Skip to content

2022–2023

2022 PG&E Greenbook (Gas & Electric Service Requirements) · 2022 edition · updated 2026-07-29 · California

Visit us at www.pge.com/greenbook

Copyright © 2022 by Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher. For information, address:

Pacific Gas and Electric Company Technical Document Management Mail Code N9H

P.O. Box 770000

San Francisco, CA 94177

Produced by Technical Document Management

Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) Electric and Gas Service Requirements (TD-7100M)

Architects and Engineers

Electrical Contractors

Plumbing Contractors

City and County Building Inspectors

Manufacturers of Electrical Equipment

Pacific Gas and Electric Company Employees

2022–2023 Edition

(Supersedes All Previous Editions and Revisions )

The Electric and Gas Service Requirements (i.e., Greenbook ) is a guide to Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) requirements and policies for establishing electric and gas service to new or remodeled applicant installations. The illustrations and explanations in this manual describe how to construct and install services and equipment. Alternate designs and installations that do not meet the requirements in this manual will not be approved.

In addition to the utility requirements, local or state officials may stipulate additional provisions for the installation of equipment and materials that are in their authorized areas of responsibility and jurisdiction.

Should you have any questions regarding this manual, please call your local PG&E representative (see Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk Contact Information,” starting on Page iv.).

Applicant gas and electric service and meter installation arrangements are subject to PG&E’s review and approval.

Applicants should contact their local PG&E representatives as soon in the planning process as possible.

N OTE : The acronym PG&E is used throughout this manual to designate Pacific Gas and Electric Company.

i 2022 – 2023

Greenbook Preface

The PG&E Electric and Gas Service Requirements (i.e., Greenbook ) is updated and published regularly. The 2022–2023 Greenbook supersedes all previous editions and revisions and the requirements, here in, are effective until a new revision is released the following year.

N otice: This Manual Is Subject to Change

Information and requirements in this manual are subject to change over time.

PG&E may revise its design and construction documents relating to applicant service requirements between updates to this manual. Except when required by law, PG&E applies only those construction and design specifications, standards, terms, and conditions that apply to a new extension of service project for the 18 months following the date the application for a new extension of service project is approved. The Approval Date of a new extension of service application refers to the earlier of either the effective date of the contract for the extension of gas and/or electric service or the date that PG&E first invoices the customer for the extension of gas and/or electric service. These requirements apply as long as applicants complete the approved projects within 18 months. If the applicant has not started construction within 18 months of PG&E’s initial approval, PG&E may review the design and, if warranted, refresh the cost estimate. If the applicant does not fulfill obligations under the extension agreement, PG&E may, at its discretion, cancel the agreement (see Provisions Form 62-0982, Section 20). PG&E can then request another review of the design before approving construction activities.

The online versions of the Electric & Gas Service Requirements, located at www.pge.com/greenbook, are updated as quickly as possible when changes occur. The bound manual is not reprinted until the next scheduled print date regardless of changes in processes or requirements. Therefore, it is imperative that applicants for all gas and electric service projects consult the online version of this manual ( www.pge.com/greenbook ) before finalizing project plans.

2022 – 2023 ii

Greenbook Preface

Information,” starting on Page iv.

iii 2022 – 2023

Greenbook Preface

Table FM-1 Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk Contact Information

Region Division Cities Covered Work
Center
Address Zip
Code
Phone Email
Region 1:
North
Coast
Humboldt Ukiah, All Mendocino and Lake
Counties Inland
Ukiah 2641 N. State St 95482 (707)
468-3914
EDLHCCDUkiah@pge.com
Region 1:
North
Coast
Humboldt Eureka, Arcata, Mckinleyville,
Fortuna, Garberville, Alderpoint,
Ferndale, Trinidad, Benbow, Blue
Lake, Rio Dell, Redway, Shelter
Cove, Willow Creek, Orick, Loleta,
Cutten, Humboldt Hill, Scotia,
Myers Flat, Weott, Samoa,
Hydesville, Phillipsville, Fields
Landing, Myrtletown, Big Lagoon,
Miranda, Redcrest, Manila, Pine
Hills, Bayview
Eureka 2555 Myrtle Ave 95501 (707)
445-5533
LHCCDEureka@pge.com
Region 1:
North
Coast
North Bay Mill Valley, Kentfield, Greenbrae,
Madera, Larkspur, Ross, Sausalito,
Tiburon, Marin City, Belvedere,
Novato, San Rafael, San Anselmo,
Fairfax, Nicasio, Woodacre, Forest
Knolls, Lagunitas, Point Reyes,
Inverness, Dog Town, Bolinas,
Stinson Beach, Olema, Muir Beach,
Parts of Marshall
San Rafael 1220 Andersen Dr 94901 (415)
257-3130
(415)
257-3431
EDLHCCDSanRafael@pge.com
Region 1:
North
Coast
North Bay Napa, Rutherford, Yountville,
Saint Helena, Deer Park, Calistoga,
Angwin Pope Valley, Berryessa,
Vallejo, Benicia, American Canyon
Napa 1850 Soscol Ave,
Suite 105
94559 (707)
257-5918
EDLHServiceDeskNapa-@pge.
com
Region 1:
North
Coast
Sonoma Sonoma, Petaluma, Cotati, Rohnert
Park, Sebastopol, Santa Rosa,
Windsor, Healdsburg, Cloverdale,
Bodega, Bodega Bay, Annapolis,
Cazadero, Duncan Mills, El Verano,
Eldridge, Forestville, Geyserville,
Jenner, Kenwood, Penngrove,
Rio Nido, Stewarts Point, Vineburg,
Valley Ford, The Sea Ranch Glen
Ellen, Graton, Stewarts Point
Santa
Rosa
3965 Occidental
Rd
95401 (707)
579-6477
EDLHCCDSantaRosa@pge.
com

2022 – 2023 iv

Greenbook Preface

Table FM-1 Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk Contact Information (continued)

Region Division Cities Covered Work
Center
Address Zip
Code
Phone Email
Region 2:
North
Valley and
Sierra
North
Valley
Chico, Oroville, Lake Almanor,
Willows, Orland, Paradise
Chico 460 Rio Lindo
Ave
95926 (530)
894‐4707
EDLHCCDChico@pge.com
Region 2:
North
Valley and
Sierra
North
Valley
Redding, Cottonwood, Igo, Ono,
Shasta, City of Shasta Lake,
Lakehead-O’Brien, Anderson,
Burney, Johnson Park, Bieber, New
Bieber, Old Station, Hat Creek, Palo
Cedro, Bella Vista, Shingletown,
French Gulch, Whiskeytown,
Round Mountain, Montgomery
Creek, Millville, Oak Run, Whitmore,
Mountain Gate, Big Bend,
McArthur, Fall River Mills, Little
Valley, Cassel, Corning, Paskenta,
Red Bluff, Mineral, Paynes Creek,
Platina, Manton, Vina, Los Molinos,
Gerber, Tehama, Flournoy,
Wildwood in SE Trinity County
only, Lassen County
Redding 3600 Meadow
View Dr
96002 (530)
246-6537
(530)
246-6527
EDLHCCDRedding@pge.com
Region 2:
North
Valley and
Sierra
Sacra‐
mento
Sacramento, Elk Grove, Rancho
Cordova, Folsom, Citrus Heights,
Carmichael, Fair Oaks, North
Highlands, Galt, Orangevale,
Antelope, Rio Linda, Gold River,
Rosemont, Rancho Murieta
Sacra‐
mento
5555 Florin
Perkins Rd
95826 (916)
386-5112
EDLHCCDSacramento@pge.
com
Region 2:
North
Valley and
Sierra
Sacra‐
mento
Vacaville, Fairfield, Dixon, Rio Vista,
Allendale, Suisun City, Birds
Landing, Woodland, Davis, Yolo,
Winters, Knights Landing,
Clarksburg, Dunnigan, Guinda,
Esparto, West Sacramento
Vacaville 158 Peabody Rd 95688 (707)
449-5791
(707)
449-5702
EDLHCCDVacaville@pge.com
Region 2:
North
Valley and
Sierra
Sacra
mento
Arbuckle, Butte City, College City
Colusa, Dunnigan, Grimes,
Maxwell, Meridian, Williams, East
Nicolaus, Elverta, Live Oak,
Nicolaus, Pleasant Grove, Rio Oso,
Sutter Yuba City, Browns Valley,
Dobbins, Linda, Marysville, Plumas
Lake, Arboga, Olivehurst, Oregon
House, Smartsville, Big Oak Valley,
Wheatland
Marysville 29 4th St 95901 (530)
634-6442
EDLHCCDMarysville@pge.com

v 2022 – 2023

Greenbook Preface

Table FM-1 Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk Contact Information (continued)

Region Division Cities Covered Work
Center
Address Zip
Code
Phone Email
Region 2:
North
Valley and
Sierra
Sierra Auburn, Alta, Soda Springs, Dutch
Flat, Colfax, Meadow, Vista,
Foresthill, Cool, Georgetown,
Garden Valley, Newcastle, Penryn,
Loomis, Granite Bay, Sheridan,
Pleasant Grove, Rocklin, Roseville,
Lincoln, Grass Valley
Auburn 12840 Bill Clark
Way
95602 (530)
889-3271
AuburnInspectionRequests@
pge.com
Region 2:
North
Valley and
Sierra
Sierra Placerville, Diamond Springs,
El Doarado, Camino, Somerset,
Grizzly Flats, Pollock Pines, Kyburz,
Twin Bridges, Strawberry Shingle
Springs, Rescue, Lotus, Coloma,
Cameron Park, El Dorado Hills
Placerville 4636 Missouri Flat
Rd
95667 (530)
621-7275
EDLHCCDPlacerville@pge.com
Region 3:
Bay Area
Diablo Antioch, Pittsburg, Bay Point,
Byron, Knightsen, Bethel Island,
Brentwood, Oakley, Discovery Bay
Antioch 2111 Hillcrest Ave 94509 (925)
779-7716
Antiochinspectionlogs@pge.
com
Region 3:
Bay Area
Diablo Concord, Walnut Creek, Pleasant
Hill, Martinez, Briones, Clyde,
Danville, Alamo, Clayton,
Blackhawk, Diablo, Moraga, Orinda,
Lafayette, Pacheco
Concord 1030 Detroit Ave 94518 (925)
779-7716
Antiochinspectionlogs@pge.
com
Region 3:
Bay Area
East Bay Oakland, Emeryville, Piedmont,
Alameda
Oakland 4801 Oakport St 94601 (510)
437-2088
InspectionDeskOakport@pge.
com
Region 3:
Bay Area
East Bay Richmond, El Sobrante, El Cerrito,
Berkeley, Hercules, Crockett,
Kensington, San Pablo, Rodeo,
Albany, Pinole, Port Costa
Richmond 1100 South 27th
St
94804 (510)
231-2939
InspectionDeskRichmond@
pge.com
Region 3:
Bay Area
Mission Fremont, Newark, Union City,
Hayward, San Leandro, San
Lorenzo, Castro Valley, Dublin,
Livermore, Pleasanton, San Ramon,
Sunol
Hayward 24300 Clawiter Rd 94538 (510)
784‐3317
missiondivisioninspectiondesk
@pge.com
Region 3:
Bay Area
Peninsula Atherton, Belmont, Brisbane,
Broadmoor Village, Burlingame,
Colma, Daly City, East Palo Alto,
El Granada, Emerald Hills, Foster
City, Half Moon Bay, Ladera,
La Honda, Loma Mar, Menlo Park,
Millbrae, Miramar, Montara, Moss
Beach, Pacifica, Stanford, Palomar
Park, Pescadero, Portola Valley,
Princeton, Redwood City, San
Bruno, San Carlos, SFO Airport,
San Mateo, San Gregorio, South
San Francisco, Woodside
San Carlos ** 275 Industrial Rd** 94070 (650)
598‐7353
PNSPInspections@pge.com
Region 3:
Bay Area
San
Francisco
San Francisco San
Francisco
2180 Harrison St 94110 (415)
695-7519
sanfranciscotrenchinspections
@pge.com

2022 – 2023 vi

Greenbook Preface

Table FM-2 Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk Contact Information (continued)

Region Division Cities Covered Work
Center
Address Zip
Code
Phone Email
Region 4:
Central
Coast
Central
Coast
Salinas, Watsonville, Santa Cruz,
Monterey, King City, Hollister,
Castroville
Salinas 356 Alisal St 93901 (831)
784‐3614
CentralCoastInspect@pge.com
Region 4:
Central
Coast
De Anza Los Altos, Los Altos Hills,
Cupertino, Sunnyvale, Mountain
View, Campbell, Los Gatos,
Saratoga, Monte Sereno, and some
areas in San Jose
Cupertino 10900 N Blaney 95014 (408)
725‐2202
DASPInspections@pge.com
Region 4:
Central
Coast
Los Padres San Luis Obispo, Pismo Beach,
Grover Beach, Arroyo Grande,
Oceano, Los Osos, Morro Bay,
Cambria, Cayucos, San Simeon,
Nipomo, Santa Maria, Orcutt,
Santa Ynez, Buellton, Los Olivos,
Los Alamos, Solvang, Sisquoc,
Lompoc, Guadalupe, Casmalia,
Carpenteria
San Luis
Obispo
5325 S. Higuera 93401 (805)
546-5247
NA
Region 4:
Central
Coast
Los Padres Templeton, Atascadero, Santa
Margarita, Shandon, Creston,
Paso Robles, San Ardo, Bradley,
San Miguel, Adelaide, Lockwood,
Carrisa Plains, Cholame, Parkfield,
Parkhill
Templeton ** 160 Cow Meadow**
Pl
93446 (805)
434‐4460
NA
Region 4:
Central
Coast
Los Padres Nipomo, Santa Maria, Orcutt,
Santa Ynez, Buellton, Los Olivos,
Los Alamos, Solvang, Sisquoc,
Lompoc, Guadalupe, Casmalia,
Carpenteria
Santa
Maria
2445 Skyway Dr 93455 (805)
346‐2241
NA
Region 4:
Central
Coast
San Jose San Jose, Alviso, Milpitas,
San Clara, San Martin, Morgan Hill,
Gilroy
San Jose 308 Stockton Ave 95126 (408)
299-1024
SJSPInspections@pge.com
Region 5:
Central
Valley
Fresno Fresno, Selma, Dinuba, Lemoore,
Coalinga, Corcoran, Auberry,
Avenal, Caruthers, Clovis, Fowler,
Friant, Hanford, Huron, Kerman,
Kettleman City, Kingsburg, Orange
Cove, Prather, Reedley, San
Joanquin, Sanger, Shaver Lake,
Tulare, Visalia
Fresno 3580 E California
Ave
93760 (559)
263-7312
fresnodivisioninspectionreque
st@pge.com
Region 5:
Central
Valley
Kern Bakersfield, Buttonwillow,
McFarland, Tupman, Taft, Cuyama,
Maricopa, McKittrick, Shafter,
Wasco, Lost Hills, Valley,
Ridgecrest, Lamont, Arvin, Lebec
Bakers-
field
4101 Wible Rd 93313 (661)
398-5711
kerninspections@pge.com

vii 2022 – 2023

Greenbook Preface

Table FM-1 Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk Contact Information (continued)

Region Division Cities Covered Work
Center
Address Zip
Code
Phone Email
Region 5:
Central
Valley
Stockton Stockton, Tracy, Angels Camp,
Lathrop, Mountain House, Ripon,
Escalon, Manteca, Mokelumne City,
Clements, Wallace, Lodi, Thornton,
Acampo, Youngstown, Woodlake,
Collierville, Lockeford, Banta,
Waterloo, Burnham, Linden,
Farmington, Oakdale, Knights
Ferry, Riverbank, Victor, Morada,
French Camp
Stockton 3136 Boeing Way 95206 (209)
272-8643
stocktondivisioninspectionreq
uest@pge.com
Region 5:
Central
Valley
Yosemite Merced, Madera, Los Banos,
Oakhurst, Mariposa, Santa Nella,
Gustine, Dos Palos, Mendota,
Firebaugh, Atwater, Winton,
Livingston, Planada, Snelling,
La Grange, Legrand, Bass Lake,
Ahwahnee, North Fork Coarsegold,
Raymond, Oakdale, Jamestown,
Sonora
Merced 4155 East Childs
Ave
93725 (209)
726-6373
YosemiteDivisionInspectionRe
quest@pge.com
Region 5:
Central
Valley
Yosemite Modesto, Newman, Gustine,
Patterson, Turlock, Ceres, Oakdale,
Riverbank, Escalon, Sonora,
Jamestown, Delhi, Knights Ferry,
Waterford, Salida, Crows Landing,
Tuolumne
Modesto 1524 North
Carpenter Rd
95351 (209)
576-6562
YosemiteDivisionInspectionRe
quest@pge.com

2022 – 2023 viii

Greenbook Preface

Customer Quick Reference Notes

Greenbook Section Number, Title, and/or Topic Page #

ix 2022 – 2023

Greenbook Preface

Customer Quick Reference Notes, continued

Greenbook Section Number, Title, and/or Topic Page #

2022 – 2023 x

Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 1 – General

1.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.2. Permits and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.2.1 Pre-Construction Meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.3. Applying for Building and Renovation Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.4. Changes in Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.5. Additional Nonresidential (Commercial and Industrial) Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.6. Design and Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

1.6.1. PG&E’s Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

1.6.2. Applicant’s Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

1.6.3. Providing Access to PG&E Electric Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

1.6.4. Installing Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1.6.5. Underground Electric Service Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1.7. Connecting and Sealing Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1.8. Access to an Applicant’s Residence, Building, or Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

1.9. Overhead Electric Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

1.10. Underground Electric Lines and Gas Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

1.10.1. Safe Landscaping Near Underground Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

1.11. PG&E Safety Training Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

1.12. SmartMeter� Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

1.13. PG&E Online (Website) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

1.13.1. Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (aka Greenbook) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

1.13.2. Rates and Tariffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

xi 2022 – 2023

Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 1 – General (continued)

1.14. Determining the Electric Service Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

1.15. Changing an Applicant’s Approved Project or Existing Service Loads . . . . . 1-20

1.16. Upgrading, Replacing, and Relocating Electric Facilities, or Adding Power Generation Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

1.16.1. Upgrading Electric Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

1.16.2. Replacing Electric Facilities with Like-for-Like . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

1.16.3. Relocating Electric Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

1.16.4. Adding Power Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

1.17. Standard Electric Service Voltage and Load Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

1.17.1. Single-Phase Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

1.17.2. Three-Phase Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

1.17.3. Mixed-Use Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

1.18. Wholesale Distribution Tariff (WDT) Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

1.19. Harmful Wave Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Section 2 – Gas Service

2.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2. Procedures for Establishing Gas Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2.1. Establishing New Gas Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2.2. Relocating or Adding Load to an Existing Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.3. Gas Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.3.1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.3.2. Branch Service Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2.3.3. Curb Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2.3.4. Joint Utility Service Trenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2022 – 2023 xii

Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 2 – Gas Service (continued)

2.3.5. Multiple Buildings Located on One Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

2.3.6. Mobile Home Parks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2.4. Set Requirements for Gas Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2.4.1. Gas Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2.4.2. Gas Meter-Set Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

2.5. Applicant-Owned and Installed Gas Service Piping (e.g., Houseline), Valves, and Automatic Shut-Off Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

2.5.1. Service Delivery Point for the Gas Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

2.5.2. Applicant-Owned Riser and Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

2.5.3. Electrically Bonding and Grounding Gas Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

2.5.4. Applicant-Owned Protective Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

Section 3 – Electric Service: Underground

3.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2. General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2.1. Safety Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2.2. Establishing Underground Electric Service Responsibilities . . . . . . . 3-2

3.2.3. Installing Ground Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.2.4. Installing Equipment Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.2.5. Installing Overhead and Underground Service for Two or More Buildings on One Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

3.2.6. Inspecting and Approving Overhead and Underground Services . . . 3-7

3.2.7. Easements for PG&E Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3.2.8. Clearances Around PG&E Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

xiii 2022 – 2023

Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 3 – Electric Service: Underground (continued)

3.3. Underground Service Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

3.3.1. Installing Services from Underground Distribution Systems . . . . . . . 3-8

3.3.2. Installing Services from Overhead Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

3.3.3. Installing Conduit for Underground Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

3.3.4. Installing PG&E-Only Service Trenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

3.3.5. Installing Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

3.3.6. Selecting Backfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

3.3.7. Providing Drainage from the Conduit System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

3.3.8. Installing Joint Utility Service Trenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

3.3.9. Providing a Service-Termination Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

3.3.10. Bioswales and Large, Wet Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

3.3.11. Replacing Non-Standard Underground Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

3.4. Electric Underground Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

3.5. Mandrels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Section 4 – Electric Service: Overhead

4.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2.1. Safety Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.3. Locating Overhead Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.3.1. Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.3.2. Two or More Buildings on One Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

2022 – 2023 xiv

Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 4 – Electric Service: Overhead (continued)

4.4. Service Drop Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.4.1. Vertical Clearance for Residential, Overhead Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

4.4.2. Clearance Above Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

4.4.3. Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

4.4.4. Vertical Clearance on Nonresidential Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

4.4.5. Clearances for a Nonresidential Building Service Drop Using Cable or Equally Insulated, Open-Wire Service Conductors . . . . . . 4-11

4.4.6. Clearances Around Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

4.4.7. Clearance Between Service Drop Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

4.4.8. Clearance from Applicant-Owned Service Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

4.5. Service Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

4.5.1. Attaching Low-Voltage, Residential, Overhead Service Drops . . . . 4-15

4.5.2. Attaching Low-Voltage, Nonresidential, Overhead Service Drops . 4-17

4.5.3. Special Service Attachment Requirements: Areas Subject to Heavy Snow Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

4.6. Attachment Structures (Periscopes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

4.6.1. Periscope Clearances and Bracing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

4.7. Service Weatherheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4.8. Service-Entrance Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4.9. Applicant-Owned, Installed, or Furnished Wood Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

4.10. Required Vegetation Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

4.10.1. General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

4.10.2. Planning Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

4.10.3. Existing Overhead Lines Adjacent to Developments . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

xv 2022 – 2023

Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 4 – Electric Service: Overhead (continued)

4.10.4. Line Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.10.5. Primary Overhead Distribution Poles in Commercial Orchard Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.10.6. Removing Vegetation Near Existing, High-Voltage, Energized Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Section 5 – Electric Metering: General

5.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2. General Conditions and Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2.1. Approved Metering and Service-Termination Equipment . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2.2. Drawing Submittal Requirements for Metering and Service Termination Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2.3. Applicant Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.2.4. Requirements for Installing Secondary Terminations (0−600 Volts) in Metering Equipment Requiring CTs . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.3. Electric Meters: General Location Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.3.1. Basic Meter Location Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.3.2. Prohibited Meter and Service Equipment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

5.3.3. Locating and Grouping Multiple Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

5.3.4. Electric Meter and Service Termination Equipment Rooms . . . . . . . 5-8

5.4. Meter Heights, Clearances, Enclosures, and Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5.4.1. Meter Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5.4.2. Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

5.4.3. Meter Set Clearance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

5.4.4. Working Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

5.4.5. Barricades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

2022 – 2023 xvi

Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 5 – Electric Metering: General (continued)

5.4.6. Meter Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

5.5. Meter Identification and Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

5.5.1. Properly Identifying and Marking Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

5.5.2. Sealing Meters and Metering Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5.5.3. Locking Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5.6. Meter Types and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5.6.1. Using a Meter Socket Adapter for Overhead-to-Underground Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

5.6.2. Installing Non-Allowed and Unauthorized Customer Equipment . . 5-29

5.6.3. Fire-Pump Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

5.7. Main Service Disconnects and Switching Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

5.7.1. Main Service Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

5.7.2. Main Service Disconnect Switch Rated for Amperes Interrupting Capacity (AIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

5.7.3. Arc Flash Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

5.7.4. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

5.7.5. Meter and Main Service Switch Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

5.8. Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

5.9. Temporary Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

5.9.1. Temporary Service Using Permanent Service Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

5.9.2. Temporary-Service Metering Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

5.9.3. Temporary Plug-In Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

xvii 2022 – 2023

Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 5 – Electric Metering: General (continued)

5.10. Connecting Non-Utility Power Sources to Utility Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

5.10.1. Specific Interconnection Requirements for Services Up to 600 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

5.10.2. Warning Statements and Labels for Interconnected Services . . . . . . 5-47

5.10.3. Violation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

5.10.4. References for Customer Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

5.11. Plug-In Electric Vehicle Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Section 6 – Electric Metering: Residential

6.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2. Residential Electric Service: Specifications and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2.1. Service Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2.2. Test-Bypass Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2.3. Electric Meter Socket Covers and Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.3. Meter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.3.1. Installing Utility Services to Mobile Homes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6.4. Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6.4.1. Single Meter: Underground Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6.4.2. Single Meter: Overhead Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

6.4.3. Single Meter: Combination Overhead and Underground Service Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

6.4.4. Multiple Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

2022 – 2023 xviii

Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 7 Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2. Service Specifications and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2.1. Permitted Types of Electric Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2.2. Required Test-Bypass Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2.3. Required Approvals for Meter Equipment Without Test-Bypass Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.2.4. Meter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.2.5. Services, 0 Amps Through 200 Amps, Single Applicant, Overhead and Underground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.2.6. Services, Over 200 Amps, Single Applicant, Underground . . . . . . . . 7-5

7.2.7. Services, Over 200 Amps, Single Applicant, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

7.2.8. Multi-Applicant Meter Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Section 8 – Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.2. Residential Electric Metering Pedestals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.3. Nonresidential Single-Meter Service Pedestals, 100–200 Amps . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8.4. Nonresidential Dual-Meter Service Pedestals, 100–400 Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

8.5. Nonresidential Current-Transformer Rated Pedestals, 400 – 600 Amps 1Ø or 3Ø, 800 Amps 3Ø . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Section 9 Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating

9.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.2. Test Blocks for Self-Contained Metering, 0 Amps Through 225 Amps . . . . . . 9-1

9.3. Test Switch Mounting Base Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9.4. Separate CT Cabinet, 201 Amps and Above, Single Phase and Three Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

xix 2022 – 2023

Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 9 Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating (continued)

9.5. CT Mounting Base, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

9.6. Alternate CT Mounting Base, One Phase or Three Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

9.7. Bused CT Cabinet, 3-Wire Service, 201 Amps Through 600 Amps . . . . . . . . . 9-8

9.8. Bused CT Cabinet, 4-Wire Service, 400 Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9.9. Meter Box for Transformer-Rated Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

9.10. Underground Service Cable-Termination Compartments or Sections . . . . . . 9-12

9.11. Approved Service-Terminal Conductor Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Section 10 Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.2. General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.3. Switchboard Service Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10.3.1. Standard Switchboard Service Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10.3.2. Specifically Engineered Switchboard Service Sections . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10.3.3. Requirements for All Switchboard Service Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10.3.4. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 0 Amps Through 1,200 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service . . . . . . 10-7

10.3.5. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 0 Amps Through 1,200 Amps, Three-Phase, 3-Wire and 4-Wire Services . . . . . . . . . 10-9

10.3.6. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps Through 3,000 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service . . . . . 10-11

10.3.7. Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps Through 3,000 Amps, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

10.3.8. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

10.3.9. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

2022 – 2023 xx

Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 10 Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts (continued)

10.3.10. Removable Link Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

10.3.11. Standard Section for Self-Contained Meter Sockets, 0 Amps Through 225 Amps, Installed in Switchboards: Nonresidential . . . 10-24

10.3.12. Service Terminations for Underground Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

10.3.13. Underground, Service-Termination Pull Section (Located Below Ground Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

10.3.14. Underground, Cable-Terminating Facilities in Pull Boxes or Pull Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

10.4. Meter and Switch Sequence Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

10.5. Metering Transformer Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

10.6. Meter Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

10.7. Transformer-Rated and Self-Contained Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

10.8. Adding New Metering Equipment to Existing Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Section 11 Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts, and Primary Services

11.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.2. General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.3. Specific Requirements for High-Voltage Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.4. Interconnection Requirements and Primary Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

11.5. Primary Switchgear Located Below Ground Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Appendix A Acronyms and Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B Electric and Gas Service Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Appendix C Electric and Gas Engineering Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C−1

xxi 2022 – 2023

Table of Contents

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 xxii

List of Tables

Contents Page

Section 1 General

Table 1-1 USA Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Table 1-2 Minimum Safe Working Distances (Scaffolds, Equipment, Tools, Structures, and People) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Table 1-3 Minimum Safe Working Distances (Boom-Type Lifting or Hoisting Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Section 2 Gas Service

Table 2-1 Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Trenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Table 2-2 Dimensions to Figure 2-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Section 3 Electric Service: Underground

Table 3-1 Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Trenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Table 3-2 Mandrel Dimensions, Part Numbers, and Order Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Table 3-3 Businesses That Sell or Rent Mandrels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Section 4 Electric Service: Overhead

Table 4-1 Minimum Clearances Over Swimming Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Table 4-2 Minimum Allowable Clearance of Insulated Service

Drops from Buildings–0 Volts Through 750 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Table 4-3 Vertical Clearance from the Ground on Nonresidential

Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Table 4-4 Maximum Distance “L” (Inches from the Service Attachment to the Top Periscope Support) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Table 4-5 Maximum Mast Height Above the Roof Without Bracing . . . . . . . . . 4-23

i 2022 – 2023

List of Tables

Contents Page

Section 5 Electric Metering: General

Table 5-1 Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearance Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Table 5-2 Working Space Dimensional Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Table 5-3 Bollard Post Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Table 5-4 Meter Socket Requirements (Number of Jaws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Table 5-5 Grounding Requirements for Wall-Mounted Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Table 5-6 Requirements for AC Disconnect Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Table 5-7 Customer Generation References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Section 6 Electric Metering: Residential

Table 6-1 Residential (0 Amps−225 Amps) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Table 6-2 Residential Combination (OH/UG) Meter Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Table 6-3 Dimension Specifications for Multimeter Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

Section 8 Electric Metering: Pedestals

Table 8-1 Minimum Dimensions (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Table 8-2 Minimum Dimensions (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Table 8-3 CT Pedestal Approved Manufacturer’s Model Numbers and Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Section 9 Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

Table 9-1 CT Cabinet Minimum Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Table 9-2 Hinged Meter Panel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Table 9-3 Minimum Wall-Mounted Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential

and Nonresidential, Single-Phase or Three-Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Table 9-4 Minimum Pad-Mounted (Floor-Standing) Switchboard Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential and Nonresidential, Single-Phase and Three-Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Table 9-5 Approved, Compression-Type, Service-Terminal Connectors . . . . . . 9-18

2022 – 2023 ii

List of Tables

Contents Page

Section 10 Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Table 10-1 Minimum Bottom-Fed Pull-Section Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Table 10-2 Pull-Section Dimensions (Minimums) Below Ground Level . . . . . . 10-31

Table 10-3 Dual-Socket, Hinged, Meter-Panel Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Table 10-4 Adding Up Meter Section Ampacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Section 11 Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts, and Primary Services

Table 11-1 Bill of Materials for Concrete Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Table 11-2 Dimensions for High-Voltage Meter Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Appendix A Acronyms and Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B Electric and Gas Service Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Table B-1 Plant Matrix for Stockton, Yosemite, Fresno, and Kern

Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Table B-2 Plant Matrix for San Francisco, Peninsula, and DeAnza

Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Table B-3 Plant Matrix for San Jose, Central Coast, and Los Padres

Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Table B-4 Plant Matrix for North Valley, Sierra, and Sacramento Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Table B-5 Plant Matrix for Diablo, Mission, and East Bay Divisions . . . . . 11-10

Table B-6 Plant Matrix for North Coast and North Bay Divisions . . . . . . . 11-11

Table B-7 Do Not Plant These Trees Under or Within 15 Feet of

Overhead Power Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Appendix C Electric and Gas Engineering Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Table C-1 Gas Design Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Table C-2 Electric Engineering Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

iii 2022 – 2023

List of Tables

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 iv

List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 1 – General

Figure 1-1 Nameplate Rating Label Example: Pad-Mounted Electrical Switchboard or Termination Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Figure 1-2 Nameplate Rating Label Example: Wall-Mounted Electrical Meter Panel or Termination Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Figure 1-3 Electric Panel Replacement Not Allowed When Over a PG&E SmartMeter Gas Meter Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Section 2 – Gas Service

Figure 2-1 Typical Gas Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Figure 2-2 Gas-Only Service Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Figure 2-3 Typical Gas Bell Hole−Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Figure 2-4 Typical Bell Hole Depth−Profile View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Figure 2-5 Typical Joint-Service Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Figure 2-6 Separate Gas Services for Two Buildings on a Single Lot . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Figure 2-7 Separate Gas Services for Two Buildings on a Corner Lot . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Figure 2-8 Apartments With Grouped Meter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Figure 2-9 Individually Metered Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Figure 2-10 Property Line Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Figure 2-11 Acceptable Locations for Gas Meter Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Figure 2-12 Acceptable Meter Locations for Mobile Home Parks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Figure 2-13 Flex-Hose Meter Set–Residential and Small Commercial . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Figure 2-14 Typical Residential Gas Meter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Figure 2-15 Typical Gas Meter Connection for 400 to 1,000 Class Meters . . . . . . 2-29

Figure 2-16 Gas Meter Connection Using a 1.5M or 3M Rotary Gas Meter . . . . . 2-30

Figure 2-17 Gas Meter Connection Using a 5M or 7M Rotary Gas Meter . . . . . . . 2-31

Figure 2-18 Gas Meter Connection Using an 11M or 16M Rotary Gas Meter . . . . 2-32

Figure 2-19 Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

i 2022 – 2023

List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 2 – Gas Service (continued)

Figure 2-20 Gas Meter Set Clearance From Building Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Figure 2-21 Gas Regulator Set Clearance Requirement from Air-Intake and Exhaust Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Figure 2-22 Clearance Requirements for an Existing Electric Meter/Panel . . . . . . 2-38

Figure 2-23 Dimensions for Typical, Residential, Multimeter Installations . . . . . . 2-40

Figure 2-24 Typical Detached Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Figure 2-25 Typical Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Figure 2-26 Recessed, Individual Meter Cabinet for Gas and Electric Meter Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Figure 2-27 Cabinet Dimensions for Multiple, Residential Gas Meters . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Figure 2-28 Typical Residential Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Figure 2-29 Recommended, Applicant-Owned Houseline Riser and Pipe . . . . . . . 2-52

Section 3 – Electric Service: Underground

Figure 3-1 Locations of Underground Electric Service-Termination and Meter Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Figure 3-2 Service Conduit Layout–Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Figure 3-3 PG&E Trench and Equipment in PUE − Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figure 3-4 Underground-to-Underground Service Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Figure 3-5 Overhead-to-Underground Service Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Figure 3-6 Typical Joint Service Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Figure 3-7 PG&E Electric and Gas Service Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Figure 3-8 Flexible Steel Mandrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Section 4 – Electric Service: Overhead

Figure 4-1 Preferred and Alternate Locations for the Overhead Service Drop Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Figure 4-2 Ground Clearances for Supply Service Drops, 0 Volts Through 750 Volts, Residential Installations (Required by the CPUC) . . . . . . . . 4-4

2022 – 2023 ii

List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 4 – Electric Service: Overhead, continued

Figure 4-3 Minimum Clearance for All Drops Above or Adjacent To Swimming Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Figure 4-4 Nonmetallic Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Figure 4-5 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-6 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-7 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-8 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-9 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-10 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-11 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-12 Ground Clearances for Supply Service Drops, 0 Volts Through 750 Volts, Industrial and Nonresidential Installations (Required by the CPUC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Figure 4-13 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors (0 Volts–750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-14 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors (0 Volts–750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-15 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors (0 Volts–750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-16 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors (0 Volts–750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-17 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors (0 Volts–750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-18 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors (0 Volts–750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-19 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors (0 Volts–750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-20 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors (0 Volts–750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-21 Clearance Around Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Figure 4-22 Clearance Around Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

iii 2022 – 2023

List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 4 – Electric Service: Overhead (continued)

Figure 4-23 Service Attachment Structure or Service Pole Secured to a Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Figure 4-24 Service Pole Detached from a Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Figure 4-25 Open Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-26 Open Wire or Cable (Open Wire Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-27 Open Wire or Cable (Open Wire Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-28 Cable (Using Triplex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-29 Cable (Single Spool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-30 Open Wire or Cable (Cable Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-31 Service Drop Cable, 4/0 and Smaller, Triplex or Quadruplex . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-32 New Wall, 1/0 kcmil 1 to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-33 New or Existing Wall, 1/0 kcmil to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-34 Open Wire Service, #4 to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-35 Service Drop Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-36 Building Attachment–Service Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Figure 4-37 Self-Supported Periscope Attachment Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Figure 4-38 Braced Periscope Attachment Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Figure 4-39 Unbraced Periscope Structure (Residential and Nonresidential) . . . . . 4-23

Figure 4-40 Illustration of a 15-Foot Clearance, Low-Growth Zone . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Figure 4-41 Grass and Shrubs Recommended Under Transmission Wires . . . . . . . 4-29

Figure 4-42 Alternative Routes to a House Showing High-Voltage Lines and Tree-Clearance Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Figure 4-43 High-Voltage Marker on Poles and Crossarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Section 5 – Electric Metering: General

Figure 5-1 Allowable Locations for Electric Service and Meter Rooms . . . . . . . 5-11

Figure 5-2 Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Figure 5-3 Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances . . 5-16

2022 – 2023 iv

List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 5 – Electric Metering: General, continued

Figure 5-4 Semi-Flush Meter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Figure 5-5 Enclosed Meter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Figure 5-6 Preferred Location of Conduits for Indoor and Outdoor Meter Panels and Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Figure 5-7 Meter Panel Clearance and Protection from Residential Driveways or Parking Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Figure 5-8 Nonresidential or Multifamily Metering and Service Equipment Clearance and Protection from Vehicle Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Figure 5-9 Connection Diagrams for Self-Contained Meter Sockets . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Figure 5-10 Connection Diagrams for Transformer-Rated Meter Sockets . . . . . . . 5-28

Figure 5-11 Fire-Pump Equipment Location and Service Connection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Figure 5-12 Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Figure 5-13 Single Meter with Main Service Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Figure 5-14 Single Meter with Multiple Service Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Figure 5-15 Multimeter Installation Without Main Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Figure 5-16 Multimeter Installation with Main Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Figure 5-17 Multiple Remote Switchboard or Meter-Panel Locations . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Figure 5-18 Grounding Outside of the Sealed Section−Self-Contained Meter . . . . 5-37

Figure 5-19 Grounding Outside of the Sealed Section–Transformer Rated Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Figure 5-20 Temporary-Service Metering Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Figure 5-21 Plug-In Temporary Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Figure 5-22 Typical Plug-In Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Figure 5-23 Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Figure 5-24 SLD Manual Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

v 2022 – 2023

List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 6 – Electric Metering: Residential

Figure 6-1 Typical Underground Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter-Socket Panel (Residential, 0 Amps−225 Amps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Figure 6-2 Typical Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter-Socket Panel for a Class 320 Meter (Residential, 120/240-Volt, 226-Amp Through 320-Amp Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Figure 6-3 Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Figure 6-4 Typical Underground, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Safety-Socket Meter Box Assembly (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1∅) . . . . . . . . 6-8

Figure 6-5 Combination Meter Socket Load Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Figure 6-6 Typical Combination Meter and Service Termination Panel for a Class 320 Meter (Residential, 120/240-Volt, 226-Amp Through 320-Amp Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Figure 6-7 Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Figure 6-8 Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Meter Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Figure 6-9 Overhead- or Underground-Fed Combination Meter and Service-Termination Panel (100 Amps−225 Amps, 1∅) . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Figure 6-10 Overhead or Underground Service-Termination Meter Panel with Manual Bypass studs (320 Amps, 120/240-Volt, 1∅) . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Figure 6-11 Overhead Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main Switch (400 Amps Max, 1∅ or 3∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Figure 6-12 Underground Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Figure 6-13 Typical, Manufactured, Combination, Multimeter Installation: Seven Meters or More . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

Figure 6-14 Clearances for a Typical, Manufactured, Combination, Multimeter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Figure 6-15 Horizontal Meter Trough Installation: Six Meters or Less . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Figure 6-16 Vertical Meter Trough Installation: Five Meters or Less . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

2022 – 2023 vi

List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 7 – Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

Figure 7-1 Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for Self-Contained Metering (0 Amps−100 Amps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Figure 7-2 Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for Self-Contained Metering (101 Amps−200 Amps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Figure 7-3 Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Figure 7-4 Separate-Bused Current-Transformer Cabinet and Meter Box with Underground Service-Termination Pull Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1∅) . . . . . . . . 7-8

Figure 7-5 Underground Service Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet (600 Amps, 1Ø or 3Ø, 800 Amps 3Ø) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Figure 7-6 Switchboard Pull Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Figure 7-7 Separate Pull Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Figure 7-8 Bottom-Fed Service Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Figure 7-9 Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet, (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Figure 7-10 Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Safety-Socket Meter Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅) . . . . . . 7-14

Figure 7-11 Overhead, Service-Termination, Standard Switchboard Service Section (0 Volts−600 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Figure 7-12 Overhead Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main Switch (Max. 400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Figure 7-13 Underground Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main Switch (Max. 400 Amps, 3∅, or 600 Amps, 1∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Figure 7-14 Grouped-Meter Installation With a Main Switch (Max. 400 Amps, 3∅, 600 Amps, 1∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Section 8 – Electric Metering: Pedestals

Figure 8-1 Residential Electric Metering Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Figure 8-2 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Figure 8-3 Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Figure 8-4 Service Cable Termination Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

vii 2022 – 2023

List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 8 – Electric Metering: Pedestals

Figure 8-5 Fixed Polycarbonate Viewing Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Figure 8-6 Service Cable Termination Section–Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Figure 8-7 Directional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Figure 8-8 Service Cable Termination Section–Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Figure 8-9 Front Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Figure 8-10 Front Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Figure 8-11 PG&E Service Cable Termination (Pull) Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Figure 8-12 Side View: Cover Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Figure 8-13 Front View−Interior Cover Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Figure 8-14 Nonresidential CT Pedestal (400 – 600 Amps 1∅ or 3∅, 800 Amps 3∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Figure 8-15 Nonresidential CT Pedestal – Side Mount Meter Panel (400–600 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅, 800 Amps 3∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Section 9 – Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

Figure 9-1 Test Blocks for Self-Contained Metering, 0 Amps−225 Amps . . . . . . . 9-2

Figure 9-2 Removable Test Switch Mounting-Base Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Figure 9-3 Cabinet Showing Stud-Mounted Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Figure 9-4 Cabinet Showing Flanged Cover Fastened by Sealable Rivet Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Figure 9-5 Cabinet Showing Hinged Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Figure 9-6 3-Wire, Single-Phase Service, Mounting Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Figure 9-7 4-Wire, Three-Phase Service, Mounting Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Figure 9-8 CT Mounting Base (Single-Phase, 3-Wire, 400 Amps–600 Amps, 0 Volts−600 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Figure 9-9 CT Mounting Base (Three Phase, 4-Wire, 400 Amps–800 Amps, 0 Volts–600 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Figure 9-10 Bused CT Cabinet, 3-Wire Service, 400 Amps−600 Amps . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Figure 9-11 Bused CT Cabinet (4-Wire Service, 400 Amps Max) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

2022 – 2023 viii

List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 9 – Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities (continued)

Figure 9-12 Meter Box for Transformer-Rated Metering (Single-Phase or Three-Phase Installations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Figure 9-13 Remote Metering Cabinet (Three-Phase Installations) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Figure 9-14 Typical Underground Service Termination Section and Pull Box, Wall-Mounted or Pad-Mounted (Floor-Standing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Figure 9-15 Detail of Clearance Requirements for Adjacent Termination Bus Stubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Figure 9-16 Detail of Aluminum, Termination Bus Stubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Figure 9-17 Service-Terminal Conductor Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Section 10 – Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Figure 10-1 Switchboard Wall Opening Between Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Figure 10-2 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 0 Amps−600 Amps, Single Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Figure 10-3 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 0–1,000 Amps and 1,001–1,200 Amps, Three Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Figure 10-4 Bus Drilling Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Figure 10-5 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Figure 10-6 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Figure 10-7 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Figure 10-8 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service . . . 10-18

Figure 10-9 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Removable Link and CT Support (One-Bolt Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Figure 10-10 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Removable Link and CT Support (Four-Bolt Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

ix 2022 – 2023

List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 10 – Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts, continued

Figure 10-11 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Removable Link and CT Support (Two-Bolt Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Figure 10-12 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Removable Link and CT Support (Six-Bolt Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Figure 10-13 Standard Section for Self-Contained Meter Sockets, 0 Amps−225 Amps, Installed in Switchboards: Nonresidential . . . . 10-25

Figure 10-14 Pull Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Figure 10-15 Separate Pull Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Figure 10-16 Bottom-Fed Service Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Figure 10-17 Switchboard Pull Section–High Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Figure 10-18 Switchboard Pull Section–Low Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Figure 10-19 Extended Top on Switchboard Pull Section Front View (Side Entry) or Side View (Back Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Figure 10-20 Additional Side or Back Switchboard Pull Section–High Entry . . . . 10-32

Figure 10-21 Additional Side or Back Switchboard Pull Section–Low Entry . . . . 10-33

Figure 10-22 Arranging Conduit in the Termination or Additional Pull Section (Example of a Front View, High Back Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Figure 10-23 Landing Terminal Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Figure 10-24 Spacing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Figure 10-25 Buses Accessible From Only One Side (Bolts Must Be Secured in Place) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Figure 10-26 Buses Accessible From Either Side (Mounting Surfaces on Both Sides of Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Figure 10-27 Standard Switchboard Service Section with CT Compartment and Filler Panel, 0 Volts−600 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Figure 10-28 Low-Profile Switchboard Service Section, with CT Compartment, for Underground Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Figure 10-29 Standard Switchboard Service Section, 15-Inch Hinged Panel for Socket Meter and Test Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

2022 – 2023 x

List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 10 – Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts, continued

Figure 10-30 Standard Switchboard Service Section, 30-Inch Panel for Socket Meters and Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Figure10-31 Outdoor or Rain-Tight Enclosures for Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Figure10-32 Outdoor or Rain-Tight Enclosures for Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Figure10-33 Outdoor or Rain-Tight Enclosures for Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Figure 10-34 Outdoor or Rain-Tight Enclosures for Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Figure 10-35 Existing Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Section 11 Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts, and Primary Services

Figure 11-1 Primary Switchgear Termination Section Pad Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Figure 11-2 Hinged Meter Panel with Multiple Sockets for 2,400-V to 27,000-V Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Figure 11-3 Hinged Meter Panel with Dual Socket for 2,400-V Through 27,000-V Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Figure 11-4 Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure: 2,400-V Through 17,000-V Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Figure 11-5 Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure:17,001-V Through 25,000-V Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Figure 11-6 Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure, 17,001-V Through 25,000-V Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Figure 11-7 Additional Side or Back Switchgear Pull Section–High Energy . . . 11-16

xi 2022 – 2023

List of Figures

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 xii

SECTION 1 GENERAL

Section 1

General

Contacting overhead or underground electric lines or equipment and natural gas pipelines can cause serious injury or death. Any part of a crane, scaffold, construction material, antenna, cable, rope, guy wire, or tool that touches an overhead electric line or penetrates an underground cable can become energized. Penetrating an underground natural gas line with a backhoe or other tool can cause a violent explosion.

WARNING

To avoid potential accidents, do not begin to excavate before identifying underground facilities.

State law requires applicants to contact Underground Service Alert (USA) by dialing 811 at least 2 working days before excavation (weekends and holidays excluded). Ensure that you call USA when planning underground work, before digging begins, to allow adequate time for USA to determine the location of underground gas and electric lines or equipment. The potential for an accident exists if applicants fail to request USA to identify underground utility facilities before excavation begins.

First, the applicant must mark the excavation area with white paint. Then, USA arranges for participating companies to mark the locations of their underground facilities at the jobsite. This is a free service. See the USA color-code identifiers below and on the back of this manual.

Additional information is available at www.pge.com/digsafely. Also, see USA services at the USA North website at http://www.usanorth.org. USA is a locating service for excavation only. Do not use USA for design purposes.

Table 1-1 USA Color Coding [1]

Excavation Sites & Underground Facilities Marking Color
Proposed Excavation White
Temporary Survey Markings Pink
Electric Red
Gas−Oil−Steam Chemical Yellow
Communication CATV Orange
Water Blue
Reclaimed Water Irrigation Slurry Purple
Sewer Green

1 Call 2 working days before you dig.

1-1 2022 – 2023

USA

Dig Safely

Section 1, General

All applicants or persons authorized by PG&E who are working on, working near, or observing others working on any PG&E equipment, enclosures, or other facility potentially are exposed to arc-flash hazards and are required to wear flame-resistant (FR) clothing. The requirement to wear FR clothing applies to everyone. Applicants and their personnel must wear FR clothing before being allowed access to perform work in and around PG&E facilities. Also, applicants and their personnel must ensure that they wear the appropriate level of FR clothing for the job being performed. The tags on all FR garments must clearly identify them as flame resistant and clearly indicate the arc rating hazard risk category (HRC). All garments must have a minimum rating of HRC 2.

See Appendix A, “Acronyms and Glossary,” for a definition of facilities.

1.1. Purpose

N OTE : For the purpose of this manual, the word “applicant” is used generically to refer to the Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) customer, or to the person or persons representing the PG&E customer in the application/construction process, including a contractor, design consultant, or installer. The word “customer” is used only when the word “applicant” is not applicable. Also, PG&E is sometimes referred to as the “Company” throughout this manual.

This manual is designed to help applicants establish gas and electric service. By reading the mandates published in this manual, applicants will understand not only the steps required to apply for service, but also the legal and safety requirements driving those steps. PG&E provides this manual to all gas and electric applicants in an effort to ensure that the Company can continue to deliver safe, uniform service.

The 2022-2023 Greenbook supersedes all previous editions and revisions. This manual is a collection of requirements and policies for establishing electric and gas service to new or remodeled installations. The Greenbook typically is updated at least annually; however, PG&E’s building requirements, as well as gas and electric design standards, are subject to change throughout the year. It is important that all applicants consult the online version of the Greenbook before finalizing project plans.

In addition to the requirements provided in this manual, applicants for gas or electric service also must comply with federal regulations and with all applicable tariffs, as well as the rules and general orders set forth by the California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC).

2022 – 2023 1-2

Section 1, General

1.1. (continued)

These regulations and orders include, but are not limited to, the following documents:

Finally, applicants must comply with all other federal, state, and local regulations. These regulations may include a Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) review for structures that impinge on navigable airspace. In such cases, the FAA requires filing notice of proposed construction a minimum of 45 days before starting the proposed construction. The FAA may issue a determination of hazard to air navigation and recommend actions to mitigate or eliminate that hazard. For additional information, please contact your PG&E project coordinator.

1.2. Permits and Inspections

Builders who are constructing new buildings or remodeling existing buildings must conform to the following guidance documents.

A. The current provisions of city and county ordinances.

B. Rules on file with, or issued by, the CPUC.

C. Applicable rules and laws of the state of California, including, but not limited to, the following three codes.

- Plumbing codes

- Mechanical codes

- Electric codes

Local and state ordinances require applicants to obtain the appropriate permits and final inspections before PG&E establishes services to any building or structure.

In areas where local ordinances governing gas or electrical installations do not exist, or where inspections provided by local jurisdictions for such installations are not available, the applicant must obtain written confirmation from a qualified person that the facilities meet the requirements specified in this manual.

PG&E will not establish gas or electric service until the gas piping or electric service facilities are installed satisfactorily.

N OTE : Gas meter release forms obtained from a permitting agency must include the specific, requested pressure (e.g., 7-inches w.c., 2 psig, 5 psig).

1-3 2022 – 2023

Section 1, General

1.2. (continued)

PG&E’s inspection process includes service requirements that are not governed by local or state codes. Parts of the applicant’s installation may require approval by state, local, and PG&E inspectors .

1.2.1. Pre-Construction Meetings

All applicant-installed and shared construction jobs require a pre-construction meeting. Pre-construction meetings provide a time to discuss safety requirements and expectations and to complete a pre-construction meeting checklist.

The pre-construction meeting is intended to:

    - Introduce key individuals and exchange contact information.

    - Discuss the project timelines.

    - Advise personnel about construction obligations and requirements.

    - Review construction drawings and gas service records (GSRs).

    - Discuss warranty obligations.

    - Clarify roles and responsibilities.

    - Discuss proper PG&E operator qualifications for covered tasks.

    - Confirm if there is a Facility at Risk letter.

    - Confirm applicant responsibilities for as-built documentation.

The PG&E job owner is responsible for scheduling and facilitating pre-construction meetings and for ensuring that Form TD-4462M-F01, “Pre-Construction Meeting Checklist,” is completed. Participants in formal pre-construction meetings must include :

    - Applicant and the applicant’s representative

    - Applicant’s contractor

    - PG&E’s senior new business representative (SNBR), new business

representative (NBR), or industrial power engineer (IPE)

    - PG&E’s gas and electric inspectors

    - Representatives from all other joint trench utilities

    - Corrosion mechanic, as needed

Responsible PG&E employees and contract personnel must follow Company qualifications, operator qualifications (OQs), standards, and procedures related to job-specific inspections.

2022 – 2023 1-4

Residential

Nonresidential

Section 1, General

1.3. Applying for Building and Renovation Services

An Application for service process online form is required for all new gas or electric services, as well as for relocating or rearranging existing services. Whether you are building or renovating your home, expanding your business facility, or opening a facility at a new location, you can apply on the Internet at “Customer Connections Online” (www.pge.com/customerconnections) and track your project with our new online tools.

Also, at the PG&E Internet websites below, you will find guides for getting started, process overviews, project cost ranges, online applications, and more. This information is provided to help you plan your project and get started. For more information, visit the following web pages.

- [Residential](https://www.pge.com/en_US/residential/home.page?)

- [Small & Medium Business](https://www.pge.com/en_US/small-medium-business/small-medium-business.page?)

Applicants without Internet access may contact the Building and Renovation Service Center 1-877-743-7782. PG&E representatives will provide you with details about the process and assist you with applying for service.

The process for installing or changing gas and electric services takes time and planning. PG&E recommends you contact us early in the process with accurate load information and the date that the services are required to allow for adequate time to complete your service request.

Large-capacity gas meters, electric transformers, or other special equipment often require several months lead time to ensure a timely delivery from the manufacturer.

Applicants must contact their local PG&E project coordinators when approved construction plans change, or when situations that affect PG&E’s service arrangements occur during construction, so that mutually satisfactory, alternate arrangements can be made.

To assist PG&E in its goal to deliver safe, uniform service, applicants should use the following guidelines when transmitting electronic drawing files for architectural, mechanical, and civil site plans .

  1. PG&E’s electronic drawing tool is AutoCAD, .DWG format. Ensure that submitted electronic drawings are either readable using, or compatible with, AutoCAD.

2. Applicants can upload documents at PG&E’s “Customer Connections Online” (www.pge.com/customerconnections) Internet website. Drawings also may be sent as an email-attached file.

  1. Applicants who do not use the online option described in Number 2. above should send drawings for large projects in a zipped format.

  2. Use layering, if possible, and preserve the layering when transferring files to PG&E.

1-5 2022 – 2023

Customer

Connect

Section 1, General

1.3. (continued)

  1. Save all drawings in model space instead of paper space.

  2. Make drawing plans two dimensional, with the “Z” elevation at zero.

  3. Ensure that any External Reference Files (Xref) or drawing updates maintain a consistent insertion point.

  4. Include all related drawing files (e.g., elevations, landscape plans, other proposed underground facilities).

Please contact your local PG&E project coordinator if you have any questions.

PG&E is committed to complying with all federal, state, and local environmental laws, regulations, and rules. Applicants must provide PG&E with copies of permits showing that they have met all environmental compliance requirements when submitting applications for service. See the “Applicant Responsibilities for Environmental Reviews for Service Requests” letter for more information. Applicants can obtain copies of this letter from their local PG&E project coordinators.

Project permits or approvals may contain conditions that require or restrict certain service designs or construction activities by PG&E, applicants, agents, consultants, or contractors. The applicant must bring these conditions to PG&E’s attention to ensure that the requirements or restrictions are included in the project design during the planning and construction phases. When submitting the service application, the applicant must provide PG&E with a written copy of any special conditions, identifying the requirements or restrictions that affect the project design and/or PG&E installation activities.

1.4. Changes in Requirements

PG&E may revise its design and construction documents relating to applicant service requirements between updates to this manual. Except when required by law, PG&E will apply only those construction and design specifications, standards, terms, and conditions that are applicable to a new extension of service project for the 18 months following the date the application for a new extension of service project is approved. The approval date of a new extension of service application refers to the earlier of either the effective date of the contract for the extension of gas and/or electric service or the date when PG&E first invoices the customer for the extension of gas and/or electric service.

These requirements apply as long as applicants complete approved projects within 18 months. If the applicant has not initiated construction within 18 months of PG&E’s initial approval, PG&E may review the design and, if warranted, refresh the cost estimate.

If the applicant does not fulfill obligations under the extension agreement, PG&E may, at its discretion, cancel the agreement (see Provisions Form 62-0982, Section 20). PG&E can then request another review of the design before approving construction activities.

Also, for applicant design jobs, refer to the Understanding applicant design and installation responsibilities website. On applicant design jobs, the version of the design and construction document that is in effect on the date PG&E approves and signs-off on the final Globals package determines the requirements that the design must meet. The Globals package is valid for 90 days.

2022 – 2023 1-6

Section 1, General

1.4. (continued)

When building projects are divided into separate phases (or tracts) where some of the construction phases will not be completed for more than 18 months from the date the project is approved, PG&E will initiate a review of the design and apply current PG&E construction and design specifications, standards, forms, and conditions that are applicable to the remaining phases of the project.

Applicants are encouraged to contact PG&E early in the planning stages of their projects. By consulting with their local project coordinators, applicants are made aware of the current construction requirements before they initiate any design work.

Do not perform construction using an unauthorized or preliminary drawing. The applicant assumes full responsibility for errors, omissions, or changes if the project is constructed using either preliminary drawings or drawings that are not approved by PG&E.

PG&E will not accept or assume ownership of facilities installed by the applicant before the construction design is completed and approved by PG&E. Additional facilities, even if provided at no cost to PG&E, represent increased plant in the rate base. This includes associated, long-term increases in taxes and maintenance

expenses.

Applicants are responsible for any additional design changes or reconstruction costs that may be required if PG&E does not accept unapproved facilities. PG&E will not energize or pressurize a system that has not received final design approval and passed all inspections.

Engineering and construction documents or requirements are incorporated into new editions of this manual; however, revisions are made periodically. Applicants can obtain revised engineering documents or requirements in two ways:

Some of the information contained in this manual is based on government codes and ordinances that are subject to change as determined by the governmental authorities. PG&E does not assume responsibility for keeping information in this manual current with these government codes, ordinances, or other requirements. Applicants should consult the responsible governmental agency with questions about the applicability of any construction procedures or requirements.

1.5. Additional Nonresidential (Commercial and Industrial) Service Information

For electric installations of more than 600 volts (V), refer to Section 11, “Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts, and Primary Services.” Generally, this manual does not include information about large nonresidential (i.e., commercial or industrial) gas loads; however, PG&E provides applicants with individual job-design specifications after they request service.

1-7 2022 – 2023

Section 1, General

1.6. Design and Construction

1.6.1. PG&E’s Responsibilities

PG&E is responsible for planning, designing, and engineering its service facilities and service laterals using Company standards for design, materials, and construction.

1.6.2. Applicant’s Responsibilities

Residential and nonresidential applicants for gas and/or electric extensions and services may select a contractor to design their facilities.

PG&E requires a clear path from existing distribution facilities to the location on the applicant’s jobsite where the services will be connected. Depending on the project, the applicant may need permits or approvals for these supply lines in order to comply with federal, state, and local requirements, regulations, and rules (including environmental laws).

Local PG&E project coordinators can provide applicants with information about available options for clearing supply lines, as well as any associated design and contract requirements for their projects.

Before designing their projects, applicants and/or their contractors must complete PG&E’s Application for service process online form, provide applicable construction plans, and submit any required project deposits to PG&E.

1.6.3. Providing Access to PG&E Electric Facilities

Applicants are required to provide access roads on their properties to PG&E pad-mounted or subsurface (i.e., transformer or switch) facilities. The roads must be accessible to PG&E at all times and constructed with either a Class 2 or an AB road base that is a minimum of 10 feet wide, with 18 feet of vertical clearance above. Also, there must be a 30-foot radial, hammerhead-style turn-around area at the end of the roads.

to provide access roads on their properties to PG&E pad-mounted or subsurface (i.e., transformer or switch) facilities. The roads must be accessible to PG&E at all times and constructed with either a Class 2 or an AB road base that is a minimum of 10 feet wide, with 18 feet of vertical clearance above. Also, there must be a 30-foot radial, hammerhead-style turn-around area at the end of the roads.

Do not place equipment more than 15 feet away from the edge of the road to facilitate the placement of the equipment using lifting equipment. Failure to design for and construct based on this guidance may result in the requirement that the applicant sign a Rule 16 Special Facilities Lifting Agreement whereby, during construction, maintenance, and operations, the applicant will be responsible for fees associated with PG&E’s specialized lifting contractors and equipment.

Avoid placing equipment immediately below, or in the vicinity of, overhead transmission, distribution, secondary voltage supply, and communication lines, when possible.

This guidance promotes the safe operation of the electric grid. By limiting equipment installation below energized lines, the chance that specialized lifting equipment contact an overhead energized line is minimized. Additionally, if safe working clearances cannot be maintained when working with specialized lifting equipment, restoration efforts could be delayed and necessitate an emergency shutdown, or require the temporary removal of the lines, to complete work safely.

2022 – 2023 1-8

Section 1, General

1.6.3. (continued)

In cases where locations exist where equipment can be placed to minimize the possibility of exposure to live lines, these locations must be used. PG&E and the applicant must work together to identify a mutually agreeable location for installing the equipment safely. Only after all local relocation efforts have been exhausted and local service planning agrees that this installation could be safely considered, should the proposed installation be submitted to the Distribution Standards department for the consideration of variance. When a location cannot be agreed to that meets with the intent of this guidance, PG&E has the final decision on placement of the equipment.

Refer to Numbered Document 051122, “Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment,” for additional requirements. When in doubt, contact your local PG&E Electric Construction supervisor for guidance before approval of a design.

1.6.4. Installing Transformers

PG&E will specify the type of transformer installations to be constructed on applicants’ premises.

Applicants may contact their local PG&E project coordinators to obtain specific transformer requirements for their projects.

PG&E’s standard transformer installations for residential, commercial, and industrial services, excluding agricultural areas, are described in Item A. and Item B. below:

A. A pole-bolted transformer in overhead areas when the applicant’s load does not require a 75 kilovolt ampere (kVA) or greater transformer.

B. A pad-mounted transformer in underground areas or in an area with overhead facilities when PG&E determines that the applicant’s load requires a 75 kVA or greater transformer.

As described in Electric Rule 15 , “Distribution Line Extensions,” and Electric Rule 16 , “Service Extensions,” found online at https://www.pge.com/tariffs/index.page., requests for the installation of a subsurface transformer are not allowed when it is technically feasible to install a pad-mounted transformer.

PG&E’s standard transformer installations for agricultural services are described in item C. below:

C. A pole-bolted transformer in overhead areas when the applicant’s load does not exceed the capability of PG&E’s largest available kilovolt ampere (kVA) overhead transformers for the voltage and phase being served.

If required or requested, the installation of a pad-mounted transformer is also allowed.

Also see Subsection 1.17., “Standard Service Voltage and Load Limitations,” on Page 1-24.

1-9 2022 – 2023

Section 1, General

1.6.3. (continued)

Applicants must provide space on their premises at locations approved by PG&E for standard transformer installations if PG&E determines that the load to be served requires a separate transformer installation to serve only the applicant.

N OTE : For reasons of safety and reliability, PG&E does not allow applicants to install water sprinklers to cool off transformers.

1.6.5. Underground Electric Service Extensions

Applicants must ensure that an underground service is installed, where required, to comply with applicable tariff schedules, laws, ordinances, or similar requirements of governmental authorities having jurisdiction, and may be necessary as determined by PG&E where an applicant’s load requires a separate, 75-kVA or greater transformer installation. For more information, see Electric Rule 16 .

1.7. Connecting and Sealing Services

A. PG&E provides standard service to applicants as described below.

  1. Establish service at one service delivery point, through one meter, and at one voltage class or pressure.

  2. Design service to extend from the connection to the distribution facilities along the shortest, most practical, and most available route to the service termination facility or service delivery point, as determined by PG&E.

  3. PG&E may require a service location to be closer to the distribution facilities in the following instances:

    • In areas where the nearest building is a considerable distance (i.e., 200 feet or more) from the property line.

    • If, in PG&E’s judgment, there is a potential hazard between the property line and service location.

B. The requirements for standard service are described below.

  1. Only authorized PG&E employees can connect or disconnect PG&E’s gas or electric service to the building or structure.

  2. Unauthorized persons must not tamper with or break PG&E seals placed on meters and associated service equipment.

  3. Only authorized PG&E employees can remove, replace, or interfere with PG&E’s meters, seals, connections, padlocks, or other locking devices.

  4. Applicants must call PG&E if it is necessary either to disconnect the service or remove the meter because of remodeling, alterations, or other activities.

2022 – 2023 1-10

Section 1, General

1.7. (continued)

  1. Applicants must not connect house gas pipes or other applicant facilities to the plugged side of the gas service-tee fitting. That fitting is for PG&E’s use only.

  2. Applicants may place gas and electric service and metering equipment in dedicated rooms within buildings when approved by PG&E.

  3. Applicants must not locate service termination enclosures in the interior, inhabitable area of residences.

  4. Applicants must ensure that all service and metering facilities are readily accessible.

  5. PG&E must review and approve of all service and meter locations and arrangements before installing any metering facilities, service-termination enclosures, or other utility service facilities.

  6. The applicant assumes the risk for any work performed without requesting PG&E’s advanced approval. PG&E can charge the applicant if it is necessary to make changes to unapproved work.

  7. An unauthorized connection to PG&E’s gas or electric facilities, or to facilities used to provide utility services, may be a violation of the California Penal Code , Part 1, “Crimes and Punishments,” Title 13, “Crimes Against Property,” Chapter 5, “Larceny,” Part 498, and Chapter 15, “Malicious Injuries to Railroad Bridges, Highways, Bridges, and Telegraphs,” Part 593c. Violators could be subject to damages pursuant to California Civil Code , Division 3, “Obligations,” Part 4, “Obligations Arising From Particular Transactions,” Title 3.5, “Utility Services,” Section 1882, et. Sequitur. These sections address connecting to utility meters and facilities and diverting utility services. They specifically prohibit any person from tampering with, making, or causing to be made any connection or reconnection with property owned or used by the utility to provide utility service, without the utility’s authorization or consent.

utility](https://leginfo.legislature.ca.gov/faces/codes_displaySection.xhtml?sectionNum=1882.&lawCode=CIV) meters and facilities and diverting utility services. They specifically prohibit any person from tampering with, making, or causing to be made any connection or reconnection with property owned or used by the utility to provide utility service, without the utility’s authorization or consent.

  1. Applicants or their contractors must not paint, color, or discolor the gas and electric facilities, including the meters.

1.8. Access to an Applicant’s Residence, Building, or Property

PG&E has the right to access Company facilities located on an applicant’s premises at any time, for any purpose connected with furnishing gas and/or electric service. These purposes include, but not limited to, the following activities:

- Reading meters.

- Inspecting utility facilities.

- Making routine repairs.

- Performing maintenance and emergency work.

- Exercising any and all rights secured to PG&E either by law or under

PG&E’s tariff schedules, including Electric Rule 16 , “Service Extensions,” and Gas Rule 16 , “Gas Service Extensions.”

1-11 2022 – 2023

Section 1, General

1.9. Overhead Electric Lines

The California Division of Occupational Safety and Health (Cal/OSHA), Title 8, Division 1, “Department of Industrial Relations,” Chapter 4, “Division of Industrial Safety,” Subchapter 4, “Construction Safety Orders,” Article 15, “Cranes and Derricks in Construction,” Section 1612, “Power Line Safety,” and the associated sub-articles, require that minimum safe working and traveling distances be maintained from cranes and derricks to overhead electric lines.

In support of these regulations, PG&E provides the voltage for overhead lines within two business days of receiving a customer inquiry. Call the PG&E Building and Renovation Service Center (BRSC) at 877-743-7782 or Customer Service at 1-800-743-5000.

Cal/OSHA, Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 5, “Electrical Safety Orders,” Group 2, “High-Voltage Electrical Safety Orders,” Article 37, “Provisions for Preventing Accidents Due to Proximity to Overhead Lines (Formerly Article 86), Section 2946, “Provisions for Preventing Accidents Due to Proximity to Overhead Lines,” requires that minimum safe working distances be maintained from overhead electric lines. Specific requirements taken from the regulation are shown in Table 1-2, “Minimum Safe Working Distances (Scaffolds, Equipment, Tools, Structures, and People),” and Table 1-3, “Minimum Safe Working Distances (Boom-Type Lifting or Hoisting Equipment),” both on Page 1-12.

](http://www.dir.ca.gov/Title8/2946.html) requires that minimum safe working distances be maintained from overhead electric lines. Specific requirements taken from the regulation are shown in Table 1-2, “Minimum Safe Working Distances (Scaffolds, Equipment, Tools, Structures, and People),” and Table 1-3, “Minimum Safe Working Distances (Boom-Type Lifting or Hoisting Equipment),” both on Page 1-12.

Table 1-2 Minimum Safe Working Distances (Scaffolds, Equipment, Tools, Structures, and People)

Nominal Voltage (Phase-to-Phase) Minimum Required Clearance
(Feet)
600

50,000
6
over
50,000

345,000
10
over
345,000

750,000
16
over
750,000

1,000,000
20

2022 – 2023 1-12

Nominal Voltage (Phase-to-Phase) Minimum Required Clearance
(Feet)
600

50,000
10
over
50,000

75,000
11
over
75,000

125,000
13
over
125,000

175,000
15
over
175,000

250,000
17
over
250,000

370,000
21
over
370,000

550,000
27
over
550,000

1,000,000
42

USA

Dig Safely

Section 1, General

1.9. (continued)

Table 1-3 Minimum Safe Working Distances (Boom-Type Lifting or Hoisting Equipment)

Contact a local PG&E project coordinator with any questions about working near overhead electric lines or about nominal voltage.

1.10. Underground Electric Lines and Gas Pipelines

As mentioned on Page 1-1, state law requires applicants to contact USA by dialing 811 at least 2 working days before excavation (weekends and holidays excluded). Applicants must call USA when planning underground work (before digging begins) to allow adequate time for USA to determine the locations of underground transmission and distribution gas and electric lines and/or equipment.

USA arranges for participating companies to mark the locations of their underground facilities at the jobsite. There is no charge for this service. The applicant must mark each end of the excavation area with white paint as well as the total length in feet. Applicants should also use arrows to indicate the direction of the trench. For more information, go to www.pge.com/digsafely. Also, learn more about USA services at the USA North website (http://www.usanorth.org).

1.10.1. Safe Landscaping Near Underground Facilities

When any new vegetation are planted, ensure that a minimum of 5 feet is maintained from underground transmission and distribution gas lines as well as distribution electric lines. Please refer to PG&E’s Guide to Safe Landscaping Near Gas Pipelines and the Guide to Safe Landscaping Near Underground Electric Lines (located in Appendix B, “Electric Gas and Service Documents,” located on Page B-5) for helpful information about the types of trees and plants that are safe for areas near transmission and gas pipelines.

1.11. PG&E Safety Training Resources

PG&E wants to ensure that contractors and construction workers avoid electric and natural gas hazards by practicing basic safety rules. Please visit www.pge.com/contractorsafety, “Contractor Safety Program Contract Requirements,” for materials to assist you in providing your employees with safety training.

1-13 2022 – 2023

Section 1, General

1.12. SmartMeterProgram

PG&E’s SmartMeter Program is part of a statewide effort driven by the CPUC to upgrade California’s energy infrastructure with automated metering technology. The SmartMeter Advanced Meter Reading system includes a programmable, solid-state electric meter and a gas module, installed on a traditional gas meter at each service delivery point to measure and record

energy use.

For more information on SmartMeters, including instructions on tracking your energy use online or information on the opt-out program, please visit Understanding your energy use with SmartMeter (www.pge.com/smartmeter)

1.13. PG&E Online (Website)

The PG&E website at www.pge.com has many tools for building or renovating homes, expanding or renovating business facilities, or opening new locations.

The PG&E Building and Renovation Services guides are available for residential services at www.pge.com/building/ and include the following information:

- [Visit our Application for service process](https://www.pge.com/en_US/business/services/building-and-renovation/understand-the-process/understand-the-process.page)

- [Choose a guide](https://www.pge.com/en_US/residential/customer-service/home-services/renovating-and-building/understanding-the-application-process/getting-started-guides.page)

These tools can help you plan your project and get started. For more information, visit the following web pages.

 - [Apply online and track your project at Customer Connections Online](https://www.pge.com/en_US/small-medium-business/building-and-property/building-and-maintenance/building-and-renovation/manage-your-services.page?WT.mc_id=Vanity_customerconnections)

(www.pge.com/customerconnections)

 - Residential services at _[Discover building and renovation services for](https://www.pge.com/en_US/residential/customer-service/home-services/renovating-and-building/renovation-and-building.page?WT.mc_id=Vanity_building)_

homeowners (www.pge.com/building/)

 - Business and agricultural services at [Discover building and renovation](https://www.pge.com/en_US/large-business/services/building-and-renovation/building-and-renovation-overview/building-and-renovation-overview.page?WT.mc_id=Vanity_newconstruction)

services for businesses (www.pge.com/newconstruction)

SmartMeter [TM]

Customer

Connect

1.13.1. Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (aka Greenbook )

The Greenbook is available on the Internet at www.pge.com/greenbook.

N OTE : Communicate and coordinate all gas and electric service arrangements through your assigned PG&E project coordinator. As mentioned earlier in this section, PG&E documents may be updated independently of this manual; however, the project coordinators provide applicants with the latest updated or revised information on request. Applicants must contact their assigned project coordinators to ensure that they are correctly interpreting and using the information found in this manual and in other governing documents.

2022 – 2023 1-14

Section 1, General

1.13.2. Rates and Tariffs

Rate and tariff information is available on the website “Electricity rates: Choose the plan that works best for you,” at http://www.pge.com/about/rates/. This information also is available on the PG&E homepage (http://www.pge.com/) under the Rate Plans drop down. Also, the online “Tariffs” provide current gas and electric rate schedules, preliminary statements, rules, forms, advice letters, and more.

1.14. Determining the Electric Service Rating

A. PG&E Service Rating: The rating of the PG&E service to be supplied is the current rating in amperes of the electrical enclosure where PG&E terminates and connects its supply facilities and conductors. This electrical enclosure or equipment also may be known as the service-termination section, pull can, service section, meter panel, or service-termination enclosure. For overhead services, the service rating is the rating of the electrical enclosure or equipment connected to the weatherhead and mast.

B. Enclosure Nameplate Labeling and Rating: Electrical enclosures must list on their manufacturers’ main labels (nameplate) a maximum current rating, in amperes, allowed for the equipment. This maximum rating must be written as a numerical value (e.g., 125, 800, 2,500) and must be acceptable to PG&E. The nameplate label must also describe the voltage, number of phases, and additional electrical information. The nameplate label must be rated for ultraviolet (UV) radiation and exposure of outdoor environments. The label must be easily accessible and permanently attached to the outside front of the equipment enclosure and, when applicable (e.g., switchboard), on each individual section. The label also may be attached to the inside of the enclosure’s outer door.

  1. For pad-mounted (i.e., free-standing) enclosures, this information typically is listed on the main nameplate labels as the “Supply” rating. See Figure 1-1, “Nameplate Rating Label Example: Pad-Mounted Electrical Switchboard or Termination Enclosure,” on Page 1-19.

When multiple sections are physically connected together to form a switchboard or switchgear, the supply rating listed on each section, whether bussed or cabled, should typically be the same. A “Section” rating also should be provided as a numerical value on each individual section label. See Figure 10-35, “Existing Switchboard,” on Page 10-47, as an example of one type of switchboard.

  1. For wall-mounted panelboards and termination enclosures, the maximum ampacity rating is for the entire enclosure and must be listed on the main rating label independently from any individual component (e.g., main bus, meter socket, main disconnect) rating. See Figure 1-2, “Label Example: Wall-Mounted Electrical Meter Panel or Termination Enclosure,” on Page 1-19 for an example. The maximum ampacity rating may be titled on the label in any of the following ways.

mum ampacity rating is for the entire enclosure and must be listed on the main rating label independently from any individual component (e.g., main bus, meter socket, main disconnect) rating. See Figure 1-2, “Label Example: Wall-Mounted Electrical Meter Panel or Termination Enclosure,” on Page 1-19 for an example. The maximum ampacity rating may be titled on the label in any of the following ways.

    - Maximum Amps

    - Maximum Utility Rating

    - Maximum Equipment Rating

1-15 2022 – 2023

Section 1, General

1.14. (continued)

  1. If a maximum ampacity rating is not included on the electrical enclosure label, PG&E uses the individual component (e.g., main bus, meter socket, main disconnect, current-transformer mounting bracket) with the greatest rating as the service rating.

  2. If there are multiple ratings or conflicting ratings either on a single electrical enclosure or on multiple enclosure sections that are physically connected together (i.e., switchboard, switchgear), PG&E uses the greatest rating as the service rating.

C. Main Service Disconnect: For installations supplying a single main-disconnecting means (i.e., main breaker or main disconnect switch), or for installations without a single disconnecting means (e.g., a service with no main disconnect and only individual disconnects), the rating of the PG&E service to be supplied is the rating of the electrical enclosure where PG&E terminates and connects its service conductors and not the rating of the main service disconnect.

For switchboards, the PG&E service rating is typically listed as the supply rating. For panelboards, the service rating is the maximum ampacity of the panel if listed on the label. If a maximum ampacity is not listed, then the service rating is the greatest rating for any individual component (e.g., main bus, meter socket) in the panelboard. For more information, see Subsection 1.14.A., “PG&E Service Rating,” on Page 1-15.

When a main service disconnect (i.e., switch, fuse, or breaker) is installed, the continuous current (i.e., ampere) rating should not exceed the rating of the electrical enclosure or the rating of the section where it is installed. The main service disconnect may have either the same rating or a lower rating than the electrical enclosure.

D. Overhead Service to Multiple Wall-Mounted Meter Panels or Meter Boxes: When more than one meter panel or meter box is connected to a separate, sealable gutter or other unrated raceway with power supplied from a PG&E overhead service, the PG&E service rating is the aggregate of all meter panel or meter box ratings.

EXAMPLE : Three meter panels rated at 200 amps, 100 amps, and 100 amps would have an aggregated rating of 400 amps (200+100+100).

For illustrations of these types of installations, refer to one of the following two figures:

- [Section 6, “Electric Metering: Residential,” Figure 6-11, “Overhead](https://www.pge.com/pge_global/common/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/greenbook_manual.pdf#page=229)

Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main Switch (400 Amps Max, 1∅ or 3∅),” on Page 6-16.

2022 – 2023 1-16

Section 1, General

1.14. (continued)

N OTE : Applicants can use PG&E approved termination enclosures that are manufactured for overhead or underground services and have a maximum ampacity listed on the nameplate labels. The maximum ampacity will be the PG&E service rating. If a termination enclosure is installed, then do not add up the ratings of the meter panels.

E. Existing Enclosures: If an existing electrical enclosure where PG&E terminated and connected its supply facilities and conductors does not have a visible rating, then the service rating is the maximum rating of the single main-disconnecting means (e.g., main circuit breaker) or of the aggregated maximum ratings of all the service breakers or disconnects if a main-disconnecting means is not present.

F. Agricultural Services: For agricultural services with a pump motor as the largest load, PG&E recommends that customers install a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) or similar controller that uses a soft start (SS) system. These types of pump controllers help compensate for in-rush current.

  1. For service termination and metering equipment with a main breaker or individual breakers built into the enclosure, refer to the requirements in Subsection 1.14.C., “Main Service Disconnect,” on Page 13.

  2. For service termination and metering equipment without a main breaker or individual breakers built into the enclosure, PG&E recommends the following types of equipment be installed externally to serve as the main disconnecting means and circuit protection for customer equipment. The following requirements apply.

a. Class R, Dual-Element, Time-Delay Fuses: These types of fuses also compensate for in-rush current. When Class R fuses are installed, size them to the pump load but do not exceed the PG&E service rating by more than 125%.

EXAMPLE : A meter panel rated at 200 amps can have one main service disconnect with Class R fuses rated up to 250 amps (200 * 1.25). A meter panel rated at 400 amps can have one main service disconnect with Class R fuses rated up to 500 amps (400 * 1.25).

b. Electronic Circuit Breaker: The electronic breaker rating must not exceed the PG&E service rating. The breaker trip settings can be set to compensate for the in-rush current. See Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” Subsection 5.7.4., “Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers,” on Page 5-32.

EXAMPLE : A meter panel rated at 600 amps can have one main electronic circuit breaker rated up to 600 amps (600 * 1.00).

1-17 2022 – 2023

Section 1, General

1.14. (continued)

c. Thermal or Magnetic Circuit Breaker: When a standard circuit breaker is installed as the main disconnect and protective device for the customer circuit, the breaker’s maximum rating must be 125% or less of PG&E’s service termination and metering equipment rating.

EXAMPLE : A meter panel rated at 400 amps can have one main thermal or magnetic circuit breaker rated up to 500 amps (400 * 1.25).

  1. When a main disconnect is not installed, and only individual service disconnects are installed on customer equipment, the aggregate total ampacity rating of all the individual service disconnects is allowed to exceed the PG&E service rating by a maximum of 125%.

EXAMPLE : A meter panel rated at 400 amps can have multiple individual service disconnects with an aggregated rating up to 500 amps. If there are three disconnects, the individual ratings could be 200 amps, 200 amps, and 100 amps or a combination that is 500 amps or less. If there are five disconnects, the individual ratings could be 50 amps, 75 amps, 75 amps, 100 amps, and 200 amps or a combination that is 500 amps or less.

2022 – 2023 1-18

1.14. (continued)

Section 1, General

Figure 1-1 Nameplate Rating Label Example: Pad-Mounted Electrical Switchboard or Termination Enclosure

Figure 1-2 Nameplate Rating Label Example: Wall-Mounted Electrical Meter Panel or Termination Enclosure

Note in reference to Figure 1-2 on Page 1-19.

  1. As described in Subsection 1.14.B.2. on Page 1-15, use the maximum rating listed on the nameplate label for the whole electric meter panel to determine the PG&E service rating. If a maximum panel rating is not listed, then use the greatest rating for any component (e.g., bus) in the panel.

1-19 2022 – 2023

Section 1, General

1.15. Changing an Applicant’s Approved Project or Existing Service Loads

An applicant must provide written notice to PG&E of any changes or plans to make material changes either in the amount or in the character of the gas and/or electrical load, equipment, or other facilities installed to supply gas and/or electricity to the applicant’s premises, structure, building, or other facilities. For more information, applicants can review Electric Rule 2 and Gas Rule 2, both called “Description of Service,” as well as Electric Rule 3 and Gas Rule 3, both called “Application for Service.” PG&E requires this written information to determine the following factors.

  • The adequacy of the existing utility service and supply facilities.

  • The need to modify those facilities to meet and supply the changed load or equipment requirements. This includes changes in the character or nature of the applicant’s previously approved gas and/or electric service.

Applicants must notify PG&E of any planned or intended changes in the load, character, or nature of the service required to supply the premises, structure, building, or other facilities.

If an applicant fails to notify PG&E, and the changes exceed the capabilities of the installed utility service, metering, or other equipment and damage those facilities, the applicant is liable for all damages and resultant costs to PG&E.

Applicants must provide PG&E with written notice immediately when they make any material change either in the amount or character of the gas loads and electric amps, appliances, or apparatus installed on the premises to be supplied with gas or electric energy.

1.16. Upgrading, Replacing, and Relocating Electric Facilities, or Adding Power Generation Sources

When PG&E determines that its existing service facilities must be replaced, those facilities are replaced as a new service extension under the provisions of the tariff rules. The following subsections describe the requirements when existing electric service termination and metering equipment are replaced.

N OTE : When replacing existing electric service equipment, refer to Section 2,

“Gas Services,” Subsection 2.4.2.E., “Panel Replacements and Conduit Connections to Existing Electric Panels, 400 Amps and Less, Within the Gas Clearance Area,” on Page 2-36, for gas meter set clearance requirements from any type of electrical equipment and materials. Also see Figure 2-22, “Clearance Requirements for an Existing Electric Meter/Panel,” also in Section 2.4.2.E.

2022 – 2023 1-20

Section 1, General

1.16.1. Upgrading Electric Facilities

An increase in the ampacity rating (e.g., 100 amps to 125 amps; 1,200 amps to 1,600 amps) of the equipment where PG&E terminates its service is typically defined as an upgrade. The ampacity rating also may be known as the service-entrance capacity. For example, when an applicant replaces an existing electric meter panel, switchboard, or termination enclosure with one that has a greater ampacity rating (i.e., upgrade), the applicant must meet all Greenbook requirements. Typically, this also includes installing new conduit and service conductors.

When a new meter panel is installed in a new location, the existing meter panel may not be used as a junction box to connect to existing load-side wires. The existing meter panel must be removed and covered by a solid, permanent exterior wall.

See the sections titled “Upgraded Panel” in the numbered documents below for conditions when the conduit or cable may not require upgrading, as determined by PG&E.

1.16.2. Replacing Electric Facilities with Like-for-Like

Replacing service termination and metering equipment with new equipment of the exact same ampacity (e.g., 100 amps to 100 amps; 1,200 amps to 1,200 amps) and in the exact same location is considered a “like-for-like” replacement and typically is not considered an upgrade.

N OTE : Replacing a main or load breaker in an existing panel is not considered a panel replacement.

The following requirements apply to like-for-like panel replacements.

A. All new meter panels and their locations must meet Greenbook requirements and be approved by PG&E.

B. If the existing electric meter panel is fed from an overhead service and has an isolated cable termination compartment, separate from the meter socket compartment, the new meter panel must also have an isolated

                                               cable termination compartment. For example, see Section 6, Figure 6 6,

“ Typical Service Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter Socket

                                   -                                       Panel for a Class 320 Meter (Residential, 120/240 Volt, 226 Amp
             - ”

Through 320 Amp Service), on Page 6-10.

1-21 2022 – 2023

Section 1, General

1.16.2. (continued)

C. If the existing electric meter panel is fed from an overhead service and does not have a cable termination compartment, then the panel may be replaced with a new panel that does not have an isolated cable termination compartment. See Section 6, Figure 6-5, “Combination Meter Socket Load Center,” on Page 6-9, for specific notes and requirements, and an allowed meter panel that does not have an isolated cable termination compartment. This type of panel may be replaced with one that has an isolated termination compartment.

the panel may be replaced with a new panel that does not have an isolated cable termination compartment. See Section 6, Figure 6-5, “Combination Meter Socket Load Center,” on Page 6-9, for specific notes and requirements, and an allowed meter panel that does not have an isolated cable termination compartment. This type of panel may be replaced with one that has an isolated termination compartment.

D. If the existing electric meter panel is fed from an underground service, the new meter panel must have an isolated cable termination compartment that is separated from the meter socket compartment. - “ For example, see Section 6, Figure 6 1, Typical Underground Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter-Socket Panel

− ” (Residential, 0 Amps 225 Amps), on Page 6-5. New panels without an isolated termination compartment are not allowed.

E. New multimeter panels must be the same shape, layout, dimensions, and number of meter sockets as the existing multimeter panel to be considered a like-for-like replacement. If any of these items are not met, the panel replacement will be considered an upgrade and must meet the upgrade requirements in Subsection 1.16.1., “Upgrading Electric Facilities,” on Page 1-21.

F. The new service and metering equipment must be positioned so the existing PG&E service conductors can be terminated into the new panel lugs or studs. Wall-mounted junction boxes, underground splice boxes, or splicing on additional cable is prohibited and not allowed. The new equipment also must be positioned to ensure that clearances are not reduced to gas facilities (as shown in Section 2, Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances,” on Page 2-33), water sources, or obstructions. If PG&E needs to install new service conductors or cables to perform the reconnect, the work and material is the applicant’s responsibility.

G. A like-for-like panel change may not have to meet the current Greenbook requirements unless worker safety, existing clearances, working space, or the panel location’s accessibility is reduced or compromised. PG&E will not energize meter panel installations if they do not meet PG&E requirements for safe working conditions. This is at PG&E’s discretion. The following are additional cases where the panel is not allowed to be replaced in the same location.

    - When structures (e.g., decks, remodeled buildings, planters) are

built over, under, or around the existing meter panel.

2022 – 2023 1-22

Section 1, General

1.16.2. (continued)

  • When the existing meter panel is installed directly above or within 12 inches horizontally from the outside edges of the gas meter set. This includes installations where the gas or electric meters are inside cabinets. If one or both of the meters are in cabinets, the 12-inch clearance is from the outer edge of the cabinet. See Figure 1-3, “Panel Replacement Not Allowed when Over a Gas Meter Set,” below. Newly replaced meter panels are prohibited from being installed in the gray area.

Figure 1-3 Electric Panel Replacement Not Allowed When Over a PG&E SmartMeter Gas Meter Set

1.16.3. Relocating Electric Facilities

When existing electric facilities are relocated, applicants must meet all of the current Greenbook requirements. If PG&E’s existing service conductor can be used, as determined by PG&E, the panel must be positioned so the service conductor can be reconnected properly. The existing service conductor must be able to be reconnected either to the underground electric panel termination lugs or, for overhead services, to the external service-entrance conductors coming out of the weatherhead.

If PG&E needs to install additional service conductors or cables to perform the reconnect, the work and material is the applicant’s responsibility. PG&E does not accept cable-termination techniques using pin adaptors, cable ringing, or splicing on additional cable.

1-23 2022 – 2023

Section 1, General

1.16.3. (continued)

For additional information, see Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” Subsection 5.3., “Electric Meters: General Location Requirements,” on Page 5-5.

1.16.4. Adding Power Generation

All customer-generating equipment connected either to the Company’s equipment or to customer equipment must conform to Company standards. This includes any applicable municipal, local, city, or federal rules and regulations, unless otherwise specified. Any distributed generation (DG) facilities, as well as backup generation installations, must meet the clearance requirements detailed in the Greenbook . This includes all clearance requirements from gas facilities.

Examples of DG and backup generation facilities include, but are not limited to, renewable sources such as solar, wind, water power, and farm waste, as well as nonrenewable energy sources such as natural gas or other fossil fuels for conventional engines, turbines, and fuel cells.

1.17. Standard Electric Service Voltage and Load Limitations

This section clarifies PG&E’s voltage requirements when applicants design services for single-family residential homes, duplex homes, town homes, condominiums, apartment buildings, or commercial (nonresidential) buildings.

1.17.1. Single-Phase Service

Unless an applicant qualifies for a three-phase service, the service voltage for a residential building or structure typically is 120/240 V, single phase, where the size of any single motor does not exceed 7.5 horsepower.

For any single-phase service, the maximum demand as determined by PG&E is limited to the capability of a 100-kVA transformer. If the load requires a transformer installation in excess of 100 kVA, the service will be three phase.

PG&E will not supply 120/208 V, single-phase service to residential structures or buildings unless both of the following conditions are met.

A. A 120/208 V secondary system is established near the location where the requested service would be supplied.

B. The rating of the disconnecting means (i.e., the main switch or main disconnect) or of the service entrance does not exceed 225 amperes.

1.17.2. Three-Phase Service

If PG&E determines that a single residential or nonresidential building or structure justifies a 75-kVA transformer at 120/208 V, or a 5 horsepower or larger motor at 120/240 V for an overhead service, then installing three-phase service is an option for the applicant. This option also is available for underground services with a 75-kVA transformer at 120/208 V, or a 10 horsepower or larger motor at 120/240 V.

2022 – 2023 1-24

Section 1, General

1.17.2. (continued)

This applies whether the applicant plans to wire the individual residential units in a single-phase or a three-phase configuration. Applicants requesting the three-phase option must provide space on the property for PG&E to install a dedicated transformer. For more information, see Electric Rule 2 .

If, based solely on PG&E’s estimation, the electric service demand is greater than that which can be supplied by a single-phase, 100-kVA transformer, then PG&E must supply three-phase service.

Other load limitations and requirements used to determine qualification for three-phase service are contained in PG&E’s Electric Rule 2 .

Three-phase service is available in 208Y/120, 240/120, or 480Y/277 voltages. The appropriate voltage depends on the minimum load requirements and the maximum demand load permitted by PG&E’s Electric Rule 2 .

1.17.3. Mixed-Use Projects

Mixed-use projects include both residential and nonresidential loads. When designing a mixed-use project where the use occurs in separate buildings, ensure that each facility is supplied by a separate transformer. This means that a single-phase transformer could supply the residential units(s) and three-phase transformer could supply the nonresidential unit(s).

If the mixed use occurs in the same building, a single transformer typically is installed to supply the building. The size and selection of the transformer is based solely on PG&E’s estimated demand load . The applicant must provide space on the property for PG&E to install a dedicated transformer.

In some cases, PG&E may determine that the residential and nonresidential loads must be supplied by separate transformers and service facilities, including meters and metering facilities. PG&E makes this determination based on the nature or anticipated operation of the nonresidential loads and how they may affect the services. The applicant must provide space for those service facilities on the property.

Again, when developing mixed-use projects, the applicant must communicate and work closely with PG&E early in the design phase .

1.18. Wholesale Distribution Tariff (WDT) Interconnections

WDT customers requesting primary service interconnections should refer to Numbered Document 092816, “Wholesale Distribution Tariff (WDT) Interconnection Design Options for Primary Voltage Service,” located in and consult with your local service planning office.

1-25 2022 – 2023

Section 1, General

1.19. Harmful Wave Form

As described in Electric Rule 2, customers must not operate equipment that either superimposes a current of any frequency or wave form on PG&E’s system, or draws current from PG&E’s system of a harmful wave form. Harmful wave forms cause interference with PG&E’s operations, or with service to other customers, or cause inductive interference to communication facilities.

Also, any customer who operates or plans to operate any equipment that creates intolerable voltage fluctuations, generates waveform harmonic distortion, or otherwise causes intolerable service interference, must limit such interference or restrict the use of such equipment on PG&E’s request.

Harmonic distortion is a growing power-quality concern on PG&E’s distribution circuits. Therefore, PG&E will adopt the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Standard 519, “Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems.” PG&E will require that the harmonic current drawn by customer’s equipment of any kind be in conformity with the IEEE Standard 519. Customer equipment types include, but are not limited to, Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) motor controllers. These harmonic distortion limits reduce the potential negative effects to customers and PG&E distribution system equipment.

As explained in Electric Rule 2, customers may be required to install protection against the adverse effects of harmonics resulting from their equipment. Customers can reduce harmonic current by installing harmonic filters or upgrading to equipment with a low-harmonic output.

2022 – 2023 1-26

SECTION 2 GAS SERVICE

Section 2

Gas Service

2.1. Scope

This section of the manual covers general gas service and gas meter-set requirements for residential and nonresidential installations.

USA

WARNING

T O AVOID POTENTIAL ACCIDENTS, DO NOT BEGIN TO

EXCAVATE BEFORE IDENTIFYING UNDERGROUND FACILITIES .

State law requires applicants to contact Underground Service Alert (USA) by dialing 811 at least 2 working days before excavation (weekends and holidays excluded). Ensure that you call USA when planning underground work, before digging begins, to allow adequate time for USA to determine the location of underground gas and electric lines or equipment. The potential for an accident exists if applicants fail to request USA to identify underground utility facilities before they begin excavating. For safety, workers must dig by hand when digging within 2 feet of distribution lines and 10 feet of gas transmission lines.

First, the applicant must mark the excavation area with white paint. Then, USA arranges for participating companies to mark the locations of their underground facilities at the jobsite. This is a free service . See the USA color-code identifiers in Table 1-1, “USA Color Coding,” on Page 1-1, and on the back of this manual.

Additional information is available at http://www.pge.com/digsafely. Find USA services at the USA North website (http://www.usanorth.org). USA is a locating service for excavation only. Do not use USA for design purposes.

Dig Safely

2.2. Procedures for Establishing Gas Service

2.2.1. Establishing New Gas Service

Applicants must follow the steps described below to establish new gas service.

A. Applicant’s Planning Stage

When planning to establish new gas service, applicants must:

  1. Fill out and submit the appropriate PG&E application. Refer to Subsection 1.3., “Applying for Building and Renovation Services,” on Page 1-5, for more information about the application requirements.

  2. Contact their local PG&E project coordinators as early in the planning stage as possible.

N OTE : See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk

Contact Information,” at the front of this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed by area.

2-1 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.2.1. (continued)

B. Working With PG&E

After initially contacting PG&E about installing new gas service, applicants must:

  1. Provide detailed site improvement plans indicating property lines, roads, sidewalks, and driveways, as well as the locations of other site infrastructure elements such as, but not limited to, water services, sewer line, water drainage, bioswales, and retaining walls. For individual parcels/single buildings, include the proposed locations of gas and electric meters, building elevations, and proposed future improvements. Ensure that the written details for required clearances in meter set assemblies are also included in the drawing. (Meter locations are subject to PG&E approval.)

  2. Submit details about the type(s) of gas appliances being installed per meter. Include the connected load breakdown in thousand British Thermal Units (MBTU) per hour for each appliance and its intended use.

  3. Applicants requesting above-standard delivery pressure (7 inches of water column) typically are required to submit a written justification for PG&E’s review and approval. Standard delivery pressure is approximately 1/4 pounds per square inch gauge (psig). See Subsection 2.4.1., “Gas Pressure,” on Page 2-18, for more requirements.

  4. Applicants can choose either PG&E or an outside company to design and/or install their services. PG&E provides the applicant with a bid for service design and installation costs. Specific conditions must be met whether the applicant chooses PG&E or an outside company to work on the project.

5. When PG&E utilities are in a trench with other utilities, see PG&E

Standard S5453, “Joint Trench” (located in Appendix B, “Electric and Gas Service Documents”), Exhibit A, “Joint Trench Drawing,” and Form B, “Job Estimate Authorization for Joint Trench Construction.” Use the information in both exhibits when PG&E facilities are in a trench with other utilities.

Contact your local project coordinator for copies of these documents. See Table FM-1 in the front of the manual on Page iv.

Information about service design and installation options is available either on Gas Form 79-716, “General Terms and Conditions for Gas and Electric Extension and Service

Construction by Applicant,” or by calling PG&E’s Building and Renovation Service Center (BRSC) at 877-743-7782.

2022 – 2023 2-2

2.2.1. (continued)

Section 2, Gas Service

  1. Obtain approval from PG&E’s project coordinators for the gas service and meter-set location. If the new gas service request is complex, PG&E may require that estimators and/or engineers become involved before approving the gas service and meter-set location.

  2. Select a trenching agent to perform the required trenching and paving services. The trenching agent also must obtain all the permits required for installing the gas service pipe from the point of connection at the main to the approved meter location. Applicants can select either PG&E or an outside contractor to perform this work.

If an applicant selects an outside trenching agent for the project, the applicant must obtain a copy of PG&E’s approved trench route or construction sketch. PG&E must inspect and approve any trenching and paving work performed by outside agents.

Outside trenching agents are required to be certified to perform work on the gas pipeline systems. For a complete list of tasks requiring certification, see the Operator Qualification Program Requirements or contact a PG&E project coordinator.

Outside trenching agents can be certified by scheduling a testing session directly with PG&E by calling 1-855-854-6227 (Option 4), or by emailing QualificationCommun@pge.com.

PG&E does not accept or assume ownership of additional facilities installed where the applicant begins construction before the design is completed and approved by PG&E . Additional facilities, even if provided at no cost to PG&E, represent increased plant in the rate base. This includes associated, long-term increases in taxes and maintenance expenses.

Applicants are responsible for any additional design changes or reconstruction costs that may be required if PG&E does not accept unapproved facilities. PG&E will not pressurize a system that has not received final design approval and passed all inspections.

  1. Pay PG&E for all the installation costs. This includes the costs for facilities and appurtenant fittings, valves, service pipe, service regulators, metering equipment, etc., in excess of the allowances. For more information, see PG&E’s Gas Rule 15, “Gas Main Extensions,” Section B, “Installation Responsibilities,” and Gas Rule 16 , “Gas Service Extensions,” Section E, “Allowances and Payments by Applicant.”

ffbook/GAS_RULES_15.pdf)_, “Gas Main Extensions,” Section B, “Installation Responsibilities,” and Gas Rule 16 , “Gas Service Extensions,” Section E, “Allowances and Payments by Applicant.”

  1. Install, own, and maintain physical protection such as bollards or barrier posts and/or enclosures, as may be required.

2-3 2022 – 2023

Gas App.

Section 2, Gas Service

2.2.1. (continued)

C. Complying with Local Building Laws and Regulations

Applicants must contact local city and county deputies and inspectors to ensure compliance with all local laws and regulations. Applicants must:

  1. Allow only qualified professionals to install applicant-owned facilities. Also, applicants must ensure that equipment required by local building codes are inspected by local building inspectors.

  2. Complete the required inspections on applicant-installed gas piping (e.g., houselines) and equipment (e.g., valves, appliances) before scheduling meter-set work with PG&E.

2.2.2. Relocating or Adding Load to an Existing Service

An applicant should contact PG&E as early as possible when there are plans to remodel that require relocating an existing gas service to a different, acceptable location or when adding gas load. Applicants are required to fill out and submit to PG&E Gas Form 62-0687, “Application for Service–Existing Service Relocate/Change Service.” This form is located on pge.com at

https://www.pge.com/tariffs/assets/pdf/tariffbook/GAS_FORMS_62 0687.pdf

This form, along with additional information about building and renovation services, also is found at http://www.pge.com/building/. The form requires applicants to provide the following information.

  - **Project Type:** Asks the reason for the relocation/rearrangement.

  - **Project Information:** Asks specific information about the project

location and applicant.

  - **Contract Information:** Asks for the applicant’s legal name, mailing

address, etc.

  - **Representative Information:** If the applicant has a legal

representative to relay project information and updates to the PG&E representative, the legal representative’s name goes here.

  - **Construction Information:** Describes the applicant’s choices for

trenching and backfill work.

  - **Load Information:** Asks for the number of existing meters at each

service location. Provide details about the quantity and types of existing gas appliances and details of those being added. Include the connected load breakdown in thousand British Thermal Units (MBTU) per hour for each appliance. Also include a description of each appliance’s intended

use.

  • Self-Generation and Net Metering Options: Describes the requirements to apply for PG&E’s net metering program.

    - **Attachments:** Lists the documents required for the application including
    

site improvement plans, drawings, and maps.

  - **Agreement to Pay and Signature:** Applicants must sign the agreement

and pay any fees associated with the work.

2022 – 2023 2-4

Section 2, Gas Service

2.2.2. (continued)

N OTE : Adding load may cause the existing service to become inadequate and may require the service to be upgraded and/or replaced at the applicant’s expense. (See Gas Rule 16 .)

Applicants can choose to provide trenching for gas services relocations. PG&E Gas Form 62-0687 describes these options in greater detail.

2.3. Gas Service

All plastic gas distribution service pipes and stub completions must be a minimum diameter of 1 inch for all new business installations and customer-requested service relocations.

2.3.1. General

A gas service is the section of plastic tubing or steel pipe that connects the service riser and gas meter to PG&E’s gas distribution main. The gas distribution main is preferably located in an easement adjacent to the applicant being served. For an example, see Figure 2-1, “Typical Gas Service Installation,” on Page 2-6.

Applicants should install the gas distribution mains in joint trenches, when it is feasible to do so. Locate distribution mains 5 feet from the face or

                                            [foundation of any building as described in Gas Design Standard A](https://www.pge.com/pge_global/common/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/a-04.pdf) 04,

“Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines, Distribution Mains, and Service Lines,” located in Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.” On private property, ensure that easements are at least 10 feet wide for mains. Services that cross third-party property also require a 10-foot-wide easement.

A financial allowance for the installed service cost is based on the applicable, connected gas appliances installed within a specific time period. The allowance is applied toward the cost of a new service, as outlined in PG&E Gas Rule 16, Section E.

A. When installing a gas service, PG&E performs the following actions.

N OTE : While it is PG&E’s responsibility to design and install the gas service, the applicant has the option to perform both.

  1. PG&E installs a service extension and applies the gas rule allowances, based on applicant load, to the applicant under the following conditions:

a. PG&E determines that the loads to be served are bona fide.

b. The loads are connected and the extension placed into service subject to compliance with Gas Rule 15 and Gas Rule 16 .

  1. Design the PG&E-approved gas service to the shortest and most practical route, preferably in a straight line at a right angle from the gas main to an approved meter location. Avoid offsets, diagonal runs, bends, and services installed under driveways or customer-paved areas. Exceptions require PG&E’s advance approval . When the building or structure is on a corner lot, PG&E determines the gas main for connection.

2-5 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.1. (continued)

  1. Install and connect the gas service to the gas main in the adjoining street, highway, alley, lane, road, or easement.

Gas Service Riser

Gas Service Pipe

Lot Line
s Meter
ce Pipe
Installation Costs Are
Subject to Allowance
e Riser
Bldg.

Gas Distribution Main

Street or Roadway

Figure 2-1 Typical Gas Service Installation

4. Refer to Gas Design Standard A-93.3, “Excess Flow Valves,”

located in Appendix C.

  1. Refer to Subsection 2.3.3., “Curb Values,” on Page 2-10, if a curb valve is required.

  2. Do not install gas services under or through retaining structures (e.g., retaining walls) greater than 3 feet above ground.

N OTE : A retaining wall is a structure that retains (i.e., holds back) material (usually earth) and prevents it from sliding or eroding away. Retaining walls are designed to resist the pressure of the material being held back.

B. PG&E does not permit the following types of installations.

  1. Installing gas service under or through structures, buildings, foundations, or decks. On an exception basis, PG&E may approve a gas service riser in a gas meter room that meets the requirements in Gas Design Standard J-16, “Gas Meter Room,” located in Appendix C.

N OTE: If PG&E determines that an applicant’s uninspected trench excavation requires repair, or if the uninspected trench is backfilled and/or paved over, the applicant must provide and pay for all of the paving services and permits that are required to get an inspection and repair the trench excavation completely. This includes trenches dug on both public and private property.

2022 – 2023 2-6

2.3.1. (continued)

Section 2, Gas Service

  1. Installing gas service and gas service risers directly into concrete or asphalt pavement materials.

  2. Installing gas service risers that are not approved by PG&E.

C. When installing a gas service, the applicant is responsible for ensuring the following conditions are met.

N OTE: Applicants must refer to PG&E Gas Form 79-716 when they propose installing new gas services for new business utility services. This form is located on the Tariffs website on pge.com at https://www.pge.com/tariffs/index.page.

  1. Provide and maintain a clear route, free of any obstructions, for installing the gas service facilities.

  2. Trench, backfill, and perform any other digging as described in PG&E’s specification and inspection instructions, as required.

  3. Pay any required permit fees.

  4. Install and maintain all of the gas piping downstream of the service delivery point. See Subsection 2.5., “Applicant-Owned and Installed Gas-Service Piping (e.g., Houseline), Valves, and Automatic Shut-Off Devices,” on Page 2-49, for more information.

  5. Ensure that all requirements are met in the following PG&E gas design standards, located in Appendix C.

  6. Notify PG&E as soon as any paving activity is planned and provide PG&E with the scheduled completion date. Applicants should remember that PG&E can meet their schedules when the Company is notified early in the process.

  7. PG&E must approve all requests for gas service in a casing before installation. Provide and install an approved casing (i.e., sleeve) under the paving material when the paving will extend over the gas service. Applicants must ensure that:

a. The casing is made of a PG&E-approved material. Refer to

Gas Design Standard A-75, located in Appendix C.

b. PG&E employees and equipment have sufficient, safe, and unobstructed access to the casing location with sufficient space to perform any required work when installing in a joint trench.

c. Before installing any type of pavement or concrete, place a minimum 3-inch sleeve around the gas service riser.

2-7 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.1. (continued)

  1. PG&E Procedure TD-4632P-01, “Gas and Electric Operations −

Cross Bore Prevention and Mitigation,” provides the steps that must be taken to prevent, inspect, identify, report, and address cross bores that are created when PG&E, its contractors, and contracting agencies perform trenchless construction. All construction work performed by or for PG&E is subject to this procedure.

N OTE : Find additional information about cross bores at the Sewer

Cleaning website: https://www.pge.com/en_US/safety/gas−safety/sewer−clean ing−safety.page

D. For more information and illustrations, see Company Standard S5453,

Exhibit B, Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide, located in Appendix B.

E. Underground warning tape is required for all gas service and main pipeline installations as described in Gas Design Standard L-16, “Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape,” located in Appendix C.

F. Figure 2-2, “Gas-Only Service Trench;” Figure 2-3, “Typical Gas Bell Hole−Plan View;” and Figure 2-4, “Typical Bell Hole Depth−Profile View,” show the typical, PG&E-required excavation for a gas-only service trench and gas bell hole. All three figures are located on - “ Page 2-9. See Gas Design Standard A 03, Gas Trench Design and Construction,” located in Appendix C, for gas-only service trenching requirements.

2022 – 2023 2-8

Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.1. (continued)

Finished Grade ÏÏÏÏ

ÎÎÎ

ÏÏÏ
12”
arning Tape I
one (See Doc
12”
Ï
12”
ÎÎÎ
2
4”
ÏÏÏ
12”
arning Tape I
one (See Doc
12”
Approved
Backfill
nstallation
umentL-16)
Approved
Backfill
nstallation
umentL-16)
Approved
Backfill
nstallation
umentL-16)
Ä
Ä
Gas Pipe
4” Bedding
Material
G
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Gas Pipe
4” Bedding
Material
ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ

Figure 2-2 Gas-Only Service Trench

ÏÏÏÏÏÏ Finish Grade

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

Ï ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Ï

Ï ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Ï

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

(4’ Length x 4’ Width, Plastic Pipe) (5’ Length x 4’ Width, Steel Pipe)

Figure 2-3 Typical Gas Bell Hole−Plan View

ÎÎÎÎÎ

Figure 2-4 Typical Bell Hole Depth−Profile View

Notes in reference to Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3, and Figure 2-4.

  1. All dimensions are the minimum required amounts.

  2. For Figure 2-2, “Gas-Only Service Trench,” soil compaction must meet PG&E’s and any applicable federal, state, county, and local requirements.

  3. Some jobs may require bell holes with larger dimensions and trench shoring.

2-9 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.2. Branch Service Pipe

Branching may be used to provide service to no more than two buildings. The meter installations must be located on adjacent sides of the two buildings being served. Where a branch-service installation is justified, a separate location for the gas meter and electric meter is permissible, if necessary.

Design and install all branch services as described in Gas Design Standard A-42, “Standard Branch Service Installation,” and Gas Design Standard A-90, both located in Appendix C.

2.3.3. Curb Valves

A. A curb shutoff valve is required to be installed when any of the following conditions exist:

  1. The meter capacity exceeds 5,000 standard cubic feet per hour, and an EFV is not required and not installed. Refer to Gas Design Standard A-93.3, located in Appendix C, for EFV requirements.

  2. The shutoff valve is not readily accessible or is inside a building and the service shutoff valve is enclosed (e.g., basement, garage, or similar obstructed location).

  3. An EFV is not required and not installed, and the service line cannot be quickly squeezed off because of wall-to-wall paving, concrete, depth of cover, or other surface conditions. This includes known, planned depth of cover or other surface conditions. Typically, a service line that is installed in a lawn area with normal soil conditions (i.e., no wall-to-wall paving, concrete, or other obstruction over the service line) may be quickly squeezed off.

B. PG&E requires curb valves when the service line supplies a building where approximately 100 or more people gather and where the occupancy may be transient (see Gas Design Standard A-43.2, “Curb Valves”). Examples include, but are not limited to:

   - Schools

   - Hospitals

   - Churches

   - Places of incarceration

   - Theaters

   - Auditoriums

   - Arenas

   - Transit centers

2022 – 2023 2-10

Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.3. (continued)

C. PG&E may require valves on small, gas-distribution systems. These systems include, but are not limited to:

    - Mobile home parks ( _**not**_ individual mobile homes)

    - Condominiums and apartments

    - Multiple buildings

    - Shopping centers

    - Commercial/industrial parks

2.3.4. Joint Utility Service Trenches

When installing underground electric service, PG&E’s gas service usually is installed in a common joint trench with the electric service. The joint trench typically includes telephone and cable television facilities. No other utilities or wiring are allowed in a joint trench (e.g., water, sewer, private wires, or facilities not a member of Underground Service Alert). See the definition for “Non-Utility” in Appendix A, “Acronyms and Glossary.”

When planning to install joint-trench, allow for additional lead time to design and engineer the joint trench. Applicants must be aware of the following requirements.

1. Both a Joint Trench Composite Drawing and Form B, “Job

Estimate Authorization for Joint Trench Construction,” are required when PG&E facilities are located in a trench with other utilities.

  1. Applicants either must submit joint trench drawings to PG&E for review, or PG&E can prepare joint trench drawings for applicants at their expense.

  2. PG&E must approve the trench’s design details before trenching begins and facilities are installed.

  3. Figure 2-5, on Page 2-12, shows the layout of a “Typical Joint-Service Trench.”

Separation and clearance details for joint utility service trenches are located in Table 2-1, “Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Trenches,” on Page 2-13.

2-11 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.4. (continued)

12” Minimum
39” Minimum Minimum
S
G
T
C
6”
39” Minimum Bedding Material

Notes in reference to Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5 Typical Joint-Service Trench

  • Increase depth to 30” in the Franchise area.
  1. Trench depth varies depending on the occupant’s facility allotment.

  2. Soil compaction must meet PG&E’s, and any applicable federal, state, county, and local requirements.

  3. A joint service trench must meet all separation and clearance dimensions shown in Table 2-1, “Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Trenches,” on Page 2-13.

  4. For more information on Figure 2-5, see PG&E’s Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide, located in Appendix B.

2022 – 2023 2-12

Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.4. (continued)

Table 2-1 Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Trenches [1]

G Duct
T
DB
T
C S P SL
(In Inches) (In Inches) (In Inches) (In Inches) (In Inches) (In Inches) (In Inches) (In Inches) (In Inches)
G Gas2 12 12 12 6 12 6
T Telephone (Duct) 12 1 1 12 12 12
T Telephone (Direct Bury) 12 1 1 12 12 12
C CATV 12 1 1 12 12 12
S Electric Secondary 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
P Electric Primary 12 12 12 12 3 3 3
SL Streetlight3 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
NE Foreign Electric Sources,
Non-PG&E4
12 12 12 12 12 12 12

1 All separation clearance distances are in inches. 2 For more information about this table, see” Company Bulletin TD-5453B-002, “Updated Separation Requirements For Conduit in Joint Trench. located in Appendix B. 3 Streetlight circuits not owned by PG&E must be installed to meet the requirements in PG&E’s Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide . Specifically, applicants must review the requirements for working with a second utility company. 4 Considered a “utility” as defined in Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench.”

PG&E does not differentiate between the clearances for casing/conduit and pipe. The clearances and installation requirements are the same.

For more information on backfill-sand requirements, see Engineering Material Specification EMS-4123, “Backfill Sand,” located in Appendix B.

For more information on the minimum separation and clearance requirements for service trenches, see the Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide .

When different service facilities (e.g., gas, electric, telecommunications) are installed in close proximity (e.g., in a joint trench), applicants must ensure that the facilities maintain a minimum horizontal separation of 36 inches from the gas riser where they transition from below ground to above ground. See Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances,” on Page 2-33.

ifferent service facilities (e.g., gas, electric, telecommunications) are installed in close proximity (e.g., in a joint trench), applicants must ensure that the facilities maintain a minimum horizontal separation of 36 inches from the gas riser where they transition from below ground to above ground. See Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances,” on Page 2-33.

Clearances between other facilities can be reduced only when the parties supplying those services or facilities reach a mutual agreement.

N OTE : Applicants must ensure that sufficient space is provided between facilities at all times to allow for safe maintenance and operation.

A. Applicants must not install any electrical devices or equipment including wires, cables, metering and telecommunication enclosures, bond wires, clamps, or ground rods within 36 inches of the gas service riser.

2-13 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.4. (continued)

This distance can be reduced to 18 inches for electrical devices or equipment certified for National Electric Code (NEC) Class I, Division 2 locations. See Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances,” on Page 2-33, and Figure 2-21, “Gas Regulator Set Clearance Requirement from Air-Intake and Exhaust Fans,” on Page 2-36.

B. Applicants must keep the area immediately behind gas meters, service facilities, and risers free and clear of all other facilities or equipment (i.e., pipes, building vents, or conduits). This requirement also applies to the area between those facilities and the premises or structure being served.

Before installing utility conduits or gas service piping, applicants must discuss the service arrangements and coordinate the final PG&E-approved meter locations and joint trench requirements with a PG&E project coordinator.

The joint trench composite drawing must include details of the sizes and quantities of all the equipment sharing the trench. PG&E inspectors must approve the trench after installation is complete.

Applicants must ensure that the gas and electric meters are installed according to Figure 2-19 on Page 2-33, providing the minimum separation clearances. Refer to the following sections of this manual for acceptable electric meter utility locations.

  - [Section 2, “Gas Service,” Subsection 2.4., “Set Requirements for Gas](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80dfc687&vd=false&device=false)

Meters” (on Page 2-18)

  - [Section 5, “Electric Metering: General”](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80e04aeb&vd=false&device=false)

  - [Section 6, “Electric Metering: Residential](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80df9fc5&vd=false&device=false)

  - [Section 7, “Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80e06c30&vd=false&device=false)

Agricultural”

Wet-utility piping or facilities are not permitted in a joint trench. Examples of wet utilities that are not allowed in a joint trench include the following:

  - Propane lines

  - Pressurized water lines

  - Sewer, sanitary, or storm drains

Both PG&E Standard S5453, Form B, “Job Estimate Authorization for Joint Trench Construction,” and the Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide , located in Appendix B, describe the requirements for separating a wet utility from a joint trench.

When applicants want to install facilities in a joint trench other than those listed in this section, PG&E requires a written request that includes a justification for the exception. Applicants must submit their requests to PG&E for review and approval before beginning work on a joint trench.

See Figure 2-19 on Page 2-33 for above-grade clearance requirements from the gas service riser where joint trench occupants terminate.

2022 – 2023 2-14

Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.5. Multiple Buildings Located on One Lot

A. Two Buildings Located on One Lot

  1. PG&E may furnish a separate gas service to each building if it does not require an additional gas distribution main extension. Figure 2-6, “Separate Gas Services for Two Buildings on a Single Lot,” on Page 2-13, and Figure 2-7, “Separate Gas Services for Two Buildings on a Corner Lot,” on Page 2-16, show examples of two premises on one lot with separate gas services.

One or More Meters Grouped at This Location

PG&E-Owned Gas Service Pipe

One or More Meters Grouped at This Location

Gas Distribution Main

Street or Roadway

Figure 2-6 Separate Gas Services for Two Buildings on a Single Lot

2-15 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.5. (continued)

Street or Right-of-Way

GasDistribution Main

Figure 2-7 Separate Gas Services for Two Buildings on a Corner Lot

  1. When more than one gas meter is required to serve a single building, the meters for that building must be grouped at a common location that has been approved by PG&E. See Subsection 2.4.2.F., “Multiple Gas Meter Connection Requirements for Single and Double (Banked) Manifold Connections,” on Page 2-39, for grouping requirements when locations have multiple meters.

B. Three or More Buildings Located on One Lot

When two or more buildings, either single family or multifamily, are on the same lot and located in close proximity to each other, PG&E may install a gas distribution main on the applicants’ properties. For specific requirements, see PG&E’s main-extension rule, Gas Rule 15, and service-pipe extension rule, Gas Rule 16 . Before a gas distribution main can be installed, applicants must ensure that the following conditions are met.

  1. There must be a protected and accessible location on the property.

  2. A satisfactory right-of-way, easement, or permit must be available at no cost to PG&E.

Typically, PG&E installs a single, gas-service pipe to each building, as described in Gas Rule 16 .

2022 – 2023 2-16

2.3.5. (continued)

Meters

Section 2, Gas Service

6 Unit

Meters

Gas Distribution Main

Gas

Gas Distribution Main

Street or Roadway

Figure 2-8 Figure 2-9 Apartments With Grouped Meter Locations Individually Metered Buildings

Typical Gas Distribution Main and Service Pipe Installation for Property With Three or More Buildings

Multifamily residential complexes are subject to a California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) mandate specifying that each unit is metered individually. Specifically, see Public Utilities Code Division 1, “Regulation of Public Utilities,” Part 1, “Public Utilities Act,” Chapter 4, “Regulation of Public Utilities,” Article 3, “Equipment, Practices, and Facilities,” Section 780.5 (on the Internet at http://leginfo.legislature.ca.gov/faces/codes_displaySection.xhtml?secti onNum=780.5.&lawCode=PUC).

E XCEPTION: A single gas meter may serve an entire complex when the gas is used only for central heating systems (i.e., space, water) that supply all tenants in common, and when each individual unit does not use gas appliances that require combustion venting. Refer to Gas Rule 18, “Supply to Separate Premises and Submetering of Gas.”

When each dwelling unit includes ground-floor space, each unit may have an individual service pipe and separate meter location if :

  1. Sufficient meter space is provided.

  2. Local ordinances do not prohibit such arrangements.

When it is practical, install the gas service pipe in a joint trench with the electric service.

See Subsection 2.4.2.F. on Page 2-39 for specific requirements when locations have multiple meters.

2-17 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.6. Mobile Home Parks

Gas mains and services in mobile home parks must meet the same standards for gas installations that are required for residential and nonresidential applications.

In addition, applicants must not install gas mains, services, and meters under existing or proposed structures including mobile homes, sheds, porches, carports, and stairs.

Applicants should install the gas distribution mains in the roadway, when it is practical to do so, and in joint trenches, when it is feasible. Locate distribution mains 5 feet from the face or foundation of any building as described in Gas Design Standard A-04 located in Appendix C. On private property, ensure that rights-of-way are at least 10 feet wide for mains and at least 5 feet wide for service piping. Only use easements for utility installations. Table 2-1 on Page 2-13 shows the minimum separation and clearance requirements for service trenches.

N OTE : Curb valves are not recommended for individual mobile home services; however, a curb valve may be installed on the service to a park’s community building.

N OTE : Refer to Gas Design Standard J-12.4, “Mobile Home/Manufactured

Home Meter Set Installation,” Contact your local project coordinator for this document.

Also see the gas meter set requirements in Subsection 2.4.2.A.4., “Mobile Home Parks,” on Page 2-23.

2.4. Set Requirements for Gas Meters

The following information describes the meter set requirements for gas services.

2.4.1. Gas Pressure

The following information describes the types of delivery pressures available with gas service.

A. Standard Delivery Pressure

PG&E typically will provide gas service pressure to the service delivery point at 7 inches of water column (WC). This is approximately 1/4 psig, as measured at the gas meter outlet.

B. Elevated Delivery Pressure

PG&E may be able to provide gas service at higher gas-delivery pressures, depending on the location of the applicant’s facility and on the requirements of the gas system serving that location. PG&E maintains sole authority to determine if the elevated delivery-pressure service is available at a specified location.

2022 – 2023 2-18

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.1. (continued)

In all elevated delivery-pressure service situations, PG&E reserves the right to reduce the gas service pressure to standard delivery pressure, as outlined in Gas Rule 2, “Description of Service,” when:

  • PG&E determines that the elevated gas pressure is no longer available.

      - The current delivery pressure is detrimental to PG&E’s gas
    

distribution system.

N OTE : When providing elevated gas-pressure service, PG&E can incur additional costs. In these cases, special facilities charges will apply as described in Gas Rule 2 . Applicants must pay these charges before PG&E can provide the services.

The following two numbered items describe cases where special facilities charges can apply.

  1. For 2-psig Services: In many PG&E service territories with sufficient distribution operating pressure, 2-psig delivery pressure may be available. When completing PG&E’s Application for service process online form, applicants must request 2-psig gas-service delivery pressure in the “Load Information” section. Generally, there are no special facilities charges at or below 2 psig for meters equal to or less than 1,000 standard cubic feet per hour (scfh) nominal capacity. As mentioned previously, PG&E determines if special facilities charges apply.

  2. For Services Higher Than 2 psig: Elevated gas-metering pressures higher than 2 psig may be available from the local gas distribution system. PG&E must ensure that tapping into this existing service will not be detrimental to the operation of that gas system.

When requesting elevated gas-service delivery pressure higher than 2 psig, applicants must follow these steps.

a. Contact the local PG&E project coordinator as soon as possible (preferably in the planning stage for a new or remodeled building).

b. Fill out the appropriate PG&E Application for service process

online form and note the gas-service delivery pressure being requested in the “Load Information” portion of the form.

c. Submit a formal, written request and justification for elevated gas-service delivery pressure (e.g., the hypothetical houseline diameter size at standard delivery pressure, the appliances’ specification requirements).

d. Submit a houseline piping schematic.

e. Submit the manufacturer’s appliance specifications to ensure that the appliances will operate as designed.

f. Provide detailed load information for all appliances and their intended use.

2-19 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.1. (continued)

C. Back-Pressure Protection

PG&E may require the applicant to install a check valve after the PG&E gas meter’s set point of connection. This check valve prevents backflow. PG&E determines the need for check valves on a case-by-case basis. The applicant is required to have a maintenance plan and to maintain the check valve.

For all higher-than-standard delivery pressure, PG&E recommends that applicants hire a qualified person, such as plumber or contractor, to review the applicant-owned gas piping, venting, and appliance installations for the gas pressure service being requested. The qualified person can ensure that the installations comply with all local, state, and federal codes, standards, and regulations. Specifically, the qualified person helps to ensure that the Uniform Plumbing Code is enforced based on the installation requirements of the local governing agency in the applicant’s location.

2.4.2. Gas Meter-Set Locations

Typically, PG&E provides only one meter set (in an outside location) for each dwelling unit and one service to each building. PG&E may require that the meter be set at the property line if either of the following two conditions are met:

  1. The building is back more than 200 feet from the property line.

  2. A potential hazard or unusual site condition threatens the service between the property line and the building. Some examples of unusual site condition are plowed land, ditches, bridges, ponds, waterways, leach fields, bioswales, inaccessible security areas, or other deterrent, obstacle, or hazard.

PG&E prefers that rotary meter sets be located outside of and away from the building.

PG&E must have unrestricted, drive-up access for service trucks and adequate space to install and maintain the meter.

Any deviations require advanced approval from PG&E.

For specific information, see Gas Rule 16, Section C, Number 5, “Unusual Site Conditions.” Figure 2-10, “Property Line Installation,” below, shows a property-line meter set installation.

2022 – 2023 2-20

2.4.2. (continued)

Gas Service Pipe

Street or Roadway

Section 2, Gas Service

Gas Meter Location and Meter Protection Provided

Property Line

Gas Distribution Main

Figure 2-10 Property Line Installation

A. Descriptions of Acceptable Meter Locations

For descriptions of, and specific requirements for, acceptable gas meter - “ ” locations, see Gas Design Standard J 15, Gas Meter Locations, located in Appendix C.

Figure 2-11, “Acceptable Locations for Gas Meter Installations,” on Page 2-23, and Figure 2-12, “Acceptable Meter Locations for Mobile Home Parks,” on Page 2-24, illustrate locations that are acceptable for installing typical meter sets.

1. Required Access

PG&E employees require access to gas meter sets to perform inspection and maintenance activities. When gas meter locations are approved by PG&E and are installed in areas that are locked or can potentially be inaccessible, the applicant must allow PG&E employees access to the meters.

a. Use a lock box, provided by PG&E and installed by the applicant, to hold the applicant’s key. The lock box with key must be installed in a PG&E-approved location near the gas meter access point.

b. For gates, a double-lock device (e.g., hasp) may be required with one lock for the applicant and one lock for PG&E.

2-21 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

2. Approved Meter Set Locations (In Order of Preference)

N OTE : For specific requirements and definitions, see Gas Design

Standard J-15, located in Appendix C.

a. Meter set located outside a building including property-line

meter sets.

b. Meter set located outside in an alcove as described in Subsection 2.4.2.G.1., “Alcoves,” on Page 2-41.

c. Enclosures as described in Subsection 2.4.2.G.2., “Enclosures,” on Page 2-42.

d. Meter set located in a cabinet or closet as described in Subsection 2.4.2.G.3., “General Requirements for Meter Cabinets,” on Page 2-43, and Subsection 2.4.2.G.4., “Gas Meter Closets,” on Page 2-45.

e. Meter set located in a breezeway. An acceptable breezeway is permanently open at both ends with no sources of ignition and no openings into the building.

N OTE : PG&E will consider approving Number f. and Number g., below, on an exception basis only after Number a. through Number e., above, are ruled out as options. Number f. and Number g., below, typically are limited to structures built up to the property line with space restrictions.

f. Meter set located inside a building in a gas meter room (see

Gas Design Standard J-16 located in Appendix C).

g. Meter set located in a buried vault, pit, or box.

2022 – 2023 2-22

2.4.2. (continued)

Section 2, Gas Service

3. Single Residential, Apartment, or Nonresidential Building

Rear Alley

G ate

Gate

ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Building
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Gate
ÍÍ
Building
ÍÍ ÍÍ
ÍÍ ÍÍ
Building
Gate
ÍÍ ÍÍ
ÍÍ ÍÍ
Building
Gate
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Building
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Building
Gate
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Building
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Building
Gate
Gat Gat
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Building
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Building
Gate
te
te te te
te te te

Gas Distribution Main

Street or Roadway

Preferred Meter Locations

ÍÍÍÍÍÍ

ÍÍÍÍÍÍ

Non-Preferred Meter Locations

Figure 2-11 Acceptable Locations for Gas Meter Installations

N OTE: When the meter set from the gas distribution line is located in a rear alley, applicants should locate the meter set outside of any gated or fenced area. This allows access for PG&E employees when maintenance is required.

4. Mobile Home Parks

For new mobile home parks, the mobile home park owner or operator must provide a separate and independent meter location for each lot. New mobile home parks are not allowed to have submetering facilities.

Typically, meters are located on flat surfaces that are not obstructed by landscaping. Meter locations cannot be obstructed by porches and stairs leading to porches. Figure 2-12, on Page 2-24, represents several acceptable meter locations within a typical mobile home park.

2-23 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

Distribution

Porch

Figure 2-12 Acceptable Meter Locations for Mobile Home Parks

Garage

Patio

Porch

PG&E does not provide metering facilities if they will be attached directly to a “movable” mobile home unit that is installed or set up in any location, including a mobile home park. Before PG&E provides metering facilities, the mobile home must meet both of the following conditions.

a. Fixed in Place: The mobile home typically does not have either running gear or wheels and is not capable of being moved to another location.

b. Installed on a Foundation System: The mobile home must have a foundation system as described on the California Department of Housing and Community Development website. From the Home page, click Manufactured & Mobilehomes. Then from the drop down, click Mobilehome Parks. Finally, click Laws and Regulations.)

This section says that if a mobile home park contains lots or site spaces that are set up to accommodate “movable” mobile home units, PG&E will install and supply the park using utility-approved service and metering facilities at a fixed location other than the mobile home. In these cases, applicants are responsible for connecting their mobile home units to those fixed metering facilities.

2022 – 2023 2-24

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

5. Subsidence Areas

In subsidence areas, the acceptable location requirements are the same as the requirements outlined in Subsection 2.4.2.A., “Descriptions of Acceptable Meter Locations,” on Page 2-21. PG&E may require a flexible connector to be installed between the gas meter outlet and the houseline. These connectors may require additional clearance space. See Figure 2-13, “Flex-Hose Meter Set−Residential and Small Commercial,” located below, for a sample installation. Contact your local project coordinator for Gas Design Standard J-58, “Flex Hose Meter Set Installation,” which provides information about diaphragm and rotary meters in subsidence areas.

Service Tee Owned and Installed by PG&E

Precast Concrete Pad 12” x 12” x 3”

Figure 2-13 Flex-Hose Meter Set–Residential and Small Commercial

Notes in reference to Figure 2-13.

  1. Hoses have a minimum bending radius (R) based on the projected settlement of the ground and on the size of the hose.

B. Unacceptable Meter Locations

For new or remodeled buildings, do not locate gas meter sets in the following areas.

  1. In curb meter boxes or vaults. (Only allowed as an option of last resort.)

  2. In living quarters, closets, toilet rooms, or bathrooms.

  3. Under stairs inside or outside.

  4. In garages without properly vented meter cabinets.

2-25 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

  1. Behind fences. (This is not preferred, but on an exception basis may be allowed.) See Subsection 2.4.2.A.1., “Required Access,” on Page 2-21.

  2. On steep slopes.

  3. In areas where landscaping restricts access.

  4. Within engine, boiler, heater, or electrical-equipment rooms.

  5. Under display platforms or show windows in commercial buildings. (This includes any permanent, elevated display floors or platforms associated with the window where the purpose of the window is to present a display to the public.)

  6. In contact with the soil, in a depression below general ground level, or where potentially corrosive materials are likely to contact the meter set.

  7. In tradesman alleys (i.e., passageway in a building with a door at one end). Meters may be in a tradesman alley when in a vapor-proof cabinet that is vented to the outside and clear of sources of ignition.

  8. In crawl spaces under buildings or decks.

  9. Near a driveway, drive-thru, or other-traveled area.

  10. In a metallic cabinet, room, or location that blocks or interferes with the radio frequency signal transmissions that are necessary for PG&E to operate its SmartMeter™ Advanced Meter Reading system.

  11. In any location that does not provide the required clear and level work space. The height dimension is 6 feet, 6 inches of clearance above ground, 1 foot on each side of the meter facilities, and the depth dimension is 3 feet of clearance in front of the gas meter. See the figures in Subsection 2.4.2.C., “Single Gas Meter Connection Requirements,” below, for the different width dimensions.

N OTE : All meter locations are subject to PG&E approval.

2022 – 2023 2-26

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

C. Single Gas Meter Connection Requirements

The figures beginning on Page 2-28 illustrate typical meter-set dimensions and working clearance requirements based on the total diversified loads and stated delivery pressure.

N OTE : The actual meter-set configuration, including the dimensions, may be different depending on field conditions and restrictions.

Consult with your local project coordinator for the exact meter location and houseline placement and orientation. Customer-installed equipment (e.g., earthquake valves) must be installed on customer houseline and cannot reduce the minimum riser-to-houseline dimension.

A commercial meter set may require the riser to be located farther away from the face of the building to accommodate the meter’s installation. Your local project coordinator can verify that risers and houselines are installed and meet all minimum clearance requirements before scheduling the meter set installation.

2-27 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

  1. Figure 2-14 represents a typical gas meter kit with 0 through 350 scfh at 7 inches WC or 0 through 600 scfh at 2 psig. Reverse sets are not allowed. The houseline must be to the right of the gas service riser.

12” 24” 12”

Top View

Figure 2-14

Typical Residential Gas Meter Connection

2022 – 2023 2-28

2.4.2. (continued)

Section 2, Gas Service

  1. Figure 2-15 represents a typical gas meter kit with 351 through 1,400 scfh at 7 inches WC or 601 through 2,400 scfh at 2 psig. Reverse sets are not allowed for 400 through 600 class meters (i.e., 400, 425, 630). The houseline must be to the right of the gas service riser.

12” 30” 12”

Top View

Figure 2-15 Typical Gas Meter Connection for 400 to 1,000 Class Meters

2-29 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

  1. Figure 2-16 represents a rotary gas meter with 1,401 through 3,000 scfh at an approved delivery pressure.

Detail A

Face Flange ANSI 150

52” Min.
See Note 6
12”
10’ See
Detail A
36”
Meter Set
32”
15”
6”
6”
Finished
Grade

See Note 6
15”
6”
Meter Set
Finished
Grade
6”

52” Min.
32”
10’
See
Detail A
36”
12”
6”
Meter Set
6”
Meter Set
6”
Meter Set
6”
Meter Set
6”
Meter Set
6”
Meter Set
6”
Meter Set
8’ 0” Minimum
Headroom
Required
Double
Gate or
Remov
Section
6’ 0”
9’ 0”
1”
4”
6”

Provided and Installed
By Customer
Provided and Installed
By PG&E
Customer to Supply 2” Flat

Enclosure Requirements

Figure 2-16 Gas Meter Connection Using a 1.5M or 3M Rotary Gas Meter

Notes in reference to Figure 2-16.

  1. Customers must provide a 40 inches x 36 inches x 4 inches concrete pad with minimum #4 rebar.

  2. Customers must provide a 2-inch ANSI 150 flat face flange to connect to PG&E facilities.

  3. If the meter set is built next to a building wall, place the vertical leg of the riser and the houseline 20 inches from the wall. This ensures that the meter set components are built in a straight line.

  4. The finished grade must be below the bury-line marking on the service riser.

  5. PG&E’s weld elbow is optional.

  6. The regulator vent must not terminate near any sources of ignition or openings into the building. The riser must be a minimum of 36 inches from sources of ignition, from any openings into the building, or any wet facility. This clearance area extends 10 feet above the highest regulator vent, 36 inches below the lowest regulator vent, and 12 inches beyond the farthest PG&E meter-set equipment.

2022 – 2023 2-30

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued) 4. Figure 2-17 represents a rotary gas meter with 3,001 through 7,000 scfh at an approved delivery pressure.

Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.)

0”

Detail A

3” Flat Face Flange ANSI 150

12’

0”

Enclosure Requirements

Figure 2-17 Gas Meter Connection Using a 5M or 7M Rotary Gas Meter

Notes in reference to Figure 2-17.

  1. Customers must provide a 78-inches x 36-inches x 4-inches concrete pad with minimum #4 rebar.

  2. Customers must provide a 3-inch ANSI 150 flat-face flange to connect to PG&E facilities.

  3. If the meter set is built next to a building wall, place the vertical leg of the riser and the houseline 20 inches away from the wall. This is to ensure the meter set components are built in a straight line.

  4. The finished grade must be below the bury-line marking on the service riser.

  5. PG&E’s weld elbow is optional.

  6. The regulator vent must not terminate near any sources of ignition or openings into the building. The riser must be a minimum distance of 36 inches from sources of ignition and openings into the building, or any wet facility. This clearance area extends 10 feet above the highest regulator vent, 36 inches below the lowest regulator vent, and 12 inches beyond the farthest PG&E meter-set equipment.

2-31 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued) 5. Figure 2-18 represents a rotary gas meter with 7,001 through 16,000 scfh at an approved delivery pressure.

Enclosure Requirements

Figure 2-18 Gas Meter Connection Using an 11M or 16M Rotary Gas Meter

Notes in reference to Figure 2-18.

  1. Customers must provide a 96-inch x 36-inch x 4-inch concrete pad with minimum #4 rebar.

  2. Customers must provide a 4-inch ANSI 150 flat−face flange to connect to PG&E facilities.

  3. If the meter set is built next to a building wall, place the vertical leg of the riser and the houseline 20-inches minimum away from the wall. This ensures the meter set components are built in a straight line.

  4. The finished grade must be below the bury-line marking on the service riser.

  5. PG&E’s weld elbow is optional.

  6. The regulator vent must not terminate near any sources of ignition or openings into the building. The riser must be a minimum distance of 36 inches from sources of ignition, openings into the building, or any wet facility. This clearance area extends 10 feet above the highest regulator vent, 36 inches below the lowest regulator vent, and 12 inches beyond the farthest PG&E meter-set equipment.

2022 – 2023 2-32

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

Contact your local project coordinator about possible locations for regulator vents. (The regulations for large, industrial meter sets can vary.)

D. Minimum Meter Set Clearance Requirements

Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances,” below; Figure 2-20, “Gas Meter Set Clearance from Building Openings,” on Page 2-35; and Figure 2-21, “Gas Regulator Set Clearance Requirement from Sources of Ignition,” on Page 2-36, all represent various metering facilities’ clearance requirements. If applicants install enclosures on their premises, the enclosures must meet the clearances provided in these illustrations.

See Figure 2-20 and Note 5 on Page 2-35

Figure 2-19 Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances

Notes in reference to Figure 2-19.

  1. Electric meter panel locations are subject to utility approval and must comply with the applicable code requirements. PG&E does not have specific requirements for the distance from the electric panel to the outside building corner. See Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” for properly locating the electric meters. See Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-17, for electric meter working space.

Notes continued on the next page

2-33 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

Notes in Reference to Notes in reference to Figure 2-19 (continued).

  1. Applicants must not install any electrical devices or equipment, including wires, cables, metering enclosures, telecommunication enclosures, bond wires, clamps, or ground rods within the shaded area around the gas meter. The 36-inch distance can be reduced to 18 inches for electrical devices or equipment certified for NEC Class I, Division 2 locations.

  2. A solid and continuous conduit without couplings, joints, or connections is allowed to run completely through the shaded area at 6 feet or higher above the gas meter regulator vent.

  3. Place the gas service riser 6 inches to 9 inches from the finished wall. The completed customer houseline at the service delivery point must extend a minimum of 4 to 6 inches from the finished wall where the meter is to be set and must be 26 inches above the finished grade. See Figure 2-14 on Page 2-28, Figure 2-15 on Page 2-29, and Subsection 2.5. on Page 2-49.

  4. The minimum dimensions and clearances in Figure 2-19 are good for gas meters up to the 1,000 class. See Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15 on Pages 2-28 and 2-29 for illustrations of clear and level work space in front of the gas meter.

2022 – 2023 2-34

2.4.2. (continued)

Section 2, Gas Service

Figure 2-20 Gas Meter Set Clearance From Building Openings

Notes in reference to Figure 2-20.

  1. Do not place gas regulator vents under display platforms or show windows in commercial buildings. This includes any permanent, elevated display floors or platforms associated with the window, where the purpose of the window is to present a display to the public.

  2. Do not place gas regulator vents under building overhangs where the overhang is likely to direct venting gas to a building opening.

  3. The building vent openings, sources of ignition, and above-ground water sources must be a minimum of 36 inches away from the riser.

  4. Applicants must not install water spigots, lines, gutter systems, or other water sources within 36 inches of the gas riser or electric facilities.

  5. For a large meter set or multimeter manifold, the minimum separation requirement for sources of ignition, opening to buildings or sources of above-ground water, extend 12 inches beyond the farthest PG&E metering facilities and 10 feet above the highest regulator vent.

2-35 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

8’ Min.

8’ Min.

Pad-Mounted Transformers,. All Electric Equip. and Air-Intake Vents Exhaust Fan
Wiring (e.g., Central Air,
Exhaust Fan)

(See Notes 1 & 2)
3’ Min.

3’ Min.
Air-Intake
Vents (See
Notes 1 & 2

Figure 2-21 Gas Regulator Set Clearance Requirement from Air-Intake and Exhaust Fans

Notes in reference to Figure 2-21.

  1. An 8-foot minimum horizontal and 10-foot minimum vertical clearance is required from the gas service riser to air-intake vents.

  2. For a large meter set or multimeter manifold, this clearance requirement will extend 8 feet beyond the farthest PG&E meter equipment.

E. Panel Replacements and Conduit Connections to Existing Electric Panels, 400 Amps and Less, within the Gas Clearance Area

Electric panel upgrades, “like-for-like” panel replacements, and new electric conduit connections to existing electric meter panels may be allowed for an existing electric meter panel that resides within the gas clearance area as shown in Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances, on Page 2-33, if all the following requirements are met:

  1. The electric panel and electric conduit and equipment must not reside within the 36-inch radius from the gas regulator vent opening.

  2. The electric panel must not reside within 12 inches on either side of PG&E gas facilities and 10 feet above the regulator vent opening as shown in Figure 2-22, “Clearance Requirements for an Existing Electric Meter/Panel,” on Page 2-38. If any portion of the existing electric panel resides within this area, the electric panel must be relocated outside all clearance areas shown in Figure 2-22 before the panel is replaced and any conduit connection is made.

  3. Additional electric equipment/devices must not be installed within the clearance areas shown in Figure 2-22.

2022 – 2023 2-36

2.4.2. (continued)

Section 2, Gas Service

Exception: A continuous metallic conduit with no couplings or joints can run completely through and terminate/connect outside of the 36−inch radial clearance from the gas regulator vent opening.

  1. All minimum clear and level working space requirements for the electric meter panel and gas meter set must be met.

2-37 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

(continued)

10’ Min.
New
Electric
Device
ÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ


Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò

Existing
Electric
Panel
and
Meter
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ

Õ
Õ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ
10’ Min.
New
Electric
Device
ÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ


Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò

Existing
Electric
Panel
and
Meter
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ

Õ
Õ
ÕÕÕÕ
10’ Min.
New
Electric
Device
ÕÕÕÕ
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
36” Min.
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
12” Min
12” MinÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ

36” Min.
36” Min.
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
12” Min
12” MinÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ

36” Min.
36” Min.
Grade



ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ

L EGEND

No Existing Electric Meter/Panel and No New Electric Devices (See Notes 1 and 2)

Fittings, Couplings, or Joints No Electrical, No Conduit, No

Meter/Panel, and No New Grounding Wires or Clamps

ÕÕÕÕ Panel Upgrades and Like-for-Like Panel

ÒÒÒ
r Vent Opening
ÒÒÒ
onduit Without
s, Couplings, or Joints
t Connection to Panel
ÕÕÕ No New Electric Devices.
ÕÕÕ Panel Upgrades and Like
ÒÒ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ

Replacements are Allowed.

Figure 2-22 Clearance Requirements for an Existing Electric Meter/Panel

Notes in Reference to Figure 2-22:

  1. This includes electric meters and panels in cabinets.

  2. Junction boxes or other electrical enclosures must not be installed to replace the existing electric meter panel.

2022 – 2023 2-38

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

F. Multimeter Manifolds

Specific requirements in this subsection apply to particular types of premises (e.g., multifamily, apartment, and commercial buildings) where multiple meters are installed at a single location using the manifold configuration. These manifold connection requirements are additions to the meter-set requirements for single gas meter sets.

PG&E limits gas meter manifold configurations to one-tier or two-tier meter manifolds not exceeding 60 inches high. These manifolds are measured from the final, level, standing surface to the top of the manifold.

N OTE : Applicants must provide their PG&E project coordinator with a written justification for approval when requesting a three-tiered manifold or a manifold greater than 60 inches high.

PG&E will assess the applicant’s site and conditions for gas service and metering installations before approving an installation site. For manifolds requiring support brackets, the applicant must provide a wall surface with adequate structural support to use ¼‐inch x 1½-inch lag screws to secure all brackets.

Refer to Gas Design Standard J-15, located in Appendix C, for additional information.

2-39 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

F ee Note 3 Houseline A e A
F A A
F A A A
F F A A A A A
F PG&E
SmartMete
PG&E
SmartMete
F
F A A A
A A A A

Finished Grade

Two-Tier Manifolds

Figure 2-23 Dimensions for Typical, Residential, Multimeter Installations

Notes in reference to Figure 2-23

  1. The applicant’s houselines must be stubbed out 4 inches to 6 inches from the finished wall at the locations shown.

  2. The applicant must clearly mark each houseline . See Subsection 2.4.2.G.I., “Meter-Set Requirements for Marking Houselines,” on Page 2-47.

  3. Gas meter manifolds may be built in a right-to-left configuration (reverse) when approved in advance.

  4. Applicants must not install any electrical devices or equipment, including wires, cables, metering enclosures, telecommunication enclosures, bond wires, clamps, or ground rods within 36 inches horizontally from the riser and 12 inches from the farthest edge of PG&E facilities and 10 feet above the regulator vent.

  5. Applicants may need to install the riser farther away from the building to accommodate the manifold installation. Consult your local project coordinator for site-specific details.

2022 – 2023 2-40

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

Table 2-2 Dimensions to Figure 2-23

Dimension Installation Comments
A 12” for residential only, 15” for cabinet
installations only, 20” for all commercial up to
1,000 class meters
PG&E provides custom-design dimensions
for mixed meter sizes and for meters larger
than 1,000 class meters.
B 26” (typical) for unenclosed, 32” minimum for
cabinet installations
C 24” residential (unenclosed and cabinet),
36” commercial
Contact your local project coordinator for
two-tier commercial manifolds.
D 6” minimum to inside building corner,
12” minimum to outside building corner,
12” minimum to openings into the building
and sources of ignition (see Note 4)
From farthest edge of PG&E equipment.
E 30” minimum to inside or outside corner
of building, 36” minimum to openings into the
building and sources of ignition (see Note 4)
PG&E may approve Dimension E to be
reduced on a case-by-case basis. For
example, in nonpedestrian traffic areas
and on select PG&E equipment.
F 24” (typically) for residential, 36” (typically) for
400 to 1,000 class meter, commercial
PG&E provides custom-design dimensions
for mixed meter sizes and for meters larger
than 1,000 class meters.

G. Requirements for Alcoves, Enclosures, Gas-Meter Cabinets, Closets, and Gas-Meter Rooms

1. Alcoves

An alcove is an exterior space that is recessed into a building or wall. The alcove’s width can vary depending on the meter set. PG&E provides final dimensions after confirming the meter size. Please consult your local project coordinator for guidance.

For single-diaphragm meters, applicants must use the area dimensions shaded in Figure 2-14 on Page 2-27 and Figure 2-15 on Page 2-28 (depth not to exceed 36 inches).

For single-rotary meters, use the area dimensions shaded in Figure 2-16 on Page 2-29, Figure 2-17 on Page 2-30, and Figure 2-18 on Page 2-31 (do not exceed 36 inches deep and 8 feet high).

A manifold located in an alcove may require a custom design depending on the configuration.

Gates are not a preferred option and will be approved only on a case-by-case basis. If a gate is proposed in front of the alcove, it must have a minimum 50% open area.

The alcove must not have openings into the building, sources of ignition, or other facilities (e.g., wiring, water downspouts, or foreign pipes).

Contact your local PG&E project coordinator for more information.

2-41 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

2. Enclosures

Gas-Meter Set Enclosures

a. Typical Enclosure Details

Figure 2-24 Typical Detached Enclosure

Double Gate or

8’ 0” Minimum Headroom Required

Figure 2-25 Typical Enclosure Dimensions

Notes in reference to Figure 2-24 and Figure 2-25.

  1. The enclosure’s length and width will vary depending on the meter set. Contact your local PG&E project coordinators for more information.

  2. Approved enclosure wall materials include, but are not limited to, concrete block, wood, perforated or expanded metal, or metal chain−link fencing.

  3. PG&E determines if the enclosure requires a wire mesh cover. If a mesh cover is required, it must have a minimum 50% open area.

  4. All distances provided in Figure 2-25 are minimums. After PG&E confirms the meter size, final dimensions will be provided.

  5. Trucks must be able to access large meter installations. Please contact your local PG&E project coordinator before designing locations for gas meters.

  6. Additional meter protection may be required. Protection posts can be incorporated into an enclosure design.

2022 – 2023 2-42

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

b. Special Requirements for Gas Meters Serving Schools or Other Buildings Where Children Congregate

The following requirements apply to schools or other buildings where children congregate.

        - Locate the gas meter enclosure adjacent to the property line

or away from buildings in a wire cage enclosure or other suitable protective enclosure.

        - PG&E requires an overhead wire cover to prevent any

debris or other material from falling inside the enclosure. The applicant must ensure that PG&E is able to secure the enclosure with a PG&E lock.

        - It is the applicant’s responsibility to provide the enclosure

and concrete pad for the gas meter set. PG&E must approve the final design and size of the enclosure.

3. General Requirements for Meter Cabinets

Gas cabinets are not preferred and require PG&E’s approval in advance of construction. Applicants must ensure that all vent openings, louvers, and/or viewing windows are installed correctly. Also, applicants must ensure that the cabinets open to the outside and are readily accessible to PG&E at all times.

When approved by PG&E, the gas meter size represented in Figure 2-14, “Typical Residential Gas Meter Connection,” located on Page 2-28, can be installed in a cabinet.

On a case-by-case basis, PG&E may allow an applicant to install a gas meter the size of the one illustrated in Figure 2-15, “Typical Gas Meter Connection for 400 to 1,000 Class Meter,” located on Page 2-29, in a cabinet.

A gas estimator must provide the cabinet spacing and size requirements, which then must be approved by a Field Service Manager.

a. Specific Requirements for a Single Gas Meter Cabinet

PG&E determines the minimum cabinet size allowed for an

applicant’s specific type of meter and provide the applicant with those dimensions. PG&E bases cabinet requirements not only on the size of the meter currently required, but also on the location and accessibility of the meter. See Gas Design Standard K-51, located in Appendix C, when determining the specifications for single gas meter cabinets.

2-43 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

zt

See Figure 5-2 on Page 5-15

b. Specifications for a Recessed, Individual Meter Cabinet

Window
Window
Window
Window

Electrical Panel

Gas Meter
PG&E
SmartMeter
CL
Gas Meter
PG&E
SmartMeter
PG&E
SmartMeter
PG&E
SmartMeter
PG&E
SmartMeter

Offset Louvers

Front View Side View

Figure 2-26 Recessed, Individual Meter Cabinet for Gas and Electric Meter Installations

Notes in reference to Figure 2-26.

18”−36” Max.

4” Min.−6” Max. See Note 4

2” x 6” Wood Insert

  1. Meter cabinets are not a preferred method of installation. Meter cabinets, with the exception of Class 250 meter installations, require approval from the local Field Services Manager before construction begins. When approved, they must comply with the requirements in this section.

  2. Regulators will be installed on the outside of the cabinet. Additional space is required for larger regulators and dual-head regulators. The local Field Services Manager may approve the regulators to be installed in a cabinet. Regulators installed in a cabinet require the vents to be piped out as described in Gas Design Standard H-93, “Piping–Details: Regulator Vent Lines–Above Ground.”

  3. See Subsection 2.5.1., “Service Delivery Point for the Gas Supply,” on Page 2-50. The houseline at the service delivery point also must be reinforced so that it can provide support for the meter set piping. The pipe must be rigid, a minimum of 3/4 inch, and have male National Pipe Thread (NPT) threads.

  4. The houseline must extend a minimum of 4 inches and a maximum of 6 inches into the gas meter cabinet measured from the finished wall. The houseline must be 26 inches above the bottom of the

meter cabinet.

° 5. Applicants must provide louvered, non-metallic doors. Each door must open at least 90 .

  1. The gas meter cabinet must have a gas-tight seal and be vapor proof from the building. Construction material and sealing requirements for the cabinet are described in Gas Design Standard K-51, located in Appendix C, and also apply to Figure 2-26.

Notes continued on the next page

2022 – 2023 2-44

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

Notes in reference to Figure 2-26 (continued).

  1. Applicants must ensure that gas meters installed in cabinets comply with the requirements of the inspection authority having jurisdiction.

  2. Do not place electric meter panels, equipment or devices, conduit or wiring, enclosures or electrical connections ; water services, faucets, downspouts, or other wet utilities within 36 inches of the gas riser including for services such as cable television or telecommunications.

Requirements for multiple, residential, gas meter cabinets are shown in Figure 2-27, “Cabinet Dimensions for Multiple, Residential Gas Meters,” and include dimensions and details.

Gas meter manifolds may be built in a right-to-left (i.e., reverse) configuration when approved in advance.

Min. Max. 30” 15” 15” 15” 30” 15” 15” 15”
Max.
2”
Max.
2”
Max.
2”
Max.
2”

Gas Meter Meter Meter Meter 1 2 3 4

Note: All numbers represent inside dimensions.

To

Figure 2-27 Cabinet Dimensions for Multiple, Residential Gas Meters

4. Gas-Meter Closets

Gas meter closets will be furnished and installed by the applicant and have a depth of 18 inches minimum and 36 inches maximum without exception. Doors must be non-metallic and fully louvered. Doors must open at least 90° and have a clear opening height of 6 feet, 8 inches tall.

The inside of the closet must be made of nonflammable material and have a minimum 1-hour fire rating. All joints and penetrations must be sealed to prevent gas from migrating into the structure.

Foreign pipes are not allowed inside the closet with the exception of fire sprinkler heads. Lighting, wiring, conduits, junction boxes, or inspection panels of any kind are not allowed inside the closet. Bonding or grounding wires on the customer’s houselines are not allowed inside the closet.

The ceiling must have a 1:12 slope. The ceiling must slope up toward the door frame with a maximum 6 inches measured from the door opening to the finished ceiling. The inside width of the closet cannot exceed 8 inches beyond either side of the door frame.

2-45 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

Refer to Figure 2-23 on Page 2-40 for manifold spacing to determine the size of closet required for the desired number of meters. The meters and manifold must fit within the opening of the closet doors with the exception of the tie-in piece from the outside riser. The riser and regulator will be installed outside of the closet.

The applicant provides a penetration through the wall into the closet. The pipe penetration from outside to inside must not conceal the pipe. It must be clearly visible for inspection. Contact your local project coordinator for the exact size and location of the required penetration.

The doors must have signs identifying “Gas Meters.” If the doors have locks, the applicant must install a lock box, provided by PG&E, near the closet in a location that is acceptable to PG&E and contains the access key provided by the applicant.

The closet cannot be used for storage of any kind. Only PG&E gas meters and metering appurtenances are allowed inside the closet.

5. Specific Requirements for Gas Meter Rooms

Refer to Gas Design Standard J-16, located in Appendix C, for specific requirements about gas meter rooms.

H. Meter Protection Requirements

Applicants must protect meter sets in locations that are subject to damage from vehicular traffic. PG&E determines when such protection is required. Refer to Gas Design Standard J-95, located in Appendix C.

Applicants must protect all gas meter sets located in the following areas.

  1. Within 3 feet of:
  • Single-family, residential driveways or parking areas (including garage areas)

        - Commercial refuse container locations
    
        - Thoroughfares
    
        - Paved areas with curbs
    
  1. Within 8 feet of:

       - Multifamily, commercial, or industrial driveways or parking
    

areas (see the “Exception” below)

      - Loading docks

      - Freight-handling areas

      - Thoroughfares

      - Paved areas without curbs

2022 – 2023 2-46

2.4.2. (continued)

Section 2, Gas Service

E XCEPTION : Physical protection is not required for meter sets located within 8 feet of multifamily, commercial, or industrial driveways or parking areas if the meter set is located 3 feet behind a barrier that is adjacent to the area and if PG&E finds the barrier to be acceptable.

  1. Within an area that has, in PG&E’s judgement, an unusually high risk of vehicular damage, the applicant must install a system of barrier posts that meet PG&E’s specifications. Consult your local project coordinator for specific requirements.

I. Meter-Set Requirements for Marking Houselines

Applicants must ensure that the following rules for marking houselines are followed.

  1. Establish service at one Service Delivery Point, through one meter, and at one voltage class or pressure.

  2. PG&E requires that lines are marked by attaching an embossed, durable, metal or plastic tag to each houseline. PG&E must approve of the tag.

  3. Markings must be legible and specific.

  4. Marking information must include an authorized apartment or street number and a use or location designation.

  5. The houseline must be permanently, clearly, and prominently marked at the point of the service connection (i.e., service delivery point).

N OTE : PG&E will not install meters unless the permanent address, the location, or, when applicable, the area being served is marked at each meter location.

  1. When gas meters are installed in interior locations or rooms, the words “Gas Meters” must be placed on the room or location access doors to allow PG&E employees to find the meters easily.

J. Meter Sets Requiring Electric Circuits for Communication

PG&E prefers to install, own, and maintain cellular equipment with a customer-provided, dedicated, electrical circuit for gas meter sets with electronic equipment that require communication. When applicants have an estimated average use of 10,000 therms per month or more, certain rate schedules, Automated Meter Reading (AMR), noncore accounts, or other nonstandard gas metering conditions, then the customer must provide an electrical circuit.

2-47 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.4.2. (continued)

When installing customer-provided, dedicated electrical circuits with no less than 15 amp and 120 volt alternating current (Vac) to a lockable disconnect switch within 3 feet of a gas meter that meets or exceeds National Electric Code (NEC) Class I, Division 2, Group D hazardous area requirements, all above-ground wiring must be placed in threaded, rigid-steel or intermediate-steel conduit with an above-ground riser conduit seal to prevent gas from migrating to areas classified as nonhazardous.

PG&E will inform the customer that if conditions change in the future, a phone line may be required. If cell service is not available or acceptable to PG&E, the applicant may be required to install, own, and maintain a nominal, 1-inch diameter conduit and a telephone cable to within 3 feet of the meter.

K. Gas Pulse Metering

Refer to Gas Standard J-65.1, “Volume Pulse Output Connection for Gas Meters,” located in Appendix C, for specific requirements about gas pulse metering.

L. Additional Meter-Set Requirements–SmartMeterModule Location Requirements

PG&E’s SmartMeter Advanced Meter Reading system uses radio frequency (RF) technology to transmit gas meter reads automatically. This allows PG&E’s customers to monitor their daily energy use.

SmartMeter customers have additional location requirements specific to the meters necessary for PG&E to operate its SmartMeter Advanced Meter Reading system. Applicants must be aware of the following requirements to ensure that the SmartMeter Advanced Meter Reading system can operate properly.

  1. Do not locate the meters in any room, cabinet, enclosure, or configuration that blocks or interferes with the radio frequency signal transmissions. An example of such a prohibited enclosure is a metallic cabinet.

  2. Do not locate the meters in close proximity to (i.e., 6 inches or less) any metallic object that could block or interfere with the radio frequency signal transmission.

  3. Do not install gas meters within 5 feet of building walls and ceilings if they are made from a significant amount of metal or metal reinforcements.

2022 – 2023 2-48

2.4.2. (continued)

Section 2, Gas Service

  1. Most SmartMeter gas modules are installed directly on a gas meter. If a gas meter is installed in a cabinet, meter room, below grade, basement garage, or other location where communication problems may exist, PG&E may install a module in a remote location away from the gas meter to ensure proper radio frequency transmissions. The equipment may be installed on nearby gas piping, a customer-owned building wall/ceiling, or an outside location. The equipment may need to be attached to the structure or wall to route the wiring.

M. SmartMeter Gas Network Utility Closet Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms

This section provides SmartMeter infrastructure installation and construction requirements for customers designing indoor gas meter rooms. It addresses below-grade and multiple above-grade meter room installations such as those that may exist in urban, high-rise environments to ensure PG&E’s SmartMeter RF network is established for these customers. These provisions are required for commercial and/or residential, with single or multiple indoor meter rooms to ensure SmartMeter gas network communication access and performance.

A separate SmartMeter gas network utility closet must be constructed for each indoor meter room directly adjacent (with a common or shared wall) to the natural gas meter room. In addition, two 1-1/2 inch conduits would be required; one from the SmartMeter gas network utility closet to the outside of the building and one from the SmartMeter gas network utility closet to the indoor gas meter room. See the requirements listed in Gas Design Standard J-16, located in Appendix C,

2.5. Applicant-Owned and Installed Gas Service Piping (e.g., Houseline), Valves, and Automatic Shut-Off Devices

The applicant is responsible for maintaining the applicant-installed and owned gas service piping, valves, automatic shut-off devices (e.g., earthquake valves), or other piping components on any premises or in any building. These applicant-owned components must be installed downstream of (i.e., after) the gas supply service delivery point. PG&E reserves the right to suspend service until applicant-owned equipment is removed from PG&E meter-set assemblies.

Applicants must ensure that after their equipment is installed, the equipment does not obstruct the operation or serviceability of PG&E’s piping, metering, and pressure-regulating equipment.

The houseline at the service delivery point typically is located after the PG&E service tee for residential services. Reinforce the houseline so that it provides support for the meter-set piping. For residential service, the houseline stub-out must be a minimum of 3/4-inch steel rigid pipe with male NPT threads. Larger gas loads or commercial meter sets may require a flanged connection.

2-49 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.5.1. Service Delivery Point for the Gas Supply

The service delivery point for the gas supply is the point where PG&E’s facilities connect to the applicant’s house pipe (i.e., houseline). Figure 2-1 on Page 2-6 illustrates a typical service delivery point.

For residential and small commercial meter sets, the service delivery point is the point where the male threads of the applicant’s houseline connect to the female threads of PG&E’s gas service tee fitting.

Some commercial installations and industrial installations do not have service tees installed. For these installations, the gas supply service delivery point is located after the gas meter, gas pressure regulator, or regulation equipment. Specifically, it is the point where the gas service bypass reconnects with the gas service outlet piping.

Typically, the gas supply service delivery point is either the first weld or fitting after the PG&E-installed bypass valve downstream of (i.e., after) the gas meter. See Subsection A in Figure 2-16 through Figure 2-18 on Page 2-30 through Page 2-32.

PG&E does not allow applicants to access the pipe fitting’s plug. Only PG&E employees are authorized to access the plug when they perform service and maintenance.

Applicants must not connect or install non-PG&E components to any portion of the PG&E gas meter set upstream of (i.e., before) the service delivery point.

Applicants must provide a securely supported gas houseline connection to PG&E piping either by bracing or by reinforcing the houselines that extend from finished walls. Do not connect flexible houseline directly to PG&E piping. (Exceptions include subsidence areas, mobile home parks, and manufactured homes as described in Gas Design Standard J-12.4, “Mobile Home/Manufactured Home Meter Set Installation,” and Gas Design Standard J-58.)

When applicants require a gas supply for multiple gas meter installations that are supplied by a manifold, PG&E will install gas service tees downstream of (i.e., after) each gas meter. PG&E will install these service tees to each location where the utility gas service pipe connects to the applicant’s houseline at the service tee.

2022 – 2023 2-50

Section 2, Gas Service

2.5.1. (continued)

Gas Regulator

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ

Front View

Threaded Pipe Plug (For PG&E Use Only)

Gas Flow

Delivery Point

SM Module

Front View

Gas Flow

Delivery Point

Side View

Figure 2-28 Typical Residential Installations [Ô]

Side View

2.5.2. Applicant-Owned Riser and Pipe

PG&E recommends that applicants use the gas-riser configuration shown in Figure 2-29, “Recommended, Applicant-Owned Riser and Pipe,” on Page 2-52, when they install above-ground gas pipe that transitions to underground gas pipe. The preferred riser for most applications is a noncorrodable, prefabricated riser.

Also, PG&E recommends that applicants contact the local authority having jurisdiction before installing ferrous gas pipe and ask for the requirements to protect the underground pipe from corrosion.

2-51 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

2.5.2. (continued)

A. Applicants are encouraged to have all buried gas houseline pipe inspected on a regular schedule. Applicants should contact locally licensed plumbing contractors if they need assistance in locating, inspecting, or repairing their buried gas service pipe or other piping equipment.

B. Applicants must ensure that all required cathodic protection is in place and documented as illustrated in Figure 2-29 below.

C. Applicants must ensure that their facilities are designed and installed to the requirements of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction. PG&E recommends using the Uniform Plumbing Code, which requires the following protective measures.

  1. Apply a coating and cathodic protection to steel pipelines.

  2. Repair any coating that is damaged during installation.

  3. Install copper tracer wire with nonmetallic gas pipe.

  4. Provide a minimum 18-inch cover for plastic yard pipe used to carry gas.

Downstream From PG&E’s Meter and Service Delivery Poi
Use Isolation Fitting
Coated Steel Riser
6”
Sleeve Through Pavement (See Note 2)
Downstream From PG&E’s Meter and Service Delivery Poi
Coated Steel Riser
Use Isolation Fitting
Sleeve Through Pavement (See Note 2)
6”
Downstream From PG&E’s Meter and Service Delivery Poi
Coated Steel Riser
Use Isolation Fitting
Sleeve Through Pavement (See Note 2)
6”
Thermite Weld or
Pipe Clamp
(Grounding Clamp)
Plastic Yard
(Applicant
Transition F
1-Pound Zinc Anode
Fabricated Riser
(Approximate 6” Radius)
Minimum Cover Requi
24”
36”
Well-Compacted Soil
Thermite Weld or
Pipe Clamp
(Grounding Clamp)
Minimum Cover Requi
Well-Compacted Soil
Thermite Weld or
Pipe Clamp
(Grounding Clamp)
Minimum Cover Requi
Thermite Weld or
Pipe Clamp
(Grounding Clamp)
Minimum Cover Requi
Thermite Weld or
Pipe Clamp
(Grounding Clamp)
Minimum Cover Requi
Thermite Weld or
Pipe Clamp
(Grounding Clamp)
Plastic Yard
(Applicant
Transition F
1-Pound Zinc Anode
Fabricated Riser
(Approximate 6” Radius)
Minimum Cover Requi
24”
36”
Well-Compacted Soil
Thermite Weld or
Pipe Clamp
(Grounding Clamp)
Minimum Cover Requi
Well-Compacted Soil
Thermite Weld or
Pipe Clamp
(Grounding Clamp)
Minimum Cover Requi

Figure 2-29 Recommended, Applicant-Owned Houseline Riser and Pipe

Notes in reference to Figure 2-29.

  1. Always maintain a minimum distance of 36 inches between the vertical centerline of the riser and the transition fitting.

  2. If the area around the gas riser is going to be paved, install a minimum 3-inch sleeve around the riser.

  3. Comply with city regulations when installing a plastic-to-steel riser (as shown) or a noncorrodable, prefabricated riser on the applicant’s houseline.

2022 – 2023 2-52

Section 2, Gas Service

2.5.3. Electrically Bonding and Grounding Gas Pipe

A. Do not install electrical devices or equipment, wires, cables, bonding or grounding wires, clamps, or ground rods around the gas meter set as shown in Figure 2-19 on Page 2-33 and Figure 2-23 on Page 2-40.

B. Do not use PG&E’s gas service piping, gas risers, or meter facilities for electric bonding or grounding that allows the gas meter, piping, or other gas facilities to become current-carrying conductors.

C. Do not allow customer houseline to be electrically bonded within meter enclosures, cabinets, or meter rooms.

2.5.4. Applicant-Owned Protective Equipment

PG&E’s gas metering equipment can be affected adversely when an applicant’s equipment causes:

 - Pulsations in the gas flow

 - Sudden changes in flow rate

 - A backflow condition

Applicants must install, at their expense, any equipment necessary to mitigate or eliminate these detrimental effects. PG&E must review and approve these installations before initiating gas service.

Applicants must add any necessary protective equipment when their operations change and those changes could create any of the three adverse conditions described in the bulleted list above.

PG&E may terminate service and refuse to restore that service to any applicant who continues to operate without the proper protective equipment after receiving notification from PG&E.

Applicants are responsible for damages made to PG&E equipment because they did not install the proper protective equipment.

2-53 2022 – 2023

Section 2, Gas Service

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 2-54

SECTION 3 ELECTRIC SERVICE: UNDERGROUND

Section 3 Electric Service: Underground

3.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides information to help applicants, as well as their engineers and contractors, select acceptable locations and types of terminations for underground services when connecting to Pacific Gas and Electric Company’s (PG&E’s/Company’s) overhead or underground electric distribution system.

N OTE : For technical information on primary services, refer to Numbered

Document 094676, “Primary Electric Service Requirements,” and for temporary or permanent service to a post or pedestal, refer to the applicable documents in Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”

3.2. General Information

PG&E has the right to access Company facilities located on an applicant’s premises at any time, for any purpose connected with furnishing gas and/or electric service. Applicants must not access PG&E facilities or enclosures. Only qualified PG&E employees will connect service lateral conductors to (or disconnect them from) PG&E’s energized distribution system. This includes installing or removing metering facilities or any other work related to PG&E’s facilities or systems.

3.2.1. Safety Reminder

WARNING

T O AVOID POTENTIAL ACCIDENTS, DO NOT BEGIN TO EXCAVATE BEFORE

IDENTIFYING UNDERGROUND FACILITIES.

C AUTION

Flame resistant (FR) clothing is required while working on, working near, or observing others working on any PG&E facility.

State law requires applicants to contact Underground Service Alert (USA) by dialing 811 at least 2 working days before excavation (weekends and holidays excluded). Ensure that you call USA when planning underground work, before digging begins, to allow adequate time for USA to determine the location of underground gas and electric lines or equipment. The potential for an accident exists if applicants fail to request USA to identify underground utility facilities before they begin excavating .

3-1 2022 – 2023

USA

Dig Safely

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.2.1. (continued)

First, the applicant must mark the excavation area with white paint. Then, USA arranges for participating companies to mark the locations of their underground facilities at the jobsite. This is a free service. See the USA color-code identifiers in Section 1, “General,” Table 1-1, “USA Color Coding,” on Page 1-1, and also on the back of this manual.

s for participating companies to mark the locations of their underground facilities at the jobsite. This is a free service. See the USA color-code identifiers in Section 1, “General,” Table 1-1, “USA Color Coding,” on Page 1-1, and also on the back of this manual.

Additional information is available at www.pge.com/digsafely and about USA services at the USA North website http://www.usanorth.org. USA is a locating service for excavation only. Do not use USA for design purposes.

3.2.2. Establishing Underground Electric Service Responsibilities

Applicants are responsible for constructing, maintaining, and protecting specific portions of underground electric services during construction of their project. The following subsections describe those responsibilities and explain PG&E’s responsibilities during the construction process.

A. Applicants are responsible for obtaining all required permits and easements . This includes local building permits, environmental permits, encroachment permits, public utility easements, and any other permits and land rights that may be required based on the specific location of the trenching/excavation activities.

B. Applicants must ensure that the following construction activities, which may be required to establish underground service, are performed according to PG&E’s standards and specifications, PG&E-approved construction drawings and inspection requirements, and any other permit-specified requirements. This includes construction activities conducted on private property, in the franchise area, or in other rights-of-way areas. Construction activities include:

    - Trenching

    - Excavation

    - Backfill

    - Compaction

    - Underground conduit (conduit, bends, couplings, end bells, cable

protectors)

    - Service riser conduit and connector (connects underground conduit

to meter panel or termination enclosure)

    - Substructures (boxes and pads)

    - Paving (cut, patch, and final repair)

C. Applicants must provide satisfactory termination facilities on or within the structures being served. (In this manual, see Sections 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11, as applicable, based on your project type, amperage, and voltage.) The locations for all transformers and meters, as well as the sizes, types, and quantities of conduit, are subject to PG&E’s specifications and approval.

2022 – 2023 3-2

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.2.2. (continued)

D. A pplicants must not install service conduit, meter, and service equipment in prohibited locations. These include, but are not limited to, outdoor areas less than 300 feet away from biowaste, toxic, corrosive, or similar type of unsafe substances that could be released into the air, are in the ground soil, located in open air wet ponds, or stored in a dry location. See Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” Subsection 5.3.2.,

“ ” Prohibited Meter and Service Equipment Locations, on Page 5-7.

E. Applicants are responsible for owning and maintaining conduit and substructures on private property; however, they must convey ownership of any portion in a public (i.e., franchise) area or right-of-way, if applicable, to PG&E.

F. Applicants are responsible for providing, installing, and maintaining any structures that are required to protect service facilities from damage.

G. If projects require Horizontal Direction Drilling (HDD), applicants or their contractors must contact PG&E before work begins. PG&E Manual TD-4135M, Horizontal Directional Drilling Manual, as well as PG&E Procedure TD-4632P-01, “Gas and Electric Operations−Cross Bore Prevention and Mitigation,” both outline the construction processes that applicants must follow to be in compliance.

If an applicant does not contact PG&E in advance of construction and does not follow the HDD processes identified in the Company documents described above, the applicant will fail the HDD installation inspection. It is then the applicant’s responsibility to correct issues noted during the inspection before PG&E accepts ownership of the HDD project.

When applicants are responsible for this trenchless construction, they must take steps to prevent, inspect, identify, report, and address any cross bores that are created during the HDD process.

All electric and gas construction work performed either by or for PG&E is subject to these rules, including PG&E gas-for-electric work and other types of applicant-installed work. Find additional information about cross bores at the Sewer Cleaning website. See http://www.pge.com/en/safety/gaselectricsafety/sewercleaningsafety/index.page).

.

H. PG&E is responsible for and required to perform any and all tie-in work to existing distribution and/or energized facilities.

3-3 2022 – 2023

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.2.2. (continued)

I. PG&E is responsible for furnishing, installing, owning, and maintaining the following service facilities, as applicable.

    - Cable/conductors to supply power

    - Transformer

    - Meter(s) and metering transformers, if required

    - Other equipment (e.g., switches)

    - Riser materials (to connect underground service to overhead facilities)

For additional details and options for performing this work, refer to Electric Rule 15 , “Distribution Line Extensions,” and Electric Rule 16, “Service Extensions,” found online at https://www.pge.com/tariffs/index.page.

Splice Box, Transformer, or Pole (See Note 5)

(See Note 5)

Walls on which underground electric service - termination and meter facilities are permitted.

Outside building walls.

Figure 3-1 Locations of Underground Electric Service-Termination and Meter Facilities

Notes in reference to Figure 3-1.

  1. If practical, attach the underground electric service-termination facility and the meter to the wall at a preferred location. Locate the facilities as close to PG&E’s service facilities as possible to avoid future operation and maintenance restrictions.

  2. PG&E must approve all service locations before they are constructed.

  3. Applicants must locate the service so that the meter can be read and serviced without entering a fenced or enclosed location, when possible.

  4. Permitted locations for electric service-termination and meter facilities are from Point A.

  5. Permitted locations for electric service-termination and meter facilities are from Point B.

2022 – 2023 3-4

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.2.3. Installing Ground Rods

Applicants or their contractors are required to install ground rods when PG&E specifically requires them as part of a substructure installation (e.g., when constructing a transformer pad). Find PG&E-approved ground rods and clamps in Numbered Document 013109, “Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps,” included in Appendix C.

3.2.4. Installing Equipment Pads

Applicants or their contractors must construct and install equipment pads, as required, for underground electric equipment. When constructing a concrete pad for a transformer, use Numbered Document 045292, “Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style Pad-Mounted Transformers.” If installing a box pad for a transformer, use Numbered Document 064309, “Box-Pad for Pad-Mounted Transformers.” Both engineering documents are listed Appendix C.

For projects that require equipment pads other than for transformers (e.g., PMH switches), the project coordinator or PG&E inspector provide these drawings at the pre-construction meeting if the installation is included in the PG&E-approved design.

Underground electric equipment has required working space clearances in front of and all around the equipment. Applicants must ensure the minimum clearances are met. See Numbered Document 051122, “Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment,” located in Appendix C.

Construct customer-owned, floor-standing switchboard pads (0–600 volts) according to their applications. Figure 3-2, “Service Conduit Layout–Top View,” on Page 3-6, and the associated “Notes,” provide the placement and arrangement for service conduits inside the utility termination section or pull section.

For primary switchboards, refer to the ground rod and conduit requirements in Section 11, “Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services,” Subsection 11.3.S., on Page 11-4, and Figure 11-1, “Primary Switchboard Termination Section Pad Detail,” on Page 11-6.

For additional references to the underground electric documents provided in Appendix C, see Table 3-2, “Electric Underground Documents,” on Page 3-23.

3-5 2022 – 2023

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.2.4. (continued)

Pad-Mounted Service Termination Enclosure

Front

Conduits

Service Conduit Arrangement Detail

Figure 3-2 Service Conduit Layout–Top View

Notes in reference to Figure 3-2.

  1. Group the conduits at the service termination (i.e., pull section) enclosure as shown in the “Service Conduit Arrangement Detail.”

  2. Center the conduits under the cable termination bus or bus stubs.

  3. Conduits should be separated from each other by approximately 1 inch.

  4. Ensure the top of each conduit is 2 inches above the concrete pad or floor of the switchboard.

  5. Permanently install end bell fittings on all conduits.

  6. Temporarily plug or cap all conduits.

  7. Grout conduit windows with nonshrink grout. Do not use asphalt or blacktop to grout windows .

8. For primary service conduit installations, see Section 11, Figure 11−1, “Primary Switchboard

Termination Section Pad Detail.”

3.2.5. Installing Overhead and Underground Service for Two or More Buildings on One Lot

If more than two dwellings or buildings are located on the same lot, applicants must consult their local PG&E project coordinators to determine the acceptable service-termination locations and meter locations before wiring the buildings.

N OTE : See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office and Inspection

Desk Contact Information,” at the front of this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed by area.

2022 – 2023 3-6

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.2.5. (continued)

Typically, PG&E only installs one service lateral to a single building on one premise, or to a single enterprise (with either one or multiple buildings) on one premise. However, PG&E may provide more than one service lateral under the following circumstances:

    - Where it is allowed or required by PG&E’s tariff schedules

    - For PG&E’s convenience

    - Where it is required by ordinance

    - When it is installed as special facilities

3.2.6. Inspecting and Approving Overhead and Underground Services

An applicant must contact the local PG&E project coordinator to arrange for a field representative to inspect and approve the applicant-furnished and installed service equipment, as well as any other mandatory components required for an underground service installation.

3.2.7. Easements for PG&E Facilities

New underground distribution facilities must be designed for installation in a Public Utility Easement (PUE) outside of public streets and roads. PUEs typically only provide the minimum-required land space for the safe and proper installation, operation, and maintenance of the distribution facilities. In some cases, PG&E may require an easement be granted instead of a PUE.

Ensure that PUEs are at least 10 feet wide for primary, secondary, and service cables. Cables should be installed around the centerline of the PUE. If other allowed non-PG&E utilities (e.g., phone, cable) and PG&E facilities (i.e., gas) are installed in the PUE, ensure the minimum clearances between facilities are met. Also, ensure clearances to below- and above-grade foreign structures, buildings, and obstructions outside of the PUE are met.

Services that cross third-party property also require a 10-foot-wide easement. In some instances, the PUE may need to be wider than 10 feet. See Figure 3-3, PG&E Trench and Equipment in PUE – Example,” on Page 3-8.

In locations along the path of the PUE where subsurface enclosures and pad-mounted equipment will be installed, the PUE must be wider to encompass the equipment being installed and to meet the minimum required working space clearances that surround the equipment. See Numbered Document 051122. If the PUE does not provide adequate space for equipment and minimum clearances, an easement granted to PG&E will be required.

Contact your local project coordinator for questions on PUE requirements, determining the best locations for distribution facilities, and high-density housing projects with short setbacks from the property line.

3-7 2022 – 2023

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.2.7. (continued)

Figure 3-3 PG&E Trench and Equipment in PUE − Example

3.2.8. Clearances Around PG&E Facilities

Applicants must not construct structures or install equipment, including, but not limited to, buildings, homes, customer generation equipment, agricultural wells, or expansions of existing structures over, under, to the sides, or between PG&E overhead or underground facilities, either in the public right-of-way or on private property, without maintaining the proper clearances. PG&E facilities are typically covered by an easement, right-of-way, or land-right agreement, and require minimum clearances be maintained around the facilities. When in doubt, contact the PG&E Land Department and your local project coordinator for help in determining the land rights and clearances required for existing PG&E facilities.

3.3. Underground Service Installation Requirements

3.3.1. Installing Services from Underground Distribution Systems

PG&E serves applicants from an underground service if the site or lot is located in an area that is supplied from an existing underground distribution system. PG&E owns, maintains, and installs the underground service lateral conductors. PG&E provides underground-to-underground service along the shortest, most practical, and most available route to the applicant’s service-termination facility.

Typically, the termination facility is on or within the building or structure, as shown in Figure 3-4, “Underground-to-Underground Service Connection,” on Page 3-9. PG&E installs the conductors in conduit.

Substructures include conduit, boxes, and transformer pads. Applicants must follow PG&E’s guidelines and specifications, including those specified in Electric Rule 16 .

PG&E installs the transformer, if required, and connects the service lateral conductors to the applicant’s termination facilities.

2022 – 2023 3-8

3.3.1. (continued)

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

PG&E’s Distribution Box Manhole or Switch Enclosure

Figure 3-4 Underground-to-Underground Service Connection

Notes in reference to Figure 3-4.

  1. When the service delivery voltage is the same as the available, primary distribution voltage (i.e., over 2,000 volts), typically the applicant provides a primary splice box according to PG&E’s requirements.

  2. PG&E supplies a transformer, if required. (The applicant must provide the trench, backfill, and required conduit, pad, and substructures.)

  3. PG&E­owned primary and/or secondary conductors. (The applicant must furnish the substructures.)

3.3.2. Installing Services from Overhead Distribution Systems

PG&E provides service from an underground riser that is installed on an existing pole, as shown in Figure 3-5, “Overhead-to-Underground Service Connection,” on Page 3-10, if any of the following requirements are met.

A. The applicant is located in an area served from an overhead system and the applicant prefers to have the service installed underground.

B. The applicant’s load requires a transformer that is 75 kilovolt amperes (kVA) or larger.

C. A local city or county ordinance requires underground service.

In these cases, in addition to the requirements described in Subsection 3.3.1., “Installing Services From Underground Distribution Systems,” on Page 3-8, the applicant must pay the material costs of both the pole riser facility and any conduit required in the public right-of-way.

3-9 2022 – 2023

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.2. (continued)

Street Property Line
Public Right-of-Way
Public Right-of-Way
Street Property Line
Public Right-of-Way
Street Property Line

See Note 2

Primary Pull or Splice Box May Be Required (Consult PG&E)

Applicant’s Termination Facilities

Building Wall

Figure 3-5 Overhead-to-Underground Service Connection

Notes in reference to Figure 3-5.

  1. When the service delivery voltage is the same as the available, primary distribution voltage (i.e., over 2,000 volts), typically the applicant provides a primary splice box according to PG&E’s requirements.

  2. PG&E’s pole and secondary riser. (The applicant must pay the installed cost of the pole riser and conduit within the right­of­way.)

  3. PG&E­owned service lateral conductors. (The applicant must furnish the conduit, as required.)

2022 – 2023 3-10

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.3. Installing Conduit for Underground Service

N OTE : PG&E will not install its supply cables in conduits that run beneath any building or structure when those conduits do not terminate on or within that building or structure, but are intended to supply another building or structure on the same or another premise.

PG&E requires applicants to install a conduit system for underground service laterals. It is the applicant’s responsibility to provide service conduit as described in the following PG&E documents. Refer to the following numbered documents, located in Appendix C.

 - [Numbered Document 038193, “Minimum Requirements for the Design](https://www.pge.com/pge_global/common/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/038193.pdf)

and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable”

 - [Numbered Document 062288, “Underground Conduits”](https://www.pge.com/pge_global/common/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/062288.pdf)

 - [Numbered Document 063927, “Methods and Requirements for](https://www.pge.com/pge_global/common/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/063927.pdf)

Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0–600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities”

/common/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/063927.pdf) Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0–600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities”

 - [Numbered Document 063928, “Methods and Requirements for](https://www.pge.com/pge_global/common/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/063928.pdf)

Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0–600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities”

Applicants must ensure that conduit is not installed in a trench at a depth greater than 60 inches. If large utility pipes or drains are obstructing the service path, the trench may be as deep as 10 feet to traverse under the obstructions and then transition back to the proper trench depth.

Conduit runs must have a polyester pull-tape (Code 560154) to initiate the cable pulling. The pull-tape must be attached securely either to conduit plugs or caps. For spare conduits that will be vacant for 30 days or longer, install detectable pull-tape (Code 602679) so the spare conduit can be identified during mark and locate field work.

Applicants must prove that the entire conduit system is free of dirt, rocks, or other obstructions that could prevent, hinder, or harm installing the electric conductors. Applicants must use a PG&E-approved mandrel to prove the conduit system. See Subsection 3.5., “Mandrels,” on Page 3-20, for details. A PG&E inspector must approve the equipment and the method, and observe the work being performed to prove the service conduit system’s readiness.

Applicants can either choose to perform the underground electric service conduit installation or request PG&E to do the work. Either way, applicants must provide the service riser conduit that extends from the conduit bend out of the ground and into the electric meter panel or service termination enclosure. The service riser conduit must be vertically straight and cannot contain any couplings, offsets, or bends.

3-11 2022 – 2023

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.3. (continued)

Applicants must furnish and install either conduit caps or plugs on the ends of all conduits. In addition, at locations where the cable insulation may be damaged (e.g., transformer pads or switchboard pull sections), applicants are required to install cable protection at all of the conduit ends. Applicants should contact their local PG&E project coordinator for specific requirements. Also see Numbered Document 038193, “Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable,” located in Appendix C.

Applicants must be aware that underground conduits, enclosures, and substructures must not be installed in the ground or in buildings foundations before PG&E issues an approved design for the installation. Unapproved installations are considered “at risk” and the applicant assumes the risk for any work performed without requesting PG&E’s advanced approval. PG&E can charge the applicant if it is necessary to make changes to unapproved work.

PG&E inspectors, at their discretion, can deny or allow at-risk installations. Inspectors also can require pot holing in the foundation and ground or require other inspection methods needed to determine if installation meet requirements.

When an applicant designs and constructs a PG&E-approved electric room inside of a building, an outside wall must be used as one of the walls of the electric room. The conduits passing through or under the applicant’s building foundation or slab must not extend past the outside wall into the room by more than 20 feet and must terminate inside the electrical room.

Refer to Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” Subsection 5.3.4., “Electric Meter and Service Termination Equipment Rooms,” on Page 5-16, and Figure 5-1, “Allowable Locations for Electric Service and Meter Rooms,” on Page 5-11.

3.3.3.1. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Couplings

When new galvanized rigid steel (GRS) conduit is used as riser conduit transitioning from the underground service conduit up to the electric meter panel, the following requirements apply.

    - The top end of the riser (the end that is inside the meter panel) must

be threaded and requires a screw-on lock nut.

    - A cable protector is required.

    - Do not use set screw couplings or lock nuts on new installations.

The following exceptions apply for existing, rigid-steel conduit risers that will be reused during an electric meter panel change, if applicable.

    - If the riser is not threaded, then a conduit lock nut with a set screw is

allowed.

    - If a coupling with set screws already exists in the riser conduit, then

it does not need to be replaced.

2022 – 2023 3-12

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.3. (continued)

New and existing rigid steel conduit does not need to be bonded to the electric panel.

All polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and steel couplings, including plastic-to-steel transition couplings, must be installed below grade and must not be exposed above grade. When a coupling is installed inside of a foundation, the top edge of the coupling may be flush with the top of foundation concrete.

3.3.4. Installing PG&E-Only Service Trenches

Applicants must ensure that trenches containing only PG&E electric service facilities or PG&E electric and gas service facilities are covered, as required, when those trenches are located on:

  - Private property

  - Designated sidewalks

  - Parkways

  - Driveways

The electric service conduit and gas pipe must be covered on private property or in the franchise as described in the following text. The required minimum clearances must be maintained as listed in Table 3-1, “Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Service Trenches,” on Page 3-19.

A. Provide a 24-inch minimum cover for secondary (i.e., 0−750 volts) electric service conduit and gas pipe.

B. Provide a 36-inch minimum cover for primary (i.e., over 750 volts) electric service conduit.

The term “cover” refers to the standard distance between the outer surface of an underground facility and the final grade level. The actual trench depth must be greater than the cover depth .

All electric service and secondary conduit must enter PG&E splice boxes or enclosures from the bottom for new construction and not through the boxes’ conduit knockouts. If the top of the conduit is not at or below the required minimum conduit depths, the applicant needs to increase the installed depth of the conduit at those locations. See notes in Numbered Document 028028, “Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures,” located in Appendix C.

PG&E may require the applicant to provide other means of protecting the service conduit in the following circumstances.

  - Increased traffic loading

  - Soil erosion

  - Open ditches

  - Where digging machinery or equipment may be used

This increased protection also may be required in areas where similar situations either are anticipated or exist already.

3-13 2022 – 2023

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.4. (continued)

Applicants must ensure that the trench depth is sufficient to meet the minimum depth requirements when taking into consideration the following conditions.

  • The required depth of cover (as described previously)

    - The size of the conduit that is being installed (e.g., 3 inch, 4 inch)
    
    - The necessary bedding materials
    
    - The size of the electric conduit bends (e.g., 24-inch or 36-inch bends)
    

When installing 4-inch and 5-inch diameter conduit that requires a 36-inch vertical bend at the pole, transition the trench to a greater depth before reaching the pole to accommodate for the larger radial bend. At the pole, the conduit must extend vertically above grade a minimum of 2 inches to a maximum of 6 inches.

For service trenches (e.g., secondary voltage and 3-inch conduit) on private property or in the franchise, the required minimum depth of trenches below grade is 30 inches. For primary services, the minimum trench depth is 42 inches for 4-inch conduit and 44 inches for 6-inch conduit.

Applicants must receive pre-approval from the PG&E inspector when requesting an exception to the minimum-depth requirements. Applicants should contact their local PG&E project coordinator with questions about trench depth.

Applicants should be aware that wet utilities must always be separated from the electric and gas service trench, meters, and risers. Wet utility piping or facilities include, but are not limited to, water, bioswales, storm sewer, sanitary sewer, steam, liquid fuels, oil, diesel, sprinkler, irrigation, spigots, downspouts, drain or leach lines, propane, or lines for other liquids or volatile, heavier-than-air gases. For more information, see PG&E Standard S5453, “Joint Trench,” Exhibit B, Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide, located in Appendix B, “Electric and Gas Service Documents.”

Also, when applicants plan to install electric service facilities with other services, such as telephone or cable television, they must refer to:

  - Subsection 3.3.8., “Installing Joint Utility Service Trenches,” on

Page 3-17.

  - Figure 3-6, “Typical Joint Service Trench,” on Page 3-18.

  - Table 3-1, “Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for

Service Trenches,” on Page 3-19.

Applicants should contact their local PG&E project coordinator in the development stages of their projects for additional details and requirements about using joint trenches.

2022 – 2023 3-14

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.5. Installing Offsets

In situations where more than two 90° bends are needed, applicants should consult their local PG&E project coordinators to determine whether additional raceway pull-boxes will be required to avoid excessive pulling tension on the service cables.

A. PG&E does not approve short-radius conduit fittings, commonly known as LBs or service elbows, for use in underground service conduits that are intended to hold PG&E service conductors. Applicants must ensure that offsets are not installed in the following situations.

  1. Do not make an offset in the service lateral conduit entering the electric service panel or enclosure.

  2. Avoid making an offset in the conduit system because it may prohibit the use of a mandrel to prove the acceptability of the conduit system.

  3. Avoid making an offset in the service conduit because it will increase the pull tension required to install the service conductors.

B. In some situations, applicants may be required to perform both of the following numbered actions.

  1. Install larger conduits and/or additional splice boxes or pull boxes to accommodate the installation of the conductors.

  2. Transition to cables appropriately sized for the service capacity.

C. The following scenarios represent situations where B.1. and B.2., on Page 3-15, could be required.

  1. Construction sites where PG&E determines that larger-than-standard cables or conductors are required to maintain voltage and flicker drop.

  2. Construction sites where normal pulling tensions may be exceeded.

N OTE: Applicants must be aware that pin adaptors, cable ringing, or splicing on additional cable will not be used to terminate cables. PG&E does not accept these termination techniques.

3.3.6. Selecting Backfill

Applicants must use backfill (i.e., sand or native soil) to provide a smooth bedding area when installing utility facilities. The backfill must fill all of the voids around the facilities and provide at least 12 inches of cover for the conduit or pipe. PG&E considers soil that contains occasional, rounded rocks that are 1/2 inch in diameter or less to be acceptable backfill.

Crushed rock or sharp-edged materials of any kind, or backfill containing easily breakable dirt clods larger than 6 inches in diameter, are not acceptable.

Additionally, PG&E prohibits applicants to use backfill with rocks greater than 3 inches in any dimension within 6 inches of the top of the pipe or conduit or less than 12 inches below the pavement subgrade.

3-15 2022 – 2023

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.6. (continued)

In sections where a shallow trench is needed and allowed, place a cement-slurry cap above the conduit. The cap must be a minimum of 3 inches thick and made from a cement-slurry mix. The mix must consist of a two-sack sand slurry, with red dye mixed in. The cap must rest on rock-free sand and not the conduit. Position the cap at least 6 inches above the conduit. The top of the cap must be a minimum of 8 inches below grade level. The width of the cap must be the same width as the trench.

the conduit. The cap must be a minimum of 3 inches thick and made from a cement-slurry mix. The mix must consist of a two-sack sand slurry, with red dye mixed in. The cap must rest on rock-free sand and not the conduit. Position the cap at least 6 inches above the conduit. The top of the cap must be a minimum of 8 inches below grade level. The width of the cap must be the same width as the trench.

When backfilling trenches on slopes or grades, bags of concrete and red dye may be required on top of the conduit to prevent the backfill from moving down the slope or running out of the trench.

Soil compaction density must be 90% to 95% and meet PG&E’s and any applicable Federal, State, County and local requirements. PG&E-specific soil compaction requirements are as follows:

A. Trenches that run across or along public roads and streets in the franchise areas must have soil compacted to a minimum of 95% density.

B. Trenches that run across private roads and streets in non-franchise areas must have soil compacted to a minimum of 90% density.

C. When PG&E requires a compaction test report for trenches or equipment pads, the testing must be performed by a qualified testing company and the report must include the testing company’s information (i.e., Name, Address, Contact Information).

All of these requirements are at the discretion of the PG&E inspector. See PG&E’s Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide for additional backfill and trenching requirements. For PG&E-approved import material, see Engineering Material Specification (EMS) 4123, “Backfill Sand.” Both are located in Appendix B.

3.3.7. Providing Drainage from the Conduit System

In some conditions, water can enter the wire and conduit system and migrate into the meter panel and/or building. The applicant or applicant’s contractor must provide a means to discharge any excess water or water pressure from the conduit system.

The most common method required for discharging water from the conduit is installing a box outside near the base of the riser to the meter panel. Alternate locations may be required by the PG&E inspector or PG&E project coordinator. Any other methods of discharging water will require PG&E’s approval before construction begins. For indoor electric meter rooms below grade or at grade level, additional methods of water drainage should be incorporated into the design of the meter room(s) to prevent the accumulation of water.

2022 – 2023 3-16

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.8. Installing Joint Utility Service Trenches

When installing electric services underground, the PG&E gas service pipe and the electric service lateral typically are installed in a common, joint trench. A joint trench also may include telephone and cable television facilities.

Applicants should be aware that wet utilities must always be separated from the electric and gas service trench, meters, and risers. Wet utility facilities are not permitted in a joint trench. Wet utility piping or facilities include, but are not limited to, water, bioswales, storm sewer, sanitary sewer, steam, liquid fuels, oil, diesel, sprinkler, irrigation, spigots, downspouts, drain or leach lines, propane, or lines for other liquids or volatile, heavier-than-air

gases.

There are additional requirements for separating a wet utility from a joint trench along with the electric and gas meters and service risers.

Applicants must submit a written request to PG&E when they want to include other facilities in a joint trench. The request must include a justification and be submitted to PG&E for review and approval before excavation or work begins.

PG&E must coordinate joint trench installations with telephone, cable television, or other facilities. This coordination requires lead time, so applicants should submit their requests and justifications as early in the planning process as possible. Applicants must ensure that PG&E has reviewed and approved their trenching plans before digging begins.

Figure 3-6 on Page 3-18 illustrates a “Typical Joint Service Trench.” Separation and clearance details for the trenches are found in Table 3-1 on Page 3-19. Also, see PG&E’s Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide located in Appendix B of this manual. This guide contains additional information and joint trench requirements. For PG&E-approved import material, see Appendix B for Engineering Material Specification EMS-4123, "Backfill Sand."

PG&E-approved import material, see Appendix B for Engineering Material Specification EMS-4123, "Backfill Sand."

When applicants plan to use joint service trenches, they must ensure that the gas and electric meters are installed either adjacent to, or in close proximity to, each other. Section 5, “Electric Metering: General;” Section 6, “Electric Metering: Residential;” and Section 7, “Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural,” provide information about determining acceptable locations for utility electric meters. Section 2, “Gas Service,” Subsection 2.4.2, “Gas Meter-Set Locations,” on Page 2-20, provides information about determining acceptable locations for utility gas meters.

Applicants must discuss the service arrangements and coordinate the meter locations and joint trench requirements with a PG&E project coordinator before installing utility conduits or gas service piping.

Applicants must ensure that when multiple service facilities (i.e., gas, electric, and telecommunications) are installed in close proximity (e.g., in a joint trench), a 12-inch minimum, radial separation is maintained where those facilities transition from below ground to above ground.

3-17 2022 – 2023

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.8. (continued)

PG&E allows an exception to that rule when the separation is between PG&E secondary, electric-service conduit and gas-service piping. In this instance, the minimum separation distance may be reduced to 6 inches. Clearances between other facilities can be reduced only when the facility owners reach a mutual agreement.

When electric underground facilities cross under or over gas facilities, the minimum vertical separation between these facilities is 6 inches. The electric and gas facilities should cross at an angle between 45 degrees to 90 degrees. Crossings less than 45 degrees are considered to be parallel and require the minimum horizontal clearance between the two facilities.

12” Minimum

12” Minimum
6”
Minimum
Bedding Material
S
G
T
C
39” Minimum

2”
12”
3”

* Increase Minimum
Cover to 30” in the
Franchise Area.
12”
Minimum
4”
39” Minimum
3”
12”
4”
2” Bedding Material Bedding Material
24” Minimum Cover*
2”

Figure 3-6 Typical Joint Service Trench

Notes in reference to Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7.

  1. Trench depth will vary depending on conduit size.

Figure 3-7 PG&E Electric and Gas Service Trench

  1. Soil compaction must meet PG&E’s and any applicable federal, state, county, and local requirements.

  2. All separation and clearance dimensions must be met in Table 3-1 on Page 3-19.

  3. For more information on Figure 3-6, see PG&E’s Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide,

located in Appendix B.

2022 – 2023 3-18

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.8. (continued)

Table 3-1 Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Trenches [1]

G Duct
T
DB
T
C S P SL
G Gas2 - 12 12 12 6 12 6
T Telephone (Duct) 12 - 1 1 12 12 12
T Telephone (Direct Bury) 12 1 - 1 12 12 12
C CATV 12 1 1 - 12 12 12
S Electric Secondary 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
P Electric Primary 12 12 12 12 3 3 3
SL Streetlight3 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
FE Foreign Electric Sources
(Non-PG&E)4
12 12 12 12 12 12 12

1 All separation clearance distances are in inches. 2 For more information about this table, seeConduit in Joint Trench,” in Appendix B of this manual.PG&E Bulletin TD-5453B-002, “Updated Separation Requirements for

3 Streetlight circuits not owned by PG&E must be installed to meet the requirements in PG&E’s Joint Trench

Configurations & Occupancy Guide . Specifically, applicants must review the requirements for working with a second utility company.

4 Must be considered a “utility” as defined in PG&E’s Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide .

Applicants must ensure that adequate amounts of space exist to maintain and operate the facilities. Applicants must ensure that the area immediately behind the gas meter, service facilities, and risers and between those facilities and the premises or structures being served is kept free and clear of all other facilities or equipment such as pipes, wires, cables, or conduits. See Section 2, Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances,”on Page 2-33.

N OTE : Applicants should consider installing conduit one size larger than the required minimum in case larger cable is required or needed for future upgrades. Refer to Subsection 1.14., “Determining the Service Rating,” on Page 1-15, for a description of the methods PG&E uses to determine the ampacity (capacity) rating of customer equipment.

3.3.9. Providing a Service - Termination Facility

In addition to the requirements in Table 3-1, above, applicants must provide and maintain a satisfactory termination facility on or within the building or structure to be served.

PG&E will not install services supplied from different electrical sources in the same termination facility unless the services are separated using suitable barriers. When two or more services are in one termination facility, the minimum dimensions of each compartment created by the barriers must be the same as if each compartment were a separate termination facility.

N OTE : See new service and current transformer (CT) installation requirements in Section 5, Subsection 5.2.4., “Requirements for Installing Secondary Terminations − ” (0 600 Volts) in Metering Equipment Requiring CTs, on Page 5-4.

3-19 2022 – 2023

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.10. Bioswales and Large, Wet Locations

A bioswale is a long, channeled depression or trench that receives rainwater runoff and uses vegetation and organic matter to slow water infiltration and filter-out pollutants. A bioswale is considered a wet location and applicants must not install PG&E facilities that go through or close to a bioswale. Bioswale areas should be avoided and PG&E facilities should be designed to go around them. If applicants cannot avoid a bioswale area, they must apply additionally protective methods when designing PG&E facilities. Also see Numbered Document 038193, located in Appendix C.

3.3.11. Replacing Non-Standard Underground Services

When applicants are relocating or upgrading their electric meter panels and they have existing, non-standard Cable in Conduit (CIC) or Direct Buried (DB) cable, it must be replaced with new PG&E service cable installed in approved service conduit. The new service and conduit run must extend from the new electric panel or termination enclosure location back to the distribution splice box or transformer.

Do not install a splice box along the path of the existing, non-standard DB or CIC cable, between the PG&E secondary distribution system and the panel or termination location, to shorten the length of the new service and conduit. This excludes installing boxes along the new service run near the meter panel to prevent the accumulation of excess water in the service conduit system.

3.4. Electric Underground Documents

Applicants that are performing underground construction should refer to the electric underground numbered documents that are provided at the back of this manual in Appendix C. See PG&E’s Internet website at www.pge.com/greenbook to access the most recent versions of these documents or contact your local PG&E project coordinator. Most of these documents also are available in PG&E Manual TD−2502M, Electric Underground Construction Manual, Book 1 .

3.5. Mandrels

The following section includes both an overview of, and a procedure for using, PG&E-approved, flexible-steel mandrels to prove conduit systems.

A. Using Mandrels to Prove Conduit Systems

Applicants must ensure that the conduit systems required for PG&E cables and/or conductors are installed in a trench that meets all of PG&E’s requirements and specifications for the particular job or project. The conduit systems must meet PG&E’s requirements for each specific installations, as well.

N OTE : The term “conduit system” includes conduits, conduit bends, conduit fittings, and all related components (e.g., bell ends and cable protectors) that are needed to install PG&E cables and conductors.

2022 – 2023 3-20

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.5. (continued)

Applicants must ensure that conduit systems are not covered or hidden from view before the facilities are inspected visually by a PG&E field inspector. The inspector must determine if the conduit system and its installation comply with all of PG&E’s specifications (e.g., type, size, schedule, radius of bends) and installation requirements before the customer backfills the trench.

After the conduit system passes PG&E’s visual inspection, including visual verification of the conduit system’s materials and the radius of the bends, the applicant must backfill the trench and compact the soil. Then, the applicant must provide PG&E with proof that the conduit system is in compliance by successfully inserting and pulling an approved, flexible-steel mandrel through the entire conduit system.

The PG&E inspector remains onsite to ensure that the appropriately sized and approved, flexible-steel mandrel is inserted and pulled through the length of the conduit system without encountering blockages or obstructions.

The applicant must provide the mandrel and follow the procedures for using the mandrel provided in Subsection 3.5.B. on Page 3-21.

The applicant must provide polyester pull-tape (Code 560154) to initiate the cable pulling. For spare conduits that will be vacant for 30 days or longer, install detectable pull-tape (Code 602679) so the spare conduit can be identified during mark and locate field work.

N OTE : For HDD projects, applicants or their contractors must contact PG&E before construction begins. See Subsection 3.2.2.G. on Page 3-3 for information about drilling projects.

B. Procedure for Using Mandrels

Applicants must follow the procedural steps below when using a mandrel to prove a conduit system.

Step 1. Select the mandrel that is sized properly for the type of conduit that will be proven. See Figure 3-8, “Flexible Steel Mandrel,” on Page 3-22, and Table 3-2, “Mandrel Dimensions, Part Numbers, and Order Codes,” on Page 3-23, for mandrel specifications.

N OTE: For high-density polyethylene (HDPE) continuous conduit only (i.e., 3-inch, 4-inch, 5-inch, and 6-inch HDPE), use the next smaller-size mandrel shown in Table 3-2 on Page 3-23.

Step 2. To pull the mandrel through the conduit, securely tie one end of the 2,500-pound pulling tape to the pulling eye of the mandrel. (The pulling tape was installed in the conduit previously.)

Step 3. Securely tie a second section of 2,500-pound pulling tape to the pulling eye located on the other end of the mandrel. This section of tape must be long enough to replace the pre-installed pulling tape completely.

3-21 2022 – 2023

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.5. (continued)

Step 3. ensures that a run of pulling tape remains in the conduit after the mandrelling process is completed. Also, if the mandrel becomes blocked or stuck in the conduit, the second run of pulling tape allows the mandrel to be pulled back out of conduit and provides a means of measuring the distance to the point of blockage.

Step 4. After both pulling tapes are attached securely to the mandrel, insert the mandrel into one end of the conduit. Slowly start to pull the pulling tape at the opposite end of the conduit. This removes any slack in the pulling tape.

Step 5. Slowly pull the mandrel through the conduit by hand or non-mechanically. The rate of the pull should not exceed 100 feet per minute. Both the person pulling the tape and the PG&E inspector must check the pulling tape for signs of stress (i.e., molten plastic) as the tape comes out of the conduit.

N OTE: The PG&E inspector may not approve a section of the conduit if any portion of the pulling tape shows damage in the form of molten plastic. If the inspector decides to reject the conduit section, he or she will secure the melted section of pulling tape as evidence.

If the mandrel passes through the conduit without encountering any blockage or obstructions, the PG&E inspector approves the conduit section for use.

D

B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A

Notes in reference to Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 Flexible Steel Mandrel

  1. The length must be adequate for the mandrel to pass through a 24­inch radius bend (all sizes).

  2. The disks must be fabricated from 1/2­inch, flat, steel plate (average weight: 490 pounds per cubic foot) with a 7/16­inch hole for the 3/8­inch cable.

  3. The spacers must be fabricated from 1/2­inch iron pipe size (IPS) pipe with a minimum inside diameter of 0.6 inches.

  4. Cable size: 3/8­inch, 6 x 19 mild, plow­steel hoisting rope.

  5. The outside diameter of the eye must not exceed Dimension A.

  6. The size must be stamped permanently into one end of the plates.

2022 – 2023 3-22

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.5. (continued)

Table 3-2 Mandrel Dimensions, Part Numbers, and Order Codes [1]

Size
(In Inches)
PG&E
Code
Manufacturer
Part Numbers3
Dimensions (In Inches)
Size
(In Inches)
PG&E
Code
Manufacturer
Part Numbers3
A B C D2 Spacer
Length
2 202567 08400−200 1.69 1.69 6.5 15 0.25
3 202570 08400−300 2.65 1.65 10.5 23 0.75
4 202571 08400−400 3.57 2.57 2.57 2.57 2.57
5 200911 08400−500 4.56 3.56 3.56 3.56 3.56
6 202572 08400−600 5.51 4.51 4.51 4.51 4.51

1 For HDPE continuous conduit only (3-inch, 4-inch, 5-inch, and 6-inch HDPE), use the next-smaller-size mandrel. 2 “D” dimensions are approximate. 3 PG&E’s approved mandrel manufacturer is DCD Design & Manufacturing.

Table 3-3 Businesses That Sell or Rent Mandrels [1,] [2]

Company Street Address City Zip Phone Number
Utility Division Locations
(UDL)
5275 Central Ave. Fremont 94536 (510) 656-9680
WESCO 1544 N. Maple Ave. Fresno 93703 (559) 255-4423
WESCO/Herning 4925 E. Annadale Ave. Fresno 93725 (559) 443-5600
WESCO/Herning 567 Exchange Ct. Livermore 94550 (925) 449-2550
Pacific Utilities Supply
Co.
2475 Estand Way Pleasant Hill 94523 (925) 674-1600
WESCO 1045 W. National Dr.,
Suite 19
Sacramento 95834 (916) 928-1001
Independent Electric
Supply (IES)
1370 Bayport Ave. San Carlos 94070 (650) 594-9440
WESCO 2800 Mead Ave. Santa Clara 95051 (408) 562-0400
Independent Electric
Supply (IES)
2801 Research Park Dr. Soquel 95073 (831) 464-3232
Utility Division Locations
(UDL)
200 East Larch Rd. Tracy 95304 (209) 832-2038
Utility Division Locations
(UDL)
4076 Channel Dr. West
Sacramento
95691 (916) 376-8400

1 Mandrels must be from the approved manufacturer listed in Table 3-2 on Page 3-23 (DCD Design & Manufacturing). 2 This table is provided as a general reference to companies that may sell or rent PG&E-approved mandrels to customers. These companies may be located in cities other than those listed in this table.

3-23 2022 – 2023

Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 3-24

SECTION 4 ELECTRIC SERVICE: OVERHEAD

Section 4

Electric Service: Overhead

4.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides instructions and minimum clearance requirements for attaching permanent, overhead services to residential and nonresidential properties. The term “residential” includes mobile homes installed on foundations in locations other than mobile home parks.

N OTE : Requirements for installing and attaching PG&E overhead services may be different than local city or county ordinances, as well as national or California electric codes. Contact your local PG&E project coordinator if you have questions. See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk Contact Information,” at the front of this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed by area.

4.2. General

Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) will not supply new overhead services to applicants when either of the following conditions exist:

A. When buildings or premises are located in areas designated either by local jurisdictions or by PG&E as underground districts.

B. When buildings or premises are located in areas zoned for nonresidential or residential use and the installed service equipment and/or load requires PG&E to use a 75-kilovolt ampere (kVA) or larger transformer.

4.2.1. Safety Reminder

C AUTION

F LAME RESISTANT ( FR ) CLOTHING IS REQUIRED WHILE WORKING ON, WORKING

NEAR, OR OBSERVING OTHERS WORKING ON ANY PG & E FACILITY.

4.3. Locating Overhead Services

4.3.1. Point of Attachment

In areas served from overhead lines, PG&E installs an overhead service drop from the Company’s distribution line to a point of attachment on the applicant’s residence, building, or structure. PG&E follows the guidelines listed below to ensure the service is installed safely and efficiently.

A. The point of attachment must be located so it can be reached with a single span from PG&E’s facilities.

B. The span should not cross over adjacent property, if possible.

C. The span must maintain the required, vertical, clearance-to-ground.

4-1 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.3.1. (continued)

The point of attachment may be either on the building wall near the PG&E line or on a periscope fixed to the building’s roof, usually not more than 18 inches in back of that wall. Figure 4-1 below provides more information about the point of attachment.

Applicants must consult PG&E before installing the building’s wiring. PG&E must approve of the location selected for the utility service attachment.

Street, Alley, Easement, etc.

Preferred Locations for Service Attachment, See Note 1

18” (See Note 3)

18” (See Note 3)

f
Alternate Locations
Residence or Building

f

Residence or Building
Alternate Locations

Walls on which service-drop attachments are permitted.

Roof areas in which periscope-type services are preferred. Roof areas in which periscope-type services are permitted.

Figure 4-1 Preferred and Alternate Locations for the Overhead Service Drop Attachment (see Note 2)

Notes in reference to Figure 4-1.

  1. Applicants can attach service drops to sidewalls if the service-drop conductors do not exceed 75 feet. Service-drop conductors must not cross over an adjacent property. Finally, applicants must ensure that the required conductor clearances and accesses to the electric meters are maintained.

2. For more information on meter location requirements, see Section 5, “Electric Metering: General;”

Section 6, “Electric Metering: Residential;” and Section 7, “Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural” (as applicable). For available short-circuit current information and requirements, see Subsection 5.7.2., “Main Service Disconnect Switch Rated for Amperes Interrupting Capacity (AIC),” on Page 5-31.

  1. The required maximum setback affects nonresidential customers only. The preferred maximum setback is for residential installations, but is not required.

2022 – 2023 4-2

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.3.2. Two or More Buildings on One Lot

If more than two dwellings or buildings are located on the same lot, applicants must consult PG&E to determine acceptable service attachments and meter locations before wiring the buildings.

Typically, PG&E installs only one service lateral to a single building on one premise, or to one enterprise (with either one building or multiple buildings) on a single premise. However, PG&E may provide more than one service lateral under the following circumstances:

  - Where it is allowed or required by PG&E’s tariff schedules

  - For PG&E’s convenience

  - Where it is required by ordinance

  - When it is installed as a special facility

4.4. Service Drop Clearances

N OTE : See Table FM-1 starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed by

area.

Applicants can request a PG&E project coordinator to specify a location for service drop attachments. When PG&E selects the location, applicants are assured that the service conductors will maintain the required clearances above thoroughfares and structures, as well as the required clearances away from windows, doors, and building exits.

The minimum clearances from the ground, structures, and other objects for overhead service drops are specified in the California Public Utilities Commission’s (CPUC’s) General Order (G.O.) 95, Rules for Overhead Electric Line Construction. Figure 4-2 through Figure 4-20 list and illustrate these minimum clearances.

ad service drops are specified in the California Public Utilities Commission’s (CPUC’s) General Order (G.O.) 95, Rules for Overhead Electric Line Construction. Figure 4-2 through Figure 4-20 list and illustrate these minimum clearances.

Applicants must ensure that the elevation at the point of attachment is high enough to maintain all of the required vertical clearances. Applicants should allow for normal conductor sag when determining these vertical clearances.

G.O. 95 allows the vertical clearance restrictions for service drops to be reduced in certain instances. PG&E’s review and approval is required before any reductions in vertical clearances are allowed. Applicants should contact PG&E as soon as possible in the planning phases of their projects to ensure that any potential problems or exceptions are addressed before construction begins.

Requirements for installing and attaching PG&E overhead services may be different than local electrical codes.

4-3 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4. (continued)

Vehicular Traffic (See 4.4.1.B.2. on Page 4-5)

or Roadway

Figure 4-2 Ground Clearances for Supply Service Drops, 0 Volts Through 750 Volts, Residential Installations (Required by the CPUC)

4.4.1. Vertical Clearance for Residential, Overhead Service

A. Clearance Above Rails

Applicants must ensure that the following clearances are maintained when requesting electric service be placed over train or trolley tracks.

  1. Crossing above railroad tracks without overhead trolley wire: 25 feet

  2. Crossing above railroad tracks with overhead trolley wire:

          - Above rails where freight cars are transported: 26 feet
    
          - Above rails where freight cars are not transported: 23 feet
    

2022 – 2023 4-4

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.1. (continued)

B. Clearance Above Thoroughfares in Public Areas and in Private Communities of 10 or More Residences

Applicants must ensure that the following clearances are maintained when requesting electric service be placed above thoroughfares in public and private communities with more than 10 residences.

  1. Crossing above the center portion between points 12 feet horizontal from curbs: 18 feet

  2. Crossing at the curb line (from the level of the street, not the sidewalk): 16 feet

  3. Crossing where there are no curbs: applicants must consider the curb line as the outer limit of possible vehicular traffic: 16 feet

C. Clearance Over Residential Property

Applicants must ensure that the following clearances are maintained when requesting electric service be placed over residential property.

  1. Crossing over private roads and other areas accessible to agricultural equipment: 15 feet

  2. Crossing over agricultural equipment: maintain 16 feet, if possible

  3. Crossing over private driveways or other areas accessible to vehicles: 12 feet

  4. Crossing over areas accessible to pedestrians only: 12 feet

D. Clearance from Communication Service Drops

Applicants must ensure that the following clearances are maintained when requesting electric service be placed over communication service drops.

  1. Normal radial clearance: a minimum of 24 inches.

  2. Within 15 feet of the point of attachment on a building or structure: the normal radial clearance may be reduced to a minimum of 12 inches.

E. Clearance from Swimming Pools

Avoid installing utility service drops above public and private swimming pools, when practical.

The CPUC, not local agencies or codes, regulates, by its adoption of G.O. 95, the installation and clearances of utility-owned, operated, and maintained supply lines and service drops. G.O. 95 contains specific requirements for installing and maintaining utility supply-line and service-drop clearances above swimming pools. Figure 4-3, “Minimum Clearance for All Drops Above or Adjacent To Swimming Pools,” on Page 4-6, illustrates the minimum-permitted clearances mandated by G.O. 95 where utility service drops are installed above swimming pools.

N OTE: Table 4-1, “Minimum Clearances Over Swimming Pools,” on Page 4-6, also provides clearance information for drops located either above or adjacent to swimming pools.

4-5 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.1. (continued)

A A A A

B

B

B

B

Side View

Top View B

Figure 4-3 Minimum Clearance for All Drops Above or Adjacent To Swimming Pools

Table 4-1 Minimum Clearances Over Swimming Pools [1]

Minimum Vertical and Radial Clearances A
Vertical
B
Radial
(In Feet) (In Feet)
Unprotected Line Conductors-Vertical Over the Highest Water Level
and Radial from the Top Edge of the Pool Walls:
1. 0 through 750 volts
2. Above 750 volts through 22,500 volts
3. Above 22,500 volts through 300 kilovolts (kV)
20
25
30
20
25
30
Service Drops-Vertical Over the Highest Water Level and Radial from
the Top Edge of the Pool Walls:
4. Pools: public and nonresidential
5. Pools: residential
Service Drops (Over Diving Boards or Platforms):
6. Portion of the board or platform that is over the water’s surface
7. Portion of the board or platform that isnot over the water’s surface
16
12
16
12
16
12
8
3
Guys−Ungrounded Portions:
8. Over the highest water level and from the top edge of the pool walls
9. Over the diving board or platform (the portion that is over the water’s
surface)
10. Over the diving board or platform (the portion that isnot over the
water’s surface)
18
18
12
18
8
6
Guys−Grounded Portions:
11. Over the highest water level
12. Over the diving board or platform (the portion that is over the
water’s surface)
13. Over the diving board or platform (the portion that isnot over the
water’s surface)
16
16
8

8
3

1 Clearance requirements may be different than local electrical codes.

2022 – 2023 4-6

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.2. Clearance Above Buildings

Table 4-2, “Minimum Allowable Clearance of Service Drops from Buildings−0 Volts Through 750 Volts,” below, lists the required clearances for buildings that are receiving electric service.

Table 4-2 Minimum Allowable Clearance of Insulated Service Drops from

Table 4-2 Minimum Allowable Clearance of Ins Buildings–0 Volts Through 750 Volts sulated Service Drops from
Minimum Clearance from Buildings
Insulated Conductors (See Note 1)
0 Volts Through 750 Volts
Vertical Clearances Above: Vertical Clearances Above:
1. All portions of buildings including metallic or
nonmetallic cornices, decorative
appendages, eaves, roofs, or parapet walls
of the building being served.
See Notes 2, 3, and 4
2. Metallic or nonmetallic, “nonwalkable”
overhang, patio cover, or other structure.
See Notes 2 and 3
3. Other buildings on the same premises. 2 Feet
4. Buildings on other premises. 8 Feet
(See Note 5)
Horizontal and Radial Clearances: Horizontal and Radial Clearances:
1. From fire escapes, exits, windows, and
doors.
3 Feet

1 Weather-resistant, covered conductors are Construction Requirements for Supply Lines,Clearance of Service Drops of 0–750 Volts from Buildings, not ” Rule 54.8, used in new installations. See“Service Drops, 0” for insulated conductor clearances.–750 Volts, G.O. 95 , Section V, ” Table 10, “Minimum Allowable“Detailed

2 Not less than 1/2 inch for residential services. Not less than 12 inches for nonresidential services as shown in Figure 4-13 through Figure 4-20 on Page 4-13.

3 An applicant must ensure that the service drop’s point of attachment for industrial and nonresidential premises is no more than 18 inches. Take this measurement from behind the front face of the building wall facing the pole line from which the service drop originates.

4 Clearance requirements may be different than local electrical codes.

5 Reduce to 2 feet for nonmetallic roofs when the roof slope exceeds 9 inches of rise per 12 inches of run. (See Figure 4-4, “Nonmetallic Roof,” below.)

Run = 12“

Rise = 9“

Figure 4-4 Nonmetallic Roof

4-7 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.3. Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment

PG&E recommends that applicants do not locate electric supply and communication services in the same vertical plane. Figure 4-11, one of the “Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment” illustrations on Page 4-9, shows the recommended arrangement for the communication service drop.

A. Typically, applicants the service drop is attached below the level of the service weatherhead; however, it may be attached above the service weatherhead, as shown in Figure 4-7 and Figure 4-9, both located on Page 4-9, if the two following situations exist.

  1. It is impractical to attach the service drop below the level of the service weatherhead.

  2. The service-drop conductor’s attachment point is located 24 inches or less from the service weatherhead.

B. Applicants must ensure that the line length of the open wiring (i.e., drip loop) between the point of service attachment and service weatherhead does not exceed 3 feet.

C. Applicants must ensure that the clearance requirements for the PG&E overhead service are met. These clearances may be greater than local electrical codes.

D. PG&E will not attach services to periscope structures made of plastic.

Figure 4-5 through Figure 4-11, all representing “Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment,” provide examples of clearances for overhead service-drop installations and terminations. These seven figures are located on Page 4-9.

N OTE : For overhead, temporary services, see Numbered Document 025055,

“Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles,” in Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”

N OTE : Refer to Numbered Document 094676, “Primary Electric Service

Equipment,” in Appendix C, for technical information on primary services.

2022 – 2023 4-8

4.4.3. (continued)

Nonmetallic Roof

Wood Block 1-1/2” Min. Thickness

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Nonmetallic Roof

Drip Loop 3’ Max.

See Figure 4-2 See Figure 4-2 Wood Block on Page 4-4 See Figure 4-2 on Page 4-4 1-1/2” Min. on Page 4-4 Thickness

Figure 4-5 Figure 4-6 Figure 4-7

Nonmetallic Roof

Drip Loop 3’ Max.

Figure 4-8 Figure 4-9

Communication Service Drop

12” Min.

PG&E Service Drop

Service Delivery Point at Point of Attachment

Applicant Service-Entrance Conductors

e Figu
Pag
re 4-2
e 4-4

Figure 4-10 Figure 4-11

Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment

4-9 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.4. Vertical Clearance on Nonresidential Property

Table 4-3, “Vertical Clearance from the Ground on Nonresidential Property,” located below, provides the minimum vertical distance (in feet) from the ground on nonresidential property.

Applicants must ensure that periscope attachment structures are constructed with one of the following, approved materials.

  - 1-1/4-inch minimum, galvanized rigid steel (GRS) or intermediate

metal conduit (IMC) rigid steel

  - 2-inch minimum rigid aluminum conduit measured in iron pipe

size (IPS) dimensions

PG&E will not attach a span to plastic periscope structures.

Periscope extensions projecting above the roof may require bracing against the pull of the service-drop conductors, as shown in Figure 4-39, “Unbraced Periscope Structure (Residential and Nonresidential),” on Page 4-23.

Typically, the service drop is attached below the level of the service weatherhead; however, it may be attached above the service weatherhead if both of the following situations exist.

  - It is impractical to attach the service drop below the level of the service

weatherhead.

  - The attachment point on the service-drop conductors is located less

than 24 inches from the service weatherhead.

Ensure the length of the open-wire drip loop does not exceed 3 feet.

PG&E connects the Company’s service conductor and an applicant’s service-entrance conductor below the service weatherhead.

Table 4-3 Vertical Clearance from the Ground on Nonresidential Property [1]

Description Minimum Vertical Distance
(In Feet)
Over private driveways, lanes, and other areas
(e.g., alleys and parking lots) accessible to vehicles.
16
Over areas accessible to pedestrians only. 12
Over buildings and bridges, or over structures (attached or
unattached) that donotordinarily support conductors and on
which people can walk.
8

1 Clearance requirements may be different than local electrical codes.

A. Clearance from Communication Service Drops

Applicants must ensure that the following clearances are maintained when requesting electric service to be placed over communication service drops.

  1. Normal radial clearance: a minimum of 24 inches.

  2. Within 15 feet of the point of attachment on a building or structure: the normal radial clearances may be reduced to a minimum of 12 inches.

2022 – 2023 4-10

4.4.4. (continued)

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Curb or Outer Limits of Possible Vehicular Traffic

Figure 4-12 Ground Clearances for Supply Service Drops, 0 Volts Through 750 Volts, Industrial and Nonresidential Installations (Required by the CPUC)

Figure 4-13 through Figure 4-20, all representing “Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors” and all located on Page 4-13, show overhead service drops and vertical-clearances, as measured from the ground, for nonresidential and industrial installations and large residential buildings.

4.4.5. Clearances for a Nonresidential Building Service Drop Using Cable or Equally Insulated, Open-Wire Service Conductors

Applicants can use the clearances shown in Figure 4-13 through Figure 4-20 only when they use Type N-SD service-drop cable, or equally insulated cable, open-wire service conductors. Applicants must not use weatherproof-rated conductors.

Figure 4-12, “Ground Clearances for Supply Service Drops, 0 Volts Through 750 Volts, Industrial and Nonresidential Installations (Required by the CPUC),” located above, provides the required clearances from a service drop to the ground.

4-11 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.5. (continued)

Figure 4-21, “Clearance Around Windows,” and Figure 4-22, “Clearance Around Doors,” both located on Page 4-14, provide applicants with the required clearances from fire escapes, exits, windows, doors, and other locations where people could be present.

Applicants must use a 1-1/4-inch minimum GRS or IMC rigid steel, or 2-inch minimum rigid aluminum conduit (IPS dimensions) for all periscope attachment structures. See Figure 4-13, Figure 4-14, Figure 4-15, Figure 4-19, and Figure 4-20, all representing “Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors,” on Page 4-13, for examples.

The clearances shown in Figure 4-13 through Figure 4-20 only apply to insulated services, up to a 750-volt maximum, over nonmetallic roofs or decorative appendages. Applicants also should refer to the service-entrance, conductor-clearance requirements found in the State Building Standards Electrical Code .

The special 24-inch minimum clearance, illustrated in Figure 4-20, is applicable only to service-drop cable.

Either brace the periscope attachment structures as shown, or ensure that the structures are supported using similar, acceptable methods. For more information on bracing periscope attachment structures, see Figure 4-34 and Figure 4-35, both representing “Service to Nonresidential Premises,” and both on Page 4-18. Also, see Figure 4-38, “Braced Periscope Attachment Structure,” on Page 4-20, and Table 4-5, “Maximum Mast Height Above the Roof Without Bracing,” on Page 4-23.

2022 – 2023 4-12

4.4.5. (continued)

Service Drop

18” from the Edge of the Eaves

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Service Delivery Point at Point of Attachment

Service Drop

12” Min. 12” Min. 12” Min.

Building Wall More Than 18” from the Max .

Not More Than 18” from Building the Face of the Wall) Wall Facing

Pole Line

Building Wall Facing Pole Line

More Than 18” from the Edge of the Eaves (but Not More Than 18” from the Face of the Wall)

Figure 4-13 Figure 4-14 Figure 4-15

Service Drop

Service Drop

Service Delivery

Point at Point

Cornice, Parapet Wall, and Roof

Facing Pole Line

Specified

Building Wall Facing Pole Line

Building Wall of Attachment

Building’s

Facing Pole Line Covered Protection

Figure 4-16 Figure 4-17 Figure 4-18

Main Building Wall Facing P ole Line

Column or Support (Not a Building Wall)

Wall Facing Pole Line

or Patio Cover

Figure 4-19 Figure 4-20

Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors (0 Volts–750 Volts)

4-13 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.6. Clearances Around Doors and Windows

Service drops are not required to clear buildings by any specified horizontal distance; however, applicants must ensure that the service weatherhead, the service drop, and the open wires between the service weatherhead and the service drop maintain the following clearances from fire escapes, balconies, stairways, exits, doors, windows, and other locations where people could be present.

A. Wires that are either at or below the level of the top of exits, doors, windows, and other openings must have a radial clearance from the boundaries of such openings of not less than 3 feet, as shown in Figure 4-21 below.

B. Wires less than 8 feet above, or 3 feet below, the surface levels of fire escapes, balconies, porches, stairways, and walkways must have a minimum horizontal clearance of at least 3 feet from such surfaces, as shown in Figure 4-22 below.

ÔÔ

36” Min.

ÔÔ

36” Min.

Ô
Ô
36” 8’0” Min. 36”
Min. Min.
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ

ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
Ô
Ô
36”
Min.
8’0” Min.
36”
Min.
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô

Figure 4-21 Clearance Around Windows

Figure 4-22 Clearance Around Doors

4.4.7. Clearance Between Service Drop Wires

The minimum-allowable radial clearance between service drop sites (i.e., 0 volts through 750 volts) in the span from the pole to the building, and a point of attachment to the building, is 3 inches. Applicants must ensure that wire supports at the building are spaced 8 inches apart, where practical.

2022 – 2023 4-14

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.8. Clearance from Applicant-Owned Service Poles

Building

See Figure 4-2 on Page 4-4

on Page 4-11 A Service Pole Detached

Min. Size

6” x 6”

Min. Size

Ground

Figure 4-23 Service Attachment Structure or Service Pole Secured to a Building

4.5. Service Attachments

Figure 4-24 Service Pole Detached from a Building

Applicants must ensure that utility service drops (i.e., 0 volts through 750 volts) are not attached directly to metal roofs.

4.5.1. Attaching Low-Voltage, Residential, Overhead Service Drops

Applicants must ensure that the service drop’s point of attachment to the building is high enough to provide the minimum legal clearances shown in Figure 4-2 on Page 4-4.

Subsection 4.6., “Attachment Structures (Periscopes),” on Page 4-21, provides information on installing and using periscopes as attachment

structures.

Whenever practical, attach the service drops below the level of the service weatherhead, as shown in Figure 4-29, “Cable (Single Spool),” and Figure 4-30, “Open Wire or Cable (Cable Shown),” both of which are on Page 4-16, and Figure 4-39, “Unbraced Periscope Structure (Residential and Nonresidential),” on Page 4-23.

In all installations, PG&E connects to the applicant’s service-entrance conductor below the level of the service weatherhead. Drip loops are included at the entrance of each conductor to the service weatherhead. These drip loops prevent moisture from penetrating the installations.

The standard service attachments shown in Figure 4-25 through Figure 4-30, all representing “0-Volt Through 300-Volt Service at Residential Premises,” on Page 4-16, are designed according to the CPUC’s State Building Standards Electrical Regulations to California electrical code and to PG&E requirements. Local authorities may have additional requirements.

4-15 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.5.1. (continued)

N OTE : PG&E will attach a service knob to a stud (e.g., 2 inch x 4 inch) or rafter, if possible. PG&E will not mount the service knob directly to the roof or attach it to corner trim or roof trim without a 2-inch x 4-inch stud or larger. Figure 4-36, “Building Attachment–Service Knob,” Detail A, on Page 4-20, provides the requirements for attaching service knobs.

Service Knob. Screw

Figure 4-25 Open Wire

Figure 4-26 Open Wire or Cable (Open Wire Shown)

Service Knob. Screw Through

8” Min. 2” x 4” Backing, Overhang

Triplex

Where Required

Nonmetallic Roof

Figure 4-27 Figure 4-28 Open Wire or Cable (Open Wire Shown) Cable (Using Triplex)

Single-Spool Periscope Fitting

1-1/4” Rigid Steel Conduit or 2” IPS

Aluminum

Pipe Strap

Exposed Overhang. Do Not Use This

Construction Where Overhang Is Boxed In

Bore Through Roof Plate (Conduit Against Stud)

Stud

Figure 4-29 Cable (Single Spool)

Figure 4-30 Open Wire or Cable (Cable Shown)

0-Volt Through 300-Volt Service at Residential Premises

2022 – 2023 4-16

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.5.2. Attaching Low-Voltage, Nonresidential, Overhead Service Drops

When applicants plan to install service-entrance wiring larger than that shown in Figure 4-31 through Figure 4-34, all representing “Service to Nonresidential Premises” and on Page 4-18, they must consult PG&E before they begin construction to obtain instructions on attaching the wiring properly.

Figure 4-31, “Service Drop Cable, 4/0 and Smaller, Triplex or Quadruplex,” shows applicants how to attach the wiring using service knobs in either concrete or masonry walls. Service knobs must be screwed into wood-frame walls.

Figure 4-32, “New Wall, 1/0 kcmil to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum,” shows applicants how to attach the wires using insulated clevises on concrete walls. For wood-frame walls or masonry walls (e.g., brick, hollow tile, cinder block), applicants must bolt the attachments through the wall. Where service is attached to masonry walls, applicants must install bracing or attachment structures.

When it is practical to do so, applicants must attach service drops below the level of the service weatherhead.

PG&E furnishes the bolts and insulators needed to secure the service drop to the building or attachment structures. Applicants can attach the service drop to the walls or to periscope structures either horizontally or vertically.

The wire sizes shown in Figure 4-31 through Figure 4-35 refer to service drops, not to service-entrance wires.

Open wiring, or drip loop, installed between the service drop attachment and the service weatherhead, must not exceed 3 feet.

Applicants must install periscope structures as illustrated in Figure 4-39 on Page 4-23. See Subsection 4.6. on Page 4-21 for additional information on installing periscopes and using periscopes as attachment structures.

4-17 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.5.2. (continued)

Service Entrance Conduit

Wiring 8”

Expansion Shield

Cable Grip

5/8” Eye Bolt and 2-1/4” Square Washer

ervice
ntrance
iring
rip

rip
ervice
ntrance
iring
rip
ervice
ntrance
iring
rip
ervice
ntrance
iring

Figure 4-31 Service Drop Cable, 4/0 and Smaller, Triplex or Quadruplex

Figure 4-32 New Wall, 1/0 kcmil [1] to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum

5/8” Flush Anchor

Dead-End 1/0 and Larger Conductors

Figure 4-33 New or Existing Wall, 1/0 kcmil [1] to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum

1-1/4” Rigid Steel Conduit or 2” IPS Aluminum Conduit Min.

Service Drop Cable

Braces

Braces

18”
Max.
18”
Max.
18”
Max.
18”
Max.
18”
Max.

Figure 4-34 Figure 4-35 Open Wire Service, #4 to 397.5 kcmil [1] Aluminum Service Drop Cable

Service to Nonresidential Premises

Note in reference to Figure 4-32, Figure 4-33, and Figure 4-34.

  1. kcmil: a thousand circular mils

2022 – 2023 4-18

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.5.3. Special Service Attachment Requirements: Areas Subject to Heavy Snow Loading

The following special requirements apply to service drops installed in snow-loading areas. PG&E has designed these requirements to minimize storm damage.

A. Applicants must ensure that the span length of triplex or quadruplex service drop cable used in snow-loading areas is 125 feet or less.

B. Applicants should locate the service weatherhead as high as practical to keep the weatherhead clear of deep snow.

C. Applicants should try to attach service drops to house gables, where practical. This type of attachment protects the service and meter equipment from being impacted by snow and ice as it slides off the roof.

D. PG&E will attach a service knob to a stud, if possible. PG&E will not mount the service knob directly to the roof or attach it to corner trim or roof trim. Figure 4-36, “Building Attachment − Service Knob,” Detail A, on Page 4-20, provides the requirements for attaching service knobs.

E. Applicants should install a self-supported, periscope attachment structure according to the requirements specified in Subsection 4.6. on Page 4-21 and Table 4-4, “Maximum Distance ‘L’ (Inches from the Service Attachment to the Top Periscope Support),” on Page 4-20.

Typically, periscope attachment structures that are installed as specified in Subsection 4.6. and Table 4-5, “Maximum Mast Height Above the Roof Without Bracing,” on Page 4-23, provide a sufficiently rigid service-drop support to withstand the expected snow loading. In areas above 3,000 feet, use the construction methods shown in Figure 4-36, where practical.

4-19 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.5.3. (continued)

Do Not Attach to the Corner or Roof Trim

Wood Backing (Installed by the Builder if the Knob Cannot Be Installed in the Stud)

Sheathing

Drill a 5/16” Diameter Hole Through the Siding to Prevent Splitting. Drill a 1/4” Diameter Pilot Hole, When Necessary

in the Slide Area Below the Roof Detail A

Figure 4-36 Building Attachment–Service Knob

Load Center

See Table 4-4 Below

See the “L” Dimension in Table 4-4 Below Top Periscope Support

Pipe Strap

Stud

Bore Through the Roof Plate (Conduit Against Stud)

Figure 4-37 Figure 4-38 Self-Supported Periscope Attachment Structure Braced Periscope Attachment Structure

Table 4-4 Maximum Distance “L” (Inches from the Service Attachment to the Top Periscope Support)

Type of
Service
Periscope
IPS Size of Service Periscope (In Inches)
Type of
Service
Periscope
1-1/43 1-1/23 2 3 2-1/2 3 4
GRS1 or
IMC2
5 7 11 22 36 57
Aluminum Not Permitted Not Permitted 4 9 3 14 26

1 GRS: galvanized rigid steel 2 IMC: intermediate metal conduit 3 Brace the periscope as shown in Figure 4-38 to maintain a sufficient clearance over the roof.

2022 – 2023 4-20

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.6. Attachment Structures (Periscopes)

An attachment structure is a support that connects the service drop to the structure while maintaining the clearances required for the service drop. Applicants must ensure that the service drop maintains the required clearance at its point of attachment to the periscope, mast, or other attachment structure. These clearances are mandated by the CPUC’s G.O. 95 .

PG&E will connect service drops to attachment structures in either one of two

ways.

A. Connect by using either spools or insulators that are installed on a building.

B. Connect by using a single mast constructed of one of the following galvanized rigid pipe or conduit materials.

 - Steel

 - Intermediate metal

- Aluminum

Applicants using Method A must only install a single (one) mast and weatherhead from the electric service termination and metering equipment to the service drop location. Applicants using Method B must only install a single (one) mast, periscope, and weatherhead from the electric service termination and metering equipment to the service drop location. Installing more than one attachment structure is prohibited.

To provide structural support for periscopes, applicants should use a heavy-duty, 2-hole pipe strap every 3 feet, secured by 3/8-inch x 3-inch lag screws (minimum size). Structural support is required at the location shown in Figure 4-39, “Unbraced Periscope Structure (Residential and Nonresidential),” on Page 4-23.

When applicants must install attachment structures to maintain the required clearances, they must contact PG&E for approval before constructing the structures. PG&E must ensure that attachment structures meet all of the applicable legal requirements.

Applicants must install and maintain these attachment structures at their expense.

The attachment structures must be strong enough to support the service drop wires and service attachments. Applicants may use a single (one) service-entrance conduit as the attachment structure. In this case, the periscope must be a minimum 1-1/4-inch GRS conduit or IMC, or 2-inch IPS rigid aluminum conduit. Applicants may not use plastic conduit as an attachment structure. Subsection 4.5.3., “Special Service Attachment Requirements: Areas Subject to Heavy Snow Loading,” on Page 4-19, provides applicants with additional requirements when using attachment structures in snow-loading areas.

When applicants use attachment structures, either on exterior walls or on roof structures, they must ensure the attachment structures provide the required clearances. Additionally, applicants must ensure that buildings are constructed or reinforced to support the weight of the attachment structure and fitting. Buildings must be able to withstand the pull of the service wires. Applicants must furnish all of the materials required to install the attachment structures except the racks, bolts, and insulators needed to secure the service wires. PG&E supplies those parts.

4-21 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.6. (continued)

Attachment structures typically must be installed directly above the service termination and metering equipment, vertically upward to the weatherhead location. The service entrance mast (conduit) should not be installed in either a diagonal or horizontal position unless approved by PG&E. For existing installations where the meter panel is being replaced and relocated away from the gas facilities, or to achieve the minimum-required working space, the mast may be installed horizontally to be able to run back to the existing weatherhead location if it is not changing. Refer to Section 2, “Gas Service,” Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances,” on Page 2-33, for gas clearance requirements. Any horizontal run of mast (conduit) should not exceed 10 feet and must not be installed on top of the roof. If a new attachment structure is installed, it should be directly above the new service termination and metering equipment.

Applicants may not attach communications conductors, such as those used for telephone or cable television service, to the electric supply’s power-service mast or attachment structure. Applicants can attach only electric-utility, power-supply, service-drop conductors to the electric-supply, power-service masts or attachment structures.

If a new meter panel is planned to be installed next to an existing meter panel and connected to the same overhead service, applicants may not install additional masts and weatherhead and are required to install a sealable gutter in conjunction with a single mast.

4.6.1. Periscope Clearances and Bracing Requirements

Applicants must ensure that periscopes and raceway-type service masts extend a maximum of 78 inches and at least 12 inches above any roof or eave they may penetrate. Applicants may be required to raise periscopes and raceway-type service masts when using them as attachment structures and/or to obtain the appropriate clearances for service drop conductors. For more information, see Figure 4-13 through Figure 4-16, all on Page 4-13. Also, see Figure 4-34, “Open Wire Service, #4 to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum,” and Figure 4-35, “Service Drop Cable,” on Page 4-18. Finally, see Figure 4-36 through Figure 4-38 on Page 4-20.

Applicants may have to brace periscopes that project above the roof lines, as shown in Figure 4-39 and Table 4-5. An acceptable method of bracing is illustrated in Figure 4-34 and Figure 4-35. Table 4-5 lists the maximum periscope heights that applicants can install without bracing for different types of conduit.

The periscope (i.e., mast) height without bracing is limited to 30 inches above the roof in either of the following two locations.

   - **Where the service drop is installed through trees**

   - **Where trees or tree branches may strike or cause unplanned**

loading on the service drop.

Applicants must ensure that unbraced periscopes projecting above roofs or eaves are continuous without couplings from the point where the utility service drop is attached to the periscope to 30 inches below the roof or eave.

2022 – 2023 4-22

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.6.1. (continued)

When the periscope structure requires support above the roof, applicants must ensure that it is braced, not guyed, as shown in Figure 4-38. The brace must be located as described in Table 4-4. When applicants need to brace periscope structures, the bracing must consist of two galvanized steel members installed at an approximate 90° spread. Braces must consist of a minimum 3/4-inch galvanized steel pipe or 1-1/4-inch x 1-1/4-inch x 1/8-inch galvanized steel angles.

Table 4-5 Maximum Mast Height Above the Roof Without Bracing [1]

(IPS) Conduit Size Maximum Height
Without Bracing4
GRS2 or IMC3 Aluminum Aluminum
All Measurements in Inches All Measurements in Inches All Measurements in Inches
1-1/4 2 42
1-1/2 2-1/2 42
2 3 54
Larger Larger 78

1 See Subsection 4.5.3. on Page 4-19 for snow-loading area requirements. 2 GRS: galvanized rigid steel 3 IMC: intermediate metal conduit 4 Periscope height, without bracing, is limited to 30 inches above the roof if the service drop is installed through trees or if tree branches may strike or cause loading on the service drop.

Wood Blocking

Wood Frame

Pipe Strap. To provide periscope

Service-Entr
Conduit
Insulators a
Clamps Fur
Table 4-5
and Installed
age 4-23
PG&E
12” Min.Above Roof
Flashing
Flashing
Service-Entr
Conduit
Insulators a
Clamps Fur
and Installed
PG&E
Above Roof
Table 4-5
age 4-23


12” Min.

support, a heavy-duty, 2-hole pipe strap every 3 feet, secured by 3/8” x 3” lag screws (minimum size), is required at this location.

Figure 4-39 Unbraced Periscope Structure (Residential and Nonresidential)

4-23 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.7. Service Weatherheads

Typically, applicants should not locate the service weatherhead on exterior walls that are less than 2 feet from a common property line. The service weatherhead should be higher than the point of service attachment.

Applicable California state laws require applicants to locate the service weatherhead so that they maintain the minimum clearances specified in Subsection 4.4., “Service Drop Clearances,” on Page 4-3, through Subsection 4.5., “Service Attachments,” on Page 4-15. These minimum clearances also apply to the service drop and the open sites between the service weatherhead and the service drop’s point of attachment.

In some instances, applicants may need to install the service weatherhead and related open wires at an elevation greater than the minimum required clearances. Adding the extra height ensures that the installed service drops maintain the required clearances above the ground and any affected structures. Also, the required clearances may be greater than local electrical codes.

A service weatherhead must be located above the service-drop conductor’s point of attachment; however, the service-drop attachment may be located above the service weatherhead if both of the following conditions are met.

A. If it is impractical to attach the service drop below the level of the service weatherhead.

B. If the attachment point on the service-drop conductor is located less than 24 inches from the service weatherhead.

Ensure that the length of the open-wire drip loop does not exceed 3 feet.

4.8. Service-Entrance Conductors

Applicants must furnish, install, and maintain the service-entrance wiring and service equipment beyond the point where it attaches to PG&E’s overhead service drop.

PG&E will only connect to one set (run) of service-entrance conductors exiting the mast and weatherhead. Therefore, applicants must only install one set of conductors in the service conduit. One set or run is a maximum of three conductors for single-phase and four conductors for three-phase services.

The type and size of service-entrance wires must conform to applicable legal requirements and must be approved service-entrance cable. If applicants use an approved service-entrance cable, they must ensure that the service-entrance wires are enclosed either in a single (one) continuous metallic tubing or in rigid conduit of a type and size to conform to applicable requirements, but preferably 1-1/4 inches or more.

N OTE : On periscope-type installations, use a minimum 1-1/4-inch GRS or IMC, or 2-inch IPS, rigid aluminum conduit. It is prohibited to install more than one conduit (mast), periscope, and weatherhead for service-entrance conductors.

2022 – 2023 4-24

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.8. (continued)

If applicants use SE-type service-entrance cables between the service weatherhead and meters, they must ensure that the SE-type cables are not concealed. Also, applicants must ensure that service entrances are rain tight by using approved fittings.

In residential and small nonresidential installations, applicants may install short-radius conduit fittings (i.e., LBs, service elbows) in the overhead, service-entrance conduit system.

Because this conduit system penetrates the outer building wall, applicants must install the short-radius conduit fittings with covers that prevent water from penetrating the fittings. The covers also must be sealable by PG&E personnel.

N OTE : Short-radius conduit fittings should not contain splices or taps.

The drip loop is the length of exposed wire between the service weatherhead and the service drop. Applicants must not use more than 3 feet of exposed, open wiring to form the drip loop.

To create drip loops, an applicant should install a minimum 18 inches of service-entrance wiring that extends out from the service weatherhead. In cases where the service-entrance open conductors pass over a roof or firewall with a minimum clearance of 12 inches, applicants must provide enough wire for PG&E to connect to the service drop and to obtain the required 12-inch minimum clearance above the building.

ip loops, an applicant should install a minimum 18 inches of service-entrance wiring that extends out from the service weatherhead. In cases where the service-entrance open conductors pass over a roof or firewall with a minimum clearance of 12 inches, applicants must provide enough wire for PG&E to connect to the service drop and to obtain the required 12-inch minimum clearance above the building.

PG&E connects the Company’s service conductors and the applicants’ service-entrance conductors below the weatherhead.

PG&E furnishes and installs connectors for joining the service-entrance conductors to the service drop. Drip loops must not extend around the corner of a building; however, the service weatherhead may be located on the same face of the building as the service-drop attachment. The service-entrance conduit or cable may be extended around the corner of the building to the meter and service switch.

Do not install conductors other than service-entrance conductors in the conduit leading to the meter.

4.9. Applicant-Owned, Installed, or Furnished Wood Poles

PG&E project coordinators will explain the requirements to ensure that applicants are familiar with the inspection process and requirements for installing and using the wood poles.

For poles that have a final height greater than 20 feet above ground level, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) may require the applicant to file a notice a minimum of 45 days before installing the pole. The FAA may issue a determination of hazard to air navigation and recommend actions to mitigate or eliminate the hazard. Please contact your PG&E project coordinator for additional information.

4-25 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.9. (continued)

After discussing or meeting with project coordinators and finalizing their installation plans, applicants must notify their local PG&E project coordinators before setting wood poles. It is critical that applicants who own, install, or furnish approved wood poles to which PG&E can attach equipment or facilities, or to which PG&E can furnish or supply permanent electric service, meet the requirements of Numbered Document 025055, found in Appendix C. After the applicant installs the pole(s) in the ground, PG&E field inspectors will approve the installation of poles that meet Company requirements.

PG&E field inspectors verify the following, specific requirements for applicant-furnished poles before approving their installation.

A. The poles must be supplied and treated by a PG&E-approved supplier.

B. The applicant must obtain and provide PG&E with a copy of a “Certificate of Treatment” from the pole supplier. That certificate must indicate that the pole was treated according to the requirements of both the American Wood Preserver’s Association and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

C. Applicants must ensure that new poles are branded or tagged. This identification must be either 10 feet from the pole butt for poles less than 55 feet long or 14 feet from the pole butt for poles more than 55 feet long. The brand must include the following four identifiers.

- The manufacturer’s name

- The month and year the pole was treated

- The wood species

- The preservative used to treat the pole

D. Poles greater than 40 feet long that will support PG&E primary facilities must be through-bored at the ground line.

E. PG&E must inspect and approve used poles before they are reused (i.e., PG&E facilities are reinstalled on the poles). PG&E-owned poles that have been removed from service and will no longer be used by PG&E cannot be reused as customer-owned poles.

The PG&E field inspector must verify that the poles meet the dimensional and test requirements for reused poles. These requirements are described in PG&E Procedure TD-2325P-01, “Inspecting, Reinforcing, and Reusing Wood Poles.”

If installing overhead temporary services, refer to Numbered Document 025055, found in Appendix C.

2022 – 2023 4-26

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.10. Required Vegetation Clearances

The state of California requires electric utilities to keep electric lines (i.e., high-voltage lines) cleared of vegetation. All newly constructed distribution lines and existing lines must meet these requirements.

N OTE : PG&E may determine that the distribution line should be installed underground, or that trees should be removed, if the planned line extension does not meet or exceed the clearance requirements between existing trees and overhead electric lines. See new options for commercial agricultural orchards in Subsection 4.10.5. on Page 4-31.

4.10.1. General Requirements

When establishing new overhead services, and/or when building or remodeling structures near high-voltage lines, poles, or towers, applicants must research planting regulations and follow the rules established here.

N OTE : Applicants must consider safety and access for repairs when planting near an overhead electric service.

A. Where required, applicants must establish clearances as described in

California Public Resource Code (PRC) Division 4, “Forests, Forestry and Range and Forage Lands,” Part 2, Chapter 3, Section 4292. PG&E can exempt applicants if the vegetation around power poles at the completed construction site will be well irrigated, low growing, and not highly flammable in perpetuity. In general, do not plant trees near power poles or

towers.

B. For electric distribution, low-voltage and high-voltage lines rated up to 60,000 volts, applicants must establish a 15-foot “low-growth” zone on both sides of all new lines. Applicants also must ensure that all branches with potential overhang within 4 feet of the conductors are trimmed.

Applicants must not plant trees under or within 15 feet of distribution power poles. Applicants should landscape with low-growth, fire-resistant plants, shrubs, and flowers in the zone under electric power lines. PG&E recommends planting shrubs and flowers in low-growth zones to ensure compliance. Figure 4-40, “Illustration of 15-Foot Clearance, Low-Growth Zone,” on Page 4-28, and Figure 4-41, “Grass and Shrubs Recommended Under Service Wires,” on Page 4-29, illustrate low-growth zones and show how the 15-foot clearance is measured from the center of the pole.

C. For all electric transmission, high-voltage lines rated greater than 60,000 volts, applicants must not plant trees within the right-of-way easement of the transmission poles or towers. Applicants must follow a “no-growth” zone inside rights-of-way areas, including under the electric power lines. The zone outside the rights-of-way areas is a “low-growth” zone, tree-planting zone, and/or a shrub-and-flower planting zone. Figure 4-41, “Grass and Shrubs Recommended Under Transmission Wires,” on Page 4-29, illustrates a no-growth zone.

4-27 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.10.1. (continued)

D. Applicants must ensure that a thorough inspection is made of proposed construction areas. Dead, dying, diseased, or hazard trees tall enough to fall into the proposed power lines must be removed. Hazard trees are defined as any tree having a structural defect that may cause the tree, or a portion of the tree, to fall either on someone or on something of value.

Figure 4-40 Illustration of a 15-Foot Clearance, Low-Growth Zone

F

2022 – 2023 4-28

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.10.1. (continued)

Transmission High-Voltage Lines
Small trees allowed. Small trees allowed.
Right-of-Way − Easement
Right-of-Way − Easement
Transmission High-Voltage Lines
Small trees allowed.
Small trees allowed.
Right-of-Way − Easement
Transmission High-Voltage Lines
Small trees allowed.
Small trees allowed.

(No trees allowed. Small shrubs and grass allowed.)

Figure 4-41 Grass and Shrubs Recommended Under Transmission Wires

E. Applicants can contact PG&E’s vegetation management personnel to obtain more information about codes or regulations and to schedule field inspections for construction sites. Vegetation management personnel perform field inspections to identify clearance requirements or hazard trees.

4.10.2. Planning Requirements

When planning and routing, high-voltage, overhead electric lines, applicants must avoid areas with heavy tree growth. See the tree-planting matrix tables (Tables B-1 through B-7 starting on Page B-2) in Appendix B, “Electric and Gas Service Documents.” Building plans should indicate where overhead lines pass within the boundaries of the construction and landscape areas, as shown in Figure 4-40, “Illustration of a 15-Foot Clearance, Low-Growth Zone,” on Page 4-28, and Figure 4-42, “Alternative Routes to a House Showing High-Voltage Lines and Tree-Clearance Zones,” on Page 4-30.

4-29 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.10.2. (continued)

15’ 15’ 15’
15’
15’
15’

Figure 4-42 Alternative Routes to a House Showing High-Voltage Lines and Tree-Clearance Zones

f

4.10.3. Existing Overhead Lines Adjacent to Developments

Most new developments are designed to ensure that power lines are built underground. However, one or more sides of the construction area may be bordered by existing power lines. When planning landscape improvements, applicants must use only lower-growing, fire-resistant plant species under and near overhead electric lines.

2022 – 2023 4-30

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.10.4. Line Extensions

Line extensions must be constructed with a 15-foot clearance on either side of high-voltage power poles. This includes removing any overhanging branches. Applicants must clear the area from one end of the line extension to the final connection point before construction on the line extension begins.

Figure 4-42 on Page 4-30 illustrates an approved method for clearing affected areas. Also, any hazard trees identified during the PG&E inspection that are located outside of the 15-foot clearance zone on either side of the power poles should be removed before construction begins on the line extension. PG&E will not connect new lines to the existing distribution system until the applicant provides adequate clearance from the trees.

4.10.5. Primary Overhead Distribution Poles in Commercial Orchard Installations

Applicants must not plant trees under or adjacent to primary overhead distribution lines. When discovering any new tree plantings, PG&E reserves the right to remove those trees in order to protect its facilities.

Applicants must work with the PG&E project coordinator to choose a route for the overhead distribution facilities that does not conflict with the orchard trees and eliminates the need for future vegetation pruning.

When planting near overhead electrical service drops, applicants must consider both safety and access to the electric facilities when irrigation pumps and other electrical loads require repair.

4.10.6. Removing Vegetation Near Existing, High-Voltage, Energized Lines

C AUTION

Because safety is the Company’s highest priority, the California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (Cal/OSHA) requires that all vehicles, equipment, tools, and people maintain a minimum 10-foot distance from all high-voltage power lines. Refer to Section 1, “General,” Table 1-2, “Minimum Safe Working Distances (Scaffolds, Equipment, Tools, Structures, and People),” on Page 1-11, and Table 1-3, “Minimum Safe Working Distances (Boom-Type Lifting or Hoisting Equipment),” on Page 1-12, for the minimum safe working distances.

Applicants or unqualified tree-trimming contractors should never attempt to trim or remove trees that are within 10 feet of high-voltage power lines (i.e., conductors).

If it is necessary to trim or remove trees located within 10 feet of a high-voltage power line, applicants must notify PG&E at 1-800-743-5000 .

Generally, high-voltage power lines are any overhead lines that connect from pole to pole. These lines typically are 600 volts and greater. Post a “HIGH VOLTAGE” sign on the poles or crossarms, as shown in Figure 4-43, “High-Voltage Marker on Poles and Crossarms,” on Page 4-32.

4-31 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.10.6. (continued)

However, applicants should contact PG&E for assistance if a line’s voltage is unknown, and should always assume that lines are high voltage .

During PG&E’s normal tree-trimming schedule, contractors qualified to perform high-voltage line clearances will prune or remove trees at no cost to applicants to create a safe distance between the vegetation and high-voltage power lines.

If it is necessary to trim a tree that is closer than 10 feet from an overhead power line before PG&E’s normal tree-trimming schedule, applicants may hire a qualified tree company to perform high-voltage line clearances (i.e., prune trees to a safe distance away from the electric lines). Again, unqualified companies/employees must never perform high-voltage line clearances . Applicants can contact PG&E to obtain the tree-trimming schedules for their areas.

ine before PG&E’s normal tree-trimming schedule, applicants may hire a qualified tree company to perform high-voltage line clearances (i.e., prune trees to a safe distance away from the electric lines). Again, unqualified companies/employees must never perform high-voltage line clearances . Applicants can contact PG&E to obtain the tree-trimming schedules for their areas.

There are regulations and statutes that dictate the requirements for working around high-voltage power lines. The California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (Cal/OSHA) requires that persons working within certain distances of overhead power lines be qualified and trained properly. For details, see the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Division 1, Chapter 4, Subchapter 5, Group 2, “High-Voltage Electrical Safety Orders,” Article 37, Provisions for Preventing Accidents Due to Proximity to Overhead Lines,” and Article 38, “Line Clearance Tree Trimming Operations.”

In addition, the California Penal Code makes it a crime for any person to work within 6 feet of a high-voltage power line . For details and additional information about this misdemeanor, see the California Penal Code, Part 1, “Of Crimes and Punishments,” Title 10, “Of Crimes Against

the Public Health and Safety, Section 385(b).

“HIGH VOLTAGE” Marker

“HIGH VOLTAGE” Marker

Figure 4-43 High-Voltage Marker on Poles and Crossarms

F

2022 – 2023 4-32

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.10.6. (continued)

See Appendix B for PG&E’s Community Wildfire Safety Program brochure, Guide to Landscaping in High Fire-Threat Areas (on Pages B-2 and B-3). This brochure suggests the best low-growing, fire-resistant native vegetation to use when planting near power lines. In general, select plants with a reduced risk for starting and fueling wildfires.

  • Low-growing native vegetation

  • Plants with high-moisture and low-resin content

  • Well-watered vegetation

  • Plants that do not create or accumulate dry, dead material

Many people now consider non-vegetative landscaping, including the following ignition-resistant options.

  • Sand

  • Decorative gravel

  • Tumbled glass

  • Drainage rock

  • Beach pebbles

  • Mulch, wood chips, bark

4-33 2022 – 2023

Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 4-34

SECTION 5 ELECTRIC METERING: GENERAL

Section 5 Electric Metering: General

5.1. Scope

This section of the manual is designed to help applicants, engineers, and contractors plan acceptable electric metering installations for the electric service supplied by Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E/Company). The information and requirements described are applicable to Section 6, “Electric Metering: Residential,” through Section 11, “Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts, and Primary Services.”

For help with determining the service rating of customer equipment, see Subsection 1.14. located on Page 1-15.

N OTE : See new service and current transformer (CT) installation requirements in Subsection 5.2.4., “Requirements for the Installation of Secondary Terminations (0−600 Volt) in Metering Equipment Requiring CTs,” on Page 5-4.

5.2. General Conditions and Responsibilities

5.2.1. Approved Metering and Service-Termination Equipment

All service termination and metering equipment must conform to nationally recognized standards, meet all applicable certification requirements, and bear the certification marking of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Nationally recognized standard organizations include, but are not limited to, the following: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and the Occupational Safety & Health Administration’s (OSHA’s) Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Program. The equipment also must meet the requirements specified in the Electric Utility Service Equipment Requirements Committee (EUSERC) manual and be approved by PG&E for use in construction projects.

N OTE : Employees perform an onsite field inspection of the equipment and installation and provide final approval only after ensuring that all of the specified requirements have been met.

5.2.2. Drawing Submittal Requirements for Metering and Service Termination Equipment

Applicants must meet the requirements in Item A., through Item E., both on Page 5-2, when installing electric metering and service termination equipment. This applies to residential and nonresidential applications and includes meter panels, pedestals, panelboards, and switchboards that are wall-mounted, pad-mounted, pole-mounted, or on panelboard construction.

5-1 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.2.2. (continued)

A. Submit drawings for metering equipment to PG&E using either hard-copy paper drawings ( in triplicate ) or electronic files. Drawings must be reviewed and pre-approved either by local meter shop employees or by a meter specialist.

B. Submit drawings for metering equipment to PG&E with the following current ratings. Do not submit drawings for metering equipment rated less than described below unless PG&E requests them.

  1. Single-Family Residential

       - Wall-mounted and pad-mounted (floor standing): Current
    

ratings of 320 amps or above.

  1. Multifamily Residential

       - Wall-mounted and pad-mounted (floor standing): Current
    

ratings of 320 amps or above.

      - Pedestals (pad-mounted): Current ratings of 200 amps or above.
  1. Nonresidential Commercial and Industrial

       - Wall-mounted and pad-mounted (floor standing): Current
    

ratings of 400 amps or above.

      - Pedestals (pad-mounted): Current ratings of 100 amps or above.
  1. Nonresidential Agricultural

       - Pole-mounted, panelboard construction, and wall-mounted: Current
    

ratings of 200 amps or above. A single-line drawing also must be submitted showing the fuse size, circuit breaker, and main disconnecting device ratings for all of the equipment being installed.

      - Pad-mounted (floor standing): Current ratings of 400 amps or above.

C. Also, submit drawings for newly designed metering equipment or for equipment that has been modified from existing designs as shown in the Greenbook or EUSERC manuals. This applies to metering equipment of any current rating. This includes, but is not limited to, new electric equipment containing electrical devices or components for customer generation interconnections. Drawings must be sent to the Meter Engineering Department for review. The review process could take 6 months or longer.

D. Ensure that submittals contain specific references from either the

EUSERC manual, this Electric and Gas Service Requirements ( Greenbook ) manual, or both. When using Greenbook references, include the applicable subsection(s), figure(s), and page number(s). For EUSERC references, use the drawing and sheet numbers.

E. Ensure that submittals contain specific references for each component or section included with the equipment. Provide a detailed summary of the specification information in the beginning of the submittal, as well as on all equipment figure drawings in the submittal.

2022 – 2023 5-2

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.2.3. Applicant Responsibilities

The applicant must provide, install, own, and maintain the following equipment and structures listed in Item 5.2.3.A. through Item 5.2.3.L., starting below.

A. All meter sockets and enclosures, metering transformer cabinets, and switchboard service sections intended for utility use, unless PG&E permits a specific exception.

B. Use only ring-type meter sockets, enclosures, switchboards, and other metering equipment approved both by PG&E and EUSERC.

C. For Overhead Service: Overhead meter panel, service entrance conductors, conduit, and a weatherhead to the point of attachment to PG&E’s overhead service conductors.

D. For Current-Transformer Panels and Switchboards: Lugs, an underground service-termination pull box, and a separate current-transformer cabinet and meter box.

E. All Indoor Meter Panels : Individual, residential, or nonresidential applicants with a meter-panel rating of any size, installed inside a meter room or inside a building or other type of structure, must follow all of the requirements described below.

  1. Install, own, and maintain a separate, nominal, 2-inch diameter conduit with pull tape inside. The conduit and pull tape must extend from the meter panel or switchboard and terminate in a NEMA 3R, 6-inch x 6-inch x 6-inch enclosure located 8 feet to 10 feet above grade on the outside surface of the building.

2. Follow the applicable requirements in Numbered Document 094683,

“Smart Meter Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and High-Rise Buildings,” located in Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”

  1. Do not use the conduit. The conduit is for PG&E’s metering equipment only. See additional requirements in Item 5.2.3.G. on Page 5-4.

F. All Indoor or Outdoor Meter Panels: Individual, nonresidential applicants with a meter-panel rating of 500 kW or greater must install, own, and maintain a separate, nominal, 1/2-inch diameter conduit with pull tape inside. The conduit and pull tape must extend from the telephone service location and terminate in a horizontal position on top of the meter panel section, 6 inches to 12 inches from the front of the meter panel. The conduit must not enter or pass through the switchboard or switchgear. Do not cut or penetrate the top of the electric panel or switchboard.

5-3 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.2.3. (continued)

E XCEPTION: Approved meter−panel locations that have adequate wireless radio frequency (RF) signal capabilities may be exempted from installing the 1/2-inch phone line conduit. To request a variance, customers must submit switchboard and meter-panel drawings with the jobsite address to their local project coordinator early in the service application process. The project coordinator submits this information to the PG&E local meter shop, enabling PG&E employees to make a field determination as to whether or not the conduit should be required. Without an exemption from the meter shop, the 1/2-inch conduit is required and must be installed.

N OTE: A 500 kW minimum, 3-phase (∅) meter panel is defined as one of the following:

  • 277/480 volts, 4-wire wye, and minimum 800 amps

          - 120/208 volts, 4-wire wye, and minimum 1,600 amps
    
          - 120/240 volts, 3-wire delta, and minimum 1,600 amps
    
          - 120/240 volts, 4-wire delta, and minimum 1,600 amps
    
          - 2,400–21,000 volts, primary service, any size
    

G. Conduit installed in the ground, floors, ceilings, walls, or concrete must be made of rigid steel. In any other installation location, the conduit type can be electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or better. For underground installations, the conduit must exit the pad on the outside of the switchgear…not inside the switchgear. See Figure 5-6, “Preferred Location of Conduits for Indoor and Outdoor Meter Panels and Switchboards,” on Page 5-20.

H. For recommendations on the best locations for equipment, ask your project coordinator to contact PG&E’s electric metering department . Questions may include the prime location for a phone interface box, the required point for conduit to exit the meter room or building, or your options in a remote location when a telephone line is unavailable.

I. Transformers rated at 120/240 volts, three-phase, 4-wire, with delta-connected service installed, must have the “high leg” (e.g., power leg, stinger leg) conductor located either in the center phase or on the right phase position. This conductor usually is designated as the “C” phase for metering purposes. Mark (i.e., identify) the conductor (e.g., high leg, power leg, stinger leg) properly. The color orange is typically used for this purpose.

On all self‐contained services, the power leg must be located in the far‐right phase position, usually designated as the “C” phase. Mark (i.e., identify) the conductor (e.g., high leg, power leg, stinger leg) properly. The color orange is typically used for this purpose.

J. Applicant wiring that extends from the distribution section (i.e., branch circuits) must not pass through any PG&E-sealed section.

2022 – 2023 5-4

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.2.3. (continued)

K. Single-metered applicants with single-phase services above 400 amps should consider installing a switchboard as described in Section 10, “Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts.”

L. For Underground Service: Conduit and electric meter panel manufactured for PG&E’s underground service conductors.

5.2.4. Requirements for Installing Secondary Terminations (0−600 Volts) in Metering Equipment Requiring CTs

All non-PG&E personnel (e.g., applicant installers) who install, inspect, or supervise the installation of PG&E services, and all PG&E personnel who schedule, install, inspect, or supervise the installation of services and metering work, must follow the new construction requirements for installing secondary terminations at customer switchboards or meter panels when 600 V metering CTs have not been installed.

rsonnel (e.g., applicant installers) who install, inspect, or supervise the installation of PG&E services, and all PG&E personnel who schedule, install, inspect, or supervise the installation of services and metering work, must follow the new construction requirements for installing secondary terminations at customer switchboards or meter panels when 600 V metering CTs have not been installed.

Non-PG&E personnel installing approved PG&E service-entrance conductors must contact the local PG&E project coordinator and request that the CTs be installed before the service-entrance conductors are installed (usually 1−2 weeks before).

To ensure the safety of field metering personnel, CTs must be installed on new services before the service conductors are terminated in the utility pull section. To prevent the secondary voltage from being energized inadvertently before the CTs are installed, all personnel should know and follow the safety requirements for installing secondary terminations.

Refer to the following PG&E documents for detailed instructions about installing secondary terminations (0−600 volt) in metering equipment requiring CTs:

    - [TD-2424P-01, “Distribution Transformer Operations”](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80e035d1&vd=true&device=false)

    - [TD-6301P-01, “Electric Metering–Safe Work Procedures,”](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80dfff82&vd=false&device=false)

Attachment 1, “Installing 600 Volt Current Transformers”

5.2.4.1. PG&E’s Responsibilities

PG&E provides, installs, owns, and maintains all meters and metering transformers for full-service applicants. For direct access applicants, refer to Direct Access Standards for Metering and Meter Data (DASMMD) in California (March 1999).

5.3. Electric Meters: General Location Requirements

To determine the most satisfactory meter location and to ensure that adequate space is provided for the meter, consult a PG&E project coordinator in the project’s preliminary planning stage. All equipment clearance and working space requirements must be met.

5-5 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.3. (continued)

When an electric panel is being relocated or replaced, and PG&E’s existing service conductor will be used, as determined by PG&E, the panel must be positioned so the service conductor can be reconnected properly. The existing service conductor must be able to be reconnected to the underground electric panel termination lugs or the external service-entrance conductors coming out of the weatherhead for overhead services. If PG&E needs to install additional service conductors or cables to perform the reconnect, the work and material would be at the applicant’s expense. PG&E does not accept cable-termination techniques using pin adaptors, cable ringing, or splicing on additional cable.

The local PG&E meter shop must approve remote meter locations before applicants locate meters away from (i.e., remote from) termination enclosures. Applicants must submit a drawing that shows the distance (in feet) and the accessible path to the remote meter location. Also, describe the size and type of conduit used to attach to the remote meter.

See Section 6, Figure 6-4, “Typical Underground, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Safety-Socket Meter Box Assembly, 201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201 Amps−800 Amps, 1∅,” on Page 6-8, as an example of remote metering.

Applicants can avoid the time and expense of installing additional facilities or relocating existing facilities by consulting with PG&E early in the process.

5.3.1. Basic Meter Location Requirements

The following five lettered items explain PG&E’s basic meter location requirements and are subject to PG&E’s review and approval to ensure compliance. Applicants must ensure that:

A. Locations have at least one clear and unobstructed path or entrance providing access to the working space.

B. Nonportable illumination is provided for the working spaces around meters, metering-related equipment, and associated facilities when meters are located indoors. Also, applicants must provide a hallway or aisle leading to the meter(s) and metering equipment.

C. Locations in elevated areas (e.g., balconies or mezzanines) or in depressed areas (e.g., basements, cellars, or underground rooms) must be accessible by either a ramp or clear stairway that conforms to building-code requirements.

D. PG&E has provided advanced approval when potential locations are not in conflict with prohibited meter locations and are on walkways, alleys, or driveways that provide access to commercial or industrial property. PG&E may grant exceptions if other suitable locations are not available.

2022 – 2023 5-6

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.3.1. (continued)

E. PG&E personnel have full access to inspect, read, or test metering facilities, whether the facilities are located indoors or outdoors. Applicants must ensure that all metering and service facilities are accessible and free of obstacles at all times when the metering equipment is energized. Applicants must maintain these accesses both during and after landscaping activities, fence installations, building construction, building renovation, remodeling activities, etc.

5.3.2. Prohibited Meter and Service Equipment Locations

The following locations are not acceptable for electric meters and service termination equipment.

A. Locations deemed hazardous to either personnel or equipment, or locations found to be unsuitable for entry. These locations include:

  1. Inside any residence.

  2. Directly over any stairway, ramp, or steps.

  3. Any area where personnel may contact either exposed, high-voltage conductors or equipment in motion.

  4. Any area that is accessible only through a trapdoor.

  5. Any elevator shaft.

  6. Any doorway, hatchway, or drive-through pathway designed for picking up goods through a window, where opening the meter panel blocks the through-area.

  7. Areas where entry may be restricted or controlled because of medical, health, environmental, or other safety-related issues.

  8. Any area in close proximity to a lake or water area. These locations are unsuitable when the meter faces the water.

  9. In traffic medians or areas where there is traffic on both sides of the

meter.

  1. Any indoor or outdoor area where personal protection equipment is needed, as determined by PG&E, including eye and hearing protection.

  2. Outdoor areas less than 300 feet away from biowaste, toxic, corrosive, or a similar-type of unsafe substances that could be released into the air, are found in the ground soil, are located in open-air wet ponds, or are stored in dry locations.

B. Underground vaults or enclosures.

C. Areas where vibration, moisture, excessive temperature, fumes, or dust may damage the meter or interfere with its operation.

D. Areas within or requiring access through any restroom, bathroom, shower, powder room, toilet, or private-type room.

E. Portions of buildings where landscaping, fencing, or other construction activities will make the meter inaccessible.

5-7 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.3.2. (continued)

F. Inside any single-family residence, multi-residential, or nonresidential building, garage, or structure that does not meet all of the requirements described in Subsection 5.3.4., “Electric Meter and Service Termination Equipment Rooms,” on Page 5-8.

G. In a metallic cabinet (including doors), room, enclosure, or location that blocks or interferes with the radio frequency signal transmissions that are necessary for PG&E to operate its SmartMeter™ Advanced Meter Reading system. This applies only to meter panels that meet all of the following criteria.

    - Single metered

    - Less than 400 amps continuous rating

    - Wall mounted

H. In a room, utility closet, or area where metering facilities or termination enclosures are less than 3 feet away from any water source such as pipes, valves, fire sprinklers or equipment, or other wet facility.

5.3.3. Locating and Grouping Multiple Meters

When it is practical, PG&E will supply two or more meters from one service and will group the meters at one location Also, see Section 2, “Gas Service,” Subsection 2.3.5, “Multiple Buildings Located on One Lot,” on Page 2-15, and Section 3, “Electric Service: Underground,” Subsection 3.2.5, “Installing Overhead and Underground Service for Two or More Buildings on One Lot,” on Page 3-6.

5.3.4. Electric Meter and Service Termination Equipment Rooms

PG&E prefers to install electric service and metering equipment outdoors. When outdoor locations are not feasible, PG&E allows applicants to design and build electric rooms indoors for the meter and service termination equipment.

Applicants must ensure that meter and service equipment rooms (electric rooms) meet the following requirements. Also, see Figure 5-1, “Allowable Locations for Electric Service and Meter Rooms,” on Page 5-11, for acceptable and unacceptable room locations. If electric rooms cannot be designed and built to meet these requirements, then the service termination and metering equipment must be installed outdoors in a location acceptable to PG&E.

If meters are located in a closet, applicants must meet the requirements described in Item A through Item K., starting below.

A. Electric room locations and specifications must be approved during the initial stages of construction. Submit the following sets of drawings listed below. Drawings should be labeled and marked to help with the review. Drawings must be submitted to your local project coordinator for review by the local meter shop.

2022 – 2023 5-8

5.3.4. (continued)

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

  1. Building site plans – Shows where the electric room is located, including driving and walking paths to the room.

  2. Elevation plans (all sides) – Shows where the room is located, including access and walking paths to the room, and any ramps and driveways leading to the room.

  3. Floor plan – Shows the dimensions of the room, all service and metering equipment to be installed (including fire pumps), and the working space and clearances surrounding all of the equipment.

  4. Single-line drawings – Shows the service termination and metering equipment, fire pump switchboard or panel, transfer switches, customer generation interconnections, disconnect switches, as well as the electrical capacities and voltages of the equipment.

B. Designs must include a designated room for electric service, meters, and metering equipment.

C. Electric rooms must be clear of obstructions and located inside of buildings on the ground floor or no more than one story below the ground floor. The exception is a qualified high-rise building where the walking surface of the highest tenant-occupied floor is over 75 feet high. PG&E may, at its option, approve grouped meter locations on one or more upper floors.

For high-rise buildings, typically 16 stories or greater, PG&E at its discretion might allow subtractive billing for locations that qualify and meet the requirements. Contact your local service planning representative for more information.

D. Electric rooms must have a doorway that opens 90 degrees or more directly to the outside of the building or into an area that is available to the general public. DO NOT design and build meter and service-termination rooms with multiple separate doorways leading up to the room or which must be accessed by walking down a corridor.

N OTE: The term “available to the public” means any person(s) who does or does not live or work at the location can walk into the business, building, or structure and up to the meter room without being restricted by locked doors, gates, security personnel, or other forms of restriction.

E. Electric rooms must have a clear and safe working space as described in Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-17, and Subsection 5.4.5., “Barricades,” on Page 5-21.

F. Rooms must not include gas meters but can be used for communication equipment.

5-9 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.3.4. (continued)

G. Rooms may be locked if the applicant provides PG&E with independent access to the room. Ensure the meter room is locked using one of the following methods.

  1. Preferred: Use an acceptably located key lock box, provided by PG&E and installed by the applicant, to hold the applicant’s key to the electric meter room door. The key’s lock box must be installed near the meter room door. PG&E personnel can use the following meter codes to order a key lock box for an applicant:

       - M170164
    
       - M170171
    
       - M231097
    
  2. Nonpreferred: Use a double-lock device (e.g., hasp), provided by the applicant, with one lock for the applicant and one lock for PG&E. This type of double-lock arrangement is typically used on gates.

H. Rooms must be identified by appropriately marking the doors or doorways as described in Subsection 5.5.1., “Properly Identifying and Marking Meters,” on Page 5-24.

I. Rooms must have conduit(s) and pull tape installed as described in Subsection 5.2.1, “Applicant Responsibilities,” on Page 5-1 through Page 5-3.

J. The applicant must install lighting for the electric meter room. The minimum-acceptable illumination is two lights with a combined brightness of 30 foot-candles.

K. Rooms must be designed and constructed with a means to adequately discharge any excess water that may enter the room from the conduit system. Below-grade electrical rooms must be designed and constructed to eliminate any and all water intrusion into the room, including through the service entrance conduit system.

L. The meter and service-termination (electric) room must be designed and constructed to include an outer wall of the buildings to meet the following requirements.

  1. The PG&E service must be installed from the outside directly into an electric room and may not run under other rooms or spaces in the building before reaching the meter and service termination

room.

  1. The PG&E service must not extend more than 20 feet past the building’s outer foundation into an electric room.

  2. The room must have a doorway that opens 90 degrees or more and leads directly to the outside of the building.

2022 – 2023 5-10

5.3.4. (continued)

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Figure 5-1 Allowable Locations for Electric Service and Meter Rooms

5-11 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.3.4. (continued)

Figure 5-1 – Detail A Outdoor Ramp to Electric Service and Meter Room Below Grade

Notes in Reference to Figure 5-1 and Detail A.

  1. If the electric rooms are located below grade, then the applicant must ensure that an accessible, permanent, and unrestricted walking ramp is provided starting at grade outside of the building and continuing directly to the meter-room door. Additional doors or gates are not allowed along the walking ramp between the outside and the meter room door. PG&E personnel may need to roll heavy equipment into and out of the meter room, so stairs are prohibited.

  2. If the electric meter room(s) is located inside a vehicle garage area, either at grade or below grade, and has building entrance gates or locked doors, then the applicant must ensure that the building is accessible to PG&E through a driveway entrance into the garage that is shared with the building occupants, and PG&E is granted access to any locked entrance gates and doors. A shared garage driveway is secondary access and does not eliminate the requirements for a meter room door directly to the outside of the building or a walking ramp (see Note 1 above) to a below-grade electric room.

  3. Applicants must ensure that electric rooms are not located in the interior of a building connected by hallways, corridors, or other internal passages. This is not considered direct access from the electric room to the outside.

2022 – 2023 5-12

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4. Meter Heights, Clearances, Enclosures, and Protection

5.4.1. Meter Heights

A. Pole-, Pad-, and Wall-Mounted Meters

When installing meter enclosures on a pole, on a wall, or on a pad-mounted structure, applicants must ensure that the meters meet the following requirements, except when installing metering equipment on poles for communication services. In that situation, follow the requirements in 5.4.1.B. on Page 5-14. All metering and service-termination facility installations are subject to PG&E review and approval. The meter height must be measured to the horizontal centerline of the meter axis.

  1. PG&E’s preferred meter height is 66 inches for all individual service-termination and meter-panel installations. All electric meters must be located 75 inches maximum above the ground or standing surface. The minimum meter heights are listed below.

       - Meters installed in self-contained panels rated up to 320 amps
    

must be a minimum of 48 inches.

      - Meters installed in outdoor transformer-rated panels 400 amps

and above must be a minimum of 60 inches. This applies to wall-mounted and panel board construction.

  1. When meters either are enclosed in a cabinet or installed indoors in a meter room, the maximum meter height is the same as for outdoor installations, or 75 inches. The minimum meter height must be 36 inches as measured from the ground or standing surface to the centerline of the meter.

  2. For switchboard service with a current transformer (CT) compartment, the maximum meter height is 72-1/2 inches, as illustrated in Section 10, Figure 10-27, “Standard Switchboard Service Section with CT Compartment and Filler Panel, 0 Volts–600 Volts,” on Page 10-40. This applies both to indoor and outdoor installations.

  3. In locations where snow accumulates, PG&E may require the minimum installed meter height to be increased. Specific meter-height requirements depend on the meter’s location. Ask your local PG&E project coordinator to consult the electric meter department for specific meter-height requirements in snow-accumulation areas.

5-13 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.1. (continued)

B. Communication Service and Meter Equipment

Applicants must ensure that meter panels installed for communication equipment meet all of the applicable Greenbook requirements. For metering equipment installed on poles with communication equipment, refer to the requirements specified on Page 5-14.

  1. Wood Pole Mounted Communication Equipment: Applicants must ensure that communication service and meter equipment installed on PG&E or joint poles is placed so the bottom of the enclosure is a minimum of 7 feet to a maximum of 8 feet from the finished grade. If it is not possible to meet the height requirements, install an electric meter pedestal. For installation requirements, ask your PG&E project coordinator for Numbered Document 027911, “Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment,” for specific requirements.

  2. Pad-Mounted Communication Equipment: When meter panels are attached to communication equipment, they must meet the minimum 48-inch meter height requirements described in Subsection 5.4.1.A., “Pole-, Pad-, and Wall-Mounted Meters,” on Page 5-13. The upper and lower areas on the back of the meter panel must be securely attached to the equipment using all of the manufactured mounting holes. Panels that are not fully attached and secured will not be approved.

  3. Steel, Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment: Before attaching communication equipment to PG&E-owned steel poles, review Numbered Document 094677, “PG&E Metered Electric Service to Antenna and Communication Equipment on Company Owned Steel Streetlight Poles.” For service to municipality owned steel streetlight poles that are on a LS-2 rate schedule, review Numbered Document 094678, “PG&E Electric service to Antenna and Communication Equipment on Municipality Owned Steel Streetlight Poles.”

5.4.2. Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances

Applicants must ensure that meter cabinet enclosures are large enough to provide easy access to the meter and have an adequate working space for maintaining the meter. The cabinet requires a side-hinged door that can be latched open at 90° or more. Also, the enclosure and service equipment must comply with local code requirements. Detailed dimensional requirements are shown in Figure 5-2, “Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances,” and Table 5-1, “Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearance Dimensions,” both on Page 5-15.

ave an adequate working space for maintaining the meter. The cabinet requires a side-hinged door that can be latched open at 90° or more. Also, the enclosure and service equipment must comply with local code requirements. Detailed dimensional requirements are shown in Figure 5-2, “Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances,” and Table 5-1, “Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearance Dimensions,” both on Page 5-15.

Applicants also must ensure that meter cabinet enclosures are maintained and work properly. In corrosive areas a fiberglass enclosure is recommended to help prevent deterioration of the metallic equipment.

2022 – 2023 5-14

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.2. (continued)

Finally, applicants must ensure that when a cabinet enclosure is pad-mounted, a 3-foot clearance is maintained between the edge of the pad and the base of the pole.

CL Window in Door

Used for Meter

Door

A
C
L
Meter
D

A
C
C
C
B
Socket
D
C
C
B
Socket
D
C
C
B
Socket
D
B
C C
D
Socket Socket Socket Socket

Side View Front View

Figure 5-2 Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances

Table 5-1 Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearance Dimensions

Dimension A 11-inch minimum / 15-inch maximum. See Note 1 below.
Dimension B 9-inch minimum to the edge of the access opening.
Dimension C 10-inch minimum to the edge of the access opening.
Dimension D 8-inch minimum from the meter centerline to the top of any protrusion below
the meter or to the bottom of the enclosing cabinet.

1 The 11-inch minimum for Dimension A may be reduced to 8 inches only for residential, wall-mounted, meter cabinet enclosures.

5-15 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.3. Meter Set Clearance Requirements

Figure 5-3, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances,” below, represent various metering facilities’ clearance requirements. If applicants install enclosures on their premises, the enclosures must meet the specifications provided in these illustrations.

See Figure 2-20 and Note 5 on Page 2-35

Figure 5-3 Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances

Notes in reference to Figure 5-3.

  1. Electric meter-panel locations are subject to utility approval and must comply with the applicable code requirements. PG&E does not have specific requirements for the distance from the electric panel to the outside building corner. Information for properly locating the electric meters is found in this section of the manual. See Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-17, for electric meter working space.

nel locations are subject to utility approval and must comply with the applicable code requirements. PG&E does not have specific requirements for the distance from the electric panel to the outside building corner. Information for properly locating the electric meters is found in this section of the manual. See Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-17, for electric meter working space.

  1. Applicants must not install any electrical devices or equipment, including wires, cables, metering enclosures, and telecommunication enclosures, bond wires, clamps, or ground rods within the shaded area around the gas meter. When the gas and electric meters are not enclosed in a cabinet the 36-inch clearance distance is measured from the gas meter riser. When the gas or electric meters are enclosed in cabinets, the 36-inch clearance is measured from the closest edge of the cabinet.

  2. A solid and continuous metallic conduit without couplings, joints, or connections is allowed to run completely through the shaded area at 6 feet or higher above the gas meter regulator vent. The continuous conduit may curve upward and out of the top of the shaded area. Service conduit from the electric meter panel to the weatherhead location must not run horizontally along the top of the roof.

Notes continued on the next page

2022 – 2023 5-16

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.3. (continued)

Notes in reference to Figure 5-3 (continued).

  1. Electric wiring for new photo voltaic or electric meter upgrades may pass through the clearance area shown in Figure 5-3 if the wires are in a metallic, continuous sleeve (conduit) with no joints, couplings, or fittings. The sleeve must extend a minimum of 3 feet on either side of the meter set and must be a minimum of 6 feet above the regulator opening.

  2. See Section 2, “Gas Service,” Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and

Clearances,” Note 5 and Note 6, on Page 2-33, for information about gas facilities.

  1. Applicants must not install water spigots, water lines, cleanout drain lines, gutter systems, or other sources of above-ground or below-ground water to within 36 inches as measured in a straight, horizontal line of any gas facilities or underground electric meter panels and facilities.

  2. For overhead service-meter panels and equipment, applicants must ensure that the clearance from above-ground downspouts and other nonpressurized (i.e., gravity fed) wet facility sources is a minimum of 12 inches radially from the meter panel.

  3. Above-ground water lines, sprinkler systems, and other objects mounted on the wall or above grade are not allowed in any part of the working space in front of the electric meter panel.

5.4.4. Working Space

Working space is defined as the whole area in front of the meter panel, the meter enclosure, the CT section, the service-conductor pulling or termination enclosure, or associated equipment. A working space permits access to the equipment and provides a safe working environment for personnel.

A working space must be located entirely on the applicant’s property or only located in the public right-of-way for municipality or state-owned land . Ask your local project coordinator to contact the PG&E electric meter department to review and approve of any exceptions to the Company’s requirements for metering work spaces and locations.

The working space must be clear, level, and unobstructed at all times. See the minimum required dimensions in Table 5-2, “Working Space Dimensional Requirements,” on Page 5-18.

In flood plains or other areas where elevated platforms are required in front of the meter, install permanent safety rails. The platform must be approved by the local metering department and meet specific PG&E requirements.

Wall-Mounted Equipment: Includes, but is not limited to, service and metering equipment mounted on building or structure walls, panelboard structures, poles, posts, and communication pedestals.

For meter panels and service equipment, the working space is 30 wide x 36 deep x 75 inches tall . See Figure 5-4, “Semi-Flush Meter Installation,” and Figure 5-5, “Enclosed Meter Installation,” both on Page 5-19.

Improved Surface: Applicants must ensure that the entire working space for multi-residential and nonresidential locations with wall-mounted meter panels or pad-mounted, single-metered pedestals up to 200 amps has an improved surface that is constructed from the same material. The improved surface material can be concrete, stone pavers, asphalt, or compacted gravel. The selected improved surface must extend a maximum of 1 inch above grade. All improved surfaces must be completely level. Native soil (dirt) is not an improved surface for the working spaces in these locations.

5-17 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.4. (continued)

The following requirements apply for each improved surface:

      - **Concrete:** Minimum 3,000 pounds per square inch (psi), precast

pad allowed. Poured concrete must be a minimum of 3 inches thick and have wire mesh or rebar.

      - **Stone pavers:** Minimum 3 inches thick, spaced not more than 1/4-inch apart.

      - **Asphalt:** 2 inches thick on top of 2 inches of angular gravel.

      - **Gravel:** Aggregate sized at 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch diameter without sharp

edges, compacted to 90% density, surrounded either by a galvanized metal or pressure-treated wood border on each side and connected together.

Floor-Standing (Pad-Mounted): Includes, but not limited to, switchboards, switchgear, pedestals metering enclosures, and service termination equipment rated over 225 amps. Use concrete to construct the working space surface area. The working space width is the same dimensional width as the equipment section.

Concrete floors, housekeeping pads, and elevated platforms must extend out in front of the whole area to the minimum working space depth. Measure the depth from the outside of the equipment’s outer door. See Figure 5-6, “Preferred Location of Conduits for Indoor and Outdoor Meter Panels and Switchboards,” on Page 5-20, for additional requirements.

Table 5-2 Working Space Dimensional Requirements [2,] [3]

Voltage
(Volts)
Meter/Service
Equipment Type
Dimensions (Inches) Figure(s)
Voltage
(Volts)
Meter/Service
Equipment Type
Width1
Depth
Height4
Height4
0−600 Wall-Mounted
30 36 75 5-4 & 5-5
0−600 Wall-Mounted
Inside Closet
See Note 2 48 75 NA
0−600 Pad-Mounted Pedestals
(0–200 Amps)
30
36 75 NA
0−600 Pad-Mounted
Switchboards, Pedestals
(> 200 Amps),
Termination Enclosures
Same as
enclosure
section
48 See
Note 4
5–6
601−25,000 Pad-Mounted Same as
enclosure
section
96 See
Note 4
5–6

1 The width of the working space is the width of all service-termination and metering equipment (connected or stacked).

2 Closet doors must open a minimum 90 degrees and not reduce the working space in front of the meters and metering equipment. The concrete (or improved surface) working space may extend to the outside past the closet doors.

3 Ensure all clearances from any obstructions are met.

4 The minimum working space height is 12 inches above the top of the pad-mounted equipment, but not less than 75 inches.

2022 – 2023 5-18

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.4. (continued)

Nearest Inside

Nearest Inside

10”

9” Min.

See Table 5-1 and Figure 5-2 for Meter Cabinet

Enclosure Clearances

Space Height

No Enclosures, Boxes, or Other Protruding Objects Are Allowed in Any Area of the Workspace.

Workspace

or Obstruction

Workspace

Property Line or Obstruction or Obstruction Workspace Note: To allow the cabinet door to open fully

  • 78” minimum for installations other than (90 ° or more), increase the 30” minimum-width individual, field-installed meter panels. dimension of the meter working space, as Increase the working-space height for necessary.

  • 78” minimum for installations other than individual, field-installed meter panels. Increase the working-space height for installations greater than 66”.

Figure 5-4 Figure 5-5 Semi-Flush Meter Installation Enclosed Meter Installation

5-19 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.4. (continued)

2” Conduit Route to Outside of Building (See Note 2.)

Terminate 1/2” Conduit on the Inside Between Meter-Panel Doors.

1/2” Conduit to Telephone Service Location (See Note 2)

Install Barrier Posts (Bollards) Outside of the Working Space. See Numbered Document 051122, Table 10, for Bollard Spacing.

Minimum

Working Space Height

Is 12” Above

the Top of the Switchboard,

but not less

than 75”

Terminate 2” SmartMeter Conduit on Top. DO NOT Cut or Penetrate Switchboard.
See
Detail A
See
Detail A
See
Detail A
See
Detail A
See
Detail A
See
Detail A
See
Detail A
See
Detail A
See
Detail A

Figure 5-6 Preferred Location of Conduits for Indoor and Outdoor Meter Panels and Switchboards

Detail A

Notes in reference to Figure 5-6.

96” (See Table 5-2)

Detail B

Pad Out to the Dimensions Shown in Table 5-2

  1. A level, concrete structure (e.g., floor, pad) must extend out the minimum-required distance in front of all sections to which PG&E requires access. This structure is used for floor-standing equipment (e.g., switchboard, pedestals greater than 200 amps, termination enclosure).

  2. A 1/2-inch phone-line conduit may be required for all indoor and outdoor meter panels rated 500 kW or greater. See Item E. and Item F. in Subsection 5.2.3., “Applicant Responsibilities,” on Page 5-3. A 2-inch SmartMeter conduit is required only for indoor, wall-mounted or pad-mounted meter-panel enclosures of any size.

Notes continued on the next page

2022 – 2023 5-20

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.4. (continued)

Notes in reference to Figure 5-6 (continued).

  1. The switchboard’s bottom horizontal support frame must not protrude more than 3 inches above the floor or pad. This is in front of all PG&E sections (see Detail B).

  2. The pad-mounted equipment must be set back less than 2 inches from the front edge of a raised pad. And the concrete pad must be less than 2 inches above the ground or floor. This is true for all PG&E sections. Otherwise extend the pad outward.

  3. For the finished surface type, see Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-17.

5.4.5. Barricades

In areas where either the meters and service termination equipment or the working spaces are exposed to vehicles or hazardous conditions, a permanent barricade outside of the working space is required. PG&E determines when this type of protection is required.

Physical protection from vehicular traffic is provided based on the level of vehicular exposure. Applicants must protect all electric metering and service termination equipment located in the following areas:

A. Within 3 feet of the following areas:

        - Single-family residential driveways or parking areas (including

garage areas)

        - Thoroughfares

        - Multifamily or nonresidential (i.e., commercial or industrial)

driveways or parking areas

        - Commercial refuse container locations

        - Loading docks and freight-handling areas

        - Paved areas without curbs

B. Within an area that has, in PG&E’s judgement, an unusually high risk of vehicular damage, the applicant must install a system of barrier posts (bollards) that meet PG&E’s specifications.

A suitable barricade for vehicular traffic is concrete-filled steel pipes, either 3 inches or 4 inches in diameter, securely set in an adequate concrete footing for support. Permanently installed posts are required. Do not use removable barrier posts or bolt-down-type barrier posts for metering and service-termination equipment.

See Figure 5-7, “Meter Panel Clearance and Protection From Residential Vehicle Driveway or Parking Space,” on Page 5-22, and Figure 5-8, “Nonresidential or Multifamily Metering and Service Equipment Clearance and Protection From Nonresidential or Multifamily Vehicle Areas,” on Page 5-23.

For information on ordering and installing bollards, see Numbered Document 051122, “Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment,” Page 25 through Page 27. This document is included in Appendix C.

5-21 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.5. (continued)

Contact your local PG&E inspector and project coordinator to determine if a barricade is required.

Figure 5-7 Meter Panel Clearance and Protection from Residential Driveways or Parking Spaces

Notes in reference to Figure 5-7:

  1. If a permanent barrier or obstruction (e.g., fireplace, wall, curb) exists less than 3 feet to the side of the meter panel and protrudes outward a minimum of 12 inches from the building farther than the meter panel, then the meter panel may be considered sufficiently protected. A PG&E inspector or meter technician will make this determination. Obstructions are not allowed in the working space.

  2. For single-lane driveways or parking spaces a minimum of 12 feet wide with meters installed at a height of 66 inches to 75 inches as measured from the ground to the centerline of the meter, or with a meter panel installed in a permanent cabinet with a meter height of 48 inches to 75 inches, the meter panel may be sufficiently protected. A PG&E inspector or metering technician make this determination. For cabinet specifications see Figure 5-2, “Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances,” and Table 5-1, “Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearance Dimensions,” both on Page 5-15.

enterline of the meter, or with a meter panel installed in a permanent cabinet with a meter height of 48 inches to 75 inches, the meter panel may be sufficiently protected. A PG&E inspector or metering technician make this determination. For cabinet specifications see Figure 5-2, “Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances,” and Table 5-1, “Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearance Dimensions,” both on Page 5-15.

  1. If the descriptions for protected meters provided in Note 1 or Note 2 do not apply, then install permanent (fixed) bollards (barrier posts) 30” to 36” apart and outside of the 30-inch-wide meter(s) working space(s). The client must ensure that the bollards are installed a minimum of 6 inches to a maximum of 48 inches from the front of the meter panel. Refer to Numbered Document 051122 for the bollard spacing and installation requirements. Note that 2-inch bollards are allowed only for single-family or two-family residential applications. Refer to Numbered Document J-95, “Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement,” (located in Appendix C) for the 2” bollard requirements. Bollard material specifications and material codes are listed in Table 5-3, “Bollard Post Materials,” on Page 5-23.

2022 – 2023 5-22

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.5. (continued)

Table 5-3 Bollard Post Materials

Description Length Code Docu-
ment
Yellow, 2” diameter, Schedule 40 galvanized pipe with reflective
tape (2” wide) and a steel cap
56” 150117 J-95
Gray, 2” diameter, Schedule 40 galvanized pipe with reflective
tape (2” wide) and a steel cap
56” 234188 J-95
Fixed post: 3” diameter, 1-3/4” fiberglass core with5/8”
polyethylene cover (Manufactured by Allwire FGP674)
67” 150553 051122
Yellow, 4” diameter, Schedule 40 galvanized pipe with reflective
tape (2” wide)
78” 150122 051122

Figure 5-8 Nonresidential or Multifamily Metering and Service Equipment Clearance and Protection from Vehicle Areas

Notes in reference to Figure 5-8:

  1. Install permanent (fixed) bollards outside the working space, as required. See the exceptions below in Note 2 and Note 3.

  2. If a minimum 6-inch high, permanent curb or equivalent barrier is present and outside the working space, bollards may not be required for low-traffic and light-duty vehicle areas. A PG&E inspector or metering personnel make this determination.

  3. If a minimum 6-inch high, permanent, vehicle parking stop or other equivalent barrier is at least 24 inches away from the front of the working space, then bollards may not be required in light-duty vehicle areas only. A PG&E inspector or metering personnel make this determination.

  4. See Numbered Document 051122 for bollard spacing, material specifications, and installation requirements.

5-23 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.6. Meter Protection

Applicants must ensure that meters and metering equipment are enclosed in a protective cabinet in the following situations. Meter heights less than 36 inches are not allowed.

A. For all installations, when the meter is less than 48 inches high, as measured from the horizontal centerline of the meter to the standing surface. Meter heights less than 36 inches are not allowed.

B. When the meter is mounted on, or recessed in, any wall at a school or similar establishment and public safety is an issue.

C. When environmental problems are anticipated.

D. When corrosion problems are anticipated or present.

E. When anticipating vandalism.

Any protective structure surrounding meters and metering equipment must be pre-approved by the local meter shop and provide safe working conditions as determined by PG&E. Approval from the local authority having jurisdiction also may be required.

When a fence or surrounding structure is approved to be built around service termination and metering equipment (e.g., switchboard, switchgear), the doors or gates leading into the structure must open outward away from the equipment being installed and are preferred to be located on the front of the structure.

If the door(s) or gate(s) into the structure are on the sides or the back of the service termination and metering equipment, the working space depth in front of the equipment is required to be increased to twice (e.g., 4 feet times 2 = 8 feet) the distance. If there are doors on the back of the switchboard or switchgear with PG&E equipment inside, or if there are multiple switchboards inside the enclosed structure, the same requirements apply.

5.5. Meter Identification and Seals

5.5.1. Properly Identifying and Marking Meters

Applicants must ensure that each individual meter position, its service disconnecting means, and the unit or dwelling being served is marked clearly and permanently. PG&E will not install meters unless the permanent address, the location, or, when applicable, the area being served is marked at each meter location. Three of the following examples describe acceptable permanent markings. One example describes unacceptable markings.

A. Preferred: An identification plate attached by screws, rivets, or weatherproof adhesive.

B. Non-preferred but acceptable: Paint that cannot be removed using common solvents. Apply the paint using a stencil.

2022 – 2023 5-24

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.5.1. (continued)

C. Non-preferred but acceptable indoors: Manufactured decals that are not installed outdoors and will not peel or fade.

D. Unacceptable: Tape-type and label-maker stick-on labels; hand-written lettering (sharpie, paint stick, etc.).

E. Temporary: Temporary meter panels rated up to 200 amps that will be installed less than one year and will not be used as a temporary-to-permanent installation may use hand-written lettering that is legible to PG&E as well as any marking methods described in Item A. through Item C (above).

N OTE: For outdoor meters, the marking material must have an ultra violet (UV) protection rating.

The identification must be legible. It must include a specific apartment number, a street number, use, or location. Ensure that the information is verified. A store name or other generic description may be included, but does not constitute acceptable identification when used alone.

Where individual meters serve a remote location, or where meters are grouped at a common location (both residential and nonresidential), applicants must ensure that they mark the sites or buildings and identify meters properly.

For meters serving agricultural pumps or other large equipment, mark the ampacity rating of the main service disconnecting means (i.e., breakers, fuses) along with the type of equipment and the nameplate rating. For multiple individual disconnects with a main disconnect, mark the aggregate rating for all of the disconnects installed.

PG&E will not install meters without a permanent address or location mark at each meter location.

When it is appropriate, applicants should include the area being served by the meter when permanently marking the site.

PG&E may make an exception to the rules for permanent marking when the Company is requested to set a meter for a single-family home that is under construction. In this case, PG&E will set the meter if the home’s address is noted clearly and legibly either on the street side of the dwelling or on the lot in front of the dwelling. PG&E understands that during construction, the “permanent” address sometimes is not available when the dwelling is ready for the meter to be set.

Customers who install distributed generation (e.g., solar, wind, battery storage) that is connected to the electric meter panel are required to install permanent signage affixed to the panel indicating an alternative source of generation is interconnected. Signage and maps also are required at the meter panel for the alternating current (ac) disconnect switch location when it is more than 10 feet away and out of the line of sight from the meter panel.

5-25 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.5.2. Sealing Meters and Metering Equipment

PG&E seals all meters and enclosures for utility meters, metering equipment, and service-entrance equipment using PG&E’s seals.

Applicants cannot locate or install equipment within meter sections, meter panels, switchboard sections, or equipment enclosures with existing PG&E seals unless they receive authorization from the PG&E electric meter group.

E XCEPTION : Equipment that provides access for replacing over-current protection fuses is exempted.

Only an authorized PG&E representative can break the PG&E seal.

Certified meter service providers (MSPs) also will seal all meters and enclosures for meters, metering equipment, and test-bypass switches owned by their respective companies with their companies’ seals, as described in the DASMMD in California (March 1999) document.

5.5.3. Locking Provisions

All transformer-rated and all three-phase installations must have provisions for sealing or locking all of the main service switches or breakers in a permanent (off) position. When installing service equipment of any phase or ampacity that contains multiple service (disconnect) switches, the applicant must ensure that provisions for locking each individual service (disconnect) switch are provided.

If the main breaker or service disconnects are installed in an enclosure, the door(s) for the enclosure also must have locking provisions that accept a PG&E lock or other locking mechanism and can accommodate more than one lock. Do not use a keyed lock handle (e.g., T-handle) to secure enclosures.

The applicant must ensure that the locking mechanism is a permanent installation and that the clip, with a hole for the lock shaft, is made of a rigid metal. The breaker or switch covers can be nonmetallic. Finally, the applicant must ensure that these provisions are sealable and lockable with a padlock having a 5/16-inch lock shaft.

5.6. Meter Types and Connections

The following requirements refer specifically to meter types and connections. Applicants must follow the guidelines listed below.

A. When installing a new service, ensure that the panel enclosures rated at 125 amps are Class 100 ampere services. Services and enclosures rated at 225 amps are Class 200 ampere services.

B. Ensure that transformer-rated meters have a current rating of less than 100 amps (e.g., CL5, CL10, or CL20).

C. Do not use K-based (i.e., bolt-in) meters when designing new installations. Services that need 400 amps (continuous) require current-transformer facilities.

2022 – 2023 5-26

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.6. (continued)

D. Ensure that sockets meet the requirements of UL Standard UL-414, “Standard

for Meter Sockets.”

E. Locate potential taps, including the neutral connection, behind a sealed panel.

F. Ensure that the meter manufacturer designs and fabricates transformer-rated meter sockets that are installed on hinged panels for back connection.

Applicants should use Table 5-4, “Meter Socket Requirements (Number of Jaws),” on Page 5-27, to find specific meter-socket requirements and to ensure they provide the proper equipment.

Table 5-4 Meter Socket Requirements (Number of Jaws)

Service 0−225 Amperes 226−320 Amperes 1 400 Amperes
and Above
Voltage Phase No. of
Wires
Self-Contained Self-Contained Transformer
Rated
120/240 1 3 4 4 2 6
120/208 3 1 3 5
120/208Y 3 4 7 13 or 15 4
240 5 3 3 5 5 8
120/240 3 4 7 13 or 15 4
277/480Y 3 4 7 13 or 15 4

1 A socket-based, Class 320-ampere (continuous) meter will be installed on a Class 400 meter panel, rated at 80% continuous (i.e., 320 amps). Do not use Class 400, bolt-in meters on new installations. Service rated at 400 amps continuous requires current transformers to be installed.

2 Only use a 4-jaw meter socket for a Class 320-ampere meter for single-phase residential applications.

3 In locations where PG&E maintains a 120/208-volt secondary system, 3-wire, single-phase service, typically the service is limited to what can be supplied by a main switch or service entrance rating of 225 amps. Single-phase loads that exceed the capacity of a 225-ampere main switch or service-entrance rating usually are supplied with a 120/208Y-volt, three-phase, 4-wire service.

4 The 15-jaw socket is acceptable, but not required.

5 Limited availability, at PG&E’s discretion. Not for new installations.

Figure 5-9, “Connection Diagrams for Self-Contained Meter Sockets,” and Figure 5-10, “Connection Diagrams for Transformer-Rated Meter Sockets,” on Page 5-28, show the required connections for self-contained and transformer-rated

meters.

5-27 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.6. (continued)

Neutral

Load

Line

Neutral

Neutral

Top Terminal

Bottom Terminal

Alternate 6 o’clock Position Load

Line

Load

120 Volts−1Ø, 2 Wire

Line

Load

240 Volts−3Ø, 3-Wire � (Limited availability, at PG&E’s discretion. Not for new installations.)

480 Volts−3Ø, 3-Wire � 120/240 Volts− 120/208 Volts−3Ø, 4 Wire (Closed to new applicants.) 3Ø, 4 Wire or 277/480 Volts−3Ø, 4 Wire

Front Views Shown

120/240 Volts−1Ø, 3 Wire 120/208 Volts 1Ø−3-Wire Wye

Power Leg

Line

Load

Line Line

Neutral Neutral

Load Load

Figure 5-9 Connection Diagrams for Self-Contained Meter Sockets

6 Jaw 8 Jaw 13 Jaw 15 Jaw (Optional)

Figure 5-10 Connection Diagrams for Transformer-Rated Meter Sockets

N OTE : PG&E is responsible for wiring transformer-rated meter sockets.

2022 – 2023 5-28

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.6.1. Using a Meter Socket Adapter for Overhead-to-Underground Conversion

Applicants may use approved meter socket adapters to convert existing services. Do not use them to establish new service. For more information, see PG&E’s Numbered Document 061032, “Residential and Small Commercial Overhead to Underground Electric Service Conversion.” Consult a PG&E project coordinator to determine which conversion method to use. The applicant must ensure that the meter socket adapter’s grounding strap is connected to the grounded wire within the meter panel.

5.6.2. Installing Non-Allowed and Unauthorized Customer Equipment

Applicants must not install any type of customer or third-party-owned meter-adapter, surge suppressor or protection device (e.g., TVSS), meter socket adapter, power usage or recording device, security or monitoring equipment, or similar interface device in, on, or between the electric revenue meter and meter sockets or inside any PG&E sealed section, including the instrument transformer (i.e., CT, PT) or service termination sections. These types of installations are not allowed and compromises the applicant’s electric service. If safe to do so, PG&E personnel will remove any customer-owned devices and leave them on the applicant’s premises if they are discovered.

Only PG&E-approved meter socket adapters used for overhead-to-underground conversions and PG&E’s green meter adapter (GMA) used with specific types of residential solar (i.e., photo-voltaic) generation systems are exempt.

5.6.3. Fire-Pump Connections

PG&E allows the following types of service connections to new and existing switchboards and fire-pump meter panels. The requirements are described below.

A. All fire-pump service connections must be approved by the local city, county, or state inspecting Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Site plans and equipment drawings must be submitted to PG&E for approval.

B. The service disconnect, meter panel, switchboard, or switchgear for the fire pump must be located in the same electrical room as the main service meter panel, switchboard, or switchgear, as well as the utility termination section. They cannot be located in another room or building. When installed outdoors, the equipment must be located next to each other.

C. For switchboards rated up to 600 volts (i.e., secondary), the following types of connections are allowed.

  1. Preferred connection for new switchboards: A fire-pump service connected in a dedicated tap section installed in the main switchboard. See Option #1 in Figure 5-11, “Fire-Pump Equipment Location and Service Connection Options,” on Page 5-31.

5-29 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.6.3. (continued)

If allowed, the local AHJ could require the tap section to be located away from the main breaker on the opposite side of the termination section.

  1. Alternative connection for new or existing switchboards: A fire-pump service connected to the load side (i.e., after the main breaker) of the main switchboard. See Option #2 in Figure 5-11 on Page 5-31.

D. For switchgear (i.e., primary) rated between 601–25,000 volts, applicants can use the following types of connections.

  1. A fire-pump service connected in a dedicated tap section of the switchgear.

  2. A fire-pump service connected to the load side (i.e., after the main breaker) of the main switchgear.

E. For main switchboard or switchgear service termination equipment rated between 0–25,000 volts, applicants can use the following type of connection.

  1. A separate and dedicated utility service that is connected directly to the fire-pump meter panel, switchboard, or switchgear. Usually, this is referred to as a second PG&E service. See Option #3 in Figure 5-11 on Page 5-31.

F. Do not place a fire-pump service tap or connections in the utility termination, instrument transformer, or metering sections.

G. Ensure that the wiring configurations for fire-pumps (either 3-wire or 4-wire) are the same as the wiring configurations for the main switch.

H. Ensure that required access panels and required signage for meter panels and switchboards serving fire pumps are installed.

I. Ensure the ampacity rating of the fire pump switchboard or meter panel does not exceed the ampacity rating for main service termination equipment (e.g., main switchboard, meter panel).

2022 – 2023 5-30

5.6.3. (continued)

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Electric Service Termination and Meter Room

Conduit

Option #3 PG&E Second Underground Service Dedicated For Fire Pump

Main Switchboard
Utility
Termination
Section
Option#1 Option#1 Customer Breaker
and Load Sections
Check with AHJ If Fire-Pump
Tap Section Is Allowed Next To
Service Disconnecting Means
Option #2

PG&E Underground Service

Figure 5-11 Fire-Pump Equipment Location and Service Connection Options

5.7. Main Service Disconnects and Switching Sequences

5.7.1. Main Service Disconnects

For each installed meter, the applicant, in compliance with applicable codes, must furnish and install a fusible switch, circuit breaker, or other approved disconnecting means for controlling all of (and only) the energy registered by that meter. When the governing code or ordinance permits, the disconnect means may consist of a group of fusible or circuit-breaker disconnects. PG&E requires access to these disconnects.

For all metering equipment, applicants must place the main service disconnect switch adjacent to the meter(s), not more than 10 feet away and within line of sight. The main service disconnect switch may be located inside an approved meter room or outside of the building being served, while adjacent to the metering equipment.

PG&E prefers applicants to have provisions for individual disconnects when they use switchboards with multimeter installations.

N OTE : See Section 1, “General,” Subsection 1.14., “Determining the

Service Rating,” Paragraph B., “Enclosure Nameplate Labeling and Rating,” when more than one disconnecting means is installed.

5.7.2. Main Service Disconnect Switch Rated for Amperes Interrupting Capacity (AIC)

State and local codes require the service equipment’s main disconnect switch and fuse, or the circuit breaker, to be rated at the available short-circuit current value.

5-31 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.7.2. (continued)

When possible, PG&E designs its facilities so that the short-circuit duty at the service termination will not exceed 10,000-amps symmetrical for new, single-family, residential applicants that are supplied by an individual service drop or lateral that is rated at 225 amps or less. This service includes mobile homes and duplexes.

For short-length service drops or laterals rated at 225 amps or less that are constructed from the PG&E distribution system to the service termination equipment, it is not practical for PG&E to design its facilities to limit the short-circuit duty to 10,000 amps. For short-service installations and for all service termination equipment rated greater than 225 amps, PG&E provides, on request by the applicant, the maximum-available short-circuit current based on the service equipment’s capacity. If the applicant increases the service equipment’s capacity, the maximum-available short-circuit current may be higher.

5.7.3. Arc Flash Assessment

PG&E’s electric system is dynamic and continually being reconfigured due to system needs and general maintenance. Therefore, due to its many variables, a range of impedance’s should be considered in an arc flash assessment. To request an arc flash assessment, contact your local project coordinator.

5.7.4. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers

Electronic circuit breakers using a trip unit are programmable devices that measure the current flowing through the circuit breaker and initiate a trip signal, when appropriate. An electronic trip unit has multiple dials that can be adjusted to various settings.

The IR setting is the continuous current value and must not exceed the ampacity rating of the enclosure. It is similar to the capacity or ampacity rating on thermal or thermal magnetic circuit breakers. The IR settings must be indicated on the trip unit. The IR settings typically are lettered and identified on a chart with the corresponding ampacity values. Electronic trip units are available with multiple ratings for each standard frame size.

The circuit breaker frame is the housing that contains the current-carrying and current-sensing components, along with the tripping and operating mechanism. The frame size (e.g., 800, 1,200, 1,600 amps) is the largest ampere rating available in a group of circuit breakers of similar physical configuration. Other types of breakers may have different frame sizes.

2022 – 2023 5-32

5.7.4. (continued)

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Figure 5-12 Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit

Note in reference to Figure 5-12.

  1. Match the letter on the IR dial to which the arrow head is pointing with the letter on the IR setting chart to determine the ampacity setting for the breaker.

5.7.5. Meter and Main Service Switch Sequence

PG&E places its meters and metering equipment ahead of (i.e., on the supply side of) the applicant’s main service disconnecting means. Figure 5-13, “Single Meter With Main Service Switch,” Figure 5-14, “Single Meter With Multiple Service Switches,” and Figure 5-15, “Multimeter Disconnect Without Main Switch,” below, all provide examples of this type of installation. Figure 5-17, “Multiple Remote Switchboard or Meter Panel Locations,” on Page 5-35, also provides an example of meter and main service switch sequences for large projects with multiple meter rooms or buildings.

5-33 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.7.5. (continued)

PG&E permits exceptions to this sequence only in circumstances where applying the electrical code requirements result in the applicant’s main service disconnect means being installed ahead of PG&E’s metering and metering equipment. Figure 5-16, “Multimeter Installation with Main Disconnect Switch,” below, provides an example of this type of installation. In these instances, an individual disconnect switch also must be installed on the load side of each meter.

The local jurisdiction having authority for enforcing the electrical code requirements determines most of the requirements that applicants must follow when installing their means to disconnect. PG&E requires a main service disconnect for multimeter installations with more than six meters or

individual service disconnects.

In large meter rooms where additional metered switchboards may be electrically connected after the main switchboard, or where wall-mounted meter stacks are electrically connected to a tap section of a switchboard, a map and signage indicating where the main service breaker is located are required on each connected switchboard or meter stack.

1

Meter

Switches with Fuses Permitted

Line

Main Service Disconnect Switch or Circuit Breaker

Line

Load (Branch Circuits)

Branch Circuit Fuses or Circuit Breakers

Load

Figure 5-14 Single Meter with Multiple Service Switches

Service Entrance

Main
Swit
Brea

Service Switches or Circuit Breakers

Load

Figure 5-16 Multimeter Installation with Main Disconnect Switch

Meter

Figure 5-13 Single Meter with Main Service Switch

Service Disconnects

Load

Load

Meter

Figure 5-15 Multimeter Installation Without Main Disconnect Switch

2022 – 2023 5-34

5.7.5. (continued)

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Service Entrance Main Switchboard Line

To Additional or Future Remote Switchboards

With Main Disconnect Switch (See Note 1) Remote Switchboard or Meter Panels Without

Main Disconnect Switch (See Note 1)

Figure 5-17 Multiple Remote Switchboard or Meter-Panel Locations

Notes in reference to Figure 5-17.

  1. When a switchboard or meter panel is located in a different room, floor, or building from the main switchboard, it is considered remote.

  2. Customer services installed from the main switchboard to remote switchboards or meter panels must be one continuous run of cables without any entering enclosures or junction boxes along the path.

5.8. Grounding

Applicants must bond and ground their electric services and metering equipment as required by applicable electrical codes, local ordinances, and PG&E requirements.

A. Applicants must not use PG&E’s gas facilities as part of the electrical grounding system.

  1. Do not install electrical devices or equipment, wires, cables, bonding or grounding wires, clamps, or ground rods around the gas meter set as shown in Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearance,” on Page 2-33, and Figure 2-23, “Dimensions for Typical, Residential, Multimeter Installations,” on Page 2-40.

5-35 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.8. (continued)

  1. Do not use PG&E’s gas service piping, gas risers, or meter facilities for electric bonding or grounding that allows the gas meter, piping, or other gas facilities to become current-carrying conductors.

  2. Do not allow gas pipe to be electrically bonded within meter enclosures, cabinets, or meter rooms.

B. PG&E supplies single-phase, 120/240-volt and 120/208-volt services and three-phase, 4-wire wye and delta services with a grounded service neutral conductor. When PG&E permits a three-phase, 3-wire, 240-volt service, one phase conductor must be grounded.

C. Applicants must locate the terminations (e.g., ground terminal) for their grounding electrode conductors outside of any section that PG&E seals . Applicants must ensure that their terminations are designed to permit their grounding systems to be isolated, when necessary, from PG&E-supplied services. See “Notes in reference to Figure 5-18 and Figure 5-19 .,” on Page 5-37, specifically Note 3, “Equipment Bonding,” which requires a continuous bond wire when grounding outside of the PG&E sealed section.

D. Applicants must not locate their grounding electrodes, grounding electrode conductors, or grounding ring conductors inside or near any PG&E electrical distribution equipment, enclosures, or vaults .

E. As mandated in the applicable sections of the electrical code, applicants may be required to physically protect their grounding electrode conductor against mechanical damage. PG&E prefers, but does not require, the grounding electrode conductor wire to be protected against physical damage by rigid steel conduit or armored cladding. Metal conduit must be bonded to an effective, grounded, fault-current path as described in the electrical code requirements.

F. Applicants must ensure that a grounded neutral connection, which is required for safety and metering purposes, exists in the PG&E-sealed section and is terminated in the same enclosure as the grounding electrode conductor.

G. When installing ground rods, applicants must only use approved ground rods and clamps as described in Numbered Document 013109, “Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps,” located in Appendix C. For homes and buildings, an Ufer grounding system using rebar is an acceptable substitute to the ground-rod method.

ommon/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/013109.pdf) Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps,” located in Appendix C. For homes and buildings, an Ufer grounding system using rebar is an acceptable substitute to the ground-rod method.

When ground rods are installed for concrete pads, refer to Numbered Document 045292, “Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers.” When ground rods are installed for equipment pads other than transformers (e.g., switchboards), install them according to their application. Finally, when installing ground rods in box pads, use Numbered Document 064309, “Box-Pad for Pad-Mounted Transformers,” for installation information.

H. To ensure proper access to PG&E facilities during installation and maintenance, do not attach the bonding and grounding attachments for communication equipment on or near any PG&E sealed sections of the meter panel that would restrict access to the panel doors and meter.

2022 – 2023 5-36

5.8. (continued)

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Out to Load

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

See the Grounded Neutral Conductor

Metallic
Service
Conduit
Self- Disconne
and UL-
Contained Enclosure
Approved
Meter
Bonding
Hubs.
L L L L L L See
I O I O I O Notes
3 & 4
N A N A N A
E D E D E D
See the Grounded Neutral
Bonding Wire Conductor Requirements in
See Note 3. Note 1 (below Figure 5-19).
Grounding Electrode Conductor
Sealed Meter
and Termination ÉÉÉÉÉÉGÉround Rod or Other Electrode
rounded
Enclosure
onductor
etallic
onduit
nd UL-
pproved
onding
Hubs.
See
Notes
3 & 4
See the Grounded Neutral
Conductor Requirements in
Note 1 (below Figure 5-19).
Service
Disconne
Enclosure
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

Self-
Contained
Meter
Service
Disconne
Enclosure
L
I
N
E
L
O
A
D
L
I
N
E
L
O
A
D
L
I
N
E
L
O
A
D
rounded
onductor
Sealed Meter
and Termination
Enclosure
Bonding Wire
See Note 3.
Metallic
Conduit
and UL-
Approved
Bonding
Hubs.
See
Notes
3 & 4
See the Grounded Neutral
Conductor Requirements in
Note 1 (below Figure 5-19).
Grounding Electrode Conductor
Ground Rod or Other Electrode

Requirements in Note 1 (below Figure 5-19).

Figure 5-18 Grounding Outside of the Sealed Section−Self-Contained Meter

Service Disconnect Enclosure

Out to Load

Transformer
Rated
Meter
Main
Service
Disconnect
Load
See the Grounded
Neutral Conductor
Requirements in
Note 1 below.
Transformer
Rated
Meter
Current Transformer
Mounting Base Furnished
and Installed by Applicant
N
E
U
T
R
A
L
Line Side If PG&E UG Service
Load Side If PG&E OH Service
See Note 3.

Sealed Meter and Termination Enclosure

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ Ground Rod or Other Electrode

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

Figure 5-19 Grounding Outside of the Sealed Section–Transformer Rated Meter

Notes in reference to Figure 5-18 and Figure 5-19 are required for the safety of workers and the proper operation of PG&E facilities.

  1. Neutral Conductor: PG&E requires that the neutral conductor be grounded. Ground the neutral conductor by using the preferred methods described in Note 2 and Note 2.a. Or use the nonpreferred method described in Note 3.

Notes continued on the next page

5-37 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.8. (continued)

Notes in reference to Figure 5-18 and Figure 5-19 (continued).

  1. Service Disconnect Enclosure:

a. Extend the neutral conductor from the meter panel to the service disconnect enclosure and terminate it to a grounded (i.e., non-insulated) ground/neutral terminal bus as shown in Figure 5-18, “Grounding Outside of the Sealed Section–Self-Contained Meter,” and Figure 5-19, “Grounding

Outside of the Sealed Section–Transformer-Rated Meter,” both above.

b. The service disconnect switch and its enclosure must be within 10 feet or less from the service

termination and metering equipment and within the line of sight.

c. The grounding electrode conductor’s termination point and the ground/neutral terminal bus must be located in the service disconnect and cannot be located in gutters or raceways.

  1. Equipment Bonding: Install an equipment grounding conductor (EGC) between the PG&E service termination enclosure (e.g., meter panel) and the service disconnect enclosure. The EGC is required in this layout. Run the EGC (i.e., bonding wire) through metallic conduit and attach it to the inside of each enclosure. Use Myers hub fittings to connect the conduit with the enclosures. These fittings are Underwriters Laboratories (UL) certified for bonding and are required to connect the conduit with the enclosures. PG&E and the local authority having jurisdiction must approve the conduit and fittings. The customer bond wire is allowed to terminate in a manufactured bond lug installed at the bottom of meter panel.

se Myers hub fittings to connect the conduit with the enclosures. These fittings are Underwriters Laboratories (UL) certified for bonding and are required to connect the conduit with the enclosures. PG&E and the local authority having jurisdiction must approve the conduit and fittings. The customer bond wire is allowed to terminate in a manufactured bond lug installed at the bottom of meter panel.

  1. Conduit: The conduit diameter size connected to the meter panel must be equal to, or larger than, the diameter of the maximum knockout manufactured in the panel. The approved bonding hubs should not extend out past the edges of the meter panel.

Table 5-5 Grounding Requirements for Wall-Mounted Panels

Material
Neutral Wire Customer
Cables to
Disconnect
Switch
Ground Rod
and Wire
Bond Wire
Allowed to be
Terminated Inside
Sealed Sections of
Meter Panel
Yes Yes No Yes

5.9. Temporary Service

5.9.1. Temporary Service Using Permanent Service Panels

To lessen the potential for damage by staples and nails during the construction phase, applicants must use only galvanized rigid steel (GRS) in locations where permanent service facilities will be installed and/or energized before completing the wall. The steel protects the conduit and/or cables from damage.

2022 – 2023 5-38

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.9.1. (continued)

Applicants also must protect their grounding conductors against mechanical damage by rigid steel conduit or armor cladding that runs from the main panel to a subterranean location and is embedded in concrete (e.g., garage). The service facilities and the wall must be a permanent and stable structure. If couplers are installed they must be of the same type (GRS) as the conduit. If transitioning from steel to rigid plastic the coupler must not reduce the internal diameter of the conduit. Refer to the steel and steel to plastic couplers in Numbered Document 062288, “Underground Conduits,” located in Appendix C.

For the installation requirements of GRS conduit and couplings, see Section 3, Subsection 3.3.3.1., “Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Couplings,” on Page 3-12.

The service panel and facilities must meet all PG&E and local jurisdiction requirements. The service facilities must pass inspection by a PG&E inspector before being energized.

As an alternative to constructing a permanent wall to support the meter panel, two flat steel bars that are each a minimum of 1/4 inch thick and 3 inches wide may be permanently cemented into the foundation and run vertically parallel with both sides of the meter panel. The flat side of the steel bars must face the sides of the panel, be long enough to reach the top of the panel, and be permanently secured to the panel.

5.9.2.

Temporary-Service Metering Pedestal

Applicants must coordinate the connection of pedestal service conductors with PG&E project coordinators. Before installing temporary-service metering pedestals, applicants must obtain any inspections and permits that are required from the local authority having jurisdiction.

Applicants must install temporary-service metering pedestals as shown in Figure 5-20, “Temporary-Service Metering Pedestal,” on Page 5-40.

5-39 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.9.2. (continued)

75” Max.

36” Min.

Splice Box

Ground
Line
ax.
referred
in.
ax.
referred
in.
ax.
referred
in.
ax.
referred
in.
ax.
referred
in.
ax.
referred
in.
ax.
referred
in.
ax.
referred
in.
ax.
referred
in.
ax.
referred
in.

Front View Side View

Figure 5-20 Temporary-Service Metering Pedestal

s:

2022 – 2023 5-40

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.9.3. Temporary Plug-In Service

The local inspection authority having jurisdiction must approve all of the permanent service connections to the main service disconnect before an applicant installs a temporary service adapter. Additionally, the local authority having jurisdiction must approve the applicant’s plan for installing and using temporary service adapters.

Applicants must install temporary plug-in service as shown in Figure 5-21, “Plug-In Temporary Service,” and Figure 5-22, “Typical Plug-In Adapter,” below.

Meter

Note: Make a neutral connection by attaching a pigtail directly to the neutral with a #4 copper wire.

manent
er
osure
Soc
Jaw
Mete
Sock
Socket
Spades
Figure 5-22
Typical Plug-In Adap
Note: Make
attaching a
neutral with
manent
er
osure
manent
er
osure
manent
er
osure

Ground Line

Figure 5-21 Plug-In Temporary Service

s:

5-41 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.10. Connecting Non-Utility Power Sources to Utility Services

By enacting California Health and Safety Code, Division 104, “Environmental Health,” Part 15, “Miscellaneous Requirements,” Chapter 5, “Electrical Hazards,” Sections 119075 through 119090, the legislature of the state of California intended to prevent electricity generated by permanent or portable electric generators from backfeeding into a utility’s electrical distribution system. In addition, California Code of Regulations ( CCR ) Title 8, Section 2320.9, “Backfeeding or Interconnection,” says that electrical power sources, both permanent and temporary, can not be connected to a premises’ wiring system, or parts of such a system, unless positive means are used to prevent electricity from being transmitted beyond the premises’ wiring system, or beyond any intentionally segregated parts of such a system.

E XCEPTION : The service utility can authorize an interconnection.

A positive means is defined in this CCR subpart as a device that, when used or operated, interrupts or prevents the flow of current to or from the electrical system. Also, a positive means provides the device operator or user with a visual or definite indication of the existing condition or state of the electrical system.

PG&E requires customers to notify the company when they are installing generation or using a generator. If installing an applicant-owned and operated generator that operates in parallel (back feeds) with PG&E’s system, or has any battery storage capabilities, the applicant must contact PG&E’s Electric Generation Interconnection (EGI) department by email at rule21gen@pge.com.

If the applicant-owned and operated generator will never operate in parallel with PG&E’s system or is fueled by natural gas connected to PG&E’s gas meter, the applicant must contact the PG&E Business Customer and Renovation Center at 877-743-7782 for the interconnection requirements specific to the location where it will be used.

Customers installing applicant-owned and operated generators that will not run in parallel with PG&E’s system, do not have battery-storage, and are not fueled by natural gas connected to a PG&E gas meter must call the PG&E Customer Service Line at 800-743-5000 to have their generators noted on the service point at their premises.

Also, for interconnection requirements, applicants should refer to PG&E’s Distribution Interconnection Handbook, which is available on PG&E’s Internet website at http://www.pge.com/mybusiness/customerservice/nonpgeutility/generateownpower /distributedgeneration/interconnectionhandbook/index.shtml

N OTE : See Numbered Document 060559, “Disconnect Switch Requirements

for Distributed Generation Customers,” located in Appendix C, when customer generation systems are installed on their premises.

5.10.1. Specific Interconnection Requirements for Services Up to 600 Volts

Residential and small commercial applicants with generating facilities on their premises who want to take advantage of PG&E’s standard net energy metering (NEM) program must meet the following requirements.

2022 – 2023 5-42

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.10.1. (continued)

A. Requirements for Small Power Generators (Qualifying Facilities) and Co-Generation Interconnections Including NEM Interconnection Installations

Table 5-6 below shows the requirements for an ac disconnect.

Table 5-6 Requirements for AC Disconnect Switches

Inverter-Based Generators Phase(s) AC
Disconnect
Required?
Self-Contained Meter Panel, Socket-Based,
320 Amps or Less (Continuous Current Rating) 1
All Other Self-Contained or Transformer-Rated
Meter Panels
Single
All
No2
Yes
Non-Inverter-Based Generators Phase(s) AC
Disconnect
Required?
All Self-Contained and Transformer-Rated Meter
Panels
All Yes

1 An ac disconnect is required for all K-base meter panels of any ampacity rating. 2 If an ac-disconnect switch is installed, it must be PG&E approved.

A fusible ac disconnect switch is required for generator interconnections ahead of the main breaker (line/supply side connection) and after the meter. Also required is an engraved placard (signage), indicating there is a line/supply side connection, installed on the metering equipment. For specific requirements, refer to Numbered Document 094670, “Supply Side Interconnection Requirements for Distributed Generation.”

n, installed on the metering equipment. For specific requirements, refer to Numbered Document 094670, “Supply Side Interconnection Requirements for Distributed Generation.”

A nonfusible ac disconnect switch may be installed if the generation is connected to a dedicated, alternative generation breaker that came manufactured (e.g., solar ready) with the meter panel. For specific requirements, refer to Numbered Document 094670, located in Appendix C.

As specified in Electric Rule 21 , “Generating Facility Interconnections,” and as required by PG&E, the generating facility must have an ac disconnect switch that meets the requirements described in Numbered Document 060559 and listed below.

  • Easily accessible by PG&E, when requested.

  • Manual and gang operated. Lockable in the “open” position.

  • Allows visible verification that an air-gap of separation has occurred.

  • Located 10 feet or less from PG&E’s electric meter at the point of common coupling or interconnection and is seen easily, in line of sight, from the panel.

5-43 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.10.1. (continued)

    - Permanent, approved sign(s) attached at PG&E’s electric revenue

meter’s point of common coupling. A map showing the location of the ac disconnect switch also may be required.

    - Installed in a safe and acceptable location (either outdoors or in a

meter room) that meets the same location, height, and working space requirements as a meter panel. The height is measured from the ground to the top of the switch.

    - The disconnect switch must be installed to only isolate the customer

generation sources and must not disconnect customer loads.

    - The disconnect switch must not be electronically controlled from a

remote location to close in the switch to the “On” (energized) position.

For additional information on disconnect switches and distributed generation requirements, see PG&E’s Distribution Interconnection Handbook .

B. Virtual Net Energy Metering − VNEM (NEMV)

This program allows qualified participants to install a single solar system to cover the electricity load of both common and tenant metered areas connected at the same service delivery point.

This Electric Rate Schedules table helps housing owners allocate a solar system’s electricity to tenants enabling residents to receive the direct benefits of the building’s solar system without requiring the generator to be physically connected to each billing meters.

Refer to Numbered Document 076249, “Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations,” found in Appendix C, which explains the requirements for VNEM installations and illustrates the various metering and connection options for VNEM projects. Check the PG&E Electric Rate Schedules website for the latest information on this program.

C. Requirements for Generators That Are Not Permanently Connected (i.e., Temporary Connections)

Portable electric generators must be connected as described in the California Health and Safety Code, Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5, Section 119075(b). This code says that any portable electric generator that can be connected temporarily to an applicant’s electrical system, and that is supplied typically by an electrical corporation or state or local public agency, can be connected only after separating the applicant’s electrical system from that of the electrical corporation or state or local agency.

This rule applies to any generator connected as a temporary (i.e., nonroutine, nonscheduled) or emergency source of power.

Connect any portable electric generator that is used periodically as a source of power, either on an as-needed or scheduled basis, as described in Subsection 5.10.1.D., on Page 5-45. An example would be a generator used to provide backup power for equipment maintenance.

2022 – 2023 5-44

Generator

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.10.1. (continued)

D. Requirements for Generators That Are Connected Either Permanently or Periodically to an Electrical Service and Used on a Planned, Routine, or Scheduled Basis, but Do Not Operate in Parallel with the PG&E System.

Generators falling under this category must have a disconnect switch that is accessible to, and in a location approved by, the serving utility.

These generators must be connected as described in PG&E’s Electric Rule 2 , “Description of Service,” Item E.6, and in the California Health and Safety Code , Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5, Section 119075(c). These rules state that any electrical generator that can be permanently connected to an applicant’s electrical system must be connected only by means of a double throw switch (see Figure 5-23 on Page 5-45). This switch isolates the applicant’s electrical system from that of the electrical corporation or state or local agency.

E XCEPTION : Generators that are designed to run in parallel with the servicing utility’s system, and that are approved by that utility, are exempt from these rules.

The double throw switch may be either a manual or automatic transfer switch meeting the requirements of UL Standard 1008, “Transfer Switch Equipment.” The switch may be an integral part either of the generator assembly or of the service facilities, and must be approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

Please visit “Electric Generator Safety” (http://www.pge.com/generator/) for more information.

To Meter

To Main Fuse Box

To Generator

Figure 5-23 Transfer Switch

N OTE: Ensure that the transfer switch is installed after the meter panel on the customer’s side, not before the meter panel on PG&E’s side.

5-45 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.10.1. (continued)

Figure 5-24 SLD Manual Transfer Switch

Notes in reference to Figure 5-24.

  1. Ensure that the automatic or manual transfer (safety) switch is a double-pole, double-throw switch certified to Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) Standard 1008, “Transfer Switch Equipment.”

  2. Do not reroute or modify line-side (supply) cables or busing coming from the meter compartment to the distribution section of the panel. Do not modify PG&E-sealed sections.

  3. A disconnect switch is required to be installed between the transfer switch and meter panel. The disconnect switch may be exempt from being installed if one of the following conditions are met.

    • If a manual transfer switch is installed, the blades have a visible air gap when switched to the “off” position.

    • If an automatic transfer switch is installed, the transfer scheme is a “break before make” open transition.

  4. For some meter panels, a disconnect switch may need to be installed between the transfer switch and customer generation.

2022 – 2023 5-46

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.10.1. (continued)

E. Requirements for NEM Revenue Metering With a 4-Wire System at the Point of Common Coupling

NEM revenue metering that has a 4-wire system at the point of common coupling also must have a NEM meter panel configured for a 4-wire system (three phases and a neutral).

When the normal source of voltage supplying PG&E co-generation metering potentially can be interrupted, PG&E, at its option, may install metering with an auxiliary source of power at the applicant’s expense.

F. Requirements for Generators Powering 10 kW (or Less), Stand-Alone, Field-Installed Telecommunication Facilities and Special Applications

Applicants can own 10 kW (or less) generators used for stand-alone, field-installed, telecommunication facilities and special applications. However, PG&E field personnel perform maintenance and routine testing on electric supply and meter facilities, and must be able to perform these functions even when applicants are unable to be present.

Applicants must provide a positive means to prevent their generators from backfeeding into the utility system. This requires installing special equipment, as described in the PG&E Distribution Interconnection Handbook .

Usually, these equipment installations are performed in the field. The generator or alternate power source either is integrated with or is made a part of stand-alone equipment and metering facilities. For example, an applicant could install a double throw switch to isolate his or her equipment and power supply and prevent electricity from flowing into the electric metering and supply system.

5.10.2. Warning Statements and Labels for Interconnected Services

California Health and Safety Code, Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5, Section 119080(a), requires that every manufacturer of a portable or permanent electrical generator that is capable of being connected either permanently or temporarily to a commercial, industrial, or residential structure’s electrical system include a warning statement.

The warning statement must be published in the generator’s instruction manual and a legible warning label must be present on the generator. The warning statement must contain the requirement found in California Health and Safety Code , Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5, Section 119075, and explain potential electrical hazards that backfeed can create when it flows into a utility’s distribution system.

nia Health](http://leginfo.legislature.ca.gov/faces/codes_displaySection.xhtml?sectionNum=119075.&lawCode=HSC)_ and Safety Code , Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5, Section 119075, and explain potential electrical hazards that backfeed can create when it flows into a utility’s distribution system.

The same warning information must be included in all advertisements offering portable electrical generators.

5-47 2022 – 2023

Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.10.2. (continued)

California Health and Safety Code, Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5, Section 119080(b) also requires that portable electrical generators display a legible warning label on a visible surface of the generator. It goes on to say that individuals or public agencies can not sell or rent to another person or public agency, or offer for sale or rent to another person or public agency, a portable generator that does not have a warning labeled displayed on the equipment.

5.10.3. Violation

California Health and Safety Code, Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5, Section 119090, states that violating the requirements of Section 119075 through Section 119085 is a misdemeanor offense, subject to a fine of not more than $500.00 or not more than 6 months imprisonment.

5.10.4. References for Customer Generation

PG&E has numerous requirements for installing portable or permanent sources of customer generation. Customers who install solar, battery storage, and backup generation systems will find useful information and requirements in these documents listed below.

Table 5-7 Customer Generation References

060559 Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation
Customers
076249 Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations
094670 Supply Side Interconnection Requirements for Distributed
Generation
094684 Green Meter Adapter (GMA) for Customer Generation
TD-2306M Distribution Interconnection Handbook

5.11. Plug-In Electric Vehicle Interconnections

Residential customers with Plug-In Electric Vehicles (PEVs) can connect the Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) to their residences under PG&E’s existing Electric Schedules. Customers must notify PG&E of the additional electrical load before connecting a PEV. The increased load may require the electric service cables, conduit, and meter panel to be upgraded.

al customers with Plug-In Electric Vehicles (PEVs) can connect the Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) to their residences under PG&E’s existing Electric Schedules. Customers must notify PG&E of the additional electrical load before connecting a PEV. The increased load may require the electric service cables, conduit, and meter panel to be upgraded.

Additional PEV information can be found in PG&E’s Electric vehicles website at http://www.pge.com/electricvehicles/. For questions regarding PG&E’s PEV requirements, please contact the Discover building and renovation services at 877-743-7782.

2022 – 2023 5-48

SECTION 6 ELECTRIC METERING: RESIDENTIAL

Section 6 Electric Metering: Residential

6.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides the Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E/the Company) service specifications and requirements for residential electric metering. Also, it describes the required locations for those residential meters. This section includes specific information that is not covered by the basic requirements in Section 5, “Electric Metering: General.”

6.2. Residential Electric Service: Specifications and Requirements

PG&E typically provides electricity for residential and commercial applicants served on a domestic rate schedule with 3-wire, 120/240-volt, single-phase, 60-hertz (Hz), alternating current (ac) service. However, the Company is able to supply 3-wire, 120/208-volt, single-phase, 60 Hz, ac service at some locations. This service is limited to a service-entrance rating of 225 amperes (amps). Applicants should contact their local PG&E project coordinators and ask about the type of services that are available for their specific locations.

N OTE : See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk Contact

Information,” at the front of this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed by area.

6.2.1. Service Classes

The 125-amp-rated panels are classified as Class 100. The 225-amp-rated panels are classified as Class 200.

6.2.2. Test-Bypass Facilities

For single-phase residential installations, test-bypass facilities may be provided, but are not required. However, test-bypass facilities are required for any of the following installations.

A. Single-family residential Service Class 320 meter, or residential meter panels that are larger than 225 amp, 120/240 volt, single phase, 3-wire.

B. Live-work homes, housing, or buildings.

C. Residential meter panels of any size or phase that supply power to elevators.

N OTE: Single-family homes may be exempt if the elevator system has integrated safety features with a backup battery system acting as an emergency power supply.

D. All common and tenant area meter panels of any size or phase, at multi-residential and live-work buildings with 2 to 5 units, that supply power to fire alarms or equipment, security alarms, laundry rooms, or significant interior lighting. Significant interior lighting is for hallways, storage rooms or areas, and garage areas.

E. All common and tenant area meters at multi-residential and live-work buildings with 6 or more units.

6-1 2022 – 2023

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.2.3. Electric Meter Socket Covers and Seals

When service cable connections are made at residential or nonresidential customer overhead or underground meter panel, termination enclosure, or pull section, whether the service is left energized or de-energized, the following requirements apply.

A. Cover and seal all meter sockets with an approved blank-off cover (i.e., pie plate) or set the electric meter(s). PG&E material codes for electric meter covers are M249424 and M249559.

B. Seal all sealable covers on the customer-owned service termination and metering equipment using PG&E-approved seals.

Do not energize meter panels and sockets unless bland-off meter covers are installed on vacant meter sockets.

6.3. Meter Locations

An applicant must consult a PG&E project coordinator during the initial construction phase of his or her project to determine the appropriate meter panel and current-transformer cabinet (if installed) location and to ensure that adequate space is provided for the metering equipment. PG&E must review and approve all meter installations before the meters are installed.

When meters are installed in a confined or enclosed area, applicants must ensure that they design a way for PG&E personnel to read the meters from the outside of the enclosures (e.g., window, opening).

The following four, lettered paragraphs provide location requirements that are applicable to residential metering.

A. Locate the meters and metering equipment either in outdoor, unfenced areas or mount them on, or recess them in, an exterior building wall. Do not mount metering equipment on, or recess metering equipment in, single family residences or inside garages.

B. Locate the meters and metering equipment in a meter room that is accessible through an outside doorway.

C. For a multifamily or residential building, locate the meters and metering equipment in a meter room either on the ground floor or in the basement level (or other acceptable location). The installation must be accessible directly from a public area.

D. In large, multifamily, multistory, high-rise residential buildings where the walking surface of the highest tenant-occupied floor is over 75 feet high, PG&E may, at its option, approve grouped meter locations on one or more upper floors.

E. An applicant who plans to install metering equipment on any floor above the ground floor in a multistory building must contact a PG&E project coordinator as early as possible during the initial stages of the project. Except for qualified high-rise buildings, PG&E will not approve of any equipment location that is above the building’s ground level.

2022 – 2023 6-2

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.3. (continued)

F. When meters will be installed indoors see Numbered Document 094683, “Smart Meter Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and High-Rise Buildings,” located in Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”

Indoor Meter Rooms and](https://www.pge.com/pge_global/common/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/094683.pdf) High-Rise Buildings,” located in Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”

G. Locate electric meters in the same general area as gas meters when designing single-family residences. For clearance specifications refer to Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” Subsection 5.4.3., “Meter Set Clearance Requirements,” on Page 5-16, and Section 2, “Gas Service.”

6.3.1. Installing Utility Services to Mobile Homes

A. Typically, PG&E will not supply utility services and/or metering facilities to mobile homes that are located or set up in any area, including a mobile home park, where utility service facilities are attached directly to the mobile home except under the following circumstances.

  1. The mobile home is fixed in place (i.e., no running gear or wheels). The mobile home must not be capable of movement.

  2. The mobile home is installed on a foundation system as described in State of California, Title 25, “Housing and Community Development,” Division 1, “Housing and Community Development,” Chapter 2, “Mobilehome Parks and Installations,” Article 7, “MH-Unit and Commercial Modular Installations and Facilities,” Section 1333, “Foundation Systems.”

B. PG&E will make an exception and install utility services to a location where mobile homes may be moved, including mobile home parks, under certain, specific conditions.

  1. The mobile homes must be served by meter pedestals or other PG&E-approved services and the meter facilities must be installed at a fixed location.

  2. Applicants are responsible for connecting their mobile homes to those fixed locations and to the meter pedestals or other utility facilities.

See Numbered Document 052521, “Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments,” for more information and for specifications. This PG&E document is included in Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents,” and also in PG&E’s Electric Underground Construction Manual, Book 1.

6-3 2022 – 2023

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4. Services

6.4.1. Single Meter: Underground Service

A. Services, 0 Amps Through 225 Amps, Single Phase

Figure 6-1, “Typical Underground Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter-Socket Panel (Residential, 0 Amps−225 Amps),” on Page 6-5, illustrates a single, underground, residential, single-phase meter panel (i.e., 4 terminal for a 120/240-volt service and 5 terminal for a 120/208-volt service).

The numbered items below describe the applicant’s requirements when designing these types of underground services.

  1. Design the socket and enclosure for underground service conductors.

  2. Ensure that enclosures designed for either overhead or underground service entry meet all of the requirements for both types of service.

  3. Ensure that all cable-termination lugs are suitable to use with both aluminum and copper conductors. The lugs must be compatible with a range of conductor sizes.

The minimum conductor size for services up to 125 amps is #6 American wire gauge (AWG) to 1/0 AWG. The minimum conductor size for services rated from 126 amps to 225 amps is #2 AWG to 250 thousand circular mils (kcmil).

  1. Use separate, independently supported, service-termination lugs that extend from the socket, and connect to it, using a bus bar. Provide a minimum radial clearance of 1-1/2 inches between the hot bus terminals and the ground or neutral surfaces. The termination facilities cannot be side- or angle-mounted in relation to the front of the panel.

  2. Ensure that the socket enclosure has a separate lug in the sealable section. Use this lug exclusively for terminating PG&E’s neutral conductor. If the neutral terminal is insulated from the enclosure, PG&E will provide the applicant with a bonding screw or jumper.

  3. Ensure that the applicant-owned wiring that extends from the distribution section (i.e., branch circuits) does not pass through the sealable section(s).

  4. Locate the applicant’s service-grounding electrode conductor outside of the sealable section and design it to permit the applicant’s grounding system to be isolated easily from PG&E’s neutral, when necessary.

2022 – 2023 6-4

6.4.1. (continued)

Self-Contained Meter Socket

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

Alternative/Parallel Energy (e.g., PV) Breaker, Manufacturer Installed on Select Panels on the Line/Supply Side (Ahead) of the Main Breaker.

Main Breaker
Applicant
Distribution
Section
(Optional)
r
N
Underground
Service
Termination
No Custome
Cables or
Equipment

PG&E Service Conduit (in the Center Position)

Figure 6-1 Typical Underground Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter-Socket Panel (Residential, 0 Amps−225 Amps)

Notes in reference to Figure 6-1.

  1. These panels are allowed with or without a manufactured-installed alternative energy breaker on the line (supply) side of the main breaker.

Table 6-1 Residential (0 Amps−225 Amps) Enclosure

Rating in
Amps
X Y N W Conduit
Rating in
Amps
Minimum Dimensions (In Inches) Minimum Dimensions (In Inches) Minimum Dimensions (In Inches) Minimum Dimensions (In Inches) Minimum Dimensions (In Inches)
Up to 125 8 4 6 6.5 2 – 3
126 to 225 11 5 8-1/2 6.5 3 – 4

B. Services, 226 Amps Through 320 Amps, 120/240 Volts, Single Phase, Residential

Figure 6-2, “Typical Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter-Socket Panel for a Class 320 Meter (Residential, 120/240-Volt, 226-Amp Through 320-Amp Service),” on Page 6-6, illustrates a single, underground, residential, single-phase, 120/240-volt, Class 320-amp meter panel. Applicants must ensure that this panel:

  1. Conforms to the requirements for underground-fed, 320-amp metering equipment.

  2. Is designed with test-bypass facilities and has provisions for using manual bypass links.

6-5 2022 – 2023

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.1. (continued)

  1. Is marked with either a rating of “320 Amperes Continuous” or “400 Amperes Maximum (320 Amperes Continuous).”

  2. Is only used with residential services.

Manual Bypass

1”
Min.
4” Min.
1”
Min.
4” Min.
1”
Min.
4” Min.
6” Min. 6” Min. 6” Min.

Side View

Panel Not Allowed in Nonresidential Applications

Center Position

Front View

Figure 6-2 Typical Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter-Socket Panel for a Class 320 Meter (Residential, 120/240-Volt, 226-Amp Through 320-Amp Service)

C. Services, 201 Amps Through 600 Amps, Single Phase or 400 Amps Three Phase with Current Transformers

Applicants must consult their local PG&E project coordinators when single-phase services exceed 400 amps. Applicants may need to install three-phase service to conform to PG&E’s Electric Rule 2, “Description of Service,” requirements.

Figure 6-3, “Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet (201 Amps−400 Amps; 1∅ or 3∅),” on Page 6-7, illustrates a single-metered, underground, residential meter panel.

Figure 6-4, “Typical Underground, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Safety-Socket Meter Box Assembly, 201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1∅,” on Page 6-8, illustrates how service and metering components can be separated into individual enclosures.

N OTE : See Section 9, “Electric Metering: Components,” for details about the components in Figure 6-3 and Figure 6-4.

2022 – 2023 6-6

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.1. (continued)

Applicants must ensure their conductors are installed before PG&E installs the current transformers. Also, applicants must ensure that their service-entrance conductors and equipment meet the following requirements.

  1. The current transformer mounting base must include termination bolts, Belleville washers, and nuts on the line and load sides necessary to connect the PG&E current transformers and service conductors to the line side.

  2. The applicant conductors must be terminated on the top (load side) of the current-transformer mounting base or termination enclosure busing. Applicant conduit must not be installed within 2 inches of the PG&E service entrance conductors. Applicant conductors must be routed properly to ensure they do not cross in front of or behind the PG&E conductors and conduit and do not obstruct the PG&E

current transformers or test switch areas.

Test Switch Locations (For Mounting Base Detail, See Figure 9-2 on Page 9-3.)

400 Amps Max. ( 1 or 3 )

PG&E Service Conduit (in the Center Position)

Sealable Studs

Transformer-Mounting Base Furnished and Installed by Applicant

10” ID

W Dimensions: 3-Wire 1 ∅ = 24” Min. 4-Wire 3 ∅ = 36” Min.

ID
1/8”
3”
3”
22” M
11” Min.
15”
3-1/2”
)
1/8”
ID
3”
3”
15”
1/8”
11” Min.
3-1/2”
22” M

ID
3”
3”
15”
1/8”
11” Min.
3-1/2”
22” M

ID
3”
3”
15”
1/8”
11” Min.
3-1/2”
22” M

3”
3”
3”
3”
ID
3”
3”
15”
1/8”
11” Min.
3-1/2”
22” M

3”
3”
22” M
ID
3”
3”
15”
1/8”
11” Min.
3-1/2”
22” M

3”
3”

3-1/2” Max.

Figure 6-3 Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1or 3)

6-7 2022 – 2023

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.1. (continued)

ServiceTermination Pad

See Section 9, Figure 9-12, on Page 9-10

Transformer−Rated Meter Box

Mounting Bracket for Test Switch

PG&E Service Conduit (in the Center Position) Conduit-to-Service Switch or Breaker

Figure 6-4 Typical Underground, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Safety-Socket Meter Box Assembly (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1)

6.4.2. Single Meter: Overhead Service

A. Services, 0 Amps Through 225 Amps, Single Phase

Figure 6-5, “Combination Meter Socket Load Center,” on Page 6-9, illustrates the 4-terminal, 120/240-volt and 5-terminal, 120/208-volt overhead service and meter panel. This panel is only allowed for residential customers with a single-phase overhead service. Individual meter socket boxes that do not have a main breaker as part of the panel are not allowed.

Enclosures designed for a combination of overhead and underground conductors must meet all of the requirements for both types of conductor entry.

2022 – 2023 6-8

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.2. (continued)

Service-Entrance Conductors (Conduit in the Center Position)

Neut ral (White Wire)

ductors
Position)
ral
Wire)
Main
Breaker
Section

ductors
Position)
ral
Wire)
Main
Breaker
Section
ductors
Position)
ral
Wire)
Main
Breaker
Section
Wire) Wire) Wire) Wire)
Wire) Main
Breaker
Section
Main
Breaker
Section
Main
Breaker
Section

Figure 6-5 Combination Meter Socket Load Center

Notes in reference to Figure 6-5.

  1. Allowed only for single-family residential homes.

B. Services, 226 Amps Through 320 Amps, 120/240 Volts, Single Phase

Applicants must ensure that this panel:

  1. Conforms to the requirements for overhead-fed, 320-amp metering equipment.

  2. Is designed with test-bypass facilities and has provisions for using manual bypass links.

  3. Is marked with either a rating of “320 Amperes Continuous” or “400 Amperes Maximum (320 Amperes Continuous).”

  4. Is used only with residential services.

6-9 2022 – 2023

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.2. (continued)

ions for 3” Min., x. Conduit in the r Position
Position Position
2” Min.
4” Min.
1-1/2” Min.
1-3/4” Min.
22” Min.
4” Min.
1-1/2”
1-3/4”
4” Min.
1-1/2”
1-3/4”
4” Min.
1-1/2”
1-3/4”
22” 22” 22”
22” Sealing Studs
Sealing Studs

Front View

Panel Not Allowed in Nonresidential Applications.

1”
Min
4” Min.
1”
Min
4” Min.
1”
Min
4” Min.
6” Min. 6” Min. 6” Min.

Side View

Figure 6-6 Typical Combination Meter and Service Termination Panel for a Class 320 Meter (Residential, 120/240-Volt, 226-Amp Through 320-Amp Service)

C. Services, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps, Single Phase or Three Phase, with a Current Transformer

Applicants should consult with a PG&E project coordinator before installing single-phase services that exceed 400 amps. Applicants may need to install three-phase service to conform to PG&E’s Electric Rule 2 requirements.

Figure 6-7, “Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet, (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅),” on Page 6-11, illustrates a single-metered, overhead, residential meter panel.

Figure 6-8, “Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Meter Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅),” on Page 6-12, illustrates a single, overhead, residential, single-phase or three-phase service and meter panel with current transformers.

N OTE : See Section 9 for details about the components in Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8.

2022 – 2023 6-10

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.2. (continued)

Applicants must ensure their conductors are installed before PG&E installs the current-transformers. Also, applicants must connect the service entrance conductors to the line and load sides of the current-transformer mounting base.

  1. The current transformer mounting base must include termination bolts, Belleville washers, and nuts on the line and load sides necessary to connect the PG&E current transformers. See Section 9, for details about these internal components.

  2. The applicant’s service entrance conductors must be terminated on the top (line side) of the current-transformer mounting base or termination enclosure busing.

  3. The applicant’s load conductors must be terminated on the bottom (load side) of the current-transformer mounting base or termination enclosure busing.

  4. Applicant conduit must not be installed within 2 inches of any corner of the cabinet.

  5. Applicant’s conductors must be routed properly, ensuring they do not obstruct the PG&E current transformers or test switch areas.

Service Conduit (in the Center Position)

Transformer-Mounting Base Furnished and Installed by Applicant

Sealable Studs (Four Places)

Test Switch Locations (For Mounting Base Detail, See Figure 9-2 on Page 9-3.)

duit er Position)

Line Side Line Side
Load Side Load Side

Front View 3-1/2” Max.

W Dimensions: 3-Wire 1 ∅ = 24” Min. 4-Wire 3 ∅ = 36” Min.

Side View

Figure 6-7 Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1or 3)

6-11 2022 – 2023

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.2. (continued)

CL of

Lower Bolt

See Subsection 5.3

See Section 9, Figure 9-11 on Page 9-8

Transformer Rated Meter Box

Figure 6-8 Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Meter Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1or 3)

6.4.3. Single Meter: Combination Overhead and Underground Service Equipment

Enclosures designed for a combination of either overhead or underground service entrance conductors must meet all of the requirements for both types of conductor entries.

A. See the requirements in Subsection 6.4.1., “Single Meter: Underground Service,” on Page 6-4, and Subsection 6.4.2., “Single Meter: Overhead Service,” on Page 6-8.

B. For overhead services, applicants must ensure the service entrance conductors are long enough to provide a bending radius that is equal to or greater than 10 times the diameter of the conductors.

C. Overhead service panels must have a manufactured raceway built for the panel to isolate the service entrance conductors.

2022 – 2023 6-12

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.3. (continued)

Busses Must Be Properly Supported

N Bus
Mu
Pro
Sup

Y

Applicant Service Conduit Applicant Service Conduit
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
N
Applicant Service Conduit
Self-Contained
Meter Socket
Applicant
Distribution
Section
X
N
Cable Termination
Compartment
(Sealable)
1/2” Min.
1‐1/2”
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
13”
Min.
1” Min.
1” Max.
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
N
Applicant Service Conduit
Self-Contained
Meter Socket
Applicant
Distribution
Section
X
N
Cable Termination
Compartment
(Sealable)
1/2” Min.
1‐1/2”
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
13”
Min.
1” Min.
1” Max.
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
N
Applicant Service Conduit
Self-Contained
Meter Socket
Applicant
Distribution
Section
X
N
Cable Termination
Compartment
(Sealable)
1/2” Min.
1‐1/2”
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
13”
Min.
1” Min.
1” Max.
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
N
Applicant Service Conduit
Self-Contained
Meter Socket
Applicant
Distribution
Section
X
N
Cable Termination
Compartment
(Sealable)
1/2” Min.
1‐1/2”
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
13”
Min.
1” Min.
1” Max.
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
N
Applicant Service Conduit
Self-Contained
Meter Socket
Applicant
Distribution
Section
X
N
Cable Termination
Compartment
(Sealable)
1/2” Min.
1‐1/2”
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
13”
Min.
1” Min.
1” Max.
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
N
Applicant Service Conduit
Self-Contained
Meter Socket
Applicant
Distribution
Section
X
N
Cable Termination
Compartment
(Sealable)
1/2” Min.
1‐1/2”
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
13”
Min.
1” Min.
1” Max.
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
É
N
Applicant Service Conduit
Self-Contained
Meter Socket
Applicant
Distribution
Section
X
N
Cable Termination
Compartment
(Sealable)
1/2” Min.
1‐1/2”
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
13”
Min.
1” Min.
1” Max.
Applicant Service Conduit Applicant Service Conduit Applicant Service Conduit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
1” Min.
Conductor
Raceway
+
Self-Contained
Meter Socket
Applicant
Distribution
Section
N
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
N N
1
1
1
1
1
1
X X
PG&E Service Condu
(in the Center Positio
W

Figure 6-9 Overhead- or Underground-Fed Combination Meter and Service-Termination Panel (225 Amps, 1)

Table 6-2 Residential Combination (OH/UG) Meter Panel

Rating in Amps X Y N W Conduit
Range
Rating in Amps Minimum Dimensions (In Inches) Minimum Dimensions (In Inches) Minimum Dimensions (In Inches) Minimum Dimensions (In Inches) Minimum Dimensions (In Inches)
225 12 7 3 – 4

6-13 2022 – 2023

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.3. (continued)

Meter Socket (Notes 2 & 4) Manual Bypass Studs (Note 3)

1-1/8” Min.

1
1

Hex Screw Lug

3/

1-
1/2”
in.
1/2”
in.
1/2”
in.
1/2”
in.

Front View

See Note 3

Neutral Bonded To Enclosure

Sealing Provisions

3/4”

1-1/2”

1” Min.

Side View

Figure 6-10 Overhead or Underground Service-Termination Meter Panel with Manual Bypass studs (320 Amps, 120/240-Volt, 1)

Notes in Reference to Figure 6-10.

  1. Ensure that this service equipment is marked with a continuous amp rating of 320 amps. Alternatively, service equipment can be marked “400 amp” (320 amps continuous).

  2. Each phase bus section must include 12−24 bypass studs, 1/2 inches in height with 1/2−inch hex nuts (measured across the flat). The studs must have a horizontal spacing of 1-1/2 inch (measured from the centers) between the line- and load-bus sections and must be offset from the line-side termination lugs to permit cable to enter from the top without interfering with the utility-provided manual bypass links.

  3. Terminations for service conductors must be aluminum-bodied mechanical lugs with a range-taking ability of #1 American Wire Gauge (AWG) through 600 thousand circular mils (kcmil). The lugs must be secured to ensure vertical alignment. Line-side lugs must be offset from the face of the bus to permit cable to enter from the top. The line and load positions must be identified in 3/4-inch high block letters.

2022 – 2023 6-14

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.4. Multiple Meters

PG&E requires grouped, single-meter installations for multifamily residential buildings.

This requirement excludes row-type condominiums where each unit is considered a single-family residence and is metered individually. Row-type condominiums must meet the applicable metering requirements described in the following subsections.

A. Grouped-Meter Installation Ampacity Ratings

The information below describes how to determine the ampacity rating of a grouped-meter installation.

  1. For installations without a main switch or breaker, the service rating will be the rating of the electrical enclosure or service termination section, pull can, or other service-termination enclosure where PG&E terminates and connects its supply facilities and conductors. Also, see Subsection 1.14.B. on Page 1-15.

  2. For installations with a main switch or breaker, the rating of the service to be supplied is the rating of the termination section, pull can, service section, or main service switch continuous current rating, typically whichever is greater. Also, see Subsection 1.14.A. on Page 1-15.

B. Grouped Meter-Socket Spacing

PG&E requires a 7-1/2-inch horizontal and 8-1/2-inch minimum vertical center spacing between meter sockets.

C. Individual Meter Sockets with Wiring Raceway/Gutters

PG&E accepts meter sockets with wiring gutters as shown in Figure 6-11, “Overhead Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main Switch (400 Amps Maximum, 1 ∅ or 3 ∅ ), and Figure 6-12, “Underground Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main Switch,” both on Page 6-16.

PG&E will accept individual meter sockets in combination with a wiring gutter only for an applicant’s service-entrance conductors and only when unmetered service-entrance conductors and metered-load conductors are not installed in the same conduit, raceway, or wiring gutter.

To conserve space and lower equipment costs, applicants should consider installing a combination multimeter, as described in Subsection 6.4.4.D., “Combination Multimeter Installation,” on Page 6-16. Only if applicants are reconstructing or adding to an existing installation can they install a meter trough, as described in Subsection 6.4.4.E., “Meter Trough Installations,” on Page 6-19.

6-15 2022 – 2023

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.4. (continued)

A* CL

*Clearance required for protruding gutter.

Figure 6-11 Overhead Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main Switch (400 Amps Max, 1or 3)

PG&E Service Conduit (in the Center Position)

Figure 6-12 Underground Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main Switch

D. Combination Multimeter Installation

A combination multimeter installation consists of the following equipment.

    - A main switch (if one is installed or required by local jurisdiction)

    - Unmetered wiring gutter

    - Multiple meter sockets

    - An appropriate number of circuit breakers

See Section 5, Subsection 5.7., “Main Service Disconnects and Switching Sequences,” on Page 5-31, for more information on disconnects and switches.

Examples of PG&E-approved, combination, multimeter installations are illustrated in Figure 6-13, “Typical, Manufactured, Combination, Multimeter Installation: Seven Meters or More,” on Page 6-17, and Figure 6-14, “Clearances for a Typical, Manufactured, Combination, Multimeter Installation,” on Page 6-18.

Applicants must ensure that all multimeter installations meet the following requirements.

  1. Individually meter multiple apartments in one building. Separate metered and unmetered conductors.

2022 – 2023 6-16

6.4.4. (continued)

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

  1. Use factory (or factory-equivalent), harness-style wiring or bus between the unmetered wiring gutter and the line terminals of each meter socket. Harness-style wiring or bus also must be used between the load terminals of each meter socket and the line side of the corresponding circuit breaker.

  2. Ensure that the panels are designed to permit any individual meter socket block or jaw assembly to be replaced. Applicants must not mount more than two meters on a single, removable panel. Removable meter-panel covers must not exceed 6 square feet in

area.

  1. Ensure that the panel’s design and construction meets the clearance requirements provided in Figure 6-14 and in Table 6-3, “Dimension Specifications for Multimeter Installations,” on Page 6-19.

  2. Increase Dimension B, shown in Figure 6-14 on Page 6-18, by the amount that the main switch door, including the operating handle,

° reduces the clearance when opened 90 .

  1. Ensure that panels are removable so that PG&E personnel can perform wiring inspections.

Point of PG&E’s Service Termination

Test-Bypass Facilities

Main
Switch
Se
Term
Pu

Barriers

Main
Switch
Main
Switch
Main
Switch
Main
Switch
TBF
Main
Switch
Main
Switch
Main
Switch
Main
Switch

Circuit Barriers Breaker

PG&E Service

Circuit Barriers Breaker Conduit (in the

Center Position) Overhead Service (400 Amps Max) Underground Service

Figure 6-13 Typical, Manufactured, Combination, Multimeter Installation: Seven Meters or More

6-17 2022 – 2023

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.4. (continued)

Main Switch

Underground Pull Box

Refer to Subsection 5.4.1. on Page 5-13 for Meter-Socket Height Requirements

Breaker * (Alternate Position)

A

Meter Socket

D
*
C
M
So

Side-View Detail

Figure 6-14 Clearances for a Typical, Manufactured, Combination, Multimeter Installation

Notes in reference to Figure 6-14.

  1. Where an adjacent wall or other obstruction extends more than 11-inches perpendicular from the face of the meter panel, a 10-inch minimum dimension to the meter socket axis is required. For obstructions extending 11 inches or less from the meter panel, the side clearance must conform to that of Dimension B.

  2. The requirements described in Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” must be met at all times.

  3. From the floor surface up to the bottom of the lowest row of meter sockets, protrusions, and equipment must not extend past the front face of the meter panels and sockets.

2022 – 2023 6-18

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.4. (continued)

Table 6-3 Dimension Specifications for Multimeter Installations

A–Protrusions
(in Inches)
B C D E
A–Protrusions
(in Inches)
All Measurements Are Minimum Dimension (in Inches) All Measurements Are Minimum Dimension (in Inches) All Measurements Are Minimum Dimension (in Inches) All Measurements Are Minimum Dimension (in Inches)
0 (No Protrusion) 3-3/4 4 4-3/4 See Note 3
for
Figure 6-14
Greater Than 0 to 1-1/8 4-1/4 4 4-3/4 4-3/4
Greater Than 1-1/8 to 2 4-1/4 4-1/4 6-1/4 6-1/4
Greater Than 2 to 4 6-1/4 4-1/4 8 8
Greater Than 4 to 11 (Maximum) 6-1/4 10 8 8

E. Meter Trough Installations

PG&E does not accept new installations of meter troughs but does accept single-meter installations only for reconstructing and adding to existing installations. In addition to meeting the general requirements for meter sockets, applicants must ensure that meter troughs meet the following general requirements.

  1. Where there are four, five, or six sockets in one trough, the incoming service conductors must terminate on a main bus that is supported independently of the socket jaw assembly.

  2. The panel design must permit individual, meter-socket blocks or jaw assemblies to be replaced individually. Applicants must not mount more than two meters on a single, removable front panel.

  3. Metered and unmetered conductors must be separated, clearly showing that the entire load is being metered.

  4. The panels must be removable so that wiring inspections can be performed.

6-19 2022 – 2023

Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.4.4. (continued)

Figure 6-15 and Figure 6-16, below, illustrate meter trough installations served by underground or overhead service.

Service Entrance Conductors

Conduit

Point of PG&E’s Service Termination

To Service Switch

(in the Center Position)

To Service Switch
PG&E Service Conduit
To Service Switch
PG&E Service Conduit
To Service Switch
PG&E Service Conduit
To Service Switch
PG&E Service Conduit
To Service Switch
PG&E Service Conduit

Overhead Service Underground Service

Figure 6-15 Horizontal Meter Trough Installation: Six Meters or Less

Service Entrance Conduit Conductors

To Service Switch

Ser
Ent
Co

Ser
Ent
Co
Ser
Ent
Co
Ser
Ent
Co
Ser
Ent
Co
Ser
Ent
Co

Overhead Service

Point of PG&E’s Service Termination

Sealable Wiring Gutter

To Service Switch

PG&E Service Conduit (in the Center Position)

Underground Service

Figure 6-16 Vertical Meter Trough Installation: Five Meters or Less

2022 – 2023 6-20

SECTION 7 ELECTRIC METERING: N I

AND AGRICULTURAL

Section 7 Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, Commercial, and Agricultural

7.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides the Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E/the Company) service specifications and requirements for commercial, industrial, and agricultural electric metering. Also, it describes the required locations for these nonresidential meters. This section includes specific information that is not covered by the basic requirements in Section 5, “Electric Metering: General.”

N OTE : Residential meter panels rated for 320 amperes (amps) shown in Section 6,

“Electric Metering: Residential,” can not be used for nonresidential (e.g., commercial, industrial, and agricultural) applications.

7.2. Service Specifications and Requirements

The following three subsections describe service specifications and requirements for commercial, industrial, and agricultural electric meters.

7.2.1. Permitted Types of Electric Service

PG&E does not permit overhead service connections in areas zoned for underground service by local ordinance, or where underground service is required by California Public Utilities Commission- (CPUC-) approved tariffs.

7.2.2. Required Test-Bypass Facilities

Test-bypass facilities are required, regardless of the panel ampacity, for both single-phase and three-phase, nonresidential installations. Applicants must furnish, install, and maintain a meter socket with PG&E-approved, manual, test-bypass facilities. This equipment also is used for the following types of services.

  - All three-phase, nonresidential services **without exception** .

  - All single-phase, nonresidential services. See the exceptions in

Subsection 7.2.3., “Required Approvals for Meter Equipment Without Test-Bypass Facilities,” on Page 7-2.

Refer to Figure 7-1, “Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for Self-Contained Metering (0 Amps−125 Amps),” on Page 7-4, and Figure 7-2, “Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for Self-Contained Metering (126 Amps−200 Amps),” on Page 7-5.

7-1 2022 – 2023

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.3. Required Approvals for Meter Equipment Without Test-Bypass Facilities

PG&E requires an approval before installing meter equipment without test-bypass facilities. If approved, the meter equipment may be exempt only when all of the conditions are met in Item 7.2.3.A. or Item 7.2.3.B., both below.

A. Single-phase, nonresidential service when all of the three following conditions are met.

  1. The main disconnect switch’s rating does not exceed 200 amps.

  2. Service to another meter or service will not be interrupted when de-energizing the meter socket without test-bypass facilities.

  3. The metered service is used exclusively for temporary power or nighttime lighting loads.

7.2.4. Meter Locations

Applicants must consult their local PG&E project coordinators during the initial construction phase of their projects to determine the appropriate meter and current-transformer cabinet locations and to ensure that adequate space is provided for the metering equipment. PG&E must review and approve all metering equipment installations before they are installed.

Additionally, the following specific location requirements apply to nonresidential metering.

A. Applicants must locate meters on exterior, ground-floor walls or other permanent structures nearest PG&E’s distribution facilities. When outdoor meter locations are not practical, PG&E will approve interior locations if they are accessible during PG&E’s typical working hours and if the interior location meets PG&E’s access requirements, as described in Section 5, Subsection 5.3., “Electric Meters: General Location Requirements,” on Page 5-5.

B. Typically, applicants must group meters for multiple-occupancy buildings at one common location; however, PG&E allows the following exceptions to this requirement.

  1. PG&E may permit applicants to have individual meters located on their premises if the installations comply with all applicable codes. When buildings contain unmetered wiring, applicants must place that wiring in PG&E-approved conduit and/or in sealable wireways.

  2. In high-rise buildings where the walking surface of the highest occupied floor is over 75 feet high, PG&E has the option to approve grouped-meter locations on one or more floors.

2022 – 2023 7-2

7.2.4. (continued)

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

  1. PG&E does not permit metering equipment to be located more than

10 feet away and within the line of sight from the service disconnect means, allowing the applicants to separate the metering equipment and service disconnect means remotely. Any exceptions to this requirement must be approved by the local PG&E meter shop. Meter shop employees must approve remote meter locations before applicants locate meters away from (i.e., remote from) the PG&E service termination point. Also, applicants must provide clearances and working space, as described in Section 5, Subsection 5.4., “Meter Heights, Clearances, Enclosures, and Protection,” on Page 5-13, for both the meter and metering transformer installations.

w.pge.com/pge_global/common/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/greenbook_manual.pdf#page=179) Subsection 5.4., “Meter Heights, Clearances, Enclosures, and Protection,” on Page 5-13, for both the meter and metering transformer installations.

Applicants must supply and install rigid steel conduit for the meter wiring between the meter and the metering transformers. The conduit must be 1-1/4-inch minimum diameter and must be limited to 50 circuit feet with a maximum of three 90° bends, unless sealable, accessible, exposed conduits are furnished.

When meters are separated by more than 50 circuit feet, PG&E requires a special review and approval for the installation.

7.2.5. Services, 0 Amps Through 200 Amps, Single Applicant, Overhead and Underground

Applicants must meet the following requirements when installing services.

A. PG&E’s service conductors must be pulled into the enclosure and connected to the bypass-test facility’s line-termination lugs.

B. One set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of load conductors must be routed and formed to allow PG&E to pull their service laterals without encountering any obstructions.

C. For overhead service, applicants must provide and install service-entrance conductors from the weatherhead to the enclosure. Applicants must connect the conductors to the bypass-test facility’s line-termination lugs.

D. The right side, test-bypass blocks (i.e., two poles) are identified as the power leg (i.e., high leg or stinger leg) for metering three-phase, 4-wire, delta service. The power leg is identified by using the color orange. Orange tape is typically used. E. All section covers can be removed independently; however, after the meter is in place, the upper cover must not be removable. After the meter is in place, the lower cover must be sealable. F. For meter socket jaw requirements, see Section 5, Subsection 5.6.,

“Meter Types and Connections,” on Page 5-26. G. Install range-taking lugs from #6 American wire gauge (AWG) to 1/0 AWG for services up to 125 amps, and #2 AWG to 250 thousand circular miles (kcmil) for services rated from 126 amps through 200 amps.

7-3 2022 – 2023

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.5. (continued)

Barriers

1-1/2” Min.

3” Min.

Note F.
on Page
7-3
1-1/2”
3” Min
Min.
in. Note D. on
Page 7-3
L L L L L L
I O I O I O 8” Min.
N A N A N A
E D E D E D 2” Ma
5” 2” Alternate
Max.

2” Ma
5”
in.
Alternate

D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
IN
L
L
2”
Max.
Note F.
on Page
7-3
1-1/2”
Min.

3” Min
8” Min.
Note D. on
Page 7-3
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
IN
L
L
2”
Max.
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
IN
L
L
2”
Max.
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
IN
L
L
2”
Max.
1-1/2”
Min.

3” Min
5”
in.
5”
in.
5”
in.
5”
in.
5”
in.
5”
in.
5”
in.
5”
in.
5”
in.
2” Ma
Alternate


8” Min.
Note D. on
Page 7-3

PG&E Service Conduit Required (in the Center Position)

Barrier
24”
4”
2”−3” 2”−3” 2”−3”

4-1/2” Min.

Position for Neutral Double Lugs

Figure 7-1 Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for Self-Contained Metering (0 Amps−100 Amps)

2022 – 2023 7-4

7.2.5. (continued)

Barriers

1-1/2” Min.

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

Note F.
on Page
7-3
1-1/2”
3” Min.
Min.
n.
Note D. on
Page 7-3
L L L L L L
I O I O I O
N A N A N A 11” Min.
E D E D E D
2-1/2” M
2-1/2”
8” Alternate
Max.
Position for

2-1/2” M
n.
Alternate
Position for
2-1/2”
Max.
1-1/2”
Min.
3” Min.
11” Min.
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L

8”
Note F.
on Page
7-3
Note D. on
Page 7-3
2-1/2”
Max.
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
2-1/2”
Max.
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
D
E
A
O
I
N
L
L
1-1/2”
Min.
3” Min.
n.
8”
n.
8”
n.
8”
n.
8”
n.
8”
n.
8”
2-1/2” M
Alternate
Position for

11” Min.

Note D. on
Page 7-3

Neutral Double Lugs

3” Min. PG&E Service Conduit Required (in the Center Position)

6” Min.

0

Figure 7-2 Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for Self-Contained Metering (101 Amps−200 Amps)

7.2.6. Services, Over 200 Amps, Single Applicant, Underground

Applicants must meet the following requirements when installing services and equipment.

A. Services, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps, Three Phase, and 201 Amps Through 600 Amps, Single Phase

  1. When planning a single, underground, single-phase or three-phase service, applicants must furnish, install, own, and maintain combination meter and current-transformer cabinets, as illustrated in Figure 7-3, “Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅),” on Page 7-7.

N OTE: See Section 9, “Electric Metering Components and Cable

Terminating Facilities,” for details about internal components.

  1. The current transformer mounting base must include termination bolts, Belleville washers, and nuts on the line and load sides necessary to connect the current transformers and the PG&E service conductors to the line side.

7-5 2022 – 2023

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.6. (continued)

  1. Applicants must install a maximum of one set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of load conductors before PG&E installs the current-transformers.

  2. The applicant’s conductor must be terminated on the top (load side) of the current-transformer mounting base or termination enclosure busing.

  3. The applicant’s conduit and conductors leaving the cabinet must not be installed within 2 inches of any corner of the cabinet or within 2 inches of the PG&E service-entrance conduit location.

  4. The applicant’s load conductors must be routed and formed properly to allow PG&E to pull their service laterals without encountering any obstructions.

  5. The applicant’s conductors must not cross in front of or behind the PG&E service entrance conduit and must not obstruct the PG&E

current transformers or test switch areas.

  1. Applicants must ensure that provisions are made for the underground service neutral when installing an insulated, bondable termination in the current-transformer cabinet.

  2. Applicants must mark the power leg (i.e., high leg or stinger leg) of a 240/120-volt, three-phase, 4-wire delta service by using the color orange. This is for metering purposes. Orange tape is typically used.

  3. Applicants must ensure that cabinets meet the following requirements.

      - All panels and covers must be sealable and all securing screws
    

must be captive.

      - Outdoor current transformer cabinets are weatherproof.

      - A neutral is bonded to the enclosure.

      - Current transformer cabinets are **not** used as splicing chambers

and current transformers are not tapped off to supply other meters or used for other purposes.

2022 – 2023 7-6

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

Transformer-Mounting Base Furnished and Installed by Applicant

10” ID

7.2.6. (continued)

W Dimensions: 3-Wire 1 ∅ = 24” Min. 4-Wire 3 ∅ = 36” Min.

Test Switch Locations (For Mounting Base Detail, See Figure 9-2 on Page 9-3.)

400 Amps Max. (1 ∅ or 3 ∅ )

PG&E Service Conduit (in the Center Position)

Sealable Studs (Four Places)

Underground
Service-
Termination
Section
Load Side
Line Side
W
ID
1/8”
3”
3”
22” M
11” Min.
15”
3-1/2”
1/8”
ID
3”
3”
15”
1/8”
11” Min.
3-1/2”
22” M
ID
3”
3”
15”
1/8”
11” Min.
3-1/2”
22” M
ID
3”
3”
15”
1/8”
11” Min.
3-1/2”
22” M
3”
3”
3”
3”
ID
3”
3”
15”
1/8”
11” Min.
3-1/2”
22” M
3”
3”
22” M
ID
3”
3”
15”
1/8”
11” Min.
3-1/2”
22” M
3”
3”

3-1/2” Max.

Figure 7-3 Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1or 3)

B. Services, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps, Three Phase, and 201 Amps Through 600 Amps, Single Phase, Current-Transformer Metering in Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinets

  1. When applicants meter a single, underground service using current transformers, they must furnish, install, own, and maintain underground, service-termination pull boxes with separate, current-transformer cabinets and meter box, as illustrated in Figure 7-4, “Separate-Bused Current-Transformer Cabinet and Meter Box With Underground Service-Termination Pull Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅, and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1∅),” on Page 7-8.

N OTE : See Section 9, for details about internal components.

7-7 2022 – 2023

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.6. (continued)

  1. Applicants must furnish and connect a maximum of one set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of service-entrance conductors to the line and load sides of the current-transformer mounting base and to the load side of the termination facilities in the underground, service-termination pull box. The applicants service-entrance conductors and load conductors must be installed before PG&E

installs the current transformers.

  1. The current-transformer mounting bus bars must include termination bolts, Belleville washers, and nuts on the line and load sides necessary to connect the PG&E current transformers.

  2. PG&E pulls and terminates its service-entrance conductor directly to the applicant-furnished, service-termination facility in the underground service-termination pull box.

  3. The applicant installs one set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of service-entrance conductors that enter the current-transformer cabinet and terminate on the top (line side) of the current-transformer mounting bus bars.

  4. The applicant must not install conduit within 2 inches of any corner of the cabinet.

  5. The applicant’s conductor must be routed properly to ensure they do not cross in front of or behind the PG&E current transformer

wires and do not obstruct the PG&E current transformer area .

Cables or Equipment

(in the Center Position) Conduit to Service Switch or Breaker

Figure 7-4 Separate-Bused Current-Transformer Cabinet and Meter Box with Underground Service-Termination Pull Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1)

2022 – 2023 7-8

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.6. (continued)

C. Services, 600 Amps Through 800 Amps, Single Phase or Three Phase, Current-Transformer Metering in Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinets

  1. When planning a single, underground, three-phase service, applicants must furnish, install, own, and maintain combination meter and current-transformer cabinets, as illustrated in Figure 7-5, “Underground Service Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet (600 Amps, 1 Ø or 3 Ø, 800 Amps 3 Ø ),” on Page 7-10.

N OTE : The only PG&E-approved manufacturer of the enclosure in Figure 7-5 is Milbank Manufacturing.

  1. This enclosure is allowed in wall-mounted applications connected to an underground service. The enclosure must be installed so the bottom is between 6 inches to 9 inches above grade or above the working space area.

  2. The current transformer mounting base must be rated for the exact ampacity as the PG&E service and must include termination bolts, Belleville washers, and nuts on the line and load sides necessary to connect the current transformers and the PG&E service conductors

to the line side.

  1. Applicants must install and connect no more than three load-side conductors per phase to the current transformer mounting base.

  2. The applicant’s conductor must be terminated only on the top (load side) of the current transformer mounting base.

  3. The applicant’s conduit and load conductors must be installed so they leave the enclosure (cabinet) either out of the top or exit out of the right or left side, no less than 12 inches from the top of the enclosure.

  4. The applicant’s load conductors must be routed and formed correctly. The load conductors must not run downward to the middle or bottom of the enclosure, cross in front of or behind the PG&E service entrance conduit, or obstruct the PG&E current transformers or test switch areas.

  5. Applicants must ensure that provisions are made for the underground service neutral when installing an insulated, bondable termination in the current transformer cabinet.

  6. For metering purposes, applicants must mark the power leg (i.e., high leg or stinger leg) of a 240/120-volt, three-phase, 4-wire delta service by using the color orange. Orange tape is typically used.

7-9 2022 – 2023

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.6. (continued)

  1. Applicants must ensure enclosures meet the following requirements:

      - All panels and covers must be sealable, and all securing screws
    

must be captive.

      - Outdoor current transformer cabinets are weatherproof.

      - A neutral is bonded to the enclosure.

      - Current transformer cabinets must **not be** used as conductor

splicing chambers and do not tap off conductors from the current transformer’s or it’s mounting base to supply other meters.

Front View with Covers Removed

Side View

Figure 7-5 Underground Service Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet (600 Amps, 1 Ø or 3 Ø , 800 Amps 3 Ø )

Notes in reference to Figure 7-5.

  1. The only PG&E-approved manufacturer of this specific enclosure is Milbank Manufacturing.

  2. This enclosure must be installed so the bottom is between 6 inches to 9 inches above grade or above the working space area.

2022 – 2023 7-10

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.6. (continued)

D. Services, 201 Amps and Above, Current-Transformer Metering in Switchboard Service Sections

  1. When applicants meter a single underground service using current transformers, they must furnish, install, own, and maintain a switchboard service section and facilities for terminating underground service conductors.

  2. Figure 7-6, Figure 7-7, and Figure 7-8, below, illustrate typical arrangements of the switchboard service sections that are used in conjunction with a pull section or pull box for underground service-conductor termination.

  3. PG&E pulls and terminates its service conductors directly to the applicant-furnished service-termination facilities in the underground service-termination pull section, pull box, or service section.

N OTE : See Section 10, “Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through

600 Volts,” for details.

Service Entrance Conductors

Standard 90”

90” Service

Service Section

Standing Surface

Standard 90” Service Section

Barrier

Barrier

To
Load
To
Load

Service

s/Cable mination
Surface
Service

X
Barrier
Surface
Service

X
Barrier
Surface
Service

X
Barrier
Surface
Service

X
Barrier
Surface
Service

X
Barrier
X
Surface
Service

X
Barrier
X To
Load
Surface
Service

X
Barrier
X W W

Figure 7-6 Figure 7-7 Switchboard Pull Section Separate Pull Box

Standing Surface

40-1/4” Min.

ard 90”
Section
e Barrier
Service
To
Load
40-1
Barrier
Service
ard 90”
Section
e
Barrier
Service
ard 90”
Section
e
Barrier
Service
ard 90”
Section
e
W W

Figure 7-8 Bottom-Fed Service Section

7-11 2022 – 2023

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.7. Services, Over 200 Amps, Single Applicant, Overhead

Applicants must meet the following requirements when installing single-applicant, overhead services that are over 200 amps.

For all agricultural overhead services, install a cable protector around the service-entrance conductors entering the wall-mounted or panelboard-mounted meter panel. Order using either Material Code 382034 or Material Code 382045, found in Numbered Document 062288, “Underground Conduits,” Table 14, on Page 8 (in Appendix C, “Electric

” and Gas Engineering Documents ).

A. Services, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps, Single Phase or Three Phase with Current Transformers

  1. When installing a single, overhead, single-phase or three-phase service, applicants must furnish, install, own, and maintain combination meter and current-transformer cabinets, as illustrated in Figure 7-9, “Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet, (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅),” shown on Page 7-13. See Section 9 for details about internal components.

  2. Applicants must install one set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of service-entrance conductors before PG&E installs the current-transformers. Also applicants must connect the service entrance conductors to the line and load sides of the current-transformer mounting base.

  3. The current-transformer mounting base must include termination bolts, Bellevue washers, and nuts on the line and load sides necessary to connect the current transformers. See Section 9 for details about these internal components.

  4. The applicant’s service entrance conductor must be terminated on the top (load side) of the current-transformer mounting base or termination enclosure busing.

  5. The applicant’s load conductor must be terminated on the bottom (load side) of the current-transformer mounting base.

  6. The applicant’s conduit must not be installed within 2 inches of any corner of the cabinet.

  7. The applicant’s conductors must be routed and formed properly to ensure they do not obstruct the PGE current transformer and test switch areas.

  8. Applicants must ensure that cabinets meet the following requirements.

      - All panels and covers must be sealable and all securing screws
    

must be captive.

     - Outdoor CT cabinets are weatherproof.

     - A neutral is bonded to the enclosure.

     - CT cabinets are **not** used as splicing chambers and CTs are **not**

tapped off to supply other meters or used for any other purposes.

2022 – 2023 7-12

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.7. (continued)

Transformer-Mounting Base Furnished and Installed Service Conduit by Applicant (in the Center Position)

Test Switch Locations (For Mounting Base Detail, See Figure 9-2 on Page 9-3.)

400 Amps Max 1 � or 3 �

W Dimensions:

Sealable Studs (Four Places)

3-1/2” Max.

osition)

Line Side Line Side
Load Side Load Side

Front View Side View

Figure 7-9 Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet, (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1or 3)

B. Services, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps, Single Phase or Three Phase, with Current-Transformer Metering

  1. When installing a single, overhead, single-phase or three-phase service using current transformers, applicants must furnish, install, and maintain separate current-transformer cabinets and meter boxes, as illustrated in Figure 7-10, “Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Safety-Socket Meter Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1� or 3�),” on Page 7-14. Also required are service-entrance conductors, conduit, and weatherhead to the point of attachment to PG&E’s overhead service.

N OTE : See Section 9, for details about internal components.

  1. Applicants must install one set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of line-side conductors and one set of load-side conductors before

PG&E installs the current transformers. Connect the

service-entrance conductors to the line side of the current-transformer mounting bus bars and load the conductors to the load side of the current-transformer mounting bus bars.

7-13 2022 – 2023

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.7. (continued)

  1. The current transformer bus bars must include termination bolts, Belleville washers, and nuts on the line and load sides necessary to connect the current transformers. See Section 9, for details about these internal components.

  2. The applicant’s conduit must not be installed within 2 inches of any corner of the cabinet.

  3. The applicant’s conductors entering and exiting the cabinet must be formed and routed properly to ensure they do not obstruct the PG&E current transformer area.

Figure 7-10 Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Safety-Socket Meter Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1or 3)

C. Services, 201 Amps and Above, Current-Transformer Metering in Switchboard Service Sections

  1. When installing a single, overhead service using current transformers, applicants must furnish, install, own, and maintain a switchboard service section with provisions for the overhead service termination.

  2. Typical switchboard service-section arrangements are illustrated in Figure 7-11, “Overhead, Service-Termination, Standard Switchboard Service Section (0 Volts−600 Volts),” on Page 7-15.

N OTE : See Section 10, “Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through

600 Volts,” for details.

2022 – 2023 7-14

7.2.7. (continued)

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

  1. Applicants must furnish and install service-entrance conductors and either cable or bus bars, as described below.
  • When switchboards are served through bus-bar conductors, the conductors must enter through the top or at the side or back in the upper 10-inch section.

  • When switchboards are served through cable conductors, the conductors must enter through the top of the switchboard. Figure 7-11, on Page 7-15, illustrates an extension that allows for horizontally incoming conduits from the side or rear of the standard switchboard service section.

  1. Applicants must ensure that the service-entrance conductors feed from top to bottom. Load conductors must leave below the metering compartment barrier. Applicants must ensure that service entrance conductors are connected to the busing in the service sections with lugs approved for the type of conductors used.

Service-Entrance Conductors

Metering Compartment

Main Service Disconnecting Means

Service-Supply Conductors Switchboard Extension

Standard 90” Service Section

To Load To Load

on

on
on
on
on
on

Figure 7-11 Overhead, Service-Termination, Standard Switchboard Service Section (0 Volts−600 Volts)

7.2.8. Multi-Applicant Meter Installations

Applicants must meet the following requirements when installing multi-applicant meters.

A. Applicants must install grouped meters for multi-applicant buildings where each occupant is metered individually.

B. Each unit of a multi-applicant installation must be considered a single applicant and must meet the metering requirements described in Subsection 7.2.5., “Services, 0 Amps Through 200 Amps, Single Applicant, Overhead and Underground,” on Page 7-3.

7-15 2022 – 2023

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.8. (continued)

C. Applicants must ensure that service entrance conductors for multi-applicant installations extend from PG&E’s service termination point to the line side of the meter socket jaw of each socket.

D. Applicants must ensure that the minimum centerline spacings between meter sockets are 7-1/2 inches horizontal and 8-1/2 inches vertical.

N OTE : PG&E provides and installs nonconductive, meter-socket, blank-off covers before energizing meter panels with vacant meter sockets. PG&E will not energize meter panels and sockets unless blank-off meter covers are installed and sealed. See Section 6, “Electric Metering: Residential,” Subsection 6.2.3., “Electric Meter Socket Covers and Seals,” on Page 6-2., for material codes and further information.

E. For multimeter installations, PG&E determines the ampacity rating of a grouped multimeter installation using one of the following two methods.

  1. For installations without a main switch or breaker, the service rating will be the rating of the electrical enclosure or service-termination section, pull can, or other service-termination enclosure where PG&E terminates and connects its supply facilities and conductors. Also, see Section 1, “General,” Subsection 1.14.B., on Page 1-15.

  2. For installations with a main switch or breaker, the rating of the service to be supplied is the rating of the termination section, pull can, service section, or main service switch continuous current rating (typically whichever is greater). Also, see Section 1, Subsection 1.14.A., on Page 1-15.

F. When a sealable gutter protrudes beyond the meter-mounting surface by more than 4 inches, applicants must maintain 10 inches of clearance from the centerline of the meter face. Otherwise, applicants must have a minimum 4-1/4 inches of vertical clearance.

2022 – 2023 7-16

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.2.8. (continued)

A* CL

TBF = Test-Bypass Facilities

*Clearance required for protruding gutter.

Figure 7-12 Overhead Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main Switch (Max. 400 Amps, 1or 3)

Point of PG&E’s Service Termination

PG&E Service Conduit (in the Center Position)

Figure 7-13 Underground Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main Switch (Max. 400 Amps, 3, or 600 Amps, 1)

CL

PG&E Service Conduit (in the Center Position)

*Clearance required for protruding gutter.

Figure 7-14 Grouped-Meter Installation With a Main Switch (Max. 400 Amps, 3, 600 Amps, 1)

7-17 2022 – 2023

Section 7, Electric Metering: Nonresidential, Industrial, and Agricultural

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 7-18

SECTION 8 ELECTRIC METERING: PEDESTALS

Section 8 Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.1. Scope

This new section provides the design and installation requirements for electric metering pedestals in the PG&E service territories. Only the PG&E-approved metering pedestals described in this section can be installed.

N OTE : This section was previously titled “Electric Metering: Direct Access.” If you have questions regarding direct access, refer to Electric Rule 22, “Direct Access,” and PG&E’s Direct Access Standards for Metering and Meter Data (DASMMD) in California, March 1999 revision (only members can access this information online).

8.2. Residential Electric Metering Pedestals

Residential electric meter pedestals, as shown in Figure 8-1, “Residential Electric Metering Pedestal,” on Page 8-2, must have a minimum rating of 100 amps and a maximum rating of 200 amps. The pedestal also must meet the requirements specified in the Electric Utility Service Equipment Requirements Committee (EUSERC) manual, Drawing 307.

For authorization to attach telephone and cable television terminating facilities to the post, contact your local PG&E project coordinators.

8-1 2022 – 2023

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.2. (continued)

4” Min.

Section A-A

Note: The PG&E-required conduit cover and depth is greater than EUSERC Drawing 307. See Numbered Document 063927 located in

Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”

A
Grade
Meter Socket (or Meter Socket Base
Electrode
See Subsections 5.4.1.
5.4.2., and 5.4.5. on
Pages 5-14 and 5-21.
8” Min.
A
2” Min., 6” Max.
18” Min.
24” Min.
(See Note)
As Required
Grade
A
A
2” Min., 6” Max.
Electrode
See S
5.4.2.,
Pages
8” Min.
Grade
A
Neutral
Bus
Neutral
Bus
Neutral
Bus
Neutral
Bus
Neutral
Bus
Grade
A
Neutral
Bus
Neutral
Bus
Neutral
Bus
Grade
A
Grade
A
Grade
A
Grade
A
Grade
A
18” Min.
24” Min.
(See Note)
As R

Figure 8-1 Residential Electric Metering Pedestal

8.3. Nonresidential Single-Meter Service Pedestals, 100–200 Amps

Applicants must ensure that nonresidential service pedestals meet the following requirements.

A. Exterior Hood: An enclosing cover that is hinged to allow the front, sides, and top of the hood to rotate upward and back, 90 degrees or more, as one unit to expose the internal metering compartment.

  1. Ensure that the lifting force required to open the hood does not exceed 25 pounds.

  2. Also, the hood must have a locking device to prevent it from closing while in the open position.

2022 – 2023 8-2

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.3. (continued)

B. Metering Compartment: The meter socket must be mounted on a support, attached to the meter panel, and provided with a sealing ring. Enclose the metering compartment with an enclosing cover (i.e., exterior hood) that meets the following requirements.

  1. Ensure the area in front of the meter sockets and test bypass is not blocked with side panels, enclosure walls, or other obstruction as described in 8.3.A., “Exterior Hood,” on Page 8-2. This provides additional safety for personnel in the event of an arc flash.

  2. Equipped with a lifting handle.

  3. Sealable and lockable with a padlock having a 5/16-inch lock shaft.

  4. Provided with a fixed poly-carbonate viewing window.

C. The test-bypass compartment cover:

  1. Must be sealable and fitted with a lifting handle.

  2. Has two lifting handles if the cover is more than 16 inches wide.

D. Test-bypass blocks with rigid barriers are furnished, installed, and wired or bused to the meter socket by the manufacturer. Connection sequences must be line-loaded from left to right and clearly identified by block-letter labeling at least 3/4 inch high.

Applicants must ensure that test-bypass facilities are installed with the following clearances.

  1. Facilities require 3 inches of vertical clearance from the upper test connector stud to the upper compartment access opening.

  2. Facilities require 3 inches from the center of the cable terminal screw to the lower compartment access opening.

  3. Facilities require 1-1/2 inches of side clearance from the rigid insulating barriers to the compartment sides and 1 inch to the compartment access openings.

E. Utility compartment covers (i.e., exterior hood and pull section) are sealable and lockable using a padlock with a 5/16-inch lock shaft.

F. Secure internal equipment (attached to the outer walls of the enclosure) in place with devices that cannot be loosened from the outside. Do not use screws or bolts requiring special tools for installation or removal.

8-3 2022 – 2023

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.3. (continued)

G. The terminating pull-section of the pedestals:

  1. Comply with the minimum dimensions illustrated in Table 8-1, “Minimum Dimensions: Inches,” on Page 8-5.

  2. Accept a minimum 3-inch conduit.

  3. Have covers equipped with lifting handles.

  4. Are equipped with aluminum-bodied mechanical lugs, ranging from

#6 AWG through 250 kcmil, for terminating the service conductors.

  1. Have insulated cables or busses installed between the termination lugs and the test-bypass facilities.

  2. Have protective metallic barriers, 16-gauge minimum, provided between the pull sections and their (the applicants’) distribution sections.

  3. Have a 1/4-inch minimum clearance between the applicants’ section walls and the barriers to prevent screws and bolts from protruding into the pull sections.

For information on structural-mounting requirements and pedestal support, consult your local PG&E project coordinator and meter shop.

2022 – 2023 8-4

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.3. (continued)

Fixed Poly- 11” Min. carbonate 15” Max. Viewing Enclosing Cover Meter Socket Window

Enclosing Cover

Test-Bypass Facilities

3” Mi n.

2” Min.

5” Max.

Test-Bypass Support

Landing Lugs and Factory Conductors

Test-Bypass Cover

Meter Section

Edge of

Barrier

Pull Section and Cover

Protective Metallic Barrier

d Poly- onate ing A A A A
36” Min
75” Max
s

ow


Applicant
Section
36” Min
75” Max
36” Min
75” Max
s

ow


Applicant
Section
36” Min
75” Max
s

ow


Applicant
Section
36” Min
75” Max
s

ow


Applicant
Section
pplicant
ection
pplicant
ection
pplicant
ection
36” Min
75” Max
s

ow


Applicant
Section

11” Min. 15” Max.

Loa~~d ~~Lin
D
Loa~~d ~~Lin
D
Loa~~d ~~Lin
D
1
M
e

Figure 8-2 Figure 8-3 Front View Side View

1-1/2” Typ. 3/4” Min.

4”
6
6 Viewin
Windo
Viewin
Windo
6 Viewin
Windo
g
w
2
6 Viewin
Windo
6” 6”

Figure 8-5 Fixed Polycarbonate Viewing Window

Table 8-1 Minimum Dimensions (Inches) [1]

.

.
.
. 17” M
W W

Figure 8-4 Service Cable Termination Section

Protective Metallic Barrier

Service W A D
Single Phase 10-1/2
12-1/2
10 4.5
Three Phase Three Phase Three Phase Three Phase

Landing Lugs

Conduit with Bell End

ÁÁÁ W

Figure 8-6 Service Cable Termination Section–Top View

  1. Applies to figures in Section 8.3.

Note: These figures represent generic design configurations. To submit other designs for review and approval, contact your local project coordinator. The project coordinator will consult with PG&E’s

electric standards and electric metering departments.

8-5 2022 – 2023

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.4. Nonresidential Dual-Meter Service Pedestals, 100–400 Amps

This subsection provides information on nonresidential dual-meter pedestals, either single phase or three phase, rated between 100 amps or 400 amps. These pedestals have two self-contained meter sockets, each rated for up to a maximum of 200 amps. The cable termination (i.e., pull section) may be located on the back or side of the pedestals. Applicants must ensure that nonresidential service pedestals meet the requirements shown in the figure below.

22”

90° 90°

D

D 2

Side View Front View Side View–Pull Section Allowed on Back or Side

Figure 8-7 Directional Views

2022 – 2023 8-6

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.4. (continued)

Table 8-2 Minimum Dimensions (Inches) [1]

Service A B C D E W
Single Phase 6 4.5 12 6 4 12
Three Phase 6 4.5 12 7 5 16
  1. Applies to figures in Section 8.4.

Landing Lugs Protective Metallic Barrier

Service Conduit with Bell End

D

P
uit
E

E
P

uit
E

W

Figure 8-8 Service Cable Termination Section–Top View

S

Fixed Polycarbonate Viewing Window

Neutral Lug in Meter Compartment

Lock Latch Accommodates 5/16” Locking Shaft

nate
w
Metering Section
nate
w
Metering Section Locking
Provisions for
5/16” Lock Shaft
Lifting
Handle
36”
75”
Customer Section
Protective
Meter Barrier
Pull Section

Figure 8-9 Front Outside

36” Min.

75” Max.

8-7 2022 – 2023

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.4. (continued)

Test Bypass Facilities (Inside)

f Glastic Barrier Between Meters and Test Blocks

Meter and Test Block Covers

Separate K/O for the Line. Each Meter Has One K/O for Load Wires

Handle Provision for Removing the Cable Termination Section Cover

Locking Provision

A A C
B
75” Max.
36” Min.
75” Max.
36” Min.
75” Max.
36” Min.
75” Max.
36” Min.
75” Max.
36” Min.
75” Max.
36” Min.
75” Max.
36” Min.
75” Max.
36” Min.
75” Max.
36” Min.
75” Max.
36” Min.
Barrier
Pull Section
Barrier
D
Barrier
Pull Section
Barrier
D
Barrier
Pull Section
Barrier
D
Barrier
Pull Section
Barrier
D
75” Max.
36” Min.
75” Max.
36” Min.

Main Disconnects to Have Lock-Off that Accepts a 5/16” Lock Shaft

Figure 8-10 Front Inside

1.50”
Landing Lugs for
4/0 Through
750 MCM (Kcmil)
Aluminum Cable
W
Rigid Barrier
Between Lug
Extends 1/2”
Minimum Be
the Energized
Landing Lugs for
4/0 Through
750 MCM (Kcmil)
Aluminum Cable
1.50”
W
22.0

Figure 8-11 PG&E Service Cable Termination (Pull) Section

2022 – 2023 8-8

No Panels or Walls on the outer Sides of the Meters

Meter Section Barrier to Extend to Edge of Test Block Barrier

Test-Bypass Cover

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

Meter Socket

Landing Lugs for 4/0 Through 750 MCM PG&E Service Cable

Locking Provision

Mounting Flange for Cover

Figure 8-12 Side View: Cover Removed

Mounting Flange for Cover

10” Min. 10” Min. 10” Min.
10” Min. 10” Min. 10” Min. 10” Min. 10” Min. 10” Min. 10” Min. 10” Min.
9” M
3”
Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3”
Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.
3” Min.

3” Min.

Mounting Flange Test Bypass Block for Cover

Figure 8-13 Front View−Interior Cover Removed

8-9 2022 – 2023

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.4. (continued)

Applicants must ensure that nonresidential service pedestals meet the following requirements.

A. Exterior Hood: An enclosing cover that is hinged to allow the front, sides, and top of the hood to rotate upward and back, 90 degrees or more, as one unit to expose the internal metering compartment.

  1. Ensure that the lifting force required to open the hood does not exceed 25 pounds.

  2. Also, the hood must have a locking device to prevent it from closing while in the open position.

B. Metering Compartment: The meter socket must be mounted on a support, attached to the meter panel, and provided with a sealing ring. Enclose the metering compartment with an enclosing cover (i.e., exterior hood) that meets the following requirements.

  1. Ensure the area in front of the meter sockets and test bypass is not blocked with side panels, enclosure walls, or other obstruction as described in 8.4.A., “Exterior Hood,” above. This provides additional safety for personnel in the event of an arc flash.

  2. Equipped with a lifting handle.

  3. Sealable and lockable with a padlock having a 5/16-inch lock shaft.

  4. Provided with a fixed poly-carbonate viewing window.

C. The test-bypass compartment cover:

  1. Must be sealable and fitted with a lifting handle.

  2. Has two lifting handles if the cover is more than 16 inches wide.

D. Test-bypass blocks with rigid barriers are furnished, installed, and wired or bused to the meter socket by the manufacturer. Connection sequences must be line-loaded from left to right and clearly identified by block-letter labeling at least 3/4-inch high.

Applicants must ensure that test-bypass facilities are installed with the following clearances.

  1. Facilities require 3 inches of vertical clearance from the upper test connector stud to the upper compartment access opening.

  2. Facilities require 3 inches from the center of the cable terminal screw to the lower compartment access opening.

  3. Facilities require 1-1/2 inches of side clearance from the rigid insulating barriers to the compartment sides and 1 inch to the compartment access openings.

2022 – 2023 8-10

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.4. (continued)

E. Utility compartment covers (i.e., exterior hood and pull section) are sealable and lockable using a padlock with a 5/16-inch lock shaft.

F. Secure internal equipment (attached to the outer walls of the enclosure) in place with devices that cannot be loosened from the outside. Do not use screws or bolts requiring special tools for installation or removal.

G. The terminating pull-section of the pedestals:

  1. Comply with the minimum dimensions illustrated in Table 8-2, “Minimum Dimensions: Inches,” on Page 8-7.

  2. Accept a minimum 4-inch and a maximum 5-inch conduit.

  3. Have covers equipped with lifting handles.

  4. Are equipped with aluminum-bodied mechanical lugs, ranging from 4/0 through 750 kcmil, for terminating the service conductors. 1-1/2 inch minimum spacing will be provided between the energized lugs or bussing. The 1-1/2 inch spacing may be reduced if rigid insulating barriers (1/16-inch minimum thickness) are provided that extend a minimum of 1/2 inch beyond any exposed, energized part when the maximum wire size is installed.

  5. Have insulated cables or busses installed between the termination lugs and the test-bypass facilities.

  6. Have protective metallic barriers, 16-gauge minimum, provided between the pull sections and their (the applicants’) distribution sections.

  7. Have a 1/4-inch minimum clearance between the applicants’ section walls and the barriers to prevent screws and bolts from protruding into the pull sections.

For information on structural-mounting requirements and pedestal support, consult your local PG&E project coordinator and meter shop.

8.5. Nonresidential Current-Transformer Rated Pedestals, 400 – 600 Amps 1Ø or 3Ø, 800 Amps 3Ø

This subsection provides information on single-metered, current-transformer (CT-) rated metering pedestals from 400 amps up to 800 amps. These pedestals are built with the utility cable termination compartment on the back and with the metering compartment on the front top above the customer section, or a meter panel connected to the side of the pedestal. Refer to Figure 8-14, “Nonresidential CT Pedestal (400 – 600 Amps 1∅ or 3∅, 800 Amps 3∅ ),” on Page 8-13, and Figure 8-15, “Nonresidential CT Pedestal – Side Mount Meter Panel (400 – 600 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅, 800 Amps 3∅ ),” on Page 8-14. These pedestals are only approved for the manufacturers and model numbers listed in Table 8-3, “CT Pedestal Approved Manufacturer’s Model Numbers, and Figures” on Page 8-12.

8-11 2022 – 2023

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.5. (continued)

Table 8-3 CT Pedestal Approved Manufacturer’s Model Numbers and Figures [2,] [3]

Manufacturer Model/Catalog Numbers Figure
Milbank CP3 Series1 CP3 Series1 8-14 & 8-15
Tesco Controls 24−412CTSBXB 24−418CTSBXB 8-14

1 Full model numbers are not listed due to numerous variations. Pedestals must meet all PG&E requirements. Final approval is in the field. 2 These pedestals are only approved for a single meter socket at specific voltages and amperages. SeeSection 10, Table 10-3, “Dual-Socket, Hinged, Meter-Panel Requirement,” on Page 10-39, for dual-socket requirements. 3 For lowCompartment, for Underground Service, ‐ profile switchboards, refer to Figure 10” on Page 10-41.-28, “Low-Profile Switchboard Service Section, with CT

2022 – 2023 8-12

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.5. (continued)

Hinged Demand Meter Reset Cover with Window

Fully Hinged Meter Section Cover

11” Min.

Fully Hinged 15” Max. Meter Section Cover–Opens 90 ° Min.

Padlock Bracket Extends Through Door for Security

Hinged Deadfront

Side View

Lifting Eye

Wire Support

Padlockable ¼ -Turn Handle

40-1/4” Min. to Bottom Stud

Hinged Exterior Door with Door Stop to Hold the Door Open

Front View

Min.
PG&E
Max
Distribution
Section

PG&E
Distribution
Section
Min.
Max
PG&E
Distribution
Section
PG&E
Distribution
Section
Min.
Max
PG&E
Termination
Section
40-1/4” M

Front Inside View Back Inside View

Figure 8-14 Nonresidential CT Pedestal (400 – 600 Amps 1or 3, 800 Amps 3)

8-13 2022 – 2023

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.5. (continued)

C C

Front View – Load Compartment

Working Space Required 48” Deep

Working Space Required 36” Deep

Top View – Layout

Figure 8-15 Nonresidential CT Pedestal – Side Mount Meter Panel (400–600 Amps, 1or 3, 800 Amps 3)

2022 – 2023 8-14

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

8.5. (continued)

Utility Side

Sealable Pad-Lockable Flip Latch

Hood Removed to

Show Meter Socket

CT Meter Socket

and Test Switch

Combo Enclosure,

Factory Prewired

Back View – Utility Compartment

CT Meter Wiring Cutout

Do Not Install Stationary Skirt. No Protruding Objects Below Meter

Locking Provisions Required for PG&E Lock

Hinged Exterior Door with Door Stop to Hold Door in Open Position

Side View – Meter

Figure 8-15 (continued)

Nonresidential CT Pedestal – Side Mount Meter Panel

(400–600 Amps, 1or 3, 800 Amps 3)

8-15 2022 – 2023

Section 8, Electric Metering: Pedestals

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 8-16

SECTION 9 ELECTRIC METERING: COMPONENTS AND CABLE TERMINATING FACILITIES

Section 9 Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides detailed information on individual electric metering components and underground service cable termination compartments or sections that Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) finds acceptable for use in electric metering and service construction projects.

The Electric Utilities Service Equipment Requirements Committee ( EUSERC ) book, Section 300, contains service and meter-equipment details for PG&E-approved components, as well.

9.2. Test Blocks for Self-Contained Metering, 0 Amps Through 225 Amps

A test block is a specific type of test-bypass device . A test block differs from a test-bypass facility, which is any mechanism used to bypass meter sockets. Both test blocks and test-bypass facilities are used for self-contained metering exclusively.

Applicants must ensure that test blocks meet the following requirements.

A. The hex nut must measure 5/8-inch across flats with a copper washer attached. The hex nut must de-energize the meter socket when backed off.

B. Stud A, located at each conductor terminal, is used to bypass the applicant’s load current. Applicants must ensure that these studs are used as described in the following three bullets.

- Stud A must be located in the clear area between the terminating lug and the

circuit-closing nut.

- Stud A may be positioned on the terminal body, on the terminal screw, or on

the bus member.

- Stud A may be incorporated as part of the wire stop.

C. Terminals must be aluminum-bodied and suitable for copper and aluminum conductors. The terminal screw may be an Allen type, 3/16-inch across flats for 100-ampere meters, or 5/16-inch across flats for 200-ampere meters.

D. If Stud A is a part of the terminal screw, the terminal screw must be a 5/8-inch hex.

9-1 2022 – 2023

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.4. (continued)

Barriers

9” Max. for Six Poles

12-24 Stud and Hex
12-24 Stud and Hex
Nut 1/2” Across Flats
1/2
1/2” Min.
1” Min.
12-24 Stud and Hex
Nut 1/2” Across Flats
1/2
1/2” Min.
1” Min.
12-24 Stud and Hex
Nut 1/2” Across Flats
1/2
1/2” Min.
1” Min.
12-24 Stud and Hex
Nut 1/2” Across Flats
1/2
1/2” Min.
1” Min.
12-24 Stud and Hex
Nut 1/2” Across Flats
1/2
1/2” Min.
1” Min.
Min. Min. 1/2 1/2
1-1/4 ” Min. ” Min. ” Min. 3/4” Min.
to 1” Max.
Notes
1 and 2
3/4” Min.
to 1” Max.
Notes
1 and 2
3/4” Min.
to 1” Max.
Notes
1 and 2
1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2”
1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2”
1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2”
1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2”
1-1/2” 1-1/2”
12-24 Stud and Hex
s
12-24 Stud and Hex
Nut 1/2” Across Flats
Barrier
1-1/2”
x.

1/2”
1/2”
1/2” Min.
3/4” Min.
1/4”Min.
1/2” Min.
3/4” Min.
to 1” Max.
Stud A 12-24
Stud and Hex Nut
1/2” Across Flats
(See Note 2)
3” Max.
1” Min.
1-1/4” Min.
7/8” Min.
1-3/4”
Note 3
Notes
1 and 2

Figure 9-1 Test Blocks for Self-Contained Metering, 0 Amps−225 Amps

Notes in reference to Figure 9-1.

  1. A hex nut (i.e., 5/8-inch across flats with a copper washer attached) de-energizes the meter socket when backed off.

  2. Stud A, located at each conductor terminal, permits PG&E to bypass the applicant’s load current. Locate Stud A in the clear area between the terminating lug and the circuit-closing nut. Stud A may be positioned on the terminal body, on the terminal screw, on the bus member, or incorporated as part of the wire stop.

  3. Terminals must be aluminum-bodied and suitable for copper and aluminum conductors. The terminal screw may be an Allen-type (i.e., 3/16-inch across flats for 100-amp meters or 5/16-inch across flats for 200-amp meters). If Stud A is a part of the terminal screw, the terminal screw must be a 5/8-inch hex.

  4. Do not use an automatic bypass or manual lever bypass. These types of test blocks are not allowed.

2022 – 2023 9-2

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.3. Test Switch Mounting Base Detail

Figure 9-2, below, shows the base dimensions for mounting a removable test switch.

10-32
1-1/4”

TAP
3-1
3-1/4”
4-1/4”
3-1/4”
4-1/4”
1-5/8”
1-1/4”
1-5/8”
1-5/8”
1-1/4”
3-1/4”
4-1/4”
1-1/4”
3-1/4”
4-1/4”
1-1/4”
3-1/4”
4-1/4”
3-1/4”
4-1/4”
3-1/4” 3-1/4” 3-1/4” 3-1/4”

Figure 9-2 Removable Test Switch Mounting-Base Detail

9.4. Separate CT Cabinet, 201 Amps and Above, Single Phase and Three Phase

Applicants must ensure that cabinets meet the following requirements.

A. All covers are sealable.

B. Outdoor current transformer (CT) cabinets are weatherproof.

C. Grounding lugs are provided.

D. CT cabinets are not used as splicing chambers.

E. CTs are not tapped off to supply other meters or used by applicants for any other purposes.

F. PG&E’s underground service-lateral conductors do not terminate in CT cabinets.

9-3 2022 – 2023

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.4. (continued)

Table 9-1 CT Cabinet Minimum Dimensions

Type of Service Cabinet Size
(in Inches)
CT Mounting Base CT Cabinet
3-Wire, 1∅ 24w x 48h x 12d Figure 9-6 Figure 9-8
4-Wire, 3∅ 36w x 48h x 12d Figure 9-7 Figure 9-10

2022 – 2023 9-4

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.5. CT Mounting Base, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps

Applicants must ensure that all of the required bolts are furnished and that conductors are connected to the line and load terminals on the CT mounting base. Also, the ampacity rating of the mounting base must not be greater than the PG&E service rating.

9/16

Corrosion-Treated Steel

9/16” Hole (Four Places)

Figure 9-6 3-Wire, Single-Phase Service, Mounting Base

2 9/16” 2” 2-1/2” M
3/4”

1-1/4”

2”
3/4”

1-1/4”

2”
3/4”

1-1/4”

2”
3/4”

1-1/4”

2”
3/4”

1-1/4”

2”
3/4”

1-1/4”

2”
3/4”

1-1/4”

2”
3/4”

1-1/4”

2”
1”
1-3/8”

8-1/8”
3/4”
1-3/4”
10-32
Wash
Into B
3-1/2”
Min.
1-3/4”

ine Screw and
ed and Tapped
1”
1-3/8”

8-1/8”
3/4”
1-3/4”
10-32
Wash
Into B
3-1/2”
Min.
1”
1-3/8”

8-1/8”

Figure 9-7 4-Wire, Three-Phase Service, Mounting Base

9-5 2022 – 2023

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.6. Alternate CT Mounting Base, One Phase or Three Phase

Applicants must ensure that mounting bases meet the following requirements.

A. Insulated supports are rated for the serving voltage and have sufficient mechanical strength for the application.

B. Mounting bases only accept bar-type CTs.

C. Two 1/2-inch steel, Grade 5 bolts are provided for each cable-terminating and CT-mounting position. Each bolt must be furnished with a 2 1/4-inch diameter Belleville washer and a nut. Bolts must be secured in place and spaced as shown in all figures. All parts must be plated to prevent corrosion.

D. The ampacity rating of the mounting base must not be greater than the PG&E service rating being supplied.

3/4”

10−32 Machine

Washer, Drilled and Tapped Into

Cable Term.

CT Mounting Bolts, Four Places Typ. See Subsection 9.6.C.

Bus Marking, CT,

See Subsection 9.6.C. (Above)

Insulating Support

2” Min.,

Insulating Support

See Subsection 9.6.A. (Above)
in.,
1/4”
/2”
ax.
ÌÌ ÌÌÌ ÌÌ
ÌÌ ÌÌÌ ÌÌ 3-1/
ating

ating

in.,
/2”
ax.
ÌÌ
ÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌ
ÌÌ
3-1/
1/4”
See Subsection 9.6.A. (Above)
ating


ÌÌ
ÌÌ
1/
ating


ÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌ
ÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌ
ÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌ

Figure 9-8 CT Mounting Base (Single-Phase, 3-Wire, 400 Amps–600 Amps, 0 Volts−600 Volts)

2022 – 2023 9-6

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.6. (continued)

1-3/8”

CT Mounting Bolts, Six Places Typ.

10−32 Machine Screw and Washer, Drilled and Tapped

1-3/8”

See Subsection 9.6.C. on Page 9-6 Insulating Support

2” Min., 2-1/2” Max.

Insulating Support

Figure 9-9 CT Mounting Base (Three Phase, 4-Wire, 400 Amps–800 Amps, 0 Volts–600 Volts)

Notes in reference to Figure 9-8 on Page 9-6 and Figure 9-9 above.

  1. CT mounting bases rated for 600 amps and 800 amps are allowed only for select types of wall-mounted and pad-mounted service termination and metering equipment.

9-7 2022 – 2023

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.7. Bused CT Cabinet, 3-Wire Service, 201 Amps Through 600 Amps

Applicants must ensure that cabinets meet the following requirements.

A. All covers are sealable.

B. Outdoor CT cabinets are weatherproof.

C. Grounding lugs are provided.

D. Neutral or unmetered wiring, either cable or bus bar, is located on either side of the cabinet.

E. CT cabinets are not used as splicing chambers.

F. PG&E’s underground service lateral conductors do not terminate in CT cabinets.

G. For Virtual Net Energy Metering (VNEM) and Net Generation Output Meter (NGOM) applications only, CT cabinets rated at 600–800 amps may be allowed, including multiple cables per phase on the line and load side of this CT cabinet.

H. Limited to a maximum of 400 amps for overhead services.

48” Min.

Handle

See Bus-Drilling Detail, Figure 9-11 on Page 9-9

Caution Sign

1” Min.

Bus
Support
10-32 Screw
and Washer
6-7/8”
1-3/4”
3/4
4” 4”
9”
Min. Min.
1-3/4”
10-32 Screw
and Washer
4”
Min.
6-7/8”
Bus
Support
9”
4”
Min.
3/4

Front View

Standing Surface Side View

Figure 9-10 Bused CT Cabinet, 3-Wire Service, 400 Amps−600 Amps

2022 – 2023 9-8

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.8. Bused CT Cabinet, 4-Wire Service, 400 Amps

Applicants must ensure that cabinets meet the following requirements.

A. All covers are sealable.

B. Outdoor CT cabinets are weatherproof.

C. Grounding lugs are provided.

D. Neutral or unmetered wiring, either cable or bus bar, is located on either side of the cabinet.

E. CT cabinets are not used as splicing chambers.

F. PG&E’s underground service lateral conductors do not terminate in CT cabinets.

G. For VNEM and NGOM applications only, CT cabinets rated at 600–800 amps may be allowed, including multiple cables per phase on the line and load side of this CT cabinet.

1-3/8”

5/8”

Bus Support

Handle

1” Min.

Standing Surface Side View

cre she
36” Min.
1-3/4”
10-32 Screw
and Washer
4”
Min
6-7/8
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-3/4”
10-32 Screw
and Washer
4”
Min
6-7/8
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-3/4”
10-32 Screw
and Washer
4”
Min
6-7/8
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-3/4”
10-32 Screw
and Washer
4”
Min
6-7/8
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-3/4”
10-32 Screw
and Washer
4”
Min
6-7/8
9”
4”
Min.
9”
8 8
1-3/4”
10-32 Screw
and Washer
4”
Min
6-7/8
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-3/4”
10-32 Screw
and Washer
4”
Min
6-7/8
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-3/4”
10-32 Screw
and Washer
4”
Min
6-7/8
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-3/4”
10-32 Screw
and Washer
4”
Min
6-7/8
9”
4”
Min.
9”
/8” /8” /8”
8” 8”

9/16”

Bus Drilling Detail

Figure 9-11 Bused CT Cabinet (4-Wire Service, 400 Amps Max)

9-9 2022 – 2023

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.9. Meter Box for Transformer-Rated Metering

Applicants must ensure that meter socket jaw requirements and connections are made according to the rules in Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” Subsection 5.6., “Meter Types and Connections,” on Page 5-26.

Horizontal Lay-In Bonding Lug With #8 Min. Wire Capacity

3/4” Wire Pulling Space

Caution Sign “DO NOT BREAK SEALS,

NO FUSES INSIDE”

Hub 12” Min. 12” Min. Hub
Front Seal
ALS,
E”
Hub
3”
3”

1-3/4” Max.
5”
See Note 1
9”
2
11”
Hub Hub Hub
Front Seal
ALS,
E”
Hub
3”
3”

1-3/4” Max.
5”
See Note 1
9”
2
11”
9”
2
1”
Front Seal
ALS,
E”
Hub
3”
3”

1-3/4” Max.
5”
See Note 1
9”
2
11”
Front Seal
ALS,
E”
Hub
3”
3”

1-3/4” Max.
5”
See Note 1
9”
2
11”
Front Seal
ALS,
E”
Hub
3”
3”

1-3/4” Max.
5”
See Note 1
9”
2
11”
See Note 1 See Note 1
Front Seal
ALS,
E”
Hub
3”
3”

1-3/4” Max.
5”
See Note 1
9”
2
11”
1-3/4” 1-3/4” Max.
Max.
Max.

2 K.O. (See Note 2)

4-1/2”

1/ 2” 2”
1/ 2” 2” 1” 1” 1”
Max. Max. Max.
Max. Max. Max.
Max. Max. Max.
Max. Max.
Max. Max.

2 K.O. Max. (See Note 2)

Figure 9-12

Front S
Note 2) Note 2) Note 2)

Meter Box for Transformer-Rated Metering (Single-Phase or Three-Phase Installations)

Notes in reference to Figure 9-12.

  1. Location of mounting bracket for test switch or reactive transformer.

  2. K.O.−knock out

2022 – 2023 9-10

9.9. (continued)

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

37”
0” Meter Panel
See Note 2
Meter Panel
See Note 2
Meter Panel
See Note 2

Front Side

Table 9-2 Hinged Meter Panel Requirements

2” 29” 6”
1”
1”
1”

Top View

Service
Voltage
Switch
Rating
Hinged
Panel
Required
277/480V
3∅, 4-Wire
401 Amps
and Above,
Yes
120/240V
3∅, 4-Wire
801 Amps
and Above
Yes
120/208V
3∅, 4-Wire
1,001 Amps
and Above
Yes

Figure 9-13 Remote Metering Cabinet (Three-Phase Installations)

Notes in reference to Figure 9-13.

  1. The enclosure must be:

a. Equipped with a device to secure the door in the open position at 90° or more.

b. Secured in the closed position with a handle-operated latching mechanism, and lockable with a padlock having a 5/16” lockshaft.

                                 - “
  1. For meter panel requirements, see Section 10, Figure 10 30, Standard Switchboard Service Section,

30-Inch Panel for Socket Meters and Recorder,” on Page 10-43. 3. Written information must be provided and marked inside of the meter panel. This information must include:

a. Potential Transformer/Current Transformer (PT/CT) designation (Type)

b. Rating Factor (RF)

c. Burden

  1. Remote metering must be approved by the the local meter shop before installation.
  2. See Table 9-2, “Hinged Meter Panel Requirements,” above.

9-11 2022 – 2023

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.10. Underground Service Cable-Termination Compartments or Sections

Applicants must ensure that underground service-termination compartments or sections meet the following requirements.

A. The termination compartment covers must be removable, sealable, provided with two lifting handles, and limited to a maximum size of 9 square feet.

B. The cover panel can be sealed using two drilled stud-nut and wing-nut assemblies on opposite sides of the panel.

C. The minimum dimensions specified in Table 9-3, “Minimum Wall-Mounted Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential and Nonresidential, Single-Phase or Three-Phase,” on Page 9-13, are used when the service conduit enters the bottom of the termination compartment or termination enclosure and all load conductors exit above the terminals. When the service conduit enters from the side or back of the pull box, use the X dimensions from the closest portion of the conduit to the nearest termination bolt.

D. Applicants must not use wall-mounted service-termination and pull enclosures for three-phase, nonresidential installations rated 401 amps through 2,500 amps. See Table 9-4, “Minimum Pad-Mounted (Floor-Standing) Switchboard Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential and Nonresidential,

                                              Single-Phase and Three-Phase,” on Page 9-13, and Section 10, Table 10 1,

“Minimum Bottom-Fed Pull Section Dimensions,” on Page 10-27, for bottom-entry installation requirements. See Table 10-2, “Pull Section Dimensions (Minimums) Below Ground Level,” on Page 10-31, for side-entry or back-entry requirements.

E. A PG&E project coordinator is contacted when developing nonresidential, 401-amps-and-above services. Applicants must ensure that they meet PG&E’s requirements for underground service-termination pull boxes, which include the following:

  1. Installing multiple sets of utility service cables.

  2. Provide stacking provisions (i.e., bolts) to terminate cables in any three-phase installation that is 1,200 amps or greater.

  3. Providing additional space (i.e., depth, width, and termination height), when required, in any section of switchboard, panel board, or other enclosure intended as a termination point for PG&E’s service cables. This additional space will provide the mandatory clearances between phases and grounded surfaces, as well as accommodate the installed service cables.

See Numbered Document 063928, “Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0–600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities,” for the appropriate conduit and cable requirements to use when designing nonresidential service installations. This document is included in Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”

F. See additional requirements for pad-mounted switchboards in Section 10,

Subsection 10.3.14., Underground, Cable Terminating Facilities in Pull Boxes or Pull Sections,” on Page 10-34. The information and figures describe additional requirements for applicants who install these facilities.

2022 – 2023 9-12

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.10. (continued)

Table 9-3 Minimum Wall-Mounted Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential and Nonresidential, Single-Phase [1] or Three-Phase [1]

Service Rating
(Amps)
Minimum Access
Opening “W”
X Y
Service Rating
(Amps)
3-Wire 4-Wire Bottom
Entry
Side/Rear
Entry
Bottom
Entry
Rear
Entry
Service Rating
(Amps)
All Measurements in Inches All Measurements in Inches All Measurements in Inches All Measurements in Inches All Measurements in Inches All Measurements in Inches
0−2252 10-1/2 14 11 36 6 15
226−400 10-1/2 14 22 42 6 24
401−6003 16-1/2 26 48 11 24
Over 6004, 5 See Table 9-4, below, for all single-phase services over 600 amperes
and all three-phase services over 400 amperes.
See Table 9-4, below, for all single-phase services over 600 amperes
and all three-phase services over 400 amperes.
See Table 9-4, below, for all single-phase services over 600 amperes
and all three-phase services over 400 amperes.
See Table 9-4, below, for all single-phase services over 600 amperes
and all three-phase services over 400 amperes.
See Table 9-4, below, for all single-phase services over 600 amperes
and all three-phase services over 400 amperes.
See Table 9-4, below, for all single-phase services over 600 amperes
and all three-phase services over 400 amperes.

1 See “Notes” at the bottom of this page in reference to Table 9-3 and Table 9-4. 2 SeeCombination (OH/UG) Meter Panel,Section 6, Table 6-1, “Residential (0 Amps” on Page 6-13, for minimum dimensions of residential (combination) meter−225 Amps) Enclosure,” on Page 6-5, and Table 6-2, “Residential panels. 3 Single phase only. 4 800-amp services and greater must be three phase and terminate in pad-mounted equipment. Refer to Table 9-4 below. 5 Excludes the wall-mounted panel inCurrent-Transformer Cabinet (600 Amps, 1Ø or 3Ø, 800 Amps 3Ø),Section 7, Figure 7-5, “Underground Service Combination Meter and” on Page 7-10.

Table 9-4 Minimum Pad-Mounted (Floor-Standing) Switchboard Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential and Nonresidential, Single-Phase and Three-Phase

Service Rating
(Amps)
Minimum Access
Opening “W”
Termination Height “X” 5
Service Rating
(Amps)
3-Wire 4-Wire 4-Wire
Service Rating
(Amps)
All Measurements in Inches All Measurements in Inches All Measurements in Inches
321−400 24 24 42 Minimum−72 Maximum
(see Note 4 below)
401−800 24 24 24
801−1,200 24 30 30
1,201−2,000 30 35 35
2,001−2,500 42 60 Minimum−72 Maximum

Notes in reference to Table 9-3 and Table 9-4.

  1. If termination bus-landing stubs are installed perpendicular to the back of the board, a wider enclosure dimension will be required to accommodate the installation of PG&E’s cables.

  2. Maintain a clear working space. When return flanges are necessary, ensure they do not intrude into service-conductor space.

  3. Dimension W is the minimum width of the pull section access opening.

  4. The minimum termination height is 40-1/4 inches for bottom-fed service sections only as shown in

Section 7, Figure 7-7 on Page 7-8 and Section 10, Figure 10-16 on Page 10-27.

  1. The X-dimension is measured from the bottom of the enclosure to the first phase bolt.

9-13 2022 – 2023

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.10. (continued)

3/4” Min.

Connectors Over 200 Amp Furnished by PG&E

2”

Y
4” Min. Wall−Mou
ts
1” Min.
Connect
Furnishe
2-1/2” Min.
4” Min. Wall−Mou
1” Min.
Connect
Furnishe
2-1/2” Min.
1” Min.
2-1/2” Min.
ts

Connect
Furnishe
Y
4” Min. Wall−Mou
Y Y Y Y
1” Min.
2-1/2” Min.
ts

Connect
Furnishe
Y
4” Min. Wall−Mou
1” Min.
2-1/2” Min.
ts

Connect
Furnishe
Y
4” Min. Wall−Mou

Conduit Must Be Staggered to Facilitate Service Cable Installation

W Y

Customer Service Entrance Conductors Exit Above Bus Stubs

1/2” Bolts

Shaded Space is for Service Supply Conductors Only

1” Min.–Wall−Mounted 4” Min.–Pad−Mounted

See Note 2

Lateral Conduits

W
As
Re
q’d. ÇÇÇÇÇ
Load
Side
Bus Stubs
to Prevent
As
Re
q’d. ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
See
Table 9-3
and
Table 9-4
for minimum
pull-box
dimensions
7
M
5”
ax.
5”
ax.
5”
ax.

Grade Level

Figure 9-14 Typical Underground Service Termination Section and Pull Box, Wall-Mounted or Pad-Mounted (Floor-Standing)

Notes in reference to Figure 9-14.

  1. Ensure that pull-box covers are removable, sealable, provided with two lifting handles, and limited to a maximum size of 9 square feet. Sealing provisions must consist of two drilled stud-and-wing nut assemblies on opposite sides of the panel. Ensure that all security screws are captive.

  2. Maintain a clear working space. When return flanges are necessary, ensure that they do not intrude into service conductor space (designated by shading).

  3. The 6-inch minimum height requirement from grade to panel does not apply for a floor-standing switchboard.

  4. A main service switch rated at 2,501 amps and above requires bus-duct configuration.

Notes continued on the next page

2022 – 2023 9-14

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.10. (continued)

Notes in reference to Figure 9-14, continued.

  1. Lugs for terminating the customer’s ground wire (or other grounding conductors) must be located outside of the sealable section and must be designed to readily permit the customer’s neutral system to be isolated, when necessary, from the serving agency.

  2. Ground buss, when provided, must be located at the rear of underground terminating enclosures (i.e., pull boxes and pull sections).

  3. Switchboard pull and termination sections must not contain line/supply side cable tap connections. A dedicated tap section or a dedicated termination enclosure must be installed.

Note: 400-Ampere Bus Stub Is Illustrated.

Figure 9-15 Detail of Clearance Requirements for Adjacent Termination Bus Stubs

9-15 2022 – 2023

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.10. (continued)

1/2” Bolts

2”
olts olts
1-3/4”

201−400 Amps

4”
1-3/4”
2”
6”
1-3/4”
2” 2”

401−800 Amps

8”
1-3/4”
2” 2” 2”
801−1,200 Amps
10” 10” 10” 10” 10” 10”
1-3/4”
2” 2” 2” 2”

5 Landings, 2,000 Amps

4 Landings, 1,600 Amps

14”
1-3/4”
2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2”

7 Landings, 2,500 Amps

Figure 9-16 Detail of Aluminum, Termination Bus Stubs

2022 – 2023 9-16

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.11. Approved Service-Terminal Conductor Connectors

Applicants must observe the following requirements when they plan to install approved, service-terminal conductor connectors.

                                              A. Applicants must furnish and install PG&E-approved, range taking connectors,

suitable for aluminum conductors, for enclosures rated at 0 through 225 amps.

B. PG&E must furnish and install approved, cable-to-flat-bar connectors on the termination bus stub, as specified in Table 9-5, “Approved, Compression-Type Service-Terminal Connectors,” on Page 9-18, for enclosures rated above 225 amps. For a Class 320-amp panel, cable-to - flat-bar connectors on the termination bus stub are preferred; however, 320-amp-rated meter panels with hex lug terminations are acceptable also.

C. Applicants may use one-bolt, bus attachment connectors for 0- through 225-amp services if the connectors are anchored to prevent the connector assembly from twisting.

Applicants must not use pin termination connectors to install cables larger than those intended for the range-taking connectors in their service panel or service enclosure.

N OTE : Do not peel stranded cables to fit conductors into termination connectors.

See PG&E Numbered Document 015251, “Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems,” Table 28, “Specifications for Terminal Connectors−Aluminum Cable-to-Flat-Bar,” Page 26, for more information. This document is included in Appendix C.

Two Holes for 1/2” Bolt

1-3/4”

Max.

Figure 9-17 Service-Terminal Conductor Connector

9-17 2022 – 2023

Section 9, Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities

9.11. (continued)

Table 9-5 Approved, Compression-Type, Service-Terminal Connectors

Conductor
Size: AWG
or kcmil
Manufacturer and Catalog Number Tool
Index
Number
Conductor
Size: AWG
or kcmil
Mac Homac Burndy Electrical
Specialty
3M
Company
Code Code
4/0 NLRB4/0-8N AL-4/0-
NTN
YAK28A-
2G2
303759 4/0 AS
4/0 MLB4/0-8N YA28-A5 AHL-4/0-
BNTP
40145 4/0 A
350 NLRB350-8N AL-350
-NTN
YAK31A-
2G2
303758 350 A
350 MLB350-8N YA31-A3 AHL-350-
BNTP
40156 350 A
700/750 NLRB750-8N AL-750
-NTN
YAK39A-
2G2
303833 700/750 A
700/750 MLB750-8N YA39-AM
2
AHL-750-
BNTP
40172 700/750 A
1,000 NLRB1,000-8N AL-1,00
0-SSN
YAK44A-
2NG7
303834 1,000 A
1,000 MLB1,000-8N YCAK44
A-2G2
AHL-1,00
0-BNTP
40178 1,000 A

2022 – 2023 9-18

SECTION 10 ELECTRIC SWITCHBOARDS: 0 Volts THROUGH 600 VOLTS

Section 10 Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides specific dimensions and details for service and meter equipment that is assembled by the manufacturer in freestanding, self-supporting switchboards.

10.2. General Requirements

Applicants must meet the following requirements when they plan to install electric switchboards.

A. Ensure that switchboard service and meter equipment is built to the requirements of this section.

B. Ensure that metering switchboard and panelboard drawings, with current ratings of 320 amperes (amps) or above, are submitted in triplicate to Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) for review and approval. Drawings must contain specific Electric Utility Service Requirements Committee (EUSERC) or Electric and Gas Service Requirements ( Greenbook ) drawing and sheet numbers for reference purposes. Refer to Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” Subsection 5.2.2., “Drawing Submittal Requirements for Metering and Service Termination Equipment,” on Page 5-1, for detailed requirements.

C. Ensure that drawings submitted for PG&E’s review and approval include the following information.

- The contractor’s name and address

- The applicant’s name

- The job location

- Phase, voltage, and ampacity rating

- Energy Reduction Maintenance Switch (ERMS) and associated

component’s location

D. Before authorizing the manufacture of a switchboard, an applicant must consult his or her local PG&E project coordinator for specific general utility requirements.

N OTE : See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk Contact

Information,” at the front of this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed by area.

10-1 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.2. (continued)

E. General utility requirements include the following:

- Horizontal bus-bar requirements

- Service voltage, phase, and wires

- Meter-panel requirements to determine the applicable rate schedule

- Service-termination location

- Switchboard and/or meter location(s)

- Size and number of service conductors

F. PG&E provides and installs meters, metering transformers, test switches, and all secondary wiring from the metering transformers to the meter.

G. Applicants must ensure that separation exists between the meters and metering transformers for the following reasons.

- To ensure meter accessibility.

- To prevent metering inaccuracies.

- To prevent unacceptable environmental conditions.

H. Applicants must ensure that rigid steel conduit is installed between the meter and the metering transformers. The rigid steel conduit must be 1-1/4 inches minimum diameter and must be limited to three 90° bends unless the applicant provides sealable, accessible, exposed conduits.

I. Service-entrance conductors must enter the metering transformer compartment from one end and leave from the opposite end. The direction of the feed may be either from the top or from the bottom of the compartment.

Load conductors must not reenter or pass through a current transformer (CT) compartment or any PG&E sealed compartment or section. Even if the conductors are inside of a raceway.

J. When transformer-rated meters are installed for multiple applicants, there must be a separate service section for each installed meter and its associated service switch.

K. When applicants install totalized metering, they must install, own, and maintain nominal 1‐1/4-inch metal conduit between the switchboard metering facilities.

L. Applicants should group self-contained meters and switches only when they meet the following conditions.

  1. Do not run unmetered service entrance conductors and metered load conductors in the same conduit raceway or wiring gutter.

  2. Ensure that each meter position and each service switch or breaker is marked clearly and permanently and is identified by the building owner, or a representative of the building owner, to indicate the occupancy being served.

2022 – 2023 10-2

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.2. (continued)

M. Ensure an Energy Reduction Maintenance Switch (ERMS) and its associated components are not installed in PG&E sections, when required to be installed. If components of the ERMS are installed in an unmetered bus location, they must be covered and barriered off from the bus and a label (e.g., ERMS NEC 240.87) must be affixed indicating the National Electric Code (NEC) rule number requiring the ERMS equipment.

N. See Subsection 10.8., “Adding New Metering Equipment to Existing Switchboards,” on Page 10-45, before connecting a new meter panel or meter section to an existing switchboard.

10.3. Switchboard Service Section

A switchboard service section is the section of an applicant’s switchboard provided specifically for terminating the service conductors and for housing the metering transformers (if required), revenue meters, test facilities, and service switch or breaker.

10.3.1. Standard Switchboard Service Section

Applicants must ensure that:

A. For all switchboard service sections with current ratings of 400 amps or above, the manufacturer submits drawings, in triplicate, to PG&E for approval. See Figure 10-14, “Pull Section,” on Page 10-27, for more information.

B. Switchboard drawings for all co-generation and self-generation installations are submitted to a local PG&E project coordinator for review and approval by the PG&E electric metering department before the switchboard is constructed or built. Ask your local project coordinator to submit them.

10.3.2. Specifically Engineered Switchboard Service Sections

A switchboard design that does not conform to the EUSERC standards is considered specially engineered. Typical examples are:

  - Switchboards over 3,000 amps.

  - Switchboards with service-breaker ratings too large for the standard

switchboard service section.

  - Multimeter service sections.

The general arrangement of the specially engineered switchboard service sections must follow, as nearly as possible, the requirements for standard switchboard service sections, as described in Subsection 10.3.1., “Standard Switchboard Service Section” (above), and the requirements described in Subsection 10.3.3., “Requirements for All Switchboard Service Sections” (below).

10-3 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.3. Requirements for All Switchboard Service Sections

This subsection describes the general requirements for all switchboard service sections and applies to all applicants.

A. The general arrangement and spacing of CTs and the methods of mounting CTs must conform as closely as possible to the illustrations in Figure 10-2 through Figure 10-8 on Page 10-8 through Page 10-18.

B. Mount the socket meters that are used with metering transformers on hinged panels. Mount the self-contained meters on nonhinged panels.

C. When a hinged meter panel is located behind an enclosure door, leave a clear space of at least 11 inches between the meter panel and the door. That is the minimum space required to mount the meter.

D. The meter panels must open at least 90° after the meters and test facilities are in place. If needed, applicants must increase the width of the section to meet these requirements.

E. Applicants must provide a clear space in the back of a meter panel for the secondary wiring and associated equipment.

F. For hinged meter panel doors, applicants must provide at least the minimum dimensions between the facility’s meter panel and the nearest bus, as shown in Figure 10-2 through Figure 10-8 on Page 10-8 through Page 10-18.

G. For nonhinged meter panel doors, applicants must provide a clear space of at least 4 inches to any barrier or obstruction.

H. Applicants must ensure that the minimum clearance be maintained between meters as shown in Figure 10-13, “Standard Section for Self-Contained Meter Sockets, 0 Amps−225 Amps, Installed in Switchboards: Nonresidential,” on Page 10-25, and Figure 10-14, “Pull Section,” on Page 10-27.

I. An applicant must maintain a minimum clear space of 4 inches directly below the bottom slot of the meter test switch. This space permits test leads to be connected safely.

J. Applicants must not mount more than two self-contained meters on any removable meter panel.

K. Applicants must ensure that panels providing access to metering transformers or a service-terminating pull section are no larger than 9 square feet in area. Removable panels must have two lifting handles.

L. Applicants must ensure that the front edge of the CT bus bars are located in the same switchboard section, and in the same vertical plane.

M. Applicants must use either one-bolt or four-bolt connections for switchboards that are rated 1,001 amps through 3,000 amps and have 4-inch buses installed. For switchboards with 5-inch buses, use either two-bolt or six-bolt connections.

2022 – 2023 10-4

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.3. (continued)

N. Applicants must ensure that buses are securely supported in the metering transformer compartment to withstand the mechanical stresses of a short circuit and to resist movement. The bus supports must not interfere when CTs either are installed or are removed. Do not use CTs to support the buses.

O. Applicants should ensure that the buses and CT mountings are designed so that each of the CTs can be removed from its mounting position directly through the access panel without disturbing any other CT. When using multi-leaf buses, orient the buses so that they appear “edgewise” when viewed from the access panel.

P. When using an aluminum bus, applicants must ensure that the aluminum bus bar is plated to prevent corrosion.

Q. Applicants must ensure that all electric meter panels and all equipment doors or panels that are intended to provide access to potential transformers (PTs) and CTs are permanently marked or labeled to indicate the service voltage being supplied.

R. In switchboards rated over 800 amps, applicants must ensure that the bus bars extend from the termination section and service landing lugs into the CT compartment . In switchboards with multiple meters, the bus bars must extend from the termination section and service landing lugs to the meter sockets in multimeter boards.

S. Switchboard manufacturers must provide accessories, such as additional Belleville washers, at the time of delivery and/or installation. T. Switchboards must meet all of the design and test conditions of

Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL891, “Standard for Switchboards.”

U. Applicants must ensure that bus arrangement and supports are provided. An exception is the neutral bus, which may be located on either sidewall. V. Applicants must locate the CT compartment on the supply side of the service-section main switch or breaker.

W. Applicants must ensure that only metering conductors pass through this CT compartment. X. Applicants must ensure that a neutral, bus-bar extension is provided in the instrument transformer compartment above the lower CT bus support when the service-section phase buses are supplied from the horizontal cross busing. Y. Applicants must ensure that the return flanges for the lower- and upper-meter panel supports do not project more than 3/4 inch up or down from the adjacent switchboard panels. Z. Applicants must ensure that each bus has a connector that accepts a stranded conductor with the amp capacity of the service-section main switch or breaker.

AA. Applicants must ensure that the power-leg bus for a 4-wire delta service is identified.

10-5 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.3. (continued)

AB. Applicants must ensure that a removable link is installed in the right-side phase bus when using the service section for three-phase, 3-wire service.

AC. Applicants must ensure that each switchboard service section is completely barriered from other service sections, pull sections, service switches, or disconnects. If possible, use barriers made of either steel or the same material as the section walls.

Barriers may have an opening to allow unmetered conductors to pass between sections. The barrier between sealed utility metering sections and the pull section must be 1/8 inch minimum. Glastic or other equivalent barrier is not preferred but may be acceptable. The clearance between the bus bar and barrier must be a maximum of 3 inches. A barrier is not required between individual phases and the neutral. See Figure 10-1, “Switchboard Wall Opening Between Sections,” on Page 10-6.

Figure 10-1 Switchboard Wall Opening Between Sections

2022 – 2023 10-6

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.4. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 0 Amps Through 1,200 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service

Applicants must ensure that the following requirements are met. These requirements apply specifically to this type of CT compartment.

A. The bus dimensions are a minimum of 1/4 inch by 2 inches and a maximum of 3/4 inch by 2 inches.

B. The barrier must be constructed of insulating, nontracking material. Ensure that openings in the barrier and clearances to the outer edges do not exceed 3/8 inch. Use non-conductive fasteners to attach the barrier.

C. The minimum clearance between the meter panel or socket and the bus is 6.5 inches. If a clearance of 6.5 inches is not possible, use a 4-inch bus as required in Subsection 10.3.6., “Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps Through 3,000 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service,” on Page 10-11.

D. A clear, unobstructed workspace is provided around the current transformer bus units as measured from the inside edge of the compartment access opening.

10-7 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.4. (continued)

See 10.3.4.D.

Top View

1”

See 10.3.4.D. on Page 10-7

Detail on for Min.

Customer Cables and
Equipment Are Not Allowed
in the Compartment
Bus Support Bar
1-3/4”
2-3/4”
Neutral Bus
4-3/4”
Customer Cables and
Equipment Are Not Allowed
in the Compartment
16
3/4”
3 18-3/8”
0”
18-3/8”
0”
3 18-3/8”
0”
18-3/8”
0”
3 18-3/8”
0”
18-3/8”
0”
1-3/4” 1-3/4”
3 18-3/8”
0”
18-3/8”
0”
3 18-3/8”
0”
18-3/8”
0”
3 18-3/8”
0”
18-3/8”
0”
3 18-3/8”
0”
18-3/8”
0”
3 18-3/8”
0”
18-3/8”
0”
3 18-3/8”
0”
18-3/8”
0”

Support Bar

Inst
Tra
Co
ru
ns
mp
8” Max.

Side View Front View

Figure 10-2 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 0 Amps−600 Amps, Single Phase

2022 – 2023 10-8

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.5. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 0 Amps Through 1,200 Amps, Three-Phase, 3-Wire and 4-Wire Services

Applicants must ensure that the following requirements are met. These requirements apply specifically to this type of CT compartment.

A. Ensure that the bus dimensions are a minimum of 1/4 inch by 2 inches and a maximum of 3/4 inch by 2 inches.

B. Ensure that the barrier is made of an insulating, nontracking material. Ensure that openings in the barrier and clearances to the outer edges do not exceed 3/8 inch. Use nonconductive fasteners to attach the barrier.

C. The minimum clearance between the meter panel or socket and the bus is 7.0 inches up to 1,000 amps and 7.5 inches for amp compartments between 1,001–1,200 amps. If a clearance of 7.5 inches is not possible, use a 4-inch bus as required in Subsection 10.3.7. on Page 10-13.

D. A clear, unobstructed work space is provided around the current transformer bus units as measured from the inside edge of the compartment access opening.

10-9 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.5. (continued)

Alternate Neutral

Locations
5* Min
5* Min
5* Min
5* Min
5* Min
4* Min
4* Min
9
9
4* Min 4* Min 4* Min 4* Min
4* Min

See 10.3.5.D. on Page 10-9

Compartment

Top View

See 10.3.5.D. on Page 10-9

1”

Page 10-11

Metering Tap

Customer Cables and
Equipment Are Not Allowed
in the Compartment
Bus Support Bar
1‐3/4”
2-3/4”
Neutral Bus Link
Bus (3∅, 3-Wire
Only)
4-3/4”
Test Transformer
Customer Cables and
Equipment Are Not Allowed
in the Compartment
16
3/4”
-1
Neutral
Bus
2-3/4”
Bus Support Bar
1‐3/4”
Test Transformer
Bus Link
(3∅, 3-Wire
Only)
4-3/4”
Customer Cables and
Equipment Are Not Allowed
in the Compartment
Neutral
Bus
2-3/4”
Bus Support Bar
1‐3/4”
Test Transformer
Bus Link
(3∅, 3-Wire
Only)
4-3/4”
Customer Cables and
Equipment Are Not Allowed
in the Compartment
Neutral
Bus
2-3/4”
Bus Support Bar
1‐3/4”
Test Transformer
Bus Link
(3∅, 3-Wire
Only)
4-3/4”
Customer Cables and
Equipment Are Not Allowed
in the Compartment
1‐3/4” 1‐3/4”
Neutral
Bus
2-3/4”
Bus Support Bar
1‐3/4”
Test Transformer
Bus Link
(3∅, 3-Wire
Only)
4-3/4”
Customer Cables and
Equipment Are Not Allowed
in the Compartment
1‐3/4” 1‐3/4”
Neutral
Bus
2-3/4”
Bus Support Bar
1‐3/4”
Test Transformer
Bus Link
(3∅, 3-Wire
Only)
4-3/4”
Customer Cables and
Equipment Are Not Allowed
in the Compartment
1‐3/4” 1‐3/4” Mete
Typ.
Bar
See B
Drillin
Detail
Page
Mete
Typ.
Bar
See B
Drillin
Detail
Page
Mete
Typ.
Bar
See B
Drillin
Detail
Page

Support Bar

8” Max.

3”
Min.
4-3/4”
See
Note C.
11 for Min. 6-7/8”
g Tap
ocations 6-3/4”
See
Note C. 5”
for Min. Min.

g Tap
ocations
3”
Min.
See
Note C.
for Min.
6-7/8”
4-3/4~~”~~
6-3/4”
5”
Min.

See
Note C.
for Min.
11
3”
Min.
3”
Min.
3”
Min.
3”
Min.
Instrum
Transf
Compa
g Tap
ocations
3”
Min.
See
Note C.
for Min.
6-7/8”
4-3/4~~”~~
6-3/4”
5”
Min.

See
Note C.
for Min.
11
3”
Min.
g Tap
ocations
3”
Min.
See
Note C.
for Min.
6-7/8”
4-3/4~~”~~
6-3/4”
5”
Min.

See
Note C.
for Min.
11
3”
Min.
4 -7/8”
-3/4~~”~~
-3/4”
See
Note C.
for Min.
5”
Min.

Front View Side View

Figure 10-3 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 0–1,000 Amps and 1,001–1,200 Amps, Three Phase

2022 – 2023 10-10

10.3.5. (continued)

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

3/4”

1-3/4”
3
1-3/8”
5/8”
9/16”

3
1-3/4”
9/16”
1-3/8”
5/8”
3
1-1/2” M

Front View Side View

Figure 10-4 Bus Drilling Detail

10.3.6. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps Through 3,000 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service

The following requirements specifically apply to the CT compartment shown in Figure 10-5, “Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service,” on Page 10-12. Applicants must:

A. Ensure that the buses are anchored so that they will remain in position when the removable section is out.

B. Ensure that the bus corners are rounded to prevent damaging the insulation.

C. For underground services, ensure that the buses extend into the pull section.

D. Be aware that the maximum permissible bus unit consists of four 1/4-inch by 4-inch bars spaced 1/4 inch apart.

E. Ensure that the barrier is a minimum of 45 inches and a maximum of 50 inches above the standing surface.

F. For a single-phase switchboard, ensure that the neutral bus is located at the side of the compartment.

G. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer secures the removable bus link to the upper- and lower-CT bus units using 1/2-inch hex-head (Grade 5) steel bolts with 2-1/4-inch diameter Belleville washer and nut.

H. Ensure that openings in the barrier and clearances to the outer edges do not exceed 3/8 inch. Use nonconductive fasteners to attach the barrier.

10-11 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.6. (continued)

Customer Cables and Equipment Are Not Allowed in the Compartment

Top View

Metering Taps Five Locations

Optional Bus Support

Barrier 45” Min. 50” Max. Above

Bus Support Bar
3 0”
7”
0”
7”
1”
3 0”
7”
0”
7”
1” 1” 1” 1”
3 0”
7”
0”
7”
1” 1” 1” 1”
3 0”
7”
0”
7”
2”
3 0”
7”
7”
3 0”
7”
7”

Test Transformer Standing Support Bar Surface

Front View

2-13/
14-1/2”
2-13/1
l
t

l
t



2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
l
t



2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
l
t



2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
2~~”~~
l
t



2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
16”
6”
16”
6”
l
t



2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
l
t



2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
l
t



2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
l
t



2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
l
t



2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.

Side View

Figure 10-5 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service

2022 – 2023 10-12

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.7. Standard Switchboard , CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps Through 3,000 Amps, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Service

The following requirements specifically apply to the CT compartment shown in Figure 10-6, “Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Service,” on Page 10-14. Applicants must:

A. Ensure that the buses are anchored so that they will remain in position when the removable section is out.

B. Ensure that the bus corners are rounded to prevent damaging the insulation.

C. For underground services, ensure that the buses extend into the pull section.

D. Be aware that the maximum permissible bus unit consists of four 1/4-inch by 4-inch bars spaced 1/4 inch apart.

E. Ensure that the barrier is a minimum of 45 inches and a maximum of 50 inches above the standing surface.

F. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer secures the removable bus link to the upper- and lower-CT bus units using 1/2-inch hex-head (Grade 5) steel bolts with 2-1/4-inch diameter Belleville washers and

nuts.

G. Ensure that openings in the barrier and clearances to the outer edges do not exceed 3/8 inch. Use nonconductive fasteners to attach the barrier.

10-13 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.7. (continued)

Neutral Bus Alternate Location of Neutral

1”

Metering Taps, Five Locations

Optional Bus Support

Customer Cables or Equipment Are Not Allowed in the Compartment

Barrier Min. 45” Max. 50” Above Standing

Bus Support Bar
0”
7”
0”
7”
0”
7”
0”
7”
0”
7”
0”
7”
1~~”~~ 1~~”~~ 1~~”~~
0”
7”
0”
7”
1~~”~~ 1~~”~~ 1~~”~~
0”
7”
0”
7”
1~~”~~ 1~~”~~ 1~~”~~
0”
7”
0”
7”
2”
0”
7”
7”
0”
7”
7”

Test Transformer Support Bar Surface

B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
16”
6”
16”
6”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B B B B B B
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
B
2-13/
2-13/1
14-1/2”
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.

Front View Side View

Figure 10-6 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Service

2022 – 2023 10-14

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.8. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service

The following requirements specifically apply to the CT compartment shown in Figure 10-7, “Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service,” on Page 10-16. Applicants must:

A. Ensure that the buses are anchored so that they will remain in position when the removable section is out.

B. Ensure that the bus corners are rounded to prevent damaging the insulation.

C. For underground services, ensure that the buses extend into the pull section.

D. Be aware that the maximum permissible bus unit consists of four 1/4-inch by 4-inch bars spaced 1/4 inch apart.

E. Ensure that the barrier is a minimum of 45 inches and a maximum of 50 inches above the standing surface.

F. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer secures the removable bus link to the upper- and lower-CT bus units using 1/2-inch, hex-head (Grade 5) steel bolts with 2-1/4-inch diameter Belleville washers and

nuts.

G. Ensure that openings in the barrier and clearances to the outer edges do not exceed 3/8 inch. Use nonconductive fasteners to attach the barrier.

10-15 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.8. (continued)

Customer Cables or Equipment Are Not Allowed in the Compartment

Bus Support

Optional Bus Support

Bus Support

10
Sc
Wa
-32
rew and
sher
-32
rew and
sher
10
Sc
Wa
-32
rew and
sher
-32
rew and
sher
1”
1~~”~~
14
M
10
Ta
-32
p
-32
p
8”
8”

To Service Switch or Breaker

Front View

Test Transformer Support Bars

2-13/16”

2”
1 5” 2-13/16”
10” Min.
B
1 5” 2-13/16”
10” Min.
B
2-1
1 5” 5” 5” 5” 5”

Test Transformer Support Bars

Side View

Figure 10-7 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service

2022 – 2023 10-16

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.9. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service

The following requirements specifically apply to the CT compartments shown in Figure 10-8, “Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service,” on Page 10-18. Applicants must:

A. Ensure that the buses are anchored so that they will remain in position when the removable section is out.

B. Ensure that the bus corners are rounded to prevent damaging the insulation.

C. For underground services, ensure that the buses extend into the pull section.

D. Be aware that the maximum permissible bus unit consists of four 1/4-inch by 4-inch bars spaced 1/4 inch apart.

E. Ensure that the barrier is a minimum of 45 inches and a maximum of 50 inches above the standing surface.

F. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer secures the removable bus link to the upper- and lower-CT bus units using 1/2-inch hex-head (Grade 5) steel bolts with 2-1/4 inch diameter Belleville washers and nuts.

10-17 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.9. (continued)

Neutral Bus Alternate Location of Neutral Bus

Top View

Customer Cables or Equipment Are Not Allowed in the Compartment

1”

M etering Taps, Seven Locations

Barrier Min. 45” Max. 50” Above Standing Surface

Max. 50”

14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
2”
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
16”
6”
16”
6”
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
B B B B B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
14-1/2”

2-13/
2-13/1
B
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.
7” Min.

11” Max.

Above

Bus Support Bar
0”
7”
0”
7”
0”
7”
0”
7”
0”
7”
0”
7”
1~~”~~ 1~~”~~ 1~~”~~
0”
7”
0”
7”
1~~”~~ 1~~”~~ 1~~”~~
0”
7”
0”
7”
1~~”~~ 1~~”~~ 1~~”~~
0”
7”
0”
7”
2”
0”
7”
7”
0”
7”
7”

Test Transformer Support Bar

Front View Surface Side View

Figure 10-8 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service

2022 – 2023 10-18

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.10. Removable Link Assemblies

The removable link assemblies for 0-volt through 600-volt CT compartments from 1,001 amps through 3,000 amps, and 3,001 amps and larger, are shown in Figure 10-9 through Figure 10-12 on Page 10-20 through Page 10-23.

Applicants may use either a one-bolt connection, as shown in Figure 10-9, “Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Removable Link and CT Support (One-Bolt Configuration),” on Page 10-20, or a four-bolt connection, as shown in Figure 10-10, “Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Removable Link and CT Support (Four-Bolt Configuration),” on Page 10-21, for switchboards that are rated 1,001 amps to 3,000 amps and have 4-inch buses installed.

For switchboards with 5-inch buses, use either two bolts, as shown in Figure 10-11, “Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Removable Link and CT Support (Two-Bolt Configuration),” on Page 10-22, or six bolts, as shown in Figure 10-12, “Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Removable Link and CT Support (Six-Bolt Configuration),” on Page 10-23.

10-19 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.10. (continued)

CL

CL

9/32” R

9/16”

(2) 9/16” Slots

Link (See Detail B)

Window-Type CT

1-3/8”

/8” /8” /8”

1/4” x 20”

Insulated

Support Torque

B)
e
er
il C)
1/2”
B)
e
er
il C)
1/2”
B)
e
er
il C)
1/2”
B)
e
er
il C)
1/2”
B)
e
er
il C)
1/2”
B)
e
er
il C)
1/2”
T
T

Removable Link (Furnished by Manufacturer)

Detail A g and Spacing of Bus (2) 9/16” Holes C
11-5/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
14-1/2”
5”
4”
CL
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
14-1/2”
5”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
14-1/2”
5”
11-5/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
14-1/2”
5”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
14-1/2”
5”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
14-1/2”
5”
4” 4” 4” 4”

Detail B 1/4 x 4 Link (Same Material as Bus)

3/8”

3/16” Minimum

Detail C Insulated Support for CT

CL
3-3/4”
1”
3”
8
3/8
3-3/4”
1”
3”
8
3/8
3-3/4”
1”
3”
8
3/8
3-3/4”
1”
3”
8
3/8
3-3/4”
1”
3”
8
3/8

1”
3/8 3/8
3-3/4”
1”
3”
8
3/8

1”
3/8 3/8
3-3/4”
1”
3”
8
3/8
3” 3-3/8
3-3/4”
1”
3”
8
3/8
3” (2) 5/16
-1/4”
(2) 5/16
-1/4”
(2) 5/16
-1/4”
-5/8” -5/8”
-5/8” -5/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”
1-1/8”

(Material: Insulating, Nontracking)

5/8”

Figure 10-9 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Removable Link and CT Support (One-Bolt Configuration)

2022 – 2023 10-20

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.10. (continued)

No. of Links, as required

Link (See Detail A)

Window-Type CT

Insulated Transformer Support (See Detail C)

1/4” x 20” Capscrew

Four 9/16” x 11/16” Slots

9/32” R

1/8”

9/16”

Detail A Drilling and Spacing the Bus

1-1/8”

LC
il A)
il A)
il A)
il A)

[C] L

Eight 9/16” Holes

Two Holes Drilled and Tapped for 1/4” x 20” Capscrew (Outside Buses Only)

1/2”

3-3/4”

Removable Link Assembly (Furnished By Manufacturer)

3/16” Min .

LC
3-3/8”
9/16”
1”
3-3/8”
9/16”
1”
9/16” 9/16”
9/16” 1”
9/16”
3” 3-3/8 3-3/8

1-3/4”

3/16” Min .

Four 5/16” Holes

1-3/16”

5/8”

1-3/16”

8-1/4” 3-3/8” 3”

1/8”

Detail B Insulated Support For CT (Material: Insulating, Nontracking)

Detail C 1/4” x 4” Link (Same Material as Bus)

Figure 10-10 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Removable Link and CT Support (Four-Bolt Configuration)

10-21 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.10. (continued)

9/32” R

Four 9/16” x 11/16” Slots

8-7/8”
/8”
1-1/
8-7/8”
/8”
1-1/
4”
2-1/2”
5”
1-
4”
2-1/2”
5”
1-
8-7/8”
/8”
1-1/
8-7/8”
/8”
1-1/

1-1/8”

Number of Links, as Required

Link

f

f
f
f

(See Detail “B”)

Utilities Window-Type CT

11-5/8”

1-3/8”

x s Fou
1-1/8”

2-1/2”

1-7/16”

Detail A Drilling and Spacing of Bus

1-1/4”

5” 1-1/4”

Insulated Transformer Support (See Detail “C”)

ail “B”)
il “B”)
ype CT
er
il “C”)

1/2”
1/4” x
Caps
il “B”)
ype CT
er
il “C”)

1/2”
1/4” x
Caps
il “B”)
ype CT
er
il “C”)

1/2”
1/4” x
Caps
il “B”)
ype CT
er
il “C”)

1/2”
1/4” x
Caps
il “B”)
ype CT
er
il “C”)

1/2”
1/4” x
Caps

Torque Label

Removable Link Assembly (Furnished by Manufacturer)

[C] L

Detail B 1/4 x 5 Link (Same Material as Bus)

3/16” Min.

1-5/8”

3/8”
1”
4-1/8”
11”
8”
5/8” 1-3/8

4-1/8”
1”
3/8”
11”
1-3/8
8”
5/8”
4-1
1”

Detail C Insulated Support for CT (Material: Insulating, Nontracking)

Figure 10-11 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Removable Link and CT Support (Two-Bolt Configuration)

2022 – 2023 10-22

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.10. (continued)

No. of Links,

as Required

CT

3/4”

1-3/4”

Six 9/16” x 11/16” Slots

[C] L

[C] L

Six 9/16” x 11/16” Slots

9/32” R

1/8”

9/16”

1-3/4”

9/16”

1-3/4”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
1-3/4” 5” 5” 8”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”

1/4” x 20” Insulated Capscrew

(See Detail B)

Link (See
mer Support
ail B)
ities
dow-Type

Detail C)
mer Support
ail B)
ities
dow-Type

Detail C)
mer Support
ail B)
ities
dow-Type

Detail C)
mer Support
ail B)
ities
dow-Type

Detail C)
mer Support
ail B)
ities
dow-Type

Detail C)
1/4”
Cap

Removable Link Assembly (Furnished By Manufacturer)

[C] L

Detail A Drilling and Spacing the Bus

Twelve

1”
9/16”

1”
9/16”
1”
9/16”
9/16” 9/16” 9/16” 9/16” 4
1”
-1
1”
9/16”
1”
9/16”
/4” /4” 4-1/4
4-1/8”
5/8”
5/8”
/4” /4”

(Five) 5/16” Holes

1-5/8”

5/8”

-5/8” -5/8” -5/8”

1-3/4”

Three Holes, Drilled and Tapped for 1/4” x 20” Capscrew (Outside Buses Only)

5”

1/2” ve C 1/2” C
1/2”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
5”
/4”

,
ses

Holes
LC
14-1
3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”
1/2”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
5”
/4”

,
ses

Holes
LC
14-1
3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”
1/2”
LC
1/2”
LC
1/2”
LC
1/2”
LC
1/2”
LC
1/2”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
5”
/4”

,
ses

Holes
LC
14-1
3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”
-3/4”
-3/4”
5”
14
-1
1/2”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
5”
/4”

,
ses

Holes
LC
14-1
3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”
1 1 1
1/2”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
5”
/4”

,
ses

Holes
LC
14-1
3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”
1/2”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
5”
/4”

,
ses

Holes
LC
14-1
3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”
-3/4”
-3/4”
1/2”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
5”
/4”

,
ses

Holes
LC
14-1
3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”
1 1 1
1/2”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
5”
/4”

,
ses

Holes
LC
14-1
3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”
1/2”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
5”
/4”

,
ses

Holes
LC
14-1
3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”
1/2”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
5”
/4”

,
ses

Holes
LC
14-1
3/4”
1/2
3/4”
1-3/4”

Detail C 1/4” x 5” Link (Same Material as Bus)

3/16” Min .

Detail B Insulated Support for CT (Material: Insulating, Nontracking)

Figure 10-12 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger, Removable Link and CT Support (Six-Bolt Configuration)

10-23 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.11. Standard Section for Self-Contained Meter Sockets, 0 Amps Through 225 Amps, Installed in Switchboards: Nonresidential

These requirements apply specifically to switchboard service sections for nonresidential, 0-amp through 225-amp meter sockets. Applicants must:

A. Ensure that the manufacturer furnishes, installs, and wires or buses the test-bypass blocks to the meter socket with four, rigid, insulating barriers. Test blocks must conform to the requirements described in Section 9, “Electric Metering Components.”

B. Ensure that the metered conductors do not pass through the adjacent metering compartments, except in enclosed wireways.

C. Ensure that the meter panels are removable with a maximum of two meters per panel.

D. Ensure that the cover panels for the test-bypass block are sealable and fitted with handles. Panels more than 16 inches wide must have two

handles.

E. Ensure that outdoor or rain-tight enclosures are used, as shown in Figure 10-31 through Figure 10-34, “Outdoor or Rain-Tight Enclosures for Switchboards,” on Page 10-44.

F. When a neutral is required for metering or testing, ensure that an insulated neutral terminal is provided behind each test-bypass cover panel. The terminal must be readily accessible when the cover panel is removed and must be individually connected to the neutral bus with a minimum Size #8 American wire gauge (AWG) copper wire.

G. Ensure that factory-installed, full-width, insulating barriers are located at the bottom of each test-bypass compartment. The insulating barrier must deflect a 1/2-inch maximum from a 25-pound downward force.

H. For three-phase, 4-wire service, ensure that the seventh jaw is connected to the body of the neutral lug with an AWG #12 copper wire.

I. For three-phase, 4-wire, delta-connected service, ensure that the right-hand, test-bypass block (i.e., two poles) is identified as a power leg.

J. For three-phase, 3-wire service, ensure that the bus is installed to connect the line and load poles together at the top of the center test-bypass block and the fifth jaw is connected to this bus using an AWG #12 copper wire.

K. For single-phase, 3-wire service, ensure that the center test-bypass block is omitted.

L. For single-phase, 3-wire, 120/208-volt service, ensure that the center test-bypass block is omitted and the fifth jaw is connected to the body of the neutral lug with an AWG #12 copper wire.

M. Ensure that the meter panels are removable. However, they must not be removable when the meter is in place. Ensure that the meter socket is attached to the meter panel, and yet is supported independently from the meter panel.

2022 – 2023 10-24

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.11. (continued)

N. Ensure that each line and load position is identified clearly by using 3/4-inch (minimum) block-letter labeling.

O. Ensure that all of the meter panels are sealable and all of the securing screws are captive.

1” Min.

12” Min.
8 -1/
. 1-1/2”Min. 1-1/2”Min. 1-1/2”Min. 10”
Op

Compartment Barrier

6” Min. 6” Min. 12” Min.

3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the

Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
|

6” Min. 6” Min. 12” Min.

3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
3” Min.
Barrier
6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
Compartment
Barrier
Test-Bypass Block With Four
Rigid, Insulating Barriers
Socket
Support
Test-
Bypass
Support


3” Min.

1” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
May Require a Greater
Dimension Between the
Test-Bypass Block and the
Barrier
12” Min.
8-1/2” Min.
10” Min.
Opening
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
21-1/2” Min. Opening
24” Min.
Compartment
Barrier
14” Min.
11” Min.
Opening
11” Min. 11” Min. 11” Min. 11” Min. 11” Min. 11” Min. 11” Min. 11” Min. 11” Min. 11” Min. 11” Min.

Figure 10-13 Standard Section for Self-Contained Meter Sockets, 0 Amps−225 Amps, Installed in Switchboards: Nonresidential

10-25 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.12. Service Terminations for Underground Services

N OTE : For overhead services where conductors go into the bottom-fed termination section, the applicant must connect the service-entrance conductors to the line side of the bus stubs in the metering-transformer compartment.

PG&E pulls and terminates its service conductors when terminating facilities that are provided by the applicant as shown in Figure 10-14, “Pull Section,” Figure 10-15, “Separate Pull Box,” and Figure 10-16, “Bottom-Fed Service Section,” all on Page 10-27. The requirements for pulling and terminating service are provided in the following paragraphs.

Applicants must:

A. When the service section is served from a pull section, ensure that the bus or cable conductors enter in one of the following two ways:

  1. Enter through the side or back in the sealable section above the CT compartment, as shown in Figure 10-14 on Page 10-27.

  2. Enter by means of horizontal cross-busing in back of the metering compartment.

B. Ensure that all pull and terminating sections provide full-front access.

C. Ensure that all of the cover panels for the pull section have all of the following attributes:

   - Are removable and sealable.

   - Have two lifting handles.

   - Are limited to a maximum size of 9 square feet in area.

D. Ensure that the power leg for a 4-wire delta service is identified effectively at the point of termination before making the service connection.

E. Ensure that the minimum width of the pull section has the dimensions specified in Table 10-1, “Minimum Bottom-Fed Pull-Section Dimensions,” on Page 10-27.

2022 – 2023 10-26

10.3.12. (continued)

W

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Alternate Entry Service Entrance Conductors

Standard 90” Service Section

Barrier

Standard 90” Service Section

Barrier

Standing Surface

Service Figure 10-14 Figure 10-15 Pull Section Separate Pull Box

Standing Surface

Standard 90” Service Section

Barrier

Cable Terminating Facilities

Min.40-1/4”

on
90”
ection
ier
Service
To
Load
Min.4
on
Service
ier
90”
ection

W ***** Standing Surface

Figure 10-16 Bottom-Fed Service Section

***** The minimum width of the pull section must meet the requirements specified in Table 10-1, below.

Table 10-1 Minimum Bottom-Fed Pull-Section Dimensions

Switchboard
Rating (Amps)
Minimum Access Opening
Dimension (W)2
Termination Height X
Switchboard
Rating (Amps)
3-Wire 4-Wire 4-Wire
Below 400 Consult Serving Agency
(All Measurements in Inches)
Consult Serving Agency
(All Measurements in Inches)
Consult Serving Agency
(All Measurements in Inches)
400−800 24 24 42 Min.1−72 Max.
801−1,200 24 30 30
1,201−2,000 30 35 35
2,001−2,500 42 60 Min.−72 Max.
2,501−4,000 Bus Duct Bus Duct Bus Duct

1 See Figure 10-16, “Bottom-Fed Service Section,” above, for the minimum termination height of a bottom-fed service section.

2 If the landing stubs in the termination bus are installed perpendicular to the back of the board, PG&E requires the enclosure dimensions to be wider to accommodate the cable installation.

10-27 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.13. Underground, Service-Termination Pull Section (Located Below Ground Level)

Applicants must follow the requirements in this subsection when underground, service-termination pull sections are located below the ground level.

A. Back Entry: When a service must enter the back of a switchboard pull section, as shown in Figure 10-17, “Switchboard Pull Section, High Entry,” located on Page 10-30, the pull space must have the required X dimension above or below the cable-terminating facilities. The pull sections must also have the required W dimension, as shown in Table 10-2, “Pull Section Dimensions (Minimums) Below Ground Level,” located on Page 10-31.

B. Side Entry: When a service must enter the side of a switchboard pull section, as shown in Figure 10-17 on Page 10-30, and in Figure 10-18, “Switchboard Pull Section, Low Entry,” on Page 10-30, the pull-space must have the required X dimension above or below the cable-terminating facilities. The pull sections must also have the required W dimension, as shown in Table 10-2.

C. Additional or Extended Section Entry: When it is not possible to meet the requirements of dimension X because the service cannot enter the upper or lower areas of the switchboard pull section, or because additional space is needed, another enclosure can be attached to the termination section enclosure.

The following three figures show of how another enclosure provides additional space for the cables to enter the termination section either low enough or high enough to meet the X dimension and facilitate proper cable termination.

   - Figure 10-19, “Extended Top on Switchboard Pull Section,” on

Page 10-31

   - Figure 10-20, “Additional Side or Back Switchboard Pull

Section–High Entry,” on Page 10-32

   - Figure 10-21, “Additional Side or Back Switchboard Pull

Section–Low Entry,” on Page 10-33

PG&E recommends that applicants submit drawings for review before installing an additional enclosure . Applicants also should attend a pre-inspection meeting.

D. Conduit: Service conduit installed in the franchise area (i.e., public property) must not be at a depth greater than 60 inches. Conduit entering the switchboard must be group together in a maximum of two rows and centered horizontally between the pull-section side walls. Refer to Figure 10-22, “Arranging Conduit in the Termination or Additional Pull Section (Front View, Back Entry, Example)” on Page 10-34.

2022 – 2023 10-28

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.13. (continued)

E. X Dimension: The X dimension is the measured distance between the

first bolt on the termination bus to the closest service conduit installed in the pull section for Figure 10-17 on Page 10-30 through Figure 10-19 on Page 10-31. When an additional pull section is used, as shown in Figure 10-20 on Page 10-32 and Figure 10-21 on Page 10-33, the X dimension is measured between the first bolt on the termination bus to the closest position where the service cable will enter into the termination section.

F. Water Drainage System: To prevent water from accumulating in meter rooms (or other types of wet facilities), applicants must ensure the following actions are performed:

  1. Design and construct the electrical meter room to discharge any water that may enter the switchboard and below-grade electrical

meter room.

  1. Contact PG&E before construction begins to ensure the method(s) for discharging and removing water are approved.

G. Cable Support Hanger: The cable hanger provides support for the cables and increases the cable height above the conduits. This creates a drip loop feature that stops water from dripping onto any exposed, live energized parts. The cable hanger must be structurally strong enough to support the weight of the type (i.e., aluminum [Al] or copper [Cu]) and the maximum number of cables that could be installed for all phases. For large switchboards this could be up to 28 copper cables, mostly sized at 1,000 thousand circular mils (kcmil), with a total weight of about 1,000 pounds. Refer to Table 5 in Numbered Document 063928, “Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities.”

Also, if the cables rest on or touch the support hanger, it must be made from, or wrapped in, a nonconductive material rated for a minimum 600 volts that provides electrical insulation and physical protection for the cables.

10-29 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.13. (continued)

One Cable Hanger for Each Conductor With Provisions to Tie the Cable to the Hanger

Barrier

Standard

Min. 6” Rise, from Highest Cable, for Drip Loop

Standard 90” Service Section

Service

ermination
f PG&E’s
ervice
ables
Barrier
Service
Entrance
Point
Loa
Sta
Ser
ermination
f PG&E’s
ervice
ables
Barrier
Service
Entrance
Point
ermination
f PG&E’s
ervice
ables
Barrier
Service
Entrance
Point
ermination
f PG&E’s
ervice
ables
Barrier
Service
Entrance
Point
W On Ea
Moisture
Barrier,
Open Top
and Bottom
dard
Pull
ction
Service
Entrance Point
Pr
Ca
Moisture
Barrier,
Open Top
and Bottom
dard
Pull
ction
Service
Entrance Point
Moisture
Barrier,
Open Top
and Bottom
dard
Pull
ction
Service
Entrance Point
Moisture
Barrier,
Open Top
and Bottom
dard
Pull
ction
Service
Entrance Point
Moisture
Barrier,
Open Top
and Bottom
dard
Pull
ction
Service
Entrance Point
Moisture
Barrier,
Open Top
and Bottom
dard
Pull
ction
Service
Entrance Point
Load Load
Moisture
Barrier,
Open Top
and Bottom
dard
Pull
ction
Service
Entrance Point
Load Load

Termination of PG&E’s Service Cables

W

Front View (Back Entry)

Cable Terminating Facilities

Front View (Side Entry) or Side View (Back Entry)

Figure 10-17 Switchboard Pull Section–High Entry

W
Service
Entrance
Point
tandard 90”
Pull Section
Service
Entrance
Point
tandard 90”
Pull Section
Cable-Termina
Facilities
Cable-Termina
Facilities
Service
Entrance
Point
tandard 90”
Pull Section
Service
Entrance
Point
tandard 90”
Pull Section
Service
Entrance
Point
ard 90”
Section
Service
Entrance
Point
tandard 90”
Pull Section
Service
Entrance
Point
ard 90”
Section
2”
ax
Service
Entrance
Point
tandard 90”
Pull Section
Service
Entrance
Point
ard 90”
Section

Front View (Side Entry) or Side View (Back Entry)

Figure 10-18 Switchboard Pull Section–Low Entry

2022 – 2023 10-30

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.13. (continued)

Table 10-2 Pull-Section Dimensions (Minimums) Below Ground Level

Switchboard
Rating in Amps
W 1, 2 X3 T
Switchboard
Rating in Amps
13-Wire 34-Wire Side or Back Entry Termination
Height
Switchboard
Rating in Amps
Measurements in Inches Measurements in Inches Measurements in Inches Measurements in Inches
201−800 24 24 42 24
801−1,200 24 30 42 24
1,201−2,000 30 35 45 24
2,001−2,500 42 60 18
2,501−4,000 Bus Duct Bus Duct Bus Duct Bus Duct

1 Ensure that the dimension (i.e., width, depth, and height) of the additional pull section are exactly the same as the terminating section. 2 If the landing stubs in the termination bus are installed perpendicular to the back of the board, PG&E requires the enclosure dimensions to be wider to accommodate cable installation. 3 See Item E., “X Dimension,” on Page 10-29.

One Cable Hanger for Each Conductor With Provisions to Tie the Cable to the Hanger

Min. 6” Rise, from Highest Cable, for Drip Loop

Service

W One C Condu
Moisture
Barrier, Open
Top and Bottom

e Point
dard
” Pull
ection
Enclosure Top
2” Min. − 36” Max.)
Condu
Tie the
Moisture
Barrier, Open
Top and Bottom

e Point
dard
” Pull
ection
Enclosure Top
2” Min. − 36” Max.)
Moisture
Barrier, Open
Top and Bottom

e Point
dard
” Pull
ection
Enclosure Top
2” Min. − 36” Max.)
Load Load Load
Moisture
Barrier, Open
Top and Bottom

e Point
dard
” Pull
ection
Enclosure Top
2” Min. − 36” Max.)
Load Load
Moisture
Barrier, Open
Top and Bottom

e Point
dard
” Pull
ection
Enclosure Top
2” Min. − 36” Max.)
Load Load
d

e
d

e
d

e
d

e
d

e
d

e
d

e

Cable-Terminating Facilities

Figure 10-19 Extended Top on Switchboard Pull Section Front View (Side Entry) or Side View (Back Entry)

10-31 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.13. (continued)

Cable Hangers Required

or Each W W
ovisions to Tie the
er are Required
s
Point
Highest
op
Moisture Barrier,
Open Top and Bottom
See Note 1 See Note 1 Cabl
X
ovisions to Tie the
er are Required
s
Point
Highest
op
Moisture Barrier,
Open Top and Bottom
ovisions to Tie the
er are Required
s
Point
Highest
op
Moisture Barrier,
Open Top and Bottom
See Note 2
and Detail A
ovisions to Tie the
er are Required
s
Point
Highest
op
Moisture Barrier,
Open Top and Bottom
See Note 2
and Detail A
ovisions to Tie the
er are Required
s
Point
Highest
op
Moisture Barrier,
Open Top and Bottom
See Note 2
and Detail A

Cable-Terminating Facilities (in Terminating Section)

A Cable Hanger for Each

Cable to the Hanger are Required in Both Enclosures

Min. 6” Rise, from Highest Cable, for Drop Loop

Service Entrance Point

Additional Pull Section

Front View (Side Entry) or Side View (Back Entry)

Figure 10-20 Additional Side or Back Switchboard Pull Section–High Entry

Notes in reference to Figure 10-20.

  1. Ensure that the dimensions (i.e., width, depth, and height) of the additional pull section are exactly the same as the terminating section.

  2. The height of the cable entrance window must be between 24 inches to 36 inches and the width must be a minimum of 20 inches. The edges of the window opening must be insulated to prevent damaging the cables. See Detail A on Page 31.

2022 – 2023 10-32

10.3.13. (continued)

Top

18” Minimum
2
t
5
Cable Protective Insulation
Material On All Inside Edges
4”
o
0”

See Dimensions in

Service Entrance Point

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Enclosure Side Wall

Detail A–Cable Entrance Window

Cable-Terminating

sions in
on Page 10-31.
rance Point
See Note 3
W
See Note 1
W Cable
Facilit
X 72”
Max.
rance Point
See Note 3
sions in
on Page 10-31.
See Note 2
and Detail A
Additional
Pull Section
Termination
Section
Termination
Section

See Note 2

Front View (Side Entry) or Side View (Back Entry)

Figure 10-21 Additional Side or Back Switchboard Pull Section–Low Entry

Notes in reference to Figure 10-21.

  1. Ensure that the dimensions (i.e., width, depth, and height) of the additional pull section are exactly the same as the terminating section.

  2. The height of the cable entrance window above the top of the pad is 3 inches maximum. Ensure that the window size is between 24-inches to 50-inches tall and the width is a minimum of 18 inches. Insulate the edges of the window opening to prevent damage to the cables. See Detail A above.

  3. Cables must not lie on the ground. The applicant must provide a cable support system to keep the cables off the ground. Otherwise, the applicant must supply cable blocks using PG&E Material Code 362118.

10-33 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.13. (continued)

Figure 10-22 Arranging Conduit in the Termination or Additional Pull Section (Example of a Front View, High Back Entry)

Note in reference to Figure 10-22.

  1. All conduits entering the section must be installed in a maximum of two rows.

10.3.14. Underground, Cable-Terminating Facilities in Pull Boxes or Pull Sections

Figure 10-23 through Figure 10-26, all on Page 10-37, provide diagrams and required dimensions for cable-terminating facilities in the pull boxes or pull sections. The following paragraphs describe the requirements for applicants who install these facilities. Applicants must:

A. Ensure that one landing position per phase is available for each 400 amps of service capacity, as shown in Figure 10-23, “Landing Terminal Detail,” on Page 10-37. Also, applicants must ensure that provisions have been made for stacking lugs.

B. Ensure that bolts are provided with nuts, flat washers, and pressure-maintaining spring washers.

C. Ensure that all parts are plated to prevent corrosion.

D. Ensure that bolts are secured in place unless working access is provided on both sides of the mounting bus. If both sides of the bus are accessible, one set of bolts may be used to provide two terminal-mounting positions, one on either side of the bus.

N OTE : “Secured in place” means the stud will not turn, back out, or loosen in any manner when subjected to normal, UL-approved torques while tightening or loosening terminal nuts. This includes cross-threaded situations.

2022 – 2023 10-34

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.14. (continued)

E. In the terminal-mounting area, ensure that a radial clearance of 1-1/2 inches is provided between any bus (including bolts) and any other bus (including horizontal cross-busing) or grounded surface, as shown in Figure 10-24, “Spacing Requirements,” on Page 10-37.

E XCEPTIONS : The following are exceptions from these requirements.

  1. The minimum clearance to the back of the pull section or to the front of the pull-section cover may be 1 inch.

  2. The neutral bus or termination may have a minimum clearance of 1 inch from any grounded surface.

  3. Service cables passing over horizontal cross busing must have a minimum 2-1/2-inch radial clearance. This distance may be reduced to 1 inch if the horizontal bus is fully insulated.

F. Ensure that each cable-mounting position has at least 8 inches of unobstructed space in front of the entire mounting surface when all of the conductors are in place. This space must be accessible from the front of the pull section.

G. Ensure that the bus stubs are firmly secured to prevent bus misalignment and movement when the cables are installed. See Figure 10-25, “Buses Accessible From Only One Side (Bolts Must Be Secured in Place),” and Figure 10-26, “Buses Accessible From Either Side (Mounting Surfaces on Both Sides of Bus),” both on Page 10-37, for bus stub details through 2,500 amps.

H. For nonresidential services, either single or three phase, 600 amps and above, PG&E requires applicants to install multiple sets of service conduit. Additionally, PG&E will require applicants to supply stacking lugs for terminating its cables in any installation that is rated nonresidential, three phase, 1,200 amps or greater.

I. For nonresidential services, additional space (i.e., depth, width, and termination height) may be required in any section of switchboard, panelboard, or other enclosure used to terminate PG&E service cables. This additional space may be necessary to provide proper clearances between phases and grounded surfaces, as well as to accommodate the installation of service cable.

J. Applicants should review Numbered Document 063928, “Methods and

                          Requirements for Installing Non [Residential Underground Electric](https://www.pge.com/pge_global/common/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/063928.pdf)

Services 0–600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities,” for the appropriate conduit and cable requirements for nonresidential service installations. Find this document in Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”

10-35 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.14. (continued)

K. PG&E does not allow applicants to install wall-mounted cable termination and pull enclosures for nonresidential, three-phase installations rated at 401 amps through 2,500 amps. For those installations, PG&E requires a switchboard pull section or enclosure meeting the requirements shown in Section 9, “Electric Metering: Components and Cable Terminating Facilities,” Table 9-4, “Minimum Pad-Mounted (Floor-Standing) Switchboard Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential and Nonresidential, Single-Phase and Three-Phase,” on Page 9-13, and Table 10-1, “Minimum Bottom-Fed Pull-Section Dimensions,” on Page 10-27, for bottom entry. Also, see Table 10-2, “Pull Section Dimensions (Minimums) Below Ground Level,” on Page 10-31, for side or back entry.

L. See additional requirements in Section 9, Subsection 9.10.,

“Underground Service Cable-Termination Section or Pull Box,” on Page 9-10. The information, tables, and figures provide additional requirements for applicants who install wall-mounted and pad-mounted cable-termination and pull-section equipment.

N OTE: The utility point of service (i.e., service point) is defined as the approved enclosure and the terminated or spliced connections.

2022 – 2023 10-36

10.3.14. (continued)

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Termination Mounting 1-1/2” Min. Radial Clearance Surface Multiple Position

1” Min.

1/2” Bolts

Min.

1/2” Bolts or Bolt Holes

1-3/4”

3/4”

1-
1-
1-
1-
ts or es M S
S
3-1/
S
3-1/
S
3-1/
-1/
1” 2” 1

2”

Figure 10-23 Landing Terminal Detail

Side

Figure 10-24 Spacing Requirements

Back

(W = 2” for Single Position)

Required Unobstructed Space

Bolts and Hol
(W = 4” for Multiple Position)
for 1/2” Bolts
3-3/4”
W
W
8” 8” 8”
Required Unobstructed Space
Bolts and Hol
for 1/2” Bolts
(W = 4” for Multiple Position)
Bolts and Hol
for 1/2” Bolts
8”
8”
8”
W
W
3-3/4”
Required Unobstructed Space
(W = 4” for Multiple Position)
Bolts and Hol
for 1/2” Bolts
8”
8”
8”
W
W
3-3/4”
Required Unobstructed Space
(W = 4” for Multiple Position)
Bolts and Hol
for 1/2” Bolts
8”
8”
8”
W
W
3-3/4”
Required Unobstructed Space
(W = 4” for Multiple Position)
Bolts and Hol
for 1/2” Bolts
8”
8”
8”
W
W
3-3/4”
Required Unobstructed Space

Figure 10-25 Buses Accessible From Only One Side (Bolts Must Be Secured in Place)

Figure 10-26 Buses Accessible From Either Side (Mounting Surfaces on Both Sides of Bus)

10.4. Meter and Switch Sequence Requirements

PG&E will locate meters and metering equipment ahead of (i.e., on the supply side) the applicant’s main switch and fuse or circuit breaker. Exceptions to this normal sequence are permitted only when required by electric codes and as allowed by PG&E.

10-37 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.5. Metering Transformer Compartments

The following requirements apply to applicants who are installing metering transformer compartments.

A. Bus the CT compartments using a rectangular bus bar. See Figure 10-2 through Figure 10-8 on Pages 10-8 through 10-18 for more information.

B. Ensure that the covers for metering transformer compartments are:

- Constructed of 12-gauge steel (minimum).

- Provided with lifting handles.

- Attached with sealable studs and wing nuts or using other approved means.

C. Use a copper or aluminum bus bar on both the line sides and load sides of all CTs. When links and supports are required for through-type CTs, ensure that the bus and removable links are constructed of a compatible material.

D. Do not use PG&E’s CTs for any purpose but metering.

Do not use the metering transformer compartment as a splicing or tap-making chamber. Ensure that load conductors do not re-enter or pass through a CT compartment even if the conductors are inside of a raceway.

E. Do not use the bolts required for connecting a CT to attach other conductors.

10.6. Meter Panels

The following requirements apply to applicants who are installing meter panels.

A. Except for remote metering enclosures, use only hinged meter panels in front of a metering transformer compartment. The meter panel must be hinged next to the test facilities.

B. Ensure that a 30-inch tall dual-socket meter panel door is provided in pad-mounted switchboards supplying a demand load of 400 kilovolt amperes (kVA) or more. See Table 10-3, “Dual-Socket Hinged-Meter Panel Requirement,” below. See the 30-inch tall panel door, shown in Figure 10-30 on Page 10-43.

C. Two 15-inch tall meter panel doors are allowed for switchboards with voltages and ampacities not listed in Table 10-3, “Dual-Socket, Hinged, Meter-Panel Requirement,” on Page 10‐39. Refer to Figure 10-29, “Standard Switchboard Service Section, 15-Inch Hinged Panel for Socket Meter and Test Switch,” on Page 10-42, for a 15-inch tall meter panel door. The two panel doors must come bolted together so they can swing open and close together. The bolts and nuts must be removable so the doors can also be opened or closed independently.

D. Ensure that meter panels are constructed of 12-gauge steel (minimum) and are sealable, hinged, and reversible. Because the meter panels are reversible, the hinges can be used on either the right side or the left side of the panels.

E. Note that the width of meter panels may sometimes require the service section to be wider than the minimum-allowable width of the transformer

compartment.

2022 – 2023 10-38

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.6. (continued)

F. Mount self-contained meters on nonhinged panels, as shown in Figure 10-13 on Page 10-25.

G. For switchboards that come with dual sockets, a test switch cover plate must be installed on the spare socket.

Table 10-3 Dual-Socket, Hinged, Meter-Panel Requirement

Service
Voltage
Switchboard Supply
Rating
30-Inch Tall Meter
Panel Door Required 1
Dual Meter Socket
Required
277/480V 3∅,
4-Wire
401 Amps and Above Yes Yes
120/240V 3∅,
4-Wire
801 Amps and Above Yes Yes
120/208V 3∅,
4-Wire
1,001 Amps and
Above
Yes Yes

1 Two 15-inch‐tall doors are not allowed on these switchboards.

10-39 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.6. (continued)

Hinge

Secure Filler Panel to Frame with Bolts

Handle Transformer

Hinge

o
e
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Return Flange (3/4” Max.)
e

o
Hinges Hinges Hinges 1 5”
e

o
Filler
Panel
(See
Note 1)
Blank Panel
(See Note 3)

Handle
e

o
Filler
Panel
(See
Note 1)
PG&E Meter Socket 1 5”
e

o
e

o
Return Flange
(3/4” Max.)
Load Section
4” Minimum Clearance
Required. (See Note 6)
Return Flange
(3/4” Max.)
Load Section
4” Minimum Clearance
Required. (See Note 6)
Return Flange
(3/4” Max.)
Load Section
4” Minimum Clearance
Required. (See Note 6)
5
4
0” M
5” M
e

o
Return Flange
(3/4” Max.)
Load Section
4” Minimum Clearance
Required. (See Note 6)
Return Flange
(3/4” Max.)
Load Section
4” Minimum Clearance
Required. (See Note 6)
Return Flange
(3/4” Max.)
Load Section
4” Minimum Clearance
Required. (See Note 6)
Instrume
Transfor
Compart
In
Tr
C
2 -1/2” -1/2”
2 -1/2” Barri

Front View Side View

Figure 10-27 Standard Switchboard Service Section with CT Compartment and Filler Panel, 0 Volts−600 Volts

Notes in reference to Figure 10-27.

  1. Use filler panels where the switchboard width exceeds the allowable meter panel width. It is allowed to hinge meter panels to hinged filler panels only if the filler panel is bolted to the switchboard in both corners of the filler panel opposite the hinges.

  2. Make the grounding connection in the main switch or breaker compartment.

  3. In a split-panel arrangement, mount the kilowatt-hour (kWh) meter panel in the lower position.

  4. Equip meter panels and filler panels with stops to prevent the panels from swinging inward beyond the front surface of the switchboard.

  5. Ensure that all panels and covers are sealable.

  6. Ensure that the meter panels can open 90° with the meter and test facilities in place. Ensure there is at least 4 inches of minimum clearance on the side where the meter panel door opens outward.

2022 – 2023 10-40

10.6. (continued)

PG&E Meter Socket

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Switchboard’s

36”

Only for Low Profile
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge 75” M
Heig
Oute
15”
Enclo
Meter Panels
Bolts
30”
Hinge
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction

in.
4” Min. Clearance Location of
28” Required. (See Note 1 Terminating
Min. and Note 6) Pull
Section
Load Section Only–. (See
Not a Utility Service Note 1)
Termination Section.

Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge
Meter Panels
Hinge

Only for Low Profile
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Bolts

in.
15”
28”
Min.
Location of
Terminating
Pull
Section
(See
Note 1)
30”
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge
Meter Panels
Hinge

Only for Low Profile
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Bolts

in.
15”
28”
Min.
Location of
Terminating
Pull
Section
(See
Note 1)
30”
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge
Meter Panels
Hinge

Only for Low Profile
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Bolts

in.
15”
28”
Min.
Location of
Terminating
Pull
Section
(See
Note 1)
30”
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge
Meter Panels
Hinge

Only for Low Profile
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Bolts

in.
15”
28”
Min.
Location of
Terminating
Pull
Section
(See
Note 1)
30”
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
cation of
rminating
ll
ction
ee
te 1)
30”
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge
Meter Panels
Hinge

Only for Low Profile
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Bolts

in.
15”
28”
Min.
Location of
Terminating
Pull
Section
(See
Note 1)
30”
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge
Meter Panels
Hinge

Only for Low Profile
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Bolts

in.
15”
28”
Min.
Location of
Terminating
Pull
Section
(See
Note 1)
30”
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
Blank Panel (Sealable) Blank Panel (Sealable) Blank Panel (Sealable)
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge
Meter Panels
Hinge

Only for Low Profile
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Bolts

in.
15”
28”
Min.
Location of
Terminating
Pull
Section
(See
Note 1)
30”
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge
Meter Panels
Hinge

Only for Low Profile
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Bolts

in.
15”
28”
Min.
Location of
Terminating
Pull
Section
(See
Note 1)
30”
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge
Meter Panels
Hinge

Only for Low Profile
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Bolts

in.
15”
28”
Min.
Location of
Terminating
Pull
Section
(See
Note 1)
30”
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
Hinge
Meter Panels
Bolts
Hinge
Meter Panels
Bolts
Hinge
Meter Panels
Bolts
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge
Meter Panels
Hinge

Only for Low Profile
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Bolts

in.
15”
28”
Min.
Location of
Terminating
Pull
Section
(See
Note 1)
30”
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge
Meter Panels
Hinge

Only for Low Profile
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Bolts

in.
15”
28”
Min.
Location of
Terminating
Pull
Section
(See
Note 1)
30”
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
75” M
Heig
Oute
Enclo
Hinge
10” Min. Clearance
Hinge
10” Min. Clearance
Hinge
10” Min. Clearance

in

Only for Low Profile
Blank Panel (Sealable)
Hinge 75” M
Heig
Oute
15”
Enclo
Meter Panels
Bolts
30”
Hinge
10” Min. Clearance
to Obstruction

in.
4” Min. Clearance Location of
28” Required. (See Note 1 Terminating
Min. and Note 6) Pull
Section
Load Section Only–. (See
Not a Utility Service Note 1)
Termination Section.


in
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.
to Obstruction
4” Min. Clearance
Required. (See Note 1
and Note 6)
Load Section Only–.
Not a Utility Service
Termination Section.

in
Lo
Te
Pu
Se
(S
No
Lo
Te
Pu
Se
(S
No

Outer Exterior Enclosure

Switchboard
Front Face
11” Min.
15” Max
.
re
Instrument
Transformer
Compartment
Alterna
Locati
Termin
Pull Se
Barrier (See N

Barrier
11” Min.
Instrument
Transformer
Compartment
Alterna
Locati
Termin
Pull Se
(See N
15” Max
Switchboar
Front Face
.
re
11” Min. Instrument
Transform
Compartm
er
ent
Alterna
Locati
Termin
Pull Se
(See N
Barrier
11” Min.
Instrument
Transformer
Compartment
Alterna
Locati
Termin
Pull Se
(See N
15” Max
Switchboar
Front Face
.
re
15” Max 15” Max 15” Max
Barrier
11” Min.
Instrument
Transformer
Compartment
Alterna
Locati
Termin
Pull Se
(See N
15” Max
Switchboar
Front Face
.
re
15” Max Barrier Barrier

(See Notes 7 & 8)

Figure 10-28 Low-Profile Switchboard Service Section, with CT Compartment, for Underground Service

Notes in reference to Figure 10-28.

  1. Locate the terminating pull section beside or behind the metering and current transformer (CT) compartment. The metering and CT compartment must not be recessed back into the switchboard.

  2. Use filler panels where the switchboard width exceeds the maximum-allowable meter panel width. It is allowed to hinge meter panels to hinged filler panels only if the filler panel is bolted to the switchboard in both corners of the filler panel opposite the hinges.

  3. Make the grounding connection in the main switch or breaker compartment.

  4. Equip meter panels and filler panels with stops to prevent the panels from swinging inward beyond the front surface of the switchboard.

  5. Ensure that all panels and covers are sealable.

  6. Ensure that the meter panels can open 90° with the meter and test facilities in place. Ensure there is at least 4 inches of minimum clearance on the side where the meter panel door opens outward.

  7. Only for low-profile switchboards. Place the PG&E meter socket on the top panel.

  8. Preferably low-profile switchboards should only be installed indoors.

  9. Low-profile switchboards installed in outdoor applications require an outer enclosure that is a minimum of 75 inches tall. This is the required minimum working space height.

10-41 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.6. (continued)

10” Min. Clearance to
le Area
4-3/4”
Min.

Obstruction
le Area
4-3/4”
Min.

Obstruction
le Area
4-3/4”
Min.

Obstruction
le Area
4-3/4”
Min.

Obstruction
Min. Min.
1 L
C
7-1/2”
5”
L
C
7-1/2”
5”
6-3/16” Dia.
See Note 7
6-3/16” Dia.
See Note 7
3/4” 3/4”
1 L
C
7-1/2”
5”
L
C
7-1/2”
5”
6-3/16” Dia.
See Note 7
6-3/16” Dia.
See Note 7
1 L
C
7-1/2”
5”
1/2” 1/2” 1/2”
1 L
C
7-1/2”
5”
1/2” 21-1/2” Min. 21-1/2” Min. 21-1/2” Min. 21-1/2” Min.

3/8”

1/4” Drill Two Holes

21-1/2” Min 36” Max. n.
11”
6-1/2”
8-1/2”
10-1/2”
6-1/2”
6-1/2” 6-1/2” 6-1/2” 6-1/2”

Test Switch Mounting Plate

All Holes 10−32 Tap, Except as Noted

Figure 10-29 Standard Switchboard Service Section, 15-Inch Hinged Panel for Socket Meter and Test Switch

Notes in reference to Figure 10-29.

  1. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer drills, taps, and slots the panel for the secondary test switch, as shown. Also, ensure that the switchboard manufacturer furnishes and installs the socket with a sealing ring.

  2. Design the meter sockets to be installed on hinged panels for back (rear) connection.

  3. Use the outdoor or rain-tight enclosures shown in Figure 10-31 through Figure 10-33 on Page 10-44.

  4. Attach a handle at the unsupported end of the meter panel. Leave a minimum clearance of 1 inch from the handle to the meter socket.

  5. Ensure that hinges can support a 25-pound load applied at the unsupported end with a maximum 1/8-inch sag when the panel is open.

  6. Secure removable plates to the rear of the panel using screws that do not protrude through the face of panel.

  7. Ensure that the meter panels can open 90° with the meter and test facilities in place.

  8. Ensure that all securing screws and sealing screws on the panels are captive. Studs and wing nuts must be sealable, when they are used.

  9. Ensure that hinges are interchangeable and can be used on either the right side of the left side of the meter panels. When using clevis-type or removable pin-type hinges, ensure that the pin can be removed from the type of the meter panel.

2022 – 2023 10-42

10.6. (continued)

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

1-1/4” Min.

2-1/2”

1
26” Min.
36” Max.
7” Min.
26” Min.
36” Max.
7” Min.
26” Min.
36” Max.
7” Min.
26” Min.
36” Max.
7” Min.
26” Min.
36” Max.
7” Min.
3 4-1
7-7


0”
7” 7”
3 4-1
7-7


0”
9”
10” Min.
Clearance to
Obstruction
9”
10” Min.
Clearance to
Obstruction
3 4-1
7-7


0”
9”
10” Min.
Clearance to
Obstruction
9”
10” Min.
Clearance to
Obstruction
3 4-1
7-7


0”
1-1/4” Min.
/16”
1-1/4” Min.
/16”
1-1/4” Min.
/16”
1-1/4” Min.
/16”
1-1/4” Min.
/16”
1-1/4” Min.
/16”
1-1/4” Min.
/16”
3 4-1
7-7


0”
2-1/2”
/8”
2-1/2”
/8”
3 4-1
7-7


0”
2-1/2”
/8”
2-
3 4-1
7-7


0”
2-7/16” 2-7/16” 2-7/16” 2-7/16” 2-7/16” 2-7/16” 2-7/16”

13/16”

All Holes 10-32 Tap, Except as Noted

1/4”

3-1/4” 2-1/2” 4-1/2”

1/4” Drill Two 6-1/2” 11”

10-1/2”

1/4”
Four Holes
2-1/2”
1”
4
11”

Cover Plate

10-32 Tap Four Holes

3-1/4”
ill

3-1/4”

ill
3-1/4”

ill
8-1/2”
6-1/2”
6-1/2” 6-1/2”
3-1/4”

ill
10-1/2” 10-1/2” 10-1/2”
3-1/4”

ill

Test Switch Mounting Plate

Figure 10-30 Standard Switchboard Service Section, 30-Inch Panel for Socket Meters and Test Switches

Notes in reference to Figure 10-30.

  1. Meter socket openings may be on either the right or the left side of the panel.

  2. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer drills, taps, and slots the panel for the secondary test switch, as shown. Also, ensure that the switchboard manufacturer furnishes and installs the socket with a sealing ring.

  3. Paint the removable plates and attached them to the panel.

  4. Construct meter panels of 12-gauge steel (minimum). Ensure they are hinged and sealable.

Notes continued on the next page

10-43 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Notes in reference to Figure 10-30 (continued).

  1. Ensure that hinges are interchangeable and can be used on either the right side or the left side of the meter panels. When using clevis-type or removable pin-type hinges, ensure that the pin can be removed from the top of the meter panel.

  2. Ensure that hinges can support a 25-pound load applied at the unsupported end with a maximum 1/8-inch sag when the panel is open.

  3. It is allowed to hinge meter panels to hinged filler panels only if the filler panel is bolted to the switchboard in both corners of the filler panel opposite the hinges.

  4. Ensure that a hinged meter panel can be opened 90° with the meter and test facilities in place. When working with either recessed or enclosed meter panels, see Figure 10-31 below.

  5. Ensure that the panel has a handle attached on both sides.

  6. All securing screws and sealing screws on the panel must be captive. Stud and wing nuts must be sealable, when they are used.

  7. Design the meter sockets to be installed on hinged panels for back (i.e., rear) connection.

  8. For panel widths of less than 26 inches, consult your local PG&E meter shop.

10.7. Transformer-Rated and Self-Contained Switchboards

Applicants may use switchboards consisting of a main disconnect (if required), individual meter sockets, and associated circuit breakers or switches for individually metered, multiple occupancies supplied from one service. Figure 10-31, Figure 10-32, and Figure 10-33, below, show standard switchboard service-section detail for transformer-rated meter sockets. Figure 10-34, below, shows standard switchboard service-section detail for self-contained meter sockets rated from 0 amps through 225 amps.

Top View Top View Top View

11” Min. 11” Min.

Pull Section

CT
Section
Top View
C T Section
C T Section
C T Section
Top View
11” Min 11” Min 11” Min ” Min

4”

Min

CT Top View Top View Top View
CT
Section
CT Section

tion
eway
10”
Min.
See
Note 1
11” Min.
4” Min.
15”
Min
CT Section
CT
Section
CT Section

tion
eway
10”
Min.
See
Note 1
11” Min.
4” Min.
15”
Min
CT Section 1” Min.
.
10” Min.
10” Min.
.
10” Min.
.
10” Min.
.
10” Min.
.
10” Min.
.
10” Min.
.
10”
Min.
10”
Min.
10”
Min.
10”
Min.
10”
Min.

Front View Front View Front View

Front View

Figure 10-31

Figure 10-32 Figure 10-33 Figure 10-34

Outdoor or Rain-Tight Enclosures for Switchboards

Notes continued on the next page

2022 – 2023 10-44

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Notes in reference to Figure 10-31, Figure 10-32, Figure 10-33, and Figure 10-34 on Page 10-44.

  1. Ensure that hinged meter panels and enclosure doors can be opened at least 90° with meter and test facilities in place.

  2. For hinged meter panel designs, see Figure 10-27 on Page 10-40 and Figure 10-28 on Page 10-41.

  3. Ensure that enclosure doors can be secured in the 90° open position.

  4. For approved enclosure-locking provisions, see Section 5, Subsection 5.3.4., “Electric Meter and

Service Termination Equipment Rooms,” on Page 5-8.

  1. Ensure that outdoor or rain-tight enclosures are used.

10.8. Adding New Metering Equipment to Existing Switchboards

When applicants want to install a new meter panel or meter section and connect to the load side of an existing switchboard, the required method is to extend the bussing from the last meter or load section of the existing switchboard into a new meter section. See Figure 10-35, “Existing Switchboard,” on Page 10-47, as an example of how to extend the switchboard bussing.

Please contact the local project coordinator before interconnecting and adding load. Project coordinators must ensure that the existing PG&E facilities are upgraded, when necessary.

If the new meter panel or meter section cannot be connected to the end of the switchboard, the interconnection may be allowed, at PG&E’s discretion, in the utility termination section of the switchboard only if all of the following conditions below are met.

A. The total aggregated ampacity of the new panel or new section plus the existing switchboard metering sections is not greater than the existing switchboard’s total (supply) ampacity rating. See Table 10-4, “Adding Up Meter Section Ampacities,” and Figure 10-35, “Existing Switchboard,” both on Page 10-47, to calculate the ampacities.

B. PG&E calculates the new total demand load and, if needed, installs the additional service conductors required to meet that load. A larger transformer may also be required because of the new total demand load.

C. PG&E identifies available spare landing positions on the terminating facilities. The spare landing positions are in addition to the number of landing positions required in Subsection 10.3.14., “Underground, Cable-Terminating Facilities in Pull Boxes or Pull Sections,” on Page 10-34, that must be reserved for existing and future installation of additional cables.

D. The utility service termination section (typically 90 inches high) does not contain a main breaker compartment or a metering compartment. This termination section is dedicated only for terminating PG&E service cables. See Figure 10-35, “Existing Switchboard,” on Page 10-47.

If all of the conditions described above are met and PG&E approves the installation of the new meter panel or meter section, applicants must follow the applicable instructions provided in Item E. and Item F. on Page 10-46.

10-45 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.8. (continued)

E. Overhead Service: Applicants must locate the taps in a sealable compartment that is located above and separated from the CT and/or metering equipment compartment.

F. Underground Service: Applicants must ensure that the taps are located in the underground service-termination pull section or pull box. In this instance, the applicant must ensure that the bus conductors terminate in a suitable, approved manner. Also, the applicant must ensure that the bus conductors are positioned so that the customer’s incoming, service-entrance conductors and the tap connections do not encroach into PG&E’s pulling area or interfere with PG&E’s pull and termination facilities for service-lateral conductors.

N OTE : Due to various types of configurations and arrangements of switchboard compartments in some termination sections, the interconnection may not meet all of the requirements listed above and will be denied. One example is when the PG&E metering compartment or the customer’s main breaker compartment is directly above the utility termination section. See Figure 10-27 on Page 10-40.

Table 10-4 Adding Up Meter Section Ampacities [1]

Example Supply
Section
(Loc 1)
Ampacity
Rating
Meter
Section,
(Loc 2)
Ampacity
Rating
Meter
Section,
(Loc 3)
Ampacity
Rating
Aggregated
Ampacity of
All Metering
Selections,
and Panels
New Meter
Equipment Tap
Allowed?
1 2,000 1,200 800 1,200 + 800 = 2,000 No.
The Total Aggregated
Ampacity in Column 5
isnot less than
Column 2.
2 2,000 1,000 600 1,000 + 600 = 1,600 Yes.
The Total Aggregated
Ampacity in Column 5
is less than Column
2. A new meter panel
less than or equal to
400 amps is allowed.

1 Only two meter sections are shown as an example. Add up the ampacities for all meter sections and meter panels connected to the switchboard.

2022 – 2023 10-46

10.8. (continued)

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Extend the Bus and Attach New Pad-Mounted Meter Section Here

9 0”

Supply Section Meter Section Meter Section
Location 1 Location 2 Location 3
Supply Supply Supply
Section Section Section
Rating Rating Rating
PG&E
E
Service
a
Termination
Section
Met
Disconnect Disconnect
or Circuit or Circuit
Breaker Breaker

PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Supply
Section
Rating
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Supply
Section
Rating
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Supply
Section
Rating
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Supply
Section
Rating
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
Supply
Section
Rating
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
Supply
Section
Rating
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
Supply
Section
Rating
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
Supply
Section
Rating
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
Disconnect
or Circuit
Breaker
PG&E
Service
Termination
Section
Supply
Section
Rating

Figure 10-35 Existing Switchboard

10-47 2022 – 2023

Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 10-48

SECTION 11 ELECTRIC SWITCHBOARDS: 601 VOLTS THROUGH

25,000 V PRIMARY SERVICES

Section 11 Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts, and Primary Services

11.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides application and installation details for high-voltage switchboard metering equipment ranging from 601 volts through 25,000 volts.

11.2. General Requirements

The following general requirements apply when installing high-voltage electric switchboards and primary services.

Find reference information for interconnections and primary services in Subsection 11.4., “Interconnection Requirements and Primary Services,” on Page 11-14.

A. The specific switchboards voltages represented in this section are:

- 2,400

- 4,160

- 12,000

- 17,200

- 20,780

B. Applicants must ensure that manufacturers contact PG&E before fabricating the switchboards and request the specific information listed below.

- Service voltage, phase, and wiring.

- Meter panel requirements for the applicable rate schedule.

- Service-termination location.

- Switchboard and/or meter location.

- Size and number of service conductors.

- Other information and specifications necessary for fabricating switchboards

(e.g., Equipment Utility Service Requirements Committee [ EUSERC ] manual, Section 400 requirements).

C. A manufacturer must submit three sets of drawings of the proposed equipment to PG&E for pre-approval before manufacturing the equipment. The drawings must include the contractor’s name and address, the applicant’s name, and the job location. The job location must be specific and can be the service address or Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinate’s location. Field-design changes are not permitted without obtaining PG&E’s approval before making the changes.

11-1 2022 – 2023

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.2. (continued)

D. Employees perform a field inspection of the switchboard at the jobsite. The switchboard is approved only when it meets all of the specified requirements.

N OTE : Potential transformers (PTs) are also called voltage transformers (VTs). The two terms are used interchangeably in Section 11.

E. PG&E must furnish and install fuses for PTs, as well as for the following equipment.

- Meters

- Metering transformers

- Test switches

- All secondary wiring from the metering transformers to the meters

When more than one switchboard is required, install a separate service section. Ensure that it is separated completely (i.e., barriered) from other service sections, pull sections, or service switches and disconnects.

11.3. Specific Requirements for High-Voltage Switchboards

The applicant must ensure that the equipment described below is provided and that the included construction requirements are followed precisely when installing high-voltage switchboards.

A. Provide and install the insulation barrier between the potential transformer (PT) disconnect switches and the PT section. The voltage disconnect switch handle must be visible when the outer door of the switchboard is opened.

B. Ensure that the insulated cables and conductors are made available to PG&E. PG&E personnel will make the connections between the PT fuse holders and metering PTs.

C. Provide an individual pulling eyebolt (shouldered type) above each of the current transformer (CT) positions to aid CT lifting. Shouldered eyebolts are required due to their rating for angular loading capacity.

D. Ensure that all ground buses are solid bus bars with dimensions of at least 1/4 inch x 2 inches. Ground buses must be constructed from either copper or aluminum .

E. Do not use flex braid on any section of ground buses.

F. Ensure that a ground bus bar is used for the PT disconnect.

G. Ensure that ground buses do not obstruct internal compartments, openings, conduits, or accesses to utility facilities, equipment, or extended work areas.

H. Ensure that the rigid ground bus is located on the right or left side towards the front of the section to provide better accessibility for any work to be performed. This includes the PT, CT, and termination sections.

2022 – 2023 11-2

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.3. (continued)

I. PT Disconnect Switch: The following requirements apply to the PT disconnect switch.

  1. Only use a gang-operated, “no-load” type, disconnect.

  2. The disconnect switch must have grounds in a blade-and-jaw configuration when it is opened.

  3. Do not use fused-drawer disconnect devices or fused, removable, section-type disconnect devices.

  4. Ensure that the maximum amount of operating force required to open and close a PT disconnect switch is no more than 50 foot-pounds.

  5. Ensure the PT disconnect-switch door has a viewing window, so the switch blades are visible.

  6. An interlocking system is required to ensure the PT disconnect is locked open fully before the PT compartment door can be opened and entered.

  7. Apply a label near the switch handle stating, “Meter & PT Disconnect Switch. Does Not De-Energize Load.”

J. Ensure that PG&E’s working space and clearance requirements are met. Confirm that there is an unobstructed, 8-foot area cleared in front of all access doors. These areas include the termination, CT, PT, and metering sections. This area is required for installing and removing PG&E’s safety grounds and other equipment. Maintain this clearance area at all times.

K. Concrete floors or pads must extend out in front of the whole area a minimum of 96 inches, as measured from the outside of the equipment’s outer doors. See the requirements in Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-17.

Concrete floors or pads must extend out in front of the whole area a minimum of 96 inches, as measured from the outside of the equipment’s outer doors. See the requirements in Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-17.

L. Mechanical Lug Connectors: Ensure that the requested size and number of lay-in lugs are provided on the rigid ground bus in each of the following sections. Each lug must be accessible and installed towards the front of the section.

  1. Three lugs in the PT section to terminate the neutral circuit connected to the ground bus in the CT compartment. The lugs should accept a wire range between #6 to #10 American Wire Gauge (AWG).

  2. Two lugs in the termination section to terminate CT and PT ground wires. The lugs should accept a wire range between #8 to #12 AWG.

  3. One lug in the termination section for the primary service concentric neutral ground wire. The lugs should accept a wire range between #2 AWG through 250 thousand circular mils (kcmil).

M. Ensure the requirements in Section 5, Subsection 5.2.3., “Applicant

Responsibilities,” on Page 5-3, are followed.

N. Ensure that permanent marking or labeling, indicating the service-voltage rating of the switchgear being supplied, is included on the exterior of all electric meter panels and all equipment doors or panels that provide access to the service terminations, PTs, and CTs.

11-3 2022 – 2023

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.3. (continued)

O. Provide a bare bus that is 4 inches above and below the CTs. PG&E will use this bare bus as a safety ground.

P. Ensure that the primary taps for the PTs are connected only to the line side of the metering CTs.

Another alternative allows applicants to mount the meter panel in front of the CT termination compartment if, when the meter panel is open, the compartment is isolated fully by a removable or hinged barrier. This barrier must be sealable using stud and wing assemblies.

Q. To attach the safety grounds, install ball studs (1/2-inch through 13-inch threads with insulating covers) on the line and load side of the CT bus units. Locate the studs less than 7 inches from the end of the bus unit and orient them toward the compartment access opening. Also, install two ball studs on the ground bus inside the CT compartment.

R. Ensure that each section of the primary switchgear has been certified to all applicable standards by the Occupational Safety & Health Administration’s (OSHA’s) Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Program. The equipment also must meet the requirements of the Electric Utility Service Equipment Requirements Committee (EUSERC) manual, as well as all applicable Greenbook requirements, and be approved by PG&E. Also, see Section 5, Subsection 5.2.1., “Approved Metering and Service-Termination Equipment,” on Page 5-1. The following requirements also apply.

  1. A certification label(s) must be affixed to the switchgear by its manufacturer (if qualified for self-certification) or by a qualified third-party agency (i.e, Underwriters Laboratories [UL] or other NRTL), indicating that the switchboard meets all applicable standards.

  2. Due to the capacity of PG&E distribution circuits, primary switchgear must not have an ampacity rating greater than 600 amps. The maximum ampacity rating must be listed on the switchgear’s nameplate label. Refer to Section 1, “General,” Subsection 1.14., “Determining the Electric Service Rating,” on Page 1-15.

S. Ground Rods and Wire: Install 2 ground rods, ground wire, and conduits for the primary service as shown in Figure 11-1,“Primary Switchgear Termination Section Pad Detail,” on Page 11-6. These two ground rods are in addition to the grounding system already installed for the switchgear.

Connect a bare copper ground wire to both ground rods and to the switchgear rigid ground bus. Use #2 solid copper ground wire for 200 amp-rated services (#2 and 1/0 primary cables) and 250 kcmil copper ground wire for services rated greater than 200 amps and up to 600 amps (4/0 and larger primary cables).

2022 – 2023 11-4

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.3. (continued)

For switchgear installed indoors in an electrical room only, where there is a basement, garage, or other room in the building directly below the electrical room, applicants may use a concrete-encased grounding electrode from the building’s grounding system (Ufer) instead of installing a ground rod inside the termination section. The concrete-encased grounding electrode typically may use electrically conductive steel reinforcing bars (rebar). The five following requirements also apply.

  1. The rebar must be connected to the switchgear’s grounding system.

  2. The rebar must be extended upward vertically out of the building’s concrete floor or pad into the termination section a minimum of 6 inches to a maximum of 9 inches above the switchgear floor.

  3. The rebar must be placed and extended out of the switchgear floor the same as the ground rod shown in Figure 11-1, “Primary Switchboard Termination Section Pad Detail,” on Page 11-6.

  4. A second grounding electrode (ground rod) must be installed outside below grade and away from the building or its foundation.

  5. Connect the two grounding electrodes (rebar and ground rod) together with a ground wire as described above and in Figure 11-1, Note 3.

T. Submit a termination section drawing detail on all of the switchboard drawings submitted to PG&E. The drawing detail must show the position and details such as size, wire gauge, and measurements (separations where applicable) of the conduit(s), conduit window, ground rods, ground wire, rigid ground bus, lugs, and additional internal components.

U. Install a transparent, insulated, inner door as a safety barrier in front of the termination section, and CT section (if separate) for all switchboards 601 volts through 25,000 volts.

  1. Construct the safety door from a solid piece of clear acrylic that is a minimum 6 millimeters (or 1/4-inch) thick and resistant to damage by impact or puncture.

  2. Ensure the acrylic is rated for the voltage served.

  3. The safety door must extend from the top to the bottom and side-to-side to cover the entire open area of the section, including all energized parts.

  4. A metallic frame or parts may be used to support the door, but metallic parts should be limited to maximize the amount of visibility through the door.

  5. Maintain all clearances.

  6. The acrylic door must be operable with hinges on one side, and a handle and provisions to secure the door in the open and closed positions on the opposite side.

  7. Identify the door on all switchboard drawings submitted to PG&E .

11-5 2022 – 2023

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.3. (continued)

V. Meter Panel Door: The primary switchgear meter panel door is required to have a minimum of two sockets and a maximum of three sockets, excluding the California Independent System Operator (ISO) socket, as shown in Figure 11-2, “Hinged Meter Panel with Multiple Sockets for 2,400-V to 27,000-V Service,” on Page 11-8., and Figure 11-3, “Hinged Meter Panel with Dual Socket for 2,400-V Through 27,000-V Service,” on Page 11-9. Consult PG&E for meter−socket questions. If requested, PG&E will furnish and install test switches and wiring for the additional, manufacturer installed meter sockets.

The PG&E metering circuit must not be extended into other sections of the switchboard.

W. Heating Equipment: Manufacturer-installed heaters or heating equipment that prevent moisture buildup inside the switchgear are allowed if they are placed in the back of the section(s) and do not interfere with PG&E equipment or obstruct the working area around the equipment.

To Ground Bus

2” ± 1”

Figure 11-1 Primary Switchgear Termination Section Pad Detail

2022 – 2023 11-6

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.3. (continued)

Notes in Reference to Figure 11-1 on Page 11-6.

  1. Primary conduits must be centered in the window, as shown.

  2. Maintain a 6-foot minimum separation between ground rods.

  3. The ground wire must be a continuous wire that connects to, and runs from, the outside ground rod, buried in the ground or in the pad, to the inside of the termination section. The wire continues on the inside running above the pad, through the primary window, and attaches to the inside ground rod. Finally, the continuous wire must run from the inside ground rod to a mechanical lug on the switchboard ground bus inside the termination section. The mechanical lug must accept wire between

#2 AWG through 250 kcmil.

  1. On switchgear termination sections that have a raised floor above the concrete pad, ensure the ground rod installed inside the termination section extends 6 to 9 inches above the switchgear section floor.

  2. Install a spare conduit only when required by PG&E.

Table 11-1 Bill of Materials for Concrete Pad

Item Quantity Description Code Doc.
No.
1 1 Pad, Concrete, Reinforced (size as required)
2 As required Wire, #2 AWG, Solid, Soft Drawn, Bare Copper1, or
2 As required Wire, 250 kcmil, Stranded Medium Hard Drawn1 Wire, 250 kcmil, Stranded Medium Hard Drawn1 Wire, 250 kcmil, Stranded Medium Hard Drawn1
3 2 Ground Rod, 5/8” x 8’, Copper Clad2 187013 013109
4 2 Clamp, Ground Rod (use with #2 Cu Ground Wire), or 187012 187012
4 2 Two Bolt Connector, Ground Rod (use with 250 Cu
Ground Wire)
305432 015251
5 As required Conduit, Type and Size (as required) 062288
6 As required Compacted Backfill

1 See Item S. on Page 11-4 to determine the required ground wire size. 2 Refer to Item S. on Page 11-4 for a description of when rebar connected to the switchgear grounding system can be used instead of a ground rod inside the termination section.

11-7 2022 – 2023

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.3. (continued)

3/4”

3/4”

Typical Return Flange

10” Min. 14” Min. 10” Min.
See Note 3
7”
15 15
75” Max
Clip Clip
Height To
Socket Socket
Grade
7-7/16”
1-1/4”
10-1/2” 10-1/2”
Min.
4-1/8” 9” 4” 9” 2-1/2”
Min
40” 13/16”
7-7/16”
15
48” Min. 15 PG&E Clip ISO Meter
Height To Clip Meter Socket See Note 2
Grade Socket
7-7/16”
2-1/2” 1-1/4”
10-1/2” 10-1/2”
Min. Min.
See 4-1/8” 9” 4” 9” 2-1/2”
Note 6 Min.
2-7/16” 13/16”
10” Min. 14” Min. 10” Min.
15
Clip
Socket
10” Min.
7”
40”
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
10-1/2”
2-1/2”
Min.
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-1/4”
Min.
2-1/2”
PG&E
Meter
48” Min.
Height To
Grade
75” Max
Height To
Grade
See
Note 6
See Note 3
2-1/2”
ISO Meter
See Note 2
9”
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
13/16”
1-1/4”
Min.
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
4”
9”
Min
10-1/2”
7-7/16”
4-1/8”
4-1/8”
2-7/16”
13/16”
10” Min.
14” Min.
10” Min.
10” Min.
14” Min.
15
Clip
Socket
10” Min.
7”
40”
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
10-1/2”
2-1/2”
Min.
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-1/4”
Min.
2-1/2”
PG&E
Meter
48” Min.
Height To
Grade
75” Max
Height To
Grade
See
Note 6
See Note 3
2-1/2”
ISO Meter
See Note 2
9”
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
13/16”
1-1/4”
Min.
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
4”
9”
Min
10-1/2”
7-7/16”
4-1/8”
4-1/8”
2-7/16”
13/16”
10” Min.
14” Min.
15
Clip
Socket
7”
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
10-1/2”
2-1/2”
Min.
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-1/4”
Min.
2-1/2”
PG&E
Meter
48” Min.
Height To
Grade
75” Max
Height To
Grade
See
Note 6
See Note 3
2-1/2”
ISO Meter
See Note 2
9”
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
13/16”
1-1/4”
Min.
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
4”
9”
Min
10-1/2”
7-7/16”
4-1/8”
4-1/8”
2-7/16”
13/16”
15
Clip
Socket
7”
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
10-1/2”
2-1/2”
Min.
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-1/4”
Min.
2-1/2”
PG&E
Meter
48” Min.
Height To
Grade
75” Max
Height To
Grade
See
Note 6
See Note 3
2-1/2”
ISO Meter
See Note 2
9”
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
13/16”
1-1/4”
Min.
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
4”
9”
Min
10-1/2”
7-7/16”
4-1/8”
4-1/8”
2-7/16”
13/16”
15
Clip
Socket
7”
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
10-1/2”
2-1/2”
Min.
9”
4”
Min.
9”
1-1/4”
Min.
2-1/2”
PG&E
Meter
48” Min.
Height To
Grade
75” Max
Height To
Grade
See
Note 6
See Note 3
2-1/2”
ISO Meter
See Note 2
9”
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
13/16”
1-1/4”
Min.
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
4”
9”
Min
10-1/2”
7-7/16”
4-1/8”
4-1/8”
2-7/16”
13/16”

All Holes 10-32 Tap, Except as Noted

Note: May Be Mirror Imaged

4-1/2”

1/4” Drill Two Holes

10-32 Tap Two Holes

3/8”

1/4”
2-1/2” 1/4”
Four Holes
2-1/2” 10-1/2”
11”

Test Switch Mounting Plate Cover Plate

Figure 11-2 Hinged Meter Panel with Multiple Sockets for 2,400-V Through 27,000-V Service

2022 – 2023 11-8

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.3. (continued)

3/4”

3/4”

Typical Return Flange

10” Min. 14” Min. 10”
See Note 3
2-7/16”
4” 10-1/2” 1-1/4”
7”
Min. Min.
75” Max. 15
Height To Clip 4-1/8” 9” 2-1/2
Grade Socket
13/16”
9”
48” Min. 15 15
Height To Clip PG&E Clip ISO Meter
Grade Socket Meter Socket See Note 2
7-7/16”
2-1/2”
Min. 1-1/4”
10-1/2” 10-1/2”
14” Min.
4”
See 4-1/8” 9” 9” 2-1/2
Min.
Note 6
2-7/16”
13/16”
10” Min. 14” Min. 10”
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
10” Min.
14” Min.
13/16”
2-1/2”
Min.
1-1/4”
Min.
2-1/2
9”
PG&E
Meter
48” Min.
Height To
Grade
75” Max.
Height To
Grade
See
Note 6
See Note 3
10”
13/16”
4”
Min.
10-1/2”
1-1/4”
Min.
2-1/2
ISO Meter
See Note 2
4-1/8”
2-7/16”
4”
Min.
4-1/8”
2-7/16”
7”
9”
14”
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
10-1/2”
9”
9”
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
10” Min.
14” Min.
13/16”
2-1/2”
Min.
1-1/4”
Min.
2-1/2
9”
PG&E
Meter
48” Min.
Height To
Grade
75” Max.
Height To
Grade
See
Note 6
See Note 3
10”
13/16”
4”
Min.
10-1/2”
1-1/4”
Min.
2-1/2
ISO Meter
See Note 2
4-1/8”
2-7/16”
4”
Min.
4-1/8”
2-7/16”
7”
9”
14”
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
10-1/2”
9”
9”
10” Min. 14” Min.
10”
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
15
Clip
Socket
13/16”
2-1/2”
Min.
1-1/4”
Min.
2-1/2
9”
PG&E
Meter
48” Min.
Height To
Grade
75” Max.
Height To
Grade
See
Note 6
See Note 3
13/16”
4”
Min.
10-1/2”
1-1/4”
Min.
2-1/2
ISO Meter
See Note 2
4-1/8”
2-7/16”
4”
Min.
4-1/8”
2-7/16”
7-7/16”
10-1/2”
10-1/2”
9”
9”
9” 9” 9” 9”
1 4” See
Note 6
4-
2-7/
7-7
See
Note 6
4-
2-7/
7-7
See
Note 6
4-
2-7/
7-7

All Holes 10-32 Tap, Except as Noted

1/4” Drill Two Holes

10-32 Tap Two Holes

Note: May Be Mirror Imaged

1/4”
2-1/2” 1/4”
Four Holes
2-1/2” 10-1/2”
2-1/2”
2-1/2”

Cover Plate

1/4” 3/8”
l 6-1/2”
les
8-1/2”
s 10-1/2”
11”
3/8” 3/8”
s
1/4”
3/8”
6-1/2”
l
les
8-1/2”
10-1/2”
11”
s
1/4”
3/8”
6-1/2”
l
les
8-1/2”
10-1/2”
11”
11” 11”

Test Switch Mounting Plate

Figure 11-3 Hinged Meter Panel with Dual Socket for 2,400-V Through 27,000-V Service

Notes in reference to Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3.

  1. The panel must be constructed using 12 gauge (minimum) steel and furnished with meter sockets, sealing rings, slotted openings, and a removable plate for installing a secondary test switch. The slotted opening and removable plate edges must be smooth to prevent damaging the meter wiring.

Notes continued on the next page

11-9 2022 – 2023

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.3. (continued)

Notes in reference to Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3, continued.

  1. Provide an ISO Meter Cast Ring Mounting Blank Cover. When a cast meter-mounting ring is provided, the screws used to attach to the meter panel must provide a minimum 1/8-inch clearance between the screw heads and the back of the ring.

  2. Auxiliary power connections are not allowed.

  3. The removable plates must be attached to the rear of the panel with screws that do not protrude through the face of the pane.

  4. Meter sockets must be designed to connect from the back. A maximum of 4 meter sockets are allowed.

  5. The panel must be equipped with hinges. The hinges must permit the panel to open to 90 degrees. Hinges must be located on the same side as the PG&E meter socket. Usually, the meter socket panel does not need to be interchangeable, right or left, unless it causes an unsafe egress or other safety-related issue.

  6. When fully opened, the panel must support a 25-pound load applied at the unsupported end, with a maximum sag of 1/8 inch.

  7. The panel must have a handle attached to both sides.

  8. Stud and wing nuts must be sealable when used.

  9. Consult PG&E before using a panel with a width of more than 38 inches.

  10. The meter panel is required to have a minimum of two sockets and a maximum of four sockets including the ISO socket. Consult PG&E for meter-socket requirements.

2022 – 2023 11-10

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.3. (continued)

Table 11-2 Dimensions for High-Voltage Meter Enclosures

Specifications Switchboard Voltage Rating
Specifications 2,400 4,160/4,800 7,200/17,000 20,800/25,000
Specifications (In Inches) (In Inches) (In Inches) (In Inches)
Minimum, Bare-Bus Clearance
∅ to Ground
3-1/2 3-1/2 6 Refer to the
Dimensions in
Figure 11-5 on
Page 11-13 and
Figure 11-6 on
Page 11-14.
Minimum, Bare-Bus Clearance∅ to∅ 5 5 7-1/2 7-1/2
Dimension A 5 Min.
10 Max.
5 Min.
10 Max.
8 Min.
10 Max.
8 Min.
10 Max.
Dimension B1 24 Min. 24 Min. 24 Min. 24 Min.
Dimension C1 24 Min. 24 Min. 24 Min. 24 Min.
Dimension D
(Do not install neutral insulator)
Dimension E1 36 Min. 48 Min. 60 Min. 60 Min.
Dimension F 42 Min.
48 Max.
42 Min.
48 Max.
42 Min.
48 Max.
42 Min.
48 Max.
Dimension G 36 Min. 36 Min. 36 Min. 36 Min.
Dimension H Fuse-Mounting Clip:
Center
8-1/2 8-1/2 11-1/2 11-1/2
Dimension H Fuse Ferrule Diameter 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8
Dimension I To Bottom of Fuse Clip or
Bus Extension (Whichever Is Lowest)
18 18 18 18
Maximum Dimension J to Top of Fuse
Clip or Bus Extension
30 30 30 30
Dimension K Insulated, Inner Safety
Barrier Door, Minimum, Clearance2
6 6 6 6

1 Clearance to any part of the enclosure, including flanges and inner walls. 2 Uninsulated inner door material, parts, and hardware increase clearance to 8 inches minimum.

11-11 2022 – 2023

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

Top View

4” Min. Wiring Space

1 1”

Inner Insulated Safety Barrier Door (See Note U.

Shouldered Lifting Eyes Above Each CT (200 Lb. Min. Strength)

4” Min. Wiring Space
11”
90° Min.
Opening
90° Min.

Opening
Opening
Opening

on Page 11-5.)
Opening
Disconnect
Viewing
Front View Window Side View
8” Not a 18”
Barrier
A
No-Load 4” No-Load
See
Voltage Voltage
Note 3
Transformer Transformer
(VT) (VT)
36”
6” Disconnect Disconnect
K
1” VT and CT
See Note 2 Secondaries
H
G
J
30” See F
0” J
Notes
N I N
I H & Q
D
11”
ax 6” Max.
E C B

8” Not a
Barrier
Not a
Barrier
Not a
Barrier
Not a
Barrier
6” Tr
D
No-Load
Voltage
ansformer
(VT)
isconnect
6” See Note 2 See Note 2
0” N
N
H
I
J
N
N
H
I
J
N
N
H
I
J
N
N
H
I
J
ax ax
8” A
4” No-Load
Voltage
Transformer
(VT)
Disconnect
K
1” VT and CT
Secondaries
G
J
See
Notes
I H & Q
D
4”
6” 6” 6” 6” 6” 6” 6” 6”
6” 6”
6” 6” G

See
Notes
H & Q
G

See
Notes
H & Q
0” 11” 11” 11” 11” 11” 11” 11”
0”
C

B
C

B
C

B
C

B

Figure 11-4 Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure: 2,400-V Through 17,000-V Service

Notes in reference to Figure 11-4.

  1. Install the meter’s panel hinge on the opposite side from the enclosing door hinge on a weatherproof

° unit. This allows the meter panel to be opened a full 90 .

  1. Locate the 1-inch, non-metallic VT and CT secondary conduits on the same side as the meter’s panel hinges.

  2. Electrically insulated barrier.

  3. Applicants must ask the local project coordinator to contact the PG&E electric meter department to ensure that the types and models of instrument transformers they intend to install (i.e., VTs and CTs) are approved for use in high-voltage switchgear.

  4. For VT Mounting rail materials and installation details, refer to the EUSERC manual, Drawing 407.

  5. Ensure that the grounding bus extends on either the left or right sides of the CT compartment’s access area. Also, ensure that the ground terminals are two aluminum-bodied mechanical lugs accepting a range of

#6 AWG through 250 kcmil conductors. Finally, ensure that they are identified with a label reading, “Safety Grounding Point For Utility Use Only.”

  1. Do not install the neutral insulator bushing in the PT compartment.

2022 – 2023 11-12

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.3. (continued)

Hinged Barrier

1” Grommet

6” Max.

No-Load Voltage Transformer Disconnect Arcing Horns Are Not Permitted
( )
11”
11”
4”
15”
7”
VT
32”
Insulated
Barrier
1” Non-Metallic Conduit
for VT Secondaries
16-1/8” Fuse Clip
Spacing (Clip
Center to Clip
Center
See Notes
H & Q
Viewing
Window
11” 11” 11” 11” 11”
11” 11” VT
32”
Insulated
Barrier
VT
32”
Insulated
Barrier
VT
32”
Insulated
Barrier
See Notes
H & Q
See Notes
H & Q
See Notes
H & Q
See Notes
H & Q
See Notes
H & Q
See Notes
H & Q

4” Min. Wire Space Grounding Lug/Bus

Side View

Figure 11-5 Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure:17,001-V Through 25,000-V Service

Notes in reference to Figure 11-5 above and Figure 11-6 on Page 11-14.

  1. For rear access to the door, refer to the EUSERC manual, Drawing 400, Sheet 2, Note 7.

  2. Connect the primary taps for VTs to the line-side of metering CTs.

  3. When switchgear is mounted on rails, include a permanent platform, level with the bottom of the enclosure, in the switchgear installation to provide a clear and level working space in front of the metering compartment.

  4. Ensure that the ground bus extends on either the left or right side of the CT compartment’s access area. Also, ensure that the grounding terminals are 2 aluminum-bodied mechanical lugs accepting a range of 6 American Wire Gauge (AWG) through 250 thousand circular mils (kcmil) conductors. Finally, ensure that they are identified with a label reading “SAFETY GROUNDING POINT FOR UTILITY USE ONLY.”

  5. Clearance to any part of the enclosure, including flanges and inner walls.

  6. For VT Mounting rail materials and installation details refer to the EUSERC manual, Drawing 407.

  7. Do not install the neutral insulator bushing in the PT compartment.

11-13 2022 – 2023

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.3. (continued)

Shouldered Lifting Eyes Above Each CT (200 Lb. Min. Strength)

4” Min.

11” Min.

1” VT
Conduit
Hinged
Barrier 90°
( ) Min.
Min.
90°
Min.
90°
Min.
Exterior Door

1” VT
Conduit
Hinged
Barrier
90°
Min.
90°
Min.
90°
Min.
( )
Min.
Exterior Door
90°
Min.
1” VT
Conduit
Hinged
Barrier
90°
Min.
90°
Min.
90°
Min.
( )
Min.
Exterior Door
1” VT
Conduit
Hinged
Barrier
90°
Min.
90°
Min.
90°
Min.
( )
Min.
Exterior Door
1” VT
Conduit
Hinged
Barrier
90°
Min.
90°
Min.
90°
Min.
( )
Min.
Exterior Door

in.

in.

in.

Top View

CT Mounting Pan

Front View

Figure 11-6 Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure, 17,001-V Through 25,000-V Service

11.4. Interconnection Requirements and Primary Services

When new or existing applicants request services above 600 volts, refer to PG&E Numbered Document 094676, “Primary Electric Service Equipment,” for technical information about primary services. This document is located in Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”

If applicants intend to interconnect their generation facilities to PG&E’s power system, they must refer to the PG&E Distribution Interconnection Handbook . (https://www.pge.com/en_US/large−business/services/alternatives−to−pge/distribut ion−handbook.page).

2022 – 2023 11-14

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.5. Primary Switchgear Located Below Ground Level

When applicants want to install primary switchgear in an electrical meter room below the ground level, applicants must follow all of the requirements in this subsection. Switchgear must not be installed more than one level below grade. If the following requirements in this section cannot be met, then the switchgear must be installed at ground level.

PG&E requires a nonstandard design for switchgear, at all primary voltage levels, when installed below grade. This nonstandard design incorporates an additional pull section for the cable to ensure there is adequate separation between the cable terminations and the service entrance point into the switchgear to reduce the potential of water intrusion into the switchgear’s termination section.

PG&E requires that applicants submit drawings for review during the initial design stage of their project and before procuring a primary switchgear.

The following additional requirements apply.

A. Additional Pull Section: Below-grade primary switchgear must have a separate independent pull section that is next to and connected with the termination section. The primary conduits stop at this pull section and the cables run through the pull section and then into the termination section. The pull section must be the same height and depth as the termination section. The wall separating the two sections must have a window for the cables to run through from the pull section to the cable termination bus stubs inside the termination section. The following items are required in the pull section.

 - Cable hanger provisions at the top of the pull section

 - Moisture barrier to contain possible water intrusion

 - Cable blocks or support system on the bottom of the switchgear floor to

ensure cables stay off of the floor or pad

B. Back or Side Entry: The conduit and service entering the switchgear must enter the upper back or upper side of the additional pull section no lower than 18 inches from the top of the section.

C. Conduit: The primary service conduit installed in the public property (franchise) area must not be at a depth below grade greater than 60 inches. Conduit may not extend more than 20 feet past the building foundation and into the electric meter room. The conduit must be continuous without breaks or junction boxes in between. Conduit entering the switchgear must enter the upper side or back of the additional pull section.

rvice conduit installed in the public property (franchise) area must not be at a depth below grade greater than 60 inches. Conduit may not extend more than 20 feet past the building foundation and into the electric meter room. The conduit must be continuous without breaks or junction boxes in between. Conduit entering the switchgear must enter the upper side or back of the additional pull section.

D. Water Drainage System: To prevent water from accumulating in meter rooms, applicants must ensure they design and construct the electrical meter room to quickly discharge any water that may enter the switchgear and the below-grade electrical meter room.

E. Cable Termination Height: PG&E requires a nonstandard design with higher cable terminations for switchgear installed below grade. The elevated terminations allow for the cables to be bent, installed, and attached correctly. The cable terminations must be between 60 inches to 72 inches. This is

measured from the first bolt on the termination bus to the bottom of the cable

entrance window.

11-15 2022 – 2023

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.5. (continued)

F. Reference Figures: The following figures show the design of the additional pull section and illustrates how the pull section adjoins the termination section. Also, a detail is provided for the window in the wall between the two sections. The minimum cable termination heights, as well as section widths, are shown in these illustrations.

 - Figure 11-7, “Additional Side or Back Switchgear Pull Section–High

Entry,” below

 - Detail A, “Cable Entrance Window,” on Page 11-17.

One Cable Hanger for Each Conductor No Top Hats or Junction Boxes Allowed with Provisions to Tie the Cable to the

18” Max. from Top of Switchgear, Continuous

Moisture Barrier, Open Top and Bottom

See Note 2

No Top Hats or Jun Each Conductor the Cable to the nction Boxes A Allowed
42” Min.
See
Note 2
and
Detail A
Pull Section
See Note 3
ervice Entrance Point
tchgear, Continuous
t, No Boxes Allowed
he Cable to the
m Highest Cable
for Drip Loop
p and Bottom
Termination
Section
60” Min.
Cable-Terminating
Facilities
60” Min.
72” Max.
Standar
Pull Se

Front View (Side Entry)

Figure 11-7 Additional Side or Back Switchgear Pull Section–High Entry

2022 – 2023 11-16

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

11.5. (continued)

Top

24”
2
Cable Protective Insulation
Material On All Inside Edges
4”

Enclosure Side Wall

Detail A–Cable Entrance Window

Notes in reference to Figure 11-7.

  1. Ensure that the height and depth of the additional pull section are exactly the same as the terminating section. The width must be a minimum of 42 inches.

  2. The height of the cable entrance window above the top of the pad is 3 inches maximum. Ensure that the window size is a 24 inches wide by 24 inches tall. Insulate all inside edges of the window opening to prevent damage to the cables. See Detail A above..

  3. Cables must not lie on the concrete pad or ground. The applicant must provide a cable support system to keep the cables off the ground. Otherwise, the applicant must supply cable blocks using PG&E Material Code 362118.

11-17 2022 – 2023

Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 11-18

APPENDIX A ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

Appendix A Acronyms and Glossary

Acronyms

A ampere, amps

ac alternating current

AHJ authority having jurisdiction

AIC amperes interrupting capacity

ANSI American National Standards Institute

AWG American wire gauge

Btu British thermal unit

CCR Code of California Regulations

CDF California Department of Forestry and Fire Protection

CGT California Gas Transmission

CL centerline

CPUC California Public Utilities Commission

CT current transformer

DA direct access

DASMMD Direct Access Standards for Metering and Meter Data

DASR direct access service request

dc direct current

DG distributed generation

DOT U.S. Department of Transportation

EFV excess flow valve

ESP energy service provider

EUSERC Electric Utilities Service Equipment Requirements Committee

G.O. General Order

GRS galvanized rigid steel

GT&D Gas Transmission and Distribution

HDD Horizontal Directional Drilling

HDPE high-density polyethylene

A−1 2022 – 2023

Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

Acronyms (continued)

Hz hertz

ID inside diameter

IMC intermediate metal conduit

IPS iron pipe size

k kilo (1,000)

kcmil thousand circular mils

K.O. knock out

kVA kilovolt ampere

MDMA meter data management agent

MSP meter service provider

NEC National Electric Code

NEM net energy metering

OH overhead

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

PCC point of common coupling

psig pounds per square inch gauge

PRC California Public Resource Code

PT potential transformer

PUE public utility easement

PVC polyvinyl chloride

scfh standard cubic feet per hour

SRA state responsibility areas

SS soft start

TBF test-bypass facility

TVSS transient voltage surge suppressor

UG underground

UL Underwriters Laboratories

U.S. United States

USA Underground Service Alert

UV ultraviolet

2022 – 2023 A−2

Acronyms (continued)

V volts

VFD Variable Frequency Drive

VT voltage transformer

W watt

WC water column

Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

A−3 2022 – 2023

Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 A−4

Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

Glossary

Applicant: This word is used generically throughout the manual to refer to the Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) customer, or to the person or persons representing the PG&E customer in the application/construction process, including a contractor, design consultant, or installer. The word “customer” will be used only when the word “applicant” is not appropriate. Also, PG&E will sometimes be referred to as the “Company” throughout this manual.

Attachment Structure: A support that connects the service drop to the structure while maintaining the clearances required for the service drop.

Back-Pressure Protection: A check valve between the downstream (i.e., after) section of the meter and the upstream section of the applicant’s piping. This check valve prevents back-flow.

Barricade (Pedestrian Traffic): A suitable barricade to help ensure the safety of pedestrians is a heavy, wire-mesh fencing that is securely supported and is capable of protecting people from the hazards created by the moving parts of stationary machinery.

Barricade (Vehicular Traffic): A suitable barricade for vehicular traffic is concrete-filled steel pipes, 3 inches or greater in diameter, securely set in an adequate concrete pour for support. Also allowed only for some job types is a sleeve-mounted vehicle barricade where the sleeves are set in concrete.

Branch Service Pipe: A pipe that branches off from a gas service pipe to serve two or more applicants.

Conduit System: A system that includes conduits, conduit bends, conduit fittings, and all related components (e.g., bell ends and cable protectors) that are needed to install PG&E cables and conductors.

Cover: The standard distance between the outer surface of an underground facility and the final grade level.

Double Throw Switch: A switch that isolates the applicant’s electrical system from that of the electrical corporation or state or local agency.

Drip Loop: A minimum 18 inches of service-entrance wiring that extends out from the service weatherhead.

Excess Flow Valve (EFV): A device installed in a gas service line at or near the main. An EFV is used to stop the flow of gas if the velocity of the gas passing through the valve creates a pressure difference across the valve that is greater than a specified design limit.

High-Voltage Power Lines: Generally, high-voltage power lines are any overhead lines that connect from pole to pole. These lines typically are 600 volts and greater.

LB: Short-radius conduit fitting. Also known as a service elbow.

A−5 2022 – 2023

Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

Glossary (continued)

Low-Growth Zone: Applicants must establish a 15-foot low-growth zone on both sides of all new, electric, high-voltage lines. The zone under the electric power lines should be a low-growth, tree-planting zone and/or a shrub- and flower-planting zone.

Main Service Disconnect: A fusible switch, circuit breaker, or other approved disconnect means for controlling all of (and only ) the energy registered by that meter. When the governing code or ordinance permits, the disconnect means may consist of a group of fusible or circuit-breaker disconnects.

Mixed-Use Projects: Construction projects that include both commercial and residential loads.

Non-Utility Facilities: Subsurface facilities not owned by any person, corporation, partnership, business, trust, or public agency belonging to a regional, one-call notification system.

Pad-Mounted (Floor Standing) Equipment: Service termination and metering equipment that are manufactured to be installed and attached to permanently installed, ground-mounted concrete pads or floors.

Point of Attachment: In areas served from overhead lines, PG&E will install an overhead service drop from the Company’s distribution line to a point of attachment on the applicant’s residence, building, or structure. The point of attachment may be either on the building wall near the PG&E line or on a periscope fixed to the building’s roof, usually not more than 18 inches in back of that wall.

Positive Means: A device that, when used or operated, interrupts or prevents the flow of current to or from the electrical system. Also, a positive means provides the device operator or user with a visual or definite indication of the existing condition or state of the electrical system.

Residential: Class of customers commonly served at either 120/240 volts or 120/208 (network) with amperage ranging from 100 amperes to 320 amperes. Mobile homes installed on foundations also are classified as residential customers.

Secured In Place: The stud will not turn, back out, or loosen in any manner when subjected to normal, UL-approved torques while tightening or loosening terminal nuts. This includes cross-threaded situations.

Service Delivery Point (Electric Supply): The point where PG&E’s service drop wires/conductors connect to the applicant’s service-entrance conductors for an overhead service. For an underground service, either the point where PG&E’s service cables/conductors connect to the applicant’s electric meter panel, switchboard, or service termination equipment; or the point where PG&E’s service cables/conductors connect directly to applicant’s service-entrance conductors.

2022 – 2023 A−6

Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

Glossary (continued)

Service Delivery Point (Gas Supply): The point where PG&E’s facilities connect to the applicant’s house pipe (i.e., houseline). For residential and small commercial meter sets, the service delivery point is the point where the male threads of the applicant’s houseline connect to the female threads of PG&E’s gas service tee fitting. Some commercial and industrial installations do not have service tees installed; therefore, the gas supply service delivery point is the first weld or fitting after the PG&E-installed bypass valve downstream of (i.e., after) the meter.

Service Elbow: Short-radius conduit fitting. Also known as an LB.

SmartMeterAdvanced Meter Reading System : A meter using the latest radio frequency technology to transmit meter reads automatically from the gas and electric meters. This allows PG&E’s applicants to monitor their daily usage information.

Standard Delivery Pressure: The gas service pressure provided to the service delivery point at 7 inches of water column (WC). This is approximately 1/4 pounds per square inch gauge (psig), as measured at the gas meter outlet.

Switchboard Service Section: The section of an applicant’s switchboard provided specifically for terminating the service conductors and for housing the metering transformers (if required), revenue meters, test facilities, and service switch or breaker.

Tariff: A schedule of rates or charges of a business or a public utility.

Test Block: A test block is a specific type of test-bypass device . A test block is used for self-contained metering exclusively.

Test-Bypass Facility: Any mechanism used to bypass meter sockets. A test-bypass facility is used for self-contained metering exclusively.

Utility Point of Service (i.e., Service Point): The approved enclosure and the terminated or spliced connections.

Wall-Mounted Equipment: Service termination and metering equipment that are manufactured to be installed and attached to the sides of permanent structures. Wall-mounted equipment include building walls, panelboard structures, poles, posts, and communication pedestals.

Wet-Utility Piping or Facilities: Includes, but is not limited to, water, bioswales, storm sewer, sanitary sewer, steam, liquid fuels, oil, diesel, sprinkler, irrigation, spigots, downspouts, drain or leach lines, propane, or lines for other liquids or volatile, heavier-than-air gases.

Working Space: An area in front of the meter, the meter enclosure, and the service-conductor termination and pulling facilities. A working space permits access to the equipment and provides a safe working environment for personnel.

A−7 2022 – 2023

Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2022 – 2023 A−8

APPENDIX B ELECTRIC AND GAS SERVICE DOCUMENTS

Appendix B Electric and Gas Service Documents

Appendix B contains the following PG&E utility documents:

Landscaping Guides

  • Community Wildfire Safety Program Guide to Landscaping in High Fire-Threat Areas

  • Guide to Safe Landscaping Near Gas Pipelines

  • Guide to Safe Landscaping Near Underground Electric Lines

  • Tree Planting Matrix Tables

Miscellaneous Utility Documents

Utility Bulletin

Utility Procedure

***** This document is not in the printed manual and is available only in the online version of

the Greenbook on www.pge.com/greenbook.

Applicants should access PG&E’s Internet website at www.pge.com/greenbook to find the latest versions of, and updates to, these documents. Also, applicants may contact their local PG&E service planning offices to ensure their documents are current.

N OTE : See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk Contact

Information,” at the front of this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed by area.

Applicants should refer to PG&E’s Community Wildfire Safety Program Guide to Landscaping in High Fire-Threat Areas (included on the following two pages) for updated guidance on extending the defensible space around your property, specifically around power lines. Following this guidance could help save both real estate and lives.

B−1 2022 – 2023

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

2022 – 2023 B−2

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

B−3 2022 – 2023

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

2022 – 2023 B−4

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

B−5 2022 – 2023

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Tree Planting Matrix Table s

Applicants should not plant trees either under or adjacent to power lines. IF applicants decide to plant trees or shrubs on their properties, attached is a list of low-growing, fire-resistant vegetation to consider for ground cover near facilities.

Table B-1 through Table B-6 list trees that are suitable for planting near ( not adjacent to or under ) power lines. The trees are listed by genus and species in each table. The list is limited and does not include all suitable trees; however, applicants can use this information as a guideline for choosing an appropriate tree for planting near power lines. The basic rule of thumb is to choose plants that grow to be 25 feet or less at maturity. For additional suggestions about appropriate trees, consult with nurseries, certified arborists, gardening books, and websites like SelecTree at http://ecologycenter.org/directory/directory−entries/selectree/ (maintained by the Urban Forest Ecosystems Institute at Cal Poly State University, San Luis Obispo).

PG&E urges applicants to consider planting shrubs, grasses, and flowers near and under power lines. By selecting low-growing vegetation, applicants ensure that trimming back intrusive growth is not an issue.

2022 – 2023 B−6

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-1 Plant Matrix for Stockton, Yosemite, Fresno, and Kern Divisions [1]

Botanical Name
Genus and Species
Common Name Evergreen
vs.
Deciduous
Height and
Spread
(in feet)
Drought
Tolerant
Special Considerations Climate
Zones 2
Acer buergeranum Trident Maple D 25 s No Low spreading growth, red to yellow
fall color.
4‐9, 14‐16,
20, 21
Acer palmatum Japanese Maple D 25 h No Green leaf varieties tolerate sun
best, fire resistance favorable.
1‐9, 14‐24
Cercis canadensis Eastern Redbud D 25‐40 h 3 No Small rosy pink flowers in early
spring, is easily killed by
over‐watering.
1‐3, 7‐20
Cotinus coggygria
`prupurea'
Smoke Tree D 25 h Branches droop but resist breakage,
full sun, dramatic puffs of purple to
lavender from fading flowers.
1‐24
Crataegus laevigata English Hawthorn D 25 h
15 s
Thorny branches, need pruning to
thin out excess twiggy growth, bright
rose to red flowers.
1‐11, 14‐17
Koelreuteria
paniculata
Kew' or Fastigiata'
Golden Rain Tree D 25 h No Branches susceptible to breakage,
soil should be well drained, prune to
shape.
2‐21
Lagerstroemia x faueri
cultivars with Indian
names
Crape Myrtle_(cultivar_
mentioned w/ Indian
names are resistant to
powdery mildew)
D 25 h
25 s
Yes Attracts birds, plant in full sun,
various flower colors available, white,
red, pink, purple.
7‐9, 12‐14,
18‐21
Laurus saratoga Saratoga Laurel E 25 h Compact erect tree, takes pruning
well, needs good drainage.
5‐9, 12‐24
Pittosporum tobira Tobira E 15 h Yes Small tree. Rarely grows to 30 feet,
favorable fire resistance, takes
pruning well, full sun or partial shade,
clusters of creamy white flowers in
spring.
8‐24
Prunus cerasifera
krauter vesuvious'_<br>_thundercloud' and
`newport'
Flowering Plum E 18 h
12 s
Profuse fragrant pink flowers early
spring, leaves purple/black, no or
little fruit,several cultivars to choose
from.
2‐22
Syringa reticulata Japanese Tree Lilac D 30 h 3 Large shrub easily trained as
single‐stemmed tree, useful as small
shade and street tree, showy white
flowers in spring.
1‐12, 14‐16

1 Plant Matrix for Stockton Division (Amador, Calaveras, San Joaquin, Alpine) (Zones 7, 8, 9, 14), Yosemite Division (Stanislaus, Merced, Tuolumne, Mariposa, Madera) (Zones 1, 7, 8, 9), Fresno Division (Fresno, Kings) (Zones 1, 7, 8, 9) and Kern Division (Kern)( Zones 1, 2, 7, 8, 9). 2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area. 3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing conditions.

B−7 2022 – 2023

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-2 Plant Matrix for San Francisco, Peninsula, and DeAnza Divisions [1]

Botanical Name
Genus and Species
Common Name Evergreen
vs.
Deciduous
Height and
Spread
(in feet)
Drought
Tolerant
Special Considerations Climate
Zones 2
Acer griseum Paperbark Maple D 25 h No Late to leaf out in spring, narrow
rounded crown, brilliant red fall color.
1‐9, 14‐21
Arbutus unedo Strawberry Tree E 35 h 3 Rarely exceeds 15‐20 feet in coastal
areas, fire resistance favorable,
hanging pink/red flowers, fruit looks
similar to strawberries.
4‐24
Cercis occidentalis Western Redbud D 25 h Yes California native, attractive changing
flower and foliage color, is easily
killed by over‐watering.
2‐24
Crateagus lavallei Carreiere Hawthorn D 25 h
15‐20 s
Dark green leaves, turn bronze red
after sharp frost, white flowers in
spring, red and orange fruit can be
messy on walkways.
1‐11, 14‐17
Eriobotrya deflexa
`coppertone'
Bronze Loquat E 25 h
25 s
No Shrubby, easily trained to a tree, new
growth is copper for long time before
turning green.
8‐24
Garrya elliptica Coast Silktassel E 25 h Yes California native, fire resistance
favorable graceful yellowish/green
catkins 3‐inches to 8‐inches long on
males.
5‐9, 14‐21
Koelreuteria
paniculata
Kew' or Fastigiata'
Golden Rain Tree D 25 h No Branches susceptible to breakage,
soil should be well drained, prune to
shape.
2‐21
Leptospermum
laevigatum
Australian Tea Tree E 30 h 3
30 s
Yes Grows best near the coast, flowers in
spring, needs full sun, it is quite frost
sensitive.
14‐24
Rhus lancea African Sumac E 25 h
20 s
Yes Slow growing, takes high summer
heat. Can be multi‐stemmed or
trained to one stem tree. Good
screen.
8, 9, 12‐24
Prunus cerasifera
krauter vesuvious'_<br>_thundercloud' and
`newport'
Flowering Plum E 18 h
12 s
Profuse fragrant pink flowers early
spring, leaves purple/black, no or
little fruit,several cultivars to choose
from.
2‐22
Prunus serrulata
`Kwanzan'
Flowering Cherry D 25 h Spectacular spring flowers, needs
moist protected site, good soil
drainage and full sun.
2‐7, 14‐20

1 Plant Matrix for San Francisco Division (San Francisco) (Zone 17), Peninsula Division (San Mateo) (Zones 14, 15, 16, 17) and De Anza Division (Santa Clara) (Zones 15, 16, 17). 2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area. 3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing conditions.

2022 – 2023 B−8

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-3 Plant Matrix for San Jose, Central Coast, and Los Padres Divisions [1]

Botanical Name
Genus and Species
Common Name Evergreen
vs.
Deciduous
Height and
Spread
(in feet)
Drought
Tolerant
Special Considerations Climate
Zones 2
Acer griseum Paperbark Maple D 25 h No Late to leaf out in spring, narrow
rounded crown, brilliant red fall color.
1‐9, 14‐21
Crateagus
phaenopyrum
Washington Thorn D 25 h
20 s
Orange red fall foliage, shiny red fruit,
light open limb structure, least
susceptible to fireblight.
1‐11, 14‐17
Eriobotrya deflexa
`coppertone'
Bronze Loquat E 25 h No Shrubby, easily trained to a tree, new
growth is copper for long time before
turning green.
8‐24
Laurus saratoga Saratoga Laurel E 25 h Compact erect tree, takes pruning well,
needs good drainage.
5‐9, 12‐24
Ligustrum ovalifolium California Privet semi‐
deciduous
15 h Inexpensive hedge plant, takes pruning
well.
4‐24
Malus floribunda
adams', robinson'
Crabapple D 25 h
30 s
Attracts birds and bees, good disease
resistance,several cultivars to choose
from.
1‐11, 14‐21
Myoporum insulare Myoporum E 30 h3
20 s
Fire resistant, takes full sun, it is quite
frost sensitive.
8, 9, 15‐17,
19‐24
Myrica californica Pacific Wax‐myrtle E 25 h Yes California native, fire resistance
favorable.
4, 5, 6,
14‐17,
20‐24
Olea europaea `Swan
Hill'
Fruitless Olive E 30 h3
25 s
Does well in areas with hot dry
summers, full sun, withstands heavy
pruning.
8, 9, 11‐24
Pittosporum tobira Tobira E 25 h Yes Small tree. Rarely grows to 30 feet,
favorable fire resistance, takes pruning
well, full sun or partial shade, clusters
of creamy white flowers in spring.
8‐17, 19‐24
Prunus cerasifera
krauter vesuvious'_<br>_thundercloud' and
`newport'
Flowering Plum E 18 h
12 s
Profuse fragrant pink flowers early
spring, leaves purple/black, no or little
fruit,several cultivars to choose from.
2‐22
Tristania laurina
`Elegans'
Elegant Brisbane Box E 25 h No Can be trained to be a single or
multi‐stemmed trunk, excellent for
screen and boundary planting.
15‐18,
19‐24

1 Plant Matrix for San Jose Division (Santa Clara) (Zones 15, 16, 17), Central Cost Division (Santa Cruz, San Benito, Monterey) (Zones 7, 14, 15, 16, 17) and Los Padres Division (San Luis Obispo, Santa Barbara) (Zones 2, 3, 7, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 23, 24). 2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area. 3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing conditions.

B−9 2022 – 2023

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-4 Plant Matrix for North Valley, Sierra, and Sacramento Divisions [1]

Botanical Name
Genus and Species
Common Name Evergreen
vs.
Deciduous
Height and
Spread
(in feet)
Drought
Tolerant
Special Considerations Climate
Zones 2
Acer ginnala Amur Maple D 25 h No Multi‐trunk large shrub or trained at
nursery as one stem tree, striking red
fall color.
1‐9, 14‐16
Acer palmatum Japanese Maple D 25 h No Green leaf varieties tolerate sun
best, fire resistance favorable.
1‐9, 14‐24
Cercocarpus ledifolius Curly Leaf Mountain
Mahogany
E 20 h Yes Native to dry mountain slopes,
attractive open branching pattern,
OK in full sun.
1‐3, 7‐14,
18, 19
Cornus kousa Kousa Dogwood D 25 h No Needs ample water, big multi‐stem
shrub can be trained to a tree, white
flowers.
3‐9, 14, 15,
18, 19
Crateagus
phaenopyrum
Washington Thorn D 25 h
20 s
Orange red fall foliage, shiny red
fruit, light open limb structure, least
susceptible to fireblight.
1‐11, 14‐17
Garrya elliptica Coast Silktassel E 25 h Yes California native, fire resistance
favorable, graceful yellowish/green
catkins 3‐inches to 8‐inches long on
males.
5‐9, 14‐21
Lagerstroemia x faueri
cultivars with Indian
names
Crape Myrtle_(cultivar_
mentioned w/ Indian
names are resistant to
powdery mildew)
D 25 h
25 s
Yes Attracts birds, plant in full sun,
various flower colors available, white,
red, pink, purple.
7‐9, 12‐14,
18‐21
Laurus saratoga Saratoga Laurel E 25 h Compact erect tree, takes pruning
well, needs good drainage.
5‐9, 12‐24
Sorbus aucuparia European Mountain
Ash
E 30 h 3
20 s
Stands winter cold, strong winds, low
humidity and extreme heat, attractive
to birds, bright fruit, clustered white
flowers.
1‐10, 14‐17
Styrax japonica Japanese Snowdrop
Tree, Japanese
Snowbell
D 30 h 3 No Needs well drained soil, full sun or
part shade, plenty of water. Prune to
control shape, tends to be shrubby if
lower branches left.
3‐10, 14‐21
Syringa reticulata Japanese Tree Lilac D 30 h 3 Large shrub easily trained as
single‐stemmed tree, useful as small
shade and street tree, white showy
flowers in spring.
1‐12, 14‐16

1 Plant Matrix for North Valley Division (Shasta, Tehama, Glenn, Butte) (Zones 1, 7, 8,9), Sierra Division (Sutter, Yuba, Nevada, Sierra, Placer, El Dorado) (Zones 1, 7, 8, 9) and Sacramento Division (Yolo, Colusa, Solano) (Zones 7, 8, 9, 14). 2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area. 3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing conditions.

2022 – 2023 B−10

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-5 Plant Matrix for Diablo, Mission, and East Bay Divisions [1]

Botanical Name
Genus and Species
Common Name Evergreen
vs.
Deciduous
Height and
Spread
(in feet)
Drought
Tolerant
Special Considerations Climate
Zones 2
Aesculus californica California Buckeye D 25 h
needs room,
very wide
spreading
Yes California native, grows best in cool,
coastal foothills.
4‐7, 14‐19
Acer truncatum “Truncatum” Maple D 20 h No Adaptable tree, leaves are purplish
red, summer green, dark purple in
autumn.
1‐9, 14‐23
Cercis canadensis Eastern Redbud D 25‐35 h 3 No Small rosy pink flowers in early
spring, is easily killed by
over‐watering.
1‐3, 7‐20
Crateagus
phaenopyrum
Washington Thorn D 25 h
20 s
Orange red fall foliage, shiny red
fruit, light open limb structure, least
susceptible to fireblight.
1‐11, 14‐17
Laurus saratoga Saratoga Laurel E 25 h Compact erect tree, takes pruning
well, needs good drainage.
5‐9, 12‐24
Ligustrum ovalifolium California Privet semi‐
deciduous
15 h Inexpensive hedge plant, takes
pruning well.
4‐24
Magnolia stellata Star Magnolia D 10 h
20 s
No Profuse bloom in late winter, early
spring.
1‐9, 14‐24
Malus floribunda
adams', robinson'
Crabapple D 25 h
30 s
Attracts birds and bees, good
disease resistance,several cultivars
to choose from.
1‐11, 14‐21
Prunus cerasifera
krauter vesuvious'_<br>_thundercloud' and
`newport'
Flowering Plum E 18 h
12 s
Profuse fragrant pink flowers early
spring, leaves purple/black, no or
little fruit,several cultivars to choose
from.
2‐22
Prunus serrulata
`Kwanzan'
Flowering Cherry D 25 h Spectacular spring flowers, needs
moist protected site, good soil
drainage and full sun.
2‐7, 14‐20
Styrax japonica Japanese Snowdrop
Tree, Japanese
Snowbell
D 30 h 3 No Needs well‐drained soil, full sun or
part shade, plenty of water, prune to
control shape, tends to be shrubby if
lower branches left.
3‐10, 14‐21

1 Plant Matrix for Diablo Division (Alameda, Contra Costa) (Zones 15, 16, 17), Mission Division (Alameda) (Zones, 7, 14, 15) and East Bay Division (Contra Costa) (Zones 7, 14, 15, 16, 17). 2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area. 3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing conditions.

B−11 2022 – 2023

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-6 Plant Matrix for North Coast and North Bay Divisions [1]

Botanical Name
Genus and Species
Common Name Evergreen
vs.
Deciduous
Height and
Spread
(in feet)
Drought
Tolerant
Special Considerations Climate
Zones 2
Acer truncatum “Truncatum” Maple D 20 h No Adaptable tree, leaves are purplish
red, summer green, dark purple in
autumn.
1‐9, 14‐23
Aesculus californica California Buckeye D 25 h
needs room,
very wide
spreading
Yes California native, grows best in cool,
coastal foothills.
4‐7, 14‐19
Amelanchier alnifolia Mountain
Serviceberry
D 20 h Suited to mountainous parts of the
west, attractive foliage changes color.
1‐6, 15, 16,
17
Callistemon citrinus Lemon Bottlebrush E 25 h Yes Favorable fire resistance, attracts
hummingbirds, shrub easily trained
to a tree, it is quite frost sensitive.
8, 9, 12‐24
Cercis occidentalis Western Redbud D 25 h Yes California native, attractive changing
flower and foliage color, is easily
killed by over watering.
2‐24
Cotinus coggygria
`prupurea
Smoke Tree D 25 h Branches droop but resist breakage,
full sun, dramatic puffs of purple to
lavender from fading flowers.
1‐24
Crataegus laevigata English Hawthorn D 25 h
15 s
Thorny branches, need pruning to
thin out excess twiggy growth, bright
rose to red flowers.
1‐11, 14‐17
Eriobotrya deflexa
`coppertone'
Bronze Loquat E 25 h No Shrubby, easily trained to a tree, new
growth is copper for long time before
turning green.
8‐24
Leptospermum
laevigatum
Australian Tea Tree E 30 h 3
30 s
Yes Grows best near the coast, flowers in
spring, needs full sun, it is quite frost
sensitive.
14‐24
Myoporum insulare Myoporum E 30 h 3
20 s
Fire resistant, takes full sun, tough,
fast growing, it is quite frost sensitive.
8, 9, 15‐17,
19‐24
Styrax japonica Japanese Snowdrop
Tree, Japanese
Snowbell
D 30 h 3 No Needs well‐drained soil, full sun or
part shade, plenty of water, prune to
control shape, tends to be shrubby if
lower branches left.
3‐10, 14‐21

1 Plant Matrix for North Coast (counties Humboldt, Mendocino, Lake, Sonoma) (Zones 1, 2, 14, 15, 17) and North Bay Division (counties Napa, Marin) (Zones 7, 14, 15, 16, 17). 2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area. 3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing conditions.

PG&E-Prohibited Trees

Applicants must not plant the trees listed in Table B-7, “Do Not Plant These Trees Under or Within 15 Feet of Overhead Power Lines,” under or within 15 feet of overhead power lines. When mature, these trees affect PG&E’s ability to provide and maintain safe and reliable service. Many species of trees are not appropriate for confined spaces under electric lines, although they may be appropriate for other locations within a development or building site. The list is limited and does not include all varieties of unsuitable trees; however, applicants can use this information as a guideline when choosing an appropriate tree for planting near power lines. Applicants should plant trees that grow higher than 25 feet at maturity at least 15 feet to the side of overhead power lines .

2022 – 2023 B−12

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Under the botanical names of the trees, occasionally only the genus is listed. Applicants should not plant any types of trees within these genera under or within 15 feet of overhead power lines.

Table B-7 Do Not Plant These Trees Under or Within 15 Feet of Overhead Power Lines

Botanical Name
(Genus and species)
Common Name Evergreen
vs
Deciduous
Height and
Spread
(in feet)
Special Considerations Climate
Zones 1
Acacia baileyana Bailey Acacia 30 h Most commonly planted. Fast growing, short
lived.
7‐9, 13‐24
Acacia mellanoxylon Blackwood Acacia 40 h
20 s
Fast dense upright growth. Roots aggressive, lifts
sidewalks, splits easily and suckers (grows from
the roots).
8, 9, 13‐24
Acer macrophyllum Bigleaf Maple D 30‐95 h Native to California foothills, too big for small
gardens and streets.
4‐17
Acer negundo Box Elder D 60 h Fast growing, seeds readily, subject to breakage. 1‐10, 12‐24
Acer rubrum Red Maple D 40+ h
20+ s
Fast growing, red twigs, branchlets and buds. 1‐9, 14‐17
Acer saccharinum Silver Maple D 40‐100 h
equal spread
Fast growth, weak wood. 1‐9, 12,
14‐24
Ailanthus altissima Tree of Heaven D 50 h Fast growing, suckers and self seeds. All zones
Alnus spp. Alder Trees D 40‐90 h Relatively fast growing, invasive roots, several
native California species.
Various
Eucalyptus Eucalyptus E 30‐200 h Fast growing, invasive roots, many species. 8‐24
Fraxinus Ash Trees D 35‐80 h Relatively fast growing.
Carya illinoensis Pecan Trees D 70 h
70 s
Long tap root and leathery mature leaves. 8‐9, 12‐14,
18‐20
Catalpa spp. Catalpa D up to 70 h Some litter from fallen flowers in summer and
seed capsules in fall. Seldom develops dominate
shoot without shaping.
All zones
Juglans spp. Walnut Trees D 30‐100 h
spreading
Various species, check_Sunset Western Garden_
Book, English and Black Walnut notorious for
hosting aphids, honeydew is inevitable.
Various
Liriodendron tulipifera Tulip Tree D up to 80 h
40 s
Fast growing, straight columnar trunk. Spreading
root system makes it hard to garden under.
1‐12, 14‐23
Liquidambar
styraciflua
Sweetgum,
Liquidambar
D 60 h
25 s
Moderate growth rate, upright, somewhat cone
shaped, fruits are spiny balls that need raking in
fall. Roots can be a nuisance in lawns or parking
strips.
1‐12, 14‐24
Metasequoia
glyptostroboides
Dawn Redwood D up to 90 h Salt winds and hot sunlight cause foliage burn. 3‐9, 14‐24
Phoenix Caneriensis Canary Island Date
Palm
Palm/E 60 h
50 s
Grows slowly until it forms trunk, then speeds up
a little. Slow to develop new head after hard frost.
9, 12‐ 24

1 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

B−13 2022 – 2023

Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-7 Do Not Plant These Trees Under or Within 15 Feet of Overhead Power Lines, continued

Botanical Name
(Genus and species)
Common Name Evergreen
vs.
Deciduous
Height and
Spread
(in feet)
Special Considerations Climate
Zones 1
Pinus spp. Pine Trees D 30‐100 h
wide
spreading
Some faster growing than other species. Many
varieties.
various
Platanus acerifolia. London Plane,
Sycamore
D 40‐80 h
30‐40 s
Fast growing. Subject to anthracnose (causing
early continuous leaf fall)
2‐24
Populus nigra italica Lombardy Poplar D 40‐100 h Fast growing, invasive roots systems, suckers
profusely.
All Zones
Populus trichocarpa Black Cottonwood D 150‐180 h
wide
spreading
Heavy limbed, wood is very brittle. Native along
mountain streams and wet lowlands west of
cascades, California to Alaska.
1‐7
Pseudotsuga
Menziesii
Douglas Fir E 70‐250 h Can't be maintained at a reduced height without
butchering the tree. Native to Northwest America
as far south as Fresno County.
1‐10, 14‐17
Quercus lobata Valley Oak D 70 h
up to 70 s
Native to California. Limbs often twisted, long
drooping outer branches can sweep ground.
1‐3,6‐16,
18‐21
Quercus spp. Oak Trees D up to 80 h
70 s
Various species, check Sunset Western Garden
Book.
Various
Robinia pseudoacacia Black Locust D 75 h Fast growth. Wood is brittle, roots aggressive,
plants of spread by suckers.
All zones
Salix babylonica Weeping Willow D 50 h
50 s
Fast growing. Invasive root systems and are
difficult to garden under.
All zones
Sequoia sempervirens Coast Redwood E 90 h
30 s
World's tallest tree! Optimum conditions to 350f.
Fast growing. Can defeat lawns.
4‐9, 14‐24
Ulmus spp. Elm Trees D 100 h
70 s
Various species, check_Sunset Western Garden_
Book. Root systems are aggressive. Branch
crotches often narrow, easily split, Attracts leaf
beetles, bark beetles, leafhoppers, aphids and
scale. Care can be messy.
Various
Washingtonia filifera California Fan Palm Palm/ E 60 h Fast growing, native to California. 8,9,11‐24
Washingtonia robusta Mexican Fan Palm Palm/E 100 h Very fast growing. 8,9,11‐24
Zelkova serrata Sawleaf Zelkova D 60+ h
60 s
Moderate to fast growth. 3‐21

1 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

2022 – 2023 B−14

Engineering Material Specification: EMS-4123 Publication Date: 08/24/2016 Effective Date: 09/7/2016 Rev. 1a

Backfill Sand

Summary This engineering material specification (EMS) defines the minimum requirements for imported sand used in bedding and embedment backfill around gas pipe in trenches.

This EMS is used for specifying this material in the contract procurement process, applicant design and installation, local maintenance and construction, and general construction.

Target Audience Personnel involved in sourcing, engineering, construction, and supplier quality inspection.

Requirements

1 General

1.1 Backfill sand (sand) can be well or poorly graded material as determined in ASTM D2487-11, “Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System).”

1.2 Sand must be free of organic and harmful materials that could cause adverse environmental impact.

1.3 Do not use blasting abrasives containing toxic elements that are at or above hazardous waste levels defined in Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 40, Protection of Environment, Part 261—Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste or California Code of Regulations.

1.4 Sand must conform to the physical properties listed in this EMS.

1.5 The responsible engineer may specify additional requirements for specific project needs.

PG&E Internal ©2017 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 5

Engineering Material Specification: EMS-4123 Publication Date: 08/24/2016 Effective Date: 09/7/2016 Rev. 1a

Backfill Sand

2 Grain Size Distribution Requirements

2.1 Sand must meet the soil gradation requirements listed in Table 1, “Grain Size Distribution Requirements,” using ASTM C136-14, “Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.”

Table 1. Grain Size Distribution Requirements

Sieve Sieve Size % Passing
3/8" 0.375 in. 9.5 mm 100
No. 4 0.187 in. 4.75 mm 90–100
No. 200 0.00298 in. 75 µm 0–15

3 pH Value

3.1 Value of pH must be between 4.5 and 9, using ASTM G51-95, “Standard Test Method for Measuring pH of Soil for Use in Corrosion Testing,” or ASTM D4972-13, “Standard Test Method for pH of Soils.”

4 Resistivity

4.1 Resistivity must be greater than 3000 ohm-cm, using ASTM G57-06(2012), “Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Soil Resistivity Using the Wenner Four-Electrode Method,” or ASTM G187-12a, “Standard Test Method for Measurement of Soil Resistivity Using the Two-Electrode Soil Box Method.”

  1. IF Resistivity is less than 3000 ohms-cm,

THEN the following chemical content limits apply:

a. Total chloride content: equal to or less than 500 parts per million, as determined by EPA Method 300.0 prepared by Parr O2 bomb combustion.

b. Total sulfate content: equal to or less than 150 parts per million, as determined by EPA Method 300.0 prepared by Parr O2 bomb combustion.

5 Maximum Dry Unit Weight and Optimum Moisture Content

5.1 Supplier must provide the maximum dry unit weight and optimum moisture content of sand determined by using the standard or modified Proctor test (ASTM D698-12 or ASTM D1557-12) or equivalent.

PG&E Internal ©2017 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 5

Engineering Material Specification: EMS-4123 Publication Date: 08/24/2016 Effective Date: 09/7/2016 Rev. 1a

Backfill Sand

6 Testing

6.1 Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) reserves the right to:

  1. Request supplier to provide written documentation summarizing the test results and certify that the supplied sand meets the specifications in this EMS. The documentation must include the length of time for which the test results are valid (typically 12 months).

  2. Request supplier to provide new test results when there is a change in the original approved source.

  3. Obtain samples from the source for internal testing at any time.

7 Records

7.1 Retain records per the records retention schedule.

END of Requirements

Definitions Soil Gradation: Classification of a coarse-grained soil that ranks the soil based on the different particle sizes.

pH: Measurement of the acidity or alkalinity of a solution or material.

Resistivity: Measurement of how strongly a material opposes electrical current.

Compliance Requirement/ Regulatory Commitment

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192 Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.319, “Installation of pipe in a ditch.”

California Public Utilities Code, Article 3, Equipment, Practices, and Facilities, Section 787

PG&E Internal ©2017 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 5

Backfill Sand

Reference

Documents

Engineering Material Specification: EMS-4123 Publication Date: 08/24/2016 Effective Date: 09/7/2016 Rev. 1a

Developmental References :

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) M 145, “Soil Classification System”.

A.W. Peabody, Control of Pipeline Corrosion, Second Edition (National Association of Corrosion, 2001)

California Department of Transportation (Caltrans) Corrosion Guidelines

Caltrans 2015 Standard Specifications

United States Bureau of Reclamation (USBR) Earth Manual Part 1, Third Edition, 1998

Supplemental References :

ASTM C136-14, “Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates”

ASTM D698-12, “Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort”

ASTM D1557-12, “Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort”

ASTM D2487-11, “Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)”

ASTM D4972-13, “Standard Test Method for pH of Soils”

ASTM G51-95, “Standard Test Method for Measuring pH of Soil for Use in Corrosion Testing”

ASTM G57-06(2012), “Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Soil Resistivity Using the Wenner Four-Electrode Method”

ASTM G187-12a, “Standard Test Method for Measurement of Soil Resistivity Using the Two-Electrode Soil Box Method”

Appendices NA

PG&E Internal ©2017 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 5

Engineering Material Specification: EMS-4123 Publication Date: 08/24/2016 Effective Date: 09/7/2016 Rev. 1a

Backfill Sand

Attachments NA

Document

Recision

EMS-4123, “Backfill Sand,” Rev. 0

Approved By Jerrod Meier, Manager, Gas Standards and Procedures

Document Owner Sean Mann, Senior Gas Standards Engineer, Gas Standards and Procedures Engineering & Design

Document

Contact

Sean Mann, Senior Gas Standards Engineer, Gas Standards and Procedures Engineering & Design

Revision Notes

Where? What Changed?
Revision 1a Revision 1a
Section 7 Added section, including records retention statement.
Revision 1 Revision 1
Entire Document Updated entire document to current EMS template.
Section 2 Updated gradation requirements.
Section 3 Removed organic impurities requirement.
Section 3 Removed sand equivalency requirement.
Section 3 Removed “Coefficient of Uniformity” requirement.
Section 4 Updated resistivity requirements.
Section 5 Updated maximum dry unit weight and optimum moisture content.
Section 6 Updated testing requirements.

PG&E Internal ©2017 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 5

Street Light Conduit Detail

June 2014

FIG. 2 (View facing Distribution Trench)
DB
T
DUCT
T
G
C
S
P
MINIMUM SEPARATION AND
CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS
DB
T
DUCT
T
G
C
S
P
MINIMUM SEPARATION AND
CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS
DB
T
DUCT
T
G
C
S
P
MINIMUM SEPARATION AND
CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS
G DUCT
T
DB
T
C S P
G (GAS) SEE NOTES 4, 7 & 13 
12" 12" 12" 6" 12"
T (TELEPHONE) DUCT 
12"
 1" 1" 12" 12"
T DIRECT
BURY
(TELEPHONE)
12" 1"  1" 12" 12"
C (CATV) 12" 1" 1"  12" 12"
S (ELECTRIC SECONDARY) 6" 12" 12" 12"  3"
P (ELECTRIC PRIMARY) 12" 12" 12" 12" 3" 
SL SEE
NOTE 5
(STREETLIGHT)
6" 12" 12" 12" 1" 3"
TYPICAL
DISTRIBUTION TRENCH
Joint Trench − Franchise Area or P.U.E.
18 INCHES
MINIMUM
STREET
SIDE
MIN.
24"
(NON PG&E)
(PREFERRED)
**
Minimum
T C SL 5"
54"
6"
G 5"
See Note 5
7"
3" MIN
P SL S 7"
FIG. 1
Placement of the Distribution Trench within a P.U.E. is the preferred method. Trenching in the
Franchise Area should only be used when a P.U.E. is unobtainable or otherwise infeasible.
Increase cover to 30" in the street area (see Note 3).
** Separation must be 12" unless a reduction (6") is mutually agreed upon by affected utilities.
TYPICAL
SERVICE TRENCH
18 INCHES
MINIMUM
*
18"
MINIMUM
T C (SEE NOTE 7) 3"
39"
12"
6"
S Min. G 4"
BEDDING MATERIAL 2"
FIG. 2
(View facing Distribution Trench)
MINIMUM SEPARATION AND
CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS
DUCT DB
G T T C S P
G (GAS) SEE NOTES 4, 7 & 13  12" 12" 12" 6" 12"

T (TELEPHONE) DUCT 12"  1" 1" 12" 12"
T (TELEPHONE) DIRECT 12" 1"  1" 12" 12"
BURY
C (CATV) 12" 1" 1"  12" 12"
S (ELECTRIC SECONDARY) 6" 12" 12" 12"  3"
P (ELECTRIC PRIMARY) 12" 12" 12" 12" 3" 
SEE
SL (STREETLIGHT) 6" 12" 12" 12" 1" 3"
NOTE 5
SEPARATION AND CLEARANCE DEFINITIONS
Cover:
The term cover" means the radial distance between the sur-
face of an underground cable, conduit, pipe, or other substruc-
ture and the surface elevation (grade).
Backfill:
The term backfill" refers to the materials used to refill a cut or
other excavation, or the act of such refilling after any needed
shading is performed.
Shading:
The term shading" refers to the materials used to provide a
measure of separation between facilities installed at different
levels within an excavation or cut.
Lift:
The term lift" is a layer of fill as spread or as compacted or a
measurement of material depth that is the rated effective soil
depth a compactor can achieve.
Bedding:
The term bedding" refers to the materials installed beneath
facilities at the bottom of a cut or other excavation and in-
tended to provide support and/or protection for those facilities.
JT
JT
JT
JT
JT
JT
JT
TYPICAL NEW (J/T) LOCATION
R/W
CURB
GUTTER
SIDEWALK
STREET
TYPICAL RECONSTRUCTION
TRENCH LOCATION
TO CUSTOMER
TO CUSTOMER
SHORT SIDE
SERVICE
TRENCH
LONG SIDE
SERVICE
TRENCH
P.U.E.
FRANCHISE AREA
STANDARD TRENCH LOCATIONS
JOINT TRENCH CONFIGURATIONS
& OCCUPANCY GUIDE
PACIFIC GAS AND ELECTRIC COMPANY
09−27−06
S5453, Exhibit B
Page 1 of 4

Utility Bulletin: TD-038193-B003 Publication Date: 05/05/2022 Effective Date: 07/05/2022 Rev: 0

New Trench, Backfill, and Warning Tape Requirements for Electric Distribution Only Trenches

SUMMARY

This utility bulletin communicates new trench, backfill, and warning tape requirements for electric distribution-only trenches. These changes increase the efficiency when installing undergrounding facilities using different equipment and techniques.

Level of Use: Informational Use

AFFECTED DOCUMENTS

Numbered Document 038193, “Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable and Facilities”

S5453, Exhibit B, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide”

TARGET AUDIENCE

Electric operations employees and contractors who design, work on, install, or inspect electric distribution-only trench installations.

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW

1 Background Information

1.1 Figures 1 and 2 below show the current PG&E electric distribution-only trench requirements.

Figure 1. Secondary/Service or Streetlight Trench Figure 2. Primary Trench

1.2 This bulletin communicates a revision to the requirements listed above and introduces the installation of a 6-inch-wide warning tape to be placed 12–18 inches over the center of electric conduits.

PG&E Public ©2022 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 6

Utility Bulletin: TD-038193-B003 Publication Date: 05/05/2022 Effective Date: 07/05/2022 Rev: 0

New Trench, Backfill, and Warning Tape Requirements for Electric Distribution Only Trenches

2 Required Action

2.1 Figures 3 and 4 below illustrate the new PG&E electric distribution-only trench backfill and warning tape requirements.

Figure 3. Secondary/Service or Streetlight Trench: Minimum Covered Depth from Top of Conduit is 24 Inches

Figure 4. Primary Trench: Minimum Conduit Covered Depth from Top of Conduit is 30 Inches

2.2 The requirement illustrated in Figures 3 and 4 above and described in Sections 2.3 and 2.4 below superceeds General Note 12 in S5453, Exhibit B, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide.”

2.3 Imported sand used for bedding and shading electric-only trenches must meet requirements in Engineering Material Specification EMS-4123, "Backfill Sand." The only exception to requirements in EMS-4123 is the grain size distribution.

and shading electric-only trenches must meet requirements in Engineering Material Specification EMS-4123, "Backfill Sand." The only exception to requirements in EMS-4123 is the grain size distribution.

  1. Imported sand can contain up to 20% of particles that do not pass through the #200 size sieves.

    - This change allows for better sand compaction and reduces seepage in the
    

trench.

   - This newly approved sand composition requires only screening, with minimum

or no wash.

  1. Only ADD imported sand for bedding and shading electric-only trenches if native backfill contains any of the following:

    - Large rock
    

PG&E Public ©2022 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 6

Utility Bulletin: TD-038193-B003 Publication Date: 05/05/2022 Effective Date: 07/05/2022 Rev: 0

New Trench, Backfill, and Warning Tape Requirements for Electric Distribution Only Trenches

2.3 (continued)

     - Paving material

     - Cinders

     - Large amounts of sharply angular substance

     Corrosive material that may damage conduits, prevent adequate compaction of

the fill, or contribute to corrosion of the conduits.

     - Native soils exceeding ½ inch minus soil conditions.

     - Bottom of a trench consists of rock or hard pan.

2.4 INSTALL 6-inch-wide warning tape as shown in Figure 3 and Figure 4 on Page 2. Figure 5 below shows a sample of the approved warning tape.

Figure 5. 6-Inch Warning Electrical Tape

  1. USE 6-inch-wide warning tape for all electric-only distribution underground jobs that involve trenching or plow methods.

  2. INSTALL tape along the length of the trench AND above the electric conduits, as shown in Figure 3 and Figure 4 on Page 2.

  3. Warning tape must be brightly colored red and marked, “Caution: Buried Electric Line Below.”

  4. STORE warning tape in a manner that limits ultraviolet (UV) exposure.

  5. Table 2 on Page 5 provides ordering information for the electrical warning tapes.

NOTE

Above the warning tape, native soils can be up to 2 inches minus soil conditions.

PG&E Public ©2022 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 6

Utility Bulletin: TD-038193-B003 Publication Date: 05/05/2022 Effective Date: 07/05/2022 Rev: 0

New Trench, Backfill, and Warning Tape Requirements for Electric Distribution Only Trenches

2.5 The minimum depth requirement from finished grade to top of conduits for electric-only trenches only applies when requirements are allowed by federal, state, county, or local ordinances.

2.6 IF, and only IF, a qualified PG&E associate distribution electric engineer (ADE), construction inspector, AND appropriate external jurisdictions grant their approvals,

THEN REDUCE the depth by adding adequate mechanical protection as follows (SEE Figure 6):

  1. PLACE a cement-slurry cap over the conduit.

      - The width of the cap must be the same width as the electric-only trench.
    
  • The top of the cap must be a minimum of 8 inches below grade level.

       POSITION the cap 6 inches above the conduit, so that the cap rests on rockfree sand and not the conduit.
    
       - The cap must be a minimum of 3-inches thick and consist of two-sack sand
    

slurry, with red dye mixed in.

Figure 6. Shallow Trench: Minimum Depth Requirements

2.7 When backfilling trenches on slopes or grades, bags of concrete and red dye may be required on top of the conduit to prevent the backfill from moving down the slope or running out of the trench.

2.8 Soil compaction must meet PG&E’s and any applicable federal, state, county, and local ordinances.

  1. Trenches that run across or along public roads and streets OR in the franchise areas must have soil compacted to a minimum of 95% density.

PG&E Public ©2022 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 6

Utility Bulletin: TD-038193-B003 Publication Date: 05/05/2022 Effective Date: 07/05/2022 Rev: 0

New Trench, Backfill, and Warning Tape Requirements for Electric Distribution Only Trenches

  1. Trenches that run across private properties AND in all other areas must have soil compacted to a minimum of 90% density.

2.8 (continued)

  1. A Compaction Test Report may be required by PG&E. This report must include the testing company information: Name, Address, Contact information.

2.9 The new trench, backfill, and warning tape requirements for electric distribution-only trenches are effective on any PG&E design jobs for New Business and Work Request by Others (NB/WRO) AND on any Applicant Design jobs where Globals are issued on or after July 05 [th] , 2022 .

3 Application Criteria

3.1 Table 1 below shows required field actions.

Table 1. Field Actions

Activity Type Action
New Construction FOLLOW the requirements listed in this utility bulletin when
constructing electric only trenches.
Re-Construction Work Re-Construction Work
Maintenance Maintenance
Emergency Emergency

4 Ordering Information

4.1 SELECT the appropriate warning tape from Table 2 below.

Table 2. Material Codes for Warning Tape

Description Unit (feet) Approved Manufacturers1 Material
Code
Warning tape, 6-inch wide 1000 ALMETEK TAPE-CBEL M621910
Warning tape, 6-inch wide 1000 PRESCO-D6105R6-457 PRESCO-D6105R6-457

1 ALMETEK is the preferred manufacturer. Presco is an alternative approved manufacturer.

DOCUMENT APPROVER

Matthew Perez, Supervisor, Electric Distribution Engineering Standards

DOCUMENT CONTACT

Lisseth Villareal, Senior Consulting Electric Standards Engineer

Randy Royval, Principal Electric Distribution Standards Specialist

PG&E Public ©2022 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 6

Utility Bulletin: TD-038193-B003 Publication Date: 05/05/2022 Effective Date: 07/05/2022 Rev: 0

New Trench, Backfill, and Warning Tape Requirements for Electric Distribution Only Trenches

Al Valenzuela, Principal Electric Distribution Standards Specialist

INCLUSION PLAN

The information contained in this bulletin will be included in the next revision of Numbered Document 038193, “Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities.”

PG&E Public ©2022 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 6

Utility Bulletin: TD-5453B-002 Publication Date: 07/10/2015 Effective Date: 07/31/2015 Rev:

1

SUMMARY

This utility bulletin updates Electric Standard 062288, "Underground Conduits" and Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench” with the requirements listed below:

The minimum separation requirement must be 1.5 inch (in.) between:

- Secondary to: Secondary, service, and streetlight conduit

- Service to: Service and streetlight conduit

The minimum separation requirement must be 3 in. between:

- Primary-to-primary conduit

- Primary to: Secondary, service, and streetlight conduit

This increase in separation is required to improve access to the conduits during future maintenance, re-routing and replacement of the facilities.

Note that the 3 in. requirement above is already included in Electric Standard 062288 but not in Utility Standard S5453.

Additionally, separation requirements between Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) Joint Trench utilities and Non-PG&E owned Foreign Electric duct (e.g., non-PG&E Streetlight) have been added to the updated Table, "Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements (Inches)", in this utility bulletin. These are not new requirements, but they were not previously located in the Exhibit B table.

The requirements of this bulletin apply to any PG&E job estimate and any PG&E design jobs for New Business and Work Request by Others (NB/WRO), and on any Applicant Design jobs where Globals are issued after the effective date of this bulletin (7/31/2015).

AFFECTED DOCUMENT

Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench”

Utility Standard S5453, Exhibit B, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide”

Electric Standard 062288, "Underground Conduits"

TARGET AUDIENCE

Personnel in: electric construction, electric distribution engineering, electric estimating, gas distribution estimating, gas distribution engineering, customer service delivery estimating, and gas construction management.

PG&E Internal ©2016 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 3

Utility Bulletin: TD-5453B-002 Publication Date: 07/10/2015 Effective Date: 07/31/2015 Rev:

1

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW

Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench,” Exhibit B, currently shows:

Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench,” Exhibit B, is updated per this bulletin as follows:

MINIMUM SEPARATION AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS (Inches)

G DUCT
T
DB
T
C S P SL
G (GAS)
SEE NOTES 4,7, & 13
- 12 12 12 6 12 6
T (TELEPHONE) DUCT 12 - 1 1 12 12 12
T (TELEPHONE) DIRECT BURY 12 1 - 1 12 12 12
C (CATV) 12 1 1 - 12 12 12
S (ELECTRIC SECONDARY) 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
P (ELECTRIC PRIMARY) 12 12 12 12 3 3 3
SL (STREETLIGHT)
SEE NOTE 5
6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
FE* (FOREIGN ELECTRIC
SOURCES, NON-PG&E)*
SEE NOTE 5
12 12** 12** 12** 12 12 12

*Must be considered a ‘Utility’ as defined in Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench.”

Notes 4, 5, 7, and 13 are located in Utility Standard S5453, Exhibit B, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide.”

** For exceptions, refer to G.O. 128 rule, Section B, Items (1) and (2).

PG&E Internal ©2016 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 3

Utility Bulletin: TD-5453B-002 Publication Date: 07/10/2015 Effective Date: 07/31/2015 Rev:

1

DOCUMENT APPROVER

Jim Herren, Manager, Gas Distribution Engineering and Design

DOCUMENT CONTACT

Lisseth Villareal, Electric Standards Engineer, Sr

David Krause, Gas Engineer, Codes and Standards - Design and Construction

John Pickering, Expert Business Process Analyst, Distribution Engineering and Design Support

Daniel Jantz, Expert Engineering Standards Technical Specialist, EAM Distribution Standards

INCLUSION PLAN

This update will be included in the next revision of Electric Standard 0662288 “Underground

” “ ” Conduits and Utility Standard S5453, Joint Trench, Exhibit B.

PG&E Internal ©2016 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 3

Utility Procedure: TD-7106P-01

Publication Date: 05/12/2020 Rev: 0

SUMMARY

This procedure describes how to perform pre-inspection patrols specific to the Enhanced Vegetation Management (EVM) program in effort to reduce vegetation related risks to electric distribution and transmission facilities.

Level of Use: Informational Use

TARGET AUDIENCE

Vegetation management (VM) operational employees and contractors involved in preinspection (PI) activities.

SAFETY

NA

BEFORE YOU START

NA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBSECTION TITLE PAGE

1 General Expectations ........................................................................................ 2

2 Overhanging Vegetation .................................................................................... 2

3 Primary Conductor Radial Clearance ................................................................ 2

4 Trees with Strike Potential ................................................................................. 3

5 LIDAR Based Vegetation Points ........................................................................ 3

6 Customer Refusal ............................................................................................. 4

Appendix A, Diagram of EVM Tree Work Standards ............................................................ 6

PG&E Internal ©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 6

Utility Procedure: TD-7106P-01

Publication Date: 05/12/2020 Rev: 0

PROCEDURE STEPS

1 General Expectations

1.1 All overhead electric distribution and transmission facilities must be inspected for the following conditions:

- Vegetation overhanging the conductors, per Section 2.

- Vegetation currently or potential to encroach within 4-ft. of the primary conductor

before the next routine cycle, per Section 3.

- Vegetation tall enough to strike the facilities, per Section 4.

1.2 IF there is any known risk to the electric facilities, THEN prescribe the tree for work.

1.3 IF the prescribed tree work will create a subsequent hazard, THEN prescribe tree for removal.

1.4 IF the tree is observed within the minimum distance requirements (MDR) (see Utility

“ ” Procedure TD-7102P-01, Vegetation Management Distribution Routine Patrol Procedure ) or the tree is failing,

“ THEN follow Utility Procedure TD-7103P-09, Vegetation Management Hazard Notification Procedure.”

1.5 WHEN an abnormal field condition is identified, THEN follow Utility Procedure TD-7102P-09, “Reporting Abnormal Field Conditions Procedure.

2 Overhanging Vegetation

2.1 The PI must prescribe clearance of any vegetation if:

- The vegetation is currently within the 4-ft. vertical plane (see Appendix A) of primary

conductor, or

- The vegetation will enter the 4-ft. vertical plane before the next routine/compliance

cycle.

3 Primary Conductor Radial Clearance

3.1 For vegetation with the potential to encroach within a 4-ft. radius of the primary conductor before the next routine/compliance tree work cycle, PRESCRIBE a minimum of 12-ft. radial clearance.

PG&E Internal ©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 6

Utility Procedure: TD-7106P-01

Publication Date: 05/12/2020 Rev: 0

3.2 Coastal redwoods and giant sequoias are not required to be removed or mitigated below conductor height (i.e. “topped") when the tree trunk occurs within the 4-ft. radius of the primary conductor, IF the tree has no indications of any of the following conditions:

- Re-sprouting from the bole of the tree resulting in annual non-compliance.

- Significant defects.
  • Poor trunk attachments related to secondary re-growth from past trunk failures.

4 Trees with Strike Potential

4.1 INSPECT all trees tall enough to strike facilities.

4.2 IF the tree is tall enough to strike, CREATE a vegetation point. For LIDAR generated vegetation points, refer to Section 5.

4.3 ASSESS the tree using the tree assessment tool (TAT) within GISArc Collector.

- For trees with an “abate” result, PRESCRIBE the tree work to remove the risk.

- For trees with a “do not abate” result, POPULATE fields as follows:

   - Status select “No Work Required under EVM.”

   - Prescription select “NW_No Work.”

5 LIDAR Based Vegetation Points

NOTE

Vegetation points based on LIDAR data are considered accurate. Physical validation is required before the inspection is considered complete. This will ensure all trees with strike potential are properly identified and mitigated.

5.1 All LIDAR based vegetation points must be validated by a PI.

5.2 The PI must assess each vegetation point, as specified in Step 1.1.

5.3 IF a tree is does not exist (e.g. two vegetation points are listed but one tree was physically removed) or is clearly not tall enough to strike facilities at time of inspection, THEN populate the vegetation point fields as follows:

- Status select “Not Valid.”

- TAT Result select “Not a Strike Tree.”

PG&E Internal ©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 6

Utility Procedure: TD-7106P-01

Publication Date: 05/12/2020 Rev: 0

6 Customer Refusal

6.1 IF the customer refuses removal or pruning, THEN FOLLOW Utility Procedure TD-7102P-04, “Distribution Vegetation Refusal Procedure.”

END of Instructions

DEFINITIONS

Facilities: Any electrical or non-electrical conductors or apparatus on a pole, the pole, or any pole supporting wires. Service drops are excluded.

LIDAR : Stands for Light Detection and Ranging. Data collected and generated by remote sensing technology using light detection.

Trees : Vegetation with a diameter at breast height (DBH) of 4-in. or more.

Vegetation point : A data point used to represent a tree in the VM inventory system.

Vertical plane : The area created by horizontally extending 4-ft. from both sides of the outer most conductor then vertically extending to the sky (i.e. football goal post).

IMPLEMENTATION RESPONSIBILITIES

The vegetation management document owner is responsible for the rollout, communication, and periodic review of this utility procedure. Vegetation management operations personnel are responsible for taking the applicable training and executing the procedure where applicable.

GOVERNING DOCUMENT

“ ”

              Utility Standard TD 7102S, [Distribution Vegetation Management Standard (DVMS)](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad81c3ae35&vd=true&device=false)

COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENT / REGULATORY COMMITMENT

General Order (G.O.) 95, Rule 35

Public Resources Code (PRC), Section 4293

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

Developmental References:

Cal Fire Power Line Fire Prevention Field Guide, 2008 revision

PG&E Internal ©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 6

Utility Procedure: TD-7106P-01

Publication Date: 05/12/2020 Rev: 0

Supplemental References:

“ Utility Procedure TD-7102P-01, Vegetation Management Distribution Routine Patrol Procedure”

“ Utility Procedure TD-7103P-09, Vegetation Management Hazard Notification Procedure”

APPENDICES

NA

ATTACHMENTS

NA

DOCUMENT RECISION

NA

DOCUMENT APPROVER

Derek Cedars, Director of Program Management, Vegetation Management

Concurrence:

Joey Perez, Manager, Vegetation Management

DOCUMENT OWNER

Joey Perez, Manager, Vegetation Management

DOCUMENT CONTACT

Ryan Willis, Manager, Vegetation Management

REVISION NOTES Where? What Changed?
Where?
What Changed?
NA
NA

PG&E Internal ©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 6

Utility Procedure: TD-7106P-01

Publication Date: 05/12/2020 Rev: 0

Appendix A, Diagram of EVM Tree Work Standards

Page 1 of 1

Figure 1. Diagram of EVM Tree Work Standards

PG&E Internal ©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 6

APPENDIX C ELECTRIC AND GAS ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS

Appendix C Electric and Gas Engineering Documents

Appendix C contains the electric numbered engineering documents and gas design standards listed in Table C-1 and Table C-2, below. Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) may revise its design and construction documents relating to applicant service requirements between updates to the bound hardcopy manual. The bound manual is not reprinted until the next scheduled print date regardless of changes in processes or requirements. Therefore, it is imperative that applicants access PG&E’s Internet website at www.pge.com/greenbook to find the latest versions of, and updates to, these documents. Also, applicants may contact their local PG&E service planning office to ensure their documents are current.

N OTE : See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office and Inspection Desk Contact Information,” at the front of this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed by area.

Table C-1 Gas Design Standards

Section 1 Document
Number
Title
A: Pipes, Mains,
and Services1
A-03 Gas Trench Design and Construction
A: Pipes, Mains,
and Services1
A-04 Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,
Distribution Mains, and Service Lines
A: Pipes, Mains,
and Services1
A-42 Standard Branch Service Installation
A: Pipes, Mains,
and Services1
A-43.2 Curb Valves
A: Pipes, Mains,
and Services1
A-75 Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing
A: Pipes, Mains,
and Services1
A-81 Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines
A: Pipes, Mains,
and Services1
A-90 Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design
A: Pipes, Mains,
and Services1
A-93.1 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE) Gas Distribution
System
A: Pipes, Mains,
and Services1
A-93.3 Excess Flow Valves
J: Meters, Gauges
and Instruments1
J-12.4 Mobile Home/Manufactured Home Meter Set Installation
J: Meters, Gauges
and Instruments1
J-15 Gas Meter Locations
J: Meters, Gauges
and Instruments1
J-16 Gas Meter Room
J: Meters, Gauges
and Instruments1
J-65.1 Volume Pulse Output Connection for Gas Meters
J: Meters, Gauges
and Instruments1
J-95 Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement
K: Pits, Vaults,
Boxes, and
Shelters1
K-51 Single Meter Cabinet for Domestic Gas Meters
L: Marker Tags,
Signs, Barricades,
and Fences
L-16 Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape
Greenbook 2 N-01 PG&E Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers

1 For PG&E reference only: “Section” refers to the section in PG&E TD-4950M, Gas Design Standards Manual, which contain these documents.

2 This document is not in TD-4950M, Gas Design Standards Manual.

C−1 2022 – 2023

Appendix C: Electric and Gas Engineering Documents

Table C-2 Electric Engineering Documents

Section 1 Document
Number
Title
Underground1
“Connectors”
013109 Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps
Underground1
“Connectors”
015251 Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution
Systems
Overhead1
“Services”
025055 Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles
Overhead1 3
“Services”
027911 Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication
Equipment
Underground1
“Enclosures”
028028 Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures
Underground1
“Services”
036670 Temporary Underground Electric Service Single-Phase,
120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum
Underground1
“Cable”
038193 Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric
Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities
Underground1
“Transformers”
041352 Service Entrance From Underground Vault Using Bus Bars
Underground1
“Transformers”
045292 Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted
Transformers
Underground1
“General”
051122 Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
Greenbook 2 052521 Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments
Underground1
“Services”
054619 Agricultural Underground Service 500 HP or Less
Underground1
“Services”
054712 Permanent Wood Post Installation Underground Electric Service
Engineering
Standards2
055103 Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From
Transmission Lines
Underground1
“Transformers”
057521 Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
Overhead1
“Services”
058087 Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less
Greenbook 2 060559 Disconnect Switch Requirements For Distributed Generation
Customers
Underground1
“Services”
061032 Residential and Small Commercial Overhead to Underground
Electric Service Conversion
Underground1
“Services”
062000 Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

1 For PG&E reference only: “Section” refers to the section in PG&E’s Electric Overhead Construction Manual or Electric Underground Construction Manual, Volumes 1 and 2, which contain these documents. 2 This document is not in the Electric Overhead Construction Manual or Electric Underground Construction Manual.

3 This document is not in the printed manual and is available only in the online version of the Greenbook on www.pge.com/greenbook.

2022 – 2023 C−2

Appendix C: Electric and Gas Engineering Documents

Table C-2 Electric Engineering Documents, continued

Section 1 Document
Number
Title
Underground1
“Transformers”
062111 Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
Underground1
“Conduits”
062288 Underground Conduits
Greenbook 2 063422 Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers
Underground1
“Services”
063927 Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential Underground
Electric Services 0−600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities
Underground1
“Services”
063928 Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential
Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts to Customer-Owned
Facilities
Underground1
“Services”
063929 Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use
With Pad-Mounted Transformers
Underground1
“Transformers”
064309 Box-Pad for Pad-Mounted Transformers
Overhead1
“Services”
065374 Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction
Greenbook 2 066211 PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers
Greenbook 2 068179 Service to Cellular on Transmission Tower
Underground1
“General”
072149 Requirements for Allowing Installation of Subsurface
Transformers
Greenbook 2 076249 Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations
Underground1
“General”
076268 Painting of PG&E Electric Distribution Pad-Mounted and
Subsurface Equipment
Underground1
and Overhead1
“Services”
Greenbook
092816 Wholesale Distribution Tariff (WDT) Interconnection Design
Options for Primary Voltage Service
Greenbook 2 094670 Supply Side Interconnection Requirements for Distributed
Generation
Underground1
“Services” and
Overhead1
“Meters”
Greenbook
094675 SmartPole Meter for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication
Equipment 3
Underground1
and Overhead1
“Services”
Greenbook
094676 Primary Electric Service Requirements
Underground1
“Services”
Greenbook
094677 PG&E Metered Electric Service to Antenna and Communication
Equipment on Company Owned Steel Streetlight Poles 3
Underground1
and Overhead1
“Services”
Greenbook
094678 PG&E Electric Service to Antenna and Communication Equipment
on Municipality Owned Steel Streetlight Poles 3

1 For PG&E reference only: “Section” refers to the section in PG&E’s Electric Overhead Construction Manual or Electric Underground Construction Manual, Volumes 1 and 2, which contain these documents. 2 This document is not in the Electric Overhead Construction Manual or Electric Underground Construction Manual.

131aad80e0269c&vd=true&device=false)_ Volumes 1 and 2, which contain these documents. 2 This document is not in the Electric Overhead Construction Manual or Electric Underground Construction Manual.

3 This document is not in the printed manual and is available only in the online version of the Greenbook on www.pge.com/greenbook.

C−3 2022 – 2023

Appendix C: Electric and Gas Engineering Documents

Section 1 Document
Number
Title
Underground1
and Overhead1
“Services”
Greenbook
094679 PG&E Metered Electrical Service to Antenna and Communication
Equipment on Non-PG&E Telecommunication Owned Poles 3
Greenbook 2 094683 SmartMeter Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter
Rooms and High−Rise Buildings
Greenbook 2 094684 Green Meter Adapter (GMA) for Customer Generation3

1 For PG&E reference only: “Section” refers to the section in PG&E’s Electric Overhead Construction Manual or Electric Underground Construction Manual, Volumes 1 and 2, which contain these documents. 2 This document is not in the Electric Overhead Construction Manual or Electric Underground Construction Manual.

3 This document is not in the printed manual and is available only in the online version of the Greenbook on www.pge.com/greenbook.

2022 – 2023 C−4

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

GAS TRENCH DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard (GDS) provides general trench requirements for Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) gas transmission and distribution facilities. It includes dimensions, acceptable materials to place in the trench, and damage prevention requirements. This GDS does not apply to pipe installed with trenchless construction methods.

1 General Information

1.1. PG&E has an obligation to repair and pave public streets and roads to the same conditions as found. PG&E trenches must meet the requirements of the local permitting agency unless the requirements are determined to be arbitrary, unreasonable, or pose a potential risk to the integrity of the facilities or safety of the public and PG&E crews during construction and routine maintenance.

1.2. Due to the large number of local permitting agencies within the PG&E service territory, it is outside of the scope of this GDS to address all possible local agency trench and backfill requirements. When this GDS differs from local agency requirements it is the responsibility of the local leadership, design and asset engineering and corrosion services teams to evaluate the agency requirements and/or coordinate with the local agency to develop a local trench design that is acceptable to both PG&E and the local

agency.

1.3. This GDS provides the recommended minimum requirements for trench configuration and backfill requirements. The project team, responsible asset engineer and corrosion services should evaluate each location and determine if a site specific trench design is required and has final authority to approve any deviation from the Issued for Construction (IFC) drawings.

1.4. For joint trench requirements refer to Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench.”

1.5. For required cover and clearances refer to Gas Design Standard A-04, “Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines, Distribution Mains, and Service Lines.”

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 12

Gas Trench Design and Construction A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

2 Trench Configuration

2.1. A typical gas only trench is shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1. Typical Gas Only Trench Configuration

2.2. Basic Trench Design Construction and Terminology

A. Bedding: The bottom of the trench must be cleared of rocks, skid blocks, or other hard substances to provide a continuous smooth base for the pipe to rest on without damage to the coating. A padding of fine earth or sand can be provided to cushion the pipe. The thickness of the padding should be ⅓ the outside diameter of the pipe, but not less than 4 inches.

B. Haunch: The backfill material under the pipe haunches supports the pipe and helps to distribute the load evenly. The quality and placement of the haunching backfill is the most important factor in pipe settlement.

C. Shading: Material that provides support from lateral displacement, distributes overhead loads, and protects the pipe during final backfilling and paving operations.

Page 2 of 12 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Gas Trench Design and Construction A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

2.2 (continued)

D. Initial Backfill: A backfill of fine materials must be placed to a minimum elevation of 12 inches over the top of the pipe, to prevent damage from rocks while backfilling above this level.

E. Final Backfill/Paving: In most cases, competent native fill is acceptable and preferred for final backfill. Paving must match any existing paving that was removed in the construction of the pipe.

2.3. Trench Width

A. Trench must be wide enough to allow for the installation of the pipe without damaging coating or inducing unnecessary stresses and to safely and conveniently compact backfill material on either side of the pipe.

B. At horizontal angles, the trench must have sufficient width to accommodate the welding elbow or bend and provide clearance between the side of the trench and the pipe.

C. At locations where welding is to occur in the trench, it must be wide enough to also safely accommodate welding personnel.

D. According to The Performance PipeEngineering Manual, 2013, the recommended minimum trench widths are listed in Table 1.

Table 1. Recommended Minimum Trench Widths

Nominal Pipe OD (in.) Minimum Trench Width (in.)
< 3 12
3–16 Pipe OD + 12
18–34 Pipe OD + 18
36–63 Pipe OD + 24

2.4. Trench Depth

A. Personnel performing excavations must follow safety guidelines provided in Utility Procedure TD-4412P-05, “Excavation Procedures for Damage Prevention,” and Utility Manual TD-4621M, “Excavation Safety Manual.”

B. The trench must be deep enough to provide the minimum cover as outlined in GDS A-04.

2.5. Warning Tape

A. A 6 inch warning tape must be installed above the pipe per Gas Design Standard L-16, “Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape.”

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 3 of 12

Gas Trench Design and Construction A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

3 Trench Backfill Material

3.1. General

A. From a corrosion, logistical, and affordability perspective, competent native soil is preferred for bedding, shading, and backfilling material throughout the trench.

B. When native material is determined to be unsuitable for bedding and shading, a PG&E approved import of fine material or sand is required for the bedding and shading material.

C. Import sand used as bedding and shading material must meet the requirements in Engineering Material Specification (EMS)-4123, “Backfill Sand.”

3.2. Competent Native or Import Material Specifications

A. General

(1) Do not use organic soils (including peat, humus, topsoil, swamp soils, mulch, and soils containing leaves), grass, branches, or other fibrous vegetable matter as bedding and shading material.

B. Distribution

(1) Bedding and Shading Material

a) Native or import material used for bedding or shading must meet the following criteria: Gradation requirements as determined by American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C136M-14, “Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates,” are shown in Table 2.

Table 2. Bedding and Shading Material Gradation Requirements

Sieve U.S. Particle Size (in) Spec
½ 0.5 100%
#4 0.187 75%

b) The material must not contain rocks with sharp edges or that may be abrasive. In general, rocks can be round to sub-round as shown in Figure 2, “Angularity Example.”

Page 4 of 12 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Gas Trench Design and Construction A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

3.2 (continued)

(2) Final Backfill Material

a) Native or import final backfill material must meet the following criteria:

b) The soil must not contain large rocks, clods, or lumps of soil greater than 3 inches.

c) The soil must be free of construction debris, sticks, stumps, garbage, or other organic materials.

C. Transmission

(1) Bedding and Shading

a) The material must not contain rocks with sharp edges or that may be abrasive. In general, round to sub-round rocks are acceptable as shown in Figure 2.

b) The material must be screened for rocks and clods of soil greater than 1 inch.

(2) Final Backfill Material

a) Native or import final backfill material must meet the following criteria: The soils must not contain large rocks, clods, or lumps of soil greater than 3 inches.

b) The soil must be free of construction debris, sticks, stumps, garbage, or other organic materials.

Figure 2. Angularity Example

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 5 of 12

Gas Trench Design and Construction A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

4 Other Design Considerations

4.1. Corrosion Potential

A. Although the coating and cathodic protection are the primary methods of protecting steel pipe from corrosion, it is recommended that the native or import soil be evaluated for corrosion potential before being used as bedding or shading backfill. Tests and recommended limits are listed below:

(1) pH must be between 4.5 and 9.

(2) Contact corrosion engineering services personnel for additional information and/or approved tests.

4.2. Above Ground Piping

A. Soil with low compaction around above group piping can cause settlement and additional stress to pipe at air to soil transitions.

(1) Consider providing site-specific compaction requirements of at least 90%, appropriate methods of placement and compaction, and testing requirements and intervals.

4.3. Site Specific Design

A. Consider providing a site specific trench design and construction method at locations where there is the potential for the following.

(1) Areas where ground settlement is a concern.

(2) Water transmission in trench that could potentially cause trench settlement and failure.

(3) Locations of known or potential landslides.

(4) High ground water table.

B. For assistance with the identification of potential issues and site evaluation contact the following.

(1) Identification of known geologic hazards:

a) Transmission Integrity Management Program (TIMP) engineering geohazard personnel.

b) Distribution Integrity Management Program (DIMP) engineering personnel.

(2) Geotechnical support personnel.

Page 6 of 12 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Gas Trench Design and Construction A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

5 Placement and Compaction

Note: It is extremely important that PG&E meet the minimum performance requirements for compaction required by the local permitting agency. Settlement and trench failures due to poor workmanship in public roads are public safety hazards.

5.1. General

A. Trench backfill compaction must meet local agency permit requirements or IFC drawings, whichever is more conservative.

B. Outside of public roads and franchise, backfill compaction is not required unless specified by the responsible design or asset engineer in the IFC drawings.

(1) It is recommended that backfill be compacted where ground settlement is a concern or potential risk.

5.2. Placement

A. Avoid damaging the pipe and pipe coating when placing the shading material.

B. Use caution when placing shading material on top of pipe service connections and transition fittings.

5.3. Compaction

A. Bedding

(1) The trench bottom needs to provide firm, uniform, and adequate support for the pipe.

a) In a trench that contains voids, consider using a concrete vibrator to assist with consolidation when using wet sand for bedding.

B. Shading

(1) No compaction operations that could damage the pipe coating are allowed. Protect the pipe in place during compaction operations.

(2) Compaction operations of shading backfill should take place adjacent to the pipe. Do not compact directly over the pipe until there are at least 12 inches of cover over the pipe.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 7 of 12

Gas Trench Design and Construction A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

5.3 (continued)

C. Final Fill

(1) Lift heights must be of sufficient depth to attain the required compaction based on the type of material and method of compaction, for example:

a) Sandy fill must be placed in lifts no greater than 6 to 9 inches and compacted using a vibrating plate compactor.

b) Clayey fill must be placed in 6 to 9 inch lifts and compacted using a rammer (jumping jack).

D. Consult the responsible design or asset engineer for minimum cover or additional protection requirements for pipe when using large compaction equipment such as a sheep’s foot roller or vibrating compaction roller.

5.4. Testing

A. Testing requirements and intervals are required by the permitting agency or as specified in the IFC drawings. In absence of specific guidance, Caltrans provides a conservative approach.

(1) ASTM D1557, “Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort,” or equivalent:

a) One sample every 2000 cubic yards.

(2) ASTM D6938-15, “Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)”

a) One test every 8 inches of thickness.

6 Slurry and Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Backfill

Note: Due to difficulties with quality control of mixture, safety, and time concerns related to accessing the pipeline for future maintenance, it is not recommended that a cement slurry or CLSM be used as pipe shading material.

6.1. Slurry Cement and/or CLSM (including soil cement CLSM)

A. Slurry cement or CLSM must not be used as a shading material unless approved by the responsible design or asset engineer in the IFC drawing or through the field change control process.

B. Do not allow cement additives such as calcium oxide (quicklime) to come into contact with PE pipe, tubing, or fittings.

Page 8 of 12 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Gas Trench Design and Construction A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

6.1 (continued)

C. The design engineer can work with concrete vendors or construction contractors to develop suitable low strength slurry mix design and quality control requirements.

(1) In order to allow for manual excavation of buried facilities, a mix with a maximum design compressive strength of 50 pounds per square inch (psi) is required.

(2) Refer to American Concrete Institute (ACI) 229R-99, “Controlled LowStrength Materials” for examples of CLSM mixture portions.

D. The responsible design or asset engineer working with the project team and corrosion services has sole authority to approve a slurry or concrete with a compressive strength over 50 psi used as a protective cap for shallow pipe.

(1) Place a minimum of 12 inches of sand or fine material between the pipe and concrete cap.

(2) Redline as-built drawing or GSR where the pipe has a slurry backfill or concrete cap.

6.2. 0-Sack Slurry (a.k.a. wet sand)

A. When using wet sand (0-sack slurry) for backfill, a minimum dry time of 24 hours is required before placing final fill.

B. The use of wet sand (0-sack slurry) as a backfill in the following locations requires design or asset engineer approval:

(1) Locations with a high groundwater table or high hydraulic gradient.

(2) Locations where ground settlement over time is a concern.

(3) In trenches where the native material is not free-draining, for example, soils with high clay and silt content.

C. Sand used in 0-sack slurry must meet the requirements in EMS-4123 with the following additions:

(1) The sand must be washed and free of fine organic silts and clays.

(2) Sand equivalent equal to or greater than 20 per ASTM D-2419-14, “Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Solid and Fine Aggregate.”

D. In a trench that contains voids, consider using a concrete vibrator to assist with consolidation under pipe and voids created by shoring removal, etc.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 9 of 12

Gas Trench Design and Construction A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

6.2 (continued)

E. Testing

(1) When required to be tested, 0-sack slurry must be tested using the following tests:

a) ASTM D-1557, “Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort” or equivalent.

b) ASTM D6938-15, “Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).”

Target Audience

The following personnel: gas transmission and distribution (T&D) construction, gas T&D general construction, gas engineering and design, gas transmission engineering and design, gas distribution engineering and design, gas maintenance and construction, gas T&D pipeline operations and maintenance, DIMP engineering, TIMP pipeline services, and facility integrity management program (FIMP) plant services.

Definitions

NA

Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment

California Public Utilities Code, Article 3, Equipment, Practices, and Facilities, Section 787

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.319, “Installation of pipe in a ditch.”

Page 10 of 12 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Gas Trench Design and Construction A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

References

American Concrete Institute (ACI) 229R-99 Controlled Low-Strength Materials

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D2488-09a, “Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure)”

ASTM D698-12, “Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort”

ASTM D1557-12, “Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort”

ASTM C136-14, “Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates”

ASTM D2487-11, “Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)”

ASTM G51-95, “Standard Test Method for Measuring pH of Soil for Use in Corrosion Testing”

ASTM D4972-13, “Standard Test Method for pH of Soils”

ASTM D6938-15, “Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)”

A.W. Peabody, Control of Pipeline Corrosion, Second Edition (National Association of Corrosion, 2001)

Caltrans Construction Manual – 2014

California Department of Transportation (Caltrans) Corrosion Guidelines Version 2.0, November 2012

Engineering Material Specification EMS-4123, “Backfill Sand”

Gas Design Standard A-04, “Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines, Distribution Mains and Service Lines”

Gas Design Standard L-16, “Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape”

Performance Pipe Engineering Manual, Chevron Phillips Chemical Company, 2003

Utility Manual TD-4621M, “Excavation Safety Manual”

Utility Procedure TD-4412P-05, “Excavation Procedures for Damage Prevention”

Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench”

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 11 of 12

Gas Trench Design and Construction A-03

Publication Date: 08/19/2020 Effective Date: 11/16/2020 Rev. 0a

Appendices

NA

Attachments

NA

Revision Notes

Revision 0a has the following changes:

  1. For Placement and Compaction, updated guidance for bedding compaction and added specific guidance for plastic installations.

  2. For Slurry and Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM), updated the approval requirements for the use of CLSM as shading. Added specific guidance for plastic installations. Clarified the requirements for CLSM to have a maximum design compressive strength of 50 pounds per square inch. Added the requirement for a minimum dry time of 24 hours for wet send (0-sack slurry) use. Clarified the guidance for locations that require approval for the use of wet sand as a backfill material.

Revision 0 (Publication Date: 08/16/2017, Effective Date: 08/30/2017) has the following changes:

  1. This is a new GDS.

Asset Type: Storage, Compression & Processing, Measurement & Control, Transmission Pipe, Distribution Mains, Distribution Services, Customer Connected Equipment, CNG/LNG.

Function: Design, Construction, Maintenance, Operation, and Emergency Response

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 12 of 12 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

COVER AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES, DISTRIBUTION MAINS, AND

SERVICE LINES

A-04

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

Purpose and Scope

This Gas Design Standard (GDS) establishes minimum cover and clearance requirements for Pacific Gas and Electric Company (Company) buried gas transmission lines, gas distribution mains, and gas service lines that do not cross highways or railroads. Its purpose is for public safety and to meet all governmental and other requirements. These cover and clearance requirements are applicable to the installation of new, replaced, or relocated gas facilities. This GDS also discusses minimum clearances by facility type.

General Information

  1. The cover and clearance requirements in this GDS meet or exceed the minimum requirements established in Code of Federal Regulations 49 (CFR) Part 192, “Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards,” and CPUC General Order (G.O.) 112-F, “State of California Rules Governing Design, Construction, Testing, Operation, and Maintenance of Gas Gathering, Transmission, and Distribution Piping Systems.”

A. Additional cover or clearances may be required where conditions warrant, as well as to meet any additional requirements contained in right-of-way documents.

B. In instances where it is impractical to provide these minimum cover and clearances, or where damage from external loading must be prevented, the local engineer must ensure pipe is cased or protected by a permanent bridging structure which will handle any anticipated loading as described in 49 CFR 192.327, “Cover.” For these conditions for transmission pressure facilities, refer to Utility Procedure TD-4813P-01, “Gas Transmission Pipelines Reduced Cover Evaluation” for further guidance.

  1. All approvals for reduced cover and clearance must be documented in an approved project management tool. If one approval covers multiple projects, then the approval must be recorded in the project management tool for each individual project.

  2. Refer to Interim Standard 463-3, “Gas Pipe Crossing of State Highways and Freeways” for minimum cover requirements for highway crossings.

  3. Refer to GDS A-70, “Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings” for specifications and illustrations of casings for highways and railroad crossings.

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 13

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

  1. For existing steel pipelines (transmission, distribution main, or service) found to have less than 6 inches radial clearance from metallic structures not associated with the steel pipeline, the following requirements apply:

A. Before backfilling the excavation, the steel pipeline must be protected by doing one of the following, in order of preference:

(1) Relocate steel pipeline to minimum clearances listed in the Clearance Requirements section of this GDS.

(2) Install at least one sheet of Delrin (material code M569264) as close as possible to the metallic structure.

(3) Install Rockguard or Tuff N Nuff between the steel pipeline and the metallic structure per GDS E-35.9, " Coating Protection Systems for Harsh Backfill Environments."

B. If steel pipeline parallels the metallic structure, it is only necessary to protect the pipe within the extent of the original excavation. Create a CAP issue for integrity management to track and prioritize the remaining steel pipeline with reduced clearance.

  1. These cover and clearance requirements are applicable to the installation of new, replaced, or relocated gas facilities. The requirements are not retroactive to existing facilities which have less than the specified cover or clearance, either because they were installed prior to the adoption of applicable governmental regulations or because the cover was reduced after the main or service line was installed. However, where an existing line is found to have cover or clearance less than that specified by 49 CFR Part 192, consult with appropriate gas engineering personnel or supervisor and reference 49 CFR 192.327 for additional cover requirements. Also, some right-of-way and permit documents require the Company to maintain a minimum cover over a pipeline. Where such a requirement exists, it must be complied with.

Cover Requirements

  1. Transmission Facilities

A. Minimum cover for buried gas transmission facilities are specified in Table 1.

Table 1. Minimum cover for gas transmission facilities by Class location

Class Normal Soil Minimum
Cover (Inches)
Consolidated Rock Minimum Cover
(Inches)
1 30 18
2 36 24
3 36 24
4
36 24

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 2 of 13 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. PG&E Internal Information

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

B. Notes on Minimum cover for buried gas transmission facilities:

(1) Where an underground structure prevents the installation of a transmission line with the minimum cover, the transmission line may be installed with less cover per the requirements stated in 49 CFR 192.327, and Utility Procedure TD-4813P-01.

a) Before installing transmission line at less than minimum cover, responsible engineer must document in an approved project management tool the underground structure, the additional protection being used, and the rationalization or any calculations done to show the additional protection was sufficient.

(2) All pipe installed in a navigable river, stream, or harbor must be installed with a minimum cover of 48” in soil or 24” in consolidated rock between the top of the pipe and the underwater natural bottom (as determined by recognized and generally accepted practices).

(3) In areas where grading or erosion are anticipated or farming or other operations which might result in deep plowing could occur, a minimum of 42” of cover must be provided over buried transmission lines. Deep plowing is plowing at depths greater than 8”.

(4) In areas where subsoiling activity is anticipated, a minimum of 48” of cover must be provided. Subsoiling is plowing or turning up the subsoil. If there are indications of any other activity that would adversely affect a pipeline installed with the cover specified or that could reduce the cover in the future, additional cover must be provided as appropriate.

(5) Minimum cover for a transmission line in or crossing drainage ditches of public roads and railroad crossings must be 36”, except where greater depths are required by Interim Standard 463-3.

  1. Gas Distribution Main Facilities

A. Minimum cover for buried gas distribution main facilities are specified in Table 2.

Table 2. Minimum Cover for Gas Distribution Main Facilities by Location

Location Minimum Cover (Inches)
Streets and Roads not designated as State
Highways and Freeways, Private
rights-of-way, Sidewalks, Private Property
24
Crossing of state highways and freeways See GDS A-70
Joint Trench
For all joint trench requirements, see Utility Standard
S5453, “Joint Trench”.

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 13

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

B. Notes on Minimum cover for buried gas distribution main facilities:

(1) Where an underground structure prevents the installation of a main with the minimum cover, the main may be installed with less cover per the requirements stated in 49 CFR 192.327. When installing under these conditions, local engineer to document reason for cover on job drawings.

(2) In areas where grading or erosion are anticipated or farming or other operations which might result in deep plowing could occur, a minimum of 42” of cover must be provided over mains. Deep plowing is plowing at depths greater than 8”. In areas where subsoiling activity is anticipated, a minimum of 48” of cover must be provided. Subsoiling is plowing or turning up the subsoil.

(3) All pipe installed in a navigable river, stream, or harbor must be installed with a minimum cover of 48” in soil or 24” in consolidated rock between the top of the pipe and the underwater natural bottom (as determined by recognized and generally accepted practices).

(4) Sufficient additional cover must be provided for the main to permit 24” of cover for services tapped off the main.

(5) INSERTS: Where an existing main is replaced by insertion, the pipe used as a casing must have a minimum of 24” of cover.

(6) Where a main being replaced by insertion does not have the required cover except where the main is subject to the conditions of Interim Standard 463-3, the local senior engineer must determine whether the existing pipe can provide the additional protection from anticipated external loads, as required by 49 CFR 192.327.

(7) Note that cover requirements in Utility Standard S5453 apply to proposed joint trenches. Installations that are adjacent to a joint trench but are not in the joint trench do not follow joint trench requirements in Utility Standard S5453.

  1. Service Lines

A. Minimum cover for buried gas service lines are specified in Table 3.

Table 3. Minimum cover for Gas Services by Location

Location Minimum Cover (Inches)
Gas Only Trench 24
Joint Trench For minimum cover, see Utility Standard S5453.

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 4 of 13 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. PG&E Internal Information

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

B. Notes on Minimum cover for buried gas service lines:

(1) Where a plastic or steel service is to be installed off an existing main which has 24” of cover or less, the service must be installed so that the section of pipe with less than 24” cover must be kept to a minimum. Cover over the service pipe under this condition must never be less than 18”, unless special protection is provided.

(2) Where an underground structure or other impeding condition prevents the installation of a service with the minimum cover shown in Table 3, then the local engineer may install the service with a minimum cover of 18”. When installing at 18”, local engineer to document reason on job drawings.

(3) At the riser, the section of pipe which has 24” of cover or less must be kept to a minimum. This is accomplished by specifying:

a) IF the ground is level near the gas service riser,

THEN use a standard riser and use dirt or sand to taper-up the slope with the servicing tubing, as close as practical to the riser. Adjusting the trench depth just prior to the riser is preferred over field bending the riser for standard installations.

b) IF the ground slopes downward from the gas service riser,

THEN use a standard riser. The riser can be bent in the field to adjust to the slope.

c) IF the ground slopes upward from the gas service riser,

THEN use a short, prefabricated riser and dig a deeper trench. Taper-up the slope with service tubing. Do not bend the riser to match the slope.

(4) Services Inserts: Where an existing service is replaced by insertion, the pipe used as a casing must have a minimum of 18” of cover. Where a service being replaced by insertion does not have the required cover except where the service is subject to the conditions of Interim Standard 463-3, the local senior engineer must determine whether the existing pipe can provide the additional protection from anticipated external loads, as required by 49 CFR 192.327.

(5) Note that cover requirements in Utility Standard S5453 apply to proposed joint trenches. Installations that are adjacent to a joint trench but are not in the joint trench do not follow joint trench requirements.

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 13

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

  1. Notes on Cover that apply to all facilities

A. Exceptional Cases: Contact the appropriate responsible gas engineering personnel to determine any additional appropriate cover requirements in the following cases:

 - If there are indications of any other activity that would adversely affect a pipeline

installed with the cover specified or that could reduce the cover in the future,

 - Where the additional cover requirement involves a substantial additional cost to the

Company, notify the appropriate responsible gas engineering personnel.

 - Where consolidated rock soil conditions are encountered which make it not feasible

to provide the cover specified above.

B. Mitigations:

 - Warning Tape per GDS L-16, “Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape.”

C. Additional Considerations: Additional cover should be provided where the potential for damage by outside forces is greater than normal. Consideration should be given to the following:

 - Agricultural land where the grade may be changed to permit irrigation or drainage.

 - Other utility crossings. The new gas facilities should be installed under the existing

facilities, unless adequate cover can be provided or casing, bridging, or other protection is used.

 - Locations where erosion due to wind, water, or vehicular activity may affect the

grade. Riprap, paving, or some other means of protection may be used in lieu of additional cover.

 - Street locations where future street work is a possibility.

 - Locations where frost, drought, and heat might affect the pipeline.

Clearance Requirements

  1. Joint Trench Requirements:

A. For joint trenches, clearances are specified in Utility Standard S5453.

B. Crossing Clearances from primary and secondary electric facilities as specified in Utility Standard S5453 Attachment 1 - “Detailed Procedures.” For installations near primary electric lines, provide a minimum radial separation of 12”. For installations near secondary electric lines, provide a minimum radial separation of 6”.

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 6 of 13 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. PG&E Internal Information

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

C. Follow Utility Standard S5453 Exhibit B - “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide” for wet utility clearances.

  1. Gas Transmission Lines:

A. Minimum clearance between transmission lines and any other underground structure must be minimum 12”.

B. Adequate measures are undertaken to prevent contact between the pipeline and the underground structure, such as encasement of the pipeline with concrete, polyethylene or vulcanized elastomer, or the installation of sand-cement bags, concrete pads or opencell polyurethane pads in the space between the pipeline and the underground structure.

C. See Clearance Requirements Section 3.C. below.

D. Clearance Requirements for Buildings

(1) In all cases that allow, install all new transmission lines a minimum horizontal clearance of at least 10 feet from the face (or foundation) of any building. This distance reduces the risk of stresses caused by external building loads due to the transmission line being installed within 10 feet of the face (or foundation) of any building.

a) In cases that do not allow a minimum horizontal clearance of at least 10 feet from the face (or foundation) of any building, the responsible gas engineer must review and approve.

b) When installing a transmission line less than 10 feet from the face of a building, consider the following design options. Note that these are considerations only: Each transmission line that is being installed less than 10 feet from the face of a building must be individually reviewed and approved.

    - Consider installing the pipeline in casing next to the building.

    - Consider posting pipeline markers at either end of the building to warn

excavators of the presence of a pipeline.

    - Consider future Grade 1 leak repair access.

    - Consider stresses caused by proximity of building foundation.

    - Consider length of service off of the main for EFV installation.

    - Ensure warning tape is installed per GDS L-16.

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 13

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

  1. Gas Distribution Mains and Services:

A. For independently installed buried distribution main and service lines (not in a joint trench), minimum clearances are specified in Table 4.

Table 4. Minimum Clearance for Gas Distribution Mains and Service Lines by Facility Type

Facility Minimum Parallel
Clearance
Minimum Crossing
Clearance
Electric primary supply systems 12 inches1 12 inches1
Electrical secondary supply systems and communication
systems
12 inches 6 inches
Government- or utility-owned water or sewer facilities, drain or
leach lines, or agriculture irrigation
3 feet2 6 inches
Diesel or other volatile liquids; propane or other volatile,
heavier-than-air gases
3 feet 6 inches
Steam lines from plastic PG&E gas pipelines 10 feet3 10 feet3
Any other heat source from plastic PG&E gas pipelines Contact responsible engineer Contact responsible engineer
Any other pipe systems or other foreign substructures not
listed above
12 inches 6 inches
  1. The minimum clearances can increase depending on the size of the electrical facility. The appropriate responsible gas engineering personnel must be consulted.
  2. For services only: if the 3-foot parallel clearance cannot be maintained, the clearance can be reduced to 12 inches. If 12 inches of clearance cannot be maintained, the service must be inserted in an existing facility or casing. The house side of the casing must be sealed per GDS A-73, “Casing Insulator and End Seals Selection Chart.”
  3. Refer to GDS A-93, "Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations," if 10 feet cannot be met.

B. Where an underground structure prevents the installation of a distribution main or service line with the minimum clearance shown in Table 4, the responsible engineer may approve installing the distribution main or service line with less clearance.

(1) When installing with less clearance, document reason for less clearance, mitigation methods used to protect the distribution main or service line, and responsible engineer approval in approved project management tool.

C. When installing plastic pipelines by trenchless excavation, design sufficient clearance for installation and maintenance activities from other underground utilities and structures at the time of installation.

(1) Install per Utility Manual TD-4135M, “Horizontal Direction Drilling Manual,” and Utility Manual TD-4170M, “Gas Transmission and Distribution Manual: Plastic Volume.”

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 8 of 13 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. PG&E Internal Information

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

D. The following possible activities should be considered when determining the clearance to be attained between the main being installed and other underground structures.

 - Installation and operation of maintenance and emergency control devices, such as

leak clamps, pressure control fittings, and squeeze-off equipment.

 - Connection of service laterals to both the main and other underground structures.

 - For additional methods of protection in lieu of sufficient clearance, see Section 2.B

above.

E. Each main must be installed with enough clearance from any other underground structure to allow proper maintenance and to protect against damage that might result from proximity to other structures.

F. Install all new distribution mains a minimum horizontal clearance of at least 5 feet from the face (or foundation) of any building.

(1) In cases that do not allow a minimum horizontal clearance of at least 5 feet from the face (or foundation) of any building, the responsible gas engineer must review and approve. When installing a distribution main less than 5 feet from the face of a building, consider the design options listed in Step 2.D above.

G. In addition to meeting the requirements above, each plastic main must be installed with sufficient clearance, or must be insulated, from any source of heat so as to prevent the heat from impairing the serviceability of the pipe.

  1. In all cases that allow, install all new services at a minimum parallel horizontal clearance that is equal to or greater than the buried depth of the service from the face (or foundation) of any building. For example, if the service is at a depth of 24”, then the service must be at least 24” from the face of the foundation when parallel.

  2. Each pipe-type or bottle-type holder must be installed with a minimum clearance from any other holder as prescribed in 49 CFR 192.175(b), “Pipe-type and bottle-type holders.”

  3. Third Party encroachment requirements:

A. A Minimum of 12” undisturbed soil clearance applies to any non-utility facilities installed by a third party encroaching on Company rights-of-way or property. Where proper clearance cannot be attained as specified, other suitable precautions must be taken to protect the pipe, such as the installation of additional insulating material, bridging, or casing.

Records

  1. Retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 13

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

Target Audience

Gas estimating, gas distribution engineering and design, gas construction, gas transmission engineering and design, land department

Definitions

See Utility Standard TD-4125S, " Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure Requirements," for the definitions of transmission line, distribution main, and service line.

Pipeline: A pipeline that transports gas from a common source of supply to a customer meter set.

Acronyms and Abbreviations

CFR: Code of Federal Regulations GDS: Gas Design Standard

Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192, “Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.3, “Definitions”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.175(b), “Pipe-type and bottle-type holders”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.325, “Underground clearance”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.327, “Cover”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.329, “Installation of plastic pipelines by trenchless excavation”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.361, “Service lines: Installation”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.376, “Installation of plastic service lines by trenchless excavation”

California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) General Order (GO) 112-F

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 10 of 13 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. PG&E Internal Information

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

Records and Information Management:

Information or records generated by this procedure must be managed in accordance with the Enterprise Records and Information (ERIM) Policy, Standards and Enterprise Records Retention Schedule (ERRS). Refer to GOV-7101S, “Enterprise Records and Information Management Standard,” and related standards. Management of records includes, but is not limited to:

  • Integrity

  • Storage

  • Retention and Disposition

  • Classification and Protection

References

GDS A-70, “Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings”

GDS E-35.9, “Coating Protection Systems for Harsh Backfill Environments”

GDS L-16, “Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape”

I.S. 463-3, “Gas Pipe Crossing of State Highways and Freeways”

S5453, “Joint Trench”

S55453 Attachment 1, “Detailed Procedures”

S5453 Exhibit B, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide

TD-4813P-01, “Gas Transmission Pipelines Reduced Cover Evaluation”

Appendices

NA

Attachments

NA

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 13

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

Revision Notes

Revision 0d has the following changes:

  1. New step General Information 5. to provide guidance for existing installations on appropriate minimum distance or protection between gas transmission and distribution assets and metallic structures or protection of existing installations when observed (CAPn issue 120472529 CA-1)

  2. Added reference to definitions in TD-4125S.

  3. Removed definitions of gas distribution main and transmission line.

Revision 0c has the following changes:

  1. For transmission clearances, replaced reference to building clearances in distribution section with existing content.

  2. For distribution clearances, replaced reference to Utility Standard S5453 for minimum clearances with Table 4, and moved clearances between plastic pipe and source of heat from existing step to Table 4. Added approval process if minimum clearances not practical, and updated minimum clearances from face (or foundation) of a building.

Revision 0b has the following changes:

  1. Updated reference to CPUC GO 112-F.

  2. Added process for transmission lines to be installed with less cover if it is provided with additional protection to withstand anticipated external loads.

  3. Clarified main and service insert minimum cover requirements and process for if existing pipe used as a casing can provide adequate protection from anticipated external loads.

  4. Added directions for when the standard riser depth does not meet the “at a minimum” requirements (CAPN 115523642).

  5. Clarified that clearances from underground structures and underground utilities in the joint trench standard and apply to independently installed distribution main and services.

  6. Added requirements for plastic pipelines installed by trenchless excavation (ECTS 508688)

  7. To align with the transmission line definition change, plastic pipe requirements apply to transmission lines as well.

Revision 0a has the following changes:

  1. Added section Records.

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 12 of 13 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. PG&E Internal Information

Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines,

A-04 Distribution Mains, and Service Lines

Publication Date: 07/24/2021 Effective Date: 10/01/2021 Rev. 0d

Revision 0 has the following changes:

  1. Converted document from Utility Standard S463-4 to Gas Standard and Specifications (Gas Design Standard).

  2. Converted document from Utility Standard S463-4 to Gas Standard and Specifications (Gas Design Standard).

  3. Converted the term “standard” to “Gas Design Standard” where appropriate. 4. Added items to cover 49 CFR 192.325, 49 CFR 192.327, 49 CFR 192.361.

  4. Clarified cover requirements for Gas Mains and Gas Services.

  5. Added clearance requirements for buildings.

  6. This design standard is part of Change 67.

Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Distribution

Function: Design

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Printed copies of this document might be out-of-date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 13 of 13

This document also appears in the following manual:

Gas Applicant Design Manual

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard illustrates approved methods of standard branch service installation and shows the approved branch service marker.

Methods of Installation

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 1 of 4

Standard Branch Service Installation A-42

Rev. #03 10-09-13

General Information

  1. Branching is at PG&E’s discretion.

2. Install plastic services in accordance with Gas Design Standard A-90, “Plastic Main and Service Installation.”

                                                      - “

3. For stub services, install EMS markers in accordance with Gas Design Standard A 90.2, Locating Wire

Installation for Direct Burial Plastic Mains and Services” and Gas Design Standard M-60, “Approved “Mark and Locate” Instruments, Equipment, Accessories, and Products.”

Notes on Methods of Installations A-D:

  1. Replacement of Existing Branch Services

a. Method A is the preferred approach for the replacement of an existing branch service for configurations that are similar to Method A. The reasons include:

� Permission has been previously obtained at this location, based on the presence of the existing branch service.

� Use of existing branch service locations generally helps reduce costs and minimizes impact to customer.

b. If the customer disagrees with the location of the branch across their property line, then use Method B.

  1. Installation of New Branch Services

a. Method B, C, and D are acceptable options for the design and installation of a new branch service. Branches shown in Method C and D will require a public utility easement (PUE). A PUE is required for any new branch originating inside a property line to serve an adjacent property.

  1. Residential Subdivisions:

a. For new business, if the applicant chooses Method D, then a side-yard PUE will be required. Currently, Method C is most commonly used in subdivisions.

  1. Exceptions to branching across property lines:

a. If the property owner disagrees with the branch location or if an easement cannot be secured from the property owner, then the branch service will need to be installed outside the property line or new services must be installed.

Page 2 of 4 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7

Standard Branch Service Installation A-42

Rev. #03 10-09-13

Branch Service Marker

Option 1. A marker made of 3/16” bronze rod, Airco #27 or similar (Code 159064) is formed into an elliptical ring and brazed closed. Do not heat the valve body. Use wet rags to keep the valve body cool when making the marker.

Option 2. A marker made of #8, #10, or #14 copper wire is formed around the cock and secured with a Burndy Hylink connector, or twisted and forged to a solid connection.

Branch Service Marker. To be installed on each branch service over the service cock as shown. Use Option 1 or 2 as preferred.

Detail A Branch Service Marker

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 3 of 4

Standard Branch Service Installation A-42

Rev. #03 10-09-13

Target Audience

Gas estimating, gas distribution engineering and design, gas construction, land department

Definitions

NA

Acronyms and Abbreviations PL: Property Line PUE: Public Utility Easement

Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment

NA

References

Plastic Main and Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90 Locating Wire Installation for Direct Burial Plastic Mains and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90.2 Approved “Mark and Locate” Instruments, Equipment, Accessories, and Products . . . . . . . . . M-60 Gas Applicant Design Manual

Appendices

NA

Attachments

NA

Revision Notes

Revision 03 has the following changes:

  1. Added Notes for Replacement of Existing Branch Services and for Installation of New Branch Services.

  2. Added Notes for Subdivisions.

  3. Added Exceptions.

  4. Added Method C and D. Reversed order of A and B.

  5. This document is part of Change 66.

Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Distribution Function: Design Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 4 of 4 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

CURB VALVES

A-43.2

Publication Date: 04/15/2020 Effective Date: 07/15/2020 Rev. 5

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard (GDS) provides requirements and installation instructions for service valves installed in curb areas. Curb valves are to be installed in accordance with Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section (§) 192.385, “Manual service line shut-off valve installation.”

1 Installation Guidelines

1.1. Use an excess flow valve (EFV) instead of, or in addition to, a curb valve, when feasible. See GDS A-93.3, “Excess Flow Valves,” and criteria in Step 1.2 for additional information.

1.2. Use a curb valve on every new or replaced service line when any of the following conditions exist:

A. The total meter capacity exceeds 1000 standard cubic feet per hour, and an EFV is not required and not installed.

(1) Valves meeting the above criteria are critical isolation valves. See Attachment 1, “Installation Guidance” for additional guidance and requirements.

B. The service riser valve is not readily accessible or is inside a building, such as where the service shutoff valve is enclosed (e.g., basement, garage, or other type of obstructed location).

C. The service line supplies a building where approximately 100 or more people gather and where the occupancy may be transient. Examples include but are not limited to schools, hospitals, churches, places of incarceration, theaters, and transit centers.

D. The service line cannot be quickly squeezed off due to wall-to-wall paving, concrete, depth of cover, or other surface conditions and an EFV is not required and not installed. This includes known planned depth of cover or other surface conditions. Typically, a service line that is installed in a lawn area with normal soil conditions (e.g., no wall-to-wall paving, concrete, or other obstruction over the service line) may be quickly squeezed off.

1.3. Install curb valve at least 5 feet from any building, as close to the property line and gas main as practical, and in a location that should minimize the chances the valve will be paved over, or access obstructed.

1.4. Install valves using components listed in Table 1.

A. Follow all instructions shown in GDS A-90.2, “Locating Wire Installation for Plastic Mains and Services.”

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 4

Curb Valves A-43.2

Publication Date: 04/15/2020 Effective Date: 07/15/2020 Rev. 5

1.4 (continued)

B. IF the curb valve installed is a critical isolation valve (Step 1.2.A.),

THEN follow additional guidance shown in Attachment 1.

(1) Critical isolation valves must be installed with a valve extension.

Table 1. Components for Curb Valve Installations

Item Material Specifications and Installation Guidance
1 Valve box
and cover
For sidewalk or other areas not normally subjected to traffic, or in paved areas where a
grade change is likely, see GDS K-40, "Plastic Valve Box for 3/4" − 4" Valves.”
1 Valve box
and cover
For traffic areas or where grade adjustability is required, see GDS K-41, “Concrete
Valve Box − Street Installation on 2" to 4" Gas Mains Incl.”
1 Valve box
and cover
Installation of boxes is shown in GDS K-40.1, “Method of Installing Concrete Curb
Boxes in Concrete Sidewalk,” and GDS K-41.1, “Typical Installation of Traffic Valve
Box on 2" to 4" Gas Mains Incl.”
2
Plastic valve For appropriate plastic valve and extension, see GDS F-90, “Polyethylene (PE) Valves.”

1.5. For more detail regarding 1 “Valve box and cover” and 2 “Plastic valve,” see Figure 1.

Figure 1. Curb Valve Installation, Distribution System

1.6. IF a curb valve is installed,

THEN complete the following steps:

A. Complete the gas service record (GSR), per Utility Procedure TD-9500P-14, “Gas Service Records.”

B. Add an electronic marker system (EMS) marker to the curb valve installation location. Refer to GDS M-60, “Approved Locate and Mark Instruments, Equipment, Accessories, and Products.”

C. Map the information.

D. Retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.

Page 2 of 4 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Curb Valves A-43.2

Publication Date: 04/15/2020 Effective Date: 07/15/2020 Rev. 5

Target Audience

Personnel in the following areas: gas distribution engineering, estimating, gas maintenance and construction (M&C), general construction (GC), distribution mapping, and new business inspection personnel. Personnel involved in distribution pipeline connection training and qualification programs.

Definitions

Curb valve Valve installed on a service line, below grade, upstream of the riser valve.

Replaced service line

A gas service line where the fitting that connects the service line to the main is replaced or the piping connected to this fitting is replaced.

Service line A distribution line that transports gas from a common source of supply to an individual customer, to two adjacent or adjoining residential or small commercial customers, or to multiple residential or small commercial customers served through a meter header or manifold. A service line ends at the outlet of the customer meter or at the connection to a customer's piping, whichever is further downstream, or at the connection to customer piping if there is no meter.

Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.181(c)(3), “Distribution line valves”

49 CFR, §Section 192.361(a), “Service lines: Installation”

49 CFR, §192.365(c), “Service lines: Location of valves”

49 CFR, §192.383(a), “Excess flow valve installation”

49 CFR, §192.385(b), “Manual service line shut-off valve installation”

References

Gas Design Standard A-90.2, “Locating Wire Installation for Plastic Mains and Services”

Gas Design Standard A-93.3, “Excess Flow Valves”

Gas Design Standard F-90, “Polyethylene (PE) Valves”

Gas Design Standard K-40, “Plastic Valve Box for 3/4" − 4" Valves”

Gas Design Standard K-40.1, “Method of Installing Concrete Curb Boxes in Concrete Sidewalk”

Gas Design Standard K-41, “Concrete Valve Box − Street Installation on 2" to 4" Gas Mains Incl.”

Gas Design Standard K-41.1, “Typical Installation of Traffic Valve Box on 2" to 4" Gas Mains Incl.”

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 3 of 4

Curb Valves A-43.2

Publication Date: 04/15/2020 Effective Date: 07/15/2020 Rev. 5

References (continued)

Gas Design Standard M-60, “Approved Locate and Mark Instruments, Equipment, Accessories, and Products.”

Utility Procedure TD-9500P-14, “Gas Service Records”

Appendices

NA

Attachments

Attachment 1, “Installation Guidance”

Revision Notes

Revision 5 has the following changes:

  1. Added information, Step 1.1 to encourage additional use of EFVs where ever feasible.

  2. Updated wording in Step 1.2 to allow for reference of other procedures.

  3. Emphasized in Step 1.3 that consideration should be given to maintenance accessibility when choosing curb box location.

  4. Moved additional install guidance to Step 1.4 to add references to GDS A-90.2 and the new Attachment 1.

  5. Added Attachment 1 to clarify Department of Transportation (DOT)-required installation and maintenance guidelines.

  6. Added additional definitions and regulatory commitment information for clarity.

  7. Added distribution mapping personnel to the Target Audience.

Asset Type: Distribution Services

Function: Design

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 4 of 4 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

GAS SERVICE AND MAINS IN PLASTIC CASING

A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard (GDS) describes the use and design of PE 2708 and PVC casing material for use in PG&E’s gas distribution system. PG&E uses PE 2708 and PVC plastic casing material to facilitate the installation of gas mains and services in residential and commercial subdivisions and for select gas main replacement projects. See the manufacturer’s product manuals and catalogs and the GDSs listed in the “References” section below for more information.

This document also appears in the following manuals:

Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)

Gas Applicant Design Manual

General Information

  1. PE 2708 (MDPE) plastic casing material (sleeves and conduit) shall conform to Engineering Material Specification 2503 except as noted in Items 3 and 4 below.

  2. PE 2708 casing material having SDRs not listed in Engineering Material Specification 2503 shall be tested and certified in accordance with ASTM D2513 - 18a.

  3. PE 2708 casing material shall be yellow in color and marked with four orange stripes running the length of the casing. The width of the four orange stripes shall be 1/8″ minimum for 2″ IPS casing, and shall increase proportionally with increases in the casing size. The orange stripes shall be equally spaced around the circumference of the casing.

  4. PE 2708 casing material shall have a printline stating “Natural Gas Sleeve” (instead of “Gas”) running the length of the casing. All other marking information, to include the spacing of printline marks, shall be provided in accordance with the requirements listed in Engineering Material Specification 2503.

  5. PVC plastic casing material (conduit) shall conform to Engineering Material Specification 64.

  6. PVC plastic casing material shall conform to Numbered Document 062288.

  7. PE 2708 casing material is preferred for service conduits and gas main casings. Use company-approved conduit for casing material when PE 2708 casing is not available.

  8. The sizes and wall thickness of PE 2708 and PVC casing material, as shown in Table 1 on

Page 2, are approved for use in the PG&E system. The use of other sizes, SDRs, and grades of PE 2708 and PVC casing material must have the prior approval of engineering personnel.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

Page 1 of 12

Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

General Information (continued)

Table 1. Approved PE 2708 and PVC Casings

Size
(IPS)
Material1 SDR Typical
Construction
Methods
OD
(Inches)
ID
(Inches)
Length2
(Feet)
Code Wall
Thickness
(Inches)
2 PVC3, 4 NA Direct Bury
(Stick)
2.375 2.161 20 016468 0.077
2 PE 2708 11 HDD (Stick)
Direct Bury or
Insert
2.375 1.917 20 021419 0.216
2 PE 2708 11 HDD (Coil) 2.375 1.917 500 021420 0.216
4 PVC3, 4 NA Direct Bury
(Stick)
4.500 4.132 20 016472 0.154
4 PE 2708 13.5 HDD (Stick)
Direct Bury or
Insert
4.500 3.830 40 021421 0.333
4 PE 2708 13.5 HDD (Coil) 4.500 3.830 400 021422 0.333
6 PVC3, 4 NA Direct Bury
(Stick)
6.625 6.111 20 016474 0.227
6 PE 2708 13.5 HDD (Stick)
Direct Bury or
Insert
6.625 5.643 40 021423 0.491
6 PE 2708 13.5 HDD (Coil) 6.625 5.643 400 021424 0.491
8 PE 2708 13.5 Direct Bury or
Insert (Stick)
8.625 7.347 40 021425 0.639
12 PE 27085 13.5 HDD (Stick)
Direct Bury or
Insert
12.750 10.862 40 021426 0.945

1 Minimum order quantities apply. 2 Lengths are for sticks or coils. Smaller lengths are for sticks and larger numbers are for coils. 3 Refer to Numbered Document 062288 for material information and codes for couplings and PVC cement. 4 Do not use HDD to install PVC casings. 5 Size and dimensions not referenced in Engineering Material Specification 2503. Dimensions shall conform to

ASTM D2513 - 18a.

Application

  1. The installation of plastic casing material should not to be used as a substitute for proper job scheduling for new business work.

  2. The installation of PE 2708 or PVC gas main casings shall not be used to circumvent main line extension rules specified in Gas Rule 15. PE 2708 or PVC main casings shall not be installed in any distribution trench, except under limited circumstances as stated in Items 3B and 3C below.

Page 2 of 12 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

PG&E Internal Information

Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

Application (continued)

  1. PE 2708 and PVC casing material may be used to facilitate construction under limited circumstances.

A. PE 2708 or PVC service casings may be installed on new business work under any of the following circumstances:

(1) Paving of the property between the service stub and proposed meter site occurs before service completion.

(2) Completion of the gas service is impractical owing to the likelihood of damage to the service as a result of construction activities.

(3) The Company or applicant installer cannot meet the developer’s construction scheduling requirements to construct the service completion.

Note: The applicant owns the empty service casing until a gas facility has been inserted and pressurized in accordance with Gas Rule 16. The applicant should be informed of the ownership requirements before construction. This includes the obligation to locate and surface mark the facility pursuant to a USA request and the responsibility to maintain serviceability of the casing and EMS devices. Do not install service casings in the public right of way.

B. PE 2708 or PVC gas main casing material may be installed on new business work under either of the following circumstances:

(1) Paving of the street between an existing gas main and proposed gas main extension would occur before the distribution trench is constructed.

(2) Installation of the gas main is impractical owing to the likelihood of damage to the main as a result of construction activities.

C. The installation of PE 2708 and PVC casings is limited to street crossings that do not traverse state highways or railroads. Refer to GDS A-70 for highway and railroad casing requirements.

Note: The applicant owns the empty casing until a gas facility has been inserted and pressurized in accordance with Gas Rule 15. The applicant should be informed of the ownership requirements before construction. This includes the obligation to locate and surface mark the facility pursuant to a USA request and the responsibility to maintain serviceability of the casing and associated appurtenances.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

Page 3 of 12

Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

Application (continued)

D. PE 2708 gas main casing material may be installed on reconstruction work under any of the following circumstances:

(1) The replacement method specified involves cast iron bursting or steel pipe splitting.

(2) The replacement method specifies using HDD to cross streets or thoroughfares other than state highways or railroads. Refer to GDS A-70 for highway and railroad casing requirements.

(3) Paving of the street between an existing gas main and proposed gas main extension occurs before the distribution trench is constructed.

(4) Installation of the gas main is impractical owing to the likelihood of damage to the main as a result of construction activities.

E. PVC gas main casing material may be installed on reconstruction work on a case by case basis.

F. PE 2708 and PVC gas main casing material may not be installed as a casing for PE pipe on bridges. Refer to GDS A-33.1 for PE casing requirements on bridge structures.

G. PE 2708 and PVC gas main casing material may not be installed as a casing for steel mains or services.

H. Gas mains and services shall not be inserted into existing service casings or gas main sleeves that do not meet the requirements of this GDS document unless approved by gas engineering personnel.

I. Service casings and gas main sleeves installed on new business work are nonrefundable items.

J. If another utility or entity encroaches upon a service casing or gas main sleeve on a new business job, the applicant is responsible for providing an alternative trench or removing the other utility’s or entity’s facility before installing the gas main or service. Contact the rates and tariffs personnel for assistance in resolving these matters.

K. If another utility or entity encroaches upon a gas main casing on a reconstruction job, contact the encroaching party and have them remove their facility. Contact Company legal personnel for assistance in these matters.

L. The approval to install service and gas main casings shall be made before construction by gas engineering personnel.

Page 4 of 12 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

PG&E Internal Information

Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

Limitations

  1. Do not install PE 2708 or PVC casing materials where operating temperatures exceed 140°F. Do not install PE 2708 or PVC casing materials within 10′ of steam lines or other sources of heat, or at a distance such that the temperature on the PE 2708 or PVC casing materials could exceed 100°F, unless an insulating barrier is provided to ensure that the temperature of the PE 2708 or PVC casing materials is always below 100°F. Crossings of PE 2708 or PVC casing materials and steam lines are allowed if a thermal insulating barrier is provided and the 100°F temperature limit is maintained. Note: PVC casing material is rated at 194°F. However, the gas carrier pipe is limited to 100°F.

  2. Do not install PE 2708 or PVC casing materials in aboveground locations, or where the material could be exposed to UV radiation. PE 2708 or PVC casing materials do not provide sufficient mechanical protection for aboveground installations.

  3. Contact gas engineering personnel to assess chemical compatibility with PE 2708 or PVC.

  4. PE 2708 or PVC service casings used to facilitate applicant installations are allowed to be installed on private property only. Refer to Gas Rule 16 for ownership requirements and responsibility to furnish materials. PE 2708 or PVC service casings shall be installed at or within the property line and terminate past the paved area with sufficient clearance to insert the gas service (carrier pipe), tie into the existing stub, and set the riser. Follow the requirements of GDS A-90 for the installation of stub services, plastic service completions, and riser installation details.

sponsibility to furnish materials. PE 2708 or PVC service casings shall be installed at or within the property line and terminate past the paved area with sufficient clearance to insert the gas service (carrier pipe), tie into the existing stub, and set the riser. Follow the requirements of GDS A-90 for the installation of stub services, plastic service completions, and riser installation details.

  1. EFVs, couplings, fittings, curb valves, or other appurtenances shall not be installed within a PE 2708 or PVC service conduit. Install EFVs in accordance with the requirements of GDS A-90 and GDS A-93.3.

  2. Service casing shall run in a straight line. Ensure that any sag or over bends are gradual.

  3. Refer to Table 2 on Page 6 for recommended casing sizes by gas carrier pipe size.

  4. The maximum permissible length of a gas main casing is determined by the safe pulling loads. Refer to Chapter 6 of the Horizontal Directional Drilling Manual and GDS A-93.1 for specific guidance in determining allowable loads.

  5. PE 2708 and PVC gas main sleeves and service conduits shall not branch or have elbows, reducers, or other inline fittings (except for electrofusion couplings) connected to it.

  6. Gas main and service casings shall not contain any other facility other than the natural gas carrier pipe and associated locating wire.

  7. When economically feasible, PE 2708 and PVC service casings may be accessed for branch installations. Follow the requirements of Item 2 on Page 8 for accessing service casings.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

Page 5 of 12

Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

Limitations (continued)

Table 2. Casing Selection Guide

Gas Carrier Size (IPS) (Inches) Recommended Casing Size (Inches)
2 4
2 6
3 6
4 8
6 12
8
12

Installation Requirements

  1. When installing the main or service, ensure that proper alignment and adequate support are provided where the pipe enters and leaves so that no strain will be placed on the carrier pipe.

  2. Link seals and split end seals are not required on PE 2708 or PVC casings.

  3. Follow the requirements of GDS A-93.1 for PE 2708 installation in a casing or bore hole.

  4. PE 2708 and PVC casing materials shall be installed in backfill meeting the requirements specified in Exhibit B of Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide.”

  5. All empty PE 2708 and PVC service conduits and gas main sleeves shall be capped before backfilling. Install plastic caps or redwood plugs in accordance with GDS A-81. Install EMS markers on both ends of the gas main sleeve or service conduit in accordance with GDS A-93.1.

  6. If necessary, use a mandrel to prove that all service conduits and gas main sleeves are free and clear of dirt, rocks, and other debris before inserting a gas carrier pipe.

  7. Where several service conduits have been installed in a joint trench, contact the other utilities involved to request that they seal the ends of their conduits adjacent to the building. A request should be made to each of the other utilities involved for their cooperation. Explain the reason for the seal, and the potential hazard of migrating gas.

  8. Provide slack for the carrier pipe so that thermal contraction will not produce tension on the pipe or any fittings or connections.

  9. PE 2708 service conduits and gas main sleeves shall be joined by the heat fusion methods prescribed in Table 7 of GDS A-93.1 or by electrofusion. All PE heat fusions and electrofusion connections shall be made in accordance with appropriate company heat fusion procedures. A current GDS D-34 qualification is not required to connect (join) casing materials.

Page 6 of 12 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

PG&E Internal Information

Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

Installation Requirements (continued)

  1. Install all PVC service casings in accordance with PG&E Numbered Document 062288.

  2. PE 2708 and PVC gas main casings shall be installed to the greatest extent practical at an approximate 90° angle between the existing distribution main and the street or proposed paved area at the point of crossing.

  3. PE 2708 and PVC gas main sleeves shall be installed with a minimum cover as specified in GDS A-93.1, unless it is installed in a joint trench crossing a street (paved) area where the cover requirement is determined by Exhibit B of Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide.” If a gas main sleeve is installed in a joint distribution trench, the gas main sleeve shall be in the same relative location in the distribution trench and shall have the same clearance from other structures that would be required for a direct burial installation.

  4. PE 2708 and PVC service conduit shall be installed with a minimum cover as specified in GDS A-93.1, unless it is installed in a joint service trench where the cover requirement is determined by Exhibit B of Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide.” If a service conduit is installed in a joint service trench, the conduit shall be in the same relative location in the service trench and shall have the same clearance from other structures that would be required for a direct burial installation.

  5. PE 2708 and PVC casings shall not be installed at a depth greater than the depths specified in Table 3 of GDS A-81.

  6. All service conduits and gas main sleeves shall have a locating wire attached per the requirements of GDS A-90.2 or GDS A-90.3, as applicable. The locating wire may terminate either at the casing ends in an ETS or be connected to the locating wires on both ends of the casing.

  7. PE 2708 and PVC service and PE 2708 gas main casings do not need to be leak tested.

  8. PE 2708 and PVC service and PE 2708 gas main casings do not need to have vents installed except as noted in Item 18A below.

  9. After the carrier (service) pipe is installed in the casing, the end of the casing nearest the house or structure being supplied shall be sealed so that any leaking gas cannot migrate through the casing to the building.

A. If the properly sized casing plug is available for PE 2708 casings, as listed in GDS B-90.2, use it for this purpose. Wrap the casing plug with Tac-Tape (Code 507036) or equivalent tape wrap. If a suitable plug is not available, a plug of duct seal at least 1″ long should be used, followed by the Tac-Tape or equivalent. If the other end of the service conduit for the gas line terminates near another building or structure into which gas could migrate, take special precautions to vent the casing to a safe location.

B. PVC service conduit shall be sealed in accordance with Item 18A above.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

Page 7 of 12

Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

Installation Requirements (continued)

  1. A 3″ wide plastic marking tape with the words “Gas Line in Conduit” (Code 373371) shall be installed on PVC service conduit. The marking tape shall be spiral wrapped around the casing for its entire length and held in place with adhesive tape at 10′ intervals. The marking tape shall be wrapped such that the horizontal distance between spirals does not exceed 36″.

  2. The owner of an empty casing shall furnish to PG&E, prior to acceptance of the casing, an as-built drawing (or service record) and a PG&E inspection record indicating that the casing was installed pursuant to this document.

  3. Where a gas service or main is installed in a sleeve or conduit, document the information on the plat sheet and service order, as applicable. Refer to GDS A-93.1 for mapping and records management requirements.

Maintenance and Operations

  1. Gas crews and other employees who could respond to a gas emergency should be made aware that some services and mains have been installed through plastic sleeves and conduits. They should be trained on how to recognize and to squeeze off pipe that has been so installed.

  2. PE 2708 and PVC service conduits and gas main sleeves may be accessed by window cutting using Company-approved tools. Precautions shall be taken to avoid damaging the carrier pipe.

  3. A gas service or main that is installed in a service conduit or gas main sleeve that has been squeezed off must be replaced. GDS A-93.1 provides specific replacement instructions.

  4. Repair all damaged PVC service conduit in accordance with Numbered Document 058548.

  5. If a broken service conduit or any other problems brought about by using a casing delays Company work, bill the applicant for lost time and associated repair or replacement costs before service completion.

Target Audience

Personnel who are involved in designing, procuring, or installing the equipment or material listed in this standard.

Definitions

Casing For the purposes of this gas design standard, a casing is also referred to as a sleeve or conduit. Casings are not pressurized and shall only be used to insert a natural gas carrier pipe.

Page 8 of 12 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

PG&E Internal Information

Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards

Records and Information Management:

Information or records generated by this procedure must be managed in accordance with the Enterprise Records and Information (ERIM) Policy, Standards and Enterprise Records Retention Schedule (ERRS). Refer to GOV-7101S, “Enterprise Records and Information Management Standard,” and related standards. Management of records includes, but is not limited to:

  • Integrity

  • Storage

  • Retention and Disposition

  • Classification and Protection

References

ASTM D638, “Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics”

ASTM D1785-89, “Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120”

ASTM D2513 - 18a, “Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings”

ASTM F512, “Standard Specification for Smooth Wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation”

Engineering Material Specification 64, “Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduits and Fittings”

Engineering Material Specification 2503, “Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Piping”

Gas Design Standard A-33.1, “Plastic Gas Lines on Bridge Structures”

Gas Design Standard A-36, “Design and Construction Requirements – Gas Lines and Related Facilities”

Gas Design Standard A-70, “Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings”

Gas Design Standard A-81, “Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines”

Gas Design Standard A-90, “Plastic Main and Service Installation”

Gas Design Standard A-90.2, “Locating Wire Installation for Direct Burial Plastic Mains and Services”

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

Page 9 of 12

Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

References (continued)

Gas Design Standard A-90.3, “Locating Wire Installation for Inserted Plastic Mains and Services”

Gas Design Standard A-93, “Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations”

Gas Design Standard A-93.1, “Plastic Gas Distribution System Construction and Maintenance”

Gas Design Standard A-93.3, “Excess Flow Valves”

Gas Design Standard B-90, “Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion Fittings”

Gas Design Standard B-90.2, “Plastic System Accessories”

Gas Design Standard D-34, “Qualifications for Joining Plastic Pipe”

Gas Rule 15, “Gas Main Extensions”

Gas Rule 16, “Gas Service Extensions”

Numbered Document 058548, “Repairing Plastic Conduit and Fittings”

Numbered Document 062288, “Underground Conduits”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-31, “Heat Iron Socket Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-33, “Heat Iron Saddle Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical Assist Tool)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-34, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-35, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Hydraulic)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-40, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Coupling)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-41, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Saddle)”

Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench”

Appendices

NA

Attachments

NA

Page 10 of 12 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

PG&E Internal Information

Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

Revision Notes

Revision 2c has the following changes:

  1. Updated reference to ASTM D2513 (now ASTM D2513 - 18a) in the following:
  • General Information 2

  • General Information Table 1, Footnote 5

  • References (Also, replaced title ASTM D2513, “Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings,” [now ASTM D2513 - 18a, “Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings”]).

  1. Removed hyperlinks per current document management process.

  2. In Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment section, added boilerplate language on “Records and Information Management.”

Revision 2b (Publication Date: 05/20/2020, Effective Date: 08/20/2020) has the following changes:

  1. Throughout the entire document, made the following changes:
  • Moved the contents from a PDF format into a Word format.

  • Updated “PE 2406” designation to “PE 2708.”

  • Removed reference to “plastic hotline.”

  • Changed “numbered document” to “gas design standard” or “GDS.”

  • Corrected internal references to pages, tables, items, and steps.

  1. In the “General Information” section, updated the following:
  • Step 7: Changed second sentence to “Use company approved conduit for casing material when PE 2708 casing is not available.”

  • Step 8: Updated “gas transmission and distribution technical services” to “engineering personnel.”

  1. In the “Application” section, the note after Step 3, removed “Note that the service casings may only be installed on private property.”

  2. In the “Limitations” section, updated the following:

  • Step 3: Deleted first sentence. “Do not install PE 2406 or PVC casing materials in subsurface locations that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other volatile organic compounds.”

  • Step 4: Changed “PE 2406 or PVC service casings shall only be installed on private property” to “PE 2708 or PVC service casings used to facilitate applicant installations are allowed to be installed on private property only.”

    • Step 6: Removed first sentence stating “The maximum permissible length of the service casing is 200 ft.”

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

Page 11 of 12

Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing A-75

Publication Date: 03/23/2021 Effective Date: 03/23/2021 Rev. 2c

Revision Notes (continued)

  1. In the “Installation Requirements” section, changed the following:
  • Step 6: Updated “A mandrel shall be used …” to “If necessary, use a mandrel ….”

  • Step 9: Updated second sentence to read “All PE heat fusions and electrofusion connections shall be made in accordance with appropriate company heat fusion procedures.”

  • Step 21: Removed reference to the obsolete Utility Standard D-S0457.

  1. In the “References” section, changed the following:
  • Removed reference for WP4170-06, “Polyethylene Heat Iron Butt Fusion.”

  • Removed reference for WP4170-07, “Polyethylene Electrofusion Coupling and Saddle Connections.”

  • Updated WP4170-04 to TD-4170P-31, “Heat Iron Socket Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe.”

  • Updated WP4170-05 to TD-4170P-33 “Heat Iron Saddle Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical Assist Tool).”

  • Added new reference for TD-4170P-34, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical).”

  • Added new reference for TD-4170P-35, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Hydraulic).”

  • Added new reference for TD-4170P-40, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Coupling).”

  • Added new reference for TD-4170P-41, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Saddle).”

Revision 2a (Publication Date: 05/04/2009; Effective Date: none) has the following changes:

  1. Added section records.

Revision 02 has the following changes:

  1. Updated the “Acronyms” and “References” sections.

  2. Added new Footnote 1 and rearranged the sequence of all footnotes in Table 1 on Page 3.

  3. Expanded note following Item 11A(3) on Page 4.

  4. This document is part of Change 61.

Asset Type: Distribution Mains, Distribution Services

Function: Design, Construction, Maintenance

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 12 of 12 ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

PG&E Internal Information

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

PLUGS AND CAPS FOR NON-PRESSURIZED GAS

PIPELINES

A-81

Publication Date: 11/20/2019 Effective Date: 02/19/2020 Rev. 2

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard (GDS) illustrates, specifies dimensions, and provides code numbers for redwood plugs and plastic end (PE) caps for use on non-pressurized gas pipelines as described in Utility Procedure TD-9500P-16, “Abandonment of Underground Gas Facilities.” It also provides the manufacturer’s part numbers for PE caps.

1 General Information

1.1. Refer to Utility Procedure TD-9500P-16 for approved sealing methods of abandoned pipelines.

1.2. Refer to Table 1 for redwood plug (Figure 1) dimensions and code numbers.

1.3. Refer to Table 2 for PE cap (Figure 2) dimensions and code numbers. Contact the responsible gas engineer for cap sizes without code numbers, for pipe sizes not shown, or when the use of PE caps are at depths greater than those listed in Table 3.

1.4. Do not use PE caps in aboveground locations or where the cap could be exposed to ultraviolet (UV) radiation.

1.5. Do not store PE caps uncovered or expose to UV radiation for extended periods of time.

1.6. If a PE cap is cracked or cut, discard it (do not use).

1.7. When using PE caps, backfill the first 12″ above the cap with sand or other suitable material (refer to GDS A-03, “Gas Trench Design and Construction,” and Engineering Material Specification EMS-4123, “Backfill Sand”).

1.8. To ensure proper installation of PE caps (i.e., full depth of the cap is on the pipe), cut the pipe end squarely and place a mark on the pipe at each of the four quadrants a distance back from the end of the pipe equal to the depth of the cap. When the cap is fully installed, it should reach all four marks.

1.9. Only use PE caps listed in this standard (see Table 2).

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 5

Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines A-81

Publication Date: 11/20/2019 Effective Date: 02/19/2020 Rev. 2

Figure 1. Redwood Plug

Table 1. Dimensions [1] and Code Numbers for Redwood Plugs

Nominal Pipe Size
(NPS)
A B C Code
3/4 1/4 1 4-3/8 204839
3/4‒1-1/4 3/8 1-1/2 5-1/2 209036
1-1/4‒1-1/2 1/2 2 5-1/2 209037
2 1-3/4 2-1/2 4 209038
  1. All dimensions are in inches.

Page 2 of 5 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines A-81

Publication Date: 11/20/2019 Effective Date: 02/19/2020 Rev. 2

Figure 2. PE Cap

Table 2. Dimensions [1] , Part Numbers, and Code Numbers for PE Caps

NPS A B Part Number Code
2 2.378 1.096 RRC-2 021124
3 3.490 1.700 RRC-3 021125
4 4.500 1.725 RRC-4 021126
6 6.640 2.150 RRC-6 021127
8 8.670 2.310 RRC-8 021128
10 10.705 2.768 RRC-10 021130
12 12.679 2.820 RRC-12 021131
16 16.000 2.837 RRC-16 021132
18 18.000 2.845 RRC-18 021133
20 20.000 2.955 RRC-20 021144
22 22.000 2.986 RRC-22
24 24.000 2.995 RRC-24 021139
26 26.000 2.750 RRC-26 021140
  1. All dimensions in inches.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 3 of 5

Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines A-81

Publication Date: 11/20/2019 Effective Date: 02/19/2020 Rev. 2

Table 3. Approved PE Cap Usage by Pipe Size and Depth of Cover

NPS1 Maximum Depth of Cover (to top of pipe)2
**NPS1 ** **Horizontal Placement3 ** **10° to 45° Placement4 ** **45° to 90° Placement5 **
2 10 10 10
3 10 10 10
4 10 10 8
6 10 8 6
8 10 6 5
10 10 5 4
12 9 4 3
16 6 2
18 5
20 5
22 4
24 3
26 2
  1. Measured in inches.

  2. Measured in feet.

  3. The axis of the pipeline is horizontal, angled up not more than 10°, or angled downward.

  4. The axis of the pipeline is angled up more than 10°, but less than 45°.

  5. The axis of the pipeline is angled more than 45°.

Page 4 of 5 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines A-81

Publication Date: 11/20/2019 Effective Date: 02/19/2020 Rev. 2

Target Audience

Personnel who use PE caps or redwood plugs for abandonment of gas facilities.

Definitions

NA

Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment

NA

References

Engineering Material Specification EMS-4123, “Backfill Sand”

GDS A-03, “Gas Trench Design and Construction”

Utility Procedure TD-9500P-16, “Abandonment of Underground Gas Facilities”

Appendices

NA

Attachments

NA

Revision Notes

Revision 2 has the following changes:

  1. Replaced Utility Operations (UO) Standard S4129, “Deactivation of Gas Facilities,” with Utility Procedure TD-9500P-16, “Abandonment of Underground Gas Facilities.”

  2. Removed rows in Table 1 featuring redwood plugs sizes 3″ and bigger.

  3. Simplified tables by adding footnotes and callouts.

  4. Updated document formatting by converting to current template.

Asset Type: Storage, Compression & Processing, Measurement & Control, Transmission Pipe, Distribution Mains, Distribution Services, Customer Connected Equipment, CNG/LNG

Function: Engineering, Construction, Maintenance & Operations, and Emergency Administration

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 5 of 5

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

POLYETHYLENE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

DESIGN

A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard (GDS) provides design requirements for the Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) polyethylene (PE) gas distribution system.

1 General Information

1.1. Connections within the PE system may be made with the following:

A. Heat iron socket and butt fusion (reference GDS B-90, “Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion Fittings”).

B. Heat iron saddle fusion (reference GDS B-90.1, “Plastic System Saddle Fittings”).

C. Electrofusion (reference GDS B-90.3, “Electrofusion Fittings and Tapping Tees”).

Note: Molded butt fusion fittings are made to different specifications than PE pipe (fitting wall thickness may be greater than standard pipe wall thickness), and therefore are incompatible with mechanical fittings.

D. Mechanical fittings (reference GDS B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe,” and GDS B-91.1, “Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings”).

(1) Mechanical fittings are only allowed to be installed on the following PE materials:

       - PE pipe

       - Excess flow valves (EFV), including ½″ molded EFVs

       - Prefabricated gas service risers

       - Prefabricated PE to steel transition fittings

       - Electrofusion tapping tees with pipe pup

       - PE valve with pipe pup

Note: Any connection to Aldyl-A pipe requires only mechanical or electrofusion fittings. Heat iron fusion is not allowed on Aldyl-A pipe.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 17

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

1.2. Evaluate cathodic protection impacts of the design:

- All isolated steel pipe, risers, valves, and fittings within a PE pipe system must be

cathodically protected. Prefabricated risers, metallic components on plastic valves, tapping tees, and metallic bolts on plastic fittings do not need to be protected. Refer to Utility Manual TD-4180M, Gas Transmission and Distribution Manual - Corrosion Control Volume .

1.3. Ensure plastic mains or services are not subjected to temperatures greater than 120º F as described in GDS A-93, “Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations.”

1.4. To deactivate a plastic service see GDS A-93.2, “Deactivation of Plastic Services.”

2 Materials

Only pipeline components listed in the Company’s GDSs, Engineering Material Specifications, Utility Bulletins, and Flash emails are allowed in construction of the gas system.

2.1. Pipe

A. Main Pipe Sizing:

(1) Preferred pipe size is 2″, 4″, 6″, or 8″. PE pipe specifications and design are specified in GDS A-93.

B. Service Pipe Sizing:

(1) New services must be 1″ copper tubing size (CTS) or larger.

(2) For fully replaced services, 1″ CTS is the preferred minimum pipe size. When inserting or splitting, consider ½″ pipe if adequate for service load and EFV sizing.

(3) On applicant installed jobs, the Company may accept previously installed ½″ CTS services and ½″ CTS service stubs installed prior to May 1, 2010, if those services and stubs have the capacity to support the current customer loads, as approved by the local area engineer. See Appendix 1 for the requirements that must be met to approve previously installed applicant installations.

Page 2 of 17 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

2.2. Fittings

A. Heat iron fusion fittings are listed in GDS B-90 and GDS B-90.1.

B. Electrofusion fittings are listed in GDS B-90.3.

C. Approved PE-to-PE mechanical connections are listed in GDS B-90.1, GDS B-91, and GDS B-91.1.

D. Make PE-to-steel, PE-to-copper, or PE-to-cast-iron transition joints using the approved transition fittings shown in:

(1) GDS B-54, “Compression Couplings”

(2) GDS B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe”

(3) GDS, B-91.1, “Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings”

(4) GDS B-91.4, “Cast Iron to Steel Insulated Transition Couplings”

(5) GDS B-91.5, “Cast Iron to Polyethylene Transition Fittings”

2.3. Risers

A. Prefabricated risers are listed in GDS A-91, “Prefabricated Risers.”

2.4. Valves

A. EFVs are listed in GDS A-93.3, “Plastic Excess Flow Valves.”

B. PE valves are listed in GDS F-90, “Polyethylene (PE) Valves.”

C. Do not install metallic valves in a PE system.

2.5. PE Pipe Locating

A. For locating wire requirements see GDS A-90.2, “Locating Wire Installation for Direct Burial Plastic Mains and Services,” and GDS A-90.3, “Locating Wire Installation for Inserted Plastic Mains and Services.”

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 3 of 17

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

3 PE Pipe System Design

3.1. PE Pipe Placement

A. See GDS A-04, “Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines, Distribution Mains, and Service Lines,” for depth of cover and clearance requirements.

(1) Plastic pipe is susceptible to buckling and crushing at specified depths due to the effects of soil stresses. Plastic pipe may not be installed at a depth greater than 10′, unless the installation is evaluated for fill-stress effects and is approved by the appropriate senior gas distribution engineer.

B. The appropriate engineer should consider the following when determining whether to parallel or replace existing main for capacity jobs:

   - Condition/Age of pipe

   - Leak history

   - Leak survey issues with having adjacent pipes

   - Additional relocation work during road reconstruction

   - Cost to transfer services

3.2. Gas Service Placement

A. Gas service is normally installed in a straight line at a right angle to the main, traversing from the main to the meter.

(1) Offsets, diagonal runs, and bends should be avoided wherever possible.

(2) Where avoidable, service should not be installed under driveways or customer-paved areas.

B. When an applicant changes the service-point location (flop lots), take one of the following actions:

(1) For short-side service stubs:

       - Cut off the service stub at the main per GDS A-93.2, and install a

new service.

(2) For long-side service stubs:

       - IF the street is not yet paved,

THEN cut off the service stub at the main per GDS A-93.2, and install a new service.

Page 4 of 17 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

3.2 (continued)

       - IF the street is paved and the walls of the new building are still

opened,

THEN use the existing service-point location and have the applicant re-plumb the houseline to the original service-point location.

       - IF the street is paved and the walls of the new building are closed,

THEN consult the local area engineer to determine the change in service lay-out.

C. The final grade level for a prefabricated riser must be at or below the red burial line indicated on the riser as described in GDS A-91.

3.3. Typical Subdivision Design for PE Pipe

A. Figure 1 shows a typical subdivision design - infill and Figure 2 shows a typical subdivision design - end of system growth.

B. The appropriate senior gas distribution engineer must specify main-line rib sizes and tie-in locations.

C. Do not terminate gas distribution facilities at the end of a development to clear paving or other improvements unless the applicant requests an extension to serve adjacent future development. Terminate these facilities approximately 5′ past the last service, or to the next property line within the project area, unless approved by the appropriate senior gas distribution engineer.

D. To make sharp turns or offsets (smaller than the minimum bend radius in Table 2), install full-opening heat fusion fittings per GDS B-90, or electrofusion fittings per GDS B-90.3.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 5 of 17

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

3.3 (continued)

Figure 1. Typical Subdivision Design – Infill

E. Place the gas facilities in the distribution trench per Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench.” Placement in a public utility easement (PUE) is preferred.

Figure 2. Typical Subdivision Design − End of System Growth

Page 6 of 17 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

3.3 (continued)

F. A subdivision design for end of system growth is shown in Figure 2. Extend the distribution main along the proposed road to provide a back-tie to the proposed development.

3.4. Branch Services

A. Branch services must be designed and installed as outlined in GDS A-42, “Standard Branch Service Installation.”

B. Branching may be used to provide service to no more than two buildings. The meter installations must be located on the adjacent sides of the two buildings served. Where a branch-service installation is justified, a separate location for the gas meter and electric meter is permissible, if necessary.

3.5. Fault Line Crossings

A. Avoid installing mains and services across fault lines whenever possible. Whenever it is necessary to install a main or service across a fault line, consider fault creep when designing the crossing and include appropriate precautions, such as the following:

(1) Installing shut off valves on the main on either side of the crossing.

(2) Minimizing the use of fittings and bends in the vicinity of the crossing.

(3) Using a large−diameter plastic casing to absorb deflection caused by fault

creep.

B. Contact distribution integrity management program (DIMP) personnel for assistance in designing fault line crossings.

4 Construction Methods

4.1. PE Joining Methods

A. The preferred joining methods for each size pipe is shown in Table 1.

Table 1. PE Pipe - Joining Methods

Pipe/Tubing Size or Connection
Type
Preferred Joining Methods1 Alternate Joining Methods2
½″ CTS‒1¼″ Iron Pipe Size (IPS) Electrofusion, Socket Fusion Mechanical
2″ IPS Electrofusion, Socket Fusion, Butt Fusion Mechanical
3″‒8″ IPS Butt Fusion Electrofusion
Saddle

Electrofusion, Heat Iron Saddle
Bolt-On Saddle
  1. Heat iron saddle, socket, and butt fusion are not permitted on Aldyl-A pipe.
  2. Consider for repairs and tie-in connections.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 7 of 17

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

4.1 (continued)

B. A 2″ mechanical stab type fitting may only be used for main or service PE pipeline repair, riser replacement, hot tie-in connections (a connection between a new or replaced section of pipeline and an existing pipeline already pressurized with natural gas), and main or service capping (end cap only).

4.2. Typical Direct-Burial Plastic Main and Service Installation

A. Unless approved by engineering personnel do not install direct-buried plastic pipe under structures subject to settlement that could cause damage to the pipeline, such as: retaining structures, walls or footings, or adjacent to pile.

B. Do not install direct-buried plastic pipe in unpaved areas where substantial wheel or equipment loading may damage the pipe, unless approved by the appropriate senior gas distribution engineer .

C. A warning tape must be installed in direct-burial installations per GDS L-16, “Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape.”

4.3. Directional Changes

A. Changes in pipe direction must be made with elbows, or tee fittings at street intersections (as illustrated in Attachment 1, “Illustration of a Direct Burial Main and Service Installation”). Roping may be used for directional changes at other locations, when necessary.

B. Bends in roped PE pipe must be installed in the trench with a radius greater than the minimum recommended radius (Table 2). All bends must have a radius greater than: 20 times the pipe diameter for SDR 7 and 9, and 25 times the pipe diameter for SDR 10, 11, 11.5 and 13.5.

C. There must be no fusion or mechanical joints within 3′ of any bend.

Table 2. PE Pipe Minimum Bend Radius

Nominal Pipe Size (Inches) Minimum Bend Radius
½ CTS 15
1 CTS 28
1¼ IPS 42
2 IPS 60
3 IPS 84
4 IPS 114
6 IPS 168
8 IPS
216

Page 8 of 17 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

4.3 (continued)

D. Ensure that plastic pipe containing fusions or mechanical joints are installed in a straight alignment. Plastic pipe installations are in straight alignment if the bend radius of the pipe is greater than 150 times the pipe diameter.

E. Figure 3 represents a typical lateral connection. See GDS B-90.1, and GDS B-90.3 for saddle fittings.

Figure 3. Plastic Service Installation

F. For future lateral lines, install a minimum 3′ stub with locating wire attached to an anode as described in GDS A-90.2.

4.4. Mechanical Insertion of PE Main and Service

A. Refer to the documents below for information on specific casing applications and installations:

(1) GDS A-75, “Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing,” for the specific installation requirements for plastic pipe in a plastic casing.

(2) GDS A-33.1, “Plastic Gas Lines on Bridge Structures,” for the specific installation requirements for plastic lines on bridge structures.

(3) GDS A-70, “Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings,” for casing size and other requirements for highway crossings.

B. Do not transfer copper services to a new main or alter copper services (see Utility Standard TD-4801S, “Service Replacement Criteria”).

C. Plastic pipe is approved for inserting into existing mains and services. See GDS A-93.1, “Plastic Gas Distribution System Construction and Maintenance,” for requirements.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 9 of 17

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

4.4 (continued)

D. Ensure that the minimum bend radius of PE pipe listed in Table 2 is not exceeded during insertion into a casing.

E. Provide for future laterals by installing stubs, or opening up the casing at appropriate locations (see Figure 4, and Figure 6).

F. Plug the space between the plastic and the casing pipe (see Figure 5) with casing plugs or cable protectors (see GDS A-70, and GDS A-73, “Casing Insulator and End Seals Selection Chart”), duct seal, or other suitable means not detrimental to PE pipe. See GDS A-75 for the plastic casing/sleeve sealing requirements.

Figure 4. Laterals Off Plastic Main Insert

Figure 5. Tie-In to Steel

Figure 6. Service Connections Off Plastic Main Insert

Page 10 of 17 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

4.5. Riser Insertion

A. Details for service head adapter installation are provided in GDS B-91.

B. Whenever possible, the service riser must be relocated outside of the building (see GDS A-91). This section is intended for use on service renewals where a new service riser cannot be relocated outside of the building. See Figure 7.

C. See Detail B for riser going directly straight into a building.

D. See Detail C for riser coming up from underneath a building.

Note: Detail C (below) is for above grade vent penetrations only. For subsurface vent penetrations consult local engineering.

Figure 7. Typical Plastic Insert into Basement or Meter Box

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 11 of 17

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

4.5 (continued)

E. Where possible, the sleeve should bridge the gap between the service tee and the casing pipe. The plastic pipe must be supported by well compacted sand or fine soil.

F. For typical scenarios of Detail C, the following method can be used to vent service casing:

(1) Casing must be gas tight.

(2) Use minimum ⅜″ outside diameter (OD) stainless steel tubing or minimum ¼″ nominal pipe size (NPS) steel pipe or approved flex hose as a vent pipe.

(3) Extend the vent to the outside of the building AND maintain the same clearances as regulator vent.

(4) Terminate the vent with insect-resistant fitting or screen.

(5) The vent line must be insulated where it passed through a wall, per GDS O-96, “Insulating Metal Gas Lines from Walls."

G. Do not insert plastic pipe into a casing if the casing pipe radius is less than that shown in Table 2.

(1) IF the radius is less than listed in Table 2,

THEN install a new riser with the proper bend radius.

H. Install curb boxes so that external loads are not transmitted to the service. The valve box must not rest on the service pipe or casing.

5 Records

5.1. See GDS A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements,” for leak test stamp requirements.

5.2. Retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.

Target Audience

The following personnel: gas planners, estimators, new business inspectors, gas distribution engineers, maintenance and construction, general construction, materials inspectors, and personnel involved in PE pipe connection training and qualification.

Definitions

NA

Page 12 of 17 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.321, “Installation of plastic pipe”

References

ASTM F1973-08, Standard Specification for Factory Assembled Anodeless Risers and Transition Fittings in Polyethylene (PE) and Polyamide 11 (PA11) and Polyamide 12 (PA12) Fuel Gas Distribution Systems

Gas Design Standard A-04, “Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines, Distribution Mains, and Service Lines”

Gas Design Standard A-15, “Code Numbers for Steel Pipe”

Gas Design Standard A-22, “Stainless Steel Tubing Specification”

Gas Design Standard A-33.1, “Plastic Gas Lines on Bridge Structures”

Gas Design Standard A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements”

Gas Design Standard A-42, “Standard Branch Service Installation”

Gas Design Standard A-44, “Service Connections to Cast Iron Main”

Gas Design Standard A-70, “Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings”

Gas Design Standard A-73, “Casing Insulator and End Seals Selection Chart”

Gas Design Standard A-75, “Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing”

Gas Design Standard A-90, “Plastic Main and Service Installation”

Gas Design Standard A-90.2, “Locating Wire Installation for Direct Burial Plastic Mains and Services”

Gas Design Standard A-90.3, “Locating Wire Installation for Inserted Plastic Mains and Services”

Gas Design Standard A-91, “Prefabricated Risers”

Gas Design Standard A-93, “Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations”

Gas Design Standard A-93.1, “Plastic Gas Distribution System Construction and Maintenance”

Gas Design Standard A-93.2, “Deactivation of Plastic Services”

Gas Design Standard A-93.3, “Plastic Excess Flow Valves” Gas Design Standard B-14, “Standard Threaded Tee”

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 13 of 17

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

References (continued)

Gas Design Standard B-15.1, “Threaded Bushing”

Gas Design Standard B-54, “Compression Couplings”

Gas Design Standard B-62, “Stainless Steel Tube Fittings”

Gas Design Standard B-90, “Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion Fittings”

Gas Design Standard B-90.1, “Plastic System Saddle Fittings”

Gas Design Standard B-90.2, “Polyethylene (PE) System Accessories”

Gas Design Standard B-90.3, “Electrofusion Fittings and Tapping Tees”

Gas Design Standard B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe”

Gas Design Standard B-91.1, “Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings”

Gas Design Standard B-91.4, “Cast Iron to Steel Insulated Transition Couplings”

Gas Design Standard B-91.5, “Cast Iron to Polyethylene Transition Fittings”

Gas Design Standard F-80, “Meter Valves”

Gas Design Standard F-90, “Polyethylene (PE) Valves”

Gas Design Standard J-15, “Gas Meter Locations”

Gas Design Standard J-16, “Gas Meter Room”

Gas Design Standard K-40, “Plastic Valve Box for 3/4” - 4” Valves”

Gas Design Standard L-16, “Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape”

Gas Design Standard O-96, “Insulating Metal Gas Lines from Walls"

Utility Manual TD-4180M, Gas Transmission and Distribution Manual - Corrosion Control Volume.

Utility Procedure TD-4110P-03-F01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, and Gas Quarterly Incident Report”

Utility Procedure TD-4634P-01, “Polyethylene Service Splitting”

Utility Standard GS I.S. 463-4, “Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines, Mains and Service Lines”

Utility Standard S0470, “Design and Construction of Gas Distribution Facilities”

Page 14 of 17 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

References (continued)

Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench”

Utility Standard TD-4801S, “Service Replacement Criteria”

Work Procedure WP4170-02, “Squeezing Polyethylene (PE) pipe”

Appendices

Appendix 1, “Application of New Installation and Design Requirements to Qualified Delayed

” Applicant-Installed Work

Attachments

Attachment 1, “Illustration of a Direct Burial Main and Service Installation”

Revision Notes

Revision 7 has the following changes:

  1. Incorporated content from Utility Bulletin TD-A-93.1B-001, “Mechanical Fittings Connections Use Clarification” to clarify what connections mechanical fittings can be used on.

  2. Added guidance for fully replaced services, 1″ CTS is the preferred minimum pipe size but to consider ½″ pipe when inserting or splitting if adequate for service load and length.

  3. Updated Table 1 to clarify preferred joining methods and alternate joining methods for PE pipe.

  4. Clarified definition of hot tie-in for 2″ stab fittings.

  5. Added guidance on parallel main installations for capacity jobs.

  6. Updated guidance on methods used to vent casings on risers.

  7. Removed old plastic pipe stamp and referenced GDS A-34 for leak test stamp requirements.

  8. Removed table for bend radius in riser casing, as Table 2 will be adequate table to use for that scenario.

Asset Type: Distribution Services

Function: Design, Construction, and Maintenance

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 15 of 17

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

Appendix 1 − Application of New Installation and Design Requirements to Qualified Delayed Applicant-Installed Work Page 1 of 2

This appendix clarifies how to apply various new installation and design requirements to qualified delayed applicant-installed gas projects, where the gas distribution main backbone and service stubs were installed and inspected, but the service completions have not been completed for many months or years.

Note: This does not apply to any “at-risk” projects.

  1. The Company has encountered delayed applicant-installed projects (e.g., subdivisions) where the gas distribution main backbone and service stubs were installed and inspected, but the service completions have not been completed for many months or years, and the system has not been pressurized, energized, and accepted by the Company. These projects must meet the following criteria:

    • Job designs were previously approved by the Company.

    • Contracts were executed by the applicant with the Company for the project.

    • Company has inspected the work to date on the project.

  2. Current installation and design requirements must be applied when a delayed project is actually pressurized and placed in service.

  3. This appendix addresses the following new requirements:

    • Pipe locating requirements

    • One-inch diameter services

    • 1000-foot maximum spacing between Electrolysis Test Stations (ETS)

    • Locating wire gauge requirements for plastic pipe installations

    • Pressure testing

  4. Locating Requirements

A. Applicant installers are required to mark dead end gas mains, and gas service stubs as described in GDS A-90.2, and GDS A-90.3.

  1. One-inch services

A. The Company will accept previously-installed ½″ services, and ½″ service stubs installed prior to May 1, 2010, if those services and stubs have the capacity to support the current customer loads.

Page 16 of 17 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90

Publication Date: 03/18/2020 Effective Date: 06/18/2020 Rev. 7

Appendix 1 − Application of New Installation and Design Requirements to Qualified Delayed Applicant Installed Work Page 2 of 2

B. The gas service stub must be at least 1″ in diameter if any of the following conditions exists:

   - Customer gas load conditions require a larger size gas service. For

example, 1″ EFVs and services are required for service lengths of 122′ or longer, per GDS A-93.3. Note that GDS A-93.3 also directs that EFVs are not to be installed on stub completions

   - Branch services

   - Changed or new customer gas loads that exceed the capacity of the

previously designed service

  1. 1000′ maximum spacing between ETS boxes

    • Applicant installers are required to install ETS boxes every 1000′(or closer) in accordance with GDS A-90.2.
  2. Locating wire gauge requirements for plastic pipe installations

  • The Company will accept 14-gauge locating wire on existing plastic pipe service installations, installed prior to August 1, 2009, as long as the wire passes continuity tests. Applicant installers are not required to replace existing 14-gauge wire (that pass continuity tests) with 10-gauge on plastic services, and service stubs that have already been installed. However, all new plastic services and service stubs must be installed with 10-gauge wire in accordance with GDS A-90.2 and GDS A-90.3.
  1. Pressure Test

    • Main and stubs are required to be tested per GDS A-34.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 17 of 17

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

INSTALLING AND MAINTAINING A

POLYETHYLENE (PE) GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

A-93.1

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard (GDS) provides requirements for installing and maintaining the Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) polyethylene (PE) gas distribution system.

1 General Information

1.1. Joining PE

A. For approved joining methods, approved materials, and qualification requirements, see Appendix A.

B. Standard heat iron fusions are not allowed on Aldyl-A material. Use only electrofusion or mechanical fittings with Aldyl-A material.

C. Mechanical fittings are not allowed on molded butt fusion fittings such as 3-way tees, 90° elbows, 45° elbows, end caps, reducers, branch saddles, PE valves with molded ends, and tapping tees without pipe pups.

(1) Exception: ½ in. excess flow valves (EFVs) have molded ends but are made to pipe tolerances and are compatible with mechanical fittings.

1.2. Transitions from PE to Steel

CAUTION

If the transition joint is exposed to excessive heat when welding, the PE pipe could

become damaged.

A. Take precautions to protect the PE pipe at the point of transition when welding the steel end.

(1) Never shorten the steel portion of a transition fitting. Heat from welding can damage the PE pipe if the steel is cut.

(2) Protect the transition joint from excessive heat. Do not weld, thermite weld, or heat the body of the fitting; only butt welding of the steel end is permitted.

B. During this welding, protect the PE part of the heat-fusion transition fitting from overheating by wrapping the midpoint of the steel part of the fitting with wet cloth to remove heat. Keep the cloth wet during the weld. After completing the weld, leave the wet cloth on the fitting until the steel pipe is cool enough to touch.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 19

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

1.2 (continued)

C. Adequately support the exposed PE pipe adjacent to the transition fitting with well-compacted sand or fine soil.

1.3. Prefabricated Risers

A. For installation of pre-fabricated risers, see GDS A-91, “Prefabricated Risers.”

B. Repair any coating damage on risers in accordance with applicable coating/wrap standards.

1.4. Thermal Expansion

A. When installing PE pipe, ensure that all plastic lines are slack before completing final tie-ins to allow for thermal expansion and contraction.

1.5. Marking New Service Installations

A. All new or replaced services must have the curb (or street) marked indicating the location of the new or replaced service. This marking provides identification and location of the gas service pending the update of the service installation by mapping.

B. IF the local municipalities or agencies have requirements that restrict marking the services,

THEN note the restriction on the gas service record (GSR), per Utility Procedure TD-9500P-14, “Gas Service Records.”

2 Construction Materials

2.1. Pipe

A. Check the production date on the pipe.

(1) Yellow medium density polyethylene (MDPE) pipe more than 3 years old must be scrapped.

2.2. Fittings

A. For approved fittings, see Appendix A.

B. Fittings and risers stored indoors, or stored outdoors and are covered, have an indefinite storage life. Only the PE portion of the riser outside of the riser casing requires a cover. The riser casing itself can be exposed to the elements.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 2 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

3 Construction Methods

3.1. PE Pipe Handling

A. Carefully handle PE pipe to eliminate the possibility of damage during loading, unloading, and storage operations.

(1) During transport, the pipe must be supported to minimize movement and must be located away from any source of heat, such as equipment or vehicle exhaust.

a) Protect pipe against ropes or other securing devices.

b) Do not use chains to secure the pipe.

c) Do not place supplies or other equipment on top of the pipe.

B. String coils of plastic pipe by hand or from a reel.

(1) Coils of 4" diameter pipe and larger must be strung from an approved trailer designed for large-diameter, coiled PE pipe as described in GDS M-17.2, “Large Diameter PE Coil Pipe Trailers and Accessories.”

a) Coils must not be rolled over sharp objects OR pulled over rough surfaces.

b) String straight lengths by lifting the pipe from the truck to the ground.

c) The pipe must be protected from rocks or other abrasive material during this operation and must not be dropped from a height.

WARNING

Considerable force may be required to field bend pipe. If pipe is released during

bending the pipe may spring back forcibly causing bodily injury.

(2) Observe proper safety precautions during field bending of pipe to avoid personnel injury.

(3) Coiled PE pipe is confined with bands at intervals within the coils. As the pipe is uncoiled, take precautions to avoid kinking the pipe. Do not uncoil the pipe faster than the bands can be cut.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 3 of 19

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

3.1 (continued)

CAUTION

Damage to the PE pipe can result from welding (weld or thermite weld) too close

without protecting the pipe with a heat-resisting baffle or wet rags.

C. To minimize the possibility of sparks or hot material coming into contact with the plastic pipe, do not perform welding on pipe immediately adjacent to plastic pipe.

3.2. Static Charge Build-Up in PE Pipe

WARNING

Discharge of static electricity can cause shocks or ignite a gas-air mixture.

A. Control static charge build up in PE Pipe.

(1) Static-electric charges can build up on both the inside and outside surfaces of PE pipe. Localized, static-electric buildup occurs because PE pipe does not readily conduct electricity. See Utility Procedure WP4170-01, “Grounding Polyethylene (PE) Pipe to Control Static Electricity,” for static-grounding procedures and requirements.

3.3. Depth of Cover for Main and Service

A. For depth of cover requirements, see GDS A-04, “Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines, Distribution Mains, and Service Lines.”

3.4. PE Pipe Pressure Control (Squeeze-Off)

A. Squeeze off PE pipe to extend or repair it. PE pipe is flexible and can be squeezed shut without damaging the pipe or reducing its pressure rating, provided the proper tools and procedures are used.

B. For squeeze-off procedures, see Utility Procedure TD-4170P-02, “Squeezing Polyethylene (PE) Pipe.”

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 4 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

3.5. Purging Plastic Mains and Services

A. Remove static-electric charges by grounding the pipe whenever the pipe is purged. Refer to Utility Procedure WP4170-01.

B. Purge plastic mains and services according to the provisions specified in GDS A-38, “Purging Gas Facilities,” as applicable.

C. If the service has an EFV, follow purging instruction in GDS A-93.3, “Excess Flow Valves.”

3.6. Gauging Requirements/Continuity of Service

A. It is Company policy to maintain uninterrupted service to customers during the construction, reconstruction, or maintenance of facilities as described in Distribution & Customer Service (DCS) Standard D-S0454, “Gas Mains, Maintaining Continuity of Service During Construction.”

3.7. Direct Burial

A. Warning tape must be installed in direct-burial installations per GDS L-16, “Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape.”

3.8. Insertion of PE Main and Services in Casing

A. Insert plastic pipe into an existing casing by performing the following steps:

(1) Clean the casing pipe.

(2) Ream the steel casings to protect the plastic insert from the sharp edges of the casing. Where necessary, the entire length of the casing pipe must be reamed.

(3) The leading edge of the plastic pipe or tubing must be sealed during insertion.

(4) Push the plastic pipe through the casing.

(5) Evaluate the first 5 feet (ft) of the plastic pipe for damage as it leaves the casing pipe.

(6) IF there is damage that is caused by the casing pipe,

THEN remove the plastic pipe and repair the pipe as described in Section 4.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 5 of 19

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

3.8 (continued)

B. Support exposed plastic at entry and exit points.

(1) Plug the space between the plastic and the casing pipe (see GDS A-90, “Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design”) with casing plugs or cable protectors, duct seal, or other suitable means not detrimental to PE pipe.

(2) Support any non-cased plastic pipe with backfill.

C. Plastic pipe is approved for double insertion into existing mains and services. This application is approved only if the following conditions are met:

(1) It is not practical or economical to remove the previously inserted pipe.

(2) The installation is made per GDS A-75, “Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing,” or GDS A-90, as applicable, particularly with respect to protecting and supporting the entry and exit points.

(3) The installation is mapped with both the casing size and casing material identified. For example, a ½ in. plastic service inserted into a 1 in. copper pipe that is inserted into a 2 in. steel line is mapped as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1. Mapping of a Double Insert

D. Squeezing of the outer casing is only allowed in the event of an emergency. If the outer casing pipe is squeezed, the casing must be grounded. The PE gas-carrier pipe must be replaced after flow control is no longer needed.

(1) IF the outer casing is metallic (e.g., steel or copper),

THEN ground the casing using a ground cable that is grounded to wet earth.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 6 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

3.8 (continued)

(2) IF the outer casing is PE,

THEN ground the squeezer and casing as if the casing were the carrier pipe in accordance with Utility Procedure WP4170-01.

(3) IF the casing is polyvinylchloride (PVC) or cast iron,

THEN remove the casing before squeezing the carrier pipe or tubing and ground the carrier pipe per Utility Procedure WP4170-01.

(4) Take special precautions when accessing the carrier pipe (window cutting) to avoid damaging it.

See Utility Procedure TD-4610P-01, “Accessing Polyethylene Pipe Within Steel Casing.”

(5) IF the pipe is damaged,

THEN the carrier pipe must be repaired by replacing the damage section of the carrier pipe.

3.9. Boring or Splitting of PE Main and Service

A. PE pipe may be pushed or pulled through a borehole as described in the following:

(1) Utility Manual TD-4135M, Horizontal Directional Drilling Manual

(2) GDS M-70.7, “Pneumatic Piercing Tools”

(3) Utility Procedure TD-4412P-05, “Excavation Procedures for Damage Prevention”

B. During pipe pulling, constantly monitor the pulling force on the pipe and use a pulling head containing a weak-link or mechanical breakaway per GDS M-16.2, “Weak-link and Mechanical Breakaway Connectors Used in Polyethylene Pipe Installation.”

C. During horizontal directional drilling (HDD) operations, the equipment gauge pressure must not be used to determine pulling forces on the pipe.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 7 of 19

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

3.9 (continued)

CAUTION

A weak-link or a mechanical break-away is critical to ensuring that

PE pipe is installed without exceeding its design load.

D. Examine the pipe as it leaves the hole to determine if the speed of the pipe is smooth and continuous. Any delay in the pipe pulling may indicate that the pipe has “hung up” and has possible damage.

E. When installing PE using HDD, minimize variations in the bore to avoid adding drag when pulling back the pipe. Proper back-reaming and mudflow will help reduce the drag on PE when pulling back the pipe.

F. PE services may be replaced per Utility Procedure TD-4634P-02, “Polyethylene Main and Service Line Splitting Using Winch Method.”

G. IF pipelines are installed using technologies where a casing is required, including the following:

(1) HDD

(2) Steel pipe splitting (see GDS A-36.1, “Splitting Steel Pipe”)

(3) Cast-iron pipe bursting,

THEN it is acceptable to insert plastic pipe and tubing into a new plastic casing if the installation of the new plastic casing meets the following requirements:

(1) All the current design requirements per GDS A-75 are satisfied.

(2) The newly installed products are mapped correctly. For example, the bursting of a 4 in. cast-iron main for the placement of a 4 in. plastic main into a 6 in. plastic casing is mapped as follows: 4 - PL (6PL).

3.10. Riser Insert

A. Before installing a service head adapter kit, inspect the PE tubing for damage (see Figure 2).

B. For instructions on service head adapters, see Utility Procedure TD-4170P-52, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Threaded Compression Transitions).”

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 8 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

3.10 (continued)

C. Support the plastic pipe with well-compacted sand or fine soil.

D. For locating wire requirements, see GDS A-90.2, “Locating Wire Installation for Plastic Mains and Services.”

Figure 2. Service Head Adapter

3.11. Unsupported Pipe Spacing

A. Determine the maximum unsupported length of pipe in an excavation using Table 1.

Table 1. Maximum Unsupported Pipe Length

Nominal Size (inches) Maximum (feet)
2 4.9
4 6.5
6 7.9
8 9.1

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 9 of 19

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

3.12. Damage Inspection and Assessment

A. Carefully inspect PE pipe for debris, kinks, gouges, scratches, punctures, and other imperfections after each of the handling operations and before and during installation.

B. IF PE pipe has defects of damages exceeding 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe,

THEN the pipe must be rejected, and existing pipe replaced. Pipe wall thicknesses are listed in GDS A-93, “Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations.”

(1) See Job Aid TD-A-93.1-JA01, “DGP-4 Pit Gauge for Polyethylene (PE) Pipe Wall Loss,” on guidelines for measuring PE pipe loss.

4 PE Pipe Repairs

4.1. General Requirements

A. Make permanent repairs by replacing the damaged segment of plastic pipe.

B. Test segments of plastic pipe that are installed to replace damaged sections of mains and services per GDS A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements.”

(1) Soap test mechanical fittings and couplings during leak testing.

(2) Soap test the repair and squeeze areas after the repair is complete.

C. Make permanent repairs to Nipak and Continental tapping tees with damaged caps by replacing the cap with the approved replacement caps listed in GDS B-90.2, “Polyethylene (PE) System Accessories.”

D. A Performance Pipe 980 Quad Ring may be used to repair the Phillips Driscopipe old style orange resin tee (see Utility Procedure TD-4170P-57, Attachment 1, “Tapping Tee Identification and Component Replacement Kits”). The tee can be identified by the presence of a Quad Ring located at the top of the tapping tower.

E. Do not use mechanical leak repair clamps as a repair method for plastic pipe.

4.2. Repair and Test Requirements for PE Pipe Damaged by Dig-in or Other Causes

A. Visually inspect the plastic pipe upstream and downstream from the area of contact.

B. Replace only enough pipe to make a permanent repair.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 10 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

4.2 (continued)

C. Pressure leak test plastic pipe to be used for repair on site.

D. Leak test the replaced section per GDS A-34.

E. IF the casing is damaged (e.g., broken, bent, or crushed),

THEN replace the plastic carrier pipe 2 ft upstream and downstream of the dig-in location.

4.3. Repairing a Service

A. To determine if a service needs to be repaired or replaced, see Utility Standard TD-4801S, “Service Replacement Criteria.”

B. Pressure test service lines from the point of disconnection to the riser.

C. IF, in a dig-in situation, it appears that the pipe or casing was pulled or moved between the point of impact and the main,

THEN leak test per GDS A-34.

4.4. Plastic Service-Inserted Risers and Prefabricated Risers

A. IF a PE service-inserted riser or prefabricated riser has been subjected to unusually high temperatures (such as being exposed to a house fire or meter fire),

THEN immediately replace either the plastic insert or the entire riser.

CAUTION

Pressure testing the service is not sufficient when a riser has been exposed to high temperatures. The plastic piping inside the riser could be damaged even though the pipe

may hold during a leak test. When the service is used on a long-term basis, it could

eventually rupture.

B. IF a PE service-inserted riser or prefabricated riser casing has been damaged or corroded to where the riser is unable to support itself,

THEN immediately replace either the plastic insert or the entire riser.

C. Electric grounding or bonding wires must not be attached to any part of a PE service-inserted riser, prefabricated riser, or locating wire.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 11 of 19

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

4.5. Dura-Line Pipe Connections

A. Do not pressurize Dura-Line PolyPipe ½ in. copper tubing size (CTS), 1 in. CTS, or 1¼ in. iron pipe size (IPS) piping that was previously installed, but not yet tied-in.

B. Whenever making a new connection to Dura-Line PolyPipe ½ in. CTS, 1in. CTS, or 1¼ in. IPS piping, use only electrofusion or socket fusion. Mechanical fittings are not approved.

(1) If the Dura-Line PolyPipe ½ in. CTS, 1 in. CTS, or 1¼ in. IPS piping was capped with a Continental Constab Cap-n-Go coupling with a verified 100 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) air test, then the existing Cap-n-Go coupling is approved for connection.

4.6. Material Problem Report (MPR)

A. A MPR is required for the following PE connection leaks:

(1) All fusion leaks, regardless of grade.

(2) All leaks found on Dura-Line PolyPipe ½ in. CTS, 1 in. CTS, or 1¼ in. IPS piping, regardless of connection type (fusion or mechanical).

(3) All Grade 1 leaks, regardless of connection type (fusion or mechanical).

(4) All connections (fusion or mechanical) that fail leak test.

B. Submit a MPR by completing the following:

(1) Take a photo of the overall fusion and of the defect of the fusion prior to removal.

(2) Remove the leaking connection by cutting a minimum of 12 in. from both sides of the joint.

(3) Generate a MPR per Utility Procedure SCM-2106P-01, “Material Problem Report Procedure” and attach photos taken in the field.

(4) Tag and carefully package the fitting or connection along with the MPR number and leak notification number.

(5) Ship the package to the following address:

ATTN: MPR Shed 3400 Crow Canyon Road San Ramon, CA 94583

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 12 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

Target Audience

Gas distribution engineers, gas planners, estimators, new business inspectors, maintenance and construction (M&C) crews, materials inspectors, and personnel involved in PE pipe connection training and qualification.

Definitions

NA

Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.321, “Installation of plastic pipe.”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.617, “Investigation of failures.”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.720, “Distribution systems: Leak repair.”

Records and Information Management:

Information or records generated by this procedure must be managed in accordance with the Enterprise Records and Information (ERIM) Policy, Standards and Enterprise Records Retention Schedule (ERRS). Refer to GOV-7101S, “Enterprise Records and Information Management Standard,” and related standards. Management of records includes, but is not limited to:

  • Integrity

  • Storage

  • Retention and Disposition

  • Classification and Protection

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 13 of 19

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

References

Distribution & Customer Service (DCS) Standard D-S0454, “Gas Mains, Maintaining Continuity of Service During Construction”

Engineering Material Specification EMS-4123, “Backfill Sand”

Gas Design Standard A−04, “Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines, Distribution Mains, and Service Lines”

Gas Design Standard A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements”

Gas Design Standard A-36.1, “Splitting Steel Pipe”

Gas Design Standard A-38, “Purging Gas Facilities”

Gas Design Standard A-75, “Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing”

Gas Design Standard A-90, “Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design”

Gas Design Standard A-90.2, “Locating Wire Installation for Plastic Mains and Services”

Gas Design Standard A-91, “Prefabricated Risers”

Gas Design Standard A-93, “Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations”

Gas Design Standard A-93.3, “Excess Flow Valves”

Gas Design Standard B-54, “Compression Couplings”

Gas Design Standard B-90, “Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion Fittings”

Gas Design Standard B-90.1, “Plastic System Saddle Fittings”)

Gas Design Standard B-90.2, “Polyethylene (PE) System Accessories”

Gas Design Standard B-90.3, “Electrofusion Fittings and Tapping Tees”)

Gas Design Standard B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe”

Gas Design Standard B-91.1, “Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings”)

Gas Design Standard D-34, “Qualifications for Joining Polyethylene Pipe”

Gas Design Standard F-90, “Polyethylene (PE) Valves”

Gas Design Standard L-16, “Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape”

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 14 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

References (continued)

Gas Design Standard M-16.2, “Weak-link and Mechanical Breakaway Connectors Used in Polyethylene Pipe Installation”

Gas Design Standard M-17.2, “Large Diameter PE Coil Pipe Trailers and Accessories”

Gas Design Standard M-70.7, “Pneumatic Piercing Tools”

Utility Manual TD-4135M, Horizontal Directional Drilling Manual

Utility Procedure SCM-2106P-01, “Material Problem Report Procedure”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-31, “Heat Iron Socket Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-33, “Heat Iron Saddle Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical Assist Tool)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-34, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-35, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Hydraulic)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-40, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Coupling)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-41, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Saddle)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-42, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Elbow)”Utility Procedure TD-4170P-50, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Stab Outlet)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-51, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Lyall Lycofit)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-52, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Threaded Compression Transitions).”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-53, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Bolt-On Saddle)”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-57, “Polyethylene Tapping Tee Repair Kits.”

Utility Procedure TD-4412P-05, “Excavation Procedures for Damage Prevention”

Utility Procedure TD-4610P-01, “Accessing Polyethylene Pipe Within Steel Casing”

Utility Procedure TD-4634P-02, “Polyethylene Main and Service Line Splitting Using Winch Method”

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 15 of 19

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

References (continued)

Utility Procedure TD-9500P-14, “Gas Service Record”

Utility Procedure WP4170-01, “Grounding Polyethylene (PE) Pipe to Control Static Electricity

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-02, “Squeezing Polyethylene (PE) Pipe”

Utility Standard TD-4801S, “Service Replacement Criteria”

Appendices

Appendix A, “Polyethylene Joining Method and Approved Material References”

Attachments

Job Aid A-93.1-JA01, “DGP-4 Pit Gauge for Polyethylene (PE) Pipe Wall Loss”

Revision Notes

Revision 11 has the following changes:

  1. Removed references to sun shields in Section 1.

  2. Updated squeeze off reference to current procedure Utility Procedure TD-4170P-02.

  3. Removed backfill requirements in Section 3. Content has been incorporated in GDS A-03.

  4. Updated splitting procedure reference to Utility Procedure TD-4634P-02 in Section 3.

  5. Removed the requirement to rinse leak soap with clear water after performing soap test in Section 4.

  6. Removed the following content that was moved to new GDS A-00, “Polyethylene Pipeline Components and Fittings Replacement Criteria”:

  • Step 4.3 - Aldyl-A tee cap

  • Step 4.4 - Plexco Tee Caps

  • Step 4.8 - Kerotest Compression end valves

  1. Added language to clarify the timeline for removal of plastic inserted and pre-fab risers exposed to excessive heat in Section 4.

  2. Added requirements for connections to Dura-Line ½ in. CTS, 1 in. CTS, or 1¼ in. IPS piping in Section 4.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 16 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

Revision Notes (continued)

  1. Moved MPR requirement language to Section 4 and updated for clarity.

  2. Removed qualification suspension and reinstatement information, because it is covered in GDS D-34 and Utility Procedure TD-4008P-03.

  3. Updated reference documents to add:

  • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-02, “Squeezing Polyethylene (PE) Pipe”

  • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-42, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Elbow)”

  • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-51, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Lyall Lycofit)”

  • Utility Procedure TD-4634P-02, “Polyethylene Main and Service Line Splitting Using Winch Method”

  1. Updated Appendix A to add:
  • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-42, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Elbow)”

  • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-51, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Lyall Lycofit)”

Asset Type: Distribution Mains, Distribution Services

Function: Construction, Maintenance

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 17 of 19

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

Appendix A, Polyethylene Joining Method and Approved Material References

Page 1 of 2

Joining Polyethylene (PE)

  1. Only personnel qualified under GDS D-34, “Qualifications for Joining Polyethylene Pipe,” can make connections to plastic gas distribution facilities.

  2. Connections within the PE system must be made with the following:

    • Heat socket fusion and butt fusion (GDS B-90, “Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion Fittings”)

    • Heat saddle fusion (GDS B-90.1, “Plastic System Saddle Fittings”)

    • Electrofusion (GDS B-90.3, “Electrofusion Fittings and Tapping Tees”)

    • Mechanical connection (GDS B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe,” and GDS B-91.1, “Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings”)

  3. Qualified personnel must join PE pipe and fittings per approved heat-iron or electrofusion joining procedures:

    • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-31, “Heat Iron Socket Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe”

    • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-33, “Heat Iron Saddle Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical Assist Tool)”

    • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-34, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical)”

    • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-35, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Hydraulic)”

    • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-40, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Coupling)”

    • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-41, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Saddle)”

    • Utility Procedure TD-4170P-42, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Elbow)”

OR following approved mechanical fitting installation procedures:

- Utility Procedure TD-4170P-50, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene

Pipe (Stab Outlet)”

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 18 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE)

A-93.1 Gas Distribution System

Publication Date: 12/15/2021 Effective Date: 03/01/2022 Rev. 11

Appendix A, Polyethylene Joining Method and Approved Material References

Page 2 of 2

3 (continued)

- Utility Procedure TD-4170P-51, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene

Pipe (Lyall Lycofit)”

- Utility Procedure TD-4170P-52, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene

Pipe (Threaded Compression Transitions)”

- Utility Procedure TD-4170P-53, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene

Pipe (Bolt-On Saddle)”

Construction Materials

  1. Heat Fusion Fittings are listed in GDS B-90 and GDS B-90.1.

  2. Electrofusion Fittings are listed in GDS B-90.3.

  3. PE-to-PE mechanical connections are listed in the following standards:

  • GDS B-90.1

  • GDS B-91

  • GDS B-91.1

  1. Transition fittings are listed in the following standards:
  • GDS B-54, “Compression Couplings”

  • GDS B-91

  • GDS B-91.1

  1. Excess flow valves are listed in GDS A-93.3.

  2. Plastic valves are listed in GDS F-90, “Polyethylene (PE) Valves.”

  3. Prefabricated risers are listed in GDS A-91.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 19 of 19

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

EXCESS FLOW VALVES

A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard (GDS) provides specifications and design information for selecting and installing polyethylene (PE) and steel excess flow valves (EFVs).

1 General Information

1.1. EFVs are manufactured in accordance with American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International) F2138, “Standard Specification for Excess Flow Valves for Natural Gas Service,” and ASTM F1802, “Standard Test Method for Performance Testing of Excess Flow Valves.”

1.2. Only personnel qualified as described in GDS D-34, “Qualifications for Joining Polyethylene Pipe,” may install a plastic EFV.

1.3. Only personnel qualified as described in applicable welding procedures may install a steel EFV.

1.4. See Appendix C for an EFV installation and replacement matrix.

1.5. Exceptions to the guidelines listed in this GDS may be granted by Standards Engineering.

2 Applications for EFVs

2.1. Table 1 describes when EFVs must be installed on new, replaced, repaired, altered, and transferred service lines, except as noted in Step 2.2.

A. In certain scenarios an EFV is required only when there is a new complete service line or new stub service. This does not include repairs, alterations, replacements, or stub completions. It is recommended to install an EFV on existing or replaced services or stub completions, where practical (e.g., installing an EFV would not require upsizing the existing service).

Table 1. Required EFV Scenarios

Service Type Total Connected Load in Standard Cubic Feet
per Hour (scfh)
Service Type 0–1400 1401–5000
Single or branched service to single-family
residence(s)1
EFV required EFV required
Single or branched service to multifamily building(s)1 EFV required EFV required for new service line2
Branched service to single-family residence and
multifamily building1
EFV required EFV required for new service line2
Single service to single commercial meter EFV required EFV required for new service line2
Any other service line (single or branched)

EFV required for new
service line2
EFV required for new service line2
  1. Step 6.2, “Branched Service Lines” describes appropriate EFV locations on branches.
  2. Step 2.1.A provides an explanation on what is a new service line.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 19

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

2.2. An EFV is not required in the following situations:

A. The EFV is not required, per Table 2.

Table 2. EFV Requirements – System Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP)

System MAOP EFV Required
<10 psig No
≥10 psig and ≤60 psig Yes
>60 psig
No

B. The repair or alteration occurs more than 3' from the gas main, except for service stub completions.

C. The repair does not require the service line to be disconnected from the main (e.g., tee cap replacement).

2.3. If an EFV is not required, per Step 2.1 and Step 2.2, AND not installed, a curb valve may be required per GDS A-43.2, “Curb Valves.”

3 EFV Selection Guidelines

3.1. Determine if the service line requires the installation of an EFV, as described in Section 2, “Applications for EFVs,” of this GDS.

3.2. Determine the proposed or existing pipe size and material for the service.

3.3. Determine the load to be served by the EFV. If the EFV is to serve both the mother and branch of a branched service, combine the loads of both meter sets. If the meter badge rating is larger than 1,000 scfh, size the EFV based on meter capacity (not by total connected load). Use either option below:

- **Meter capacity:** Size the EFV based on the maximum continuous capacity of the

meter listed in GDS J-10.1, “Diaphragm Meter Capacities,” or GDS J-20, “Rotary Meter Capacity – At Standard and Elevated Delivery Pressures.” Take metering pressure into account when determining the maximum continuous capacity.

- **Total connected load:** Use the total connected load of all customer appliances. Do

not diversify the load. Include anticipated future load.

3.4. Determine the length of the service, as measured from the main to the meter location. If the EFV is to protect both the mother and branch of a branched service, the distance is measured to the farthest meter.

3.5. Determine the normal operating pressure (NOP) of the distribution system. For non-estimate work (such as emergency leak repair), gauge pressure can be used as NOP.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 2 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

3.6. Select the EFV based on the pipe size and material, load, service length, and design pressure as determined above.

A. Refer to one of the following tables:

(1) Table 3, for plastic EFVs with plain ends

(2) Table 4, for plastic EFVs with socket ends

(3) Table 5, for EFVs incorporated into plastic electrofusion couplings

(4) Table 7, for steel Honeywell Perfection EFVs

B. Where more than one EFV would be suitable for the service, it is recommended to choose the EFV with the highest capacity. There is no minimum load for an EFV to function properly.

3.7. For service lines with more than one size of pipe, select one pipe size (to match the proposed EFV size) for the purpose of EFV selection. Convert the length of pipe of any other size to an equivalent length of pipe of the selected size. See Appendix B.

3.8. When sizing an EFV for an existing service line that will not be replaced (i.e., transferred services, repairs, and high-pressure regulator rebuilds) and has no EFV installed, it is acceptable for the service length to exceed the maximum length for the EFV shown in Table 3, Table 4, Table 5, or Table 7. Choose the EFV that provides the greatest length of protection while providing adequate capacity for the load. In the Notes section of the gas service record, note that “the service line is partially protected.”

3.9. EFV combo valves (curb valve and EFV combined) listed in Table 6 may be used where EFVs and curb valves would be located close to each other or where space constraints prevent them from being installed separately.

3.10. Refer to Appendix A for data on pressure drop across EFVs.

4 Plastic EFV Specifications and Material Codes

4.1. Specifications and material codes for EFV with plain ends are listed in Table 3.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 3 of 19

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

Table 3. EFV Specifications and Material Codes for Plastic Plain End EFVs

Size (in) EFV
Flow
Series
NOP ≥ 10 psig1 NOP ≥ 24 psig2 Material
Code
Part Numbers
Size (in) EFV
Flow
Series
Maximum
Total
Connected
Load
(scfh)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Total
Connected
Load
(scfh)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Honeywell
**Perfection3 **
GasBreaker
Model 51
½ copper
tubing size
(CTS)
400 385 122 395 251 M022896 51910202PGE
½ copper
tubing size
(CTS)
600 595 45 595 107 M022929 51910210PGE
½ copper
tubing size
(CTS)
800 700 28 790 66 M022916 51910222PGE
1 CTS 800 700 1000 790 2355 M022917 51523PGE
1 CTS 1100 990 261 1085 1000 M022918 51758013PGE 20382GB
1 CTS 1800 1620 122 1775 437 M022921 51258PGE 20383GB
1¼ iron
pipe size
(IPS)
2600 2340 560 2340 1697 M022923 51758025PGE 20394GB
1¼ iron
pipe size
(IPS)
5500
4912 125 5000 390 M026962 20395GB
2 IPS 55004 5000 1899 5000 3149 M022928 51950106PGE 20397GB
  1. The values in this column are based on a 10 psig design pressure.
  2. The values in this column are based on a 20 psig design pressure.
  3. Honeywell Perfection EFVs whose part numbers end in PGE are special order for PG&E. The only difference is they come with two metal tags instead of one.
  4. 2-inch IPS 5500 EFVs can be used with two reducers and installed on 1¼ IPS service lines. Appendix B provides examples to perform equivalent length calculations, where the maximum service length for NOP ≥ 10 psig is 307 ft and the maximum service length for NOP ≥ 24 psig is 508 ft.

4.2. Specifications and material codes for EFVs with socket ends are listed in Table 4.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 4 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

Table 4. EFV Specifications and Material Codes for Plastic Socket End EFVs

Size (in) EFV
Flow
Series
NOP ≥ 10 psig1 NOP ≥ 24 psig2 Material
Code
Manufacturer Part Numbers
Size (in) EFV
Flow
Series
Maximum
Total
Connected
Load
(scfh)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Total
Connected
Load
(scfh)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
½ CTS 400 357 177 400 341 M025078 Lyall EFV100-
000002-001
½ CTS 400 385 122 395 251 M020947 Honeywell
Perfection
51716
½ CTS 775 692 30 775 72 M025079 Lyall EFV100-
000011-001
½ CTS 800 700 28 790 66 M020949 Honeywell
Perfection
51713
1 CTS 775 692 1419 775 2916 M025080 Lyall EFVEC-
BB3DT00-004
1 CTS 800 700 1000 790 2355 M020951 Honeywell
Perfection
51715XMD
1 CTS 1200 1072 523 1200 1196 M025081 Lyall EFVED-
BB3DT00-004
1 CTS 1800 1584 104 1800 385 M025082 Lyall EFVEE-
BB3DT12-004
1 CTS 1800 1620 122 1775 437 M020954 Honeywell
Perfection
51745XMD
1¼ IPS 2600 2322 952 2600 1897 M025084 Lyall EFV300-
000002-003
2 IPS 55003 4818 1495 5000 2855 M025086 Lyall EFV300-
000008-002
  1. The values in this column are based on a 10 psig design pressure.
  2. The values in this column are based on a 20 psig design pressure.
  3. 2-inch IPS 5500 EFVs can be used with two reducers and installed on 1¼ IPS service lines. Appendix B provides examples to perform equivalent length calculations, where the maximum service length for NOP ≥ 10 psig is 239 ft and the maximum service length for NOP ≥ 24 psig is 456 ft.

4.3. Specifications and material codes for electrofusion couplings with an incorporated EFV are listed in Table 5.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 5 of 19

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

Table 5. EFV Specifications and Material Codes for Plastic Electrofusion Couplings With Incorporated EFV

Size (in) EFV Flow
Series
NOP ≥ 10 psig1 NOP ≥ 24 psig2 Material
Code
Part Numbers
Size (in) EFV Flow
Series
Maximum
Total
Connected
Load
(scfh)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Total
Connected
Load
(scfh)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
MAXITROL
1 CTS x ½ CTS 500 510 119 571 225 M026396 128240
1 CTS 680 696 2565 779 4873 M026397 128238
1¼ IPS 1700 1789 3101 2003 5854 M026398 128241
2 IPS 4800 4960 2913 5554 5520 M026399 128257
  1. The values in this column are based on a 10 psig design pressure.
  2. The values in this column are based on a 20 psig design pressure.

4.4. Honeywell Perfection combination EFV and curb valve comes with plain pipe pups. Material codes and specifications are listed in Table 6.

Table 6. EFV Specifications and Material Codes for Plastic EFV / Curb Valve Combos With Plain Ends

Size (in) EFV Flow
Series
NOP ≥ 10 psig1 NOP ≥ 24 psig2 Material
Code
Part Numbers
Size (in) EFV Flow
Series
Maximum
Total
Connected
Load
(scfh)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Total
Connected
Load
(scfh)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Honeywell
Perfection
½ CTS 400 385 122 395 251 M038509 45130140PGE
½ CTS 600 595 45 595 107 M038510 45130141PGE
½ CTS 800 700 28 790 66 M038513 45130142PGE
1 CTS 800 700 1000 790 2355 M038514 45130145PGE
1 CTS 1100 990 261 1085 1000 M038529 45130146PGE
1 CTS 1800 1620 122 1775 437 M038530 45130147PGE
  1. The values in this column are based on a 10 psig design pressure.
  2. The values in this column are based on a 20 psig design pressure.

4.5. Extra metal tags may be purchased using material code M020957.

5 Steel EFV Specifications and Material Codes

5.1. Steel service lines requiring an EFV are to be replaced with plastic, if practical, per Utility Standard TD-4801S, “Service Replacement Criteria.” If a plastic replacement is not practical, install a steel EFV per Table 7.

5.2. When welded into a steel service, a steel EFV provides electrical continuity for cathodic protection.

5.3. Steel EFVs are intended for 3/4" steel service lines and have the following specifications:

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 6 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

A. Series 800 and 1100 steel EFVs are contained in a stick of 3/4" NPS Schedule 40 pipe with ends beveled for welding.

B. Series 1800 steel EFV is contained in a stick of 1" NPS Schedule 40 pipe with a 1" × 3/4" reducer at each end.

C. Pipe is Grade B and conforms to ASTM A53, “Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.”

5.4. Steel EFV specifications and material codes are listed in Table 7.

Table 7. EFV Specifications and Material Codes for Steel Weld End EFVs

Size (in.) EFV
Flow
Series
NOP ≥ 10 psig1 NOP ≥ 24 psig2 Material
Code
Part Numbers
Size (in.) EFV
Flow
Series
Maximum
Total
Connected
Load
(scfh)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Total
Connected
Load
(scfh)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Maximum
Service
Length
(ft)
Honeywell
Perfection
3/4 NPS 800 665 329 790 787 M032155 51733011
3/4 NPS 1100 915 92 1085 336 M032168 51733012
3/4 NPS 1800 1495 51 1775 151 M032169 51733013
  1. The values in this column are based on a 10 psig design pressure.
  2. The values in this column are based on a 20 psig design pressure.

6 EFV Installation Locations Guidelines

6.1. New or Fully Replaced Service Lines

A. For new or fully replaced services, install the EFV as close as practical to the gas main.

B. For services fed by farm tap regulator sets, install the plastic EFV approximately 3' from the steel-to-plastic transition fitting downstream of the farm tap regulator set.

(1) Include an electronic marker system (EMS) marker with the EFV to allow for future locating in the event the EFV must be replaced or removed.

(2) See GDS H-10, “High-Pressure Regulator-Type Stations and Farm Tap Regulator Sets.”

6.2. Branched Service Lines

A. For a new or fully replaced mother and branch service installation:

(1) Install one EFV on the mother service as close as practical to the gas main, having designed the EFV with adequate capacity and protected length for both mother and branch. See Figure 1.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 7 of 19

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

Figure 1: Branched Service Line

B. For a new branch being added to an existing single service line that has an existing EFV:

(1) If existing EFV on mother service protects entire length of new branch service and has adequate capacity for both meter sets, leave the existing EFV in place.

(2) If existing EFV on mother service does not protect entire length of new branch service or has inadequate capacity, select a new EFV with adequate capacity to protect both mother and branch, and replace the existing EFV.

a) If this cannot be achieved, run a new single service instead of a branch.

C. For a new branch being added to an existing single service line that does not currently have an EFV:

(1) Select a new EFV with adequate capacity to protect both mother and branch, and install EFV at the main or the nearest non-paved point.

a) If this cannot be achieved, run a new single service instead of a branch.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 8 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

6.3. Stub Completions

A. For an existing stub on a single service or a branched service where neither side has been completed:

(1) When completing an existing stub that is missing an EFV, install the EFV at the nearest non-paved point to the gas main or at the main. See Figure 2 and Figure 3 for EFV locations on common installation scenarios.

Figure 2. EFV Locations on Common Installation Scenarios

B. For an existing stub that is part of a branched service line where the other side has already been completed:

(1) If there is no EFV upstream of the branching point, install an EFV at the non-paved point nearest to the branching point.

(2) If there is an existing EFV upstream of the branching point, ensure it will protect the entire length of the completed service and it has adequate capacity for both meter sets.

(3) See Figure 3 for EFV locations on common branch installation scenarios.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 9 of 19

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

6.3 (continued)

Figure 3. EFV Locations on Common Branch Installation Scenarios

C. To complete a ½" stub service:

(1) Select a ½" EFV per Table 8, and install the EFV at the appropriate location per Figure 2 and Figure 3. Use 1" plastic pipe for the remainder of the service completion.

(2) If a ½" EFV series does not meet the customer loads as described in Table 8, upsize the stub, EFV, and service completion to 1" plastic and size the EFV accordingly.

(3) If the stub completion requires more than 150' of 1" piping, contact standards engineering personnel for guidance or variance options.

Table 8. EFV Selection for ½" Stub Completions

Length of ½"
Stub1 (ft)
Total Connected Load (scfh)

Length of ½"
Stub1 (ft)
0–385 386–595 595–700
NOP <24 psig
0–23 1" or ½" – Honeywell
Perfection 800
1" or ½" – 800 1" or ½" – 800
NOP <24 psig
24–40 ½" – 600 ½" – 600 Replace all with 1"
NOP <24 psig
41–117 ½" – 400 Replace all with 1" Replace all with 1"
NOP ≥24 psig 0–60 1" or ½" – 800 1" or ½" – 800 1" or ½" – 800
NOP ≥24 psig 61–100 ½" – 600 ½" – 600 Replace all with 1"
NOP ≥24 psig 101–245 ½" – 400 Replace all with 1" Replace all with 1"
  1. Stub length is measured from gas main to the end of the longest stub.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 10 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

7 General EFV Installation Instructions

7.1. Do not squeeze an EFV.

7.2. Plastic EFVs with factory-installed pipe pups may be cut on the pup ends as needed for proper installation; however, steel EFVs may not be cut to reduce their length.

7.3. In most cases, an EFV with plain pipe ends may be connected directly to the service tee, but a short piece of pipe may be installed between the service tee and EFV as needed.

7.4. Remove debris from the service line before installing an EFV.

CAUTION

An EFV installed with the flow direction going the wrong way

will flow normally but will not activate.

7.5. When installing the EFV, ensure the directional arrow is in line with the flow of the gas and pointing toward the gas meter.

7.6. Use an appropriate welding procedure when installing a steel EFV. When welding a steel EFV, place a wet rag over the center of the steel EFV stick while it is being welded in place. Keep welding heat away from the center of the EFV stick.

7.7. The EFV is supplied with metal identification tags, while some models are also supplied with an adhesive sticker.

A. Use the supplied nylon tie to install the metal tag.

B. Install the metal tag on the gas service riser at the gas service valve location.

C. Install the adhesive sticker (if supplied) on the pressure regulator.

D. For a branch service line, place a metal tag on the riser for each meter set. Extra metal tags may be purchased using material code M020957. Follow GDS A-42, “Standard Branch Service Installation,” for additional branch marking requirements.

7.8. Install EFVs on new stub service lines as close as possible to the gas main.

A. Leave the metal tag and adhesive sticker (if supplied) in the EFV plastic bag.

B. Wrap the bag around the buried stub.

C. Attach the metal tag on the riser and sticker (if supplied) to the pressure regulator when the service line is completed.

D. Ensure a properly sized EFV is present when performing a stub completion, if required.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 11 of 19

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

7.9. Leak Testing

A. When leak-testing a service line that has an EFV, as required in GDS A-34, “Piping Test Design Requirements,” increase the air pressure slowly. A high flow may cause the EFV to trip. For example, take 15 seconds to pressurize a typical 50"–100" service line of ½" or 1" CTS.

B. Depressurize the service at a slow flow rate to avoid tripping the EFV.

7.10. Purging

A. Gas service lines with an EFV require a slower purge velocity than the normal gas purge procedure described in GDS A-38, “Purging Gas Facilities.”

B. Do not attempt to purge a gas main through a service that has an EFV.

C. Confirm there is an EFV identification tag on the gas service valve, service riser, riser sun shield, or pressure regulator. If the tag is present, an EFV has already been installed on the service.

D. Open the gas service valve very slowly and only partially.

     - If the valve is fully opened, the resulting rapid flow of gas will activate and

trip the EFV.

     - The EFV may activate when purging to atmosphere even if the gas valve

is opened slowly.

     - If the EFV activates during purging, shut off the gas service valve and

wait until the pressure equalizes before attempting to continue purge.

E. When performing service work downstream of the regulator at the meter set, avoid removing a plug or associated piping too quickly because doing so can activate the EFV.

F. If the EFV activates, shut off the service valve and wait for the pressure to equalize. A typical EFV takes approximately 5 minutes to equalize.

8 Customer Notification

8.1. If a customer's service line operates at a pressure of 10 psig or greater throughout the year, PG&E must provide written or electronic notification to the customer of their right to request the installation of an EFV as specified in Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section (§) 192.383, "Excess flow valve installation."

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 12 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

Target Audience

Gas distribution engineering and estimating personnel, maintenance and construction personnel, general construction personnel, contractors, applicant designers, and inspectors.

Definitions

Branch service line A gas service line that is not directly connected to a gas main but has another service line as its source of supply.

Farm tap regulator set A pressure regulator set, including both single and multiple stages of pressure regulation, that controls pressure to a service line.

Nominal operating pressure (NOP)

The operating pressure of a system that is generally the set point of the working regulator.

Total connected load Total demand of all gas appliances operating simultaneously and at full capacity.

Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.381, “Service lines: Excess flow valve performance standards.”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.383, “Excess flow valve installation.”

Records and Information Management:

Information or records generated by this procedure must be managed in accordance with the Enterprise Records and Information (ERIM) Policy, Standards and Enterprise Records Retention Schedule (ERRS). Refer to GOV-7101S, “Enterprise Records and Information Management Standard,” and related standards. Management of records includes, but is not limited to:

  • Integrity

  • Storage

  • Retention and Disposition

  • Classification and Protection

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 13 of 19

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

References

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International) A53, “Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless”

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International) F1802, “Standard Test Method for Performance Testing of Excess Flow Valves”

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International) F2138, “Standard Specification for Excess Flow Valves for Natural Gas Service”

Gas Design Standard A-34, “Piping Test Design Requirements”

Gas Design Standard A-38, “Purging Gas Facilities”

Gas Design Standard A-42, “Standard Branch Service Installation”

Gas Design Standard A-43.2, “Curb Valves”

Gas Design Standard D-34, “Qualifications for Joining Polyethylene Pipe”

Gas Design Standard H-10, “High-Pressure Regulator-Type Stations and Farm Tap Regulator Sets”

Gas Design Standard J-10.1, “Diaphragm Meter Capacities”

Gas Design Standard J-20, “Rotary Meter Capacity – At Standard and Elevated Delivery Pressures”

Utility Standard TD-4801S, “Service Replacement Criteria”

Appendices

Appendix A, “Pressure Drop Across EFVs”

Appendix B, “Calculating Equivalent Lengths of Plastic Pipe”

Appendix C, “EFV Installation and Replacement Matrix”

Attachments

Attachment 1, "Excess Flow Valve (EFV) Calculator"

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 14 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

Revision Notes

Revision 9c has the following changes:

  1. Updated Section 3 as follows:

a. In Step 3.6.A, deleted any mention of Honeywell Perfection EFVs (except in Step 3.6.A.4), GasBreaker, and plastic Lyall. Added “with plain ends,” “with socket ends,” and “incorporated into plastic electrofusion couplings.”

b. Added new step (Step 3.10) to refer to Appendix A.

  1. Completely revised Section 4, including the following:

a. Grouped plastic EFVs by connection type rather than by manufacturer.

b. Added manufacturer's part numbers to the tables.

c. Added three additional GasBreaker EFVs with plain ends.

d. Merged GasBreaker EFVs with plain ends with Honeywell Perfection EFVs with plain ends under one material code for the same size and flow series. Maximum protected length of 1¼″ IPS 2600 and 2 IPS 5000 Honeywells were reduced to align with GasBreaker.

e. Added MAXITROL as a new EFV manufacturer.

  1. Added to Step 7.7 and Step 7.8 that adhesive stickers are not required if not supplied in the bag with the EFV.

  2. Removed option to keep original EFV in place if or when transferring a service to a new main.

  3. Merged cells in Appendix C (row 11, columns 3 and 4).

  4. Added new Attachment 1 (Excel) to assist in sizing the EFVs.

Revision 9b (Publication Date: 04/01/2021; Effective Date: 06/15/2021) has the following changes:

  1. Added GasBreaker Model 51 plastic EFVs now approved for use.

  2. Advanced table numbering throughout for new Table 4.

Revision 9a (Publication Date 03/17/2021, Effective Date 06/15/2021) has the following changes:

  1. Added new Step 2.1.A to clarify what is meant by a new service line in Table 1.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 15 of 19

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

  1. In Table 1, added Step 2.1.A reference to expand on footnote 2.

  2. Revised Step 3.3, adding meter badge rating larger than 1,000 scfh (CAPn 120228322).

  3. Revised Step 3.5, removing converting from NOP to design pressure and adding that non-estimated work can use gauge pressure for NOP.

  4. In Table 3, Table 4, and Table 6, replaced “design pressure” with “NOP” in the header and removed conversion from NOP to design pressure in the footer.

  5. In Table 3 and Table 4, added using 2″ 5500 EFV with two 2″×1¼″ reducers.

  6. Added new Section 8, “Customer Notification.”

Revision 9 (Publication Date: 07/27/2020; Effective Date: 10/27/2020) has the following changes:

  1. Rearranged entire GDS, added new sections for better usability, and incorporated previous attachments into the body of the GDS.

  2. Clarified that there is no minimum load requirement on EFVs.

  3. Updated Table 1 to clarify when EFVs are required.

  4. Updated Table 3, Table 4, Table 5, and Table 6 to incorporate maximum service length of

EFVs at 10 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) and 20 psig design pressure.

  1. Updated load capacity and maximum protected length for Lyall EFVs that have socket fusion ends.

  2. Clarified if multiple EFV models can be used for a certain scenario, it is recommended to choose the EFV with the highest capacity.

  3. Added new guidance for EFV installation location guidelines on branched service lines.

  4. Added new Appendix A.

  5. Added new Appendix B.

  6. Moved “EFV Installation and Replacement Matrix” to new Appendix C.

  7. Developed a “Frequently Asked Questions” (FAQ) document (stored in the Technical Information Library) to address commonly asked EFV questions.

Asset Type: Distribution Services

Function: Design, Construction, Maintenance

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 16 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

Appendix A, Pressure Drop Across EFVs

See Table A-1 for data on maximum pressure drop values across EFVs, and use these values as references, if needed.

Table A-1. Maximum Pressure Drop Values Across EFVs

Plastic EFVs

**Size(in.) ** Type and EFV Flow Series
Maximum Pressure Drop (psig)
½ CTS Perfection 400 0.75
½ CTS Perfection 600 1.90
½ CTS Perfection 800 1.40
½ CTS Lyall 400 0.41
½ CTS Lyall 775 1.53
1 CTS Perfection 800 1.40
1 CTS Perfection 1100 3.00
1 CTS Perfection 1800 3.20
1 CTS Lyall 775 0.76
1 CTS Lyall 1200 1.35
1 CTS Lyall 1800 3.00
1¼ IPS Perfection 2600 4.90
1¼ IPS Lyall 2600 0.56
2 IPS Perfection 5500 0.50
2 IPS Lyall 5500 0.67
Steel EFVs Steel EFVs Steel EFVs
**Size(in.) ** Type and EFV Flow Series Maximum Pressure Drop (psig)
3/4 NPS
Perfection 800 1.40
3/4 NPS
Perfection 1100 3.00
3/4 NPS
Perfection 1800 3.20

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 17 of 19

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

Appendix B, Calculating Equivalent Lengths of Plastic Pipe

For flows governed by the Mueller formula (typically high-pressure gas flow in plastic pipe), a length (L 1 ) of pipe of one internal diameter (D 1 ) can be converted to an equivalent length (L 2 ) of pipe of a second internal diameter (D 2 ) by applying the following formula:

𝑳 = 𝑳 × 𝟐 𝟏

[ 𝑫 [𝑫] [𝟐] 𝟏

]

𝟒.𝟕𝟑𝟗𝟏𝟑

See Table B-1 for the minimum inside diameter (ID) of PE pipe sizes ½” CTS through 2” IPS.

Table B-1. Minimum ID of Plastic Pipe

Nominal Pipe Size (in.) Minimum ID
½ CTS 0.423
1 CTS 0.898
1¼ IPS 1.283
2 IPS
1.885

Example 1: Converting 100' of ½" plastic (PL) to 1" PL

Minimum ID ½" CTS = 0.423";

Minimum ID 1" CTS = 0.898".

In this scenario, 100' of ½" plastic would be equivalent to 100 × (0.898/0.423) [ 4.73913] = 3543.2' of 1" plastic.

Example 2: Converting 100' of 1" PL to ½" PL

Minimum ID 1" CTS = 0.898";

Minimum ID ½" CTS = 0.423"

In this scenario, 100' of 1" plastic would be equivalent to 100 × (0.423/0.898) [ 4.73913] = 2.8' of ½" plastic.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

Page 18 of 19 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Excess Flow Valves A-93.3

Publication Date: 10/20/2021 Effective Date: 01/01/2022 Rev. 9c

Appendix C, EFV Installation and Replacement Matrix

See Table C-1 for EFV installation scenarios and their recommended actions.

Table C-1. EFV Installation and Replacement Matrix

Scenario EFV
Installed
Action Charge To
Customer requests new gas service. A
new single service line is installed.
No Engineered job: Install a new EFV that
has the appropriate capacity.
New
Business
Customer adds load to a single service
line. The service is completely replaced.
Yes Yes Yes
Customer adds load to a single service
line. The service is completely replaced.
No No No
Customer adds load to a single service.
The service line is altered to
accommodate the load.
Yes Check the EFV’s capacity, and replace it
if the capacity is inadequate.
WRO
Customer adds load to a single service.
The service line is altered to
accommodate the load.
No Install a new EFV if the alteration is
within 3' of the service tee/saddle.
WRO
Customer adds load, but no service line
reinforcement work is performed.
Yes Check the EFV’s capacity, and replace it
if the capacity is inadequate1.
New
Business
Customer adds load, but no service line
reinforcement work is performed.
No No EFV installation is required. NA
Customer requests service line to serve
new or existing load. A new service is
branched off an existing service.
Yes Check the EFV’s capacity, and replace it
if the capacity is inadequate.
New
Business
Customer requests service line to serve
new or existing load. A new service is
branched off an existing service.
No Engineered job: Install a new EFV. See
the “EFV Installation Locations
Guidelines” section for details.
New
Business
Customer requests additional meter on
manifold.
Yes Check the EFV’s capacity, and replace it
if the capacity is inadequate.
New
Business
Customer requests additional meter on
manifold.
No No EFV installation is required. NA
Developer does a lot flop. PG&E
deactivates the old stub and installs
new service at the new service point.
Yes Engineered job: Install a new EFV that
has the appropriate capacity.
WRO2
Developer does a lot flop. PG&E
deactivates the old stub and installs
new service at the new service point.
No No No
Customer requests an EFV on an
existing service line.
No Engineered job (service alteration):
Install a new EFV1.
WRO2
The EFV is leaking or has failed. Yes Replace the EFV. Maintenance
The service is replaced as part of a gas
pipeline replacement program (GPRP),
reliability, or capacity job.
Yes Engineered job: Install a new EFV that
has the appropriate capacity.
Capital Job
The service is replaced as part of a gas
pipeline replacement program (GPRP),
reliability, or capacity job.
No No Capital Job
The service is transferred as part of a
GPRP, reliability, or capacity job.
Yes Engineered job: Install a new EFV that
has the appropriate capacity.
Capital Job
The service is transferred as part of a
GPRP, reliability, or capacity job.
No No No
Existing service line is cut off at
property line by PG&E to facilitate work
by customer and is reconnected later.
Yes Same load: Leave current EFV. NA
Existing service line is cut off at
property line by PG&E to facilitate work
by customer and is reconnected later.
Yes Added load: Check EFV capacity, and
replace it if the capacity is inadequate.
WRO2
Existing service line is cut off at
property line by PG&E to facilitate work
by customer and is reconnected later.
No Install EFV at time or reconnection. NA
  1. If the service line size is increased to meet the EFV maximum protected service limitation, bill the applicant under New Business or WRO, as appropriate.
  2. Reimbursable WRO.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 19 of 19

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

MOBILE HOME/MANUFACTURED HOME METER SET

INSTALLATION

J-12.4

Publication Date: 10/17/2018 Effective Date: 10/17/2018 Rev. 1

Purpose and Scope

This Gas Design Standard (GDS) provides application requirements and ordering information and describes the installation of gas meter sets for mobile homes or manufactured homes in a mobile home park.

General Information

  1. Install gas meter sets supplying mobile homes and manufactured homes in accordance with this GDS.

  2. A flexible connector meeting the requirements of American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z21.75/CSA 6.27 and approved by the California Department of Housing and Community Development (HDC) for outdoor use must be provided and installed by the customer to connect the customer’s mobile home or manufactured home piping to the gas meter set outlet. Approved connectors are identified with the ANSI/Canadian Standards Association (CSA) specification number on an attached label or tag, or permanently stamped on an end connection fitting.

  3. Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) piping in the meter set terminates with the 3/4″ fitting on the meter outlet as shown in Figure 1.

  4. Install the meter using a meter stake shown in Figure 1.

Specific Information

  1. A meter stake:

A. Can only be installed in locations identified in Figure 2.

B. Is 2″ x 2″ x 3/16″ angle iron. 48″ long hot dip galvanize with grey polyester powder overcoat on top 22″ shown in Figure 3.

C. Must be installed plumb and level in the ground up to the bury line identified on the stake between 28″ and 32″ deep.

D. Must be installed in well compacted soil or in concrete as shown in Figure 1.

  1. Meter set outlet piping must be attached using insulated U-bolt and insulating pad that is provided with the meter stake. Piping can be attached per Option A or B as shown in Figure 4.

  2. For a detailed list of components see Table 1.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2018 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 5

Mobile Home/Manufactured Home Meter Set Installation J-12.4

Publication Date: 10/17/2018 Effective Date: 10/17/2018 Rev. 1

Figure 1. Mobile Home Diaphragm Meter Set – Profile View

Page 2 of 5 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2018 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Mobile Home/Manufactured Home Meter Set Installation J-12.4

Publication Date: 10/17/2018 Effective Date: 10/17/2018 Rev. 1

Figure 2. Mobile Home Diaphragm Meter Set – Plan View

Figure 3. Meter Stake

Figure 4. U-Bolt Detail

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2018 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 3 of 5

Mobile Home/Manufactured Home Meter Set Installation J-12.4

Publication Date: 10/17/2018 Effective Date: 10/17/2018 Rev. 1

Table 1. Material List

Item Description Quantity Code GDS
1
Gas Meter Connection Kit 1
M040945 B-16
2~~1 ~~
Single Meter Loop 11
M040140 B-16
2A~~1 ~~ Domestic Regulator
11 Various Various
3 Gas Meter with SmartMeter Module2 1 M231932 J-94
4 Elbow, standard NPT, 3/4″ Varies,
build to suit
M020250 B-12
5 Swivel, male straight, #1A x 3/4″ 1 M041426 J-50
6 Nut, swivel, #1A 1 M040099 J-50
7 Washer, swivel, #1A 2 M040160 J-50.2
8 Tee, standard NPT, 3/4″ 1 M020902 B-14
9 Plug, standard NPT, 3/4″ 1 M020774 B-10.1
10 Meter stake 1 M234167 J-12.4
11
Nipple, standard NPT, 3/4″ x length to suit
Varies,
build to suit

B-13

1 Items 2 and 2A are only used when an insulated Jomar riser valve is not installed on the riser. 2 Substitute meter with standard index code number 230053 for non-SmartMeter opt out customers.

Target Audience

All personnel who install meter sets (and their supervisors), including field services; gas maintenance and construction (M&C); general construction (GC); gas pipeline operations and maintenance (GPOM); gas estimators; distribution engineers; gas measurement and regulation engineering.

Definitions

NA

Acronyms and Abbreviations

MSA: Meter Set Assembly

Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment

NA

Page 4 of 5 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2018 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

Mobile Home/Manufactured Home Meter Set Installation J-12.4

Publication Date: 10/17/2018 Effective Date: 10/17/2018 Rev. 1

References

Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook), Section 2, “Gas Service”

GDS B-10.1, “Standard Pipe Plugs”

GDS B-12, “Standard 90° Threaded Elbows”

GDS B-13, “Standard Threaded Pipe Nipple”

GDS B-14, “Standard Threaded Tee”

GDS B-16, “Gas Meter Connection Kits for Residential (#1A Connection Size) Diaphragm Meters”

GDS J-50, “Meter Swivels and Swivel Nuts”

GDS J-50.2, “Gas Meter Swivel Washers”

GDS J-94, “Gas Meter Selection Guide for New Meter Sets”

Appendices

NA

Attachments

NA

Revision Notes

Revision 1 has the following changes:

  1. This change removes the concrete block used for meter support and now requires the use of a meter stake.

  2. Material list has been updated based on meter stake design.

Asset Type: Measurement & Control, Distribution Services, Customer Connected Equipment. Function: Design and Construction Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2018 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 5 of 5

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

GAS METER LOCATIONS

J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard (GDS) outlines the requirements for complying with applicable federal and state codes when installing gas meter sets for residential and commercial premises.

This document includes definitions, references, and standard designs that support compliance with regulations and codes for gas meter set locations. Local jurisdictions may have adopted codes and ordinances relating to customer facilities that could require consideration when designing gas meter sets. Compliance with applicable federal and state codes is mandatory for Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) facilities. Compliance with local codes is mandatory for customer facilities.

General Information

  1. Applicability

A. Per Gas Rule 16, “Gas Service Extensions,” all gas meter set equipment must be located at a protected location on applicant’s premises as approved by the Company. PG&E is responsible for the design and final approval of the location for metering facilities. The preferred meter set location is outside and adjacent to the building being served. Customers must submit the requested meter set location with the application early in the planning stage to avoid delays. Typically, PG&E provides only one meter set for each dwelling unit or commercial unit and one service lateral to each building.

B. New or customer-requested relocated meter sets must be installed in compliance with current regulations, standards, and codes.

C. Existing meter sets may be repaired, altered, or rebuilt in their existing location provided the clearance requirements meet or are brought up to current standards.

D. These requirements do not mandate retroactive compliance of existing meter sets unless unsafe conditions exist as determined by the Company. If the existing service line or metering equipment is altered, then compliance with this gas design standard is required.

  1. Applicable Regulations and Codes

Listed below are the pertinent Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Part 192— Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards sections (§), that apply to gas meter set locations.

  • 49 CFR § 192.353, “Customer meters and regulators: Location”

  • 49 CFR § 192.355, “Customer meters and regulators: Protection from damage”

  • 49 CFR § 192.357, “Customer meters and regulators: Installation”

  • 49 CFR § 192.363, “Service lines: Valve requirements”

  • 49 CFR § 192.365, “Service lines: Location of valves”

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

Note: All meter locations are subject to PG&E approval and review.

  1. General Requirements

The following requirements comply with the regulations and codes.

A. General Meter Set Requirements

(1) Approved Meter Locations, listed in order of preference.

(a) Meter set located outside a building.

(b) Meter set located outside in an alcove or enclosure.

(c) Meter set located in a breezeway.

(d) Meter set located in a cabinet.

Note: PG&E considers approving Items (e) and (f) below only after Items (a) through (d) have been determined not possible or practical.

(e) Meter set located in a buried vault, pit, or box (not permitted for new or remodeled services).

(f) Meter set (excluding service shutoff valve) located inside a building in a gas meter room. See GDS J-16, “Gas Meter Room,” for specific room requirements.

(2) Prohibited Meter Locations

For new or remodeled buildings, do not locate gas meter sets in the following

areas:

(a) In curb meter boxes or vaults for new services.

(b) In living quarters, closets, toilet rooms, or bathrooms.

(c) In garages without properly vented meter cabinets.

(d) Behind fences that applicants can lock.

(e) On steep slopes.

(f) In areas where landscaping restricts access.

(g) Within engine, boiler, heater, or electrical-equipment rooms.

(h) Under display platforms or show windows in commercial buildings. This includes any permanent, elevated display floors or platforms associated with the window where the purpose of the window is to present a display to the public.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

3.A. (continued)

(i) In contact with the soil, in a depression below general ground level, or where potentially corrosive materials are likely to contact the meter set.

(j) In a poorly-ventilated tradesman alley (passageway in a building, with a door at one end).

(k) In crawl spaces under buildings or decks.

(l) Near a driveway, drive-through, or other traveled area. Gas meters located in traveled ways must be adequately protected from passing vehicles, as described in GDS J-95, “Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement,” Appendix C.

(m) In a metallic cabinet, room, or location that blocks or interferes with the radio frequency signal transmissions that are necessary for PG&E to operate its SmartMeter™ Advanced Meter Reading system.

(n) In any location that does not provide the required working space. The height dimension is 6 feet, 6 inches of clearance above ground and the depth dimension is 3 feet of clearance in front of the gas meter.

(3) SmartMeter Module Location Requirements

Specific SmartMeter module location requirements are detailed in Utility Manual TD-7001M, Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook), Section 2.4.F.12.

(4) Gas Meter Working Space

(a) Gas meter locations must be 78 inches high and allow for a minimum clear and level working space of 3 feet in front of the meter; width depends on meter size and the number of meters. Grade slope should be less than 2%. See Figure 1 and Figure 2. For a large meter set or multi-meter manifold, this working space extends 12 inches beyond the edge of the Company meter set equipment.

(b) Figure 1 represents a typical gas meter kit with 0 through 350 scfh at 7 inches WC or 0 through 600 scfh at 2 pounds per square inch gauge (psig). Reverse sets are not allowed. The houseline must be to the right of the gas service riser.

(c) Figure 2 represents a typical gas meter kit with 351 through 1400 scfh at 7 inches WC or 601 through 2400 scfh at 2 psig. Do not use reverse sets for 400 through 600 class meters (i.e., 400, 425, and 630). The houseline must be to the right of the gas service riser.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 22

3.A. (continued)

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

Figure 1. Typical Residential Gas Meter Connection

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 22

3.A. (continued)

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

Figure 2. Typical Gas Meter Connection for 400 to 1000 Class Meter

(5) Meter Set Location Relative to Service Line

The meter set is typically located so that the service line is the minimum possible length, measured in a straight line perpendicular to the main. The Company may consider an alternate route if it results in significantly lower construction costs or facilitates construction.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

3.A. (continued)

(6) Meter and Regulator Accessibility

Each meter set must be in a readily accessible location for reading, maintenance, inspection and replacement. It must be protected from corrosion and other damage that may be anticipated including vehicular damage. Large meter sets or multimeter manifolds require adequate space for installation and maintenance and require drive-up access for the Company’s service trucks.

(7) Service Shut-Off Valve Locations

(a) Each service line must have a shut-off valve in a readily accessible location when:

      - Services or risers are newly installed, relocated, or completely replaced

OR

      - Work is performed under the Meter Protection Program

(b) The location for the service shut-off valve is above ground on an outside riser in a readily accessible location.

(c) Service risers must not be installed inside buildings or meter rooms, except where special circumstances prevent outside installation as determined by the Company in accordance with GDS J-16. If the riser is located inside a building or an outside riser valve is not readily accessible, then a curb valve must be installed in a location that is readily accessible.

(8) Meter Set Separated from Service Shut-Off Valve

If the meter set (or meter and regulator assembly) is located remotely from the service shut-off valve, then install an additional service shut-off valve at the meter set when performing new installations, replacing the meter, or altering or replacing the service. The additional valve facilitates maintenance and operation procedures.

(9) Meter Set Clearance Requirements

The meter set and service regulator vents must terminate in a safe outside location that complies with the following criteria.

(a) The regulator vent must not terminate near any sources of ignition or openings into the building. The riser must be a minimum distance of 36 inches from sources of ignition and openings into the building, and this clearance area extends 10 feet above and 36 inches below the regulator vent termination. (See Figure 3.) For a large meter set or multi-meter manifold, this clearance requirement extends 12 inches beyond the last service tee or end of the manifold, whichever is greater, Company meter set equipment, 10 feet above the highest regulator vent, and 36 inches below the lowest regulator vent.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 22

3.A. (continued)

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

Figure 3. Gas Meter Set Separations

(b) The regulator vent must not be within any location under building overhangs, where the overhang can direct gas into a building opening or any electrical devices under the overhang. Overhangs are acceptable if they direct gas away from a building (i.e., are sloped up and away from the building and cannot trap gas).

(c) The riser must be a minimum lateral distance of 8 feet from a forced air intake into the building. (See Figure 4.) For a large meter set or multi-meter manifold, this clearance requirement extends 8 feet beyond the edge of the Company meter set equipment. The 8-foot distance extends around corners of the building.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

3.A. (continued)

Figure 4. Requirements for Gas Regulator Set Clearance from Sources of Ignition

(d) The meter set must not be within any location that is under display platforms or show windows in non-residential buildings, including any permanent, elevated, display floors or platforms associated with the window.

(10) Corrosion Protection

Each meter set and service line must be installed to provide protection from corrosion and anticipated damage. The service and meter set location must allow inspection for operation and maintenance activities.

(11) Meter Sets in Contact with Soil

Meter sets must not be installed in contact with the soil, in a depression below general ground level (curb meters are an exception), or where potentially corrosive materials are likely to contact the meter set. The potential for accidental electrical shunting of the insulating fitting must be minimized.

(12) Buried Lines Downstream of the Shut-Off Valve

On an exception basis, as approved by the company, if it is necessary to bury any segment of the metering facility downstream of the service shutoff valve such locations must have adequate corrosion protection.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

3.A. (continued)

(13) Service Risers

(a) Company-approved prefabricated, non-corrodible risers must be used. A minimum 3-inch casing will be required for the placement of the gas riser in areas that will be paved with concrete or asphalt. Gas service risers must not be directly embedded in concrete or asphalt pavements.

(b) If it is necessary to pave (concrete or asphalt) before installing the gas service, refer to GDS A-75, “Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing.”

(14) Overpressure Protection

When any overpressure protection devices are required in addition to the final service regulator, refer to GDS H-15, “Design Requirements for Company-Owned Gas Regulating Systems Serving Customers.”

(15) Potential for Damage from Vehicles

Meter sets should be installed in locations where they are not exposed to damage from vehicular traffic. If there is a potential for damage to the meter set from vehicular traffic, refer to GDS J-95.

(16) Working Space Around Electric Meter Sets

To provide required working space around an electric meter, the gas service riser may not be located less than 36 inches laterally from the closest edge of the electric meter panel. (See Figure 3.) For a large gas meter set or multi-meter manifold, this clearance requirement extends 12 inches laterally beyond the edge of the Company gas meter set equipment.

(17) Other Hazards

When selecting the meter set location, it is necessary to be alert to any potential hazards not specifically indicated in this document, including potential risk to others caused by the meter set, and exercise reasonable care to avoid any hazards. Electric grounding or bonding wires must not be attached to any part of the gas meter set. No bonding is permitted within 36 inches of PG&E meter set assembly on the customer houseline.

(18) Service Delivery Point

(a) All customer-installed equipment must be installed downstream of the Company point of connection as shown in Figure 5. Customer-installed equipment may include: earthquake valves, seismic shutoffs, remote monitoring equipment, or flex hoses. Any customer-installed equipment on Company facilities must be removed at the customer’s expense.

(b) Company point of connection must be made to rigid pipe houseline and not to flex line.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 22

3.A. (continued)

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

Figure 5. Typical Residential/Small Commercial Meter

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

B. Specific Requirements for Outside, Aboveground Meter Sets

(1) Location

Meter sets should be located at the building and as near as practical to the point where the gas service pipe enters the property. The meter set location is typically near the side of the building from which the customer will be served. The order of preference for locating the outside, aboveground meter set is as follows.

(a) In a protected location adjacent to the building served (see Figure 6, below). An exception to this requirement is for schools, where it is required to protect the meter set by installing it in a location that is separated from buildings and playground areas. It will be necessary to install a protective enclosure or wire cage with a cover around the meter set in these cases. (See Figure 7 and Figure 8.)

(b) At the customer’s property line, if a location exists where the meter set can be properly protected from damage by vehicles and anticipated damage. The service and meter set location must allow inspection for operation and maintenance activities. (See Figure 9.)

(2) Meter Set Accessibility

For ease of access, avoid locations behind fences or other barriers that may be kept locked by the customer.

Figure 6. Gas Service

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 22

3.B. (continued)

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

Figure 7. Typical Detached Enclosure

Figure 8. Typical Enclosure Dimensions

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 12 of 22

3.B. (continued)

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

Figure 9. Property Line Installation

C. Specific Requirements for Meter Sets Located in Alcoves

(1) An alcove’s width can vary depending on the meter set. The height of the alcove is typically 8 feet; the depth must not exceed 36 inches. PG&E provides final dimensions after confirming the meter size and the number of meters.

(2) A manifold located in an alcove may require a custom design depending on the configuration.

(a) For single-diaphragm meters, applicants must use the area dimensions shaded in Figure 1 and Figure 2.

(b) Single-rotary meters or multi-meter manifolds may require a custom design depending on the configuration.

(c) A gate is not a preferred option and requires approval on an exception basis. If a gate is proposed in front of the alcove, it must have at least 50% open

area.

(d) No lighting, wirings, foreign pipes or other facilities are allowed in the alcove.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 13 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

D. Specific Requirements for Meter Sets Located in Breezeways

(1) Isolation from Living Spaces

Meter sets installed in breezeways must be located so that gas cannot migrate into building openings.

(2) Ventilation

Meter sets may be installed in breezeways that are adequately ventilated to the outside atmosphere. The breezeway must be open at both sides.

(3) Separation from Sources of Ignition

No sources of ignition are allowed in the breezeway. Any electric wiring, switches, light fixtures, or circuit breakers must meet the requirements of the National Electric Code for installation in Class 1, Division 2 areas.

E. Specific Requirements for Meter Sets Located in Cabinets or Gas Closets

(1) Meter cabinets are not a preferred method of installation. A meter cabinet larger than for single domestic meter installations requires prior approval from the local field services manager. When approved, it must comply with the requirements in this section.

(2) It is preferred to have regulators installed on the outside of the cabinet. Additional space is required for larger regulators and dual-head regulators. Installing the regulators in a cabinet requires prior approval from the local field services manager. If there are regulators in a cabinet, then the vents must be piped out of the cabinet per GDS H-93, “Piping – Details, Regulator Vent Lines - Above Ground.”

(3) Meter sets and meter set components located in a cabinet must have adequate working space, proper ventilation, and no source of ignition. See GDS K-51, “Single Meter Cabinet for Domestic Gas Meters,” for single meter cabinet requirements and details. Final cabinet dimensions must be approved by Company prior to construction for other than single domestic meter size.

(4) Cabinets must be designed to be vapor-proof and prevent migration of gas into the interior of a building or other location where gas may create a hazard. The cabinet must be constructed of non-metallic and non-combustible material with non-metallic doors, and open to the outside.

(5) Meter cabinets that have been constructed prior to acceptance by Company may not be approved. Submitting these requests with the application early in the planning stage reduces delays.

(6) Modifications to existing gas meter sets in cabinets must comply with current codes and standards.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 14 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

3.E. (continued)

(1) Cabinets are limited to a minimum depth of 18 inches and a maximum depth of 36 inches. See Figure 10, below, for specific meter cabinet sizes and clearances. Cabinets deeper than 36 inches must conform to the requirements of GDS J-16.

Figure 10. Specifications for a Recessed Individual Meter Cabinet

(2) Gas Meter Closets

(a) Gas meter closets must be furnished and installed by the applicant and have a depth of 18 inches minimum and 36 inches maximum, without exception. Doors must be non-metallic and fully louvered.

(b) Doors must open at least 90° and have a clear opening height of 6 feet, 8 inches.

(c) The inside of the closet must be made of non-flammable material and have a minimum 1-hour fire rating. All joints and penetrations must be sealed to prevent gas from migrating into the structure. Foreign pipes are not allowed inside the closet with the exception of fire sprinkler heads. Lighting, wiring, conduits, junction boxes, or inspection panels of any kind are not allowed inside the closet. Bonding or grounding wires on the customer’s houselines are not allowed inside the closet.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 15 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

3.E. (continued)

(d) The ceiling must have a 1:12 slope. The ceiling must slope up toward the door frame with a maximum of 6 inches measured from the door opening to the finished ceiling.

(e) The inside width of the closet cannot exceed 8 inches beyond either side of the door frame. Refer to Section 3.H, below, for manifold spacing to determine the size of closet required for the desired number of meters. The meters and manifold must fit within the opening of the closet doors with the exception of the tie-in piece from the outside riser.

(f) The riser and regulator must be installed outside of the closet. The applicant provides a penetration through the wall into the closet. Contact your local project coordinator for the exact size and location of the required penetration.

(g) The doors must have the identifying sign “Gas Meters.” If the doors have locks, the applicant must install a lock box near the closet that is acceptable to PG&E and contains a key.

(h) The closet cannot be used for storage of any kind. Only PG&E gas meters and metering appurtenances are allowed inside the closet.

F. Specific Limitations for Curb Meter Sets

(1) The Company considers curb meter installations undesirable because they are difficult to maintain. See GDS J-14.1, “Curb Meter Installations,” for a description of the policy and design considerations for curb meter installations. Depending on the size and type of facilities, required equipment may not be available or suitable for use below grade.

(2) Large Meter Installations for Commercial or Industrial Loads

On an exception basis, a vault or meter box may be located on the customer’s property, either adjacent to the building served or near the property line.

G. Specific Requirements for Meter Sets Located Inside Buildings

Meter sets and all meter set components located inside buildings must be contained within a dedicated gas meter room, as specified in GDS J-16.

H. Multi-Meter Manifolds

Multiple meters will be at one approved location for each property or location. Number of meters, tiers and size of piping are designed by the Company. See GDS J-52.1, “Gas Meter Manifolds (1-1/4" and 2" Sizes),” GDS J-52.2, “Brackets for Gas Meter Manifolds,” and GDS J-52.3, “Gas Meter Manifolding.” The Company limits gas meter manifold configurations to one-tier or two-tier meter manifolds not exceeding 60 inches high. These manifolds are measured from the final level standing surface to the top of the manifold. See Figure 11 and Table 1.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 16 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

3.H. (continued)

Figure 11. Typical Multimeter Installations

Notes for Figure 11

  1. The applicant’s houselines must be stubbed out 4 inches to 6 inches from the finished wall at the locations shown.
  2. The applicant must clearly mark each houseline.
  3. Applicants must not install any electrical devices or equipment, including wires, cables, metering enclosures, telecommunication enclosures, bond wires, clamps, or ground rods within 36 inches horizontally from the farthest edge of PG&E facilities and 10 feet above the regulator vent.
  4. Applicants may need to install the riser farther away from the building to accommodate the manifold installation. Consult your local project coordinator for site-specific details.

Table 1. Dimensions for Figure 11

Label in Fig. 11 Installation Dimensions Comments
**A ** 12" for residential only
15" for cabinet installations only
20" for all commercial meters up to 1000 class
PG&E provides custom-design dimensions for
mixed meter sizes and for meters larger than
1000 class.
**B ** 26" (typical) for unenclosed
32" (typical) for cabinet installations
-
**C ** 24" residential (unenclosed and cabinet)
36" commercial
Contact local project coordinator for two-tier
commercial manifolds.
**D ** 6" min. to inside building corner
12" min. to outside building corner
36" to electrical wired (see Note 3)
From farthest edge of PG&E equipment.
**E ** 30" min. to inside or outside corner of building
36" min. to electrical wires (see Note 3)
PG&E may approve reduction of Dimension E on
a case-by-case basis – e.g., in non-pedestrian
traffic areas, or on select PG&E equipment.
**F ** 24" (typical) for residential
36" (typical) for 400 to 1000 class meter,
commercial
PG&E provides custom-design dimensions for
mixed meter sizes and for larger than 1000 class
meters.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 17 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

3.H. (continued)

Note: The Company does not install meters unless the permanent address, the location, or the area being served (if applicable) is marked at each meter location.

I. The Company requires that buildings, dwellings, occupancies, houselines, or other facilities or locations be marked to identify gas lines that are serving locations or supplying equipment. Applicants must ensure that the following rules for marking houselines are enforced.

(1) The Company requires that lines be marked by attaching an embossed, durable, metal or plastic tag to each houseline. The Company must approve of the tag.

(2) Markings must be legible and specific.

(3) Marking information must include an authorized apartment or street number and a use or location designation.

(4) The houseline must be permanently, clearly, and prominently marked at the point of the service connection (i.e., service delivery point).

J. Protecting Meter Sets From Vehicular Damage

(1) Meter Sets in Traveled Areas

If any portion of a gas meter set must be located in or adjacent to traveled areas where there is the probability of vehicular damage, physical protection acceptable to the Company must be provided by the customer. The Company determines when such protection is required. Physical protection must be provided for any gas meter, per GDS J-95.

(2) Returning Damaged Meter Sets to Service

If a meter set is damaged by a vehicle or other equipment and there is a potential for a recurrence, temporary barricading must be installed before service is restored, and until permanent protection is installed, per GDS J-95, or the meter is relocated.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 18 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

Target Audience

Personnel who work in design, engineering, estimating, field services, maintenance and construction (M&C), gas pipeline operations and maintenance (GPOM), and general construction.

Definitions

Alcove Exterior space that is recessed into a building. The alcove’s width can vary depending on the meter set. PG&E provides final dimensions after confirming the meter size.

Breezeway A passage or walkway with full openings on both sides. No sources of ignition or openings into the building.

Cabinet A structure, not deeper than 36 inches, with a solid or closed top that is freestanding, attached or recessed into a building exterior wall, vapor proof from the building, with access doors for the purpose of containing/protecting a gas meter set or meter set components.

Enclosure A structure with an open top that is freestanding or attached to a building exterior wall with access doors; a cage; or walls and gate for the purpose of containing/protecting a gas meter set or meter set components.

Gas meter room A space within a building that is solely used to house natural gas metering equipment in accordance with GDS J-16, “Gas Meter Room.”

Meter set The gas meter, service regulator, overpressure protection devices, and all associated Company piping and fittings between the service riser valve and the customer houseline.

Readily accessible location

For a gas meter set: The preferred location can be accessed immediately and does not require contact with the owner or occupant. If the preferred location is unavailable, the Company may approve a lock box with key for access.

For a service shut-off valve: The preferred location is outside and aboveground. If the preferred location is unavailable, the Company may approve a curb valve in which no permanent structure prevents immediate valve access or operation.

Show window A ground floor window in the wall of a commercial building, including any permanent elevated display floors or platforms associated with the window, where the purpose of the window is to present a display to the public.

Source of ignition As defined by the National Fuel Gas Code Handbook, sources of ignition are defined as “devices or equipment that, because of their intended modes of use or operation, are capable of providing sufficient thermal energy to ignite flammable gas-air mixtures.” This includes electric wiring, switches, and circuit breakers that do not meet the requirements of the National Electric Code for installation in Class 1, Division 2 areas.

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 19 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

Acronyms and Abbreviations

CFR: Code of Federal Regulations CPUC: California Public Utilities Commission

Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section (§) 192.353, “Customer meters and regulators: Location”

CFR 49 § 192.355, “Customer meters and regulators: Protection from damage”

CFR 49 § 192.357, “Customer meters and regulators: Installation”

CFR 49 § 192.363, “Service lines: Valve requirements”

CFR 49 § 192.365, “Service lines: Location of valves”

Records and Information Management:

Information or records generated by this design standard must be managed in accordance with the Enterprise Records and Information (ERIM) Policy, Standards and Enterprise Records Retention Schedule (ERRS). Refer to GOV-7101S, “Enterprise Records and Information Management Standard,” and related standards. Management of records includes, but is not limited to:

 - Integrity

 - Storage

 - Retention and Disposition

 - Classification and Protection

References

California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) General Order 112-F, “State of California Rules Governing Design, Construction, Testing, Operation, and Maintenance of Gas Gathering, Transmission, and Distribution Piping Systems”

Gas Design Standard (GDS) A-75, “Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing”

GDS A-90, “Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design”

GDS H-15, “Design Requirements for Company-Owned Gas Regulating Systems Serving Customers”

GDS H-91, “Vent Cover for Regulator on Curb Meter Sets”

GDS H-92, “Plastic Vent Caps”

GDS H-93, “Piping – Details, Regulator Vent Lines - Above Ground”

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 20 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

References (continued)

GDS J-14.1, “Curb Meter Installations”

GDS J-16, “Gas Meter Room”

GDS J-52.1, “Gas Meter Manifolds (1-1/4" and 2" Sizes)”

GDS J-52.2, “Brackets for Gas Meter Manifolds”

GDS J-52.3, “Gas Meter Manifolding”

GDS J-95, “Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement”

GDS K-10, “Precast Concrete Pit”

GDS K-10.1, “Precast Concrete Vaults & Pits”

GDS K-40, “Plastic Valve Box for 3/4" – 4" Valves”

GDS K-40.1, “Method of Installing Concrete Curb Boxes in Concrete Sidewalk”

GDS K-42, “Precast Boxes 24" x 36", 30" x 48", and 30" x 60"”

GDS K-42.1, “Precast Boxes 13" x 24" and 17" x 30"”

GDS K-51, “Single Meter Cabinet for Domestic Gas Meters”

Gas Rule 16, “Gas Service Extensions”

NFPA 70: National Electric Code (NEC)

Utility Manual TD-7001M, Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook), Section 2, “Gas Service”

Utility Standard S4446, “Vault Inspection Procedure”

Appendices

NA

Attachments

NA

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 21 of 22

Gas Meter Locations J-15

Publication Date: 08/18/2021 Effective Date: 11/01/2021 Rev. 9a

Revision Notes

Revision 9a has the following changes:

  1. In 3.A.(13).(a), removed requirement to install a protective sleeve or “sunshield.”

Revision 9 (Publication Date: 11/15/2017 Effective Date: 11/29/2017) has the following changes:

  1. Updated Purpose and Scope.

  2. Updated Applicability.

  3. Updated Definitions.

  4. Added figures from Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook).

  5. Added language requiring meter sets in cabinets to be approved by Field Services Manager.

Asset Type: Customer Connected Equipment

Function: Design and Construction

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Printed copies of this document might be out of date. The Technical Information Library (TIL) has the current version.

PG&E Internal Information ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 22 of 22

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard describes the requirements for any gas meter room inside any building. Local jurisdictions may have adopted codes or ordinances relating to customer-owned and maintained facilities that could require consideration when designing a gas meter room. Compliance with California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) requirements is mandatory. For PG&E gas meter locations, the applicable codes and regulations are described in Gas Design Standard J-15, “Gas Meter Locations.”

General Information

  1. A gas meter room is a space within a building that is solely used to house natural gas metering equipment.

  2. The preferred gas riser, meter and regulator location is outside and adjacent to the building being served. On an exception basis, gas meters and regulators may be installed in a specially designed gas meter room. However, PG&E will not install a gas meter in a gas meter room unless all of the following conditions have been met:

A. The applicant has specifically applied to install the gas meter in a specially designed room.

B. The applicant’s request is accompanied by an explanation detailing the reasons why the presence of some condition associated with the property itself makes it impossible to locate the gas riser, regulator and meter outside the building OR that such location would deny the applicant a substantial benefit of property ownership enjoyed by other similarly-situated properties and that the approval of this exception would not constitute a special privilege to this applicant which has been denied to similar applicants in other locations.

C. PG&E must concur that the unique attributes of this property render it impossible to locate the riser, regulator and meter outside the building and that approval of the proposed meter room is reasonable and safe and does not constitute a grant of a special privilege or advantage.

D. PG&E and the applicable planning/building department must approve the design in advance of any construction.

E. The applicant has recorded a covenant substantially in the Covenant Agreement which provides that the applicant or its successors in interest will maintain the meter room as approved by PG&E in good and serviceable condition, will provide access to PG&E or its agents at all times, and will not use the meter room for any other purpose (e.g. storage).

  1. A meter room may not be used as a storage area.

  2. It is the responsibility of the applicant to design, construct, and furnish the gas meter room and related materials to meet the gas meter room requirements that are described in this document, and in accordance with the California Building Code, including means of egress and those provisions to safeguard the health and safety of all personnel. The minimum room dimensions will be unique for each project based on the meter, regulator, and manifold requirements necessary to serve each load. Applicant gas service and meter installation arrangements are subject to PG&E’s review and approval.

  3. A covenant must be placed on the deed of property ensuring that successive property owners will adhere to the requirements in this standard. The covenant will be prepared by the PG&E land department and recorded on the deed of property prior to the installation of the gas meters. The covenant will state that PG&E has the right to suspend or terminate gas service if the conditions of this standard are not upheld. In addition, the covenant will state the owner is responsible for complying with gas tariffs. Any deviation in the form of the Covenant Agreement must be approved by the PG&E land department prior to installing of the gas meters.

  4. The covenant confirms the applicant’s financial responsibility when a relocation of PG&E facilities is required; e.g. relocating a meter set from a basement under the city sidewalk.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 1 of 11

Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

  1. The covenant will provide that PG&E has the right to terminate service if ever PG&E determines, through regular inspection, information or otherwise that the terms of this standard have not been upheld. The following list describes examples of some but not all situations that violate the terms of this standard:

A. The fan is not in constant operation or does not turn on with the lights.

B. The lights are not operational.

C. The combustible gas indicator (CGI) is not signed-off or up-to-date.

D. The room is not vapor-tight.

E. The room is not clear of storage.

8. Gas meter room location and piping must conform to all current federal, state, and local codes including Code of

Federal Regulations 49 (CFR. Part 192), “Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards,” and the National Fuel Gas Code (NFPA 54).

  1. PG&E requires all applicant installed electrical equipment in the room be classified as Class I, Division 1, Group D pursuant to NFPA-70, National Electric Code.

  2. Do not locate or place any electric devices or electrical connections for services such as cable television or telecommunications within the gas meter room. Under no circumstances will this requirement be waved.

  3. All electrical wiring and conduit that pass through a gas meter room must conform to the National Electric Code Article 501.

  4. The customer must provide lighting for the gas meter room, with a minimum 30 foot-candle illumination.

  5. No foreign pipe (i.e., drain lines, domestic water, etc.) or ducts are permitted to be located in or routed through the gas meter room.

  6. Gas meter room(s) must be designed to prevent entrapment of gas. Mechanical ventilation to the outside atmosphere is required.

  7. The requirements of this standard must be met when a customer houseline is added to an existing gas meter room or gas meter set within a building.

General Service Requirements

  1. Service shut-off valves must be installed and comply with the following:

A. Each new service or replacement service must have a readily accessible shut-off valve that is preferably located outside, above ground on the gas service riser.

B. If it is necessary to locate the riser inside a building, or an existing riser valve is otherwise inaccessible, then a curb shut-off valve must be installed at the customer’s expense in a readily accessible location in accordance with Gas Design Standard A-43.2, “Curb Valve Installations, Distribution Systems.”

  1. Service Riser Locations

A. Service risers must not be installed inside buildings or meter rooms, except where special circumstances prevent outside installation. The installation of an inside riser may be justified at the discretion of the local PG&E senior gas engineer. PG&E must grant prior approval for any gas meter design/location where settlement or subsidence issues have been identified in any geotechnical report.

B. Examples of situations where inside risers are considered:

(1) A location with insufficient clearance between the building and the property line to safely locate the riser outside of the building.

(2) A building with the meter room located inside of a basement or half basement, where an outside riser at ground level would enter the room at an excessive height.

(3) An inner city urban redevelopment building with inadequate space for an outside riser.

(4) A designated historical building where modifications needed to locate the riser outside are not permitted.

(5) Sidewalk Basements - when the service passes through a sidewalk basement to the meter location on private property. Sidewalk basements are basement spaces built underneath a city sidewalk, in front of the foundation wall of a building. The PG&E land department must review and verify the applicant has sufficient rights for PG&E equipment to be in a sidewalk basement prior to the installation of the gas meters.

C. Existing service risers inside of buildings or meter rooms may be repaired with a plastic insert in accordance with Gas Design Standard A-90, “Plastic Main and Service Installation.”

Page 2 of 11 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7

B

Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Fan (See

All holes

core drilled

and sealed by applicant

Exhaust

Intake Louvers

Regulator rated walls (See Note 2) & doors

Notes:

  1. Fan can be mounted anywhere in the exhaust duct.
  2. Regulator vents to be piped outside when regulators are approved to be installed inside room.

Regulator (See Note 2)

Figure 1 Plan View

Window/Opening to buildings

Notes:

10’ Min.
Regulator
(See Note 1)
PG&E
approved
required
lock box
Preferred
light switch
6’ Min.
Ceiling must
be min. 7.5’,
10’ preferred.
Exhaust
louvers
Rise
r Intake louvers
  1. See Natural Gas Regulator Requirements 3.A.(1), Page 6.

Figure 2 Front Outside Elevation − A

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 3 of 11

Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Î
Î
Exhaust
louver Î
gulator
Riser
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Exhaust
Fan
Î vent ÎÎÎ
No Smoking − No Open Flames − Sign − must be
No Sources of Ignition −
posted on at least
This room is for the sole use of
PG&E gas meter equipment − two walls in gas
No storage of any kind is allowed. meter room
Scree
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
Fan
Sign − must be
posted on at least
two walls in gas
meter room
No Smoking − No Open Flames −
No Sources of Ignition −
This room is for the sole use of
PG&E gas meter equipment −
No storage of any kind is allowed.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Exhaust
vent
Î
Î
Î
Fan
Sign − must be
posted on at least
two walls in gas
meter room
No Smoking − No Open Flames −
No Sources of Ignition −
This room is for the sole use of
PG&E gas meter equipment −
No storage of any kind is allowed.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Exhaust
vent
Î
Î
Î
Fan
Sign − must be
posted on at least
two walls in gas
meter room
No Smoking − No Open Flames −
No Sources of Ignition −
This room is for the sole use of
PG&E gas meter equipment −
No storage of any kind is allowed.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Exhaust
vent
Î
Î
Î
Fan
Sign − must be
posted on at least
two walls in gas
meter room
No Smoking − No Open Flames −
No Sources of Ignition −
This room is for the sole use of
PG&E gas meter equipment −
No storage of any kind is allowed.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Exhaust
vent
Î
Î
Î
Fan
Sign − must be
posted on at least
two walls in gas
meter room
No Smoking − No Open Flames −
No Sources of Ignition −
This room is for the sole use of
PG&E gas meter equipment −
No storage of any kind is allowed.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Exhaust
vent
Î
Î
Î
Fan
Sign − must be
posted on at least
two walls in gas
meter room
No Smoking − No Open Flames −
No Sources of Ignition −
This room is for the sole use of
PG&E gas meter equipment −
No storage of any kind is allowed.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Exhaust
vent
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
Fan
Sign − must be
posted on at least
two walls in gas
meter room
No Smoking − No Open Flames −
No Sources of Ignition −
This room is for the sole use of
PG&E gas meter equipment −
No storage of any kind is allowed.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Exhaust
vent
Î
Î
Î
Fan
Sign − must be
posted on at least
two walls in gas
meter room
No Smoking − No Open Flames −
No Sources of Ignition −
This room is for the sole use of
PG&E gas meter equipment −
No storage of any kind is allowed.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Exhaust
vent
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Exhaust
vent
Fan ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver
Î
Î
Î
gulator
Riser
Exhaust
louver

Meter Room Location Requirements

Figure 3 Cross Section − B

The following is a list of gas meter room locations that will be approved by PG&E for situations where the customer’s building occupies all of the property that is owned by the customer (i.e., zero lot line) and the construction of an alcove is not possible. Option 1 is preferred and successive options will only be considered when the previous options are not possible:

  1. A meter room that is accessible from a public right-of-way at all times. The gas meter room is located at an above grade location designed and constructed with walls, ceiling, and floor that are vapor-tight to prevent the migration of gas to the building’s interior. The gas meter room has doors that open to the outside of the building.

  2. A gas meter room that is located adjacent to an outside building wall inside the customer’s building and constructed with walls, ceiling, and floor that are vapor-tight to prevent the migration of gas to the building’s interior. This gas meter room is also located at grade level with a door that opens to the inside of the building. These doors shall be vapor-tight to prevent the migration of gas to the building’s interior.

  3. A customer’s building’s basement meter room that is adjacent to an outside wall and constructed with walls, ceiling, and floor that are vapor-tight to prevent the migration of gas to the building’s interior.

  4. A sidewalk basement meter room is not acceptable without a written approval from the municipality and PG&E.

Natural Gas Meter Room Design Requirements

  1. Fire rated walls must have a minimum 2-hour fire rating, or as specified in the California Building Code for Group H, Division 1 occupancies.

  2. All entry and exit doors must be rated commensurate with the rating of the wall . Doors that open to the inside of the building must be vapor-tight to prevent the migration of gas to the building’s interior.

  3. The applicant/customer must consult with local PG&E service planning personnel to obtain the required gas meter room dimensions. Door dimensions and access must be approved by PG&E on a case-by-case basis.

  4. No floor drains are permitted within a natural gas meter room.

  5. If the applicant/customer’s building is equipped with a fire sprinkler system pursuant to NFPA-13 standard for the installation of sprinkler system, the applicant/customer must also install fire sprinklers inside of the gas meter

room.

  1. Only explosion-proof lighting fixtures are to be installed in a gas meter room and these must meet the requirements of the NFPA-70: National Electric Code for Class I, Division 1, Group D locations.

Page 4 of 11 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7

Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

  1. It is preferred to mount the light switch outside the room next to the entry door. Explosion-proof light switches must be installed if such switches are to be located inside of the meter room. These switches must meet the requirements of the NFPA-70: National Electric Code for Class I, Division 1, Group D locations.

  2. No electrical receptacles (i.e., outlets) are permitted within a gas meter room.

  3. The applicant/customer must furnish ladders or platforms inside of the gas meter room as required for a tiered meter configuration.

  4. The floor-to-ceiling height inside of the meter room must be a minimum of 7.5 feet. The preferred height is not more than 10 feet.

  5. Doors into gas meter rooms must be provided with approved signs. The signs must state that the room contains flammable gas.

  6. Signs must be posted on at least two walls within the room stating “No Smoking − No Open Flames − No Sources of Ignition - This room is for the sole use of PG&E gas meter equipment − No storage of any kind is allowed”.

  7. A lock box, acceptable to PG&E, containing a door key to the gas meter room door must be installed by the applicant/customer and such lock boxes must be located near the gas meter room door.

  8. The applicant/customer is responsible for core-drilling, sealing, waterproofing, and maintaining a vapor tight seal on any wall, ceiling, or floor where:

A. Inlet natural gas piping enters the building and/or the gas meter room.

B. Natural gas regulator relief vents exit the gas meter room and the applicant/customer’s building.

C. Conduits containing wiring for the gas meter (and appurtenances) enter the gas meter room.

Gas Meter Room Ventilation Requirements

Applicant must submit the designs and calculations, stamped and signed by a licensed professional mechanical engineer, demonstrating that the ventilation for the gas meter room satisfies the following requirements:

  1. Ventilation must be provided in accordance with the Mechanical Code and one of the following:

A. Continuous ventilation introducing fresh air at six air exchanges per hour.

OR

B. A combustible gas detection system, interlocked with an automatic ventilation system that will provide fresh air at six air exchanges per hour upon activation of the detection system. The gas detectors must be set at 20% Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) (or 1.0% concentration of natural gas in air). The instructions for the combustible gas detection system are found below in Requirements for Customer-Owned Equipment, Item 5.

� The formula for the gas room air exchange calculation is: minimum fan air flow rate (cfm) = room volume (cf) x 6 air changes per hour / 60 minutes per hour (where cfm = cubic feet per minute, cf = cubic feet.) Pressure drop values (e.g. louver, screen and duct elements) must be included in the design and calculations.

  1. To ensure complete air exchange the low-fresh air intake and the high-exhaust air duct must be at opposite corners within the room. Exterior louvers must be in a low-fresh air and high-exhaust air configuration as far apart as practical and ensure no recirculation. The bottom of the high-exhaust air louver will be over the travel way at least 6’ above the finish outside grade.

  2. Mechanical fans and all other electric devices must be explosion proof and meet the requirements of the NFPA-70: National Electric Code for Class I, Division 1, Group D locations.

  3. Mechanical fans and detection equipment must be continuously monitored in case of failure. Alarms for trouble and failure must be installed in accordance with NFPA-72, National Fire Alarm Code.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 5 of 11

Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Natural Gas Regulator Requirements

  1. Natural Gas Regulators

Typically PG&E will install natural gas service regulators and overpressure protection devices outside of a meter room. Applicants/customers who want to install gas service regulators and overpressure protection devices inside of a meter room must provide PG&E with the written justification as part of the application. The preferred gas riser, meter and regulator location is outside and adjacent to the building being served. On an exception basis, gas meters and regulators may be installed in a specially designed gas meter room. PG&E must approve all gas meter and regulator installations and the gas meter room design in advance of any construction. If acceptable to PG&E, the following additional conditions apply:

A. Each gas service regulator installed within a building must be located as near as practical to the point of the service line entrance into the meter room, and as specified by PG&E.

B. PG&E will specify materials and designs for any overpressure protection devices needed, as outlined in Items 2 and 3 below.

  1. Regulator Vent Lines

A. Regulators and any additional overpressure protection equipment installed indoors must be vented to the outdoors. The customer is required to provide holes (penetrations) through walls or ceilings for these vents. In rare situations where the meter room location is not adjacent to an outside wall, the customer is required to install the vent piping from the meter room to the outside wall (PG&E will determine pipe size and location). PG&E will be responsible for connecting the vent piping to the regulator or overpressure protection device.

B. PG&E will position gas regulators to minimize the length of the regulator vent lines and to ensure adequate venting capacity.

                                                        - “ −

C. PG&E will specify regulator vent lines, in accordance with Gas Design Standard H 93, Regulator Vent Lines

Above Ground,” when required.

  1. Regulator Vent Locations

A. Service regulator vents must terminate in a safe outside location that complies with the following criteria:

(1) The regulator vent must not terminate near any sources of ignition or openings into the building. The regulator vent must be 36 inches horizontally from sources of ignition and openings into the building, and this clearance area will extend 10 feet above and 36 inches below the regulator vent termination.

(2) A minimum lateral distance of 8 feet from a forced air intake. This includes the intake vents for the gas meter room.

(3) Within any location that is under display platforms or show windows in commercial buildings, including any permanent, elevated, display floors or platforms associated with the window.

(4) Within any location that is under building overhangs, where the overhang is likely to direct venting gas into a building opening.

B. Vents for all natural gas regulator and gas monitor diaphragm equipment must terminate above a reasonable flood level. Regulator vent extensions must be separate lines, terminated so they are protected from the rain and provided with screened fittings to prevent insects and other debris from entering the vent.

C. Vent locations must have final approval by PG&E.

Page 6 of 11 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7

Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Requirements for PG&E-Owned Equipment

  1. Natural Gas Metering

Electrical grounding or bonding to PG&E’s metering facility piping or equipment or to customer-owned house lines inside of the meter room is not permitted.

  1. Land-Line Cable and Conduit

Customers with an estimated average use of 10,000 therms per month or more are required to install, own, and maintain a nominal 1” diameter conduit and a telephone cable. PG&E’s requirements for the conduit are described below.

A. Applicant/customer must extend the conduit and telephone cable from the closest telephone service location (i.e., outdoor “general purpose” area) to a location specified by PG&E that will be at or near the gas metering facilities. The maximum allowable distance from the telephone service location to PG&E’s gas meter is 50 feet.

B. Conduit must terminate within 3 feet of the gas meter location.

C. Applicant must install a conduit seal, inside the gas meter room, within 18 inches of the boundary where the conduit enters the gas meter room. There must be no conduit fitting between the boundary and the seal. PG&E will pour the conduit seal.

D. Applicant/customer is responsible for all charges and costs associated with installing the telephone facilities necessary to provide telephone service for PG&E’s gas metering facilities which are to be used for PG&E’s purposes.

E. PG&E is responsible for establishing telephone service and for the ongoing telephone service charges for gas metering purposes.

  1. Additional Equipment Needed to Support Gas Meters

Consideration must be given to the design requirements for:

A. Volume pulse output connections.

B. Electronic correctors.

C. Power for gas meters. If AC power is required for PG&E equipment, the applicant must provide an outlet termination (with a lockable disconnect switch) located in the outdoor “general purpose” area, as noted in Item 2 above (also see Figure 4).

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 7 of 11

Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Communication Cabinet 14” x 18” x 8”, See Note 1 Below

Notes:

Non-Classified Area Inside Meter Room, Class 1 Div. 1
t 14” x 18” x 8”,
Wall
Rigid Conduit, 1”
Conduit Seal
(Installed by customer, poured by P
See Note 2 below)
Gas Meter
5’ Set Assembly
Note 4
2’
Note 4
Floor
Non-Classified Area
Inside Meter Room, Class 1 Div. 1
Wall
Rigid Conduit, 1”
Conduit Seal
(Installed by customer, poured by P
See Note 2 below)
Gas Meter
Set Assembly
2’
Note 4
5’
Note 4
t 14” x 18” x 8”,
Floor
Ground Rod, Clamp, and Wire
(Installed by Customer, See Note 3 Below)
  1. Cabinet must be large enough for ac outlet, AC/DC converter, EC modem, and customer pulse board.

  2. Install conduit seal where conduit exits wall.

  3. Ground rod with clamp must be 5/8” in diameter and 8’ long. A #12 AWG insulated green ground wire connects ground rod to the communication cabinet.

  4. Dimensions are for guidance only. Final design must be approved by PG&E.

Figure 4 Gas Meter Room Electric Enclosure and Conduit Arrangement

  1. SmartMeter System

PG&E’s SmartMeter Advanced Meter Reading system uses radio frequency technology to transmit meter reads automatically from the gas module. Applicants must make provisions for SmartMeter requirements to ensure that the SmartMeter Advanced Meter Reading system can operate properly. Consult with PG&E for current requirements.

Some, but not all, installation limitation requirements for SmartMeter gas module include:

A. Module must be mounted at least 3” away from the wall in case of metal siding or foil insulation.

B. Module must be installed with a spacer on surfaces other than plaster and wood.

C. Module must be located at least 6” away from pipes, conduit, electrical wires, and other metal objects.

D. Module must be located at least 4” vertically and 3” horizontally from other modules.

E. Module must be located at least 2” below plaster or metal grid ceiling.

F. Module, direct mount or remote, is installed above grade level.

G. A remote module must be installed for any gas meter in a basement.

Page 8 of 11 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7

Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Requirements for Customer-Owned Equipment

  1. All customer-installed gas equipment must be installed downstream of the service delivery point. The service delivery point is defined as the gas supply point where PG&E’s facilities connect to the customer houseline as follows:

A. For residential and small commercial meter sets, the service delivery point is the point where the male threads of the applicant’s houseline connect to the female threads of PG&E’s gas service tee fitting.

B. Because some commercial and industrial installations do not have service tees installed, the gas supply service delivery point is located at the first weld or fitting after the PG&E-installed bypass valve downstream of the meter.

  1. Customer-installed equipment must not connect to utility facilities or obstruct the operation or serviceability of PG&E’s piping, metering, and pressure regulating equipment. Customers are responsible for maintaining all customer facilities downstream of the service delivery point.

  2. For multiple gas meter installations where the gas meters are supplied by means of a manifold, any installation of a customer automatic gas shut-off device must be installed downstream of the service delivery point for each meter.

  3. Where customers elect to install an automatic shut-off device, all piping, valves, or other piping components must be installed downstream of (i.e., after) the gas supply delivery point.

  4. When a combustible gas indicator (CGI) device and controller are installed, the following are required:

A. A gas sensor must be installed no more than 6” from the ceiling of the gas meter room.

B. The design and installation of all such detection devices and systems must be done in accordance with and comply with the NFPA-72, National Fire Alarm Code.

C. The controller must be installed outside of the gas meter room and be located near to the gas meter room door.

D. All wiring and piping of the transmitter to the controller must meet the requirements of NFPA-70, National Electric Code for Class I, Division 1, Group D locations.

E. An audible alarm and flashing strobe light must be included as a part of the controller system. This alarm system must continue to be operational until the condition that has triggered such an alarm has been determined and is manually reset.

F. The controller must have the capability to display readings of the percentage of the LEL readings from inside of the gas meter room.

G. The customer must maintain and calibrate the combustible gas indicator device and all related systems per the manufacturer’s recommendations. An up to date inspection card will be mounted on the wall, just inside the door, signifying the gas detection device has been calibrated and is working accurately.

H. The light switch will continuously and fully engage the fan when turned on.

Access to Meter Room

Applicant must make provisions to allow PG&E access to the gas meter room for emergency response, meter reading, system testing, inspection, and maintenance, in accordance with Gas Rule 16, “Gas Service Extensions.”

Records

  1. Retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 9 of 11

Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Target Audience

Design, engineering, estimating, field services, M&C crews, gas T&R, general construction

Definitions

NA

Acronyms and Abbreviations AC: alternating current AWG: American wire gauge cfh: cubic feet per hour CFR: Code of Federal Regulations CPUC: California Public Utilities Commission

DC: direct current

EC: electronic corrector

EFV: excess flow valve

G.O.: CPUC General Order LEL: lower explosive limit NFPA: National Fire Protection Association

Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment

NA

References

Curb Valve Installations, Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43.2 Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75 Plastic Main and Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75 Plastic Main and Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90

Prefabricated Risers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91 Design Requirements for Company-Owned Gas Regulating Systems Serving Customers . . . . . H-15 Regulator Vent Lines − Above Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-93 Gas Meter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-15 Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-95 Precast Concrete Vaults & Pits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-10.1 Precast Boxes 24” x 36”, 30” x 48”, and 30” x 60” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-42 Single Meter Enclosure for Domestic Gas Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-51 Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-16 Vault Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4446 Gas Service Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Rule 16 Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook), Gas Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 2 Code of Federal Regulations, Transportation of Natural Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CFR 192 CPUC General Order 112-E, Latest Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.O. 112-E California Code of Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Title 24 CCR2, 4, 9, National Fire Protection Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NFPA-13, 54, 70, 72, 497

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.O. 112-E California Code of Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Title 24 CCR2, 4, 9, National Fire Protection Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NFPA-13, 54, 70, 72, 497

Appendices

NA

Attachments

NA

Page 10 of 11 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7

Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Revision Notes

Revision 03a has the following changes:

  1. Added section “Records.”

Revision 03 has the following changes:

  1. Item 15 added to General Information.

  2. Added Figures 1, 2, and 3.

  3. Item 10 of Natural Gas Meter Room Design Requirements, removed “maximum of 10 feet” high ceiling and revised to say “the preferred height is not more than 10 feet”.

  4. This document is part of Change 66.

Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Distribution Function: Design Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 11 of 11

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard describes the typical installation of a volume pulser on a gas meter to provide the customer with a volume pulse output under the terms of the Electric and Gas Monitoring Meter Pulse Agreement, Form 79-1049, “Agreement to Install Applicant Requested Common Special Facilities - Gas and Electric Rule 2.” Contact advanced metering service and support personnel for any volume pulser request and the latest copy of the pulse agreement form.

General Information

  1. Pulsers installed or with connections within a 15’ area of the meter-set flanges, valves, and threaded fittings must conform to NEC Class I, Division 2, Group D hazardous area requirements. Conduits must be sealed to prevent gas migration to areas classified as non-hazardous. For the purpose of this document, underground is considered non-hazardous.

  2. All wiring between equipment must be in threaded rigid steel or intermediate steel conduit. Where provisions must be made for limited flexibility, liquid-tight flexible metal conduit in lengths not exceeding 3’ may be used without securing or supporting the flexible conduit between termination points.

                                                       - “
    
  3. For a volume pulse output from an electronic corrector, see Gas Design Standard J 65.2, Volume Pulse Output

Connection for Mercury Electronic Correctors.”

PG&E Responsibilities

  1. Provide intrinsic safety barrier enclosure to customer (“PG&E Responsibilities,” Item 2). (Note: Customer must install the enclosure in the non-hazardous area, at least 15’ but no more than 500’ away from the gas meter set).

  2. Install intrinsic safety barrier Item 3 for 120 Vac or Item 4 for 24 Vdc.

  3. Provide and install pulser (“PG&E Responsibilities,” Item 1).

  4. Connect power wires provided by customer.

  5. Connect pulser to intrinsic safety barrier.

  6. Connect customer pulse output to intrinsic safety barrier.

  7. Check for pulse connection.

  8. Complete end-to-end test of the system.

  9. Pour conduit seal after successful completion of end-to-end test.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 1 of 4

Volume Pulse Output Connection for Gas Meters J-65.1

Rev. #04 10-01-13

Customer Responsibilities

  1. Install enclosure (Table 1, Item 2) in the non-hazardous area, at least 15’ but no more than 500’ from the gas meter.

  2. Install all conduit and wire (Table 1, Items 5 & 6) from intrinsic safety barrier enclosure to no farther than 3’ from the gas meter and to customer power source. Leave extra 5’ of wire at meter end and an extra 2’ of wire at enclosure. (Note: Customer must not make any connections to the intrinsic safety barrier).

  3. Install a conduit seal (Table 1, Item 9) on wall or out of ground if conduit is buried as close to the hazardous area transition zone as practicable.

  4. Supply 24 Vdc power for intrinsic safety barrier. Alternatively, customer can supply 120 Vac. Provide PG&E with

6+ 4−

G N L

Pulse To Customer

120 Vac From Customer

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

y 24 Vdc power for intrinsic safety barrier. Alternatively, customer can supply 120 Vac. Provide PG& mation on which type of power (120 Vac or 24 Vdc) must be provided.
1
F
C
1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Non-Hazardous Area
Class I Div. 2 Area
Div. 2 Area
Underground
8
3c
P
C
9
OR
5
6
(15’ min. from meter in free air or
can be less from wall penetration)
Ch1
Ch2
1
2
3
4
Ch1
Ch2
5
6
7
8
Pwr 9+ 10−
6+ 4−
G N L
2
3a
7
7
3b
7
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

Underground

Non-Hazardous Area

Figure 1 Volume Pulse Output Connection (120 Vac Power)

4a 7
4b 4b 4b 4b 4b

To Customer

24 Vdc From Customer

Class I Div. 2 Area Non-Hazardous Area
(15’ min. from meter in free air or 2
can be less from wall penetration)
4a
Ch1 1 2
1
7
Ch2 3 4
T
5
C
6 Ch1 5 6
4b
Ch2 7 8
2
9
F
Pwr 9+ 10− 7 8
Div. 2 Area
OR

Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Underground

Non-Hazardous Area

Figure 2 Volume Pulse Output Connection (24 Vdc Power)

Page 2 of 4 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7

Volume Pulse Output Connection for Gas Meters J-65.1

Rev. #04 10-01-13

Table 1 Bill of Materials

Item Quantity
by
Customer
Quantity
by
PG&E
Description
1 1 Pulser Specified in Table 2
2 1 Intrinsic Safety Barrier Enclosure - Hoffman QLINE E, Type 4X, Model
Q251815ABE with Mounting kit QEMFK (installed by customer)
3 1 Intrinsic Safety Barrier system (120 Vac version) consisting of:
a)
Intrinsic Safety Barrier - 2-Chanel, 24 Vdc, Pepperl+Fuchs
KCD2-SR-EX2 or equal
b)
Fused Power Disconnect. Phoenix UK 5 - HESI with 3 amp fuse
c)
Power Supply - 120Vac/24Vdc, Mean Well DR-4524
4 1 Intrinsic Safety Barrier system (24 Vdc version) consisting of:
a)
Intrinsic Safety Barrier - 2-Chanel, 24 Vdc, Pepperl+Fuchs
KCD2-SR-EX2 or equal
b)
Fused Power Disconnect - Phoenix - UK 5 - HESI with 3 amp fuse.
5 1 Conduit, 1/2” Rigid, and 1/2” Liquid-Tite Metallic Flex (as required)
6 1 Three-Conductor Shielded Cable1, Stranded #22 AWG, Belden 9363, or Equal
(for signal wiring)
7 1 Single Conductor #18 AWG for power wiring within enclosure
8 1 Single Conductor #12 AWG max for power wiring from customer power source
(Note: Wire size used must be based on customer breaker size providing the
power to enclosure)
9
1

Conduit Seal, EYS 1/2”, Crouse-Hinds

1 NEC Type PLTC per Article 725, which is approved for wiring in Class I Division 2 hazardous areas.

Table 2 Volume Pulsers for Gas Meters

Pulser Make and Model Gas Meter Make Gas Meter Model
American RVP-FI 1 American Diaphragm Meters AC 175, AC 250, AL 175, AL 310, AL 425,
AT 175, AT 210, AT 250
American RVP-FI 1 Rockwell Diaphragm Meters 175, 175S, 250, R275, 310, R315, 415
American RVP-FI 1 Schlumberger/Sprague
Diaphragm Meters
240, 250, 305, 400, 400A, 675, 1000, 2, 3, 4,
5, 5A
American RVP-VI 1
or
Mercury 206 Pulse Transmitter 2, 3
American Diaphragm Meters AC 630, AL 800, AL 1000, AL 1400, AL 2300,
AL 5000, 25-B, 35-B, 60-B, 80-B, 250-B, 500-B
American RVP-VI 1
or
Mercury 206 Pulse Transmitter 2, 3
Sensus/Invensis/Equimeter/
Rockwell Diaphragm Meters
750, 800, 1000, 3000, 5000, 10000, 2, 2-1/2,
3, 4, 4-1/2, 5
American RVP-VI 1
or
Mercury 206 Pulse Transmitter 2, 3
Itron/Actaris/Schlumberger/
Sprague Diaphragm Meters
675A, 800A, 1000A

1 One pulse per revolution of the index test hand. 2 One pulse per revolution of the instrument drive. 3 American Meter Mounting Kit Part #20-4187, MS Code 230504 is required to install Mercury 206 Pulse Transmitter on Rockwell and Sprague meters.

Ordering Instructions

When ordering a volume pulser, specify the make and model of the pulser and the make and model of the gas meter.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 3 of 4

Volume Pulse Output Connection for Gas Meters J-65.1

Rev. #04 10-01-13

Target Audience

Gas control technicians, gas measurement technicians, gas transmission and regulation (T&R) supervisors, gas estimators and gas engineers

Definitions

NA

Acronyms and Abbreviations Vac: Volt alternating current AWG: American wire gauge Vdc: Volt direct current

NEC: National Electric Code

Compliance Requirement/ Regulatory Commitment

NA

References

Volume Pulse Output Connection for Mercury Electronic Correctors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-65.2 Agreement to Install Applicant Requested Common Special Facilities - Gas and Electric Rule 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79-1049

Appendices

NA

Attachments

NA

Revision Notes

Revision 04 has the following changes:

  1. Added AC-630 in Table 2.

  2. This document is part of Change 66.

Asset Type: Gas Metering Function: Design and Construction Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 4 of 4 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

METER GUARD DESIGN AND INSTALLATION

ARRANGEMENT

J-95

Publication Date: 05/15/2019 Effective Date: 08/15/2019 Rev. 3a

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard (GDS) provides requirements and instructions for selecting and installing new and retrofitted gas meter guards for residential and commercial meters subject to vehicular traffic. This GDS is used during other meter set work to correct any unprotected meter sets. These meter guards protect against incidental bump damage during typical low-speed maneuvering (i.e., turning, backing, etc.). Post installation must be done in accordance with Utility Standard TD-4412S, “Preventing Damage to Underground Facilities.” Always Dig Safely and call 1-800-227-2600 before digging.

General Information

  1. Physical protection must be provided for any gas meter set located in one of the areas described below:

A. Type 1 Locations

(1) Within 3' of the following:

   - A single-family driveway or parking area.
  • A roadway, street, alley, or driveway with a curb.

(2) Within 8' of the following:

   - Multi-family driveway or parking area.

   - A roadway, street, alley, or driveway without a curb.

B. Type 2 Locations

(1) Within 3' of a commercial refuse container location.

(2) Within 8' of the following:

   - A commercial or industrial driveway or parking area.

   - A loading dock or freight handling area.

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

Page 1 of 8

Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement J-95

Publication Date: 05/15/2019 Effective Date: 08/15/2019 Rev. 3a

Selection and Installation

  1. If a meter location is at risk of vehicular damage, protect the location with barrier posts as follows:

    • Install meter posts so that they do not obstruct vehicular traffic, inconvenience customers, or hamper gas meter maintenance and meter reading.

    • Install all utilities before installing the barrier posts.

    • Provide barrier posts on all sides of the meter set that are exposed to vehicle hazards and that are not already protected by existing structures. Final arrangement of the barriers must not allow a vehicle approaching at any angle to damage the meter set.

    • Install all posts at the same height.

  2. Protection for Type 1 Locations

A. A 2" diameter post should be used to provide protection for meter sets in Type 1 locations. See Figures 1–4 and Tables 1–3 for installation instructions. Protect gas meter sets in residential areas using minimum 2" diameter, Schedule 40 steel posts.

  1. Protection for Type 2 Locations

A. A 4" diameter post should be used to provide protection for meter sets in Type 2 locations. See Figures 1–4 and Tables 1–3 for installation instructions. Protect gas meter sets in commercial and industrial areas using concrete-filled, minimum 4" diameter, Schedule 40 steel posts.

Note: When field conditions do not permit exact compliance with these requirements, alternatives may be proposed. Alternative meter guard arrangements must sufficiently protect the meter set and ensure adequate distance for maintenance and meter reading. A meter guard may be used in conjunction with man-made barriers such as wing-walls, planters, fences, etc., to provide protection; these barriers may be 6" or higher curbs, large trees, permanently installed planters, barrier posts, fences, or other similar permanent structures.

Page 2 of 8 ©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Gas Design Standard Template

PG&E Internal Information

Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement J-95

Publication Date: 05/15/2019 Effective Date: 08/15/2019 Rev. 3a

Figure 1. Post Installation

Note: Post should extend 6" above the highest point on the meter set, but not to exceed maximum height above grade.

Table 1. Dimensions for Concrete Footing

A
(inches)
B
(inches)
12 8
15 8
20
6

PG&E Internal Information ©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

Page 3 of 8

Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement J-95

Publication Date: 05/15/2019 Effective Date: 08/15/2019 Rev. 3a

Note: The concrete footing must be at least 6" away from any point on the riser. If the post is positioned above an underground gas service, a minimum distance of 3" must be maintained between the service and the concrete footing.

Figure 2. Multiple Meters Post Arrangement

Figure 3. Single Meter Post Arrangement Figure 4. Single Post Arrangement

Table 2. Dimensions for Post Arrangement

C1
(inches)
Maximum D2
(inches)
Less than 12 Space posts to prevent vehicle from contacting meter set,
but leaving room for meter access and maintenance.
12 18
15 24
18 30
24
42

1 Distance to meter or regulator. 2 May not be more than 42".

Page 4 of 8 ©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Gas Design Standard Template

PG&E Internal Information

Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement J-95

Publication Date: 05/15/2019 Effective Date: 08/15/2019 Rev. 3a

Table 3. Post Materials

Description Length Code
Yellow - 2" Diameter, Schedule 40, Galvanized Pipe,
with Reflective Tape 2" wide, and Steel Cap
56" 150117
Gray - 2" Diameter, Schedule 40, Galvanized Pipe
with Reflective Tape 2" wide, and Steel Cap
56" 234188
Yellow - 4" Diameter, Schedule 40, Galvanized Pipe, with Reflective Tape 2" wide
78" 150122

Riser Protection Method

  1. This method may be implemented in cases where only impact perpendicular to the structure is a threat. If there is a threat of lateral impact, install standard meter posts.

A. A 4-1/2" Split Steel Pipe With Mounting Flanges

WARNING

Respiratory distress can result from welding flanges onto galvanized steel if the area is not

well-ventilated or an approved respirator is not worn.

 - Use caution when welding flanges onto galvanized steel.

 - Bolt pipe directly to the existing structure.

CAUTION

Covering the service valve makes the valve impossible to access

without first removing the riser protection.

 - Use to cover any portion of the riser in danger of vehicular damage, but **DO NOT**

cover the service valve.

 - See Figures 5 and 6, and Table 4, for installation instructions.

PG&E Internal Information ©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

Page 5 of 8

Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement J-95

Publication Date: 05/15/2019 Effective Date: 08/15/2019 Rev. 3a

Figure 5. Riser Protection Method

Figure 6. Riser Protected by Riser Guard

Table 4. Materials for Riser Protection

Description Code
4-1/2" Half-Rolled Steel Pipe, Galvanized
150133

Target Audience

Design engineering, estimating, field services, maintenance and construction (M&C), gas transmission and regulation (T&R), and general construction (GC) personnel, and damage prevention process owners.

Definitions

NA

Page 6 of 8 ©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Gas Design Standard Template

PG&E Internal Information

Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement J-95

Publication Date: 05/15/2019 Effective Date: 08/15/2019 Rev. 3a

Acronyms and Abbreviations

CFR: Code of Federal Regulations DOT: Department of Transportation GC: General Construction GDS: Gas Design Standard M&C: Maintenance and Construction T&R: Transmission and Regulation

Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment

California Fire Code, Section (§) 603.9, “Gas meters.”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, §192.803, “Definitions.”

49 CFR §192.353, “Customer meters and regulators: Location.”

References

American Welding Society, Safety and Health Fact Sheet No. 25: Metal Fume Fever

Electric and Gas Service Requirements, “Meter Protection”

Gas Design Standard J-15, “Gas Meter Locations”

Utility Standard TD-4412S, “Preventing Damage to Underground Facilities”

Appendices

NA

Attachments

NA

Revision Notes

Revision 3a has the following changes:

  1. In Table 3, added new material code for gray 2" posts, and added color descriptions to the two other protection posts listed in the table.

Revision 3 (Publication Date: 10/18/2017 Effective Date: 11/01/2017) has the following changes:

  1. Moved the Dig Safely message from the bottom of each page to the Purpose and Scope section.

  2. Re-wrote Selection and Installation section for greater clarity.

  3. In Table 3, added new descriptions of the protection posts, and removed stand-alone visibility strips and 2" end cap.

PG&E Internal Information ©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template

Page 7 of 8

Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement J-95

Publication Date: 05/15/2019 Effective Date: 08/15/2019 Rev. 3a

Asset Type: Distribution Mains, Distribution Services, Measurement & Control

Function: Design, Construction, Maintenance and Operation

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 8 of 8 ©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Gas Design Standard Template

PG&E Internal Information

K: Pits, Vaults, Boxes, and Shelters

Prepared by: JTMZ

Purpose and Scope

This numbered document provides specifications and ordering information for single, residential gas meter cabinets.

Safety Note

The cabinets shown in this numbered document are intended to be built into the wall of a structure. The fabricated non-flammable/non-metallic cabinet and door(s) must be sealed at all joints and penetrations from the inside with caulking or other appropriate sealant and must be vented to the outside to prevent any gas from leaking into the structure. If constructed from wood, it must be lined with sheet rock or other non-flammable material.

The prefabricated American Gas Products (AGP) ABS plastic cabinet part number J-40 (with solid cover) is an approved alternate for the fabricated cabinet. Order from American Gas Products (AGP) Inc. P.O. Box 4777, Anaheim, CA 92803.

General Information

Fabricated Non-Flammable/Non-Metallic Cabinets (see Figure 1)

  1. Cabinets and door(s) shall be made from non-flammable wall board, or other suitable material. If constructed from wood, it must be lined with sheet rock or other non-flammable material. Review local codes to ensure that the cabinet complies with any fire rating requirements.

  2. Cabinets and cabinet doors shall not be fabricated from metal in order to minimize the potential for interference with SmartMeter radio frequency (RF) signal transmission.

  3. Seal all joints and penetrations from the inside with caulking or other appropriate sealant.

  4. The box width and height dimensions are the minimum inside dimensions needed for maintenance and operating activities. These dimensions may be increased to suit local conditions, but should be kept as close as practical to the specified minimums to discourage customers from using the box for storage purposes.

  5. The right side door should be louvered or otherwise vented at the top and bottom as shown. It shall be held closed with two slide-bolt latches located on the outside. Other types of latches can be used.

  6. Lock the solid door closed using two slide-bolt latches located on the inside. Both doors shall open fully to allow servicing of the meter and regulator.

  7. Electrical wiring is permitted in the cabinet only if the wiring is within sealed conduit with no joints, or the wiring meets the requirements of the National Electric Code for Class I, Division 1 areas. The conduit must not interfere with the meter, regulator, or piping.

  8. Take care not to paint the cabinet vents or the regulator’s internal relief valve (IRV) vent termination fitting openings and thereby obstruct the flow of air or gas.

Rev. #01: 11-18-11 K-51 Page 1 of 4

K: Pits, Vaults, Boxes, and Shelters Single Meter Cabinet for Domestic Gas Meters

30” Min.

Slide Bolts (Outside) (Typical)

Plexiglas Window for Reading Meter (6” x 4”)

1/8” Clearance All Around Between Door and Frame

Vent Openings, Louvered (Typical) (3” x 8” Rectangular, Preferred or 3” Diameter Minimum Size, Alternate)

2” x 4” Reinforcing Wedges (Typical) (As Required)

10” 10” 10” 1/8”
Clearance
10” 10” 10” 10” 10”
10” 10”
10”
18” Min.
36” Max. 36” Max. 36” Max.
36” Max.
36” Max.

(Typical)

Figure 1 Meter Cabinet

Prefabricated Plastic Cabinets (see Figure 2)

  1. The cabinet is designed to fit between studs on 16” centers.

  2. Add a second 2”x4” on each side of the cabinet to support the flange.

  3. Meter sizes up to AC630 will fit in the cabinet.

  4. Align the gas service riser with the “R” marking on the left side of the cabinet and stub out the connection to the customer’s houseline to align with the “HL” marking on the right side of the cabinet. Do not drill into or penetrate the back, sides, top, or bottom of the cabinet.

  5. Locate the meter to align with the figure outlined on the rear of the cabinet and connect the inlet and outlet piping as shown in Figure 3 on Page 4.

  6. The cabinet cover may be painted to match the building.

K-51 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #01: 11-18-11

K: Pits, Vaults, Boxes, and Shelters

Single Meter Cabinet for Domestic Gas Meters

1/2” 3
1/2”

Top View

39-1/2”

24”
24” 24” 24” 24” 24”
39-
24”
16”
24”
16”
16” 16” 16” 16”

Front View Side View

Figure 2 Prefabricated Plastic Meter Cabinet Dimensional Views

Rev. #01: 11-18-11 K-51 Page 3 of 4

K: Pits, Vaults, Boxes, and Shelters Single Meter Cabinet for Domestic Gas Meters

Figure 3 Prefabricated Plastic Meter Cabinet Piping Installation View

Revision Notes

Revision 01 has the following changes:

  1. Added alternate prefabricated plastic cabinet.

  2. Changed description to “Cabinet” to agree with Numbered Document J-15.

  3. Added non-metallic cabinet door material requirement for SmartMeter RF signal transmission.

  4. Added maximum cabinet depth of 36”.

  5. This document is part of Change 64.

K-51 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #01: 11-18-11

L: Markers, Tags, Signs, Barricades and Fences

Prepared by: C1K8

Purpose and Scope

This numbered document provides guidelines for purchasing and installing underground warning tape above gas pipelines. The installation of the warning tape applies to all open trench installation of gas pipelines.

Acronyms

References Document

Design and Construction Requirements Gas Lines and Related Facilities . . . . . . . . . . A-36 Plastic Gas Distribution System Construction and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93.1 Joint Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5453

General Information

  1. A warning tape is to be installed in open trench installation over gas pipelines in both Transmission and Distribution facilities. This includes trenches, bell holes, excavations for repair purposes and riser replacements. The warning tape is intended for excavator digging in the “tolerance zone” to strike the warning tape prior than the pipeline. When the warning tape is exposed and grabbed with excavating equipment, it stretches without breaking, thus alerting the excavator of the gas facility below.

  2. Install 6” wide warning tape above the gas pipeline at least 12” below grade, and no closer than 12” from the pipe. Installation should provide the greatest distance between the pipeline and the tape as possible. Install the tape along the length of the excavation. Ensure that the tape overlaps when two or more pieces of tape are used.

EXCEPTION: When a joint trench design does not allow for installment of warning tape within the “warning tape installation zone”, install the warning tape a minimum of 6” above the gas pipeline, and below the facility above the pipe.

  1. Warning tape shall be brightly colored yellow and marked “Caution: Gas Line Buried Below” or marked with a similar notification.

  2. Warning tape shall be stored in such a manner that limits Ultraviolet (UV) exposure.

Rev. #00: 05-01-13 L-16 Page 1 of 2

L: Markers, Tags, Signs, Barricades and Fences Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape

Figure 1 Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape

Table 1 Material Specification for Figure 1

Description Dimensions Material Code
1 Roll (Terra Tape) 6” x 1000’ 379947

Finish Grade

Figure 2 Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape Installation

Revision Notes

Revision 00 has the following changes:

  1. This is a new document.

  2. This document is part of Change 66.

L-16 Page 2 of 2 Rev. #00: 05-01-13

GAS DESIGN STANDARD

PG&E-APPROVED GAS MATERIALS

MANUFACTURERS

N-01

Publication Date: 08/21/2019 Effective Date: 11/21/2019 Rev. 4a

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard (GDS) provides a partial list (see Table 1) of current Pacific Gas & Electric Company (PG&E or Company) approved manufacturers included in the Green Book for those without access to the complete list currently available via SAP.

General Information

  1. Not every Company-approved manufacturer supplies all the approved variations of each commodity. Refer to the appropriate reference document for approved part descriptions.

  2. If a plant location is not listed, then material from all manufacturing locations operated by the named manufacturer is approved for use. If a plant location is listed, then only material manufactured at that approved location is acceptable.

  3. The complete list of Company-approved manufacturers is stored and managed in the Qualified Suppliers List (QSL) on SAP. If other materials are needed, contact your local PG&E representative to obtain information from SAP.

Table 1. PG&E-Approved Manufacturers

Material Approved Manufacturer
(Plant)
Document Reference
PE Electrofusion
Fittings and
Tapping Tees
Innogaz (Goa, India and
Mannheim, Germany)

GDS B-90.3, “Electrofusion Fittings and Tapping Tees”
PE Electrofusion
Fittings and
Tapping Tees
IPEX-Friatec(Mannheim,
Germany)
IPEX-Friatec(Mannheim,
Germany)
PE Electrofusion
Fittings and
Tapping Tees
Plasson (Ma'agan Michael,
Israel)
Plasson (Ma'agan Michael,
Israel)
PE Excess Flow
Valves
Honeywell Perfection
(Geneva, OH)

GDS A-93.3, “Excess Flow Valves”
PE Fittings
Mechanical
Transition
Chicago Fittings
GDS B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe”
PE Fittings
Mechanical
Transition
Continental Industries
(Tulsa, OK)
Continental Industries
(Tulsa, OK)
PE Fittings
Mechanical
Transition
Normac Normac
PE Mechanical
Fittings
Continental Industries
(Tulsa, OK)

GDS B-91.1, “Polyethylene (PE) System
Mechanical Fittings”

EMS-4761, “Non-Corrodible Mechanical Fittings for
Polyethylene Gas Piping and Tubing”
PE Pipe & Tubing
JM Eagle (Tulsa, OK)
GDS A-93, “Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and
Design Considerations”

EMS-2502, “Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing, ½ in. and 1 in.”

EMS-2503, “Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Piping, 1-1/4 in. to 10 in.”
PE Pipe & Tubing
Performance Pipe (Knoxville,
TN)
Performance Pipe (Knoxville,
TN)
PE Pipe & Tubing
Performance Pipe
(Pryor, OK)
Performance Pipe
(Pryor, OK)
PE Pipe & Tubing
Performance Pipe
(Reno, NV)
Performance Pipe
(Reno, NV)
PE Pipe & Tubing
PolyPipe/Dura-line
(Gainesville, TX)
PolyPipe/Dura-line
(Gainesville, TX)

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 7

PG&E-Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers N-01

Publication Date: 08/21/2019 Effective Date: 11/21/2019 Rev. 4a

Table 1. PG&E-Approved Manufacturers (continued)

Material Approved Manufacturer
(Plant)
Document Reference
PE Saddle Fittings Central Plastics
(Shawnee, OK)

GDS B-90.1, “Plastic System Saddle Fittings”

EMS-4758, “Heat Fusion Fittings for Polyethylene (PE)
Gas Piping and Tubing”

EMS-4761, “Non-Corrodible Mechanical Fittings for
Polyethylene Gas Piping and Tubing”
PE Saddle Fittings Continental Industries
(Tulsa, OK)
Continental Industries
(Tulsa, OK)
PE Saddle Fittings Performance Pipe
(Bloomfield, IA)
Performance Pipe
(Bloomfield, IA)
PE Socket and Butt
Fusion Fittings
Central Plastics
(Shawnee, OK)

GDS B-90, “Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion
Fittings”

EMS-4758, “Heat Fusion Fittings for Polyethylene (PE)
Gas Piping and Tubing”
PE Socket and Butt
Fusion Fittings
Performance Pipe
(Bloomfield, IA)
Performance Pipe
(Bloomfield, IA)
PE System
Accessories
Continental Industries
(Tulsa, OK)

GDS B-90.2, “Polyethylene (PE) System Accessories”
PE System
Accessories
Performance Pipe
(Bloomfield, IA)
Performance Pipe
(Bloomfield, IA)
PE System
Accessories
JM Eagle (Tulsa, OK) JM Eagle (Tulsa, OK)
PE System
Accessories
Innogaz (Goa, India and
Mannheim, Germany)
Innogaz (Goa, India and
Mannheim, Germany)
PE System
Accessories
Plasson (Ma'agan Michael,
Israel)
Plasson (Ma'agan Michael,
Israel)
PE System
Accessories
Central Plastics
(Shawnee, OK)
Central Plastics
(Shawnee, OK)
PE Valves Andronaco (Kentwood)
GDS F-90, “Polyethylene (PE) Valves”
PE Valves Honeywell Perfection
(Geneva, OH)
Honeywell Perfection
(Geneva, OH)
PE Valves Kerotest (Mansoura, LA) Kerotest (Mansoura, LA)
Risers, Pre-
Fabricated Gas
Service, and Riser
Kits
Honeywell -Perfection
(Geneva, OH)

GDS A-91, “Pre-Fabricated Risers”

EMS-6421, “Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of
Pre-Fabricated Metal-Cased Plastic ¾ in. × ½ in. CTS and
¾ in. × 1 in. CTS Gas Service Risers”

EMS-7030, “Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of
Pre-Fabricated Metal-Cased Plastic 1¼″ × 1 CTS and 1¼″
× 1¼″ IPS Gas Service Risers”
Risers, Pre-
Fabricated Gas
Service, and Riser
Kits
R.W. Lyall (New Berlin, WI
and Corona, CA)
R.W. Lyall (New Berlin, WI
and Corona, CA)
Standard Threaded
Pipe Caps
Tube Forgings of America
(Forged Steel)

GDS B-10, “Standard Pipe Caps”
Standard Threaded
Pipe Caps
Ward (Malleable Iron) Ward (Malleable Iron)
Standard Threaded
Pipe Caps
Mill Iron Works (Forged
Steel)
Mill Iron Works (Forged
Steel)
Threaded Pipe
Plugs
Bonney Forge (Forged Steel)
GDS B-10.1, “Standard Pipe Plugs”
Threaded Pipe
Plugs
Advance Engineering
(Cast Iron)
Advance Engineering
(Cast Iron)
Standard Threaded
Steel Pipe Nipple
Perfect Pipe
GDS B-13, “Standard Threaded Steel Pipe Nipple”
Standard Threaded
Steel Pipe Nipple
Jinan Meide Jinan Meide
Extra Heavy
Threaded Steel
Pipe Nipples,
Toe Pipe Nipples
Perfect Pipe

GDS B-13.1, “Extra Heavy Pipe Nipples”

GDS B-13.2, “Threaded One End Pipe Nipples (Toe)”
GDS B-13.4, “Branch Nipple”

Page 2 of 7 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

PG&E-Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers N-01

Publication Date: 08/21/2019 Effective Date: 11/21/2019 Rev. 4a

Table 1. PG&E-Approved Manufacturers (continued)

Material Approved
Manufacturer (Plant)
Document Reference
Swage Nipples Mill Iron Works
GDS B-13.3, “Concentric Reducing Nipple
(Swage Nipple)”
Swage Nipples Perfect Pipe Perfect Pipe
Stainless Steel
Pipe Nipples
Swagelok
GDS B-13.5, “Stainless Steel Threaded Nipple”
Stainless Steel
Pipe Nipples
Hoke Hoke
Stainless Steel
Pipe Nipples
SSP TruFit SSP TruFit
Threaded Tees, Elbows,
Unions, and Bushings
Bonney Forge
(Forged Steel)

GDS B-12, “Standard 90° Threaded Elbows”

GDS B-12.1, “Standard Reducing 90° Elbows”

GDS B -12.2, “Standard 90° Threaded Street Elbows”

GDS B-12.3, “45° Threaded Elbow”

GDS B-14, “Standard Threaded Tee”

GDS B-14.1, “Standard Threaded Street Tee”

GDS B-14.2, “Reducing Threaded Tee”

GDS B-15, “Standard Threaded Unions”

GDS B-15.1 “Threaded Bushing”
Threaded Tees, Elbows,
Unions, and Bushings
Ward
(Malleable Iron)
Ward
(Malleable Iron)
Threaded Tees, Elbows,
Unions, and Bushings
Anvil
(Malleable Iron)
Anvil
(Malleable Iron)
Steel One-Piece Line
Stopper Fittings
Mueller
GDS C-16.3, “Mueller H-17190 Welding Line
Stopper Fitting”

GDS C-16.4, “Mueller H-17191 Mechanical Joint Like
Stopper Fitting”

GDS C-64.1, “TDW Shortstopp II: 6″—12″ Fitting”
Steel One-Piece Line
Stopper Fittings
TDW TDW
Steel Save-A-Valves Mueller
GDS C-14, “Mueller Save-A-Valve Nipples”
<2″ Diameter Steel
Seamless Pipe
PTC Alliance
(Darlington, SC)

GDS A-15, “Code Numbers for Steel Pipe”
<2″ Diameter Steel
Seamless Pipe
Michigan Seamless
Tube (South Lyon, MI)
Michigan Seamless
Tube (South Lyon, MI)
<2″ Diameter Steel
Seamless Pipe
Benteler Tube & Steel
(Shreveport, LA)
Benteler Tube & Steel
(Shreveport, LA)
Steel Service Tees Continental Industries
(Tulsa, OK)

GDS C-10, “Mueller Service Tees Types H-17500
and H-17501”

GDS C-10.1, “Mueller Flanged Tees Types H-17505 and
H-17506”

GDS C-11, “Mueller Valve, Tee-Type H-17656”

GDS C-13, “Service Tapping Tee with Coupon Retaining
Punch”

GDS B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe”
Steel Service Tees Mueller Mueller
Steel Two-Piece Line
Stopper Fittings
Mueller
GDS C-15.2, “Mueller Welding Line Stopper Fittings
H-17055, H-17056, H-17155, and H-17156”

GDS C-15.3, “Mueller Welding Line Stopper Fittings
H-17255, H-17256, H 17257, H-17275, H-17276,
and H-17277”
Steel Two-Piece Line
Stopper Fittings
Blackhawk (Stopple
fitting)
Blackhawk (Stopple
fitting)
Steel Two-Piece Line
Stopper Fittings
TDW (Stopple fitting) TDW (Stopple fitting)
Steel Two-Piece Line
Stopper Fittings with Bottom
Connection
Mueller
GDS C-16.2, “Mueller Welding Line Stopper Fittings with
Bottom Connection”
Steel Two-Piece Spherical
Line Stopper Fittings with
Bottom or Side Connection
Mueller
GDS C-17, “Mueller Spherical Line Stopper Fittings”
Steel Unions
Insulated Threaded
Central Plastics
GDS O-23, “Insulated Threaded Unions”

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 3 of 7

PG&E-Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers N-01

Publication Date: 08/21/2019 Effective Date: 11/21/2019 Rev. 4a

Target Audience

Personnel involved in gas engineering and construction inspection.

Definitions

NA

Acronyms and Abbreviations

PE: Polyethylene QSL: Qualified Suppliers List

Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Subpart B‒Materials

References

EMS-2502, “Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing, ½ in. and 1 in.”

EMS-2503, “Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Piping, 1-1/4 in. to 10 in.”

EMS-4758, “Heat Fusion Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Piping and Tubing”

EMS-4761, “Non-Corrodible Mechanical Fittings for Polyethylene Gas Piping and Tubing”

EMS-6421, “Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Pre-Fabricated Metal-Cased Plastic ¾ in. × ½ in. CTS and ¾ in. × 1 in. CTS Gas Service Risers”

EMS-7030, “Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Pre-Fabricated Metal-Cased Plastic 1¼″ × 1″ CTS and 1¼″ × 1¼″ IPS Gas Service Risers”

GDS A-15, “Code Numbers for Steel Pipe”

GDS A-91, “Prefabricated Risers”

GDS A-93, “Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations”

GDS A-93.3, “Excess Flow Valves”

GDS B-10, “Standard Pipe Caps”

GDS B-10.1, “Standard Pipe Plugs”

GDS B-11, “Standard Threaded Pipe Couplings”

Page 4 of 7 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

PG&E-Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers N-01

Publication Date: 08/21/2019 Effective Date: 11/21/2019 Rev. 4a

References (continued)

GDS B-11.1, “Threaded Reducers (Bell Reducers)”

GDS B-12, “Standard 90° Threaded Elbows”

GDS B-12.1, “Standard Reducing 90° Elbows”

GDS B-12.2, “Standard 90 Degree Threaded Street Elbows”

GDS B-12.3, “45° Threaded Elbow”

GDS B-12.4, “Reducing Street Elbow”

GDS B-13, “Standard Threaded Pipe Nipples”

GDS B-13.1, “Extra Heavy Pipe Nipples”

GDS B-13.2, “Threaded One End Pipe Nipples (TOE)”

GDS B-13.3, “Concentric Reducing Nipple (Swage Nipple)”

GDS B-13.4, “Branch Nipple”

GDS B-14, “Standard Threaded Tee”

GDS B-14.1, “Standard Threaded Street Tee”

GDS B-14.2, “Reducing Threaded Tee”

GDS B-15, “Standard Threaded Unions”

GDS B-15.1, “Threaded Bushing”

GDS B-90, “Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion Fittings”

GDS B-90.1, “Plastic System Saddle Fittings”

GDS B-90.2, “Polyethylene (PE) System Accessories”

GDS B-90.3, “Electrofusion Fittings and Tapping Tees”

GDS B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe”

GDS B-91.1, “Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings”

GDS C-10, “Mueller Service Tees Types H-17500 and H-17501”

GDS C-10.1, “Mueller Flanged Tees Types H-17505 and H-17506”

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 5 of 7

PG&E-Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers N-01

Publication Date: 08/21/2019 Effective Date: 11/21/2019 Rev. 4a

References (continued)

GDS C-11, “Mueller Valve, Tee-Type H-17656”

GDS C-13, “Service Tapping Tee with Coupon Retaining Punch”

GDS C-14, “Mueller Save-A-Valve Nipples”

GDS C-15.2, “Mueller Welding Line Stopper Fittings H-17055, H-17056, H-17155, and H-17156”

GDS C-15.3, “Mueller Welding Line Stopper Fittings H-17255, H-17256, H-17257, H-17275, H-17276, and H 17277”

GDS C-16.1, “Mueller Extension Stopper Fitting for Lateral Connections”

GDS C-16.2, “Mueller Welding Line Stopper Fittings with Bottom Connection”

GDS C-16.3, “Mueller H-17190 Welding Line Stopper Fitting”

GDS C-16.4, “Mueller H-17191 Mechanical Joint Line Stopper Fitting”

GDS C-16.5, “Mueller Extension Stopper Fitting for Lateral Connection”

GDS C-63, “T.D. Williamson M-Stopp Fitting (Mueller Compatible)”

GDS C-64.1, “TDW Shortstopp II: 6″—12″ Fitting”

GDS F-80, “Meter Valves”

GDS F-90, “Polyethylene (PE) Valves”

GDS J-50, “Meter Swivels and Swivel Nuts”

GDS J-52.1, “Gas Meter Manifolds (1-1/4″ and 2″ Sizes)”

GDS O-23, “Insulated Threaded Unions”

Appendices

NA

Attachments

NA

Page 6 of 7 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

PG&E Internal Information

PG&E-Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers N-01

Publication Date: 08/21/2019 Effective Date: 11/21/2019 Rev. 4a

Revision Notes

Revision 4a has the following changes:

  1. Table 1: Deleted cast iron material; extension stopper fittings; KWH as approved manufacturer for the PE Pipe & Tubing material group; and Chicago Fittings from the Risers, Pre-Fabricated Gas Service, and Riser Kits material group.

  2. Table 1: Added JM Eagle (Tulsa, OK), Plasson (Ma'agan Michael, Israel), Innogaz (Goa, India and Mannheim, Germany), and Central Plastics (Shawnee, OK) to the PE System Accessories group; Benteler to the <2″ Diameter Steel Seamless Pipe group; TDW to the Steel Two-Piece Line Stopper Fittings group.

  3. Table 1: Minor clarifications.

Revision 4, published 06/19/2019 and effective 09/18/2019, has the following changes:

  1. Purpose and Scope section revised to limit scope to a partial list of approved manufacturers for inclusion in the Green Book.

  2. Removed Notes 1 and 4 from General Information section, adding new Note 3 highlighting that the SAP QSL is now the complete list of Company-approved manufacturers and revising original notes (now Notes 1 and 2).

  3. Deleted items not typically applicable to applicant work from Table 1.

Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Compression

Function: Design

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation.

©2019 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 7 of 7

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

This document is also included in the following manual:

Purpose and Scope This document describes corrosion resistant ground rods and ground rod clamps.

References Location Document

Methods of Grounding Steel Transmission Poles and Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 012566 Method of Grounding Fences and Wire Trellises . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020607 Installation of Grounds on Wood Pole Transmission

and Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 021904 Ground Resistance and Resistivity Measurements . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 053241

Conventional Ground Rods

Notes

  1. Ground rods shall meet the requirements of ANSI Spec. C33.8 (UL 467).

  2. Welded-type connections may be used when welding equipment is available on the job.

Dia.

Table 1 Conventional Ground Rods

Copper Covering

Steel Core

Dimensions Minimum
Copper Jacket
Thickness
(inches)
Code Application Mfr.1 Catalog
Number
Dia. Length Length Length Length Length Length
5/8” 8’0” 0.010 187013 Normal Grounds for
Pad-Mount and Pole
Grounds
Nehring NCC 588
5/8” 8’0” 0.010 187013 Normal Grounds for
Pad-Mount and Pole
Grounds
Galvan 6258
5/8” 8’0” 0.010 187013 Normal Grounds for
Pad-Mount and Pole
Grounds
Calpico CP588
5/8” 8’0” 0.010 187013 Normal Grounds for
Pad-Mount and Pole
Grounds
Eritech 615880
3/4” 12’0” 0.010 010098 For Substation Grounds or
Ground Rods Larger Than
8’ 0” and All Subsurface
Primary Enclosures
Eritech 613412
3/4” 12’0” 0.010 010098 For Substation Grounds or
Ground Rods Larger Than
8’ 0” and All Subsurface
Primary Enclosures
Galvan 7512
3/4” 12’0” 0.010 010098 For Substation Grounds or
Ground Rods Larger Than
8’ 0” and All Subsurface
Primary Enclosures
Nehring NCC 3410

Figure 1 Ground Rod

1 Ground rods are to be furnished with the length and manufacturer’s identification permanently marked on each rod.

Rev. #06: 06-29-12 013109 Page 1 of 3

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps

Ground Rod Clamps

Ground Wire

ÇÇ
ÇÇ

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ

Figure 2 Figure 3 Standard Clamp Clamp for Large Wire

Table 2 Utility-Grade Ground Rod Clamps [1]

Ground Rod Clamp Setscrew Should Tighten Against the Ground Rod and Not Against the Ground Wire

Install the Ground Wire in the Clamp on the Side Opposite Setscrew

Ground Rod

Detail A Installation of Ground Rod

Refer to Ground Rod
Diameter
Ground Wire Size − Copper Code Manufacturer Catalog
Number
Figure 2 5/8” 6 to 1/0 187012 Hubbell/Anderson
Dossert
Eritech
Eritech
Galvan
GC103-01
Figure 2 5/8” 6 to 1/0 187012 Hubbell/Anderson
Dossert
Eritech
Eritech
Galvan
GN-62
Figure 2 5/8” 6 to 1/0 187012 Hubbell/Anderson
Dossert
Eritech
Eritech
Galvan
HDC58H
Figure 2 5/8” 6 to 1/0 187012 Hubbell/Anderson
Dossert
Eritech
Eritech
Galvan
SP58
Figure 2 5/8” 6 to 1/0 187012 Hubbell/Anderson
Dossert
Eritech
Eritech
Galvan
JAB58HH
Figure 2 5/8”
or
3/4”
2/0 to 4/0 With 5/8” Diameter
Rod
and
6 to 1/0 With 3/4” Diameter Rod
187017 Hubbell/Anderson
Dossert
Galvan
GC103-02
Figure 2 5/8”
or
3/4”
2/0 to 4/0 With 5/8” Diameter
Rod
and
6 to 1/0 With 3/4” Diameter Rod
187017 Hubbell/Anderson
Dossert
Galvan
GN-75
Figure 2 5/8”
or
3/4”
2/0 to 4/0 With 5/8” Diameter
Rod
and
6 to 1/0 With 3/4” Diameter Rod
187017 Hubbell/Anderson
Dossert
Galvan
JAB34HH
Figure 2 3/4” 4/0 and 250 kcmil 187024 Hubbell/Anderson
Dossert
GC103-03
Figure 2 3/4” 4/0 and 250 kcmil 187024 Hubbell/Anderson
Dossert
GNS-75
Figure 3
5/8” or 3/4” 300 to 500 kcmil 187020 Hubbell/Anderson
Burndy
Royal
GC-111-3D
Figure 3
5/8” or 3/4” 300 to 500 kcmil 187020 Hubbell/Anderson
Burndy
Royal
GAR6434
Figure 3
5/8” or 3/4” 300 to 500 kcmil 187020 Hubbell/Anderson
Burndy
Royal
2022(DQ)

1 The setscrew and clamp are to withstand approximately 35-40 foot-lbs. of torque on the setscrew head without cracking or breaking.

013109 Page 2 of 3 Rev. #06: 06-29-12

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps

Sectional Ground Rods

Notes

  1. Remove the driving head and upper coupling from the ground rod to permit installing a ground rod clamp, (see Table 2 on Page 2), when the ground rod has been driven to its final depth.

  2. After driving a second sectional rod, check the rod with a wrench to ensure that the bottom of the second rod is contacting the top of first rod in the threaded coupling. Repeat this check on each additional rod used.

Driving Head

Threaded Coupling See Note 1

See Detail B

5/8” Dia.

Threaded Coupling

Dimensions Code Application Manufacturer Catalog
Number
Dia. Length Length Length Length Length
Dia. Length Length Length Calpico S5810T
Dia. Length Length Length Eritech
635800

Detail C Threaded Bronze Coupling

See Detail C

Table 3 Sectional-Type Ground Rods

Detail B Sectional Ground Rod

Table 4 Threaded Bronze Coupling for 5/8” Diameter Sectional-Type Ground Rods

Threaded
Coupling Size
Code Application Mfr. Catalog
Number
5/8” 187022 For Connecting
Ground Rods
(see Table 3)
Calpico C158
5/8” 187022 For Connecting
Ground Rods
(see Table 3)
Eritech CR-58
5/8” 187022 For Connecting
Ground Rods
(see Table 3)
Galvan 60−C

Figure 4 Typical Assembly

Revision Notes

Table 5 Driving Head for 5/8” Diameter Sectional-Type Ground Rods

Detail D Driving Head

Driving Head Catalog
Driving Head
Size
Code Application Mfr. Catalog
Number
5/8” 187023 For Driving Ground
Rods (see Table 3)
Calpico D358
5/8” 187023 For Driving Ground
Rods (see Table 3)
Eritech DS58
5/8” 187023 For Driving Ground
Rods (see Table 3)
Galvan 60−DS

Revision 06 has the following changes:

  1. Updated Table 2 on Page 2.

Rev. #06: 06-29-12 013109 Page 3 of 3

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook

Prepared by: MZGD

Purpose and Scope

This document provides application and ordering information for cable connectors and terminals for use in underground distribution systems.

General:

This document applies to connectors for copper-to-copper, copper-to-aluminum, and aluminum-to-aluminum conductors. The use of aluminum conductors and the necessity of splicing aluminum-to-copper presents some specific problems as follows.

  1. All connectors shall meet the requirements of ANSI C119 Class A .

  2. Oxide Film

Unlike copper, aluminum is normally covered with a thin, hard film of invisible aluminum oxide. This film is a good insulator and forms immediately whenever aluminum is exposed to air. Therefore, aluminum connectors must meet the following requirements.

A. Connectors should exert sufficient pressure on the cable to break through the oxide film.

B. Connectors should exert approximately equal pressures on all strands.

  1. Thermal Expansion and Plastic Flow

The difference in the thermal expansion of copper and aluminum must be addressed. Aluminum expands and contracts approximately 38% more than copper with the same temperature change. Copper connectors and copper cables expand together as do aluminum connectors and aluminum cables.

If copper connectors are used on aluminum cables, the aluminum cable expands more than the copper connector. As the temperature rises this causes the aluminum to extrude out of the connector. When the joint cools, the copper connector cannot shrink to fit the reduced diameter of the aluminum conductor. This cycle, repeated over time, results in loose connections and high resistance joints. Therefore, it is important to use connectors that have the same coefficient of expansion as the cable. For example, copper connectors with copper cable and aluminum connectors with aluminum cable.

Aluminum-to-copper connections must be made with special aluminum connectors designed to run cooler than the copper comductor and compensates for the difference in the coefficient of expansion. These connectors have a larger mass than standard aluminum connectors.

  1. Corrosion

A. Electrolysis : The third characteristic of aluminum that affects connectors is not peculiar to aluminum alone but is common to all metals. Aluminum in contact with another metal in the presence of moisture will have an electrolysis action.

This problem exists in the connection of aluminum-to-copper, and the electrolysis action causes corrosion of the anode material (aluminum), leaving the cathodic material (copper) undamaged.

B. Chemical: Moisture in the absence of air reacts with aluminum forming aluminum hydroxide, which, in a very short time, will seriously corrode the aluminum material.

It is of extreme importance that aluminum conductors and connectors installed underground be free of moisture. Special care must be used to prevent moisture from entering into underground splices by using an inhibitor, and carefully and correctly taping or sealing splices.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 1 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

  1. General Rules for Battery Presses.

A. A 6-ton in-line or pistol grip battery-powered press is equivalent to the older mechanical hand tools used for pressing connectors - for example, the Burndy MD6-8 tool.

B. A 6-ton tool uses the same dies and the same number of compressions that the mechanical hand tool does.

C. If the connector is stamped with a die designation of HYD, it means a 12-ton tool is necessary with a U die. In the past only 12-ton presses were hydraulic. Examples:

� A Kearney 303 connector shows “HYD O DIE”. This means a 12-ton tool with a U-O die (with 1 compression) is required. An O die in a 6-ton tool is not sufficient.

� A Kearney 308 connector shows “HYD D OR D3 DIE”. This means a 12-ton tool with a U-D or U-D3 die (with 1 compression) is required.

D. If the connector is stamped with a die designation of HAND or MEC, it means a 6-ton tool can be used with a W die. Example:

� A Kearney 302 connector shows “HYD B – MEC K”. This means a 6-ton tool with a W-KK die (with 3 compressions) can be used or a 12-ton tool with a U-B die (with 1 compression) can be used. The 6-ton tool is much lighter than the 12-ton tool and is preferred for ergonomics.

6. For information on multi-tap splices for 600V insulated cable refer to Document 036640

  1. All information for field drilling connectors has been removed in this revision (16). Use range taking connectors (shearbolt) when dealing with non-standard cable sizes.

  2. Ground terminal connector has been replaced with a more robust design. See Table 10 on page 14.

Application

  1. There are four general types of connectors: solder sweated, bolted, compression, and shear-bolt. The advantages, disadvantages, and normal application of these four types of connectors are described in Table 1.

  2. Compression tap connectors, Pages 15 through 18, are the preferred connectors for residential and light commercial installations.

Table 1 UG Connector Comparison

Connector Type Application Advantages Disadvantages
Solder Sweated
Split Tinned
Copper1
For Copper-to-Copper Straight
Connections (Page 13)
 Inexpensive
 Excellent Electrical
Connection
 Special Tool Required
 Must Be Sweated on
(increasing time and labor)
 Limited to Copper Cables
Bolted Terminals and Tap Connections
Rated Less Than 600 V
(Pages 14, 28, 30,
32, and 36 - 37)
 Fast and Easy Install
 Wide Range of Sizes
 No Special Tools
Required
 Low Cost
 More Difficult to Seal
Compression
(preferred)
Straight and Tap Connections for
Copper and Aluminum Cables
(Pages 8 - 12, 17 - 27,
33 - 35, and 38)
 Preferred Electrical
Connection
 Ease of Installation
 Requires Specific Tools and Dies
Shearbolt Straight and Y & H
Cold-Shrink Splices
 Range Taking
 Excellent Electrical
Connection
 Ease of Installation
 No Special Tool
Required
 More Expensive
  1. Use only with paper-insulated lead-covered (PILC) Cable.

015251 Page 2 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

References Location Document

Joints for 15 kV Three-Conductor Paper-Insulated Lead-Covered Cable for Use on 12 kV Circuits . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022709 Method of Terminating 15 kV Paper Insulated Lead-Covered Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022820 Splice for Leaded to Non-Leaded Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022824 Splice for 5 kV and 15 kV Type RO&N Cable Single Conductor Shielded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022827 Method of Terminating 5 kV Single Conductor Non-Leaded Rubber-Type Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRO: UG-1 Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022828A Method of Terminating 15 kV and 22 kV Single Conductor XLPE-PVC and EPR-PVC Cables (compound filled pothead) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRO: UG-1 Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022829A Street Light Cable Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022830 Method of Terminating Single Conductor Non-Leaded Varnished Cambric Insulated Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRO: UG-1 Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022831A Splice for Varnished Cambric Insulated Cable With Flameproof Jacket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022832 Installation of Cable Risers on Wood Poles . . . . . . . . . OH: Risers/UG-1 Terminations . . . . . . . . . 027742

  1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022832 Installation of Cable Risers on Wood Poles . . . . . . . . . OH: Risers/UG-1 Terminations . . . . . . . . . 027742

Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028114 Distribution Transformer Requirements for Vault Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRO: UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 030362B Installation of Single-Phase 12 kV Pad-Mounted Transformer Underground Residential Areas . . . . . . FRO: UG-1 Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 032768A Joints for 15 kV & 25 kV Single Conductor Paper Insulated Lead-Covered Cable for Use on 12 kV & 22 kV Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 033585 10 Arrangement 12 kV Switch and Bus Cells . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 033701 Distribution Transformer Requirements, Single-Phase and Three-Phase, Overhead-Type . . OH: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 034963 Installation of Single-Phase 7,200 V Pad-Mounted Transformer Underground Residential Areas . . . . . . FRO: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 034978A Single-Phase, Subsurface, Round Transformers . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035313

=003710481) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 034978A Single-Phase, Subsurface, Round Transformers . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035313

                 [Installation of Subsurface, Load](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdoctdm.asp?itemid=981910003) Break, and

Dead-Break Primary Junction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035380 Multi-Tap Splice for 600-Volt Insulated Cables . . . . . . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 036640 Installation of 200-Amp, Subsurface Sectionalizing Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039954 Cables for Underground Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039955

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039954 Cables for Underground Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039955

     Compression [Type Connectors for Overhead](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdocTDM.asp?itemid=981530085)

Distribution and Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041010 Splices for 15 kV and 22 kV XLP-PVC and EPR-PVC Cable Single-Conductor Shielded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041583 Termination for 15 and 22 kV XLP-PVC, EPR-PVC, and XLP-CONC-PVC Cables Single Conductor Shielded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041584 Installation of Live-Front, Low-Profile, Single-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 042762 Installation of Low Profile Single-Phase 6.9 kV Pad Mounted Transformer Underground Residential Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 042765 Installation of Three-Phase, Radial-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043817

s) Installation of Three-Phase, Radial-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043817

                      [Splices for 15 kV and 22 kV Concentric](http://webedm/cgi-bin/searchELS.asp?server=dmsedm01&System=dmsels01&View=idmDocCustom1,idmDocCustom7,idmDocCustom9,idmName,idmDocCustom5&Rename=View,Prop,Drawing,Sheet,Rev,Title,Date&MZ_VL_idmDocCustom1=015051&MZ_OP_idmDocCustom1=equals) Type Cable

(PE-CONC, XLP-CONC and XLP-CONC−PVC) . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043901

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 3 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

References (continued) Location Document Method of Terminating 15 KV and 22KV I/O & Smaller Concentric Type Cable − XLP-CONC−PVC & XLP-CONC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043902

,Prop,Drawing,Sheet,Rev,Title,Date&MZ_VL_idmDocCustom1=043902&MZ_OP_idmDocCustom1=equals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043902

         -             Installation of Loop [Style, Three](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdoctdm.asp?itemid=981910023) Phase,

Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045291 Installation of Three-Phase, 600-Amp, Subsurface Sectionalizing Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 050859 Straight and Tap Splice for 600 Volt Insulated Cable . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051034 600-Amp Separable Insulated Connectors . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051071 Premolded 600-Amp Splices for Primary Underground Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 053732 Pad-Mounted Transformers Installed Indoors . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook/EMWP . 057521

emid=981900053) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 053732 Pad-Mounted Transformers Installed Indoors . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook/EMWP . 057521

-     Single [Phase, Dead](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdocTDM.asp?itemid=981910040) Front, and Duplex,

Pad-Mounted Transformer Installations . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 064308 Cold Shrink 600-Amp Splices for Primary Underground Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066204 Fired Wedge Connectors for Primary and Secondary Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066194 24 kV 1/0 Cable Joint for Use on 22 kV Circuits, PILC Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306644

,Prop,Drawing,Sheet,Rev,Title,Date&MZ_VL_idmDocCustom1=306644&MZ_OP_idmDocCustom1=equals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306644

� Straight Cold Shrink 15 KV Transition Splices where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80dfd28c' and any r_version_label='3.0') . . . . . ELS where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80dfd28c' and any r_version_label='3.0') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072152 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80dfd28c' and any r_version_label='3.0') Cold-Shrinkable Trifurcating 600-Amp 15KV where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e10275' and any r_version_label='1.0') Transition Splice where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e10275' and any r_version_label='1.0') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e10275' and any r_version_label='1.0') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076245 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e10275' and any r_version_label='1.0') Cold-Shrinkable Straight 600-Amp 15 KV where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e20b15' and any r_version_label='1.0') Transition Splice where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e20b15' and any r_version_label='1.0') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e20b15' and any r_version_label='1.0') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076246 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e20b15' and any r_version_label='1.0') Medium Voltage Y and H Splices for Manhole Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076261 Grounding of Tape Shield and Flat Strap where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad83b42c6f' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Neutral Cables where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad83b42c6f' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad83b42c6f' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076264 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad83b42c6f' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

e.com/D2/?docbase=pge_ecm&commandEvent=D2_ACTION_CONTENT_VIEW&locateDql=pge_document(all) where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad83b42c6f' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076264 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad83b42c6f' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

015251 Page 4 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Table 2 Connectors − Pictorial Index
Connector Type Type Page Application Application
Connector Type Type Page Cable Document1
Straight Connectors Compression 8 to 9 Copper-to-Aluminum 022824
022827
022830
041583
043901
051034
10 & 15 Aluminum-to-Aluminum Aluminum-to-Aluminum
11 to 13 Copper-to-Copper 022709
022824
022827
022830
022832
033585
041583
043901
051034
Shearbolt 2 Bi-Metal Copper or
Aluminum
066204
072152
076245
076246
Split Connectors Solder 13 Copper-to-Copper 022709
022824
022827
022830
022832
033585
041583
043901
051034
Tap Connectors Bolted 14 Copper-to-Copper
(San Francisco and Oakland
Network only)
051034
Compression 15 to 20 Aluminum-to-Aluminum or
Aluminum-to-Copper
(for secondary conductors)
Aluminum-to-Aluminum or
Aluminum-to-Copper
(for secondary conductors)
19 to 21 Copper-to-Copper
(for secondary conductors)
Copper-to-Copper
(for secondary conductors)
Terminal Connectors Terminal Connectors 22 to 27 Aluminum-to-Copper
(for transformer spade
terminals)
032768A
034978A
042762
042765
043817
045291

1 For a description of the application document, see “References” on Page 3 .

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 5 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Table 2 Connectors − Pictorial Index (continued)
Connector
Ê
Type Type Page Application Application
Connector
Ê
Type Type Page Cable Document1
Ê Terminal Compression 4 Bi-Metal Copper or
Aluminum
051071
Shearbolt 4 4 076261
Terminal Connectors Bolted 28 to 31 Copper
(for transformer spade
terminals, non-preferred)
028114
030362B
033701
Terminal Connectors Bolted 32 Copper
(transformer terminals)
028114
030362B
033701
Ground Terminal Bolted 14 Copper
(equipment tank grounds
and primary concrete
enclosures)
035313
035380
039954
050859
Tap Connectors Bolted 32 Copper-to-Copper 022828A
022829A
022831A
32 Copper-to-Aluminum 042762
042765
Compression 33 Aluminum-to-Aluminum
Copper-to-Aluminum
Copper-to-Copper
041583
043901
Slip-Fit Connectors Bolted 36 Aluminum or Copper 064308
Multiple Transformer
Terminal
Bolted 37 Aluminum or Copper 043817
045291
Pin Terminals Compression 38 − 39 Aluminum or Copper 027742
041584
043902
Tool and Die Information Tool and Die Information Compression 7 Copper Cables
Aluminum Cables
Tool and Die Information Tool and Die Information Compression 8 8 8

1 For a description of the application document, see “References” on Page 3 .

015251 Page 6 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Applications of Straight Connectors Compression-Type (copper-to-aluminum)

Notes

  1. Circular dies should be used on all primary and secondary splices. In these small sizes, the indent-type dies seriously distort the connector.

  2. Tool index numbers may be applied to in-line cable-to-cable limiters.

  3. For the correct number of crimps, see the appropriate numbered document or the manufacturer’s instructions on the package. When the information is not available, make as many non-overlapping crimps as possible without going over the outer end.

  4. Pages 8 through 14 and 17 through 22 show compression-type connectors used to connect copper conductors to aluminum conductors. These connectors may also be used to connect aluminum-to-aluminum conductors.

  5. Table 3 on Page 8 and Table 4 on Page 9 show compression splice connectors which accommodate specific conductor sizes.

  6. Use a clean wire brush to remove oxides from the conductors prior to installing the connectors.

  7. After the connector has been pressed on, insulating and sealing of pressed connections is accomplished in the same manner as shown in Document 051034. Special attention must be given to the following:

A. Both ends of the aluminum connector should contain oxide inhibitor. Connectors shown in Table 3 on Page 8 and Table 4 on Page 9 are prefilled with inhibitor. See Document 028852 for approved oxide inhibitors.

B. After the connector has been pressed on the cable, excess oxide inhibitor must be wiped from the connector and conductor surface.

C. Use special care to ensure a moisture-proof splice.

  1. Solder-type connectors must not be used on aluminum conductors. This type of connection is only allowed on PILC cable.

  2. If several insulated aluminum conductors are to be connected to one insulated copper conductor, each aluminum conductor must first be spliced to a short length of copper conductor so that the multiple connection can be made with all copper conductors. This multiple connection may be a tee tap (or several tee taps) as shown in Document 051034.

  3. Special care must be used to prevent moisture from entering through the copper strands when connecting a bare stranded copper conductor to an insulated aluminum conductor (e.g., copper-to-aluminum neutral connection). See Figure 1 below for these connections.

Insulated PVC Tape (as required) Conductor

Figure 1 Connection Between Bare and Insulated Conductor

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 7 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Straight Connectors Compression-Type (predrilled) Copper-to-Aluminum

A

L

O
L
AA
BB
L
AA
BB
L
AA
BB

(copper or aluminum)

Crimps Made

Conductor A Conductor B

Figure 2 Figure 3 Overall Dimensions View After Connector Installation (for Figure 2)

Table 3 Compression-Type Connectors − Predrilled

Conductor Size
− AWG or kcmil
Connector Dimensions
(inches)
Manufacturer and Catalog Numbers 6-Ton Tool Die # 5
12-Ton Tool Die #
15-Ton ToolDie #
Connector
Code
A 1
(Cu or
Al)
B (Al) AA BB L 2 OD Burndy Richards Homac Homac Homac
4 2 1.03 1.03 2.75 0.65 SeeDocument 028852 SeeDocument 028852 SeeDocument 028852 W-BG
U-BG
U-BG4
3055583
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3055593
2 1 1 1 1 1 YR1CA2CCAG1 ALCR 8-7 SAC1R2 SAC1R2 305569
2 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 SeeDocument 028852 SeeDocument 028852 SeeDocument 028852 SeeDocument 028852 3055623
2 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 SeeDocument 028852
2 2/0 1.56 1.56 4.00 0.91 YR26A2CCAG1 ALCR 10-7 SAC2/0 R2 W249
U249
U2494
305571
2/0 2/0 2/0 2/0 2/0 2/0 YS26UG2 ALC 10 SAC2/0 SAC2/0 305581
2/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 YR27A26CAG1 ALCR
11-10
SAC3/0
R2/0
SAC3/0
R2/0
305582
2/0 4/0 4/0 4/0 4/0 4/0 YR28A26CAG1 ALCR
12-10
SAC4/0
R2/0
SAC4/0
R2/0
305585

1 Maximum copper conductor size. 2 These dimensions may vary slightly among the various suppliers. 3 These connectors are overhead-type insulated service sleeves. The insulation on these sleeves does not provide an adequate seal for underground application. These sleeves must be insulated and sealed as shown in Document 051034 as if they were bare. 4 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing U-dies in a 15-Ton press. 5 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.

se sleeves must be insulated and sealed as shown in Document 051034 as if they were bare. 4 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing U-dies in a 15-Ton press. 5 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.

015251 Page 8 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Straight Connectors Compression-Type (predrilled) Copper-to-Aluminum (continued)

Table 4 Compression-Type Connectors − Predrilled

Conductor
Size − AWG or
kcmil
Dimensions (inches) Manufacturer and Catalog Numbers 6-Ton Tool-Die # 4
12-Ton Tool Die #
15-Ton Tool Die #
Connect-
or
Code
A 1
(Cu or
Al)
B
(Al)
AA BB L 2 OD Burndy Richards Homac Homac Homac
250 250 1.86 1.86 4.62 1.12 YS29UG1 ALC 13 SACB250
U31ART
U31ART3
305586
250 300 300 300 300 300 YR30A29CAG1 ALCR 14-13 SAC300R250 SAC300R250 305602
250 350 350 350 350 350 YR31A29CA ALCR 15-13 SAC350R250 SAC350R250 305127
250 400 2.55 2.55 6.19 1.62 YR32A29CAG1 ALCR
16−13
SACL400R250
UI39ART
P39ART
305604
500/600 500 500 500 500 500 YS34APGE ALC 18 SACL500 SACL500 305108
500 600 600 600 600 600 YR36A34CA ALCR 20-18 SAC600R500 SAC600R500 305129
500 700,
750
700,
750
700,
750
700,
750
700,
750
YR39A34CA ALCR 25-18 SAC750R500 SAC750R500 305107
500 800 2.91 2.91 7.16 1.84 YR40A34CAG1 ALCR 24-18 SACF800R500

P44ART
305606
750 1,00
0
1,00
0
1,00
0
1,00
0
1,00
0
YR44AG3 ALCR 28-23 SAC1000R750 SAC1000R750 305023
For Circuits Above 5 kV For Circuits Above 5 kV For Circuits Above 5 kV For Circuits Above 5 kV For Circuits Above 5 kV For Circuits Above 5 kV For Circuits Above 5 kV For Circuits Above 5 kV For Circuits Above 5 kV For Circuits Above 5 kV For Circuits Above 5 kV
4 2 1.50 1.50 3.57 0.65 YR2CA4CCATG1 OATCR7-5 SAC2R4 W-BG
U-BG
U-BG3
305607
2 2 2 2 2 2 YS2CUTG1 OATC 7 SAC2 SAC2 305608
2 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 YR25A2CCATG3 OATCR9-7 SAC1/0R2 SAC1/0R2 305609
2/0 4/0 2.08 2.08 4.82 0.91 YR28A26CATG2 OATC 12-10 SAC4/0R2/0 W249
U249
U2493
305610
250 350 2.61 2.96 6.66 1.12 YR31A29CAT OATC15-13 SAC350R250
U31ART
U31ART3
305143
500/600 700,
750
3.75 4.19 9.41 1.62 YR39A34CAT OATC23-18 SAC750R500
U39ART
P39ART
305403
750 1,00
0
4.10 4.10 9.09 1.84 YR44ATG1 OATC28-13 SAC1000R750

P44ART
305611

1 Maximum copper conductor size. 2 These dimensions may vary slightly among the various suppliers. 3 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing U-dies in a 15-Ton press tool. 4 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.

Notes

  1. Connectors shall be pre-filled with an approved oxide inhibitor.

  2. All connectors shall have an oil stop.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 9 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Straight Connectors Compression-Type (aluminum-to-aluminum)

Crimps Made Between

L
B
B
L
B
B

Knurled Guide Lines Figure 4

View After Installation (for Figure 4)

Table 5 Dimensions and Ordering Information − Aluminum-to-Aluminum (Figure 4)

Conductor
Size
AWG or
kcmil
Refer to Dimensions
(inches)
Manufacturer and Catalog Number 6-Ton Tool Die # 4
12-Ton Toot Die #
15-Ton Tool Die #
Code
Conductor
Size
AWG or
kcmil
Refer to L B OD Burndy Richards Homac Homac Homac
2 Figure 5
On
Page 11
2.75 1.18 0.65 SeeDocument 028852 SeeDocument 028852 SeeDocument 028852 W-BG
U-BG
U-BG3
3055591
1/0 1/0 2.75 1.18 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 3055631
4/0 4/0 3.302 1.542 0.91 YS28AG9 ALC12 AC4/0 W249
U249
U2493
305616
350 350 6.97 3.38 1.12 YS31AY ALC15 AC350
U31ART
U31ART3
305148
700/750 700/750 8.28 4.00 1.62 YS39AY ALC23 AC750

U39ART
P39ART
305150
1,000 1,000 10.81 5.25 1.84 YS44AY ALC28 AC1000

P44ART
305618

1 These connectors are overhead-type insulated service sleeves (see Document 028852). The insulation on these sleeves will not provide an adequate seal for underground application. These sleeves must be insulated and sealed as shown in Document 051034 as if they were bare. 2 For Burndy & Richards, Dimension L = 2.34”, B = 1.09”. 3 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing u-dies with 15-Ton press. 4 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool

Notes

  1. Connectors shall be pre-filled with an oxide inhibitor.

  2. Connectors shown in Table 5 above are not suitable substitutes for the compression connectors supplied in the 3M pre-molded splice kits. The connector ODs supplied in the splice kits are larger than normal to provide a heat sink and facilitate sliding the pre-molded housing back and forth.

  3. These connectors are aluminum unplated finished and must be used only with aluminum cables.

015251 Page 10 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Straight Connectors Compression-Type (copper-to-copper)

Table 6 Straight Connectors − Compression-Type − Copper-to-Copper (Figure 4)

Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
Dimensions
(inches)
Manufacturer and Catalog Number 6-Ton Tool Die # 4
12-Ton Tool Die #
15-Ton Toot Die #
Code
Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
Length
(L)
OD Burndy Richards Homac Dossert Dossert Dossert
4 2.38 0.34 YSP4CT OCC5 PC-4 DPCP 4 W4CRT
U4CRT
U4CRT3
3051641
2 2 2.62 0.42 YSP2CT OCC7 PC-2 DPCP 6 W2CRT
U2CRT
UWCRT3
3051651
2/0 2.21 0.56 YS26T CC10 TC-2/0 DPC 13-T W26RT
U26RT
U26RT3
305283
2/0 3.13 0.56 YSP26T OCC10 PC-2/0 DPCP 13 DPCP 13 3051671
4/0 2.39 0.69 YS28T CC12 C-4/0 DPC 21-T W28RT
U28RT
U28RT3
305285
250 3.38 0.75 YSP29T OCC13 PC-250 DPCP 25
U29RT
U29RT3
3054291
250 3.38 0.75 YS29 CC13 C-250 DPC 25 DPC 25 305202
500 4.62 1.06 YSP34T OCC18 PC-500 DPCP 50
U34RT
U34RT3
3054281
500 4.63 1.06 YS34 CC18 C-500 DPC 50 DPC 50 305203
750 4.23 1.3 Y39T CC23 TC-750 DPC 75-T
U39RT
U39RT3
305488
1,000 6.13 1.50 YS44 CC28 C-1000 DPC 100

P44RT
305480
1,500 6.5 1.84 YS46 CC30 C-1500 DPC 150

P46RT
305511

1 These connectors have oil stops. These are more costly connectors and should only be used for splicing P&L cable to rubber or polyethylene insulated cables. 2 For #2 Solid, use Burndy 162 die index. Refer to Table 20 on Page 19 for Die ordering information. 3 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing u-dies with 15-Ton press. 4 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 11 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Straight Connectors Compression-Type (copper-to-copper)(continued)

Notes

  1. For material and finish information refer to “Specifications for Straight Compression Type Connectors for Insulated Copper Conductors”.

  2. Connectors shown in Figure 5 on Page 11 are to be used to connect cables of up to 35 kV rating or lower, and can be used on bare cables where such cables will not be subjected to tension.

  3. An indentor type compression die (clacker) should not be used on #4 or #2 AWG size connectors because itexcessively distorts the connector.

  4. Round the sector cable with rounder tool.

015251 Page 12 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Straight Connectors Solder-Type (copper-to-copper)

12 ° � 1 °

Radius = 50 mils or Wall Thickness, Figure 6 C Whichever Is Less

D

Table 7 Straight Connectors − Split Tinned-Type − Copper-to-Copper, All Voltages (Figure 6)

Cable Size
AWG or Kcmil
(round or compact
sector)
Nominal Dimensions − Inches Standard
Package
Burndy
Part
Number
Richards Code
Cable Size
AWG or Kcmil
(round or compact
sector)
A
ID
B
OD
C
(wall thickness)
D
(slot width)
E
(length)
E
(length)
E
(length)
E
(length)
E
(length)
8 5/32 3/16 1/32 1/32 1-1/2 200 SS8C8C RSS2 305041
6 3/16 1/4 1/32 1/32 1-1/2 200 SS6C6C RSS3 305042
4 7/32 5/16 1/32 1/32 2 100 SS4C4C RSS5 305043
2 9/32 3/8 1/32 1/32 2 100 SS2C2C RSS7 305044
1/0 3/8 1/2 1/16 1/16 2 100 SS2525 RSS9 305045
2/0 13/32 9/16 1/16 1/16 2 100 SS2626 RSS10 305046
3/0 15/32 5/8 1/16 1/16 2 100 SS2727 RSS11 305059
4/0 17/32 23/32 1/16 1/16 2-1/2 50 SS2828 RSS12 305047
250 9/16 25/32 3/32 1/8 2-1/2 50 SS2929 RSS13 305048
350 11/16 29/32 3/32 1/8 2-1/2 20 SS3131 RSS15 305324
400 23/32 31/32 1/8 1/8 3 10 SS3232 RSS16 305049
500 13/16 1-3/32 1/8 1/8 3 10 SS3434 RSS18 305050
600 29/32 1-3/16 1/8 5/32 3-1/2 10 SS3636 RSS20 305051
750 1-1/32 1-11/32 5/32 5/32 3-1/2 10 SS3939 RSS23 305052
1,000 1-5/32 1-9/16 3/16 7/32 4-1/2 1 SS4444 RSS28 305053
1,500 1-7/16 1-29/32 7/32 9/32 5 1 SS4646 RSS30 305054
2,000 1-21/32 2-7/32 1/4 9/32 6 1 SS4848 RSS32 305055

Notes

  1. For material and finish refer to “Edison Electric Institute Specification TD 160 “Specifications for Solder-Sweated Split Tinned Copper Connectors”.

  2. When splicing cables of different sizes, cut a sector from one half of the connector.

  3. When tinning and sweating the connector onto the conductors:

A. Protect the insulation.

B. Wipe smooth, removing all sharp solder points.

  1. Round the sector cable with a rounder tool.

Application These connectors must be used only to tap splices 5,000 V and above on copper cable in sizes larger than #2 AWG.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 13 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Bolted Connectors for Underground Network Systems

A. These copper alloy connectors are for making copper-to-copper current carrying connections on underground network secondary systems in San Francisco and Oakland.

Figure 7

Figure 8

Table 8 Split Bolt Connectors For Copper-to-Copper Connections (Figure 7)

Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
S
Solid Stranded
Nut
ize D
Torque
Inch-lbs.
(ft./ lbs)
Code Manufacturer and Catalog Number
Solid Solid Solid Solid Solid Blackburn Burndy Penn-Union Homac
10 10
7/16” 80 (7) 305026 9H KS90 S-10-S
8
8


1/2”
80 (7)
305027
8H
KS15
S-8-S
E-8
6
4
8

6
1/16”
3/4”

305028
305029
6H
4H
KS17
KS20
S-6-PGE
S-4-PGE
E-6
E-4
2 4
7/8” 305030 2H KS22 S-3-PGE E-2
1 2
7/8” 305031 1H KS23 S-2-S
2/0 1/0 1” 305032 10H KS25 S-1/0-S E-1/0
3/0 2/0
1-
1/18” 385 (32) 305033 20H KS26 S-2/0-S E-2/0
4/0 3/0, 4/0, 250
1-
5/16” 650 (54) 305034 40H KS29 S-250-PGE E-250

Table 9 Two Bolt Connectors for Copper-to-Copper Connections (Figure 8)

Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
Code Manufacturer and Catalog Number
Main Run Min.
Tap
Min.
Tap
Hubbell Blackburn Burndy Penn-Union AFL Homac
4/0 6 305431 K-3 2B40 KVS28 VT-2 DSU21
250 to 350 1/0 305432 K-4 2B350 KVS31 VT-3 DSU35 TBC 350
400 to 500 2/0 305433 K-5 2B500 KVS34 VT-4 DSU50 TBC 500
600 to 750 4/0 305434 K-6 2B800 KVS40 VT-5 DSU80 TBC 800
800 to 1,000 4/0 305435 K-7 2B1000 KVS44 VT-6 DSU1000 TBC 1000

Notes

  1. Connectors shown in Table 8 and Table 9 are for use on unshielded insulated cables rated 600 V or lower.

  2. Connectors shown in Table 8 may also be used to connect unshielded streetlighting cable.

  3. If necessary, double back on small size tap wires to obtain a tight fit.

  4. The connectors described on this page can be used on bare cables where such cables will not be subjected to tension.

  5. These connectors shall not be used in overhead applications.

Ground Terminal

1/2”-13NC Thread

HPS

1/2”-13NC Thread

Table 10 Ground Terminal (Figure 9)

Conductor Size
AWG
Manufacturer and Catalog Number Code
Conductor Size
AWG
Hubbell H − J H − J
#4 Str. − 2/0 GC-208 AS1372-002 M301546

Hubbell H−J

Figure 9

015251 Page 14 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Tap Connectors Compression-Type (#6 through 400 kcmil aluminum-to-aluminum or aluminum-to-copper)

Figure 10 H-Type Connector

Table 11 Tap Connectors − Compression-Type − Aluminum-to-Aluminum or Aluminum-to-Copper (Figure 10) [1]

Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
Tap
Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
#6 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Str. #2 Sol. #1 Sol. #2 Str. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 250 266.8 Str. 336.4 Str. 350 397.5 400
Run #6 Sol. Code
305507
Code
305507
Code
305507
Code
305507
Run #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol.
Run #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str.
Run #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol.
Run #1 Sol. Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Code
305509
Run #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str.
Run 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol.
Run 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. Code
305519
Code
305519
Code
305519
Code
305519
Code
305519
Code
305519
Code
305519
Code
305519
Code
305519
Code
305519
Run 2/0 Str. Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Code
305510
Run 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. Code
305831
Code
305831
Code
305831
Code
305831
Code
305831
Code
305831
Code
305831
Code
305831
Run 4/0 Str. Code
305520
Code
305520
Code
305520
Code
305520
Code
305520
Code
305520
Code
305520
Code
305830
Code
305830
Code
305830
Code
305830
Code
305830
Code
305830
Code
305830
Code
305830
Code
305830
Code
305830
Run 250 Code
305833
Code
305833
Code
305834
Code
305834
Code
305834
Code
305834
Code
305834
Code
305834
Run 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str. 266.8 Str.
Run 336.4 Str. Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Run 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350
Run 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5
Run 400 Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305832
Code
305833
Code
305833
Code
305834
Code
305834
Code
305834
Code
305834
Code
305834
Code
305834

1 For required number of compressions, Refer to Table 13 on Page 16.

Table 12 Aluminum Compression Connectors for Secondary Connections to Streetlight Conductors

Conductor Size (AWG) Tap
Conductor Size (AWG) Conductor Size (AWG) #10 Sol. #8 Sol.
Run #2 Str. Code 305842 Code 305842
Run 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str.
Run 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str.
Run 3/0 Str. Code 305843 Code 305843
Run 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 15 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Tap Connectors Compression-Type (#6 through 400 kcmil aluminum-to-aluminum or aluminum-to-copper) (continued)

Note

The material for these connectors is aluminum alloy.

Application These connectors are used for straight splice or tap, residential and light commercial.

Table 13 Aluminum H-Type Compression Connectors
Tools and Dies Data Tools and Dies Data Tools and Dies Data Tools and Dies Data Tools and Dies Data
Connector Code
1
6-Ton Tool 6-Ton Tool 12-Ton Tool 12-Ton Tool
Connector Code
1
Die Required # of
Compressions
Die Required # of
Compressions
305507 W-O 4 U-O 2
305509 305509 5 1 5 1 5 1
305510 W-D 5 1 U-D 2
305519 305519 305519 305519 305519
305520 305520 305520 305520 305520
305830 305830 7 7 3
305831 305831 305831 305831 305831
305832 U-N 2
305833 305833 305833 305833 305833
305834 305834 305834 305834 3
Connectors for Connection to Secondary Streetlight Conductors
305842 W-O 4 U-O 2
305843 W-D 4

1 These connectors are the same tap connectors shown in Document 041010.

Note

  1. Do not use the N Die with UT-15 tools

  2. Use U-die adapter with U-dies when a 15-ton press tool is utilized.

015251 Page 16 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Tap Connectors Compression-Type for Secondary Conductors (2/0 through 1000 kcmil aluminum-to-aluminum or aluminum-to-copper)

Table 14 Tap Connectors − Compression-Type for Secondary Conductors
Conductor
Size AWG or
kcmil
Conductor
Size AWG or
kcmil
Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap
Conductor
Size AWG or
kcmil
Conductor
Size AWG or
kcmil
2/0 3/0 4/0 250 268.8 300 397.5 500 600 636 700 715.5 750 900 1000
Run 397.5 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15 See Table 11 Page 15
Run 500 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521 Code 305521
Run 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Run 636 Code 305524 Code 305524 Code 305524 Code 305524 Code 305524 Code 305524 Code 305526 Code 305526 Code 305526 Code 305537 Code 305537 Code 305537 Code 305537 Code 305537 Code 305537
Run 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700
Run 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5
Run 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750
Run 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900
Run 1,000 Code 305804 Code 305804 Code 305804 Code 305875 Code 305875 Code 305875 Code 305976 Code 305976 Code 305976 Code 305976 Code 305976 Code 305976 Code 305976 Code 305976 Code 305976

Notes

4 1 2 3

Marking on Connector for Compression with R Die

Figure 11 Order of Compression Sequence

4 1 2 3
3

Position of Z Die on R Die Compression Markings

Figure 12 Installation Instructions for Z Die

Table 15 Ordering Data for Z Die for Use in UT-15 Hydraulic Tool

Die Designation Code Manufacturer and Catalog Number
Z 216248 Homac 15 CZ1

1 T&B equivalent 15620.

  1. The material of these connectors is aluminum alloy.

  2. Two dies can be used for compressing the aluminum H-Type connectors listed in above Table 14. These are the R and Z dies. Some manufacturers refer to both dies while others designate only the R die on their connectors. Homac, the supplier of the UT-15 hydraulic head, has standardized on the Z die. Since this tool is standard on the System, the Homac Z die catalog number 15 CZ, has been specified for use in the UT-15 head for compressing all connectors listed in above Table 14. The Z die is slightly wider than the R die and will overlap the R die guide markings on the connectors.

ly the R die on their connectors. Homac, the supplier of the UT-15 hydraulic head, has standardized on the Z die. Since this tool is standard on the System, the Homac Z die catalog number 15 CZ, has been specified for use in the UT-15 head for compressing all connectors listed in above Table 14. The Z die is slightly wider than the R die and will overlap the R die guide markings on the connectors.

  1. When using the Z die on connectors which require three compressions, make the first compression in the center. The Z die will overlap the crimp location markings on the connector since these markings are based on the narrower R die. Then make a compression on each side of the center compression, keeping the die even with the outside edge of the connector and overlapping the previously made center compression.

When using the Z die on connectors which require four compressions, make the first two compressions in the center portion of the connector, overlapping the centerline of the connector on each compression as shown in Figure 12. Then complete a compression on each end, overlapping the previously completed center compression sufficiently to maintain the outer edge of the die flush with the end of the conductor.

Application

These connectors are used for straight splice or tap, residential and light commercial.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 17 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Tap Connectors Compression-Type for Secondary Conductors (copper-to-copper)

Table 16 YP-C-Tap (Figure-6 Type) (Figure 13) Copper Connectors

Figure 13 Burndy YP-C-Tap Type

Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
Tap
Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
#6 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Str. #2 Sol. #1 Sol. #2 Str. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 4/0 Str.
Run #6 Sol. Code 305844 Code 305844 Code 305844 Code 305844 Code 305844 Code 305844 Code
012086
Code
012086
Run #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol.
Run #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str. #4 Str.
Run #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol.
Run #1 Sol. #1 Sol. #1 Sol. #1 Sol. #1 Sol. #1 Sol. #1 Sol. #1 Sol. #1 Sol. #1 Sol. #1 Sol. #1 Sol.
Run #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str.
Run 1/0 Sol. Code 305845 Code 305845 Code 305845 Code 305845 Code 305845 Code 305845 Code 305845 Code 305845 Code 305845 Code 305845
Run 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str.
Run 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 2/0 Str.
Run 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 3/0 Str.
Run 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str.
Run 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250

Table 17 Die Information for YP-C (Figure-6 Type) Connectors ( Figure 13)

Manufacture and
Catalog Numbers
Die 1, 2 Connector
Code
Required
Number of
Compressions
Brundy Dossert Die Die Die
YP2C2 DC6 U-O 305844 1
YP29C26 DC25−13 U-D3 305845 1
YP28C28 U-D3 012086 1

1 These dies use a 12-ton press tool. 2 Refer to Table 24 on Page 21 for Die ordering information.

015251 Page 18 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Tap Connectors Compression Type for Secondary Conductors (copper-to-copper (continued)

Table 18 Blackburn, Homac, Kearney and Penn-Union H-Tap

Figure 14 Blackburn, Kearney, Homac, Penn-Union H-Tap Type

Copper Connectors (Figure 14)
Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap
Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
Conductor Size
AWG or kcmil
#6 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Str. #2 Sol. #1 Sol. #2 Str. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Str. 2/0 Str. 3/0 Str. 4/0 Str.
Run #6 Sol. Code
305243
Code
305243
Code
305243
Code
305243
Code
305243
Code
305243
Code
305243
Code
305243
Code
305243
Code
305243
Code
305243
Run #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol. #4 Sol.
Run #4 Str. Code
305244
Code
305244
Code
305244
Code
305244
Code
305244
Code
305244
Code
305244
Code
305244
Code
305244
Code
305244
Code
305244
Run #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol. #2 Sol.
Run #1 Sol. Code
305245
Code
305245
Code
305245
Code
305245
Code
305246
Code
305246
Code
305246
Code
305246
Code
305246
Code
305246
Code
305246
Run #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str. #2 Str.
Run 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol. 1/0 Sol.
Run 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str. 1/0 Str.
Run 2/0 Str. Code
30521471
Code
30521471
Code
30521471
Code
305249
Code
305249
Code
305249
Code
305249
Code
305846
Code
305846
Code
305846
Run 3/0 Str.
Run 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str. 4/0 Str.

1 Only the Kearney connector is currently approved for use with #6 solid using a U-D die

Table 19 Blackburn, Kearney, and Penn-Union Connectors

Connector
Code
Blackburn
Part No.
Kearney Part
No.
6-Ton Tool 12-Ton Tool
Connector
Code
Blackburn
Part No.
Kearney Part
No.
Die Required Number
of Compressions
Die Required Number
of Compressions
305243 1 CF-44-1 301-82 W-KB 3
305244 1 CF-22-1 302-82 W-KK 3
305245 CF-102-1 304-82 U-O 1
305246 CF-1010-1 303-82 U-O 1
305247 1 CF-402-1 309-82 U-D 1
305249 CF-4010-1 308-82 U-D, D3 1
305846 CF-4040-1 307-82 U-D, D3 1

1 Do not use with W-BG die for the connectors under M305243 and M305244 codes. 2 Only the Kearney connector is currently approved for use with #6 solid using a U-D die.

Table 20 Ordering Data for 6-Ton Press Tool

Burndy Catalog Number Die Code 1 Burndy Catalog Number Die Code 2
W-KB 202240
W-KK 202241
W-161 1208088 U-161 2791549
W-162 1208089 U-162 2702336
W-163 1208100 U-163 2755406

1 These dies use 6-ton press tool. 2 These dies use 12-ton press tool. 3 These dies are only available for purchase in SRM. The codes shown on this table are the SRM part number.

Notes

The material for connectors are on Pages 20 and 21 is copper alloy

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 19 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Application

Connectors are on Pages 20 and 21 are used for straight splice or tap.

Connectors for Splicing and Tapping Concentric Wires

Table 21 For Splicing and Tapping of XLP-Conc-PVC Cable Concentric Neutrals [2]

Primary Cable Size
AWG or kcmil
Document 039955 1
Conc. Size
2/0 Cu
1/0 Al
4/0 Al
350 Al #2 Al #4 Cu
250 Cu
#2 Cu 700 Al 500 Cu 1,000 Al
Primary Cable Size
AWG or kcmil
Document 039955 1
Conc. Size
Conc. Size 8 − #14 9 − #14 10 − #14 11 − #14 17 − #14 18 − #14 13 − #12 16 − #12
2/0 Cu
1/0 Al
4/0 Al
8 − #14 Code 305244 Code 305244 Code 305244 Code
305245
Code
305245
Code
305245
Code
305245
Code
305247
350 Al 9 − #14 9 − #14 9 − #14 9 − #14 9 − #14 9 − #14 9 − #14 9 − #14 9 − #14
#2 Al 10 − #14 10 − #14 10 − #14 10 − #14 10 − #14 10 − #14 10 − #14 10 − #14 10 − #14
#4 Cu
250 Cu
11 − #14 Code 305245 Code 305245 Code 305245 Code 305245 Code 305245 Code 305245 Code 305245 Code 305245
#2 Cu 17 − #14 17 − #14 17 − #14 17 − #14 17 − #14 17 − #14 17 − #14 17 − #14 17 − #14
700 Al 18 − #14 18 − #14 18 − #14 18 − #14 18 − #14 18 − #14 18 − #14 18 − #14 18 − #14
500 Cu 13 − #12 13 − #12 13 − #12 13 − #12 13 − #12 13 − #12 13 − #12 13 − #12 13 − #12
1,000 Al 16 − #12 Code 305247 Code 305247 Code 305247 Code 305247 Code 305247 Code 305247 Code 305247 Code 305247
#2 Str. Cu Code 305245
Code 305246
Code 305244
Code 305245
Code 305246
Code 305244
Code 305245
Code 305246
Code 305244
Code 305245
Code 305246
Code 305244
Code 305246 Code 305246 Code 305246 Code
305249
#2 Solid Cu Code 305244 Code 305244 Code 305244 Code 305244 Code 305244 Code 305244 Code 305244 Code
305247

1 For extension or splicing out of concentric neutral wires, see Document 051071.or Document 066204. 2 This cable design is no longer approved for purchase.

Table 22 Connectors for Splicing and Tapping EPR Cable Concentric Neutrals [1]

Primary Cable Size AWG or kcmil
Document 039955 2
(AL)
#2
1/0
600
1,100
#2
1/0
600
Concentric Size 10-#14 12-#14
#2
1/0
600
10−#14 Code 305244 Code 305245
1,100 12-#14 Code 305245 Code 305245

1 This cable design is our current standard. 2 For extension or splicing out of concentric neutral wires, see Document 051071 or Document 066204

Table 23 Connectors for Splicing and Tapping EPR-Cable Flat Strap Neutral [1]

Primary Cable Size AWG or kcmil
Document 039955 2
(Cu)
#2 350
500
750
#2 305244 305246
350
500 500 500 500
700 305247

1 This cable design is used in special application. 2 For extension or splicing out of concentric neutral wires, see Document 051071.or Document 076264.

015251 Page 20 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Connectors for Splicing and Tapping Concentric Wires (continued)

Table 24 Dies Ordering Data for 12-Ton Press Tool

Die Kearney
Catalog Number
Burndy
Catalog Number
Die Code 1, 2
U-O U-O 216083
U-D U-D 2811758
U-D3 U-D3 216084
U−N UN-C 216085
U−BKT 36832 U-KBKTT 216133

1 Code includes one complete set of dies consisting of two half-sections. 2 These dies are only available for purchase in SRM. The codes shown on this table are the SRM part number.

Table 25 Equivalent Conductor Size for Concentric Neutrals [1]

Equivalent Size Concentric Size
#4
Approximate
8 − #14
#4
Approximate
9 − #14
#4
Approximate
10 − #14
#2
Approximate
11 − #14
#2
Approximate
12 − #14
#2
Approximate
17 − #14
1/0
Approximate
18 − #14
1/0
Approximate
13 − #12
1/0
Approximate
16 − #12

1 To connect these concentric conductors to conductors other than #2, use the equivalent conductor size and select a connector from Table 21 − 25 on Page 20.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 21 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Compression-Type (aluminum cable for flat bar or transformer spade terminals)

L L

B B

C OD C OD

1/2” Bolt Size 1-3/4” 1/2” Bolt Size

3” (Min.) 3” (Min.)

3”

T

T Contact 3/4” Thick

Figure 17 4-Hole Pad

Figure 15 Straight Terminal

Figure 16 Stacking Terminal

Table 26 Specifications for Terminal Connectors − Aluminum Cable-to-Flat Bar (Figure 15 and Figure 16)

Cable Size
AWG or kcmil
Refer to Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Tool Dies # 7
12-Ton Tool Dies #
15-Ton Tool Dies #
Cable Size
AWG or kcmil
Refer to Approximate Dimensions (inches) Approximate Dimensions (inches) Approximate Dimensions (inches) Approximate Dimensions (inches) Approximate Dimensions (inches) Connector
Code
Connector
Code
Cable Size
AWG or kcmil
Refer to B C 1 L 1 T 1 OD OD OD
4 Figure 15 1.24 1.25 4.92 0.25 0.65 303829 W-BG
U-BG
U-BG8
2 2 1.10 0.91 5.62 0.25 0.65 303761 303761
1/0 1/0 1.10 0.91 5.62 0.25 0.65 303760 303760
2/0 2/0 1.60 1.25 5.43 0.25 0.91 303830
U26ART
U26ART8
4/0 4/0 1.60 1.25 5.75 0.30 0.91 303759
U28ART
U28ART8
250 250 1.96 1.25 5.88 0.25 1.12 303831
U249ART
U249ART8
350 350 1.91 1.62 6.84 0.38 1.12 303758
U31ART
U31ART8
500/600 500/600 2.62 1.62 6.78 0.38 1.62 303832
U34ART
U34ART8
700/7502 700/7502 2.65 1.62 8.22 0.62 1.62 303833

P39ART
1,000/1,1002 1,000/1,1002 2.97 1.62 8.88 0.62 1.84 303834

P44ART
1,2503 1,2503 2.58 2.60 7.53 0.51 1.84 303835 L7276
1,5003 1,5003 3.19 3.09 8.59 0.81 2.26 303836 L46ART6
1,7503 1,7503 3.69 3.33 8.38 0.86 2.46 303837 L735 or L735W6
2,0003 2,0003 3.69 3.57 8.50 0.94 2.60 303838 L48ART6

015251 Page 22 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Table 26 Specifications for Terminal Connectors − Aluminum Cable-to-Flat Bar (Figure 15 and Figure 16) (Continued)

Cable Size
AWG or kcmil
Refer to Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Tool Dies # 7
12-Ton Tool Dies #
15-Ton Tool Dies #
Cable Size
AWG or kcmil
Refer to Approximate Dimensions (inches) Approximate Dimensions (inches) Approximate Dimensions (inches) Approximate Dimensions (inches) Approximate Dimensions (inches) Connector
Code
Connector
Code
Cable Size
AWG or kcmil
Refer to B C 1 L 1 T 1 OD OD OD
6 5 Figure 164, 5
(stacking
terminals)
1.50 0.87 5.25 0.21 0.62 303732 W-BG
U-BG
U-BG 8
2 5 2 5 1.10 0.91 5.62 0.25 0.65 303731 303731
1/05 1/05 1.10 0.91 5.62 0.25 0.65 303730 303730
4/05 4/05 1.52 1.17 6.20 0.30 0.91 303729
U28ART
U28ART 8
250 250 1.90 1.62 6.6 0.38 1.0 301283
U249ART
U249ART 8
3505 3505 2.25 1.62 6.84 0.38 1.12 303728
U31ART
U31ART 8
700/7502, 5 700/7502, 5 2.65 1.62 8.22 0.62 1.62 303839

P39ART
1,000/1,1002, 5 1,000/1,1002, 5 2.97 1.62 8.88 0.62 1.84 303840

P44ART

1 These dimensions may vary slightly among the various suppliers. 2 These connectors shall be designed to fit side by side on a standard NEMA spade terminal (see Figure 24 on Page 29). 3 To order 4-hole terminals larger than 1,000 kcmil, select the Burndy or Homac terminal for the proper cable size and substitute 4 for 2 in the catalog number. Example: YA45A-4NTN or Homac AL-750-4NTN. See Figure 17 on Page 22. 4 If it is necessary to stack copper conductors, use aluminum stacking connectors. 5 These connectors shall be capable of being stacked on any straight terminal of equal or larger size (up to and including 1,000 kcmil). 6 These Die require a 60-ton press tool. 7 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool. 8 A U−die adapter must be used when utilizing U−dies in a 15−Ton press.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 23 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Compression-Type (aluminum cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)(continued)

Table 27 Terminal Connectors (aluminum cable-to-flat bar)(continued)

Cable Size AWG or
kcmil
Approved for Purchase
Cable Size AWG or
kcmil
Manufacturer and Catalog Number Manufacturer and Catalog Number Connector Code
Cable Size AWG or
kcmil
Homac Burndy Burndy
4 SA4NTN YAR4U2NTN 303829
2 SA2NTN YAR2U2NTN 303761
1/0 AL1/0-NTN YAK25A-2GA 303760
2/0 SA2/0-NTN YAR2/0U2NTN 303830
4/0 AL4/0-NTN YA4/0A2NTN 303759
250 SAB4/0-NTN YA250A2NTN 303831
350 AL350-NTN YA350A2NTN 303758
500 SAL500-NTN YA500A2NTN 303832
700/7501 AL750-NTN YA750A2NTN 303833
1,0001 AL1000-NMS YA1000A2NTN 303834
1,2502 AL1250-NTN YA1250A2NTN 303835
1,5002 AL1500-NTN YA1500A2NTN 303836
1,7502 AL1750-NTN YA1750A2NTN 303837
2,0002 AL2000-NTN YA2000A2NTN 303838
Stacking Terminal Stacking Terminal Stacking Terminal Stacking Terminal
6 3, 4 ASL 6-NTN YARSO6U2NTN 303732
2 3, 4 ASL 386-N YARSO2U2NTN 303731
1/03, 4 ASL1/0-NTN YARSO1/0U2NTN 303730
4/03, 4 ASL4/0-NTN YASO4/0A2NTN 303729
250 ASL250-NTN YASO250A2NTN 301283
3503, 4 ASL350-NTN YASO350A2NTN 303728
700/750 1, 3, 4 ASL750-NTN YASO750A2NTN 303839
1,000 1, 3, 4 ASL1000-SSNTN YASO1000A2NTN 303840

1 These connectors shall be designed to fit side by side on a standard NEMA spade terminal (see Page 27). 2 To order 4-hole terminals larger than 1,000 kcmil, select the Burndy or Homac terminal for the proper cable size and substitute 4 for 2 in the catalog number. Example: YA45A-4NTN or Homac AL-750-4NTN. 3 If it is necessary to stack copper conductors, use aluminum stacking connectors. 4 These connectors shall be capable of being stacked on any straight terminal of equal or larger size (up to and including 1,000 kcmil).

Notes

  1. The material for these connectors, is tinned aluminum alloy, tubular.
  2. Attach terminal connectors using Everdur bolts and washers shown on page 28. For ordering Everdur Bolts refer to Table 29 on Page 28.
  3. Partially filled with oxide inhibitor and sealed. For ordering Everdur bolts refer to Table 30 0n Page 28.
  4. Connections of copper-to-copper, tinned aluminum-to-copper, and tinned aluminum-to-tinned aluminum require no special precautions other than a clean surface. Any combination involving an untinned aluminum surface requires the application of oxide inhibitor to the surface. Wire brush the surface through the compound thoroughly. Brushing through this inhibitor prevents the oxide from reforming. If in doubt as to the materials or tinning, applying inhibitor will do no harm

015251 Page 24 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Compression-Type (copper cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)

C

T (approx.)

Figure 18

Table 28 Specifications for Terminal Connectors − Copper Cable-to-Flat Bar (Figure 18)

Cable
Size
AWG or
kcmil
Manufacture and
Catalog Number
Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Tool Dies # 1
12-Ton Tool Dies #
15-Ton Tool Dies #
Cable
Size
AWG or
kcmil
Manufacture and
Catalog Number
Manufacture and
Catalog Number
Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Bolt
Size
Connector
Code
Connector
Code
Cable
Size
AWG or
kcmil
Homac Burndy B C D L N T T T T
4 5 L4N YA4C-2N 1-1/8 13/16 3 4-1/2 5/8 1/8 1/2 303916 W4CRT2
U4CRT2
U4CRT2,6
2 2,5 L2N YA2C-2N 1-1/4 13/16 3 4-23/32 5/8 1/8 1/2 303221 W2CRT
U2CRT
U2CRT6
1 5 L1N YA1C-2N 1-3/8 13/16 3 4-7/8 5/8 1/8 1/2 303804 W1CRT1
U1CRT1
U1CRT16
1/05 L1/0N YA25-2N 1-3/8 13/16 3 4-29/32 5/8 1/8 1/2 303209 W25RT
U25RT
U25RT6
2/05 L2/0N YA26-2N 1-1/2 13/16 3 4-29/32 5/8 1/8 1/2 303220 W26RT
U26RT
U26RT6
3/05 L3/0N YA27-2N 1-1/2 29/32 3 4-15/16 5/8 1/8 1/2 303219 W27RT
U27RT
U27RT6
4/05 L4/0N YA28-2N 1-5/8 1 3 5-1/16 5/8 9/64 1/2 303917
U28RT
U28RT6
2505 L250−N YA29-2N 1-5/8 1-3/32 3 5-5/32 5/8 5/32 1/2 303092
U29RT
U29RT6
300 L300-N YA30-2N 2 1-11/16 3 5-3/4 5/8 5/32 1/2 303451
U30RT
U30RT6
3505 L350-N YA31-2N 2 1-25/32 3 5-11/16 5/8 3/16 1/2 303452
U31RT
U31RT6
5005 L500-N YA34-2N 2-1/4 1-17/32 3 5-15/16 5/8 15/64 1/2 303093
U34RT
U34RT6

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 25 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Compression-Type (copper cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)(preferred)

Table 28 Specifications for Terminal Connectors − Copper Cable-to-Flat Bar (Figure 18 on Page 25) (Continued)

Cable
Size
AWG or
kcmil
Manufacture and
Catalog Number
Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Tool Dies # 1
12-Ton Tool Dies #
15-Ton Tool Dies #
Cable
Size
AWG or
kcmil
Manufacture and
Catalog Number
Manufacture and
Catalog Number
Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Bolt
Size
Connector
Code
Connector
Code
Cable
Size
AWG or
kcmil
Homac Burndy B C D L N T T T T
6003, 4 L600-N YA36-2N 2-11/16 1-1/2 3 6-5/8 5/8 17/64 1/2 303454
U36RT
U36RT 6
7503,4,5 L750-N YA39-2NN1 2-7/8 1-3/4 3 6-3/4 5/8 17/64 1/2 303296
P39RT
1,0003,5 L1000N YA44-2NG10 3 1-3/4 3 6-15/16 5/8 21/64 1/2 303461 P44RT

1 Within this column,the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool 2 For #2 Solid, use Burndy 162 die index. For Die ordering information refer to Table 20 on Page 19 3 Dimension C shall not exceed 1-3/4”. 4 To order 4-hole terminals, select the Homac or Burndy terminal for the proper cable size and substitute 4 for 2 in the catalog number. For example: YA39-4NNT, for Burndy L750-4N for Homac. 5 Conductor can be compressed or compact. 6 A U−die adapter must be used when utilizing U−dies in a 15−Ton press.

Notes

  1. Attach using Everdur bolts and washers as shown on Table 30 on Page 28.

  2. Connections of copper-to-copper, tinned aluminum-to-copper, and tinned aluminum-to-tinned aluminum pads require no special precautions other than a clean surface. Any combination involving an untinned aluminum surface requires the application of oxide inhibitor to the surface. Wire brush the surface through the compound thoroughly. Brushing through this inhibitor prevents the oxide from reforming. If in doubt as to the materials or tinning, application of the inhibitor will do no harm.

015251 Page 26 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Applications of Compression-Type Terminal Connectors (preferred)

1/4” 4” Copper Bus Bar 1/4” 4” Copper Bus Bar See Note 1 See Note 1

Spacer (Same Thickness as Spade)

Bolts, Nuts, Washers, as Required See Table 30 on Page 28

Transformer Secondary Bushing

Bolts, Nuts, Washers, as Required See Table 30 on Page 28

Cable (See Note 3) Cable (See Note 3)

Figure 19 Figure 20

Notes

  1. Where the transformer spade does not provide sufficient space for cables to be connected, it may be extended with a short length of 1/4” x 4” copper bus bar, 3.86 pounds per foot, Code M156024 . The current carrying capacity of the bus bar, when insulated with tape is as follows:

1,200 amps for one 1/4” x 4” bus bar.

2,200 amps for two 1/4” x 4” bus bars (one on each side of the spade).

The spade itself has capacity sufficient for the rating of the transformer.

  1. Where large size or a large number of cables are attached to secondary spade, they should be supported to prevent excessive strain on the secondary bushings.

  2. Installations shown in this document cannot be used for aluminum cables 1,250 kcmil and larger, or copper cables 750 kcmil and larger, as the flat portion of the connector is wider than the hole spacing provided on the transformer spade.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 27 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Bolted-Type (copper cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)(non-preferred)

1-3

Figure 21

Figure 22

3”
4-1
/2”
-1
/2”
3”
4-1
/2”
3”
4-1

Table 29 Connectors (copper cable eye bolt-to-flat bar type) [1]

Use for Cable
Range
(AWG-kcmil)
Manufacturer and Catalog Number Code
Use for Cable
Range
(AWG-kcmil)
Refer to A.E. Corp.2 Burndy So. States Royal Dossert Dossert
2/0-500 Figure 21 TLD-62 QQGF34-G6 UNNS-4656T 12222 T2L-50E 303169
600-1,000 Figure 22 TLDN-86 QQGFL44-G4 UNNS-5666T 19599 T2L-50E 303286

1 Connectors shown in Figure 21 and Figure 22 have two cable clamping elements and require a minimum of space and taping. The recommended tightening force for the 1/2” eye bolt on these connectors is 25−40 foot-pounds. 2 Formerly Anderson Brass Works.

Note

  1. See Pages 24 to 29 for preferred compression connectors for this application.

Table 30 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers (Figure 21 above, Figure 26 on Page 30,

Table 30 0 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers (Figure 21 above, Figure 26 on Pa Figure 36 on Page 37) 1, 2, 3 age 30,
Item Description Code
1 Screw, Cap (bolt) Everdur, Hex. Head 1/2” x 1-1/2”1, 2 193023
2 Screw, Cap (bolt) Everdur, Hex. Head 1/2” x 2”1, 2 193025
3 Screw, Cap (bolt) Everdur, Hex. Head 1/2” x 2-1/2”1, 2 193177
4 Nut, Bolt, Everdur, Hex. 1/2”1 195013
5 Washer, Round, Everdur, 1/2” 195252
6 Washer, Lock, Everdur, 1/2” 195193
7 Screw, Cap (bolt), Steel, CDPL, Hex. HD 1/2” x 1-1/2” 193271
8 Screw, Cap (bolt), Steel, CDPL, Hex. HD. 1/2” x 2” 193272
9 Screw, Cap (bolt), Steel, CDPL, Hex. HD. 1/2” x 2-1/2” 193273
10 Screw, Cap (bolt), Steel, CDPL, Hex. HD. 1/2” x 3” 193274
11 Nut, Bolt, Steel, CDPL, Hex. 1/2” 195449
12 Washer, Round, Steel, CDPL 1/2” 195450
13 Washer, Lock, Steel, CDPL 1/2” 195451

1 The recommended tightening force for a 1/2” Everdur bolt is 40 foot-pounds. Normally, the use of an 8” wrench will give this range of torque. 2 Everdur cap screws are low silicon bronze, Spec 651 per ASTM F468 with Class 2A threaded. 3 Use Items 1 − 6 as shown In Figure 23 on Page 29 and Figure 36 on Page 37. Use Items 7 − 13 as shown in Figure 26 on Page 30.

015251 Page 28 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Bolted-Type (copper cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)(non-preferred) (continued)

9-16” Holes

H

Figure 23

Table 31 Connectors − Bolted Tongue-to-Copper Cable Type [1] (Figure 23)

Use for
Cable Range
(kcmil)
Manufacturer and Catalog Number Dimensions (inches) 2 Connector
Code
Use for
Cable Range
(kcmil)
Burndy Royal Dossert L W H T T
400-500 QA34-2N 18726 HL 50-2N 4-11/16 1-3/8 1-15/16 5/16 303188
600-800 QA40-2N 18727 HL 80-2N 4-13/16 1-5/8 2-5/16 3/8 303298
850-1,000 QA44-2N 18728 HL 100-2N 4-15/16 1-7/8 2-1/2 1/2 303189

1 Bolt on these connectors is 40 foot-pounds of applied torque. 2 Dimensions shown are for Burndy connectors; others may vary slightly.

Notes

  1. Figure 24 Below shows standard transformer spade terminals per Electronic Edison Institute (EEI) Specification.

9/16” Hole

9/16” Hole

4-1/8” 1-3/4” 2-3/4” 1-3/4” 1-3/4”

3” 3-1/2” 1-1/8”

9/16” Hole
9/16” Hole
8”
1-3/4”
1”
2-3/
9/16” Hole
8”
1-3/4”
1”
2-3/
1-3/4” -3/
3” 3”
4”
4” 4” 4”

Spade G 1/4” Spade H 3/8” Spade J 1/2”

Figure 24 Standard Transformer Spade Terminals (EEI-NEMA)

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 29 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Bolted-Type (copper cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)(non-preferred)(continued)

C C

K L K

7 8 9 or 10 7 8 9 or 10

12 12

13 11 13

11 13 11

H
H

Figure 25 Figure 26

Table 32 Connectors − Copper Cable Eyebolt-to-Flat Bar Type (Figure 25 and Figure 26)

Cable Range
(AWG or kcmil)
Min − Max
Manufacturer and Catalog Number Approximate Dimensions
(inches) 1
Code
Cable Range
(AWG or kcmil)
Min − Max
Figure 26 Figure 26 Figure 25 Figure 25 Figure 25 Figure 25 Figure 25 Figure 25
Cable Range
(AWG or kcmil)
Min − Max
Burndy Royal Dossert H J L W W
2 − 350 QGFL-31B1 12208 QL35 2-3/4 1/2 1-3/4 1-7/16 303165
1/0 − 500 QGFL-34B1 12209 QL50 3-3/16 1/2 2-1/4 1-13/16 303233
750 − 1,000 QGFL-44B1 12212 QL100 3-1/2 1/2 2-1/4 2-3/16 303179

1 The recommended tightning force for the 1/2 ” eye bolt on these connectors is 40 foot-pounds of applied torque. 2 Dimensions shown are for Burndy connectors; others may vary slightly.

Terminal Connectors Bolted-Type (copper cable-to-flat bar for current transformer terminals only)

Table 33 Connectors − Cable-to-Flat Bar-to-Copper Cable Type (Figure 25 and Figure 26)

Cable Range
(AWG or
kcmil)
Min − Max
Manufacturer and Catalog Number Approximate Dimensions
(inches) 1
Code
Cable Range
(AWG or
kcmil)
Min − Max
Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 26 Figure 26 Figure 26 Figure 26 Figure 26 Figure 26
Cable Range
(AWG or
kcmil)
Min − Max
A.E. Corp. Burndy Royal Dossert C H K (min.) L W W
3/0 − 4/0 ITE024-A QA28-B3 18723 HL 21-1-50 1 1-7/16 9/16 2-1/4 1/4 303297
250 − 350 ITE035-A QA31-B 18724 HL 35-1 1-3/16 1-11/16 17/32 2-11/16 5/16 303182
400 − 500 ITE050-A QA34-B 18725 HL 50-1 1-3/8 2 17/32 3-3/16 5/16 303112
600 − 800 ITE080-A QA40-B 19600 HL 75-1 1-5/8 2-3/8 11/16 3-11/16 3/8 303122
850 − 1,000 ITE100-A QA44-B 19601 HL 100-1 1-7/8 2-1/2 11/16 3-15/16 1/2 303121

1 Dimensions shown are for Burndy connectors; others may vary slightly.

Notes

  1. Connectors shown in Table 32 on Page 30 are less costly than those shown in Table 33 and should be used when connecting one cable to bar-type primary terminal.

  2. Use connectors shown in Table 32 on Page 30 to connect two cables to bar-type primary terminal by placing them back-to-back as shown in Figure 25 and Figure 26.

Where severe corrosive conditions exist, use Everdur cap screws, nuts, and washers shown in Table 30 on Page 28.

015251 Page 30 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Tap Connectors for Cable Termination (copper or aluminum cable) Pad-Mounted Transformers

H

Figure 28 J

Figure 28

J
J J
Figure 28

J
J

Table 34 Tap Connectors − Tee-Type (copper-to-copper, for circuits 5,000 V or lower)

Cable Size
AWG or
kcmil
Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Tool Dies # 1
12-Ton Tool Dies #
15-Ton Tool Dies #
Run Tap Refer
to
Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Burndy
Catalog
Number
Dossert
Catalog
Number
Code Code
Run Tap Refer
to
B C E H J L L L L L
6 to
2/0
2 Figure
27
1-11/32 1-5/8 2-17/32 1-13/16 3-7/32 VYT262CG
1
UTDK
13-6
305638 W2CRT
U2CRT
U2CRT 2
6 to
2/0
2/0 2/0 1-17/32 1-5/8 2-23/32 1-13/16 3-13/32 VYT2626G
1
UTDK
13-13
305639 W26RT
U26RT
U26RT 2
1/0
to
300
2 Figure
28
1-11/32 1-3/8 2-3/4 1-27/32 7/16 3-23/32 VYT302C UTSK
30-6
305640 W2CRT
U2CRT
U2CRT 2
1/0
to
300
2/0 2/0 1-17/32 1-3/8 3-1/16 1-27/32 7/16 4 VYT3026 UTSK
30-13
305641 W26RT
U26RT
U26RT 2
1/0
to
300
250 250 1-21/32 1-3/8 3-1/4 1-27/32 7/16 4-7/32 VYT3029 UTSK
30-25
305642
U29RT
U29RT 2
1/0
to
300
500 500 2-9/32 1-3/8 3-1/16 1-27/32 7/16 5 VYT3034 UTSK
30-50
305643
U34RT
U34RT 2

1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool. 2 A U−die adapter must be used when utilizing U−dies in a 15−Ton press.

Notes

  1. If Tee Connectors, shown in Figure 27 and Figure 28 are to be attached to an aluminum overhead conductor run, use a short length of bare copper conductor between the connector and the aluminum conductor, and attach it with a fired wedge per Document 066194.

  2. If the desired connector size is not shown, special sizes may be acquired by ordering a connector similar to the connector shown.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 31 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Tap Connectors for Cable Termination (copper or aluminum cable) Pad-Mounted Transformers (continued)

Transformer Terminal Rod

Pin Terminal

Transformer Terminal Rod

Figure 29

Figure 30 Blackburn Catalog Number PGH3, Code 305997

Application: Tap clamp for live-front loop-style, 3-phase pad-mounted transformer. Document 045291 and Document 057521 conductor range #2 AWG to 2/0.

Application

See “Low Profile” Single-Phase 6.9 and 12 kV pad-mounted transformer, Document 042762 and Document 042765.

Table 35 Tap Connectors for Cable Termination in “Low-Profile” Pad-Mounted Transformers (Figure 29)

Connector Size
AWG or kcmil
Manufacturer and Catalog Number 6-Ton Tool Dies # 1
12-TonTool Dies #
15-TonTool Dies #
Connector
Code
Connector Size
AWG or kcmil
Kortick Kortick Kortick
4 Cu PMT-401 W4CRT
UCRT
UCRT2
305057
2 Cu PMT-201 W2CRT
U2CRT
U2CRT2
305058
2 Al PMTA-201 W2CART
U2CART
U2CART2
305153
1/0 Al PMTA-1001
U25ART
U25ART2
305264

1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool. 2 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing u-dies in a 15-ton press.

015251 Page 32 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Primary T-Connectors, Compression-Type,5 kV or Above Aluminum-to-Aluminum, Copper-to-Aluminum, or Copper-to-Copper

T (approx.)

A A A
T (approx.)
T (approx.)
A
A
T (approx.)
A
A

OD

OD

A
OD

Figure 32

Approximate

A A A A A
H
A
A A A A A A

Figure 31

Table 36 Primary T-Connectors, Compression-Type - Aluminum-to-Aluminum or Copper-to-Aluminum (refer to Figure 31)

Conductor Size AWG
or kcmil
Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Tool Die #
12-Ton Tool Die #
15-Ton Tool Die #
Conductor Size AWG
or kcmil
Conductor Size AWG
or kcmil
Dimension
(inches)
Dimension
(inches)
Manufacturer and Catalog Number Manufacturer and Catalog Number Connector
Code
Connector
Code
Conductor Size AWG
or kcmil
Conductor Size AWG
or kcmil
A A Burndy Dossert Dossert Dossert
Run Tap Burndy Mac Mac Mac Mac Mac
2 2 1-21/32 1-7/8 YST2CU2CUT CVT6-6-S-AA 305266 See
Table 38 on
Page 35
4 2 1-21/32 1-7/8 YST4CU2CUT CVT4-6-S-AA 305268 305268
1/0 1/0 1-3/4 1-7/8 YST25U25UT CVT10-10-S-AA 305270 305270
1/0 2 1-3/4 1-7/8 YST25U2CUT CVT10-6-S-AA 305271 305271
#2-4/0 #2-4/0 3-3/32 YST28TG1 CVT6-6-S-AA 305380 305380
4/0-250 #2-250 3-5/8 YST29TG1 CVT21-6-S-AA 305384 305384
350-500 #2-500 4-9/32 YST34TG1 CVT35-6-S-AA 305386 305386
700-1,0001 #2-7001 4-25/32 YST39TG1 CVT70-6-S-AA 305398 305398

1 Maximum conductor size for aluminum only. Maximum copper size is 750 kcmil for run and 500 kcmil for tap.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 33 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Primary T-Connectors, Compression-Type, 5kV and Above Aluminum-to-Aluminum, Copper-to-Aluminum, or Copper-to-Copper (continued)

Table 37 Primary T-Connectors, Compression-Type - Copper-to-Copper (refer to Table 32 on Page 30)

Conductor
Size
AWG or
kcmil
Dimensions (inches) Manufacturer and Catalog
Number
Connector
code
6-Ton Tool Die #
12-Ton Tool Die #
15-Ton Tool Die #
Conductor
Size
AWG or
kcmil
Conductor
Size
AWG or
kcmil
A AA H T OD OD Burndy Homac Dossert Dossert Dossert
Run Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Run Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap
2 2 1.23 1.23 2.16 4.31 0.42 0.42 YSTP2C2CT 2T2 CVT6-6 305808 W2CRT
U2CRT
U2CRT2
2 4 1.23 1.09 2.04 4.31 0.42 0.34 YSTP2C4CT 2T4 CVT6-4 305809 305809
4 4 1.09 1.09 1.84 3.88 0.34 0.34 YSTP4C4CT 4T4 CVT4-4 305810 W4CRT
U2CRT
U2CRT2

1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool. 2 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing u-dies in a 15-ton press.

Notes

  1. The material of these connectors is aluminum or copper with a tinplated finish.

  2. Barrels are factory drilled to accommodate the minimum conductor OD.

  3. Connectors shall be filled with oxide inhibitor and sealed

Application

Tap splices for above 5,000 V, see Document 041583 and Document 043901

015251 Page 34 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Primary T-Connectors, Compression-Type, Aluminum-to-Aluminum, Copper-to-Aluminum or Copper-to-Copper (continued)

Table 38 Tooling from Table 36 on Page 33

Connector 6-Ton Tool Dies # 1
12-Ton Tool Dies #
15-Ton Tool Dies #
Code Run Tap
305266
U25ART
U25ART

U25ART
U25ART2
305268 W2CART
U2CART
U2CART
W2CART
U2CART
U2CART
305270 W27ART
U27ART
U27ART
W27ART
U27ART
U27ART2
305271 305271
U25ART
U25ART2
305380
U31ART
U31ART

U31ART
U31ART2
305384
U39RT
P39ART

U39ART
U39ART2
305386
U39ART
P39ART

U39ART
P39ART
305398

P44ART


P44ART

1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool. 2 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing u-dies in a 15-ton press.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 35 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Slip-Fit Connector Installation, Aluminum or Copper Cable

One

Code 300010 Secondary Cover Homac ABW 4100SL Code 031605 Utilco PTL4-1000JSL Homac SB6486

Scope This page shows slip-fit connectors for single-phase, dead-front transformer, low voltage, secondary installations (see Document 064308).

Notes

  1. All set screws to be 5/16” Allen head drive.

  2. The bar is rated in excess of 1,600 amps, which exceeds the maximum allowable transformer load.

  3. Connectors may be used for aluminum or copper conductors.

  4. Never combine conductors in one port.

  5. Connector is designed to slip onto the stud even though the terminal is threaded.

  6. Secondary cover, see Figure 35, is a tool to be used when required to insulate the energized secondary slip-fit connectors.

Instructions

  1. Remove any jam nuts from transformer studs.
  2. Slide the connector onto the transformer stud, position the connector to allow a straight, smooth cable entry, mesh the threads together, and tighten the setscrews to lock the connector in place.
  3. To prepare the cable, remove the insulation, wire brush the conductor, and apply inhibitor.
  4. Insert the conductor in the port and tighten the setscrew.

Remove any jam nuts from transformer studs. 2. Slide the connector onto the transformer stud, position the connector to allow a straight, smooth cable entry, mesh the threads together, and tighten the setscrews to lock the connector in place. 3. To prepare the cable, remove the insulation, wire brush the conductor, and apply inhibitor. 4. Insert the conductor in the port and tighten the setscrew.

  1. After completing work on the secondary connectors, make sure all connections are tightened as indicated in Table 39.

Table 39 Conductor/Torque

Conductor Torque (ft/lbs)
#6 − 350 and Transformer Stud 25
500 − 1,000 40

015251 Page 36 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Multiple Transformer Terminal Aluminum or Copper Cable

1-3/4”

H

Secondary Spade Support

Secondary Terminal Installation

Figure 36 8-Way Terminal Illustrated (1,000 kcmil)

Table 40 EZ Keeper Lay-In Terminals for Copper or Aluminum Conductors (600 V or lower) (refer to Figure 36)

Conductor
Range
Ampacity
(minimum)
Number of
Conductors
Dimensions − Approximate
(inches)
Mounting Hole Diam eter Code
Conductor
Range
Ampacity
(minimum)
Number of
Conductors
L W H H H
1/0 − 1,000 3100 4 7.0 6.25 1-7/8 9/16” 301281
301282
1/0 − 1,000 5100 8 13.75 6.25 6.25 6.25 6.25

Scope

These connectors are for use in connecting service cables from 1/0 to 1,000 kcmil to the spade of three-phase, pad-mounted transformers (Document 043817 and Document 045291). Cable-to-flat bars are replaced in this design by set screws and a removable lay-in connection. If needed to terminate a #2 neutral onto one of these bars, it is necessary to splice a piece of 1/0 tail for insertion into the lay-in port.

Notes

  1. Connectors may be used for copper or aluminum conductors.

  2. Never put more than one cable in a port.

  3. Install the lower (X 0 and X 2) connectors first, then the higher (X 1 and X 3 ). Use as many bolts as there are holes in the spade.

4. If transformer spades are not supported, install a secondary cable support kit (see Document 045291).

  1. To prepare the cable, remove the insulation, wire brush the conductor, and apply inhibitor.

  2. Make sure all set screws are tightened as indicated in Table 39 on Page 36. (Torque them to the specified value, wait 5 minutes, and make the final torque).

  3. See Table 30 on Page 28 for bolts, nuts, and washers.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 37 of 39

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Pin Terminals

L

L L L
E
P
E
P
E
P
E
P
Figure 37
S. D. Copper Rod
A
B
O

Table 41 Specifications for Aluminum Pin Terminal [1]

Copper/
Al.
Cable
Size
Copper
Stud
Equivalent
Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Tool Die # 1
12-Ton Tool Die #
15-Ton Tool Die #
Copper/
Al.
Cable
Size
Copper
Stud
Equivalent
Manufacturer and
Catalog Number
Manufacturer and
Catalog Number
Dimension (inches) Dimension (inches) Dimension (inches) Dimension (inches) Dimension (inches) Dimension (inches) Code Code
Copper/
Al.
Cable
Size
Copper
Stud
Equivalent
Homac Brundy A B OD E
Approx.
L
Approx.
P P P
6 8 SAPT-6-26 YE6R-40 0.250 1.75 0.65 3.25 9.25 6.00 303843 W-BG
U-BG
U-BG2
2 4 SAPT-2-26 TE2R-40 0.250 1.75 0.65 3.25 9.25 6.00 303844 303844
1/0 2 SAPT-1/0-26 YE25R-60 0.250 1.75 0.65 3.25 9.25 6.00 303845 303845
4/0 2/0 SAPT-4/0-206 YE28R-60 0.375 1.54 0.91 3.50 10.9 6.00 303846 W249
U249
U2492
350 4/0 PTB-350-6 YE31AG3 0.460 2.25 1.12 4.70 10.7 6.00 303554
U31ART
U31ART2
500/60
0
500 PTM-500-346 YE34AP-
GE
0.750 2.56 1.57 6.30 12.3 6.00 300013
U34ART3
U34ART2,3
700 500 PTL-750 YE39AGB 0.750 2.56 1.60 6.30 12.3 6.00 303555

P39ART
1,000 700 PTF-1000-34
6
YE44AG7 0.750 2.56 1.60 6.30 12.3 6.00 033757

P44ART

1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool. 2 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing U-dies in 15-ton press tool. 3 Homac equivalent of this die is 106A.

Notes

  1. The material for the pin terminals is on Table 41. Copper Rod-Soft Drawn, Tinned, Aluminum Connector EC Grade, Untinned

  2. Connector is supplied pre-filled with inhibitor and sealed.

  3. Connector is supplied pre-filled with inhibitor and sealed.

  4. Pin terminals connected to copper secondary conductors use a copper connector. Pin terminals connected to aluminum secondary conductors use a fired wedge or h-tap.

Application

  1. To make straight connections of insulated aluminum secondary neutral to bare copper neutral, see Note 10 Page 7.
  2. To connect aluminum primary stress cone termination to terminal tap connector or cutout.
  3. To make watertight termination for secondary risers.

015251 Page 38 of 39 Rev. #07: 03-25-22

UG-1: Connectors Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems

Pin Terminals (continued)

Table 42 Color Coding
Color Coding Requirements for Plastic End Plugs in Pin Terminals
Conductor Size Plug Color
#6 Blue
#2 Red
1/0 Yellow
4/0 Pink
350 Brown
700 Purple

Table 43 Specifications and Ordering Information for Copper Pin Terminal

Cu
Cable
Size
Cu
Stud
Size
Manufacturer and Catalog Number Dimensions (inches) 6-Ton Tool Die # 1
12-Ton Tool Die #
15-Ton Tool Die #
Code
Cu
Cable
Size
Cu
Stud
Size
Dossert Mac Prod
Co.
Brundy A B OD E L P P P
2 2 SDP
6-PG
CAS2-2 YE2CLH128 0.25 1.25 0.415 2.25 9.00 6.00 W2CRT
U2CRT
U2CRT 2
303847

1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool. 2 A U-die must be used when utilizing u-dies 15-ton press tool.

Notes

  1. The material for the pin terminals on Table 43 is copper rod-soft-drawn, tinned.

  2. Rod may be bent for installation convenience. It is recommended that bending take place 1/2” beyond the copper sleeve.

Application

  1. To make straight connections of insulated aluminum secondary neutral to bare copper neutral, see Note 10 Page 7.

  2. To connect bare copper secondary neutral to aluminum bar connector using Thermofit boot, see

Document 036640.

  1. To make watertight termination for secondary risers.

Revision Notes

Revision 07 has the following changes:

  1. Updated manufacturers information in Table 14 on Page 14.

  2. Revised left image of Figure 9 on Page 14.

  3. Corrected typo on Material code on Table 22 on Page 20.

  4. Revised Die number for several Aluminum connectors in Table 26 starting on Page 22.

  5. Revised Die number for several Copper connectors in Table 28 starting on Page 25.

Rev. #07: 03-25-22 015251 Page 39 of 39

OH: Services Greenbook EMWP

Prepared by: SXZO

This document is also included in the following manuals:

Purpose and Scope

Equipment installed on service poles as shown in this document will also meet the requirements of the California Building Standards Code - Electrical Regulations. These requirements have been established by the state of California in the interest of safety to the public and to workers and are applicable to all customer-owned service poles. PG&E cannot establish service to poles that do not meet these minimum requirements. The maintenance of customer-owned service poles in conformity with these requirements is the sole responsibility of the customer.

Local ordinances may include wiring requirements in addition to those shown in this document. Consult local inspection authorities for these requirements and for city or county permits and inspections that may be required before service can be connected.

References Location Document

Methods of Attaching Services to Customers Premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025202 Dead-End and Angle Attachments for Aluminum Conductors - Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028851

Connectors for Aluminum Conductors on

Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028852 Temporary Underground Electric Service Single-Phase, 120/240 Volt 200 Amps Maximum . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 036670 Conductors for Overhead Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 059626 Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH Services/UG-1 Services/Greenbook 065374

         - “

Utility Standard TD 2325S, Wood Pole Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-2325S

Temporary Service Pole Installation

  1. The use of temporary service poles must be restricted to installations of a temporary nature, such as building construction, temporary sales locations, etc., where the period of service is estimated to be 1 year or less.

  2. Temporary service poles must be furnished and installed by the customer and may be wooden or metallic. The minimum length must be 20 feet (set 4 feet in the ground). A longer pole may be necessary to provide the required clearance from the ground (see Note 9 on Page 4) or to supply the customer’s overhead line (see Figure 3 on Page 8).

  3. A temporary, wood service pole may be rectangular or circular in cross section and must be solid (not laminated). Rectangular poles must have a minimum cross section of 6” x 6” nominal; circular poles must meet the requirements for permanent service poles specified in Note 7 on Page 2 except that the minimum length may be 20 feet providing the required clearances are maintained.

  4. The butt of the temporary, wood service pole must at least be painted with creosote or other approved preservative. However, it is recommended that these poles be full-length treated with a suitable preservative in order to obtain the maximum useful life of the pole and to provide increased safety to workers and to the

Rev. #20: 3/25/2022 025055 Page 1 of 17

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

public. The permanent service pole specified in Note 6 below is approved for temporary installations. It will usually be the more economical pole for repeated use.

  1. A metal pole may be used for temporary service provided its strength is at least equivalent to the wood service poles specified in Note 3 on Page 1 and provided its base or foundation is designed to provide at least an equivalent resistance to overturning when set at the same depth. The use of 4-inch extra-strong steel pipe (Schedule 80), set in concrete to obtain equivalent bearing surface, or the use of a 5-inch standard steel pipe (Schedule 40), set directly in the ground, will meet these requirements.

Permanent Pole Installation

  1. A permanent wood or metal service pole must be used when it is estimated that the installation will remain for a period longer than 1 year. Permanent wood service poles, as specified in Note 7, must be furnished and installed by the customer. PG&E will, however, furnish and install the pole (wood or metal) exclusive of wiring and service entrance equipment, at the customer’s expense, if the customer is unable to have the pole installed by a private contractor.

  2. Customer Owned Wood Poles:

A. Customer-owned, permanent wood poles must meet all pertinent requirements of ANSI O5.1.2008, “Wood Poles − Specifications and Dimensions,” and American Wood Protection Association Standards T1-10 and U1-10, as modified or described in Engineering Material Specification 57, “Preservative Treated Wood Poles and Stubs for Overhead Lines.”

B. Approved pole suppliers and treatments are shown in Table 1 and Table 2 of this document.

C. For poles that will have a final height greater than 20 feet above ground level, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) may require the applicant to file a notice a minimum of 45 days prior to the installation of the pole. The FAA may issue a determination of hazard to air navigation and recommend actions to mitigate or eliminate that hazard. Please contact your PG&E project coordinator for additional information

D. When planning to install a new customer owned service pole prior to inspection by PG&E personnel see the section, Verifying Depth of Customer Owned Poles, on Page 6 and Figure 18, “Pole Depth Verification”, on page 17.

After setting the pole(s), the customer/contractor must notify the local PG&E inspector who will look at the pole(s) to verify that they meet the requirements stated within this note (Note 7).

E. Customer-owned, permanent wood poles must be of circular cross section, minimum Class 6, with a minimum length of 25 feet (See Setting Depths in Table 3 on Page 3). A longer pole may be necessary to obtain the required clearance from the ground. Consult PG&E before ordering. Exception: minimum length may be 20 feet providing the required clearances are maintained.

F. The pole brand must remain visible at all times. The customer-owner shall not install the main service switch meter socket box, or conduit runs over the brand.

G. Used poles may be installed provided they are inspected and accepted by PG&E before installation.

H. Applicants must obtain a certificate of treatment or a letter from a supplier indicating that the pole was treated in accordance with the American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) and ANSI requirements. PG&E should receive a copy of this certificate before accepting the pole.

I. Do not notch, cut, chip, or damage the pole in any way. As this affects the integrity of the pole.

  1. A metal pole may be used for permanent service provided its size and strength are at least equivalent to the wood pole described in Note 7,and provided its base or foundation is designed to provide at least equivalent resistance to overturning when set at the same depth. The following are some poles that will meet these requirements:

A. An 11-gauge steel pole with 8-1/2-inch minimum diameter at ground line, set directly in the ground.

B. A 7-gauge steel pole with 7-inch minimum diameter at ground line, set directly in the ground.

C. A 5-inch extra-strong steel pipe (Schedule 80) set in concrete to obtain equivalent bearing surface.

D. A 6-inch standard steel pipe (Schedule 40) set in concrete to obtain equivalent bearing surface.

All steel permanent metal poles must be galvanized.

025055 Page 2 of 17 Rev. #20: 3/25/2022

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Table 1 Approved Suppliers for Permanent Wood Poles (Table 5, Item 2 on Page 7) [1]

Service Poles 35 Feet and Shorter Distribution Poles Taller than 35 Feet
Koppers Stella Jones − SJC / McFarland Cascade − MCF
(Tacoma, WA. or Eugene, OR. Yards only)
Silver Springs, NV.
Stella Jones − SJC / McFarland Cascade − MCF
Thunderbolt Wood Treating
Thunderbolt Wood Treating

1 Service poles are sold to lumberyard/hardware companies.

Table 2 Approved Service Pole Treatments [1]

Species Treatment
Species Penta-A Pressure
(Oil-Penta)
(PA)
Ammoniacal
Copper
Zinc Arsenate
(ACZA or SZ)
Creosote
(C)
Chromated
Copper Arsenate
(CCA or SK)
Western Red Cedar X X X X
Douglas-Fir
X X X
Northern Red Pine (NP)2
X

1 All poles must be full-length treated, except Western Red Cedar may be butt treated with oil pentachlorophenol. 2 The Northern Red Pine poles are only allowed as customer owned service poles 35 feet and shorter.

Table 3 Pole Setting Depths

Pole Length (feet)
Setting Depth (feet) Setting Depth (feet)
Pole Length (feet)
Firm Soil Rock
251 5-1/2 3
30 6 3
35 6−1/2 3-1/2
40 7 3-1/2
45
7−1/2 4

1 Do not use a 25 foot pole when the service crosses a street, road, or traveled dirt thoroughfare in agricultural areas. Use a taller pole that allows the minimum clearances to be met.

Table 4 Customer’s Service Attachment Location [1,] [2]

Panel Rating
(amps)
Weatherhead Distance From Top of Pole
(inches)
PG&E Service
Attachment
(type)
Panel Rating
(amps)
Minimum Maximum Maximum
 225 18 20 Service Knob
226-400 (1-Phase)3 34 36 3 Spool & Clevis4, 5, 6
226-400 (3-Phase)3 42 44 4 Spool & Clevis4, 5, 6

1 All open wire services require vertical construction. See Figure 7 on Page 11 and Figure 4 on Page 9. 2 A longer pole may be necessary to obtain the required service clearances from the ground. See note 9D on Page 4. 3 See Note 26 on Page 6. 4 See Figure 7 on Page 11. PG&E service must be insulated wire. 5 The installation of extended rack brackets is not allowed. Use Vertical construction. 6 A properly installed and PG&E approved crossarm may be allowed instead of spool and clevis attachments.

Rev. #20: 3/25/2022 025055 Page 3 of 17

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Vertical Clearance for Service Poles

  1. Conductors to service poles must have a minimum ground clearance as follows:

A. Over the center portion of the street, 18’ 0” minimum. For conductor height over trolleys, railroad tracks, telephone lines, etc., consult PG&E.

B. At the curb or outer limits of possible vehicular traffic, 16’ 0” minimum.

C. Over private driveways, lanes, or other areas accessible to vehicles used for industrial, commercial, or agricultural purposes, 16’ 0” minimum.

D. If required clearances cannot be obtained with a minimum-length service pole and the constructions illustrated on Pages 7 through 9, the required clearances should be obtained by using a longer (taller) pole . The setting depth for a 25-foot and longer pole must be followed as specified in Table 3 on Page 3.

10’ 0” Minimum (from surface of Company pole, lines, or equipment)

Company

Service Entrance Conductors

See Note 22 on Page 6

Figure 1 Clearances for Service Poles

  1. The customer must furnish, install, and maintain the service entrance wiring and service equipment beyond the point of attachment to PG&E’s service wires. The service entrance wires must be continuous and must be of a size and type that will provide not less than the minimum standard of safety as specified in local city and county ordinances or, where there is no local ordinance, as specified in the current issue of the National Electrical Code (NEC).

  2. The neutral conductor of 2-wire, 120 V and 3-wire, 120/240 V (or 120/208 V) services must be securely connected to the neutral terminal of the meter socket and extended through to the neutral terminal of the service entrance switch. It must be continuous (without splice) from the service head to the service entrance switch.

  3. At least 18 inches of service entrance conductors must be provided outside the service head.

  4. Weatherproof wire is not permitted in conduit.

025055 Page 4 of 17 Rev. #20: 3/25/2022

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Service Entrance and Load Side Conduit and Conduit Covering

  1. Service entrance and load side conduit and conduit covering requirements must comply with applicable codes and local requirements. G.O. 95 requires that any conduit installed below the 8-foot level on the pole must be treated as a riser; in which case, the conduit must be either rigid galvanized steel or 2-inch minimum diameter Schedule 40 PVC.

Exception: Conduit that enters the top of an enclosure is considered to be “protected” by the enclosure and need not be treated as a riser unless installed below the 6-foot level. Conduit installed above the 6-foot or 8-foot level (whichever height applies) must be either: (1) galvanized rigid steel conduit, (2) rigid aluminum conduit, (3) electrical metallic tubing, (4) IMC, or (5) PVC plastic conduit having a minimum wall thickness of 0.15 inches (Schedule 40 for 2-inch PVC conduit or larger, Schedule 80 for 1-1/2-inch or smaller). All fittings must be rain-tight. If PVC plastic conduit is used, it need not be covered. If rigid steel or other approved metallic conduit is used, it must be enclosed with PVC “U” shaped molding for a minimum distance of 8 feet below the lowest open service entrance conductor. The covering must be fastened to the pole at intervals not greater than 3 feet (see Page 11).

  1. Wood Block:

A. A wood block must be attached directly over the service head in the following situations:

(1) On a service pole where electrical metallic tubing, rigid steel, or IMC is used.

(2) On a wood pole with plastic conduit installation when the service head is metallic and the neutral service entrance conductor is not insulated.

B. A wood block over the service head is not required in the following instances:

(1) On a service pole with plastic conduit installation except as noted in Note 15, A. above.

(2) On a metallic pole, provided the pole is effectively grounded and provided all metallic conduits are adequately bonded to the metal pole with approved clamps or connectors.

C. Attach wood blocks as shown on Pages 8 through 10.

  1. All conduit and fittings must be rain-tight.

  2. Water pipe and fittings are not permitted for use as electrical conduit.

Service Entrance Switch

  1. Main switch, receptacles, and other equipment on the load side of the meter must be of weatherproof design or protected by weatherproof enclosures. Such equipment must comply with local ordinances and must also comply with the California Building Standards Code - Electrical Regulations.

  2. The switch cover must be locked if the enclosure contains exposed live parts.

Grounding

  1. The customer must be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed, non-current-carrying metal parts. Grounding and bonding must be in accordance with NEC and local ordinances. PG&E prefers, but does not require, the grounding electrode conductor wire to be protected against physical damage by rigid steel conduit or armored cladding (see Pages 8 and 10 for additional details).

Pole Location

  1. Poles must be located so that the vertical clearances specified in Note 9 and Figure 1 on Page 4 can be obtained. A service pole must not be located less than 10 feet from the surface of the PG&E pole, or pole-mounted equipment, or within 10 feet of the vertical plane of a PG&E line.

PG&E must be consulted for maximum span lengths, as they can vary depending on wire type and size, loading area, clearances, and suitable guying. The maximum span length of PG&E’s service drop to a temporary pole must not exceed 100 feet, and if 4/0 conductor is necessary, not more than 80 feet. The maximum span length for a permanent type installation may vary from 80 feet to 150 feet upward depending on the variables mentioned.

The pole must also be positioned so that the pole brand will not be hidden by the main service switch, meter socket box, or conduit runs.

Rev. #20: 3/25/2022 025055 Page 5 of 17

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Guying or Bracing

  1. Where conductors cross, a public or private paved street or road, a traveled dirt thoroughfare in agricultural areas, or poles set in areas with soft soil, as determined by PG&E, the customer’s pole must be guyed or braced against the pull of conductors as follows:

A. Temporary Poles: Anchor guy as shown in Figure 13 on Page 12, or with wood braces not smaller than 2” x 4” timber and securely bolted to the pole as per Figure 14 on Page 12. See Figure 2 on Page 8 for the correct placement of guy or brace.

B. Permanent Service Poles: Anchor guy only as shown in Figure 13 on Page 12. See Figure 5 on Page 10 for the correct placement of guy.

C. The guy strain insulator is to be located in a zone: 8 feet or more above the ground; and 8 feet or more below the level of the lowest supply conductor, or 6 feet or more from the surface of the pole and 1 foot or more below the level of the lowest supply conductor.

Metering Requirements

  1. Meters must be furnished by PG&E. See Greenbook sections 5, 6, and 7 for meter panel and additional metering requirements.

  2. For residential installations, meter sockets without test bypass facilities must be furnished, installed, and wired by the customer as shown on Page 12.

  3. For commercial and industrial applications, meter sockets with PG&E-approved test bypass facilities must be furnished, installed, and wired by the customer.

  4. Customer−owned poles for residential use are limited to only one meter panel rated at 225 amps (continuous) or less. Poles for non−residential applications are limited to only one meter panel rated at 200 amps or less. Residential and Non−residential installations with more than one meter, or a meter panel with a greater ampacity must be installed on panelboard construction as shown in Document 065374. Electric meter panels with a circuit breaker section attached to the right or left side of the meter section, may be required, as determined by PG&E, to provide additional support for the panel on the pole.

Verifying Depth of Customer Owned Poles

Applicants who plan to install a new customer−owned service pole prior to inspection by PG&E personnel can use following method for PG&E inspectors to verify the setting depth of newly installed poles that have already been set in the ground. See notes below and Figure 18, “Pole Depth Verification”, on page 17. These installations will be approved at the discretion of the PG&E Electrical inspector.

  1. Install 3/4−inch diameter PVC Schedule 40 conduit from the bottom of the pole to 12 inches above grade level.

  2. Place a removable cap on the top of the conduit and a permanent cap on the bottom of the conduit.

  3. Attach the conduit to the pole using three heavy duty pipe straps and 10D galvanized nails. Place one pipe strap towards the top of the conduit below the removable cap. Place the second strap in the middle of the conduit and the third strap at the bottom of the conduit just above the permanent cap.

  4. Install a PG&E approved pole to, at least, the minimum required setting depth. Refer to Table 3 Pole Setting Depths on page 3.

  5. Ensure the PVC conduit is not broken and remains free of soil, equipment, or other obstacles, throughout the conduit. The conduit will be used to verify the pole setting depth.

  6. Backfill and compact the soil around the pole to 90% of maximum density. Determine the maximum density and the in−place density by the California Test Method No. 216−6, Parts I and II respectively, or by ASTM D−1556 and D−1557 respectively. A copy of the test results may be required by PG&E.

  7. Call for inspection after the installation of the customer owned pole is complete.

025055 Page 6 of 17 Rev. #20: 3/25/2022

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Table 5 Materials to Be Furnished and Installed by the Customer
Item Description
1 Pole, 6” x 6” Timber, Class 6 Round, or Equivalent Metal (length as required, see Note 2 on Page 1)
2 Pole, Wood, or Equivalent Metal (see Note 6, Note 7, and Note 8 on Page 2). (See Table 1 on Page 3 for
approved list of wood pole suppliers.)
3 Meter Socket, Main Service Switch
4 Conduit, Service (see Note 14 on Page 5)
5 Conduit, Load Side (see Note 14 on Page 5)
6
Conduit Fitting, Threaded, With Cover and Gasket
7 ~~1 ~~
Covering, PVC Conduit, or PVC Moulding (see Page 9)
8 ~~1 ~~ Wood Block (4” x 4” x 6” or two 2” x 4” x 6” nailed together)
9 Service Head
10 Service Knob
11 Wire, Insulated (size as required) (18” minimum extension from service head)
12 Bolt, Machine, 5/8 or 3/4, (as required), Galvanized
13 Washer, Curved, 3” x 3” (for 5/8” Bolt) or 4” x 4” (for 3/4” Bolt), Galvanized
14 Guy Hook or Guy Pole Plate and Thimble Assembly
15 Guy Strand Cable, 7/32” or 1/4“ Minimum Galvanized Steel or Equivalent
16 Insulator, Guy Strain (10,000 lbs. minimum)
17 Guy Grip, Preform, (as required)
18 Anchor Rod, 5/8” x 6’ 0” Minimum, and Fittings (as required)
19 Anchor, 16” Cross Plate, or 8” Expanding
20 Guy Marker
21 Push Brace, 2” x 4” Minimum Timber (securely bolted to pole). See Figure 14 on Page 12.
22
Grounding by Customer (see Pages 8 and 10)

1 Omit conduit covering, Item 7, and wood block, Item 8, on a metal pole or on a wood pole with plastic conduit (see Note 15 on Page 5). Exception : The wood block is required for a wood pole with plastic conduit when the service head is metallic and the neutral service entrance conductor is uninsulated (see Note 15 on Page 5).

Table 6 Materials to Be Furnished and Installed by PG&E

Items Description Document
23 Vertical Construction
24 Spool and Clevis 022439
25 Meter, Watthour (as required)
26 Service Wire (as required) 059626
27 Insulator, for Service Wire (as required) 025202
28 Connectors, Service Sleeve (as required) 028852
29 Preformed Grip, Dead-End (as required) 028851

Rev. #20: 3/25/2022 025055 Page 7 of 17

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Temporary Installations

Notes

  1. Locate the guy in line with the service drop. The guy must be maintained taut.

  2. Grounding and bonding, by the customer, must be in accordance with NEC and local ordinances, (see Note 20 on Page 5). The ground rod must be located no less than 12 inches from the pole surface.

  3. Customer’s equipment must not be installed in the climbing space or over the pole brand. See Note 20 on Page 5 for grounding requirements.

  4. For customer-owned poles, span lengths are limited to 100 feet. The vertical separation between conductors in vertical construction is 8 inches minimum.

  5. If the poles are to be set in firm soil, use the setting depths from the “Firm Soil” column of Table 3 on Page 3. If the poles are to be set in rock, use the setting depths from “Rock” column of Table 3 on Page 3. If the poles are to be set in soft soil, the poles must be set deeper than the depths shown in Table 3. Consult the PG&E project coordinator for the other approved methods for soft soil.

See Alternate

Figure 2 Service Drop Cable to Receptacles

Figure 3 Service Drop Cable to Overhead Line

025055 Page 8 of 17 Rev. #20: 3/25/2022

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Temporary Installations (continued)

PG&E Insulated Line

Figure 4 Open Insulated Wire Construction (For use when the load requires a larger service drop conductor)

Guy
Service
Drop
Guy
Alternate Locations for
Service
Drop
Alternate Locations for
Guy
Guy
Service
Drop
Alternate Locations for
Guy
Guy
Service
Drop

Service Drop and Guy (see Note 1 on Page 8)

Detail A See Figure 16 on Page 14

Rev. #20: 3/25/2022 025055 Page 9 of 17

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Permanent Installations

Notes

  1. Locate the guy in line with the service drop. The guy must be maintained taut.

  2. Grounding and bonding, by the customer, must be in accordance with NEC and local ordinances (see Note 20 on Page 5), The ground rod must be located no less than 12 inches from the pole surface.

  3. Customer’s equipment must not be installed in the climbing space or over the pole brand. See Note 20 on Page 5 for grounding requirements.

  4. For customer-owned poles, span lengths are limited to 150 feet. The vertical separation between conductors in vertical construction is 8 inches minimum.

  5. If the poles are to be set in firm soil, use the setting depths from the “Firm Soil” column of Table 3 on Page 3. If the poles are to be set in rock, use the setting depths from “Rock” column of Table 3 on Page 3. If the poles are to be set in soft soil, the poles must be set deeper than the depths shown in Table 3 on Page 3. Consult the PG&E project coordinator for the other approved methods for soft soil.

PG&E

See Alternate 26
Locations 27 29
6” Min. PG
8 Lin
See
Table 4
9
Figure 15,
Page 13 28
11
12 1314 17
Note 22.C
on Page 6
15 16
4 See Note 14
on Page 5
Figure 13 on 7
Page 12
3 See Note 3
2
25 Meter Min. Note 7 2
Page
0”
(see
25’ on
6
75” Max.
66” Preferred
48” Min.
17 See Note
Ground
5
Level
(see Table 3
on Page 3)
To
Load

2729
7
See Alternate
Locations
PG
Lin
Ground
Level
Meter
To
Load
See Note 3
See Note
See Note 14
on Page 5
6” Min.
8
9
28
11
4
3
25
2
6
17
5
26
(see Table 3
on Page 3)
75” Max.
66” Preferred
48” Min.
Note 22.C
on Page 6
See
Table 4
13
12
Figure 15,
Page 13
14
15 16
25’ 0” Min.
(see Note 7
on Page 2
17
Figure 13 on
Page 12
(see
on P
Table 3
age 3)

Figure 5 Figure 6 Service Drop Cable to Underground Line Service Drop Cable to Overhead Line

025055 Page 10 of 17 Rev. #20: 3/25/2022

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Permanent Installations (continued)

Alternate Locations for Service Drop and Guy

on Page 10)

Detail B See Figure 5 and Figure 6 on Page 10

Figure 7 Open Insulated Wire Construction (for use when the load requires a larger service drop conductor)

Method of Covering Metal Conduits and Attaching Coverings on Wood Poles

Notes

  1. Strap PVC conduit to the pole with 2−hole heavy duty pipe straps or galvanized perforated plumber’s tape spaced not more than 3 feet apart (see Figure 8).

  2. Attach PVC molding to the poles with 1/4” x 2-1/2” galvanized washer-head lag screws.

Figure 8 PVC Conduit (see Note 1)

Figure 9 PVC Molding (see Note 2)

Rev. #20: 3/25/2022 025055 Page 11 of 17

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Meter Connections

  1. For test bypass facilities, see Note 25 on Page 6.

  2. All wiring material on the load side of the meter socket must be in accordance with applicable electrical codes, city and county ordinances, and must comply with the California Building Standards Code − Electrical Regulations. Unless threaded connections are used, adequate bonding of all sections of the service equipment must be provided.

Threaded Conduit Hub

4-Terminal

Meter Socket (see Note 1)

Lock

Ground Wire (see Note 20 on Page 5)

Threaded

Conduit Hub

4-Terminal Meter Socket (see Note 1)

Weatherproof Service Switch. Cover Must Be

Locked if Enclosure Contains Exposed Live Parts.

Weatherproof Receptacles (see Notes 18 and 19 on Page 5)

Figure 10 120/240 V, 3-Wire With WHM, Service Switch, and Receptacle in Weatherproof Cabinet (see Note 2)

Figure 11 120/240 V, 4-Wire Delta With Weatherproof Service Switch and Receptacles (see Note 2)

Figure 12 120/240 V, 3-Wire With Weatherproof Service Switch and Receptacles (see Note 2)

Details of Anchors, Guying Materials, and Brace

5/8” Diameter x 72”

2” x 4” Min. Wood

Galvanized Steel

Anchor Rod

Length Approx.

(minimum size)

2” x 4” Min. Wood

Length Approx.

Figure 13 Steel Anchor

n. Wood 20-Foot Approx. Bolted to Pole 45°
Bolted to
Stake
Service
Pole
” Min.
Stake
Approx.
45°
6” Min.

Figure 14 Wood Brace (for use with temporary pole only)

Note: Use 1/2 Galvanized Machine Bolts, and 1” x 1” Diameter Curved Washers to attach wood brace to stake and pole.

025055 Page 12 of 17 Rev. #20: 3/25/2022

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Figure 15 Guying Materials

Temporary Commercial Service to Non-Substantial Portable Structure

Notes

  1. Temporary Service Attachment

Temporary services will not be directly attached to any structure considered by PG&E to be of inadequate strength. The structure must, in all cases, be substantial (see Note 2) and capable of supporting the service span, as well as the force of the ladder and worker against the service mast.

  1. Portable Buildings (Figure 16 on Page 14 and Figure 17 on Page 16)

Portable buildings, such as small sheds, combined office/toilet structures, etc., are not considered to be substantial structures unless they are staked in place in the manner shown in Figure 17 on Page 16. Furthermore, periscopes must be installed and adequately braced in accordance with Figure 17 on Page 16 and the “Electric Service: Overhead” Section of the Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook).

  1. Temporary Poles (Figure 16 on Page 14)

Customer-owned temporary poles are required for support of PG&E’s overhead service wires if the temporary building to be served is considered by PG&E as not substantial .

  1. Method of Serving

Non-substantial structures that have been approved for the attachment of metering equipment and service periscopes may be served in the manner shown on Page 14. However, if desired, the metering equipment may be removed from the structure and placed on the temporary pole as shown in Figure 2 on Page 8.

  1. The distance from the centerline of the periscope service mast to the pole face must not exceed 24 inches.

  2. A portable structure must not obstruct the climbing space of a temporary pole.

  3. The working space in front of the meter must not be obstructed.

  4. The minimum distance from the surface of a PG&E pole to a customer’s pole is 10 feet.

  5. The maximum permitted span to a PG&E pole is 100 feet and may be only 80 feet in some cases (see Note 21 on Page 5).

Rev. #20: 3/25/2022 025055 Page 13 of 17

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Temporary Commercial Service to Non-Substantial Portable Structure (continued)

10 Feet Minimum (see Note 8 on Page 13) 100 Feet Maximum (see Note 9 on Page 13)

(see Note 6 on Page 11)

36” x 36” Working Space (see Note 7 on Page 11)

Customer’s Temporary Pole (for details, see Note 1 on Page 8 and Detail A on Page 9)

12 Feet Minimum Above Ground

36” Minimum 75” Maximum

Customer’s Portable Building

24” Maximum (see Note 5 on Page 13)

ary Pole
e 1 on 1
on Page 9)
inimum
ound
PG&E
Meter
15
Service Drop
Customer Service Entran

Figure 16 Portable Structure (non-substantial) (see Note 2 on Page 11)

025055 Page 14 of 17 Rev. #20: 3/25/2022

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Temporary Commercial Service to Substantial Portable Structure

Notes

  1. Substantial Building

See Note 2 on Page 13 for an explanation of a “substantial” portable building.

  1. Structure Anchoring

To prevent overturning, the structure is required to be securely anchored in place using one of the following methods:

A. Four 2” x 4” minimum wood stakes driven a minimum of 24 inches into the ground and attached to the framework of the structure using 1/4-inch minimum bolts or lag screws.

B. Four steel stakes having strength equivalent to 3/4-inch rigid steel pipe driven a minimum of 24 inches into the ground and attached to the framework of the structure using 1/4-inch minimum bolts or lag screws.

C. Four steel stakes having strength equivalent to a 3/4-inch rigid steel pipe driven a minimum of 24 inches into the ground with a cross member of each stake firmly contacting the upper surface of the timber used as a base or skid for the structure.

Note : Methods 2A and 2B above describe the preferred methods of attaching the stakes to the structure framework. However, four 16d (8-gauge, 3-1/2-inch) common nails per stake may be used in lieu of the bolts or lag screws, providing the wood is in good enough condition to permit a secure attachment.

  1. Periscope Mast Bracing

Two galvanized steel braces, securely bolted or lagged to the structure’s framework with approximately a 90 ° spread, must be installed. Use 3/4-inch galvanized rigid steel pipe or 1-1/4” x 1-1/4” x 1/8” galvanized steel angle (minimum size).

  1. Service Disconnection

When initial service is disconnected, sufficient service drop cable should be left connected to the service entrance cable to permit the future splicing of service cable from the ground level. This practice will limit the need for placement of ladders against the periscope mast when the structure is moved to a new location.

  1. The working space in front of the meter must not be obstructed.

6. For temporary underground commercial service to substantial portable structures, see Document 036670.

Rev. #20: 3/25/2022 025055 Page 15 of 17

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Temporary Commercial Service to Substantial Portable Structure (continued)

Customer’s Portable Building

36” x 36” Working Space (see Note 5 on Page 13)

Braces Securely Bolted or Lagged to Structure Framework

Bracing (see Note 3 on Page 15)

See Note 2 on Page 15

Figure 17 Portable Structure - Substantial

(see Note 2 on Page 13)

025055 Page 16 of 17 Rev. #20: 3/25/2022

OH: Services Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Removable Cap on the Top of the Conduit

Secure the Conduit to the Pole Using Three Heavy Duty Pipe Straps and 10D Galvanized Nails. One at the Top, One in the Middle, and One at the Bottom of the Conduit.

Figure 18 Pole Depth Verification

Revision Notes

Revision 20 has the following changes:

  1. Updated note 7.E. on Page 2 regarding setting depths.
  2. Updated Table 2 on Page 3.
  3. Updated Footnote 1 in Table 3 on Page 3 to include, traveled dirt thoroughfare in agricultural areas.
  4. Added Footnote 6 in Table 4 on Page 3 to allow properly installed and PG&E approved crossarms instead of spool and clevis attachments.
  5. Updated Note 22 on Page 6 requiring an anchor and guying for where conductors cross a traveled dirt thoroughfare in agricultural areas, or poles set in areas with soft soil.
  6. Updated Note 22 on Page 6 stating that single metered panels with a circuit breaker section may be required to provide additional support for the panel on the pole.
  7. Removed the old minimum pole setting depth shown in Figure 5 and Figure 6 on Page 10.

Rev. #20: 3/25/2022 025055 Page 17 of 17

OH:Services Greenbook

Prepared by: SXZO

Purpose and Scope

This document illustrates the minimum design and construction requirements for providing service, supplied from overhead facilities, to non−PG&E owned antenna and communication equipment installed above or below supply lines (primary, secondary or service) on PG&E or joint distribution wood poles and wood streetlight poles.

General Information

  1. The preferred location for antennas to be installed is in the communication zone on the pole and not the top of the pole. Only service connections and arrangements described and shown in this document are approved design installations. Alternate connections, arrangements, or designs will not be allowed.

  2. For the design and construction requirements for antenna and communication equipment installed on PG&E or Municipal owned steel streetlight poles, or 3rd party owned wood poles, served from an underground or overhead service, refer to 094677, 094678 and 094679 listed in the reference documents on Page 3.

  3. It is the responsibility of the constructor to ensure the antenna installation meets the requirements of PG&E and CPUC General Order 95.

  4. Before installation, the location of the equipment and the vertical run are to be mutually agreed upon between representatives of the communication company and PG&E.

  5. 3rd party (non−PG&E) owned antennas and communication equipment are not allowed to be installed on poles that have PG&E distribution equipment installed and connected to the primary voltage lines. This includes the top of the pole and the communication zone. This will reduce interference on poles and allow for quicker and safer access during emergency work for the operation and replacement of equipment.

ntennas and communication equipment are not allowed to be installed on** poles that have PG&E distribution equipment installed and connected to the primary voltage lines. This includes the top of the pole and the communication zone. This will reduce interference on poles and allow for quicker and safer access during emergency work for the operation and replacement of equipment.

Distribution equipment includes primary risers, cutouts, fuses, switches, transformers, capacitors, regulators, as well as any other type of equipment not listed here that is connected to the overhead primary lines.

  1. Primary voltage lines with triangular construction provide a safer work environment, more reliable system, and reduces the threats of fire ignition, by increasing the separation of the wires and installing them at different levels. For these reasons, of the design and installation of antennas on existing pole tops where the primary voltage lines are built with triangular construction are not allowed . A pole nearby that has all wires on a crossarm (flat construction) or a streetlight pole may be selected.

  2. Stand mounted antennas or antennas embedded in or attached to communication cables and messengers must have a minimum radial clearance of 6 feet from the edge of the pole. If the Minimum Approach Distance (MAD) for the antenna is greater than 3 feet than the radial clearance must be increased.

  3. SmartPole Metering is required for service. Refer to 094675 listed in the reference documents on Page 3 for the SmartPole metering options and requirements. For loads that exceed 100 amps contact the local service planning office for alternate metering requirements.

  4. The metering provision contained herein is an exception to the Greenbook requirement and is designed primarily for CATV power supplies and other telecom equipment requiring metering.

  5. The metering equipment must be mounted on the same pole as the PG&E service, antenna, and communication equipment. Remote metering is not allowed.

  6. When pole metering is unacceptable because it does not meet the PG&E criteria and requirements, the alternative method is to install approved pad−mounted pedestal metering served from a PG&E underground service. Some examples of unacceptable situations include locations:

  • Where access to the meter is impaired.

Rev. #14: 3/25/2022 027911 Page 1 of 15

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

  • Where meters may be subject to obvious traffic hazards or unsafe working conditions.

  • Where hillside pole locations render metering unsafe.

  • Where there are only PG&E underground facilities and no overhead primary and secondary distribution facilities.

  1. The potential exists for governmental entities to inquire as to metering for traffic or surveillance cameras, or possibly lighting load if mounted on PG&E or joint poles. In all cases, field representatives shall request the telecommunication company to provide documentation that authorizes them to occupy the space on the pole (e.g., contract permit issued by PG&E or joint owner for tenants).

  2. The pole-mounted antenna and communication equipment loads will only be served at single−phase, 2−wire, 120 V or a single−phase, 3−wire, 120/240 V service.

  3. The requirements in this Engineering Document are typically updated annually. The requirements become effective on the date of the publication. New changes may affect the customer’s preliminary designs and selected pole location as submitted on their application. This includes application submittals that are up to, or more than, 12 months old. As described in Greenbook section 1.4., Changes in Requirements, PG&E may revise its design and construction documents up to the date the applicant’s service design is approved and signed−off by PG&E. Applicants that have not been provided a PG&E approved design, or if the approved design is older than 12 months, are subject to newly published requirements.

  4. If changes are made to an existing antenna installation that requires the pole to be replaced for any of the following reasons, then all requirements in this document must be met. Including Note 5 where the antenna would be required to be removed from a pole with distribution equipment connected to the primary lines.

A. Pole loading is exceeded.

B. Minimum clearances will not be met.

C. The PG&E service and SmartPole meter are upgraded to handle a larger ampacity due to increased loading.

D. The PG&E meter is remote at another location and not attached on the same pole or in a pad−mounted pedestal. Remote meters are not allowed and must be brought to current standards.

  1. Pole steps shall be placed so that runs or risers do not interfere with their free use. Attention is directed to the following requirements of General Order (G.O.) 95.

A. The position of the climbing space shall not be shifted more than 90 ° around the pole within a vertical distance of less than 8 feet. Refer to Rule 93 of G.O. 95.

B. Vertical runs are not permitted in climbing spaces through conductors in rack construction.

C. Vertical runs of supply lines shall have a clearance of not less than 1-1/2 inches from vertical runs of communication lines.

D. The coaxial cable leads to and from amplifier units shall not be carried under the same protective covering with the 120/240 V supply conductors. The leads should be carried outside the molding in cable rings. The leads are not required to be covered unless they are within a vertical distance of 3 feet above or 6 feet below unprotected supply conductors.

E. The ground wire is required to be covered.

  1. Units shall be fused or otherwise protected against short-circuit currents. A fused switch or circuit breaker, approved for service entrances, is required. Communication type fuses and fuse holders are not satisfactory means of disconnecting the power source.

  2. Power Supply Units: Power supplies, or any amplifier which has or is connected to a backup power supply, must have a disconnecting device to separate it from PG&E’s system. Power units are to have the communication company’s name and emergency phone number on them.

  3. Antennas: Antennas installed on distribution poles must have an ownership label with a contact number, site identification information, and a disconnect switch which will shut off RF transmission. The disconnect switch is to be used in an emergency when the normal practice of arranged power−down cannot be accomplished. Locate the ownership label above the SmartPole Meter and not greater than 15 feet above grade. See the requirements in item 18.C. Signage, on Page 5.

  4. To ensure proper climbing and working space around poles is maintained a minimum clearance of 4 feet from PG&E poles and metering equipment is required for non−PG&E street signs on posts or poles.

027911 Page 2 of 15 Rev. #14: 3/25/2022

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

  1. Antennas and communication equipment will not be allowed on poles that have permanent non−PG&E street signs attached if the signs restrict the pole climbing space and the working space around metering equipment.

  2. Antennas and communication equipment will not be allowed on PG&E poles that are less than 10 feet away from a non−PG&E pole. This includes streetlight and non−streetlight poles.

  3. Antennas and communication equipment on a streetlight pole must not block or impede the illumination projecting (throw) from the streetlight fixture (luminaire). For specific requirements see document TD−092817−B002 Streetlighting Design Restrictions: Mounting Apparatus below Streetlights.

  4. PG&E meters must not be installed on poles that are in traffic medians or traffic islands where vehicle thoroughfares are on more than one side of the pole. Refer to document 094675.

References Location Document

“Procedures for Working Around Antennas . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD−2001P−01 SmartPole Meter for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 094675 Service to Communication Equipment on PG&E Owned Steel Streetlight Poles with Antenna Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 094677 PG&E Metering and Service Connections For Non−PG&E Owned Steel Streetlight Poles With Antenna and Communication Equipment . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 094678 PG&E Electric Service and Metering For Communication Company Equipment and Antennas on Non−PG&E Telecommunication

e.com/pge_global/common/pdfs/services/building-and-renovation/greenbook-manual-online/094679.pdf) Communication Company Equipment and Antennas on Non−PG&E Telecommunication

Owned Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 094679 Notification of Abnormal Conditions Caused by Third−Party Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD−2014S Moldings, Conduits, and Attachments for Use on Wood Poles and Crossarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Risers/ UG-1: Terminations . . . . . . . . 021924 Requirements for Customer−Owned Poles . . . . . . . . . . OH:Services/Greenbook/EMWP . . . . . . . 025055

     Compression [Type Connectors for Overhead](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdocTDM.asp?itemid=981530085)

Distribution and Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041010 Fired Wedge Connectors for Primary and Secondary Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066194

Design and Construction:

  1. The following requirements apply to antennas installed on solely owned, jointly owned, wood distribution poles.

A. Antennas above supply lines: Third party antennas are only allowed above supply lines or at pole top (above supply facilities) under a license agreement and in accordance with the design and construction requirements outlined herein.

B. Antennas below supply and/or communication lines: Third party antennas are allowed in or below the communication space on joint use poles in accordance with the design and construction requirements outlined herein. When the requesting party is a member of the NCJPA and requests attachment to a PG&E solely−owned distribution wood pole, that party is required to submit a joint pole preliminary Form 2 intent. When the requesting party is not a member of the NCJPA, they must obtain a license agreement for pole attachments. Refer requests from non−members to PG&E’s New Revenue Development Department (NRD).

C. PG&E owned antennas: Antennas associated with PG&E’s SCADA system or the SmartMeter [TM] project shall be installed in accordance with the applicable engineering documents; 054422 PG&E Overhead SCADA and PDAC Installation, 068190 Antenna and DCU Installation Details for SmartMeter [TM] Network, 072145. SmartMeter [TM] Electric SSN Network Nodes on Distribution Infrastructure.

D. Third party antennas are not allowed on streamline poles. PG&E owned antennas are allowed on streamline poles on an exception basis when no other options are available.

E. Any antenna communication equipment or combination of equipment that exceeds 18” in height must be stood off a minimum of 4” from the surface of the pole to facilitate climbing.

Rev. #14: 3/25/2022 027911 Page 3 of 15

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

  1. Design and Construction Requirements for 3 [rd] Party Antennas on Distribution Poles; Above or Below Supply Lines. The following requirements apply to antennas installed on joint use poles supporting circuits up to 50 KV and are in accordance with G.O. 95 Rule 94. Antennas and their related crossarms, brackets, hardware, risers, control boxes, etc. shall meet the requirements detailed below.

A. Clearances (Also see illustrations in Figure 6 through Figure 10)

(1) Antennas and supporting elements (e.g. crossarms, brackets) shall maintain a vertical clearance of 6 feet below Supply Conductors operating at 0 – 50kV.

(2) Antennas and their support elements (e.g. crossarms, brackets) shall maintain a 2 ft. vertical separation from communication conductors and equipment. Antennas may be installed above or below communication conductors as long as the installation complies with the clearance requirements outlined in items (1) and (3) of this section.

(3) Antennas, associated equipment (e.g. terminations, enclosures) and their support elements installed above supply lines and/or communication lines of different ownership shall maintain vertical clearances as specified in Rule 38 Table 2, Case 21 Columns A−H. These requirements are summarized below.

(a) Minimum vertical clearance of antennas and associated support elements from:

(i) Span wires, guys and messengers – 2 feet

(ii) Communication conductors – 2 feet

(iii) 0−750 volt conductors including service drops – 4 feet

(iv) 750−35,000 volt conductors – 6 feet

(b) Notes:

(i) Vertical runs or risers associated with the antenna(s) may terminate 1 foot below the antenna or support element for conditions (a) (i) or (a) (iii) above.

(ii) Service drops, that serve only the antenna, may terminate 10 inches below the antenna and its support elements.

(4) Antennas, associated equipment and support elements, installed above supply or communication lines, shall maintain radial clearances from unattached supply and communication lines as specified in Rule 38, Table 2 Case 3. These requirements are summarized below.

(a) Minimum radial clearance of antennas, equipment and associated support elements from:

(i) Span wires, guys, messengers and communication conductors – 2 feet

(ii) 0−750 volt conductors including service drops – 4 feet

(iii) 750−7,500 volt conductors – 4 feet

(iv) 7,500−20,000 volt conductors – 6 feet

(v) 20,000 – 150,000 volt conductors – 8 feet

(vi) Above 150KV see G.O. 95.

(5) Antennas shall maintain a 2 foot horizontal clearance from centerline of pole when installed between supply and communication lines or below communication lines.

(6) There is no horizontal clearance from centerline of pole for antennas installed between supply lines or at the top of the pole, but the antenna and support elements must be arranged so that the pole can be safely climbed.

(7) Antennas shall have a vertical clearance above ground as specified in Table 1, Column B Cases 1 to 6a of G.O. 95. This requires antennas that overhang buildings, walkable surfaces, roadways etc. meet the same vertical clearance requirements as communication conductors.

B. Climbing Space must be maintained except for the allowable climbing space obstructions. Reference G.O. 95 Rule 54.7 A (3). Antennas, associated equipment and support elements are not allowed in the climbing space. When antennas are installed above supply lines at the top of the pole, climbing space must be maintained to:

(1) The bottom of the antenna (including associated support elements) if affixed less than 8 inches from the surface of the pole.

027911 Page 4 of 15 Rev. #14: 3/25/2022

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

(2) The top of the pole or pole top extension if the antennas are affixed more than 8 inches from the surface of the pole or pole top extension.

Note: Climbing space can be difficult to maintain with antenna installations due to antenna size, number, configuration, and orientation on the pole. In addition, most installations have multiple risers and vertical runs, grounds, equipment and metering enclosures. As always, good communication, up front, is essential to ensure adequate space is available to accommodate the antenna and all the associated equipment.

ce can be difficult to maintain with antenna installations due to antenna size, number, configuration, and orientation on the pole. In addition, most installations have multiple risers and vertical runs, grounds, equipment and metering enclosures. As always, good communication, up front, is essential to ensure adequate space is available to accommodate the antenna and all the associated equipment.

(3) Pole Steps: Stepping must be in accordance with Rule 91.3. No pole steps are to be installed in the supply space or above supply lines except for any necessary steps associated with a pole top extension bracket.

(4) Risers, grounds and vertical conductor runs on non−metallic structures:

(a) Risers, grounds and vertical runs passing supply lines and/or communication lines and/or their associated equipment shall be suitably covered throughout their length, shall be installed outside the climbing space and shall be constructed and maintained in accordance with Rule 54.6−D 1, 2, 3, and 5 (requirements for vertical runs for supply lines).

(b) The suitable protective covering (see Rule 22.8) for risers, grounds and vertical runs passing supply lines and/or equipment shall extend no less than:

(i) 3 feet above lines energized from 0 − 750 volts

(ii) 6 feet above lines energized from 750 – 35,000 volts

(iii) 9 feet above lines energized from 35,000 – 50,000 volts

(5) Risers, grounds and vertical conductor runs on metallic structures that pass supply lines and/or communication lines and/or equipment shall occur on a single structure and shall be installed outside the climbing space in accordance with Rule 54.6−D4.

C. Signage: Poles shall be marked with a sign or signs for each antenna installation. The sign shall contain the following information and placement.

(1) Name / identification of the antenna operator

(2) A 24−hour contact number of antenna operator for emergency notification or other information

(3) Unique identifier of the antenna installation

(4) Indication that the antennas RF output is in compliance with the FCC General Population (G.P.) uncontrolled exposure limits or, if the antenna exceeds those limits indication of the minimum approach distance. See Utility Procedure TD−2001P−01 Procedures for Working Around Antennas for examples of typical RF signage.

(5) Located above the SmartPole Meter and not greater than 15 feet above grade.

D. Disconnect switch

(1) Antennas that exceed the FCC’s General Population (G.P.) Uncontrolled Limits

(a) Require the antenna owner to provide a disconnect switch that is readily accessible to PG&E. This switch must de−energize all sources of power to the antenna, both AC and any battery backup.

(b) Require the antenna owner to establish a protocol, agreed to by PG&E, for powering down the antenna site.

(c) Will be operated by mutual agreement except during emergencies.

Note: Minimum Approach Distances (MADs) must be indicated on the antenna signage.

(2) Antennas that meet the FCC’s General Population (G.P) Uncontrolled Limits

(a) Do not require a disconnect switch for these low power antennas.

(b) Require the wireless company to submit documentation indicating the maximum RF output of the antenna meets the FCC requirements for General Population/Uncontrolled RF exposure.

  1. Notification of Conditions to Third Party Utility: If an existing antenna installation is found that does not meet the design and construction requirements detailed in 1 thru 7 above, a 3rd party notification (Form -3447) should be created. Typical problems involve antennas, risers or other equipment installed in the climbing space, inadequate clearances or signage, and antennas installed in the Safety Clearance Zone on joint poles. These conditions

Rev. #14: 3/25/2022 027911 Page 5 of 15

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

present a hazard for workers and must be corrected within the timelines described in Utility Standard TD−2014S Notification of Conditions to Third-Party Utility. Also see the, Design and Construction Checklist for Third Party Antennas, for requirements and typical deficiencies.

  1. Design and Construction Requirements for Antennas and Other Equipment on Streetlight Poles

A. Antennas and other equipment on PG&E−owned streetlight poles

(1) PG&E will not sell ownership interest in a streetlight−only pole. Third party attachments, antennas or other equipment (see note below) may be permitted under a license agreement. Requests from a NCJPA Member to become a joint pole owner (for streetlight only poles), via Form 2, should be rejected. Refer all requests to PG&E’s NRD Department.

(2) Licensing for third party antennas, gunshot detectors, government owned cameras, and other equipment will be managed by PG&E’s NRD Department. Consult with NRD and Electric Distribution Standards for the applicable design, construction and other requirements.

(3) Where applicable, unmetered attachments to streetlights must also meet the requirements outlined in Form 79−1078 − Agreement for unmetered electric service to devices connected to Pacific Gas and Electric Company’s streetlight facilities.

(4) Antennas are not allowed on poles with decorative, semi−decorative, or ”Special facility” streetlights that the customer has chosen from our appliance product mix or outside of the normal product mix. Exceptions may be allowed when the streetlight customer of record states, in writing, that they have no objection to the installation. Refer any requests to PG&E’s New Revenue Development (NRD) Department.

  1. Antennas on customer owned streetlight poles.

A. Antenna projects involving customer owned streetlight poles will be managed by PG&E’s. Streetlight Program Manager. Streetlight poles installed under the following rate schedules are not owned by PG&E therefore any requests for attachment should be directed to the pole owner.

(1) LS−1C, Customer owns pole and foundation

(2) LS−2A, B, and C

(3) OL−1

B. Where the requesting party wants to attach to a PG&E owned streetlight mast arm on a customer owned pole, a letter of approval must be acquired by the requesting party from the PG&E customer receiving lighting service.

C. A separate energy connection for the antenna must be made under the governing tariff in absence of any special CPUC approved agreement. The 79−1048 agreement (and Rate Schedule LS−2) allows antennas on city owned streetlight poles to utilize the streetlight photo control receptacle as the energy source where the installation meets the loading limitation and all other requirements of the agreement.

Table 1 Bill of Material to Be Furnished by the Communication Company
Item Description
1 Conduit, Rigid, PVC, Schedule 801 (size as required)
2 Pipe Straps, Galvanized
3 Conduit Fittings (as required)
4 Wire, 600 V, Size as Required
5 Service Weather Head, PVC
6 SmartPole Meter Enclosure094675, as required
7 Steps, Pole (if pole is unstepped)

1 Use Schedule 80 for 1-1/2” or smaller, or Schedule 40 for 2”.

027911 Page 6 of 15 Rev. #14: 3/25/2022

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

Note

Table 2 Bill of Material to Be Furnished and Installed by PG&E
Item Description Code Document
8 Connector, Compression or Wedge (as required) 041010
9 Conduit, Rigid, PVC, 2” 360234 021924
10 SmartPole Meter, Watthour (as required)
  1. Unmetered load may be 2-wire, 120 V or 3-wire, 120/240 V.

  2. When a SmartPole Meter is required refer to TD−027911B−002 SmartPole Meter for Service to Pole−Mounted Communication Equipment.

Rev. #14: 3/25/2022 027911 Page 7 of 15

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

Seal Connection on Covered Cable

and Plastic Cover

Ground to Be Installed by Communication Company

Secondary Extended Rack

Figure 2 Installation With Aerial Cable Secondary

Crossarm

4 8

n
H
N
H
H
N
H
H
N
H

To Communication Equipment

Figure 3 Installation With Existing Extended Rack Secondary

Note: New Extended Rack Construction is not allowed

ommunication ompany Cable To Secondary
mmunication
mpany
uipment

Grou
Inst
Comm
Co
72” Min. to
Secondary
Level
36” M
1

15’ Minimum
(may be reduced to
9’ when not
exposed to traffic)
1
7
2
3
To Co
E
Se
Extend
mmunication
mpany
uipment

Grou
Inst
Comm
Co
72” Min. to
Secondary
Level
36” M
1

15’ Minimum
(may be reduced to
9’ when not
exposed to traffic)
1
7
2
3
To Co
E
Se
Extend
36” M
mmunication
mpany
uipment

Grou
Inst
Comm
Co
72” Min. to
Secondary
Level
36” M
1

15’ Minimum
(may be reduced to
9’ when not
exposed to traffic)
1
7
2
3
To Co
E
Se
Extend
Grou
Inst
Comm
Co
1
7
To Co
E
Se
Extend

8
ndary
sarm
H P N H
9 4
Seal End of
1
VC Conduit
th Duxseal,
de 495060)

Seal End of
VC Conduit
th Duxseal,
de 495060)

Figure 1 Unmetered Service Connection to Communication Equipment

To Communication Equipment

Figure 4 Installation With Crossarm Secondary

027911 Page 8 of 15 Rev. #14: 3/25/2022

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

Notes

  1. For poles close to curbs avoid exposure to equipment and personnel. It is best to place the meter on a side of the pole away from traffic. If this cannot be done, the following conditions must be met:

A. The meter must be no closer than 4 feet to a curb to provide safe access and reading. B. If the meter panel extends to the side past the pole, it cannot be closer than 1 foot to a curb. C. For meters on poles next to driveways or roads without curbs see Section B−B (Driveway or Road without Curb) and associated notes on Page 9 .

Communication

To Secondary

15’ Minimum

9’ when not

Curb

Section A-A (Road with Curb) Note : See Section B-B (Road without Curb) on Page 10

Ground to Be Installed by Communication Company

3
in.
ax.
not be
to traffic,
e 1 and
n A-A)

Figure 5 Pole-Metered Service Connection to Communication Equipment

Detail A

Rev. #14: 3/25/2022 027911 Page 9 of 15

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

Notes

For poles next to roads that have no curb, rolled curbs, sidewalk or curb ramps, driveways, including the driveway apron (approach), or other type of non−curbed vehicle entrance, avoid exposure to equipment and personnel by placing the meter panel on the back side of the pole away from the road or vehicle entrances. The meter panel can only be placed in the 12 O’clock position, between the 9 to12 O’clock position, or between the 12 to 2 O’clock positions. The meter panel must not,

  1. Extend out past the parallel plane of the pole to the roadway.

  2. Be closer than 8 feet (96 inches) from adjacent roads or non−residential driveways.

  3. Be closer than 4 feet (48 inches) from residential driveways or sidewalk ramps.

Parallel Plane to Roadway

Road

Driveway or Adjacent Road Thoroughfare Alley

Section B-B (Driveway or Road without Curb)

027911 Page 10 of 15 Rev. #14: 3/25/2022

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

Notes

  1. Consideration should be given on reserving additional space (> 6 Ft.) for proposed or future installation of PG&E wires and equipment.

Centerline of Pole

0 � 50 kV Conductors

Secon
Aerial
Comm
Condu
Comm
Condu
Comm
Condu
Ant Ant ennas ennas 2 Ft
(Rul
2 Ft
(Rul
. Minim
e 94.4
Ant Ant

2 Ft. Minimum (Rule 94.4E)

Figure 7 Antenna − Below Communication Lines

Figure 6 Antenna − Below Supply Lines

Rev. #14: 3/25/2022 027911 Page 11 of 15

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

Figure 8 Pole Top Antenna − Single Communication Conduit Run

027911 Page 12 of 15 Rev. #14: 3/25/2022

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

Note: If Antennas are mounted more than 8” from the surface of the pole, climbing space must be maintained to the top of the pole.

6 Ft Minimum (Rule 94.4C)

6”
M
36” x 36”
Climbing
Space
Ante
Cond
36” x 36”
Climbing
Space
36” x 36”
Climbing
Space
36” x 36”
Climbing
Space

Section AA

See Note
Top of Conduit
750 V 35 KV
A
A
Multiple Communi
Conduits on
Standoff Brackets
Conductor
10 Ft Typical Spacing
for Standoff Brackets
6 Ft
(Rul
Antennas
5
Top of Conduit
750 V 35 KV
A
A
Multiple Communi
Conduits on
Standoff Brackets
Conductor
10 Ft Typical Spacing
for Standoff Brackets
6 Ft
(Rul
Antennas
5

Figure 9 Pole Top Antenna − Multiple Communication Conduits on Standoff Brackets

Rev. #14: 3/25/2022 027911 Page 13 of 15

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

Note

Any equipment or combination of equipment that exceeds 24” in height must be stood off a minimum of 4” from the surface of the pole to facilitate climbing.

Service Conduit Sch 80 for 1 1/2” or Smaller

Sch 40 for 2”

Communication Equipment (see note above)

30” x 30”

Street Light

Communication Conduit Grd

Curb CL

Figure 10 Pole Top Antenna − Streetlight Only Poles

027911 Page 14 of 15 Rev. #14: 3/25/2022

OH:Services Greenbook Installation Details for Service to Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment

Revision Notes

Revision 14 has the following changes:

  1. Updated the Purpose and Scope on Page 1.

  2. Edited Note 2 on Page 1.

  3. Edited Note 6 on Page 1.

  4. Separated Note 8 into four. Notes 8 through 12.

  5. Added new new Notes 15.C. and 15.D.

  6. Created new Notes 20, 21, 22, 23 and 24 on Page 3.

  7. Updated Reference Section on Page 3.

  8. Updated references in Table 1 on Page 6.

Rev. #14: 3/25/2022 027911 Page 15 of 15

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook

Prepared by: MZGD

This document is also included in the following manual:

This document provides specifications, ordering information, illustrations, and application instructions for the various sizes of non-concrete and precast concrete enclosures used in PG&E electric underground secondary distribution.

General Information

  1. The words boxes/enclosures have the same meaning and are used interchangeably.
  2. The design loads for these subsurface enclosures are specified in Engineering Material Specification No. 51,

“Non-Concrete Enclosures”, and in Engineering Material Specification No. 53, “Electric Underground Concrete where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Enclosures” where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

  1. Requirements for non-concrete, non-deliberate vehicular traffic enclosures and covers: A. Non-concrete enclosures for incidental loading must meet the requirements of Engineering Material

Specification No. 51, “Non-Concrete Enclosures.”. B. The cover and exposed portions of a enclosure shall be of a concrete color. Enclosures may not be painted other colors.

C. Enclosures shall comply with this document concerning marking, security devices, and dimensions. D. Enclosure covers must have PG&E identification. The enclosure body and cover must be labeled with the manufacturer’s name, enclosure weight, and have the PG&E code number on inside surfaces. E. The cover shall be made of polymer concrete and shall have a PG&E-approved high coefficient of friction (0.65 or better), slip-resistant surface. F. Non-concrete parts shall be interchangeable. 4. Requirements for concrete enclosures, required when installing a secondary enclosure in an area subject to vehicular traffic.

A. Concrete enclosures for full-traffic must meet the requirements of the latest ASTM C-857. B. Enclosures shall also comply with this document’s requirements, such as marking, security devices, and dimensions.

C. Concrete parts shall be interchangeable. Concrete joints shall be interchangeable with those shown in Figure 7 on Page 9, Figure 9 on Page 11, and Figure 11 on Page 13.

D. Covers shall have a PG&E-approved high coefficient of friction (0.65 or better), slip-resistant surface. E. Enclosure covers must have PG&E identification. The enclosure body, cover, and extension must be labeled with the manufacturer’s name, enclosure weight, and have the PG&E code number on inside surfaces. 5. Pedestals are no longer allowed for new construction. Replacement pedestal codes can be found in Table 19 of

Document 066205.

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 028028 Page 1 of 14

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Application

  1. Consider the following when selecting enclosure sizes:

A. Secondary non-concrete enclosures are the preferred method of terminating 600 V conductors in residential, small commercial applications and in areas where heavy, non-deliberate vehicular traffic is expected. Concrete secondary enclosures should be installed in areas where full-vehicular traffic is expected.

B. Ultimate required conductor size and number to serve the maximum service panel.

C. Location of duct entrances, cable layout, and minimum bending radius of cables.

  1. The 26” deep enclosures are required for installations of conductors larger than 4/0.

  2. When installing any secondary enclosure smaller than 36” x 60”, adjust the enclosure to the anticipated natural grade. Install enclosures as level as practical. Do not exceed 2” per foot in any direction. If the maximum grade of 2” per foot cannot be met, the enclosure must be installed level and a retaining wall installed. Use grout or foam placed from the outside to seal around any side entering conduits if side entering conduits are required. Do not pave over the enclosure cover.

  3. When installing a 36” x 60” secondary enclosure, install the enclosure as level as practical, but do not exceed 1/8” per foot in any direction. Use adjustment bolts in cover to adjust cover to meet needed final grade. Do not pave over enclosure.

  4. Secondary enclosures shall not be used for primary cable.

11. Swedge reducers are necessary with conduit smaller than the terminators supplied (see Document 062288).

  1. All conduits are to be stubbed 1-1/2” min. − 2-1/2” max. from ground level inside the subsurface enclosure. See Figure 5 on Page 7. End bells are required.

  2. For new construction, conduit entry shall be as shown in Figure 5 and Figure 6 on Page 7 for splice boxes. Group conduits at one end of the box to achieve maximum cable length to avoid exceeding minimum cable bending radius.

  3. For new construction, conduit entry into the #2 and #3 concrete enclosures shall also be as shown in Figure 5 and Figure 6 on Page 7.

  4. When replacing an existing box or installing new conduits into an existing box, the conduits may only enter the knockouts or duct terminators when having 18” − 24” of cover at the entrance of the box. A minimum of 18” of conduit entering the side wall must be straight with no bends.

  5. Conduits that do not terminate in a duct terminator must be fitted with an end bell.

  6. Enclosures shall be set on a 6-inch thick layer of 1” drain rock, mechanically compacted, or alternatively secondary enclosures other than #5 secondary concrete enclosure may be set on a 6-inch thick layer of 3/4” Class 2 Aggregate Base (AB).

18. See Document 066205 for replacement parts for older style installations.

References Location Document

Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Connectors/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 015251 Multi-Tap Splice for 600-Volt Insulated Cables . . . . . . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 036640 Straight and Tap Splice for 600 Volt Insulated Cable . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051034 Identification Plates for Subsurface Enclosures . . . . . . UG-1: Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051768 Primary Electric Underground Equipment Enclosures . UG-1: Enclosures/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 062000 Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . 062288 Enclosure Repair/Replacement Criteria and Replacement Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066205 PG&E Approved Manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066211 Engineering Material Specification No. 51, “Non-Concrete Enclosures” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS51 Engineering Material Specification No. 53, where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE') “Electric Underground Concrete Enclosures” where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . TIL where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS53 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

ge_ecm&commandEvent=D2_ACTION_CONTENT_VIEW&locateDql=pge_document(all) where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS53 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

028028 Page 2 of 14 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Table 1 Guide for Application of Splice Boxes in New Construction for Underground Secondary Using Multi-Tap Splices (see Document 036640) [1]

Enclosure Size
Description 11-1/2” 13” x 24” 17” x 30” 24” x 36” 36”x60”2
4 Terminal #6 Str. − 350kcmil For
Streetlight
Applications
Only
(see Note 2
on Page 5)

For Service
Runs and
Non-Bus Bar
Splices
(4/0 max)

x 3
6 Terminal #6 Str. − 350 kcmil #6 Str. − 350 kcmil #6 Str. − 350 kcmil x 3
8 Terminal #6 Str. − 350 kcmil #6 Str. − 350 kcmil #6 Str. − 350 kcmil x 3
4 Terminal 4/0 − 1,000 kcmil 4/0 − 1,000 kcmil 4/0 − 1,000 kcmil x 3, 4 x
6 Terminal 4/0 − 1,000 kcmil 4/0 − 1,000 kcmil 4/0 − 1,000 kcmil x 3, 4 x
6 Terminal (4) #6 − 350, (2) 4/0 −
1,000 kcmil
(4) #6 − 350, (2) 4/0 −
1,000 kcmil
(4) #6 − 350, (2) 4/0 −
1,000 kcmil
x 3, 4 x
8 Terminal (4) #6 − 350, (4) 4/0 −
1,000 kcmil
(4) #6 − 350, (4) 4/0 −
1,000 kcmil
(4) #6 − 350, (4) 4/0 −
1,000 kcmil
x 3, 4 x
8 Terminal
(one-way
configuration)
4/0 − 1,000 kcmil 4/0 − 1,000 kcmil 4/0 − 1,000 kcmil x
8 Terminal
(two-way
configuration)
8 Terminal
(two-way
configuration)
8 Terminal
(two-way
configuration)
8 Terminal
(two-way
configuration)
x
16 Terminal
(two-way
configuration)

1 For approved suppliers, see Document 066211. 2 If using splices, 36” x 60” enclosure can accommodate up to 14 runs (7 in and 7 out or combination) of 1,000 kcmil or smaller wires. 3 350 kcmil and larger conductor installations require a 26-inch deep non-concrete enclosure or a 12-inch extension with a concrete enclosure. 4 The maximum number of runs of 750 kcmil and 1,000 kcmil conductors will be limited to a total of 2 runs (1 in and 1 out) not including or limiting other smaller conductors in the enclosure; otherwise a 36” x 60” enclosure is needed.

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 028028 Page 3 of 14

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Installation of Enclosures in Special-Finish Sidewalks

Notes

  1. Frequently the customer or city (or other public entity) installs special-finish sidewalks (brick, tile, terrazzo, etc.). When required with enclosures through 3’ x 5’, the enclosure and standard cover shall be installed 2-inch below the final grade, and the customer or city shall furnish and install the special-finish cover as illustrated in Figure 1 on Page 4

  2. The requirements for this cover shall be as follows:

A. No single section of cover shall exceed 125 pounds.

B. Provisions for removal shall be provided.

C. The special-finish cover shall be identified by the letter “E” to indicate the location of the PG&E splice enclosure.

D. This type of enclosure shall not be installed in locations where vehicular traffic is expected.

E. Caution: PG&E cover design allows for a maximum of 1/2-inch deflection under an 8,000-pound or 12,000-pound design load, depending on the specified cover.

Timber Sidewalk Surface

Full Radius Bends

Figure 1 Installation of Enclosures in Special-Finish Sidewalks

Figure 2 Installation of Non-Concrete Enclosures in Sidewalks

028028 Page 4 of 14 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Streetlight Enclosure Assembly

Notes

  1. In conduit systems, enter the bottom of the box with 90 ° sweeps.

  2. Do not connect more than two streetlights per enclosure.

  3. Three is the maximum number of conduits allowed.

  4. For streetlight applications only (see Table 1 on Page 3).

Pent-Head Bolt 3/8” SS Bolt for Cover Bolt-Down

2”

“Snap-Lock” Tab

Description Code
Cover 032509
Body 032510
Complete Assembly 032511

Figure 3 Streetlight Enclosure

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 028028 Page 5 of 14

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Non-Concrete Enclosure for Incidental Traffic

Note

  1. See Table 3 on Page 7 and Table 4 on Page 8 for box dimensions.

Bolt-Down Feature, Pent-Head, Coil Thread, 1/2” x Length as Required, 1/2” Nut, Two Locations

Drain

Nut

Detail A

Concrete Key (1-1/2” x 15”) (one each side)

Plan View

Thru Holes for Lifting Eye Bolts (two lifting eye bolts on the 13” x 24” box,

Q 17” x 30” box and four

on the 24” x 36” box)

V W Single Knockout on 13” x 24” x 26” Box 4-3/4” x 4-3/4”

Minimum Inside Opening

Hole for 1/2” Bolt With Recess for Head (see Detail A)

S

Minimum Inside Opening

J K

End View

P Plan View
H
I I
I I

Side View

Figure 4 Cover

028028 Page 6 of 14 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Non-Concrete Enclosures for Incidental Traffic (continued)

Table 3 Codes for Enclosure Components and

Top View

Figure 5 Location of Conduits Entering 17” x 30” Splice Box

Service #3 Box
24” x 36”
Secondary
Service

Top View

Figure 6 Location of Conduits Entering 24” x 36” Splice Box

Assemblies

Enclosure Enclosure Description Code
Size
(inches)
Depth
(inches)
Depth
(inches)
Depth
(inches)
13 x 24 18 Body 040931
13 x 24 18 Assembly1 040933
13 x 24 26 Body 040920
13 x 24 26 Assembly1 040935
13 x 24 8,000 lb Cover 8,000 lb Cover 043716
13 x 24
17 x 302 18 Body 040928
17 x 302 18 Assembly1 040936
17 x 302 26 Body 040929
17 x 302 26 Assembly1 040937
17 x 302 8,000 lb Cover 8,000 lb Cover 043720
17 x 302
24 x 36 18 Body 040930
24 x 36 18 Assembly1 040940
24 x 36 26 Body 040919
24 x 36 26 Assembly1 040942
24 x 36 8,000 lb Cover 8,000 lb Cover 043724
24 x 36
All Pent-Head Bolt
Coil Thread
1/2” x
2-1/2” 192853
All Pent-Head Bolt
Coil Thread
1/2” x
3-1/2” 017488
All Pent-Head Bolt
Coil Thread
1/2” x
4-1/2” 017489

1 Includes cover and body. 2 Only six conduits allowed in 17” x 30” boxes.

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 028028 Page 7 of 14

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Non-Concrete Enclosures for Incidental Traffic (continued)

Table 4 Dimensions of Non-Concrete Enclosures

Enclosure Size
(inches)
Dimensions (inches)
Enclosure Size
(inches)
A B C D E F G H I J
13 x 24 x 18 25-1/4 18 9-7/8 5-1/8 23-1/2 14 1-1/2
13 x 24 x 26 25-1/4 26 29-1/4 19-3/4
13 x 24
Cover
23-1/4 23 13-3/4
17 x 30 x 18 32-1/2 18 13-1/4 6-3/4 30-3/4 17-3/4 1-1/2
17 x 30 x 26 32-1/2 26 30-3/4 17-3/4
17 x 30
Cover
- 30-1/2 30-1/4 17-1/2
24 x 36 x 18 37-7/8 18 15-9/16 9-3/4 35-7/8 24-1/4 5-1/8
24 x 36 x 26 37-7/8 26 15-9/16 9-3/4 35-7/8 24-1/4 5-1/8
24 x 36
Cover
35-5/8 35-1/8 24
Enclosure Size
(inches)
Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches)
Enclosure Size
(inches)
K L M N P Q R S T U
13 x 24 x 18 15-3/4 4-5/8 24-7/8 15-3/8
13 x 24 x 26 15-3/4 4-1/2 25-3/16 15-5/8
13 x 24
Cover
13-1/2 9-7/8 5-1/8 1-3/8 2 8
17 x 30 x 18 19-1/2 4-5/8 32-1/8 19-1/8
17 x 30 x 26 19-1/2 4-1/2 32-3/8 19-3/8
17 x 30
Cover
17-1/4 13-1/4 6-3/4 1-3/8 2 9
24 x 36 x 18 26 6 37-1/4 25-5/8
24 x 36 x 26 26 6 37-9/16 25-15/16
24 x 36
Cover
23-1/2 15-9/16 9-3/4 5 3 11

Table 5 Knockout Dimensions from Center of Wall of Non-Concrete

Enclosures

Enclosure Size1 Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Number of Knockouts
Enclosure Size1 V W W
13” x 24” x 26” 7-1/2 0 6
17” x 30” x 26” 10-1/2 5 8
24” x 36” x 26” 11 5-1/2 8

1 Knockouts in 26” deep enclosures only.

028028 Page 8 of 14 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

17” x 30” (#2) Concrete Enclosures for Full-Vehicular Traffic

Notes

  1. Grade adjustment, when required, shall be made between the box and the extension or top section.

  2. A base is not required.

  3. All concrete parts shall be permanently identified as to the manufacturer on the inside surface. The weight shall be stenciled on the outside of all concrete parts.

  4. All concrete parts shall be provided with four 7/8-inch diameter, 1-3/4-inch minimum deep inserts with UNC Class 2A threads.

  5. Joints must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail B.

  6. Install mastic sealant provided with enclosure assembly for all concrete-to-concrete joints below surface level.

  7. The identification plate is an integral part of the cover and should be included by the manufacturer.

  8. For new construction conduits shall enter the enclosure using 90 degree elbows rising into the enclosure. Refer to Figure 5 and Figure 6 on Page 7.

Enclosure

1-3/4”

Width = 10-1/2”

Detail B Tongue and Groove

B
38”
30”
B
38”
30”
B
38”
30”
B
38”
30”
B
38”
30”
B
38”
30”
B
38”
30”
B
38”
30”
B
38”
30”
B
38”
30”
30” 30” 30” 30” 30” 30”
2” 1/4” Fillet Weld
Both Sides
9”
2”
2”
2”
2”
2”
2” 9” 9” 9” 9”
2”
2”
2” 35”
B
35”
B
35”
B
35”
B
35”
B
35”
B
35”
B

1-1/2”

Bolt-Down Feature

6-1/2”

3-1/4”

5”
5”

Terminators Cast in Walls

(see D Plan 7/8” Dia. Insert, See See Note 7
Note 4
CL
4”
L 2-1/2” x 2-1/2” x 3/16”
10-1/2”
18”
6”
3”
12”
12”
See Note 7
Note 4
CL
4”
L 2-1/2” x 2-1/2” x 3/16”
10-1/2”
18”
6”
3”
12”
12”
See Note 7
Note 4
CL
4”
L 2-1/2” x 2-1/2” x 3/16”
10-1/2”
18”
6”
3”
12”
12”
See Note 7
6” CL CL CL
1 8” 8” 8” 3”
12”
3”
12”
10-1/2”
12”
10-1/2”
12”
10-1/2”
12”
1 8”
1 8”
1 8”

Section A-A

Figure 7 Concrete Enclosure

Section B-B

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 028028 Page 9 of 14

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

17” x 30” (#2) Concrete Boxes for Full-Vehicular Traffic (continued)

2-1/2” x 2” x 1/4”

1-1/2”

21-3/8”

Section D-D

Table 6 Codes for Complete 17” x 30” Concrete

Bar 1-1/4” x 1/4” x 4”

34-3/8”
” Dia.
d Lift
2”
e 9-7/8”
6”
21-
18” B/B
6”
C D
2” 9” 9” D
1-1/4” Slot
in Cover Plate
34-3/8”
9”
” Dia.
d Lift
e
D
C
2~~”~~
9”
34-3/8”
D
1-1/4” Slot
in Cover Plate

2”
9-7/8”
6”
21-
18” B/B
6”
D
21-
9”
” Dia.
d Lift
e
D
C
2~~”~~
9”
34-3/8”
D
1-1/4” Slot
in Cover Plate

2”
9-7/8”
6”
21-
18” B/B
6”
9-7/8 2” 2” 2”
9”
” Dia.
d Lift
e
D
C
2~~”~~
9”
34-3/8”
D
1-1/4” Slot
in Cover Plate

2”
9-7/8”
6”
21-
18” B/B
6”
9-7/8
9”
” Dia.
d Lift
e
D
C
2~~”~~
9”
34-3/8”
D
1-1/4” Slot
in Cover Plate

2”
9-7/8”
6”
21-
18” B/B
6”
9-7/8 6
9”
” Dia.
d Lift
e
D
C
2~~”~~
9”
34-3/8”
D
1-1/4” Slot
in Cover Plate

2”
9-7/8”
6”
21-
18” B/B
6”
1 / 6
9”
” Dia.
d Lift
e
D
C
2~~”~~
9”
34-3/8”
D
1-1/4” Slot
in Cover Plate

2”
9-7/8”
6”
21-
18” B/B
6”
9”
” Dia.
d Lift
e
D
C
2~~”~~
9”
34-3/8”
D
1-1/4” Slot
in Cover Plate

2”
9-7/8”
6”
21-
18” B/B
6”
9”
” Dia.
d Lift
e
D
C
2~~”~~
9”
34-3/8”
D
1-1/4” Slot
in Cover Plate

2”
9-7/8”
6”
21-
18” B/B
6”
9”
” Dia.
d Lift
e
D
C
2~~”~~
9”
34-3/8”
D
1-1/4” Slot
in Cover Plate

2”
9-7/8”
6”
21-
18” B/B
6”

with 9/16” Dia. Hole

Box Assemblies

Box Box Code 1
Type Depth Depth
Full-Vehicular-Traffic
With Slip-Resistant Cover
24” 019588
Full-Vehicular-Traffic
With Slip-Resistant Cover
30” 019597
Extension 6” 043517

1 PG&E assembly code includes body with a 6” or 12” top section with cast-in frame and a cover. If more depth is required, order the 6” extension.

Slip-Resistant Steel Plate

Cover

Bar 2” x 1/4”

Weld One Side

L 2-1/2” x 2” x 1/4”

Section C-C

Bolt Head Is Flush With Cover

Penta-head Bolt

Two Self-Locking 1/2 ” Washers

Coil Thread Nut (some manufacturers only)

Detail C Bolt-Down Feature

Figure 8 17”x 30” Cover

028028 Page 10 of 14 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

24” x 36” (#3) Concrete Boxes for Full-Vehicular Traffic

Notes

  1. Grade adjustment, when required, shall be made between the box and the extension or top section.

  2. A base is not required.

  3. All concrete parts shall be permanently identified as to the manufacturer on the inside surface. The weight shall be stenciled on the outside of all concrete parts.

  4. All concrete parts shall be provided with four 7/8-inch diameter, 1-3/4-inch minimum deep inserts with UNC Class 2A threads.

  5. Joint must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail D.

  6. Install masitic sealant provided with enclosure assembly for all concrete-to-concrete joints below surface level.

  7. The identification plate is an integral part of the cover and should be included by the manufacturer.

  8. For new construction conduits shall enter the enclosure using 90 degree elbows rising into the enclosure. Refer to Figure 5 and Figure 6 on Page 7.

1-1/2”

Detail D Tongue and Groove

See Detail D, Install Mastic Sealant

1-3/4”

Enclosure

F
36”
44”
36”
44”
36”
44”
1/4” Fillet Weld
Both Sides
12”
9” 9” 9” 9”
9” 9”
9”

(see Detail E on Page 12)

Plan

See Note 7

3”

12 - 4” Dia.

Plastic Duct

Terminators

Cast in Walls

7-1/2”
7-1/2
7-1/2”
7-1/2
6-1 /2”
6-1 /2”
6-1 /2”
6-1 /2”

Section E-E Section F-F

Figure 9 24” x 36” Concrete Box

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 028028 Page 11 of 14

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

24” x 36” (#3) Concrete Boxes for Full-Vehicular Traffic (continued)

Table 7 Codes for Complete 24” x 36” Concrete Box Assemblies

Box Box Code1
Type Depth Depth
Full-Vehicular-Traffic With
Slip-Resistant Cover
30” 019598
Full-Vehicular-Traffic With
Slip-Resistant Cover
36” 019599
Extension 6” 043521
25”
9”
9” 9” B/B 2”
9”

in Cover Plate

5-1/2

15/16”

With 9/16” Dia. Hole

Cover

Slip-Resistant Steel Plate

Bar 2” x 1/4”

3/16” Fillet Weld

One Side

Section G-G

Bolt Head Is Flush With Cover

Penta-head Bolt

Coil Thread Nut (some manufacturers only)

Two Self-Locking 1/2” Washers

With Cover
ad Bolt ad Bolt ad Bolt ad Bolt ad Bolt
ad Bolt ad Bolt
ad Bolt
ad Bolt

Detail E Bolt-Down Feature

Figure 10 24”x 36” Steel Cover

028028 Page 12 of 14 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

36” x 60” (#5) Incidental, Full-Vehicular Traffic and Heavy Full-Vehicular Traffic Concrete Boxes

Notes

  1. Joints must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail F.

  2. Install mastic sealant included with the enclosure assembly for all concrete-to-concrete joints below surface level.

  3. Pulling irons shall be designed for 20,000 pounds ultimate, with a safety factor of 2 (40,000 pounds).

  4. Boxes shall be lifted using pulling irons in the floor.

  5. For new construction, a 12” extension is required.

  6. Install Full-Vehicular Traffic (FVT) enclosure assembly with quick-release covers in locations not subject to high-density traffic with speeds exceeding 25 mph. Typical allowable locations are alley, residential driveways and parking strips.

Tongue and

CL CLEnclosure

J

1-1/8”

Detail F Tongue and Groove

Plan View

30 - 5” Dia. Plastic

Duct Terminators

4-1/2”

60” 4-1/2” 36”

9-1/2”

7-1/8”

2”
0”
7”
See Detail F, Install Mastic Sealant

1/2”
9
CL
/2”
9”
8-1/2”
36”
11”
See Detail F, Install Mastic Sealant

1/2”
9
CL
/2”
9”
8-1/2”
36”
11”
See Detail F, Install Mastic Sealant

1/2”
9
CL
/2”
9”
8-1/2”
36”
11”
See Detail F, Install Mastic Sealant

1/2”
9
CL
/2”
9”
8-1/2”
36”
11”
See Detail F, Install Mastic Sealant

1/2”
9
CL
/2”
9”
8-1/2”
36”
11”
See Detail F, Install Mastic Sealant
CL
9”
8-1/2”
1 1” 1” 1”

Section I-I Section J-J

Figure 11 36” x 60” Concrete Box

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 028028 Page 13 of 14

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

36” x 60” (#5) Incidental, Full-Vehicular Traffic and Heavy Full-Vehicular Traffic Concrete Boxes (continued)

Table 8 Codes for 36” x 60” Concrete Box

Box Box Code
Type Depth Depth
Incidental-Traffic Assembly 30” 032506
Full-Traffic Assembly Full-Traffic Assembly 042019
Heavy Full-Traffic Assembly Heavy Full-Traffic Assembly 0325071
Body Body 032508
Extension 12” 043362

1 This code includes a 12” extension to accommodate the heavy full-traffic cover.

Revision Notes

Revision 22 has the following changes:

  1. Update Asset Type, Function, and document owner’s name on Page 1.

  2. Clarify Note 5 on Page 2 with reference to Table 19 of Document 066205.

  3. Clarify Note 17 on Page 2 to allow 1” drain rock base for all enclosures with 3/4” Class 2 Aggregate Base as an acceptable alternative.

  4. Remove Footnote 2 of Table 1 on Page 3.

  5. Clarify Figure 5 section with 90−deg bend at conduit entry.

  6. Fix Figure 7 Section B−B dimension callout.

028028 Page 14 of 14 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: Services Greenbook EMWP

Prepared by: ABB1

This document is also included in the following manuals:

Purpose and Scope

This document shows minimum requirements for a customer-installed wood post or portable structure for temporary installation of a single-phase 120/240 V 200-amp maximum underground electric service. PG&E cannot establish service to posts which do not meet these minimum requirements. The maintenance of customer-owned service posts in conformity with these requirements is the sole responsibility of the customer.

General Information

  1. Local ordinances may include requirements in addition to those shown in this document. Consult local inspection authorities for these requirements. In areas where local ordinances require permits and inspection, these must be obtained before PG&E can establish service. Meters will be installed and energized by PG&E after the customer’s metering equipment has been properly installed and after an inspection clearance has been given to PG&E by the appropriate electrical inspection authority.

  2. Definition of a “temporary service:” Service for enterprises or activities which are limited to one year or less in duration.

3. If temporary overhead wires are to be extended from poles, the poles shall conform to requirements of G.O. 95, as shown in Document 025055.

  1. Customer shall install conduit and cable as required by local codes.

  2. The customer must contact the Underground Service Alert (USA) or PG&E to locate and mark underground facilities in the work area. Failure to do so can result in injury to personnel and/or costly damage to utility facilities.

  3. When single-phase service larger than 200-amps or three-phase service is desired, consult PG&E.

  4. Service Post Installation (see Page 3)

A The use of temporary service posts shall be restricted to installation of a temporary nature, such as building construction, temporary sales locations, etc. Temporary service posts shall be furnished and installed by the customer. If the temporary service is to be established at the permanent meter location, consult PG&E.

B Minimum dimensions of posts shall be 4” x 6” x 7’ 0” long and depth of setting shall be 24 inches minimum.

C Post installations shall be in protected locations, out of the way of vehicular traffic or other hazardous conditions.

  1. Service to Substantial Portable Structure (see Page 4)

A Portable buildings, such as small sheds, combined office/toilet structures, etc., are not considered to be substantial structures unless staked in place in the manner shown in Figure 3 on Page 4.

B Temporary underground service to a portable building will only be connected to a substantial portable structure. For definition of substantial portable structure and method of installation, see Figure 3 on Page 4, Note 8A on Page 1, and Note 1 on Page 4.

Rev. #04: 07-31-15 036670 Page 1 of 4

UG-1: Services Greenbook EMWP Temporary Underground Electric Service Single-Phase, 120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum

  1. Grounding

The customer shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed non-current-carrying metal parts. Grounding shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local ordinances except that the grounding wire shall be protected against mechanical damage by rigid steel conduit or armored copper ground wire may be used (minimum #8 AWG copper). For installation, see Figure 1 on Page 3.

  1. Service Trench

The minimum conduit depth shown in Figure 1 on Page 3 and Figure 3 on Page 4, may be reduced from 24 inches to 18 inches for the length of the customer’s service trench. However, in the vicinity of PG&E’s splice box, the conduit depth must be 24 inches to assure proper entry into boxes’ conduit knockout. Splice boxes without extensions do not require a 24-inch trench depth at the box location. Contact PG&E to determine if the splice box has an extension.

References Location Document

Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025055 Rules for Overhead Electric Line Construction . . . . . . . . Technical Information Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.O. 95

036670 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #04: 07-31-15

UG-1: Services Greenbook Temporary Underground Electric EMWP Service Single-Phase, 120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum

Service Post Installation

Notes

  1. The customer’s cables will be connected by PG&E. The customer is to contact PG&E when they are ready to extend the conduit and cable into the splice box. Customer runs adequately insulated unstripped cable into the splice box Customer’s cables are to extend a minimum of 24 inches into the splice box.

  2. PG&E secondary splice box is normally located adjacent to the sidewalk. Consult PG&E for exact location. If a splice box is not present, PG&E will install an appropriate splice box at the customer’s expense.

  3. Conduit is to enter the splice box through knockout positions only.

  4. Meter height can be reduced to a minimum of 36” if the meter is enclosed or guarded by a hinged protective hood.

2
11
3
4
1
2
3
4
11
2
3
4
11
2
3
4
11
2
3
4
11
2
3
4
11
2
3
4
11

Figure 2 Alternate Metering (overhead style enclosure)

Grou Line
Min. Min. Min.

Figure 1 Service Post Metering Preferred Installation

Note 10 on Page 2

Table 1 Materials to be Furnished and Installed by the Customer

Item Description
1 Service Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter Socket Panel
2 Post, Minimum Dimension 4” x 6” x 7’ 0” Long (see Note 7B on Page 1)
3 Conduit, Rigid Steel, Galvanized, or Schedule 80 Pvc 1-1/2” Minimum I.D. for #2 or 1/0 Aluminum Service Cable
4 Weatherproof Outlets
5 Conduit, Rigid Steel, Galvanized, With Pipe Strap (for bare ground wire, omit if armor clad wire used)
6 Hub and Clamp, Grounding, to Suit Item 5
7 Ground Rod (see Note 9 on Page 2)
8 Ground Wire, Copper, Bare or Armor Clad (size in accordance with applicable electrical codes and local requirements)
9 Conduit Bushing or Bell End (as required)
10 Service Termination Enclosure, 8” x 12” x 4”, Rain-Tight, Circle AW No. R-9007A or Equivalent (see Note 2 on
Page 4)
11 Conduit Fitting, Threaded With Cover and Gasket (size to suit Item 3)

Rev. #04: 07-31-15 036670 Page 3 of 4

UG-1: Services Greenbook EMWP Temporary Underground Electric Service Single-Phase, 120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum

Commercial Service to Substantial Portable Structure

Notes

  1. Structure Anchoring: To prevent overturning, the structure is required to be securely anchored in place using one of the following methods:

A. Four 2” x 4” minimum wood stakes driven a minimum of 24 inches into the ground and attached to the framework of the structure using 1/4-inch minimum bolts or lag screws.

B. Four steel stakes having strength equivalent to 3/4-inch rigid steel pipe driven a minimum of 24 inches into the ground and attached to the framework of the structure using 1/4-inch minimum bolts or lag screws.

C. Four steel stakes having strength equivalent to 3/4-inch rigid steel pipe driven a minimum of 24 inches into the ground with a cross member of each stake firmly contacting the upper surface of the timber used as a base or skid for the structure.

D. Methods A and B described the preferred methods of attaching the stakes to the structure framework. However, four 16d (8 gauge 3-1/2”) common nails per stake may be used in lieu of the bolts or lag screws, providing the wood is in good enough condition to permit a secure attachment.

  1. Item 10 may only be used if the service conductor is 1/0 AWG or smaller.

Substantial Portable Structure

Conduit

Condu Suppo
4
5
6
8

M
3
Min.
ax.
3
Min.
ax.

M
3
Min.
ax.

24”

See

Note 1

Note10 on Page 2

Conduit Support

e 1

See
Note 2
it
rt
3
3
1
1
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
10
Min.
Max.
36” Mi
75” Ma
See

e 1

See
Note 2
it
rt
3
3
1
1
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
10
Min.
Max.
36” Mi
75” Ma
See
1
4
5
6
8
10
1
4
5
6
8
10
1
4
5
6
8
10
1
4
5
6
8
10
1
4
5
6
8
10

e 1

See
Note 2
it
rt
3
3
1
1
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
10
Min.
Max.
36” Mi
75” Ma
See

e 1

See
Note 2
it
rt
3
3
1
1
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
10
Min.
Max.
36” Mi
75” Ma
See

e 1

See
Note 2
it
rt
3
3
1
1
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
10
Min.
Max.
36” Mi
75” Ma
See
4
5
6
8
36”
75”
Mi
Ma

e 1

See
Note 2
it
rt
3
3
1
1
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
10
Min.
Max.
36” Mi
75” Ma
See

e 1

See
Note 2
it
rt
3
3
1
1
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
10
Min.
Max.
36” Mi
75” Ma
See

e 1

See
Note 2
it
rt
3
3
1
1
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
10
Min.
Max.
36” Mi
75” Ma
See
7 7 7

Section A-A Preferred Installation

Note 1

Section A-A

Alternate Installation

Figure 3 Portable Structure Metering

Revision Notes

Revision 04 has the following changes:

  1. Revised 100 Amp to 200 Amp maximum.

  2. Revised Note 1 on Page 3 :customer is to contact PG&E when they are ready to extend the conduit and cable into the splice box.

036670 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #04: 07-31-15

UG-1: General Greenbook

Prepared by: MZGD

Purpose and Scope

This document describes the minimum requirements for the design and installation of electric conduits and pulling insulated cables. This document also provides requirements of what facilities are allowed within the same enclosure.

General Information

  1. A minimum of 24 inches of cover for secondary (0 − 750 V) electric service, or 36 inches minimum cover for primary (over 750 V) is required for electric trench only. Cover is the distance from the outer surface of an underground facility to the top of the final grade. The actual trench depth will be greater (approximately 30 inches or 42 inches minimum respectively) to accommodate the underground facility, bedding, enclosures, riser sweeps, and joint trench installations with other utilities.

2. For detail information for joint trench requirements see S5453, Exhibit B.

  1. There is no cut-off date of when a cable needs to be installed after it has been manufactured if the cable meets the following parameters

A. Cable is manufactured by a currently approved supplier and meets PG&E approved standard design cable requirements.

B. Cable was properly stored at PG&E, applicant or contractor facility, i.e. properly sealed with end caps at both ends so no water/debris could have entered the cable at any time.

C. The cable is in good condition, i.e. no damage on the jacket, or any other layers.

D. Print line is fully legible.

  1. For riser to riser primary conduit runs, a PG&E approved primary enclosure is required to be installed near the base of one of the riser poles to facilitate cable installation and removal.

5. Refer to the utility procedure TD-2002P-01 “Installing underground Cable in Conduits” for a description on the methods for pulling underground cables into and out of conduits. This utility procedure also includes the types of equipment needed for the pulling operation. Situations, methods, and equipment may vary based on the material and jobsite.

  1. Electric conduits installed using horizontal directional drilling (HDD), can be installed without any separation between the conduits when installed in the same bore. However the current carrying capacity (ampacity) of the cables can be reduced when multiple load carrying cables are installed in close proximity. Refer to Document 050166 or Document 050167 or consult with the responsible planning engineer.

  2. Design requirements for less frequently encountered field conditions such as bio swells, railroad, bridge and septic tank/leach field, are listed on Page 9 through Page 13.

  3. Percent fill table for rigid PVC DB 120 conduit has moved to end of this document and it is shown for reference only. Percent fill table for currently approved rigid PVC schedule 40 conduit is shown on Table 9 on Page 19.

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 1 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

General Information (continued)

  1. There are many variables involved in designing underground electric conduit systems and installing cables that are peculiar to each installation and cannot be covered in this document. Some of these variables are listed below:

A. Physical requirements of the installation.

B. Limitations of available cable-pulling and reel−handling equipment.

(1) 1,000 pounds maximum for a single grip, 2,000 pounds maximum for two or more grips.

(2) 10,000 pounds maximum for reusable mechanical pulling eyes.

C. Number and radius of sweeps.

(1) Sidewall bearing pressure (1,000 pounds x radius).

D. Deflections, changes in direction, and obstructions encountered during conduit installation.

E. Coefficient of friction (COF) between cable and conduit surfaces.

F. Maximum allowable pulling tension for the cable size under consideration.

G. Conduit, cable, and facilities installation must comply with the job design and construction documents. When deviation from the original design is required due to field conditions, the originating engineering department must be notified and will determine if the deviation will require additional Substructures. Follow the variance request procedure. See Document TD-2951P-01.

References Location Document

Cables for Underground Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039955 600-Amp Separable Insulated Connectors . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051071 Ampacity of Underground Distribution Insulated Aluminum Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable/EPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 050166 Ampacity of Underground Distribution Insulated Copper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable/EPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 050167 Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . 062288 Methods and Requirements for installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook/EDM . . . . . . . 063927 Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . UG−1: Services/Greenbook/EDM . . . . . . 063928 Request for Variance Distribution Standards . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-2951P-01 Installing Underground Cable in Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-2002P-01 Electric Distribution Conduits Installed on Bridges . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-2310P-10 Horizontal Directional Drilling Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4135M Electric Design Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-9001M [Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings](https://ecmapp

=false) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-9001M [Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings](https://ecmapp

=false) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-9001M Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A−70 Casing Insulator and End Seals Selection Chart . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A−73 Modular Wall and Casing Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A−74 Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide Exhibit B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5453, Exhibit B Electric Design Manual Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-9001M Electric Design Manual Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD−9001M Electric Design Manual Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-9001M

/ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80e028d8&vd=true&device=false) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-9001M

038193 Page 2 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Trench Requirements

Notes

  1. Field conditions may require a minimum depth greater than shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 below.

    • Preferred maximum depth from final grade to the bottom of the trench is 60 inches.

    • When needed to avoid obstacles, maximum depth from final grade to the bottom of the trench is 120 inches.

    • Trenches deeper than 120 inches require a variance. Follow the instructions found in Utility Procedure TD-2951P-01 to submit a variance request.

Backfill (see Note 6)

Secondary/Service or Streetlight

2
M
Î
Î
4”
in. Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
(
Î
Î
Î Sec
or S
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
12” min.
ÎÎÎ
12” min.
Î
Î
Î
Î

Figure 1 Secondary/Service or Streetlight Trench

)
vice
mary
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
3
M
)
vice








mary
3”
See Note 2
18” Min.
3”
See Note 2
18” Min.
)
vice








mary

Figure 2 Primary Trench

2. Joint trench requirements are specified in the Utility Standard S5453. The table showing the minimum separation

” ” and clearance requirements for joint trench is listed in Joint Trench, Exhibit B. However, this table was last updated July 31, 2015 via a bulletin. The updated table is shown in Section 3.3.8 of Greenbook and for convenience it is also shown below:

Table 1 Joint Trench Requirements ***
MINIMUM SEPERATION AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS (Inches)
G DUCT
T
BD
T
C S P SL
G (Gas) 12 12 12 6 12 6
T (TELEPHONE) DUCT 12 1 1 12 12 12
T (TELEPHONE) DIRECT BURY 12 1 1 12 12 12
C (CATV) 12 1 1 12 12 12
S (ELECTRIC SECONDARY) 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
P (ELECTRIC PRIMARY) 12 12 12 12 3 3 3
SL (STREETLIGHT) SEE NOTE 5 **** 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
FE* (FOREIGN ELECTRIC SOURCES. NON-PG&E)
SEE NOTE 5 ****
12 12** 12** 12** 12 12 12

1 ” ”

* Must be considered a “Utility” as defined in Utility Standard S5453, Joint Trench . 2 ** For exceptions, refer to G.O. 128 rule, section B. Items (1) and (2). 3 *** These clearances/separations supersede old clearances/separation shown in S5453 Exhibit B. 4 **** It is preferred to have non−PG&E owned streetlights at a level other than the gas or electric level. Non−PG&E owned streetlights may be at the electric level of the trench as long as minimum clearances are provided and comply with all special notes for a joint trench with a second electric utility.

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 3 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Trench Requirements (Continued)

Notes

  1. For independently installed electric trenches, most of the requirements are the same as for joint trenches. However, Table 2 below shows and clarify requirements when installing electric trench only.

Table 2 Minimum Seperation an Clearance for Electrical Conduit by Facility Type [5]

Facility Minimum Parallel
Separation
Minimum Crossing
Separation
Between multiple electric primary conduits 3 inches 6 inches
Between electric primary and secondary, service and
streetlight conduits
3 Inches 6 inches
Between electric secondary, service and streetlight conduits 1.5 inches 6 inches
Between electric primary and gas distribution main and service
conduits
12 inches 12 inches
Between electric secondary, service, streetlight and gas main
and gas service conduits
12inches 6 inches
Leach field and electric primary, secondary, service and
streetlight conduits
10 feet1 Not Allowed2
Steam lines from PG&E electric conduits 10 feet3 18 inches3
Tree trunk from PG&E electric primary, secondary, service, and
streetlight conduits
5 feet4 5 feet4
Diesel or other volatile liquids; propane or other volatile,
heavier-than-air gases and any type of electrical conduit
20 feet 20 feet
Edge of Underground gas tank and any type of electric conduits 10 feet 10 feet
Hydrogen cooling block, dispenser or storage and any type of
electric conduit
5 feet 5 feet
Hydrogen compressor and any type of electric conduit 15 feet 15 feet
Any other pipe systems or other foreign substructures excluding
wet facilities not listed above
12 inches 6 inches

1 If this separation cannot be achieved, refer to the Septic Tank/Leach Field/Leach Line section starting on Page 9. 2 Mobile home park is the only exception, refer to the Septic Tank/Leach Field/Leach section starting on Page 9. 3 If this separation cannot be achieved, refer to the Steam Line section starting on Page 12. 4 Radial distance from the closest edge of the trunk to the edge of electric conduit. 5 Wet facility requirements are the same as listed in S5453.

  1. Separations in Table 1 and Table 2 may be reduced when conduits are entering enclosures, panels, pads, vaults, or structures. Allowance must be made for the installation of the conduit end bell fittings.

  2. Sharp turns, bends, or other irregularities in the conduit must be avoided.

  3. If the bottom of a trench which will contain plastic conduit is rocky, use backfill material conforming to the requirements of Engineering Material Specification 4123. Before tamping in the area of plastic conduit, apply at least 6 inches of backfill over the top of the conduit to avoid breakage. Final backfill may then be placed in the trench and tamping employed to finish grade. The soil originally removed from the trench should be used as backfill wherever possible.

  4. Do not use salt−water sand backfill with steel conduit.

  5. Other utility practices may require a greater minimum conduit separation.

  6. Refer to state of California, Department of Industrial Relations; Trench Construction Safety Orders for trench construction requirements. These orders are issued by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health.

038193 Page 4 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Conduit System Design and Installation

To minimize the possibility of cable damage during installation, the following conduit design parameters must be followed:

  1. The total number of factory bends installed in conduit run for primary cable must not exceed 300 degrees, including the bend at the feed−in location. Only factory bends are allowed.

  2. The total number of factory bends installed in conduit runs for secondary cable and services having a maximum length of 200 feet must not exceed 315 degrees, including the bend at the feed-in location. If the total length of conduit run exceeds 200 feet, then the total number of factory bends for secondary and service cable must not exceed 300 degrees.

  3. The maximum length of any straight conduit run (no factory bends) must not exceed 1,200 feet.

  4. The calculated pulling tension for the non-preferred (highest) direction must be used as the limiting pulling tension.

  5. When the conduit run includes bends (300 degrees or less), the maximum length of the run must be limited to 800 feet.

  6. For secondary, services, and 200-Amp primary applications, the conduit run must not exceed 600 feet if there is a vertical 90 degree bend at both ends of the conduit run.

  7. The first 18 inches of conduits entering or leaving any primary or secondary underground 3’ x 5’ or larger enclosure must be straight with no bends, couplings, or swedge reducers.

  8. To avoid potential burn−through of sweeps, use polyester pulling tape (material code M560154 ) as the “P-Line” to initiate cable pulling. For further information refer to Utility Procedure TD-2002P-01 “Installing Underground Cable in Conduit”.

For each primary cable run, the construction drawing must contain:

A. The calculated pulling tension.

B. A preferred direction of pulling.

C. The maximum allowable pulling tension.

D. A place to record the actual pulling tension and direction of pull.

  1. The tension on the pulling line, as seen on the dynamometer, is dependent on the number of rollers and sheaves used to rig the pulling line and the angle between the line entering and leaving the device. Multiply the calculated pulling tension on the cable by 5% for each 90 ° bend of the rope.

  2. The pulling equipment specified for a job should be capable of twice the calculated pulling tension. This is recommended due to the following variables:

A. Back tension.

B. Condition of the conduit.

C. Temperature of the conduit, cable, and the ambient air temperature.

D. Increase in friction due to rigging.

E. Static (start/stop) friction.

Combinations of the above could increase the actual pulling tension to twice (or more) of the calculated tension. Attention should be paid to minimizing these factors.

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 5 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Conduit System Design and Installation (continued)

Cable Pulling Requirements

To minimize issues during cable pulling, follow the steps below:

  1. The use of approved pulling practices and equipment is required.

  2. Before starting any cable installation or removal operation, all employees must be thoroughly familiar with the safe operation of the equipment and methods to be used.

  3. Provide a reliable means of communications between feed-in and pull-out locations before and during the entire operation.

  4. Provide an adequate number of employees to safely install or remove the cable.

  5. The conduit must be cleared of dirt, rocks, or other debris before starting the cable installation.

  6. The practice of attaching the pulling rope to a vehicle and then driving the vehicle to pull in or remove cable may damage the cable and is prohibited.

  7. All cable must be lubricated (pre-lubed) before installing (see Table 6 on Page 7 and Table 7 on Page 8) .

  8. The use of a dynamometer or inline tensiometer to monitor the pulling tension during cable installation is recommended for cable pulls where the calculated pulling tension is less than 50% of the maximum allowable pulling tension for the cable being installed.

  9. The use of a dynamometer or inline tensiometer to monitor the pulling tension during cable installation is required for cable pulls where the calculated pulling tension is equal to or greater than 50% of the maximum allowable pulling tension for the cable being pulled.

  10. All locations where the actual pulling tensions exceed the calculated tensions by more than 25% must be reported to the originating engineering department and analyzed to determine the cause of the difference. The information will be used to improve the design parameters as well as PG&E’s cable-pulling practices.

  11. The minimum radius bend that an insulated cable can be subjected to cannot exceed the results of the OD of the cable times the multiplier shown in Table 3.

Table 3 Minimum Allowable Cable-Bending Radius Multiplier
Type of Cable Multiplier
P&L or PL&N 10
15 and 22 kV XLP-PVC 12
5−35 kV CONC-PVC, LLDPE Encap, or
EPR-CONC-PE
8
600 V XLP and EPR&N 5 (500 kcmil and larger)
600 V XLP and EPR&N 4 (less than 500 kcmil)
  1. The recommended amount of cable lubricant depends only on the size and length of the conduit system.

The appropriate quantity for use on any given pull can vary from this recommendation depending on the complexity of the pull. Consider the following factors:

A. Cable weight and jacket hardness (increase quantity for stiff, heavy cable). B. Conduit type and condition (increase quantity for old, dirty, or rough conduits). C. Conduit fill (increase quantity for conduit fills of 50% or greater). D. Number of bends (increase quantity for pulls with several bends). E. Pulling environment (increase quantity for high temperatures).

  1. Front-end packs are conduit-sized polyethylene bags of lubricant. The packs are attached to the winch line, ahead of the cable, and are manually opened as they enter the conduit, pre-lubing the conduit. Codes for front-end packs are in listed Table 4 on Page 7 .

038193 Page 6 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Conduit System Design and Installation (continued)

Cable Pulling Requirements (continued)

Table 4 Pulling Lubricant

Description Code
Front-End Pack 2” and 3” Conduit 500118
Front-End Pack 4”, 5”, and 6” Conduit 500117
Pourable Lubricant, 2.5-Gallon Container 500031
Pourable Lubricant, 5-Gallon Container 500099
  1. Cable lubricant LZ type must be used when 500 kcmil, 750 kcmil, and 1100 kcmil Cu 15kV EPR flat strap with low smoke zero halogen (LSZH) jacketed cable is pulled through conduits. For more information regarding LSZH cable refer to Document 039955. Note: The use of standard pulling lubricant will have a negative impact on the physical integrity of the cable’s LSZH jacket.

Table 5 Pulling Lubricant to be Used With LSZH Cable

Description Code 6
Lubricant, Squeezable Quart 500060

6 12 quarts is the minimum order quality.

  1. Table 6 Below and Table 7 on Page 8 indicate the approximate amount of pulling lubricant for various cable pulls. Same tables apply for the lubricant LZ type.
Table 6 Pulling Lubricant Needed for 2”, 3”, and 4” Conduit
Pull
Length
(feet)
2” Conduit 2” Conduit 2” Conduit 3” Conduit 3” Conduit 3” Conduit 4” Conduit 4” Conduit 4” Conduit
Pull
Length
(feet)
Gallons
Needed
Number of
Front-End
Packs
Pourable
(gallons)
Gallons
Needed
Number of
Front-End
Packs
Pourable
(gallons)
Gallons
Needed
Number of
Front-End
Packs
Pourable
(gallons)
100 0.25 1 0 0.50 2 0 0.50 1 0
200 0.50 2 0 1.00 2 0.50 1.00 2 0
300 1.00 2 0.50 1.25 2 0.75 2.00 2 1.00
400 1.25 2 0.75 1.75 2 1.25 2.50 2 1.50
500 1.50 2 1.00 2.25 3 1.50 3.00 2 2.00
600 1.75 3 1.00 2.75 3 2.00 3.50 3 2.00
700 2.00 4 1.00 3.25 4 2.25 4.00 4 2.00
800 2.50 4 1.50 3.50 4 2.50 5.00 4 3.00
900 2.75 4 1.75 4.00 4 3.00 5.50 4 3.50
1,000 3.00 4 2.00 4.50 4 3.50 6.00 4 4.00

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 7 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Conduit System Design and Installation (continued)

Cable Pulling Requirements (continued)

Table 7 Pulling Lubricant Needed for 5” and 6” Conduit

Pull Length
(feet)
5” Conduit 6” Conduit
Pull Length
(feet)
Gallons
Needed
Number of
Front-End
Packs
Pourable
(gallons)
Gallons
Needed
Number of
Front-End
Packs
Pourable
(gallons)
100 1.00 2 0 1.00 2 0
200 1.50 3 0 2.00 2 1.00
300 2.50 2 1.50 2.50 3 1.00
400 3.00 2 2.00 3.50 3 2.00
500 4.00 2 3.00 4.50 3 3.00
600 4.50 3 3.00 5.50 4 3.50
700 5.50 4 3.50 6.50 4 4.50
800 6.00 4 4.00 7.00 4 5.00
900 7.00 4 5.00 8.00 6 5.00
1,000 7.50 5 5.00 9.00 6 6.00

038193 Page 8 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Design Requirements for Less Frequently Encountered Field Conditions

Conduit and Substructure Installation

Conduit and substructure installation must comply with the job design and construction documents. If field conditions require a deviation that is not within current standards, follow the variance request procedure. See Document TD-2951P-01.

The requirements listed below are for the various field conditions where electric conduits are installed;

Bio Swale

It is preferred to install conduit around a bio swale. If is not feasible to go around the bio swale, primary and/or secondary conduits under the bio swale must be installed following the requirements below:

  1. Option #1

A. Install conduits with a minimum cover of 48” between the top of the conduit and the bottom of the bio swale.

B. Add 6” sand bed below conduit

C. Use PVC Schedule 40, and install a spare conduit

D. Install conduit 36” past bio swale on each side

E. Add 6” sand bed on top of conduit

F. Complete trench fill with native dirt

  1. Option #2 (if option #1 is not feasible)

A. Install conduits with a minimum cover or 36” between the top of the conduit and the bottom of the bio swale.

B. Add 6” sand bed below conduit

C. Install PVC Schedule 40, and install spare conduit

D. Run conduit 36“ past bio swale on each side

E. Add 6” sand bed on top of conduit

F. Add 3” Red Slurry Cap

G. Complete trench fill with native dirt

  1. Option #3

A. Use horizontal directional drilling (HDD) to install conduits crossing under existing bio swales. For more information about HDD, Refer to Utility Procedure TD-4135M.

B. The minimum depth burial for HDD is 48” from the bottom of existing bio swales.

Railroad

Railroad crossing may require electric conduits installation in a casing via HDD. For information about casing specifications, casing sealing, casing spacers refer to A−70, “Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings“, A−73, “Casing Insulator and End Seals Selection Chart“, and A−74 , “Modular Wall and Casing Seal “.

Bridge

For the design requirements of conduits installed on bridges see Utility Procedure TD-2310P-10.

Septic Tank/Leach Field/Leach Line

Leach fields are used to dispose of sewage from septic-tank sanitary sewer systems. Typically, leach fields consist of a system of rock-filled trenches with drain line or perforated pipe and weir-type diversion boxes. They are grade-sensitive and create a wet environment.

Septic tanks and Leach fields are considered an unreasonable interference for UG distribution electric line easements. Substructure conduit connections are not designed to be used under pressure and are not air tight. As a result, sewage may enter the conduit and result in unsafe working conditions.

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 9 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Design Requirements for Less Frequently Encountered Field Conditions (continued)

Septic Tank/Leach Field/Leach Line (continued)

Ensure that the entire leach field is located outside the right of way or easement of PG&E electric facilities.

Septic tanks are installed underground. The potential of seepage or leaks from cracks is a concern. Therefore, septic tanks are unacceptable in any right of way or easement of PG&E electric facilities. Variance requests for this requirement will not be considered and they will be denied.

A horizontal distance of 10 feet away from the septic tanks and or leach systems must be maintained. Crossing over or underneath septic tank/leach lines is not allowed (see note 5e for the only exception). Installation of PG&E underground electric facilities across a new leach field is not allowed.

When all alternatives have been considered, and it is not feasible to achieve 10 feet of horizontal separation from the septic tank/leach lines, install PG&E underground facilities maintaining as much separation as possible. The minimum horizontal separation must not be less than 3 feet. Follow the steps listed in the notes below.

Notes:

  1. Leach fields are regulated by Counties. Therefore, Counties may have different restrictions. The more stringent requirements must be followed. Without a written authorization from the Counties where the leach field is located, there will be no variances consideration for the installation of PG&E underground facilities within 10’ from the septic tank/ leach system.

  2. Provide valid evidence that it is not feasible to physically install PG&E electric underground facilities 10’ away from septic tank and leach field. Cost alone is not a valid reason.

  3. Provide detail information of the location of the septic tank and leach field indicating what part of the leach field is solid pipe and where does the perforated pipe start. Most of the release will likely happen soon after the transition from the solid to perforated pipe.

  4. Provide the direction of the field grading in relation to the service trench.

  5. Mitigate the hazards created by not installing underground facilities 10’ away from the septic tank/leach field by meeting the following requirements:

A. Use a continuous run of HDPE conduit to avoid any effluent infiltration. Building a seal conduit system is the best way to mitigate migration of the contaminants.

B. Seal both ends of HDPE conduits entering and leaving the leach field.

C. Install electric enclosure 10’ away from the septic or leach lines.

D. Install the approved laminated film (M602637) as the suitable barrier between the leach field and the service trench when the trench is outside of the leach field, but unable to meet the 10’ separation requirement. Figure 3 on Page 11 illustrates the proper installation of the laminated film barrier material. The instructions listed below explain the steps illustrated in Figure 3.

(1) Step One: Install the laminated film barrier material (shown in red) into the empty trench so that it covers the trench floor; it will rise up the wall of the trench and be laid on the ground on the leach field side of the trench. Laying the barrier material over the top side of the trench will allow for the barrier material to be held in place while backfilling. The barrier material will later overlap the top of the trench as described on step two. Install the bedding material to pin barrier material down and install conduits as far from the septic tank/leach field/leach line as possible.

(2) Step Two: Begin backfilling and soil compaction to a level that allows for the barrier material to be laid over the backfill covering the top of the trench near final grade. Note that the barrier is placed before final grade is achieved. Finally, complete backfill and soil compaction to final grade.

E. Avoid crossing an existing leach field, mobile home park projects are the only exception to this rule. All other possible design alternatives must be considered before designing PG&E electric underground facilities across an existing leach field. The leach field is contaminated, therefore, no need to install a barrier as it will have no effect.

038193 Page 10 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Step One

Final Grade
Approved Barrier
Material (Shown
in Red)
HDPE Electric
Gas Conduit
2
Mi
Bedding Material Bedding Material

Step Two

Final Backfill Final Grade
Final Backfill HDPE Electric
Gas Conduit
2
M
Approved Barrier
Material (Shown
in Red)
Backfill
Material
Bedding Material Bedding Material

Figure 3 Installation of Laminated Film Barrier (M602637) for Leach Field Application

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 11 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Design Requirements for Less Frequently Encountered Field Conditions (continued)

Steam Lines

Steam lines present the potential problem of leaking even when they are insulated. Steam leaks migrate through the ground and into electric substructures resulting in damage of our electric conduits and cables. To mitigate the high temperature effects of the steam, the installation of a thermal insulation is required when our electric facilities cannot meet the following requirements,

−PG&E electric facilities must maintain a distance of 10 feet away from the steam line when paralleling, and a distance of 3 feet away when crossing over or underneath steam lines.

−Steel conduits are not allowed to be used within a radius of 10 feet from steam lines.

When all alternatives have been considered, and it is not feasible to achieve the required separation between PG&E electric facilities from the steam lines, the installation of a thermal insulation barrier is required. Install PG&E underground facilities maintaining as much separation as possible. Even with the installation of the thermal insulation barrier, the minimum horizontal separation must not be less than 3 feet, and the minimum vertical separation must not be less than 12 inches.

PG&E approves two installation methods for achieving a thermal insulation barrier between PG&E electric facilities and steam lines.

Method 1: Use of Fluidized Thermal Backfill (FTB) or Thermal Select Backfill

After PG&E has inspected and approved the duct bank or underground structure, the trench must be backfilled with native backfill, FTB, or thermal select backfill. Permit agencies may require specific backfill materials for areas within their jurisdiction. Approval of the backfill material is required before its use in the trench. The proposed material must have a thermal resistivity of not more than 60 C−cm/watt at critical moisture content (3% for FTB) and 90 C−cm/watt at 0% moisture content.

FTB is an engineered material that has very low thermal resistivity . FTB is a low-cement concrete with a fluidizing agent to fill unwanted voids. Fluidizing fly ash must be used along with the standard concrete aggregates of pea gravel and sand. The low strength mix must have a maximum nominal compressive strength of 70 − 300 psi. Higher compressive strength is unacceptable because of the difficulty of trenching above the duct bank or conduit.

Thermal select backfill must be placed to enhance heat dissipation. This backfill consists of limestone screenings, cement and water, mixed into a slurry to facilitate placement. The contractor must provide the mix proportions for thermal select backfill to PG&E inspection for review, and must obtain approval for thermal resistivity of the backfill from Geotherm, Inc.

Milpitas Materials Company is a PG&E-approved supplier of select backfill. It is located in Milpitas, CA.

The following is a representative mix design: Limestone screenings: 1 cubic yard (approximately 3,000 lbs.). Cement: 3/4 sacks (approximately 70 lbs.) per cubic yard of limestone Water: 55 −60 gallons (approximately 544 lbs.) per cubic yard of limestone (depending on the moisture content of the limestone)

Method 2: Use of FOAMGLAS ® ONE � Insulation Barrier.

FOAMGLAS ® ONE � insulation is a lightweight, rigid material composed of millions of completely sealed glass cells. It is manufactured by Owens Corning in a block form and then fabricated into a wide range of shapes and sizes. This approved material is not coded. PG&E employees need to order this material as non−coded material using Ariba. The approved FOAMGLAS ® ONE � insulation may be of 3” minimum thickness of the FOAMGLAS ® ONE �, but 6” is preferable.

Configure each of the FOAMGLAS ® ONE � in a running bond brick pattern, so there is no gap between each block for the entire length electric conduits are installed less than the required separation from the steam line.

Install the approved Owens Corning FOAMGLAS ® ONE � insulation material as shown in Figure 4 on Page 13.

038193 Page 12 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

12”

Bottom of Steam Line

Native Backfill

Crossing Side View

12”

6” thick Owens Corning Foamglass

m of 12” 12” 12”
3” Sand Backfill
3” Sand Backfill

Line
ll

Min.

Min.
3” Sand Backfill
3” Sand Backfill

Line
ll

Min.

Min.
6” thick Owens
One insulation b
3” Sand Backfill
3” Sand Backfill

Line
ll

Min.

Min.
3” Sand Backfill 3” Sand Backfill 3” Sand Backfill 3” Sand Backfill 3” Sand Backfill
3” Sand Backfill
3” Sand Backfill

Line
ll

Min.

Min.
3” Sand Backfill
3” Sand Backfill

Line
ll

Min.

Min.
3” Sand Backfill 3” Sand Backfill 3” Sand Backfill 3” Sand Backfill 3” Sand Backfill
Electrical Conduit Electrical Conduit Electrical Conduit Electrical Conduit Electrical Conduit Electrical Conduit

Electrical Conduit

Protection:

3” of Sand Backfill

Foamglass One

3” of Sand Backfill

Crossing Top View

12”
Min.
12”
Min.
Electrica
12”
Min.
Steam Line

Backfill
ens Corning
ass One

Figure 4 Steam Line

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 13 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Material and Equipment Design Requirements and Restrictions

  1. Two different 600-Amp or 200-Amp primary circuits of the same or different voltage are permitted in the same enclosure if each circuit is racked on opposite walls.

  2. No more than one set of 600-Amp separable connectors is allowed in any one enclosure. One set means three 600-amp separable assembly. Figure 5 below shows one 600-Amp separable assembly.

  3. No more than three 600-Amp elbows are allowed in any one 600-Amp separable assembly.

  4. No more than one set of 200-Amp taps (piggy-backed) off of a set of 600-Amp separable assembly is allowed

A. A 200-Amp tap from a 600-Amp separable assembly must be made with a load-break reducing tap plug (RTP) and a 200-Amp load-break elbow receptacle, as shown in Document 051071, “600-Amp Separable Insulated Connectors”. See Figure 5.

B. Only one such connection is allowed between two 600-Amp main line switches.

200-Amp Elbow Receptacle

600-Amp

600-Amp

Figure 5 Allowed 600-Amp Separable Splice Assembly

200-Amp Cable

600-Amp Cable

  1. 600−Amp three-phase switching devices are required at all critical main−line intersections. Consult with the responsible electric distribution planning engineer for direction during the project’s design phase.

  2. Only one set of 600-Amp separable assembly is allowed between two 600-Amp main-line switches. However, for all main-line junctions, three phase switching devices are required.

  3. No more than four-ways of cable on a 600-Amp subsurface switch is allowed.

A. A way is a conduit run from point A to point B. It can be one, two or up to three cables.

B. It is not allowed to tap off (piggy-back) 600-Amp elbows on top of each other 600-Amp elbows on the same switch bushing at any time. See Note 9 under Cable and Equipment in Document 050859

C. It is not allowed to tap off (piggy-back) 200-Amp taps off subsurface switches.

D. Subsurface switch bushings that are rated at 600-Amps may be converted to 200-Amps by using a bushing extension and a 600/200-Amp tap/plug.

E. 200-Amp taps that utilize 600-Amp bushing extensions are not considered piggy-back.

F. SCADA installation on 600-Amp subsurface switch is exempt from requirement 7. However, whenever possible install SCADA on 600-Amp subsurface switches with no 200-Amp tap (piggy-backed ).

  1. No more than four-ways of cable on a 200-Amp pad-mounted or subsurface junction is allowed.

  2. It is not permissible to use 1/0 cable adapters with 600-Amp separable connectors to make a 200-Amp tap. See Figure 6 on Page 15. Material code for the 1/0 cable adapters is still active to be used for replacement of existing facilities only. See Document 051071.

A. For SCADA jobs that require the installation of a 600−Amp switch on a 200-Amp application using 1/0 Al XLPE 15kV/22kV rated cable (previously installed standard cable) or currently approved 1/0 Al EPR 25kV rated cable; it is allowed to use cold−shrink 600−Amp elbow (M301641) .

038193 Page 14 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Material and Equipment Design Requirements and Restrictions (continued)

200-Amp Elbow

600-Amp

Cable Installed Using 1/0 Cable Adapter or Cold-Shrink 600-Amp Elbow

Figure 6 Not Permissible 600-Amp Separable Splice Assembly

200-Amp Cable

600-Amp Cable

  1. When necessary, use one of the following three options to establish additional 200-Amp tap from existing mainline cables that already has 600-Amp separable assembly with one existing 200-Amp tap.

Option 1. Leave existing 600-Amp separable assembly. Intercept and re-route existing 200-Amp tap to a new 200-Amp interrupter (install the 200-Amp interrupter as close as possible to the existing 600-Amp separable assembly). Extend the 200-Amp tap from the load side of 200-Amp interrupter and install a 200-Amp subsurface or pad−mounted junction. This installation is shown in Figure 7 below.

600-Amp

600-Amp

New 200-Amp Tap

Existing, Re-routed 200-Amp Tap

Figure 7 Upgrade Existing 200-Amp Tap

Option 2. Replace existing 600-Amp separable assembly with a pad-mounted switch, such as PMI-11, install a 200−Amp subsurface or pad−mounted junction with existing and new two 200-Amp taps. This installation is shown in Figure 8 below.

600-Amp

New 200-Amp Tap

600-Amp

Existing, Re-routed 200-Amp Tap

Figure 8 Replace Existing 600-Amp Separate Assembly with Pad-Mounted Interrupter

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 15 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Material and Equipment Design Requirements and Restrictions (continued)

Option 3. Install a Switch-Interrupter-Switch, 3-Way, 3-Way-Switched; extend the interrupter way and install a 200-Amp subsurface or pad-mounted junction with two 200-Amp taps. Re-route the existing 200-Amp piggy-backed of the existing 600-Amp separable assembly to one of the ways of the 200-Amp junction.

600-Amp

600-Amp

200-Amp

Existing, Re-routed 200-Amp Tap

Figure 9 Re-route Existing 200-Amp Tap to One of the Position of the 200-Amp Junction

  1. Locate the protection devices as close as possible to the mainline tap when designing 200-Amp taps off the 600-Amp mainline. See examples in Figure 10 on Page 17.

  2. Do not install the following facilities in the same enclosure (#5, #6 or #7 size) .

A. 600-Amp separable assembly with or without 200-Amp piggy-backed tap and 200-Amp subsurface junction or any other operable equipment.

B. 600-Amp separable assembly with or without 200-Amp piggy-backed tap and 600-Amp straight splices.

C. 600-Amp separable assembly with or without 200-Amp piggy-backed tap and 200-Amp straight splices.

D. 600-Amp straight splices and 200-Amp straight splices installed on the same wall.

E. 600-Amp or 200-Amp operable equipment and 600-Amp or 200-Amp straight splices.

  1. The requirements listed in Note 12 apply to new construction and reconstruction. However, if field conditions such as space constraints make it unfeasible to comply with these requirements, it is allowed for existing facilities to take exceptions to these requirements.

038193 Page 16 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Material and Equipment Design Requirements and Restrictions (continued)

P
P

P

P

P
evice
P
P
P
P
evice
P
P
evice
P
P
evice
P
P
evice
P
P
evice
P
P
evice
P
P
evice
P
P
evice
P
P
evice
P
P
evice
P
P
evice
P
P
evice
P
P P P P

200-Amp Tap

200-Amp Protection Equipment is not as Close as Possible to Mainline

Bad Design

P

200-Amp Protection Equipment is Right on the Mainline

Alternative Option

Protective Device

P P

Protective Device

Better Design

600-Amp

P

P

600-Amp

P

or or
or or

200-Amp Tap

200-Amp Protection Equipment is Close to the Mainline

Preferred Option

Figure 10 Protection Design Device Location

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 17 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Formulas and Parameters

Notes

  1. The formulas and parameters used in this document are widely used in the utility industry. The parameters that must be checked are: Conduit Fill, Cable Configuration, Minimum Bending Radius, Cable Jamming Potential, Cable Clearance, Maximum Pulling Tension, and Sidewall Bearing Pressure Limits.

  2. Cable Jamming

Jamming is a condition that may occur if the sum of the cable diameters is about equal to the inside diameter of the conduit. It will typically occur at bends when one cable is forced between the other two cables and wedges them against the inner wall of the conduit. Jam ratios between 2.8 to 3.1 should be avoided to prevent the possibility of the cables jamming at a sweep. Use the formula given below to calculate jam ratio.

  1. Jam Ratio Formula

J = D/d Where: J = Jam ratio D = Conduit inside diameter (inches) d = Cable nominal diameter (inches), one cable

Check the probability of jamming using the formula: J = 1.05 D/d 1.05*J = (p) probability of jamming

 - If the value J is less than 2.5, jamming is unlikely to occur. Cables are in triangular configuration.

 - If the value J is between 2.6 and 2.7, jamming is very possible. Cables are more likely in triangular

configuration.

 - If the value J is between 2.8 and 3.1, jamming is very possible. Cables can be either in triangular or

cradled configuration. The risk is higher if the sidewall bearing pressure in a bend exceeds 1000 pounds/foot.

 - If the value J is greater than 3.1, jamming is unlikely to occur. Cables are in triangular configuration.

Check the probability of jamming using the formula: P = 1.05 D/d

Probability of jamming = (P) =1.05*J

The 1.05 factor is to account for the oval shape of the bends in the section view.

  1. Coefficient of Friction

A coefficient of friction value of 0.30 is recommended for lubricated PVC or PE conduits.

  1. Minimum Bending Radius

The multipliers for determining the minimum cable bending radius for commonly used cables are listed in Table 3 on Page 6.

  1. Percent Conduit Fill

Conduit fill is the percentage of area inside the conduit taken up by the cable(s).

A. The recommended maximum percentage of conduit fill is shown in Table 8 on Page 14.

B. The total combined percent conduit fill ratio of PG&E electric supply cable and fiber optic cable (FOC) must not exceed 75%.

C. For new construction, the conduit is usually sized for the next-larger size of cable.

038193 Page 18 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Formulas and Parameters (continue)

Table 8 Recommended Maximum Conduit Fill

Number of Cables Example Percent of Total Internal Area of
Conduit to Be Filled by Cable
1 60
2 40
3 55
4 55

Table 9 Percent Fill for Common Cable/Conduit (Rigid PVC Schedule 40) Combinations

Type of Cable 2” 3” 4” 5” 6”
600 V 1/0 Triplex 17% 8%
600 V 4/0 Triplex 28% 13%
600 V 350 kcmil Triplex 20% 12%
600 V 750 kcmil Triplex 36%1 21% 14% 10%
600 V 1,000 kcmil Triplex 28% 18%
600 V 1/0 Quadruplex 24% 11%
600 V 4/0 Quadruplex 18% 10%
600 V 350 kcmil Quadruplex 28% 16% 11%
600 V 750 kcmil Quadruplex 30% 19% 14%
600 V 1,000 kcmil Quadruplex 39% 25% 17%
15 kV 3-#2 AWG, Cu-EPR 25% 14%
15 kV 3-350 kcmil, Cu-EPR 28% 18% 13%
15 kV 3-500 kcmil, Cu-EPR 34% 22% 15%
15 kV 3-750 kcmil, Cu-EPR 42% 29% 20%
15 kV 3-1,100 kcmil, Cu-EPR 37% 26%
15 kV 3-500 kcmil, Cu-EPR2 38% 24% 17%
15 kV 3-750 kcmil, Cu-EPR2 48% 31% 21%
15 kV 3-1,100 kcmil, Cu-EPR2 40% 28%
25 kV 1-1/0, Al-EPR 37% 17%
25 kV 3-1/0, Al-EPR 29%
25 kV 3,600 kcmil, Al-EPR 37% 26%
25 kV 3-1,100 kcmil, Al-EPR 47% 36%
25 kV 3-1,100 kcmil, Cu-EPR 48% 38%
34.5 kV 3-1/0, Al-EPR 14%
34.5 kV 3,600 kcmil, Al-EPR 36% 25%
34.5 kV 3-1,100 kcmil, Al-EPR 43%

1 Although percent fill is less than 55%, it is difficult to pull 750 kcmil triplex in 3” conduit. It is acceptable to pull 750 kcmil triplex in existing 3” conduit. New construction should use 4” conduit. 2 This cable has low smoke zero halogen (LSZH) jacket for indoors substations application only.

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 19 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Formulas and Parameters (continue)

  1. Sidewall Bearing Pressure (SBP)

Sidewall pressure is exerted on a cable as it is pulled around a bend. The following limits are recommended:

A. SBP = 500 pounds/foot for one solid dielectric cable (XLPE or EPR insulation).

B. SBP = 1,000 pounds/foot for two or more solid dielectric cables (XLPE or EPR insulation).

C. SBP = 300 pounds/foot for PILC (lead) cables.

  1. Weight Correction Factor

This is an important factor to calculate because when you pull two or more cables in a conduit, the sum of the forces developed between the cables and the conduit is always greater than the sum of the individual cable weights. When you have three single cables of equal diameter and weight, you can expect a higher weight factor for the cradled position than the triangular position. Assume that the cables will sit in the cradled position (unless you are pulling triplexed cables from a single reel), because this will yield a higher and therefore more conservative pulling tension calculation.

For one or two cables

w = 1 single

For three cables in a cradled configuration Where 3 > J > 2.5

w cradled = 1 + (4/3)*(d/D − d)^ [2]

For three cables in a triangular configuration Where J < 2.5

w triangular = 11 − (d/D − d ) [2]

For four cables (quadruplex) in a diamond configuration Where J < 3.0

w diamond = 1 + 2 [d(D − d) [2] ]

  1. Maximum Allowable Pulling Tension

The maximum allowable pulling tension is the lesser of the allowable tension on the pulling device and the maximum pulling tension that can be applied to the conductors.

Definition of symbols: w = Weight Correction Factor f = Coefficient of Friction W = Cable Weight, pounds per foot L = Length of conduit run, in feet

  1. Equations to calculate pulling tension formulas

A. Tension, Horizontal Straight Section T out = wfWL+T in

B. Tension, Natural or Factory Bend Section (except for “D” below)

T out = T in cosh (wf) + sinh (wf) x T in [2] + (WR) [2]

Where: sinh (wf) = (e [wf] [�] − e [−wf] [�] ) / 2 cosh (wf) = (e [wf] [�] + e [−wf] [�] ) / 2

And � = Angle of bend, in radians R = Sweep radius e = 2.718

038193 Page 20 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Formulas and Parameters (continue)

C. Tension, inclined and Vertical Straight Section

(1) Pulling up a Straight Section

T out = WL (sin () + wfcos () ) + T in

Where: � = Angle of incline

(2) Pulling down a Straight Section (utilize equation for horizontal straight section)

T out wfWL + T in

D. Tension, Convex Bend at Top of Incline, Upward Pull

T out = T in e [wf] [�] + (WR / (1 + (wf) 2)) [2wfe [wf] [�] sin+ (1 − w [2] f [2] ) (1 − e [wf] [�] cos)]

Where: � = Angle of bend (same as angle of slope)

R = Sweep radius

e = 2.718

  1. When cable is pulled through a conduit bend or around a sheave, sidewall bearing pressure (SBP) develops between the cable wall and the bend or sheave. This pressure has a dramatic effect on the sizing of the conduit system, because it relates directly to the radii of bends, pulling tension and cable’s weight.

For single cable:

SBP = TR

For 3 cables in cradled configuration:

SBP = [(3w cradled - 2) T]3R

For 3 cables in triangular configuration:

SBP = (w triangular T)2R

For 4 cables in diamond configuration:

SBP = (w diamond -1) (TR)

  1. It is necessary to have adequate clearance between the uppermost cable and the top of the conduit to ensure a safe and easy pull. For straight pulls, a clearance of 1/4” is safe. For pulls that include bends, a clearance of 1/2” to 1” is needed. Use the outside diameters of the circumscribing circle listed on Document 039955 to determine cable clearances.

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 21 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Determining Pulling Tension for Sections Containing Sweeps

Example

Given:

- Conduit layout as shown in Figure 11.

- Conduit size 6 inch, 6.11”.

- Size of cables: three 1/C 1,100 kcmil Al. EPR-CONC-Encap PE, 25 kV.

- Weight of cable = 3 x 2.36 lbs. = 7.08 pounds/foot.

- Coefficient of Friction = 0.30

Find:

- If cable can be pulled without damage.

- Best direction of pull.

- What type of pulling attachment can be used.
  1. The first step is to calculate conduit fill in percent:

d = 2.05” from Document 039955.

D = 6.11” From Table 10-3 of the Electric Design Manual.

r = d/2 = 1.025”

Cable Area = 3 � (d/2) [2] or Cable Area = 3 � r [2]

Cable Area = 9.902 in [2]

Conduit Area = � (D/2) [2]

Conduit Area = 29.321 in [2]

Conduit Fill = (Cable Area/Conduit Area)*100%

Conduit Fill = 33.771%

This is less than the 55% percent conduit fill allowed.

R = 5 feet

A

G

Figure 11 Typical Duct Layout

038193 Page 22 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Determining Pulling Tension for Sections Containing Sweeps (continued)

  1. The next step is to calculate the jam ratio to determine the cable configuration and the probabilities of cable jamming.

J = D/d = 2.98

Since this ratio is larger than 2.5 but less than 3, it is assumed that the cables are going to be in the cradled configuration. Cable clearance does not need to be checked.

Check the probability of jamming by using the following formula:

P = 1.05 D/d

P = 1.05*2.98 = 3.13

In this case the probability of jamming is greater than 3.1; therefore, jamming is not expected to happen.

  1. The next step is to calculate the weight correction factor for this cable:

w cradled = 1 + (4/3)*(d/D-d) [2] = 1.339

  1. We can now proceed to calculate the pulling tensions:

T in = 0 Tension at A!

Tension at B is calculated using the formula for horizontal bend section:

W = 7.08 lbs/ft R AB = 5 ft f = 0.3= p /2

T AB = T in cosh(w cradled f) + sinh(w cradled f) T in [2] + (WR AB ) [2]

T AB = 0 + (0.674) 0 + (35.4) [2]

T AB = 23.85 lbs

Tension at C is calculated using the horizontal straight section formula:

L AB = 200 ft T BC = w cradled fWL AB + T AB T BC = 568.81 + 23.85 = 593 lbs

Tension at D is calculated using the formula for horizontal bend section:

R CD = 5 ft

T CD = T BC cosh(w cradled f) + sinh(w cradled f) T BC [2] + (WR CD ) [2]

T CD = 715.02 + 400.22 = 1,115 lbs

Tension at E is calculated using the pulling down straight section formula.

L DE = 200 ft T DE = wfWL DE + T cD T DE = 568.81 + 1,115 = 1,684 lbs.

T EF = 3,165 lbs

T FG = 4,232 lbs

Since this tension exceeds the maximum allowable tension of 2,000 lbs. on pulling grips (see Table 10 on Page 25), pulling eyes are needed for this pull (10,000 lbs. limit). Also, the maximum tension on the conductor can be calculated as follows:

A C = Area in cmil cmil = mil [2] N c = Number of Conductors

S c = 0.008 lbs/cmil Maximum Stress on Al or Cu conductors!

The area of 1,100 kcmil is: A c = 1,100,000 cmil and N c = 3

T conductor = N c S c A c = 26,400 lbs

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 23 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Determining Pulling Tension for Sections Containing Sweeps (continued)

The maximum allowable tension on these cables is the lesser value of the calculated tension on the conductor(s) and the maximum tension on the pulling device. In this case, the 10,000 lbs limit on the pulling eye is the maximum allowable tension. Refer to Table 10 on Page 25 through Table 12 on Page 26 for the maximum allowable tension on PG&E’s cables.

Reverse Direction Calculations

Tension at F is calculated as follows:

L FG = 375 ft. T in = 0

T GF = w cradled fWL FG + 0 = 1,067 lbs

T FE = 2,006 lbs T ED = 3,422 lbs T DC = 6,432 lbs T CB = 7,001 lbs T BA = 13,158 lbs

Since the pulling tension from G to A is greater (13,158 lbs.) than the pulling tension from A to G (4,232 lbs.), and pulling tension from G to A exceeds the 10,000 lbs maximum allowable tension on the puling eye, cable must be pulled in the direction from A to G.

  1. Finally, the sidewall bearing pressure limits need to be checked at the bends.

The pulling tensions at B and D are not very significant, but the tension at F may be a concern in terms of sidewall bearing pressure.

SBP = [(3w cradled − 2)T EF ]/3R EF **= [(31.339 − 2)3,165]/15 SBP = 426 lbs/ft

As we can see, the limit of 1,000 lbs/ft for two or more solid dielectric cables is not exceeded at the bend between points E and F.

However, if any of the limits are exceeded, consider one or more of the following options:

- Increase bend radii.

- Decrease conduit fill.

- Reduce the number of bends.

- Try reverse pull.

- Pull in stages.

- Decrease length of pull.

038193 Page 24 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Maximum Allowable Pulling Tensions for Various Cable Rating, Sizes, and Configurations

Table 10 Maximum Allowable Pulling Tensions for 1/C Aluminum or Copper XLP or EPR Insulated Cables

Cable Rating Cable Size
AWG or kcmil
Maximum Allowable Pulling Tension (lbs.)
Cable Rating Cable Size
AWG or kcmil
1/C per Duct 1/C per Duct 2/C per Duct 2/C per Duct 3/C per Duct 3/C per Duct
Cable Rating Cable Size
AWG or kcmil
Grip Pulling Eye Grip Pulling Eye Grip Pulling Eye
600 V
Through
35 kV
#4 334 334 668 668 668 668
600 V
Through
35 kV
#2 531 531 1,062 1,062 1,062 1,062
600 V
Through
35 kV
1/0 844 844 1,688 1,688 1,688 1,688
600 V
Through
35 kV
2/0 1,000 1,065 2,000 2,130 2,000 2,130
600 V
Through
35 kV
4/0 1,000 1,693 2,000 3,386 2,000 3,386
600 V
Through
35 kV
250 1,000 2,000 2,000 4,000 2,000 4,000
600 V
Through
35 kV
350 1,000 2,800 2,000 5,600 2,000 5,600
600 V
Through
35 kV
500/600 1,000 4,000 2,000 8,000 2,000 8,000
600 V
Through
35 kV
700 1,000 5,600 2,000 10,0003 2,000 10,0003
600 V
Through
35 kV
750 1,000 6,000 2,000 10,0003 2,000 10,0003
600 V
Through
35 kV
1,000/1,100 1,000 8,000 2,000 10,0003 2,000 10,0003
600 V
Through
35 kV
1,500 1,000 10,0003

3 Limited by cable pulling and reel handling equipment.

Table 11 Maximum Allowable Pulling Tensions for 1/C Copper P&L and PL&N Cables

Cable Rating Cable Size
AWG or
kcmil
Maximum Allowable Pulling Tension (lbs.)
Cable Rating Cable Size
AWG or
kcmil
1/C per Duct 1/C per Duct 2/C per Duct 2/C per Duct 3/C per Duct 3/C per Duct
Cable Rating Cable Size
AWG or
kcmil
Grip Pulling Eye Grip Pulling Eye Grip Pulling Eye
1 kV 1/0 475 1,265
1 kV 250 677 3,000
1 kV 500 458 3,000 916 6,000
1 kV 750 571 4,500 1,141 9,000
1 kV 1,000 674 6,000 1,349 12,000
1 kV 1,500 897 9,000
5 kV #4 415 501 415 501
5 kV #2 460 796 460 796
5 kV 2/0 597 1,600 597 1,600
5 kV 250 725 3,000 725 3,000
5 kV 500 512 3,000 1,025 6,000
5 kV 750 631 4,500 1,262 9,000
15 kV #4 653 653 653 653
15 kV #2 693 796 693 796
15 kV 2/0 733 1,600 733 1,600
15 kV 250 916 3,000 916 3,000
15 kV 500 622 3,000 1,244 6,000
15 kV 750 750 4,500 1,498 9,000
15 kV 1,000 700 6,000 1,400 10,0001
15 kV 1,500 857 9,000
15 kV 2,000 1,008 10,0001
25 kV #2 800 1,060
25 kV 250 928 3,000
25 kV 500 1,181 10,0001

1 Limited by cable pulling and reel handling equipment.

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 25 of 27

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

Maximum Allowable Pulling Tensions for Various Cable Rating, Sizes, and Configurations (continued)

Table 12 Maximum Allowable Pulling Tensions for 3/C Copper PL&N Cables, 1/C per Duct

Revised

Cable Rating Cable Size AWG or kcmil Maximum Allowable Pulling Tension (lbs.) Maximum Allowable Pulling Tension (lbs.)
Cable Rating Cable Size AWG or kcmil Grip Pulling Eye
5 kV #2 464 1,194
5 kV 2/0 510 2,400
5 kV 250 657 4,500
5 kV 500 875 9,000
15 kV #2 708 1,195
15 kV 2/0 840 2,400
15 kV 250 866 4,500
15 kV 500 1,150 9,000
15 kV 750 1,434 10,0001

1 Limited by cable-pulling and reel-handling equipment.

038193 Page 26 of 27 Rev. #15: 03-25-22

UG-1: General Greenbook Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities

The Information on This Page is “For Reference Only”

Table 13 Percent Fill for Common Cable/Conduit (DB 120) Combinations

Type of Cable 2” 3” 4” 5” 6”
600 V 1/0 Triplex 15% 7%
600 V 4/0 Triplex 24% 11%
600 V 350 kcmil Triplex 18% 11%
600 V 750 kcmil Triplex 32%1 19% 13% 9%
600 V 1,000 kcmil Triplex 25% 17%
600 V 1/0 Quadruplex 20% 9%
600 V 4/0 Quadruplex 15% 9%
600 V 350 kcmil Quadruplex 24% 15% 10%
600 V 750 kcmil Quadruplex 27% 18% 13%
600 V 1,000 kcmil Quadruplex 35% 24% 16%
15 kV 3-#2 AWG, Cu-EPR 21% 13%
15 kV 3-350 kcmil, Cu-EPR 26% 17% 12%
15 kV 3-500 kcmil, Cu-EPR 31% 20% 14%
15 kV 3-750 kcmil, Cu-EPR 42% 28% 19%
15 kV 3-1,100 kcmil, Cu-EPR 38% 26%
25 kV 1-1/0, Al-EPR 32%
25 kV 3-1/0, Al-EPR 27%
25 kV 3-600 kcmil, Al-EPR 38% 26%
25 kV 3-1,100 kcmil, Al-EPR 47% 34%
25 kV 3-1,100 kcmil, Cu-EPR 48% 34%

1 Although percent fill is less than 55%, it is difficult to pull 750 kcmil triplex in 3” conduit. It is acceptable to pull 750 kcmil triplex in existing 3” conduit. New construction should use 4” conduit.

Revision Notes

Revision 15 has the following changes:

  1. Modify Note 1 and Note 4 on Page 1.

  2. Added new Note 6 on Page 1.

  3. Added Trench requirements to this document on Page 3 and Page 4. Some of these trench requirements were previously listed in document 062288.

  4. Added size 1100 cable to Note 14 on Page 7.

  5. Re−arranged conduit and substructure installation section to top of Page 9.

  6. Updated Note 5D under septic tank/leach field/leach line on Page 10.

  7. Added new Figure 3 on Page 11.

  8. Added requirements for steam lines on Page 12 and 13.

  9. Modify Note 5 and added new Note 12 under material and equipment design and restriction on Page 14 and 16.

  10. Revised Figure 10 on Page 17 to change 2W−2W switched switch with a 3W−3W switched switch.

  11. Corrected weight cradled corrected factor formula on Page 20.

Rev. #15: 03-25-22 038193 Page 27 of 27

SERVICE ENTRANCE FROM UNDERGROUND VAULT USING BUS BARS

UG-2: Transformers Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

041352

Asset Type:

Electric Distribution

Function:

Design and Construction

11-01-18

Issued by: Mike Thibault (MLTC) Date:

Rev. # 02: This document replaces Document 041352, Rev. #01. For a description of changes, see Page 2.

Purpose and Scope:

The purpose of this document is to illustrate the preferred method of installing a service entrance from an underground vault using bus bars.

General Information:

  1. Customer shall drill bus bars to fit connectors furnished by PG&E.

  2. If the above configuration or dimensions illustrated in this document are impracticable because of physical or other limitations, consult PG&E.

  3. For customer-owned underground vaults, consult PG&E.

  4. All exposed grounded metal bolts within 10” of bus bars shall be suitably insulated.

  5. For bus rated at less than 3,000 Amps, bus bars may extend less than 12” from bus support and smokeproof barrier. Consult PG&E.

  6. Barrier not needed if firestop supports the bus and is smokeproof.

(Furnished by Customer)

Customer’s Service Entrance Bus Bars

Vault Ceiling

Customer’s Service Entrance Bus Bars

Vault Floor

To Customer’s Switchgear

Wall Between Vault and Customer’s Building

Sidewall

Plan

Figure 1 Service Entrance

Section A-A

Rev. #02: 11-01-18 041352 Page 1 of 2

UG-2: Transformers Greenbook Service Entrance From Underground Vault Using Bus Bars

Figure 2 Connection to Customers Bus Bar

A Varies A

Customer’s Service Entrance Bus Bars

Connector May be Placed Connector Back-to-Back Where Bus Spacing Permits

Section B-B

This document is also seen in Section 15 of the Electric and Gas Service Requirements (“Green Book”) and in Section 13 of the Electric Meterman’s Manual.

Revision Notes:

Revision 02 has the following changes:

  1. Revised Section A−A on Page 1 to conform to Drawing 057521, Detail G.

  2. Removed Table 1 on Page 2.

041352 Page 2 of 2 Rev. #02: 11-01-18

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

This document is also included in the following manual:

This document shows construction details for concrete pads for three-phase, loop-style, pad-mounted transformers. Refer to Document 043817 for installation details of three-phase, radial-style, pad-mounted transformers. See Document 045290 and Document 045291 for fabrication and installation details of three-phase, loop-style, pad-mounted transformers.

General Information

  1. When a pad is installed by the customer, that customer shall provide all materials. In areas of known unusually soft soil conditions, PG&E will require special treatment as specified in Notes 13, 14, and 15. Before pouring or setting the pad, the customer or contractor will request an inspection by PG&E to approve the installation. PG&E shall determine the acceptability of each pad installation.

  2. The installation of the pad includes the two ground rods and the interconnecting ground wire.

Application

  1. If a pad-mounted transformer cannot be located away from vehicular traffic, the customer shall provide suitable barriers for the protection of the transformer. PG&E shall determine the protection requirements according to Document 051122.

  2. If the customer is to use bus duct, the secondary opening is not needed. Grout in the window of precast pads.

  3. The pad sizes are based on maximum dimensions, including cooling radiators, of the various manufacturers’ transformers.

  4. The Style IIE transformers will fit on Style IIB/IIC/llF pads. The 75 kVA, Style IIE transformer will fit on the largest Style IIE pad. The 300 kVA, Style IIE transformer will fit on the small Style IIE pad. The 2,500 kVA, Style IIE transformer will sit on the old 80” x 106” pad, but the radiators will overhang the pad. (Note: Some 1989 and 1999 Style IIE transformers have radiators that will overhang the pad.)

  5. The Style IIG will fit on the largest IIE pad.

  6. The Style IIH will fit on the largest IIC/IIF pad.

Construction Notes

  1. In general, all equipment pads should be installed as level as practical. Pads supporting oil-filled equipment must be leveled to within 1 inch in 8 feet in all directions.

  2. An equipment pad SHALL NOT be placed on an elevated berm, mound or structure either earthen or otherwise when placed in a Flood Plain. If local knowledge of the area in which the equipment is to be placed identifies a high likelihood that uninsulated terminals of the equipment will come in contact with floodwater and the location cannot be moved to a location less likely to have flood levels come in contact with the exposed terminals, a Subsurface Fully Insulated Device should be installed in lieu of the pad mount design. In some cases such as transformers, because of capacity limits of subsurface material coded equipment it may not be possible to provide a transformer of sufficient capacity to serve loads in excess of the capabilities of a 1000 kVA UCD.

  3. The transformer pad shall be placed on firm, compacted native material or on engineered fill which has been compacted at least to the requirements of Note 14.

Rev. #13: 12-01-19 045292 Page 1 of 8

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers

  1. The area under the pad shall be excavated to the required grade, or to a depth necessary to reach firm, undisturbed material, whichever is deeper. The material can be considered firm if it cannot be penetrated by thumb except with moderate effort.

  2. If firm material has not been reached within a depth of 3 feet, excavate 3 feet beyond the perimeter of the pad and backfill the entire excavated area to the required grade and to the requirements of Note 14.

  3. In case it has been necessary to excavate deeper than the required grade to reach firm material, backfill to the required grade in one of the following ways:

A. Backfill with clean, non-expansive soil compacted to 90% of maximum density. Soil shall be placed in layers not more than 8 inches thick before compaction. Maximum density and in-place density is to be determined by California Test Method No. 216-G, Part I and II respectively, or by ASTM D-1556 and ASTM D-1557 respectively. A copy of the test results may be required by PG&E.

California Test Method No. 216-G, Part I and II respectively, or by ASTM D-1556 and ASTM D-1557 respectively. A copy of the test results may be required by PG&E.

B. Backfill with soil-cement slurry consisting of one sack of Portland cement per cubic yard and clean native soil or sand. When slurry is used as a backfill material, the customer will not be required to use a poured-in-place pad.

  1. In areas of known soft soil conditions, trenches within the pad excavation area for the installation of conduits shall be backfilled in one of the ways specified in Note 14 on Page 2.

  2. In addition to the above, precast pads shall be placed on a 3-inch layer of slurry backfill or sand screeded level to provide uniform bearing.

  3. Conduit windows shall be grouted with non-shrink grout (asphalt or blacktop is not approved for grouting).

  4. Concrete shall be designed to attain a strength of 2,500 pounds per square inch (psi) at 28 days. Slump for concrete placement shall not exceed 3 inches. Reinforcing steel shall be per ASTM A615, Grade 40 minimum.

  5. A minimum distance of 6 feet shall be maintained between ground rods.

  6. Wood-float or light broom finish the top of the slab. Finish all exposed edges with a finishing tool. Vertical edges shall have a 3/4-inch chamfer. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces slightly for drainage. Moist-cure concrete for at least 7 days after pouring. Do not install transformer until 14 days after pouring concrete. See Note 21 for exceptions to this requirement.

  7. The transformer may be installed earlier than the 14 days specified above, provided the concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 1,500 psi obtained as follows (this procedure is permitted only for urgent cases where earlier pouring of pad is not practical):

A. For a six-sack mix using normal Portland cement, the transformer may be installed after 7 days; or for a six-sack mix using high early-strength cement, the transformer may be installed after 72 hours.

B. All concrete must be moist-cured to the minimum period specified above before installing the transformer.

C. Verify the required strength by either concrete cylinder test or Schmidt hammer test.

  1. Belled ends of conduits should be placed approximately 1 inch above the concrete pad surface. If belled ends are removed, install end bell fittings. Temporarily plug or cap all conduits.

  2. Only PG&E-approved utility electric-service-related equipment and structures may be installed in the area beneath the transformer pad. The area 6 feet deep and 12 inches horizontally around the pad shall be free of all foreign substructures.

Construction Notes for Precast Pads

  1. Concrete shall be designed to attain a strength of 2,500 psi in 28 days.

  2. Inserts and securing of inserts shall be of sufficient strength to lift the pad. A minimum of three inserts with 7/8-inch diameter, UNC thread and 2-1/4 inch inside depth, steel, galvanized with temporary plugs shall be provided.

  3. Inserts shall be installed flush with the surface of the pad.

27. Reinforcing bars shall be as per ASTM A615, Grade 40 minimum.

  1. All exposed edges shall have a 3/4-inch chamfer or radius.

  2. Surface shall have a light broom or wood-float finish.

  3. The surface of the pad shall be level and flat.

  4. Precast pads shall be permanently identified with manufacturer’s name (for location see Figure 4 and Figure 5 on Pages 7 and 8) and have the weight stenciled on top of the pad.

045292 Page 2 of 8 Rev. #13: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers

References Location Document

Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Connectors/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 013109 Installation of Three-Phase, Radial-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043817 Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad Mounted Transformers UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045290

//ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80e06ea1&vd=true&device=false) Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad Mounted Transformers UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045290

         -             Installation of Loop [Style, Three](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80e08b22&vd=true&device=false) Phase,

Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1:Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045291 Location, Clearances, and Mechanical Protection Details for Pad-Mounted and Subsurface Equipment UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051122 Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288

Rev. #13: 12-01-19 045292 Page 3 of 8

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers

Table 1 Bill of Materials for Concrete Transformer Pads
Item Quantity Description Code Document
1 1 Pad, Concrete, Reinforced (see Page 5)
2 As Required Wire, #2 AWG, Solid, Soft Drawn, Bare Copper1 290074
3 2 Ground Rod, 5/8” x 8’, Copperclad 187013 013109
4 2 Clamp, Ground Rod, for Item 3 187012 187012
5 As Required Conduit, Type and Size (as required) 062288
6 As Required Reinforcing Steel, Number 42
7 As Required Compacted Backfill
8 Tool Bolt, Eye, 7/8” Diameter x 1-1/2” Long, 1-1/2” Inside Diameter,
Shoulder-Type
190013

1 When pad is installed for PG&E by others, the use of solid or stranded wire is acceptable. 2 Number 3 rebar at 12-inch maximum separation with 4x4 6-6 wire mesh over the entire surface may be substituted for the use of Number 4 rebar.

1-1/2” Inside Diameter

1-1/2”

7/8” Diameter (UNC thread)

Detail A Lifting Eye for Pad and Boxes

045292 Page 4 of 8 Rev. #13: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers

Pad Arrangements for Style IIA, IIB, IIC, IIF, and IIH Transformers

Notes

  1. Primary conduits must be centered in the window.

  2. Secondary conduits shall be grouped towards the front of the pad.

  3. Precast pads do not have cut off walls.

  4. A 6-foot minimum separation shall be maintained between ground rods.

  5. The ground wire must be a continuous wire that runs from the outside ground rod, under the pad, to the primary window, then above the pad from the primary window, through the secondary window, to the secondary ground rod as shown below.

See

Note 4

Plan View

Grout in Around Primary

8” Min.

2” ± 1”

7 See Note 11

on Page 1

Above Pad

Section A-A

Figure 1 Style IIA, IIB, IIC, IIF, and IIH Pad Arrangement, Poured-in-Place Pad Shown

Rev. #13: 12-01-19 045292 Page 5 of 8

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers

Pad Arrangements for Style IID, IIE, and IIG Transformers

Notes

  1. Install primary conduits as shown. Keep single primary conduit installation to the left as indicated to reduce strain on elbow terminators.

  2. Secondary conduits shall be grouped towards the front of the pad.

  3. Precast pads do not have cut off walls.

  4. A 6-foot minimum separation shall be maintained between ground rods.

  5. The ground wire must be a continuous wire that runs from the outside ground rod, under the pad, to the primary window, then above the pad from the primary window, through the secondary window, to the secondary ground rod as shown below.

Secondary

Secondary

Plan View

Grout in Around Primary

2” ± 1”

Finished Grade Level

Plan View

Grout in Around Primary

2” ± 1”

Finished Grade Level

B

8” Min.

8” Min.

Section B-B

Figure 2 Loop Installation of Style IID, IIE, and IIGPad Arrangement, Poured-in-Place Pad Shown

Section C-C

Figure 3 Radial Installation of Style IID, IIE, and IIG Pad Arrangement, Poured-in-Place Pad Shown

045292 Page 6 of 8 Rev. #13: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers

Concrete Pad Details for Style IIA, IIB, IIC, IIF, and llH Transformers

Location of 6 #4 at 12” Maximum Each Manufacturer’s

Min.

” Maxim Way mum Each
Way
6”
d
3”

10”
6”
d
3”

10”

Poured‐in‐Place Pad

6”

Precast Pad

Section C‐C

4” All Around

#4 Corner

r’s
Note 31
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
2” Min.
Typ.
2” Min.
Typ.
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
r’s
Note 31
2” Min.
Typ.
Front
7/8” Insert,
Galvanized
(see Notes 25
and 26 on
Page 2)
B C C D D D D D

Figure 4 Construction Details of Style II A/B/C/F/H Pad (see Figure 1 on Page 5 for pad arrangement)

Table 2 Dimensions and Codes for Style IIA, IIB, IIC, IIF, and llH Transformer Pads [1]

Transformer Pad Dimensions (inches) Code
Style kVA Size Approximate
Maximum Weight (lbs)
A B C D E F G H K L W W
IIA 75 3,200
3,200
3,500
4,000
4,500
21 8 14 16 13 15 16 16 15 72 72 043436
IIA (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2 (112.5) 2
IIA 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
IIA (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2 (225) 2
IIA 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
IIB
and
IIF
(225) 2 4,500
5,000
23 8 19 17 13 15 16 19 15 78 80 043538
IIB
and
IIF
300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
IIB
and
IIF
(500) 2 6,000 29 29 29 29 23 23 23 23 23 100 96 040242
IIB
and
IIF
750 9,000 32 32 32 32 22 22 22 22 22 112 98 040243
IIB
and
IIF
1,000 11,000 36 36 36 36 26 26 26 26 26 117 106 040244
IIC
and
IIF
1,500 13,000
15,000
16,000
22,000
31 8 23 17 26 15 16 19 15 120 105 040245
IIC
and
IIF
(2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2 (2,000) 2
IIC
and
IIF
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
IIH 2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325
2955/
3325

1 See Document 066211 for approved suppliers. 2 ( ) = Indicates a kVA size that is no longer purchased.

Rev. #13: 12-01-19 045292 Page 7 of 8

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers

Concrete Pad Details for Style IID, IIE, and IIG Transformers

7/8” Insert, Galvanized (see Notes 25 and 26 on Page 2)

Location of Mfr. Name, (see Note 31 on Page 2)

#4 at 12” Maximum Each Way

6”

6~~”~~

4” All

Around

10” Min.

12” Min.

6

Poured-in-Place Pad

6”

Precast Pad

Section D-D

L
G
K
Front
L
G
K
6 #4 Corner Bars
2” Min.
Typ.
7/
6
H
F
Front
K
G
L
K
G
L
K
G
L
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
Front
K
G
L
K
G
L
K
G
L
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Min.
Typ.
#4 Corner Bars
6
2” Mi
Typ.
n.
Front
K
G
L
K
G
L
K
G
L
Front
K
G
L
K
G
L
K K K
Front
K
G
L
K
G
L
K K K
Front
K
G
L
K
G
L
K K K
Front
K
G
L
K
G
L
K K K
Front
K
G
L
K
G
L
K A A B B C C D E E
Front
K
G
L
K
G
L
K W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

Front
K
G
L
K
G
L
K

Figure 5 Construction Details of Style IID, IIE, IIG Pad (see Figure 2 on Page 6 for pad arrangement)

Table 3 Dimensions and Codes for Style IID, IIE, and IIG Transformer Pads [1]

Transformer Pad Dimensions (inches) Code
Style kVA Size Approximate
Maximum Weight
(lbs)
A B C D E F G H K L W W
IID
and
IIE
75
4,600 17 16 15 19 13 10 6 17 14 61 80 040291
IID
and
IIE
(112.5)2 4,800 4,800 4,800 4,800 4,800 4,800 4,800 4,800 4,800 4,800 4,800 4,800 4,800
IID
and
IIE
150
5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000
IID
and
IIE
(225) 2 5,500 5,500 5,500 5,500 5,500 5,500 5,500 5,500 5,500 5,500 5,500 5,500 5,500
IIE 300
5,800 22 16 15 20 17 20 6 19 25 106 90 040292
IIE (500) 2 6,100 6,100 6,100 6,100 6,100 6,100 6,100 6,100 6,100 6,100 6,100 6,100 6,100
IIE 750 9,000 9,000 9,000 9,000 9,000 9,000 9,000 9,000 9,000 9,000 9,000 9,000 9,000
IIE 1,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000
IIE 1,500 13,000 13,000 13,000 13,000 13,000 13,000 13,000 13,000 13,000 13,000 13,000 13,000 13,000
IIE 2,500 16,000 22 16 15 20 17 20 6 19 25 106 90 040292
IIG
2955/3325 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000

1 See Document 066211 for approved suppliers. 2 ( ) = Indicates a kVA size that is no longer purchased.

Revision Notes

Revision 13 has the following changes:

  1. Add Note 10 on Page 1.

045292 Page 8 of 8 Rev. #13: 12-01-19

j

UG-1: General Greenbook

Prepared by: MZGD

This document is also included in the following manual:

Purpose and Scope

This document contains information relating to the placement of electric underground equipment and enclosures. This includes pad-mount, subsurface, and vault installations with or without equipment.

References Location Document

Marking, Numbering, and Identification of Line Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022168

Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 045292

Pad-Mounted, Load-Break Switches and Fuses . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 053318

Pad-Mounted Transformers Installed Indoors . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 057521

Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . UG-1Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . 063422

Box-Pad for Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 064309

Pad-Mount Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066197

PG&E Approved Manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066211

Installation of Pad-Mounted, Load-Break Junction . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066212

General Order (G.O.) 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.O. 128

California Administrative Code:

Title 8 − Industrial Relations, Chapter 4, Sub-Chapter 5, Electrical Safety Orders

Title 24 − State Building Standards, Part 3 − California Code of Regulations, California Electric Code

1. Clearances

Clearances are divided into the following sections:

  • Building clearances.

  • Clearances to foreign substructure.

  • Horizontal work space clearances.

  • Hazardous locations.

Underground equipment, pads and enclosures shall be located so that they meet or exceed the required clearances in each of the clearances sections and in each of their subsections.

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 1 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

2. Building Clearances

A. Clearances from building surfaces (see Figure 1): Oil filled pad-mount equipment shall have the following clearances (based on G.O. 128, Rule 34.3 [D] ):

a) 3-foot minimum from combustible building surfaces to the edge of the pad.

b) 2-foot minimum from non-combustible building surfaces to the edge of the pad. Non-combustible materials include brick, clay, concrete, steel, stone, and stucco.

B. Doorway clearance (see Figure 1): Pad-mounted equipment shall not be placed where it impedes the flow of traffic through a doorway. In general, 4 feet of doorway clearance is sufficient (based on the Uniform Building Code).

Figure 1 Building and Doorway Clearances (see Notes 2.A and 2.B)

051122 Page 2 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

2. Building Clearances (continued)

C. Vertical clearance from overhangs (see Figure 2): To provide space for hoisting equipment so that equipment can be replaced, the following vertical clearances from the top of the pad for pad-mounted equipment or top of the enclosure for subsurface equipment are required (based on G.O. 128, Rules 17.3 and 34.2 ).

a) 20-foot minimum for:

� 1 ∅ pad-mount equipment.

� Subsurface equipment.

� Style MTP 3 ∅ transformer.

b) 30-foot minimum for:

� 3 ∅ pad-mount equipment except style MTP transformers.

c) When required for installations such as in dry vaults (Document 057521), the vertical clearance outside the doorway may be reduced to 10 feet from ground level. This reduced clearance will greatly expand the replacement time, since the equipment must be jacked and rolled out to a position where the clearance is adequate to hoist it.

Figure 2 Clearances for Pad-Mounted or Subsurface Equipment (see Note 2.C)

D. Railroad or streetcar track clearance: 6-foot minimum clearance is required from the rail to the nearest edge of any manhole, enclosure, or secondary box ( G.O. 128, Rule 31.5 [D]) .

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 3 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

3. Clearances to Foreign Substructures A. Pad-Mounted Equipment: The area 1 foot around and 6 feet below the pad or pedestal shall be kept free of foreign substructures.

B. Subsurface Equipment or Enclosures: The area 1 foot around and 6 feet below the enclosure shall be kept free of foreign substructures. 4. Work Space Requirements

Maintain work space requirements as indicated on all new installations. Exercise judgement on existing installations where encroachment has occurred. For example, a fire hydrant located within the work space that does not adversely affect operations is not a concern. Clear and level work areas are required around underground equipment and enclosures to provide an adequate safe working space for operation or maintenance. Obstructions and elevation changes, other than a standard city/county street curb, are not allowed in the work space. (Based on G.O. 128, Rule 17.3 and 34.2) .

A. Primary enclosures (see Table 1 below and Figure 3 on Page 5): Sufficient clearance to remove covers, operate with hot sticks, replace equipment and cable, etc., is required. Field conditions and the specific equipment may allow some of the clearances to be reduced.

Table 1 Primary Enclosure Clearances

Primary Enclosures Required Clearances
Round or Square
3’ x 5’ (interior dimensions)
3’ From Outside Edges
4’ x 6’ 6” (interior dimensions) 3’ From the Outside Edge of the Long Side /
4’ From the Outside Edge of the Short Side
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (interior dimensions) 3’ From the Outside Edge of the Long Side /
5’ From the Outside Edge of the Short Side
J-Box in 3’ x 5’ 3’ on short sides, 2’ on long side adjacent to the
junction bars (the non-operable side), 5’ on the
long side opposite the junction bars
(the operable side)
J-Box in 4’ x 6’ 6” 4’ on short sides, 2’ on long side adjacent to the
junction bars (the non-operable side), 5’ on the
long side opposite the junction bars
(the operable side)
J-Box in 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” 5’ on short sides, 2’ on long side adjacent to the
junction bars (the non-operable side), 5’ on the
long side opposite the junction bars
(the operable side)

B. Pad-Mounted Equipment (see Figure 4 and Figure 5 on Page 6).

a) 8’-foot minimum (measured from the edge of the pad) in front of all equipment doors to provide room to operate with hot sticks and to replace the equipment. Some equipment types have operable doors in both the front and the rear and both require 8 feet of operating room.

b) 5’-foot minimum on non-operable sides with control cabinet doors.

c) 3’-foot minimum from non-operable sides without control cabinet doors. Exceptions to the 3’ minimum are:

(1) Landscaping obstructions (decorative walls, planters, rocks, etc.) that are up to about 1 foot wide and 2 feet tall may be placed next to the pad on non-operable sides (refer to Document 063422).

(2) One of the 3-foot dimensions may be reduced to 2 feet where Note 2.A.b on Page 2 applies, except for pad-mount switchgear.

051122 Page 4 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

C. Secondary Enclosures − Minimum Work Space Required:

a) Pedestal: 3 feet in front, 2 feet to the side, and 1 foot to the back. 4. Work Space Requirements (continued)

Front

b) Secondary Splice Box − 24” x 36” or smaller: 3 feet on short sides, 2 feet on one long side.

c) Secondary Splice Box − 3’ x 5’ or larger: Same as Table 2.

Edge of Slope

Subsurface Equipment

or

Enclosures

X = 3’ for Round or Square X = 3’ for 3’ x 5’ X = 5’ for 4’ 6” x 8’ 6”

3' 3' 3’

3’

Equipment

Retaining Walls (see Figure 8 and Figure 9 on Page 9)

Profile Plan View

Figure 3 Example of Subsurface Equipment or Enclosures Installed on Sloped Terrain (see Note 4.A on Page 4)

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 5 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

4. Work Space Requirements (continued)

Edge of Slope

Plan Profile

Pad-Mounted Equipment

@@@@

Figure 4 Example of Pad-Mounted Equipment (with front doors only) Installed on Sloped Terrain (see Note 4.B on Page 4)

Pad-Mount With Front and Rear Doors

Figure 5 Work Space for Pad-Mounted Equipment (with front and rear doors including most switches and capacitors) (see Note 4.B on Page 4) @@@@

5. Hazardous Locations

Use the following guide when installing pad-mounted and subsurface equipment in areas where hazardous liquids and gases are dispensed or stored in sealed containers.

A. Liquified flammable gases : Do not install pad-mounted or subsurface equipment within 20 feet of a gas dispenser without conforming to the regulations concerning installation of electrical equipment in hazardous areas (refer to Articles E500-1, E500-2, E500-3, E514-1, and E514-2 of Title 24, Part 3, State Building Standards). Examples: Gas station fuel pump, convenience store propane pump.

B. Any container which stores flammable liquid or gas: These containers will be considered equivalent to “combustible walls”. Therefore, the required clearances are the same as established in Note 2.A.a on Page 2 of this document. Examples: Emergency generator, propane tank at a house.

051122 Page 6 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

6. Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) and Oil Containment

It is the customer’s responsibility to comply with spill prevention and containment requirements for oil-filled electrical equipment in accordance with applicable laws, regulations, and ordinances. The Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) regulations and the Uniform Fire Code (UFC) require the installation of containment structures to prevent spills and leaks of oil from reaching a waterway. SPCC requirements are found in the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 112 and apply to facilities having a total quantity of oil exceeding 1,320 gallons. The requirements of UFC Articles 79 and 80 may also apply to containers and equipment holding more than 55 gallons of oil. These regulations include information on the type and size of the containment needed. Additional containment requirements may be mandated in local hazardous materials ordinances.

7. Future Construction

Consideration should be given not only to conditions existing at the time of installation but also to possible future structures and equipment that could interfere with required clearances or accessibility. On those installations where there is a high probability of a future obstruction, install a clearance requirement sign (Code 373998) on the equipment.

8. Noise Control

Transformer noise level increases with the kVA size. Avoid placing transformers alongside bedrooms and other places where noise may be objectionable.

9. Retaining Walls

A. Retaining walls are required when PG&E determines that it is necessary to protect equipment or enclosures against landslides, drainage wash, drifting sands, etc. The applicant is responsible for the installation and maintenance of the retaining walls and any associated safety rail. The retaining wall will be designed to provide a barrier of sufficient strength and suitable construction to provide adequate protection and working space around the enclosure or equipment. Typical examples of retaining wall placement are shown in Figure 3 and Figure 4 on Page 6 of this document.

B. Pre-approved retaining wall designs and materials are shown on Pages 8 and 9 of this document.

C. For retaining walls in excess of the dimensions shown on Page 8:

a) The wall will be constructed of precast concrete, concrete poured in place, or concrete block.

b) A safety rail of corrosion resistant material is required at the top of all retaining walls when wall height exceeds 4 feet (refer to Utility Standard SAFE-1012S for more information).

c) The applicant will provide PG&E with a set of design drawings and structural calculations certified by a licensed civil engineer.

D. Treated redwood or pressure-treated Douglas fir posts (nominal 4” x 4” minimum) and planks (nominal 2 inches or thicker) may be used for short (1 foot or less) retaining walls. Posts should be 24 inches or less in length and extend at least 12 inches below ground and not more than 12 inches above ground (see Page 9).

E. The working area within the retaining wall shall be level.

a) For pad-mounted equipment, it is to be slightly below the pad level (see the appropriate pad document for specific information).

b) For subsurface enclosures, it is to be level with the enclosure.

F. The working area shall be kept weed free and covered with a locally acceptable decorative covering.

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 7 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

10. Precast Retaining Walls

Note

  1. For drainage requirements, see Figure 9 on Page 9.

B B

15’ 0”

or 19’ 0”

11’ 0”

or 15’ 0”

15’ 0”

L or L

or 19’ 0”

Plan Plan

Figure 6 Concrete Poured in Place or Concrete Block Retaining Wall

Figure 7 Precast Concrete Retaining Wall (see Table 2 on Page 8)

2 Angles 3” x 3” x 1/2” x 4” Galvanized Each Corner

#3 Rebar @ 12” Each Way

6”

H 3’ 6” H 3’ 6”

Corner Fasteners

Non-Corrosive

rner
4”
rner
4”
rner
4”
rner
4”
rner
4”

Material

@ 12” 4”
H 3’
4”
6”
6”

Section A-A Section B-B

Table 2 Codes for Precast Retaining Walls

Dimension Code 1
L H H
11’ 0” 3’ 6” 024881
15’ 0” 15’ 0” 024882

1 See Document 066211 for approved suppliers.

051122 Page 8 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

11. Wooden Retaining Walls and Drainage Details for All Retaining Walls

1
1

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 9 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

12. Barrier Posts

A. Barrier Posts must be installed such that ANY equipment that contains control cabinets can be fully opened and the doors of the control cabinets locked in an open position. Reference Note 4.B.b for clarification. Examples of this requirement may be interrupters with SCADA cabinets installed. Reference Document 076260 Multi-way Interrupter and Single-way Pad-Mount Interrupters in Document 068188.

B. Physical protection from vehicular traffic shall be provided in accordance with the level of vehicular exposure. Barrier posts, etc., are intended to provide reasonable warning from accidental vehicular contact, rather than to prevent all possible contact. When PG&E determines it necessary, the applicant will provide acceptable physical protection.

C. In general, pad-mounted equipment having the following setbacks do not require the customer to provide any other physical protection.

a) Single-family, duplex, and other low density residential areas: 3-foot minimum from the edge of the thoroughfare pavement due to low vehicular traffic (see G.O. 128, Rule 23.6 for definition of thoroughfare).

b) Commercial, apartment, condominium, and other high density areas: 9 feet from the edge of the thoroughfare pavement due to high vehicular traffic and frequent truck-backing.

The design of the particular layout may, of course, call for an increase or decrease in these dimensions. For example, a 3-foot setback is often adequate for parts of commercial parking lots where traffic flow is constrained and backing perpendicular to the curb is unlikely.

D. The posts shown in this document are the standard means for providing such physical protection. Suitable alternatives to these protective posts may be proposed by the applicant for PG&E’s approval.

E. All barrier posts at the same installation site will be the same height.

F. A building wall can be considered as physical protection provided it is located at a point where a post would be normally required.

G. Maintain 36” minimum clearance between barrier posts and the edge of the pad in front of the equipment doors so that they do not interfere with opening the doors.

H. Certain types of pad-mounted equipment have doors in both front and back and require 36” minimum clearance to the pad on both sides.

I. Use removable posts when:

a) Posts are installed less than 8 feet in front of the equipment’s doors, or

b) Where fixed posts would obstruct access for installation or replacement of equipment.

J. Preferred barrier post arrangements for specific equipment are provided in Figure 11 on Page 12 to Figure 23 on Page 24. These may be modified as needed, to meet specific layouts, but must conform to the requirements in Figure 10 on Page 11.

K. Barrier post details are shown in Figure 24 on Page 25 to Figure 30 on Page 27.

051122 Page 10 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

12. Barrier Posts (continued)

A = Distance Between Posts in Inches B = Shortest Distance Between the Protected Device and the Line Between Barrier Posts

Figure 10 Generic Barrier Post Placement

Requirements

  1. “A” must be less than or equal to 42 inches.
  2. “B” must be greater than or equal to 12 inches on non-operable sides.
  3. “B” must be greater than or equal to 36 inches on operable sides.
  4. B n must be greater than or equal to (A n /2)+3.

Table 3 Common A and B Pairs

“A”
(inches)
“B”
(inches)
18 12
24 15
30 18
42 24
42 36

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 11 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

13. Preferred Barrier Post Arrangement for Transformers

Figure 11 Style DF-LB Box Pad 36” x 52” (Document 064309)

F = Fixed R = Removable

051122 Page 12 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

13. Preferred Barrier Post Arrangement for Transformers (continued)

F = Fixed R = Removable

50”
5
2”

Figure 12 Style DF-LB Box Pad 50” x 52” (Document 064309)

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 13 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

13. Preferred Barrier Post Arrangement for Transformers (continued)

6 1”
80”

Figure 13 Style IIE-LB Pad 80” x 61” (Document 045292)

F = Fixed R = Removable

051122 Page 14 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

13. Preferred Barrier Post Arrangement for Transformers (continued)

1
90”
06”
1 6”
4 2”
4 2”
4 2”
2 4”

F = Fixed R = Removable

Figure 14 Style IIE-LB Pad 90” x 106” (Document 045292)

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 15 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

14. Barrier Posts for Capacitors

F = Fixed R = Removable

Figure 15 Pad-Mount Capacitor 82” x 72” (Document 066197)

051122 Page 16 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

15. Barrier Posts for J-Boxes

F = Fixed R = Removable

3 6”
48”

Figure 16 1-Wire, Pad-Mounted Junction 48” x 36” (Document 066212)

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 17 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

15. Barrier Posts for J-Boxes (continued)

40” 40” 40”
3 6”
72”

F = Fixed R = Removable

Figure 17 2- or 3-Wire Pad-Mounted Junction 72” x 36” (Document 066212)

051122 Page 18 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch

F = Fixed R = Removable

41 -1/2”
40-7/8”

Figure 18 PMH Switchgear 40-7/8” x 41-1/2” (Document 053318)

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 19 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch (continued)

55- 1/2”
40-7/8”

F = Fixed R = Removable

Figure 19 PMH Switchgear 40-7/8” x 55-1/2” (Document 053318)

051122 Page 20 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch (continued)

64 -1/2”
73”

F = Fixed R = Removable

Figure 20 PMH Switchgear Pad 73” x 64-1/2” (Document 053318)

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 21 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch (continued)

F = Fixed R = Removable

60 -1/2”
49”

Figure 21 PMH Switchgear Pad 49” x 60-1/2” (Document 053318)

051122 Page 22 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch (continued)

6 9”
49”

Figure 22 PMH Switchgear Pad 49” x 69” (Document 053318)

F = Fixed R = Removable

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 23 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch (continued)

26” 42” 42” 26”
80- 1/2”
88”

Figure 23 PMH Switchgear Pad 88” x 80-1/2” (Document 053318)

051122 Page 24 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

17. Placement of Metal Barrier Posts and Details

9/16” Be Painted Over

With a Zinc Primer

Post Low Profile 67” Post: 3

Eye Bolt, 1/2” x 6”, Steel Galvanized (to be installed parallel to edge of pad)

End Cap
End Cap
Post
Regular 80
48” Min. − 5
Low Profile 6
35” Min. − 3
Visibility
Strips

Figure 24 Steel Barrier Post (see Table 4)

Concrete

See Detail A

Sleeve (see Table 3 on Page 11)

Concrete

Cut From 1/2” x 6” Eye Bolt, Steel Galvanized

32” Min. - 33” Max.

Detail A (see Figure 26)

Min.

Figure 25 Footing for Fixed Steel Post Detail (see Table 4)

Figure 26 Footing for Removable Steel Post Detail (see Table 4)

Table 4 Description and Codes for Steel Barrier Posts 1

Description Length
(inches)
Code Doc
Galvanized Fixed Post, 4”, Steel Pipe, Standard, Schedule 40 80 155107
Galvanized Fixed Post, 4”, Steel Pipe, Standard, Schedule 40 672 155108
Removable Post, 4”, Galvanized Steel Pipe, Standard, Schedule 40 With 5”
Galvanized Steel Pipe Sleeve, 36” Long, Standard, Schedule 40
80 155105
Removable Post, 4”, Galvanized Steel Pipe, Standard, Schedule 40 With 5”
Galvanized Steel Pipe Sleeve, 36” Long, Standard, Schedule 40
672 155106
Replacement 4” Removable Barrier Post Galvanized Steel Pipe With Cap Less
Sleeve and Eye Bolt
67 150265
Replacement 4” Removable Barrier Post Galvanized Steel Pipe With Cap Less
Sleeve and Eye Bolt
80 150266
End Cap, 4”, Galvanized Malleable Iron, May Be Screwed 021882
Strip, Visibility Reflective Yellow Adhesive Sheet, 2” X 12”, Pacific Utilities #PEM212F,
Almetek #DL-RY2X12-A
013163 022168
Safety Lock 170116

1 Posts fabricated from 20-foot lengths of galvanized steel pipe, Code 011794. 2 67” post length is for single-phase transformer.

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 25 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

17. Placement of Metal Barrier Posts and Details (continued)

See Detail B

3” Barrier

Post

Pentahead Located at

Security Cover

Detail B See Figure 27

Figure 27 Security Cover for Removable Post Lock Material Code 150271

Installation of Security Cover:

  1. Remove Top Cap.
  2. Slide Collar Down Over the Eyebolts Locked Together.
  3. Drill Hole for Bolt.
  4. Insert and Engage Pentahead Bolt.

051122 Page 26 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

UG-1: General Greenbook

Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

18. Residential and Light Commercial Non-Metallic Barrier Post

3” Barrier

Post

A

A

bility Strips
3” OD x 67”
Long Post
3” OD x 67”
Long Post
bility Strips
3” OD x 67”
Long Post
bility Strips
3” OD x 67”
Long Post
bility Strips
3” OD x 67”
Long Post
bility Strips
3” OD x 67”
Long Post
bility Strips
3” OD x 67”
Long Post
bility Strips

Figure 28 Non-Metallic Barrier Post (see Table 5)

Detail C See Figure 30

4” OD x 35” Sleeve

4-1/2” OD x 5” Long Galvanized Steel Locking Device

Penta-Head Bolt

Protective

Penta-Head

Shield

Lock (see Detail C)

Concrete

30” Min. - 32” Max.

Concrete

3” Minimum

Min 12”

Section A-A Post
-Sleeve
ete
Post
12”
±3”
30” Min. -
-Sleeve
ete
Post
12”
±3”
30” Min. -
-Sleeve
ete
Post
12”
±3”
30” Min. -
-Sleeve
ete
Post
12”
±3”
30” Min. -

. Min

.

3” Minimum

Figure 29 Footing for Fixed Non-Metallic Post

Figure 30 Footing for Removable Non-Metallic Post Kit (see Table 5)

Table 5 Description and Codes for Non-Metallic Barrier Posts

Description Allwire Code
Fixed Post: 3” OD x 67” Long, 1-3/4” Fiberglass Core With 5/8” Polyethylene Cover FGP674 150553
Removable Post Kit: 4” OD x 35” Long Polethylene Sleeve, 4-1/2” OD x 5” Long Galvanized
Steel Locking Device and 1/2” x 1-1/4” Penta-Head Bolt
RPK001 150554
Security Cover for Removable Post Lock 150271

Rev. #22: 03−25−22 051122 Page 27 of 28

UG-1: General Greenbook Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment

Revision Notes

Revision 22 has the following changes:

  1. Changed Document Owner.

  2. Revised Section 4B and Section 12 to incorporate notes on equipment with Control Cabinets. Care should be taken in the layout for Barrier Posts to assure a permanent post is not installed that would prevent a cabinet from being fully opened allowing access to the internal controls.

051122 Page 28 of 28 Rev. #22: 03−25−22

Greenbook EMWP

Prepared by: ABB1

This document is also included in the following manuals:Electric Meter Work Practices

Purpose and Scope

This document shows methods of supplying underground electric service to meter equipment (pedestal) serving mobile homes in accordance with Electric Rule 15 and Electric Rule 16 for a park that qualifies as a mobile home development as defined by PG&E. Additionally refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements manual (Greenbook) for additional requirements that may not be listed in this document.

Note: In accordance with Title 25, Article 7, Sections 1322, 1333, and 1333.5, mobile homes installed on foundation systems in locations other than mobile home parks, may be served by PG&E from overhead or underground service to the customer’s equipment (service entrance conductors if overhead), which is attached directly to the mobile home. Refer to PG&E Document 063927 for underground service requirements and Documents 025202 and 022169 for overhead service requirements.

Instructions

  1. The developer or his contractor shall provide all necessary trenching, secondary and service conduit (when required), and shall be responsible for the location and final grade of the utility islands

  2. The required location for the meter equipment is at the front of the mobile home (see Figure 1 on Page 4). Alternate locations for the meter pedestal are indicated by the shaded areas in Figure 1 on Page 4.

  3. PG&E shall install the secondary and service lateral cables in accordance with current engineering standards and construction methods.

  4. Maintain a 36-inch (minimum) work space clearance from the meter face and from any access panel to PG&E facilities on the enclosure. Maintain a 36-inch (minimum) clearance from the meter equipment to other utility equipment such as gas, water or sewer. Refer to the National Electrical Code and the Authority Having Jurisdiction for the allowed working space requirements and if the 36-inch (minimum) clearance shown in Figure 3 and Figure 4 on Page 5 may be reduced to 12 inches for pedestal designs which have the meter and all access panels (both PG&E’s and customer’s) located on the same side of the pedestal.

  5. Before PG&E has installed the cable, the developer or his contractor shall then:

A. Install the electric meter pedestal in place over the conduit. Position the pedestal so the meter socket faces toward the street as shown on Page 5 or away from mobile home. Maintain the work space and clearances as described in Note 4.

B. Install and connect a copper grounding conductor from the pedestal grounding lug to an N.E.C. approved ground electrode system. The grounding connection shall not be made to a gas piping system. The customer shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed non-current-carrying metal parts in accordance with the applicable electric codes and local ordinances. PG&E prefers, but does not require, the grounding electrode conductor wire to be protected against physical damage by rigid steel conduit or armored cladding. Refer to the NEC for any required clearance distance of the ground rod away from the pedestal. The top of the ground rod may be exposed or buried as required to meet the applicable electric codes. Exposed ground rods should be placed so they are not a tripping hazard.

C. Bond the service neutral termination lug to the meter pedestal by means of a bonding screw, or by continuing the grounding conductor between the grounding lug and the neutral lug.

Rev. #06: 11-01-18 052521 Page 1 of 8

Greenbook EMWP Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

D. Backfill around the pedestal to provide good support, plumb and level the pedestal, and pour the concrete base support or island. The concrete surface should be no more than 1-inch above grade and 1-inch to 2-inch below the bottom of the utility section opening.

E. Backfill all trenches, and furnish any imported backfill material required.

  1. PG&E shall connect the service lateral conductors to the termination lugs in the meter pedestal, install and seal the pull section panel, and blank off and seal the meter socket.

  2. PG&E shall set the meter upon request for service, after required permits and inspections have been obtained from city or county inspection authorities.

  3. See Figure 1 on Page 4 for a typical electric distribution system layout for a mobile home development.

  4. PG&E shall design its facilities so that the short-circuit duty at the electric service entrance will not exceed 10,000 amps.

  5. Mobile home pedestal shall have a minimum rating of 100 amps. The socket and enclosure shall be designed in accordance with PG&E Document 051001 and the following:

A. The minimum meter height shall be 36 inches when the meter is enclosed, or 48 inches if the meter is exposed.

B. When the meter is enclosed, the enclosing cover shall be hinged for ready access and shall have a shatter-proof reading window. When the meter is enclosed or recessed, the clearance from the meter centerline to any fixed side obstruction shall be a minimum of 6 inches.

C. The service cable pull and terminating section shall be covered with a sealable removable panel (or panels), extending from a fixed panel 1 to 2 inches above concrete. The removable panel shall allow full access to the service terminating lugs. Access to the service terminating lugs may be from either front or rear of the pedestal.

D. Service terminating lugs shall be twin #6 to 350 kcmil range, aluminum bodied pressure type for connecting a single-service lateral.

E. Lugs for terminating the user’s neutral conductors shall be located outside the sealable section and shall be designed to readily permit his neutral system to be isolated, when necessary, from PG&E’s neutral.

F. The pedestal at grade line shall have the minimum dimensions as specified on Page 8.

G. The minimum depth of the pedestal in the ground shall be 24 inches.

H. Adequate ventilation shall be provided to prevent moisture condensation inside the pedestal, as required by UL414.

I. Any unmetered bus going through the breaker section shall be completely covered by steel or approved plastic conduit.

  1. Installation of PG&E distribution system facilities including service and metering equipment installations shall be designed and constructed in accordance with PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements. Refer to the applicable sections in the Greenbook manual for additional requirements that may not be listed in this document.

  2. Physical protection from vehicular traffic shall be provided in accordance with the level of vehicular exposure. Barrier posts are intended to provide reasonable warning from accidental vehicular contact, rather than to prevent all possible contact. The applicant will provide acceptable physical protection. Refer to Document 051122, Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment .

052521 Page 2 of 8 Rev. #06: 11-01-18

Greenbook EMWP Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

References Location Document

Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG−1: Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 015251 Clearances for Supply Service Drops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022169 Methods of Attaching Services to Customer Premises . OH: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025202

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022169 Methods of Attaching Services to Customer Premises . OH: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025202

                            [Temporary Underground Electric Service Single](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdocTDM.asp?itemid=981900042) Phase,

120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 036670 Cables for Underground Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039955 Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051122 Terminating Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817 Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG−1: Services/Greenbook/EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063927

Rev. #06: 11-01-18 052521 Page 3 of 8

Greenbook EMWP Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

Driveway

Driveway

SB

Mobile
Home
Driveway

Mobile
Home
Driveway
Driveway Driveway Driveway Driveway
Mobile
Home
Driveway
SB

Street

Location

Detail A Meter Clearance

052521 Page 4 of 8 Rev. #06: 11-01-18

Greenbook EMWP Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

Location of Electric Meter Pedestal

Notes

  1. Position pedestal so that electric meter is faced toward the street or right of way.

  2. See Figure 5 and Detail B.

  3. Position pedestal so that electric meter is facing away from mobile home, towards right of way.

  4. Alternate location for pedestal. Position pedestal so that electric meter is facing away from mobile home.

  5. Trench depth shall be 30 inches (minimum) with or without gas service, and greater if joint with a gas main.

Street

36” Min Mobile Home (see Note 4 Being Served on Page 1)

See Note 3

Secondary Distribution Trench

Figure 2 Pedestal (preferred location)

Secondary Distribution Trench Secondary Distribution Trench

Figure 4 Pedestal (alternate location)

36” Min., See Note 4 on Page 1

Mobile Home Being Served

Mobile Home Being Served

18” Approximate

able
.
.
able
.
able
.

Detail B Plan

Trench (Figure 2 or Figure 3)

Cable

Pedestal

Utility Island Pad

6” Min.

Temporary pedestal Support

Figure 5 Pedestal

Rev. #06: 11-01-18 052521 Page 5 of 8

Greenbook EMWP Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

Material

Notes

  1. It is recommended that the main circuit breakers used in pedestals have a 10,000-amp short-circuit current rating to insure compliance with state and local codes. These codes require that the main breaker of service equipment be rated at the available short-circuit current. PG&E shall design its facilities to supply all new mobile home customers so that the short circuit duty at the pedestal will not exceed 10,000 amps.

  2. See Table 2 on Page 6 for a list of approved meter pedestal manufacturers and catalog numbers.

  3. Pedestals are allowed to have rear connection kit.

Table 1 List of Material for Supplying Electric Service to Mobile Home Developments
Item Description
Material to Be Supplied by Applicant Material to Be Supplied by Applicant
1 Meter Pedestal (as required, see Table 2 on Page 6 for the approved list)
2 Conduit, Rigid Steel, Galvanized, with Pipe Strap (for bare ground wire, omit if armor clad wire is used)
3 Hub and Clamp, Grounding (to suit Item 3)
4 Conduit Fitting, Threaded, With Cover and Gasket (size to suit Item 3)
5 Ground Rod (see Instruction 5B on Page 1)
6 Ground Wire, Copper, Bare, or Armor Clad (size in accordance with applicable electrical codes and local
requirements)
7 Conduit and Cap (as required)
Material to Be Furnished by PG&E Material to Be Furnished by PG&E
8 Cable, XLP, 600-V (as required), seeDocument 039955 (see Table 2)

Table 2 Approved Meter Pedestals [3]

Rating
(amps)
Mobile Home Electric Metering Pedestals
Rating
(amps)
Manufacturer Catalog Number
0 − 125 Myers Elec. Prod. MES-M100SE
0 − 125 MILBANK MPRV Series
0 − 200 Myers Elec. Prod. MES-M200SE
0 − 200 MILBANK MPAP Series
0 − 200 MILBANK U6276 Series

1 See Notes on Page 6. 2 Pedestals can have rear connection kits. 3 Other meter pedestal that meet EUSERC 307 and PG&E requirements may be allowed.

052521 Page 6 of 8 Rev. #06: 11-01-18

Greenbook EMWP Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

Service and Meter Pedestal

Notes

  1. The meter pedestal shown on Page 8 may be used for a single service only.

  2. Termination lugs for a pedestal shall be twin #6 to 350 kcmil range, aluminum bodied pressure type for connecting a single-service lateral and a single streetlight service when needed. Lug height, measured to the bottom of the terminating lug from grade line, shall be 18 inches minimum and 36 inches maximum. The space between terminating lugs, from lugs to sides of pedestal, from lugs to any grounded surface, or from lugs to panel above shall be 1-1/2 inch minimum. Rigid insulating barriers are required and shall project 1/4-inch minimum beyond any energized parts when this space is reduced. Terminating lugs may be positioned either in-line or staggered, and access shall be unobstructed when all service conductors are in place.

  3. Meter height may be reduced to 36 inches if it is enclosed or guarded by a hinged protective hood (see Note 10B on Page 2).

  4. The pedestal shown on Page 8 may also be used for an underground service to an individual mobile home not in a park.

  5. The pedestal shown in Figure 6 on Page 8 is limited by its pull-section size to a maximum of 350 kcmil conductors.

Rev. #06: 11-01-18 052521 Page 7 of 8

Greenbook EMWP Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

Service and Meter Pedestal (continued)

Breaker and Receptacle

Sealable

8” Min.

CL

A

Finish Grade Line

Fixed Grade and Poured Concrete Pad See Note 5.D on 2

Pad 1” Max Above Grade

7 Min.

(see Note 3 on Page 1)

Figure 6 Service and Meter Pedestal

Revision Notes

Revision 06 has the following changes:

PG&E Service Conduit (see Note 3 on Page 1)

Section A-A

Detail C Cable and Conduit Arrangement

  1. Updated Notes 5.B on Page 1 and 5.D on Page 2.

  2. Updated Note 10.D on Page 2.

  3. Updated Figure 5 on Page 5

  4. Updated Table 1 on Page 6.

  5. Removed Detail C and Table 2 on Page 7 about Compression Type Terminals.

  6. Updated Figure 6.

052521 Page 8 of 8 Rev. #06: 11-01-18

UG-1: Services Greenbook EMWP

Prepared by: ABB1

This document is also included in the following manual:

Purpose and Scope

This document establishes and illustrates the preferred methods of providing underground agricultural service of 500 hp or less.

The requirements shown on this document shall apply to agricultural underground service installations, from PG&E’s overhead lines, for connected loads of 500 hp or less. This document applies where there is a suitable service post, building, or structure as approved by PG&E for attaching the service conduit and metering equipment. For requirements applicable to agricultural service poles (overhead service only) refer to PG&E’s Document 058087. The customer should contact the local PG&E office for installations larger than 500 hp or other underground installations from underground systems as these installations may require different facilities.

General Information

1. PG&E shall furnish and install transformers, service conductors (in accordance with PG&E’s Electric Rule 16), meters, and metering current transformers. Unless otherwise stated, all other materials shall be furnished, installed, and maintained by the customer and shall comply with the requirements of PG&E. It shall be the responsibility of the customer to ascertain and comply with the requirements of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. In areas where no provision is made for inspection by local authorities, the applicable state regulations shall apply. Local ordinances may include wiring requirements in addition to those shown in this document or in the National Electrical Code. Consult inspection authorities for requirements, city or county permits, and inspections which may be required before service can be connected.

  1. The customer should apply for service and verify the available service voltage with PG&E as far in advance of construction as possible. The customer should then notify his pump company of the available PG&E voltage.

  2. Available Service Voltage: Non-residential single-phase loads to a maximum of 7-1/2 hp shall be served at 120/240 V, single-phase, 3-wire. Three-phase motors of 5 hp, but less than 30 hp, will normally be served at 120/240 V, three-phase, 4-wire, but may be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V at the customer’s option and if capacity is available from existing facilities. Single or grouped three-phase motors of 30 hp to 50 hp can be served at 120/240 V, three-phase, 4-wire, if the customer has a combination of single and three-phase loads, otherwise they must be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V, three-phase, 4-wire. Single or grouped three-phase motors from 60 hp to 125 hp shall be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V, three-phase, 4-wire. Three-phase motors larger than 125 hp shall be served at 277/480 V, 4-wire.

to 50 hp can be served at 120/240 V, three-phase, 4-wire, if the customer has a combination of single and three-phase loads, otherwise they must be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V, three-phase, 4-wire. Single or grouped three-phase motors from 60 hp to 125 hp shall be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V, three-phase, 4-wire. Three-phase motors larger than 125 hp shall be served at 277/480 V, 4-wire.

  1. If one or more service posts are used to support the service conduit and metering equipment, or a panel board on which the service and metering equipment are mounted, they shall meet the minimum requirements outlined in Document 054712 for service posts and Document 065374 for panel board construction. Service posts can be installed for applications from 0 to 200 amps, otherwise, panel board construction is needed.

Rev. #10: 07-31-15 054619 Page 1 of 7

UG-1: Services Greenbook Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less EMWP

  1. Service Conduit and Termination

A. Service termination shall be in a PG&E-approved service termination facility. Refer to Figure 5 on Page 6 through Figure 8 on Page 7 for typical installations.

B. In accordance with PG&E’s Electric Rule 16, PG&E shall install the service riser and conduit sweep at PG&E’s pole, and shall pull and connect the service lateral to the customer’s termination facilities. The customer shall provide and install all conduits and other substructures as necessary and shall trench from the base of PG&E’s pole or customer’s property line to the service termination point.

C. The minimum conduit size is based on the maximum continuous ampacity of the metering equipment. Refer to

Document 063928 to select the appropriate size and number of conduits.

D. Underground conduit (Item 5) is restricted to the following types:

(1) Hot-dip galvanized rigid steel.

(2) PVC, Schedule 40 or 80, UL approved 90 ° C.

(3) PVC marked ASTM F-512, DB120 or better, with prior local PG&E approval. Riser conduit (Item 7) is restricted to galvanized rigid steel.

E. When the conduit enters an enclosure for service termination, end bells should be installed, unless the conduit has been installed in an enclosure equipped with duct terminators. Cable protectors should be installed on reconstruction projects only, when end bells cannot be installed. Refer to Document 062288 for more information about conduit fittings.

F. The minimum depth of the customer’s underground conduit shall be 24 inches for secondary or 30 inches for primary. If the underground service is in a location subject to erosion, sub-soiling, or ripping, conduit should be buried at a depth sufficient to avoid possible damage, but not less than 24 inches.

G. PG&E will determine the point-of-service termination to avoid unsuitable routing of underground service installations.

  1. If a pad-mounted transformer is used, the customer shall provide the transformer concrete pad. Dimensional details and additional trenching requirements will be provided by the local PG&E office.

  2. The customer shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed non-current carrying metal parts. Grounding shall be in accordance with National Electric Code, local ordinances, and PG&E requirements. Do not install a bonding jumper or ground wire inside of any PG&E sealed section. Bonding jumper or ground wire attachments to the outside of the meter cabinet are allowed.

  3. Metering Requirements

A. The meter sequence shall be meter-switch-fuse for all installations.

B. The customer shall provide and install a self-contained meter socket or current-transformer metering enclosure, approved by PG&E, for the available service voltage, in accordance with Table 1 on Page 4 and the illustrations on Page 5.

C. For agricultural services, the rating of the service supplied will be determined by the ampacity rating of the metering equipment or enclosure (typically, whichever is greater) where the service conductors terminate.

  1. Customer’s Control Equipment

A. Customer’s switch and motor control equipment may be installed on the same post or panel board as the underground service terminating and metering equipment.

B. Customer’s switch and motor control equipment shall be of proper horsepower and voltage rating and shall be weatherproof. This equipment shall include three overcurrent units, one in each phase, for protection of each three-phase motor or as otherwise specified in Article 430 of the National Electric Code.

C. Customer’s switch and motor control cover shall be effectively locked or sealed if the enclosure contains accessible electrically energized parts.

054619 Page 2 of 7 Rev. #10: 07-31-15

UG-1: Services Greenbook Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less EMWP

  1. Service to Three-Phase Pumps

A. When three-phase service is established to a pump, PG&E’s crew will assist in checking for satisfactory pump motor performance if the customer or his representative is present. The construction crew should take “clamp-on” ammeter readings at the service head, or the customer or his representative can take the readings at the motor control box. If the reading on the “high” phase is more than 10% higher than the reading on the “low” phase, then the phases should be rolled to get the readings as close as possible (see Figure 1 below). The set of readings that gives the lowest difference is the connection to be retained. It is possible that none of the other readings will be any better. Record all readings.

B. Starting and stopping of the pump should be done only by the customer or his representative. Connections can be changed at the transformer pole or service pole by PG&E’s crew or at the motor control box by the customer or his representative.

C. On 240 V 3-wire services where one phase conductor is grounded, all rolling of leads must be done on the customer’s motor leads (at the motor control box), not on PG&E’s service leads.

Figure 2 Interchanging Leads Reverses Rotation (for information only)

Figure 1 Rolling Leads (maintains same rotation)

Example: Once water was flowing satisfactorily from the pump, the following ammeter readings were taken:

Amps

L1 L2 L3

A. Original Readings 60 61 67 B. Second Set of Readings 60 62 63 C. Third Set of Readings 59 62 66

Conclusion: Connection “B” should be used.

11. A voltage stabilizer shall be installed in all 480 V three-phase, 3-wire ungrounded service. See Document 052497.

References Location Document

Installation of Meter Protective Device on

480 V Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 033286

  •                     [Voltage Stabilizer for 480 Volt Three](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdoctdm.asp?itemid=981830029) Phase, 3 Wire,
    

Ungrounded Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Meters/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 052497 Permanent Wood Post Installation Underground Electric Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 054712 Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less . . . . . . . OH: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058087 Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288 Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial Underground Electric Services 0-600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facillities . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928 Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction OH/UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 065374

Rev. #10: 07-31-15 054619 Page 3 of 7

UG-1: Services Greenbook Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less EMWP

Typical Underground Service

Table 1 Customer’s Metering Equipment Requirements [1]

Service Voltage 2 Maximum Horsepower 3
Single or Grouped Motors
Metering Equipment’s
Current Rating
(maximum amps shown) 6
Type Meter Equipment
Required
Refer to
120/240 Volt
Single-Phase,
Non-Residential,
3-Wire
7 1/2 hp Single 100 Self-Contained, 4-Jaw Bused
Safety-Socket Meter Box
Figure 5,
Page 6
240 Volt Delta
3-Phase, 3-Wire4
30 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained, 5-Jaw Bused
Safety-Socket Meter Box
Figure 6,
Page 6
240 Volt Delta
3-Phase, 3-Wire4
60 hp Single or Grouped 200 200 200
240/120 Volt Delta
3-Phase, 4-Wire
30 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 7-Jaw Bused
Safety-Socket Meter Box
Figure 7,
Page 6
240/120 Volt Delta
3-Phase, 4-Wire
50 hp Single or Grouped 200 200 200
480 Volt Delta
3-Phase, 3-Wire5
60 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 5-Jaw Bused
Safety-Socket Meter Box
Figure 6,
Page 6
480 Volt Delta
3-Phase, 3-Wire5
125 hp Single or Grouped 200 200 200
480 Volt Delta
3-Phase, 3-Wire5
300 hp Single or Grouped 400 Combination Meter, Current-
Transformer, and Service
Termination Cabinet with 8-Jaw
Socket and CT Mounting Base
Figure 8,
Page 7
277/480 Volt Wye
3-Phase, 4-Wire
60 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 7-Jaw Bused
Safety-Socket Meter Box
Figure 7,
Page 6
277/480 Volt Wye
3-Phase, 4-Wire
125 hp Single or Grouped 200 200 200
277/480 Volt Wye
3-Phase, 4-Wire
300 hp Single or Grouped 400 Combination Meter,
Current-Transformer and
Service Termination Cabinet
with 13-Jaw Socket and CT
Mounting Base
Figure 8,
Page 7
277/480 Volt Wye
3-Phase, 4-Wire
500 hp Single or Grouped 600 Pad-Mounted (free standing)
Switchboard
Greenbook
Section 10

1 For meter equipment illustration, see Pages 6 and 7. 2 See Note 3 on Page 1 for available service voltages. 3 Maximum horsepower for single and grouped motors is based on nameplate ratings. Ratings shown are the recommended values for motors running at full load. 4 Limited availability, consult PG&E. 5 480 Volt Delta is not available to new services. 6 Customers may choose a greater current rating for their metering equipment.

054619 Page 4 of 7 Rev. #10: 07-31-15

UG-1: Services Greenbook Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less EMWP

Typical Underground Service (continued)

Note

1. Voltage stabilizer shall be furnished and installed by PG&E. Refer to Document 052497.

6 6

Plan View

Plan View

66” Preferred 75” Max.

48” Min. 66” Preferred 75” Max.

Front View Side View

Figure 3 Safety Socket Box and Service Equipment Enclosure

Front View Side View

Figure 4 Meter and CT Cabinet With Free-Standing Pad-Mounted Service Equipment Enclosure

Table 2 List of Materials to Be Furnished and Installed by the Customer

Rev. #10: 07-31-15 054619 Page 5 of 7

UG-1: Services Greenbook Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less EMWP

Safety Socket Meter Boxes

Notes

  1. Applicable to maximum of 125 hp motor(s) (self-contained).

  2. Refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook) for dimensional and specification details.

  3. A voltage stabilizer, required on 480 V ungrounded services, shall be furnished and installed by PG&E. See

Document 052497.

  1. 240 V, three-phase, 3-wire service is available only when PG&E’s transformers are of the overhead type, the load is limited to three-phase motors (small 240 V, single-phase loads may be permissible in some locations), and in the future other customers are not likely to be served from the transformer bank.

See Note 2 See Note 2

Point of PG&E Service Lateral Termination

See Note 3

PG&E Service

Point of PG&E Service Lateral Termination

PG&E Service

Customer’s Service Entrance Conductors

Neutral

Grounded Phase Conductor on 240 V Service

Customer’s Service Entrance Conductors

See Note 3

Figure 5 0 − 200 Amp Safety Socket Meter Box 120/240 V, Single-Phase, Self-Contained 4-Jaw Bused

See Note 2

Point of PG&E Service Lateral Termination

Figure 6 0 − 200 Amp Safety Socket Meter Box 240 V and 480 V, Three-Phase, 3-Wire, Self-Contained 5-Jaw Bused (see Notes 1 and 2)

Power Leg Conductor on 4-Wire Delta

Customer’s Service Entrance Conductors

Neutral

PG&E Service

Figure 7 0 − 200 Amp, Safety Socket Meter Box 240/120 V, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Delta or 480/277 V, Three-Phase, 4-Wire, Wye Self-Contained 7-Jaw Bused (see Note 1)

054619 Page 6 of 7 Rev. #10: 07-31-15

UG-1: Services Greenbook Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less EMWP

Transformer-Rated Enclosures and Metering

See Note 2 on Page 6

Current-Transformer Mounting Base (Furnished and Installed by Customer)

UG Service Termination Pull Section

Removable Test Switch Perch

PG&E Service

Figure 8 400-Amp Service Terminating Pull Box and Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet 240 V, Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 480 V, Three-Phase, 3-Wire Delta 240/120 V, 3-Phase, 4-Wire Delta or 480/277 V, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Wye Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service Equipment is Shown (see Note 4 on Page 6)

Notes

  1. Applicable to maximum of 300 hp motor(s).

  2. Refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook) for dimensional and specification details.

  3. A voltage stabilizer, required on 480 V ungrounded services, shall be furnished and installed by PG&E. See

Document 052497.

  1. 240 V, three-phase, 3-wire service is available only when PG&E’s transformers are of the overhead type, the load is limited to three-phase motors (small 240 V, single-phase loads may be permissible in some locations), and in the future other customers are not likely to be served from the transformer bank.

  2. Figure 8 is applicable to wall-mounted, termination enclosures with a maximum rating of 400 amps. Larger termination equipment (600 amps, three-phase) must be pad-mounted.

Revision Notes

Revision 10 has the following changes:

  1. Corrected available service voltage for three-phase motors of 5 hp but less than 30 hp shown on Note 3 on Page 1.

  2. Clarified 3 [rd] column of Table 1 on Page 4.

  3. Revised Table 1 Footnotes 3 and 6 on Page 4.

Rev. #10: 07-31-15 054619 Page 7 of 7

UG-1: Services Greenbook EMWP

Prepared by: ABB1

This document is also included in the following manual:

Purpose and Scope

This document shows the minimum requirements for a customer-installed wood post for permanent installation of underground electric service. The service installations shown on this document are intended to serve individual customers (not mobile home parks) where PG&E-approved manufactured pedestals are not readily available. Manufactured pedestals are preferred because they provide easier service installations and better protection of conduit, ground wire and customer’s connection facilities. Refer to Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook), Section 6 and Section 9.

General Information

  1. The customer shall install service conduit in accordance with this document. The customer shall install load side conduit and suitable conductors as required by local or state codes.

  2. Local ordinances may include requirements in addition to those shown in this document. Consult local inspection authorities for these requirements. In areas where local ordinances require permits and inspection, these must be obtained before PG&E can establish service. Meters will be installed and energized by PG&E after the customer’s metering equipment has been properly installed and after an inspection clearance has been given to PG&E by the appropriate electrical inspection authority.

3. When a service larger than 225 amps is desired, panel board construction is required. Refer to Document 065374.

  1. Service Post Installation

A. A permanent service installation is one which will remain for a period longer than one year, as estimated by PG&E (for temporary installations, refer to Document 036670).

B. Wood posts used for permanent service shall be pressure-treated for the full length. Any other process which will provide equivalent penetration and retention must be approved by PG&E. Acceptable wood preservatives are water-borne salts and pentachlorophenol. Brush application of wood preservative is ineffective for permanent posts and therefore unacceptable. Minimum dimensions of square posts shall be 6” x 6” x 8’-0” long. Minimum dimensions of cylindrical post shall be 6“ diameter x 8’-0” long. Depth of setting shall be 3’ 0” minimum. A 4-inch-thick concrete pad shall be poured around the post as shown in Figure 1 on Page 3 and Figure 3 on Page 4.

C. Post installations shall be in protected locations, out of the way of vehicular traffic or other hazardous conditions.

  1. Service Conduit and Termination

’ A. PG&E will install the underground service in accordance with PG&E s Electric Rule 16. The underground service lateral will be installed, owned, and maintained by PG&E from PG&E’s distribution line to the termination facility, which is normally the meter enclosure.

B. The customer shall provide trenching and backfill in accordance with PG&E specifications and pay any costs

’ provided for in PG&E s Electric Rule 16.

C. Residential service will normally be installed in conduit as shown in Figure 1 on Page 3.

D. Non-residential service will normally be installed in conduit furnished and installed by the customer as shown in Figure 3 on Page 4.

Rev. #09: 08-15-17 054712 Page 1 of 4

UG-1: Services Greenbook Permanent Wood Post Installation Underground Electric Service EMWP

  1. Grounding

The customer shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed non-current-carrying metal parts. Grounding shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code and local ordinances except that the grounding wire shall be protected against mechanical damage by rigid steel conduit, or armored copper ground wire may be used.

  1. Metering Requirements

A. Meters will be furnished by PG&E.

B. For residential installations, a PG&E-approved combination service termination and meter socket panel without circuit closing devices as shown on Page 3, shall be furnished, installed, and wired by the customer.

C. For non-residential applications, a PG&E-approved combination service termination and bused-safety-socket meter box with test bypass facilities and service main disconnect, as shown on Page 4, shall be furnished, installed, and wired by the customer.

References Location Document

Temporary Underground Electric Service Single-Phase, 120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 036670 Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 038193 Terminating Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817 Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0−600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook/EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063927 Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial Underground Electric Services 0-600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . UG−1: Services/Greenbook/EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928 Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services/UG−1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . 065374

Table 1 List of Materials to be Furnished and Installed by the Customer

Table e 1 List of Materials to be Furnished and Installed by the Customer (see Figure 1 on Page 3 and Figure 3 on Page 4)
Item Description
1 Service Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter Socket Panel
(see Figure 2 on Page 3 or Figure 4 on Page 4 for details)
2 Square Post, 6” x 6” x 8’-0” Long, Cylindrical Post, 6” in Diameter x 8’-0” Long, Fully Treated
(see Note 4 on Page 1)
3 Conduit (load side), Size and Material as Required by Building Code
(typically rigid galvanized steel or Schedule 80 PVC plastic)
4 Conduit, Service Riser, Rigid Steel, Galvanized or Schedule 80 PVC Plastic, (see Note 5 on Page 3)
5 Conduit, Rigid Steel, Galvanized, With Pipe Strap (for bare ground wire, omit if armor clad wire is used)
6 Hub and Clamp, Grounding, to Suit Item 5
7 Ground Rod (see Note 6)
8 Ground Wire, Copper, Bare or Armor Clad
(size in accordance with applicable electrical codes and local requirements)
9 Conduit, Plastic or Rigid Steel, for Underground Service (size as shown inDocument 063927
andDocument 063928)

054712 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #09: 08-15-17

UG-1: Services Greenbook Permanent Wood Post Installation Underground Electric Service EMWP

Residential Service Only, 0−225 Amp

Notes

  1. Poured concrete pad shall be approximately 4 inches thick. Provide 1/2-inch slope away from post to allow for drainage.

  2. Install bend in direction of service trench. To facilitate cable installation, only one 90 ° bend is permitted in the service riser installation. If trench is shared with gas or other utilities, consult PG&E for required increased trench depth.

  3. Meter socket enclosures for residential service (Figure 2) shall not be equipped with any circuit closing device.

  4. Approved meter socket enclosures for non-residential service (Figure 4 on Page 4) shall be equipped with test bypass facilities.

  5. Whenever it is necessary to install a service longer than 75 feet, the applicant must contact PG&E before ordering the service riser, conduit or, termination facilities. If the service riser and conduit called for in Table 2 on Page 4 will not accept the cable required to meet the voltage and/or flicker drop requirements, or will cause cable pulling problems, the next larger PG&E standard conduit size must be installed. (Refer to Document 041543 for flicker and voltage drop requirements and Document 038193 for cable pulling limitations.)

66” Preferred

1
Customer’s
N
d Distribution
Section
8” Min.
−125 Amp.
11” Min.
6−225 Amp.
Sealable Cover

8” Min.
−125 Amp.
11” Min.
6−225 Amp.
N
Sealable Cover
Customer’s
Distribution
Section
d
1
Customer’s
Distribution
Section
8” Min.
−125 Amp.
11” Min.
6−225 Amp.
N
Sealable Cover
Customer’s
Distribution
Section
d
1
N
8” Min.
−125 Amp.
11” Min.
6−225 Amp.
N
Sealable Cover
Customer’s
Distribution
Section
d
1
N Sealable Cover Sealable Cover

Figure 2 Typical Residential Combination Service Termination Enclosure and Meter Socket Panel, 225 Amp Max., 120/240 V

Figure 1 Residential Service

Rev. #09: 08-15-17 054712 Page 3 of 4

UG-1: Services Greenbook Permanent Wood Post Installation Underground Electric Service EMWP

Residential and Non-Residential Service 0−225 Amp Installed in Conduit

66” Preferred

To Load

Figure 4 Typical Service Termination Enclosure for Non-Residential 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service 0−225 Amp Maximum 0−600 V

Figure 3

(see Note 5 on Page 3)

Non-Residential Service

(see Figure 2 on Page 3 for typical residential enclosure)

Figure 3 Non-Residential Service

Table 2 Cable and Conduit Requirements

Main Service Switch
Rating − Amps
Conduit Number and Size
(see Note 5 on Page 3)
Aluminum Cable Number and
Size AWG or kcmil
Main Service Switch
Rating − Amps
3-Wire 4-Wire Per Phase Neutral
0−125 See Footnote1 1−3” 1−1/0 #2
126−225 1−3” 1−3” 1−4/0 1−1/0

1 1- 2” for residential. 1- 3” for non-residential.

Revision Notes

Revision 09 has the following changes:

  1. Corrected Reference Location Document 036670 100 Amps to 200 Amps Maximum.

054712 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #09: 08-15-17

Engineering Standard Electric Planning Manual Greenbook

Prepared by: NIB1/EOB1

This document is also included in the following manuals:

Purpose and Scope

  1. This document specifies the requirements and preferred method of serving single customer substations from transmission lines.

  2. This substation planning guide is only applicable to single customer (PG&E owned) substations where the service delivery voltage is over 2,000 volts and the magnitude of the applicant’s load is such that PG&E has elected, for its operating convenience and necessity, to supply the load from transmission sources. This will require the installation of a substation on the applicant’s premises under the provisions of Section D of PG&E’s Electric Rule No. 2 and Section C of PG&E’s Electric Rule No. 16.

he service delivery voltage is over 2,000 volts and the magnitude of the applicant’s load is such that PG&E has elected, for its operating convenience and necessity, to supply the load from transmission sources. This will require the installation of a substation on the applicant’s premises under the provisions of Section D of PG&E’s Electric Rule No. 2 and Section C of PG&E’s Electric Rule No. 16.

  1. The applicant’s service may be either overhead or underground. A typical overhead service is shown in Figure 1 on Page 5, and a typical underground service is shown in Figure 2 on Page 6. The illustrations on Pages 5 and 6 of this document are general and are intended for preliminary planning purposes only.

General Information

  1. The applicant shall, at his or her expense, obtain all land use, environmental impact, and necessary building permits.

  2. It is the applicant’s responsibility to install and maintain all related substation site improvements in accordance with the requirements of PG&E and those of federal, state, and local agencies.

  3. The applicant shall, at his or her expense, furnish, construct, and maintain the following site improvements:

A. Fences and gates.

B. Paving and grading.

C. Paved access road.

D. Foundations, including embedded stubs and anchor bolts.

E. Conduits and pull boxes.

F. Grounding systems.

G. Landscaping required.

H. Oil retention facilities if required (as determined by PG&E or the applicant).

Foundations, underground conduits, and grounds are to be installed as specified by PG&E. The applicant shall arrange to have PG&E inspect them during installation, while they are exposed. Foundation forms and anchor bolt settings are to be approved before concrete is poured.

Landscaping or oil retention facilities may be required by local, state, or federal agencies.

  1. If an enlargement of an existing customer substation is to be made that will require construction to be done within the fence of the existing energized station, it may be necessary to either relocate the fence or have the actual construction work performed by PG&E at the applicant’s expense. Ties to an existing ground grid are to be made by PG&E.

  2. The applicant’s design for grading, access road, and oil retention facility must be approved by PG&E prior to the start of construction.

Rev. #01: 01-30-06 055103 Page 1 of 7

Engineering Standard Electric Planning Manual Greenbook Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines

  1. The applicant’s service point is the terminal pad of a disconnect switch in the substation. The applicant shall terminate his or her electric service conductors with PG&E-approved flexible connectors to PG&E’s copper switch pads. The connectors and tinned Everdur bolts (or equal) shall be furnished by the applicant and installed by PG&E. The applicant’s equipment, except overhead service take-off lines, shall not be mounted on PG&E structures. Underground cable potheads shall be supported on a separate structure provided by the applicant.

rvice conductors with PG&E-approved flexible connectors to PG&E’s copper switch pads. The connectors and tinned Everdur bolts (or equal) shall be furnished by the applicant and installed by PG&E. The applicant’s equipment, except overhead service take-off lines, shall not be mounted on PG&E structures. Underground cable potheads shall be supported on a separate structure provided by the applicant.

  1. Substation lighting poles and lighting fixtures will be furnished and installed by PG&E, including wiring. The applicant shall provide the required foundation and conduits for lighting poles as described in Note 6 on Page 1. If practical, lighting fixtures may be installed on substation structures.

  2. Revenue metering transformers and meters will be provided and installed by PG&E. No other circuits or equipment shall be connected to the metering transformers, except with special written approval granted for unusual circumstances.

Where the applicant takes delivery at the secondary voltage level of the transformer, the applicant shall provide a cubicle which is dedicated for the installation of revenue metering transformers and meters. This metering cubicle shall be located in the applicant’s switchgear, outside the fenced substation enclosure. The cubicle shall be designed to comply with PG&E’s service requirement standards, and drawings shall be submitted to PG&E for approval prior to the manufacturer’s fabrication.

Where the applicant takes delivery at the transmission voltage level and owns or leases the substation, metering shall normally be at the transmission voltage with the applicant providing the structures, foundation, and by-pass and disconnect switches for mounting and connecting the metering transformers. Meters shall be located in a building or cubicle provided by the applicant and accessible without entry into the fenced substation enclosure.

  1. Services will normally be supplied from a grounded wye transformer. Services of voltages other than those shown on Table 1, are generally not available. Special consideration is necessary if 230 kV transmission voltage is required.

Table 1 Three-Phase MVA Ratings [1]

Nominal
Transmission
Vo ltage
Available Substation Secondary Voltage
Nominal
Transmission
V l
otage
4160Y/2400 V
12470Y/7200 V
21600Y/12470 V
Nominal
Transmission
V l
otage
Three-Phase MVA Ratings (maximum) Three-Phase MVA Ratings (maximum) Three-Phase MVA Ratings (maximum)
60 kV 10.5 12.5 12.5
70 kV 5.2 12.5 12.5
115 kV 10.5 45.0 45.0

1 These ratings indicate the MVA size of emergency replacement transformers. Service to loads in excess of the values indicated requires special consideration.

  1. The applicant shall install, adjacent to the substation, a power circuit breaker or a three-phase recloser on his or her main service conductor, or on each circuit supplied from the main service. The term “adjacent” means that only the substation fence separates the applicant’s switchgear from the substation. If the applicant cannot locate his or her switchgear adjacent to the substation, the applicant shall provide a metering cubicle, and a power circuit breaker or a three-phase recloser, for his or her main service adjacent to the substation.

  2. The applicant shall provide ground fault protection if:

A. Power circuit breakers or three-phase reclosers (specified in Note 13 above) serve overhead lines.

B. Ground fault limiting resistors or reactors are installed.

Ground fault protection is also recommended for underground cables.

The applicant’s protective devices shall coordinate with PG&E’s protective devices, and they shall clear every fault on the applicant’s system.

  1. Any underground conduits or piping extending outside of the fenced area of the substation yard shall be non-metallic to a distance of at least 8 feet.

  2. On 3-wire services using metallically shielded underground high voltage cables to connect the substation to the applicant’s equipment, the cable shield should be grounded only at PG&E’s end and shall be insulated at the applicant’s end. Shielded cable shall be installed in non-metallic conduit extending to a distance of at least 8 feet outside the substation fence.

055103 Page 2 of 7 Rev. #01: 01-30-06

Engineering Standard Electric Planning Manual Greenbook Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines

  1. Where the applicant requests a ground fault limiting resistor in the transformer neutral located outside of the substation fenced area, the elevated neutral conductor shall be insulated for the operating voltage supplied. If the applicant requires a ground fault limiting resistor in the substation, the resistor and a resistor bypass switch will be installed by PG&E at applicant’s expense.

  2. If the applicant’s equipment fence ground is bonded to his or her equipment ground grid, the fence must be separated from the substation fence by 8 feet. Use non-metallic 8-foot sections to cover the separations. If the applicant’s equipment fence ground is not bonded to his or her equipment ground grid, the equipment fence must be separated from the substation fence by 6 inches.

  3. The substation ground grid shall not be connected to the fence grounds or anything outside the substation. For details of ground grid installation and separation requirements of fence grounds, see Document 067910 and Document 020607.

  4. The applicant shall be responsible for keeping the substation free of weeds and other debris.

  5. The following data is to be supplied by the applicant to PG&E:

A. Prior to design completion:

(1) The applicant’s service requirements, such as expected demand (MW), proposed service voltage, power factor, and ultimate growth requirements.

(2) Plot plan showing the proposed substation location and proposed access road.

(3) Grading plan of the proposed substation, access road, and adjacent areas.

(4) Soil report or suitable information for foundation design.

(5) The electrical rating of the ground fault limiting resistor, the resistor by-pass switch, current transformer, and any other associated equipment, if required by the applicant.

(6) Location, length, and description (overhead or underground) of the service connection to the applicant’s facilities.

(7) Final disposition of yard drainage to determine if a special oil retention facility will be required.

(8) Landscaping plans, if required.

(9) Electrical plans, such as single-line, meter, and relay drawings, general arrangement of conduits and grounds, and elementary diagrams of the applicant’s facility. These drawings shall include all high voltage fuse and/or breaker ratings, capabilities of interrupting devices, current transformer and potential transformer ratios and connections, and protective relay types, ranges, and settings.

B. Prior to operation:

(1) Documentation of permits the applicant has obtained for the substation and a written inspection clearance notice from the inspection authority having jurisdiction (city, county, or state agency, etc.).

(2) Signed reports for the following tests:

(a) Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground megger test performed on the applicant’s side of the open disconnect switch to the service point, including high voltage cable runs with all customer’s primary breakers and fuses racked open.

(b) Individual megger tests on all major equipment, such as primary breakers, potential transformers, station service and auxiliary transformers.

(c) Ratio test of auxiliary transformers.

(3) Test report showing that the primary breaker relay settings conform with the protection requirements provided by PG&E.

  1. The following data is to be furnished to the applicant by PG&E:

A. Substation equipment layout.

B. Arrangement and requirements for foundations, embedded stubs, and anchor bolts.

C. Arrangement of conduits, if required, and grounds.

D. Electrical data, such as short-circuit duty, transformer impedance, etc.

E. Outline of PG&E’s transformer bank differential current transformers to be located in the applicant’s switchgear, if required.

Rev. #01: 01-30-06 055103 Page 3 of 7

Engineering Standard Electric Planning Manual Greenbook Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines

F. Engineering standards for substation fence and fence grounding.

G. Requirements for revenue metering equipment.

H. Space requirements and details of substation capacitors, if required.

I. Provision for a mobile transformer, if required.

J. Specification for an oil retention facility, if required.

K. Relay coordination and other protection requirements.

L. PG&E will prepare design drawing of the access road and fencing at the applicant’s expense if the applicant so requests.

References Document

General Notes for Grading and Paving for Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041838 Grounding Requirements for Outdoor Electrical Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 067910 High Pressure Sodium Outdoor Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459076 Method of Grounding Fences and Wire Trellises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020607 Property Fence and Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 059659 Termination and Structure for 12 kV and 21 kV Underground Feeders Low Profile Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 050861

Table 2 List of Material for Serving Single Customer

Substations From Transmission Lines
Item Description
Item Material Furnished by PG&E
1 Structures1
2 Control Building
3 Transformer
4 Control Wiring
5 Lighting Fixture
6 Air Switch
7 High Voltage Fuses
8 Disconnect Switch
9 Station Service
10 Potential Transformer
Material Furnished by Customer
11 Fence and Gates2
12 Foundation
13 Grounding System
14 Conduits, ABS Type DB
15 Take-Off Equipment
16 Stubs and Anchor Bolts
17 Access Roads
18 Pothead and Support Structure

1 Latticed steel or aluminum structures may be used instead of the tubular structures shown in Figure 1 on Page 5 and Figure 2 on Page 6. 2 Gate location, roadway and inside substation arrangement may vary, depending on the direction of entry for the access road.

055103 Page 4 of 7 Rev. #01: 01-30-06

Engineering Standard Electric Planning Manual Greenbook Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines

60 or 70 kV Station for Overhead Service

To Customer’s Low Voltage Power Equipment

From PG&E’s High Voltage Line

70’ 0” Approx.

10

10
10
10 C

17
9 9
14 14

and Fuse Structure

To Customer’s Low Voltage Power Equipment

From PG&E’s High Voltage Line

Section A-A

Rev. #01: 01-30-06 055103 Page 5 of 7

Engineering Standard Electric Planning Manual Greenbook Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines

115 kV Station for Underground Service

To Customer’s Low Voltage Power Equipment

From PG&E’s High Voltage Line

B

13 9 Ground Rod
10
10
10
14 Control
Bldg.
17 17

From PG&E’s High Voltage Line

To Customer’s Low Voltage Power Equipment

Section B−B

055103 Page 6 of 7 Rev. #01: 01-30-06

Engineering Standard Electric Planning Manual Greenbook Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines

Revision Notes

Revision 01 has the following changes:

  1. Updated the “References” section on Page 4.

Rev. #01: 01-30-06 055103 Page 7 of 7

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook EMWP

Prepared by: ABB1

This document is also included in the following manuals:Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)

Electric Meter Work Practices

Purpose and Scope

This document provides a guide for determining space requirements and illustrates recommended layouts to accommodate three-phase, loop, or radial circuit, pad-mounted transformers installed in a dry room located inside or adjacent to a customer’s building. The room is usually provided by the customer.

General Information

  1. A dry room is one which:

A. Is located at/or above ground level, or

B. Is located below ground level, and

(1) Is completely contained within the building’s foundation.

(2) Is so designed that flood water entry is prevented.

(3) Has sufficient gravity drainage to prevent water retention.

  1. It is best that the doorway of the room opens to the street. However, the doors may open to a parking area or driveway provided that access is maintained from the street to the doors. The access path must be at least 11 feet wide.

  2. The room must be large enough to accommodate a transformer capable of supplying 100% of the main switch capacity. Enlarging a transformer room is very costly and sometimes entirely impractical.

  3. Eight feet of clear level space must be provided in front of the transformer cabinet, in order that the fuses and cables can be safely operated with live-line tools.

5. Ventilation design must conform to the requirements in Document 054163. The location of the intake and exhaust vent shafts may be adjusted to meet local conditions. The vents shall NOT be oriented in such a manner that would allow the Intake Fan to recirculate the Hot Exhaust Air. Inside the room cross ventilation must always be maintained between the intake and exhaust. The Applicant HVAC Mechanical Engineer must prepare the calculations to PG&E with the Design Package. Service Planning and Estimating are not required to review these calculations. The calculations must have a California State Professional Engineers Stamp affixed to the calculations assuring they were prepared by a competent professional familiar with ventilation requirements identified in Document 054163.

  1. The room itself must conform to all applicable state and local codes. The applicant is responsible for installing and maintaining any items such as sprinklers, smoke alarms, etc. that may be required by local authorities.

  2. It is preferable to have access to a room via an outside entrance which would be accessible to authorized Company employees at all times (i.e., from parking lot, loading ramp, street, etc.). However, should it become necessary to accept access through the customer’s premises, arrangements should be made to ensure that complete access for both equipment and authorized Company employees is available whenever required. Inadequate access will result in prolonged outages.

Rev. #12: 12-01-19 057521 Page 1 of 20

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

  1. The room shall be designed with adequate security to permit entrance only to authorized personnel.

  2. Cable troughs rather than conduits are required to allow the cables to be pulled out of the way of jacking and rolling the transformer out of the room.

  3. The applicant will own and construct the transformer room and any associated substructures on its property. This provision is in accordance with the rates filed with and approved by the CPUC. The room must meet all city, county, and state codes and regulations, as well as PG&E’s requirements for the safe installation, removal, and operation of its equipment.

  4. PG&E must review and approve a not-for-construction drawing prior to the construction of the vault. Once approved, PG&E will forward it and the associated specification sheets to the applicant for his/her use and distribution to the general contractor. It is the responsibility of the applicant to notify PG&E of any design or construction changes. PG&E must review and approve these changes before proceeding with the design or construction of the vault.

wing prior to the construction of the vault. Once approved, PG&E will forward it and the associated specification sheets to the applicant for his/her use and distribution to the general contractor. It is the responsibility of the applicant to notify PG&E of any design or construction changes. PG&E must review and approve these changes before proceeding with the design or construction of the vault.

  1. It is the applicant’s responsibility to contact PG&E’s inspection department prior to the construction of the transformer room. PG&E will inspect the transformer room as it is being built to assure the proper installation and placement of various items required to ensure a safe working environment. PG&E equipment will not be installed until the room has been completed and the work area is clear of any debris. PG&E’s inspection department must accept and sign off the room before energizing the new service. To schedule a room inspection appointment, please call____________.

  2. No foreign objects shall pass through or terminate in the transformer room. The use of surface-mounted rigid electrical conduits and outlet boxes is allowed provided they are waterproof and approved by the local authorities.

  3. Provide 3-hour fire rated concrete reinforced structure, including cable troughs, room walls, floor, and ceiling. Cover all exposed structural steel with 3-hour fire rated flameproof material. Seal off all openings to the interior of the building with approved caulking material. Intake and exhaust vents must be constructed with 3-hour fire dampers.

  4. The doors must:

A. Be 3-hour fire rated.

B. Be capable of being secured while in the open position.

C. Open sufficiently so that within 2’ of the 8’ 6” doorway the path for the transformer installation and removal must open up to at least 11’ wide.

D. Open sufficiently so as not to impede the sidewalk.

  1. Provide a minimum of two lights with a minimum 30 foot-candle illumination. Provide convenient GFI duplex receptacles. Maintain 60 inches above the finish floor for receptacles and switches. Provide power for all equipment from the applicant’s emergency power supply. Also see Document 054438.

  2. Provide pulling eyes (Code 36-2029) with a working load of 10,000 lbs. times a safety factor of two. Install the pulling eyes 36” above the finished floor with 4 inches of clear space between the steel and wall surface. Center them directly across from the door opening and the end of each cable trough. Submit an engineered wet stamped drawing to PG&E for its approval for any pulling eye deviations. Also see Document 09219.

  3. The room floor must support the total weight of PG&E equipment plus 2,000 lbs. and maintain a minimum of 10 feet ceiling height for moving the equipment.

  4. A Transformer Room Agreement must be signed and recorded for an Indoor Transformer Room Installation. Reference the template at [https://sps.utility.pge.com/sites/ssenvironmental/lm/lrsupport/land right toolkit/land](https://sps.utility.pge.com/sites/SSEnvironmental/LM/LRSupport/Land Rights Toolkit/Land Document Templates/Easement Document Templates/Transformer Room Agreement.doc) [document templates/easement document templates/transformer room agreement.doc](https://sps.utility.pge.com/sites/SSEnvironmental/LM/LRSupport/Land Rights Toolkit/Land Document Templates/Easement Document Templates/Transformer Room Agreement.doc)

  5. The secondary configuration depends on the main switch size and whether or not there is an associated fire pump main.

A. For main service of up to 7 sets of cables per Greenbook Document 063928 without a separate fire pump service, or where the combined mains of the service and fire pump do not require more than 8 cables, the secondary are cables in an open trench to conduits stubbed through the right-side or rear vault wall (see Figure 1 on Page 5). Alternately, the cables may terminate on a wall-mounted bus stub.

057521 Page 2 of 20 Rev. #12: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

B. For main service of up to 7 sets of cables per Greenbook Document 063928 with a separate fire pump service, the secondary is made of cables in an open trench to wall-mounted bus stubs that feed adjacent stubs to the fire pump (see Figure 4 on Page 8).

C. For bus duct main service per Greenbook Document 063928 without a separate fire pump service, the applicant provides a bus duct termination through the vault wall (see Figure 7 on Page 11).

D. For bus duct main service per Greenbook Document 063928 with a separate fire pump service, the secondary is made of cables in an applicant-installed cable tray from the side of the transformer to wall-mounted bus stubs that then also feed an adjacent bus stub to the fire pump (see Figure 9 on Page 13).

E. The fire pump main must be dedicated to emergency equipment and must not exceed 2,000 A. With combined services, running the emergency equipment will require curtailing regular load. There shall be a permanent sign on or near the fire pump controls indicating that regular load must be curtailed when running the fire pumps.

  1. Provide a ______CFM forced air ventilation system from outside air via direct-drive, AMCA Type A or B spark resistant, fan with an explosion proof motor (intake) and high exhaust vent opening. Install 1/2-inch mesh screen on both sides of the fan assembly (see Document 054163). Install a remote thermostat sensor at the exhaust opening and a separate thermostat control 60 inches above finished floor. Set thermostat between 85 ° F and 90 ° F . All vent openings shall have a minimum of 576 square inches of opening.

  2. Provide two 3/4” X 12” ground rods with 12” exposed above finished floor, as shown in the plan view. Ground rods are not to be altered in any way and must maintain a minimum of 6 feet of separation between them. Install #2 Solid CU ground wire in a loop as indicated between the ground rods. PG&E will inspect all ground rods prior to covering. Provide tests and documentation for deviations to this procedure to substantiate the resistivity of the ground rods (see Document 060462).

  3. Provide a 6-inch removable sill across all entrances for oil containment after transformer(s) are installed. Caulk all gaps leading to the interior of the building. Provide a Corbin lock set with tumbler (CL3357-N2D-626 or CK4257-GRC-626) for the vault door(s). PG&E will key the tumblers. Provide provisions to lock the door in the open position for emergency purposes.

  4. All exposed metal in the vault must be grounded.

  5. Room to be designed and built as a Class 1, Zone 1, reference California Subchapter 5, Electrical Safety Orders, Article 59, hazardous (classified) locations.

References Location Document

Draw Bolt for Electric Manholes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09219

t=idmDocCustom7+asc&MZ_VL_idmDocCustom1=09219&MZ_OP_idmDocCustom1=equals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09219

Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Connectors/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 013109 Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Connectors/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 015251 Cable Support for Underground Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1 Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028077 Tags for Identifying Underground Cables and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 033582 Premolded 200-Amp Terminations for Primary Underground Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035314 Cables for Underground Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039955 Service Entrance from Underground Vault Using Bus Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041352 Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformers UG-1: Transformers/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . 045290

. . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041352 Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformers UG-1: Transformers/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . 045290

         -             Installation of Loop [Style, Three](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdoctdm.asp?itemid=981910023) Phase,

Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045291 Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 045292

Ventilation of Vaults and Manholes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 054163

Installation of Wiring for Lighting and Auxiliary Equipment in Vaults and Manholes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 054438

Rev. #12: 12-01-19 057521 Page 3 of 20

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

References (continued) Location Document

Terminating Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . UG-1 Services/Greenbook/EMWP . . . . . 058817

Grounding of Underground Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060462 Fault Indicators for Underground Application . . . . . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 061683 Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288 Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial Underground Electric Services 0-600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928 Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063929 Corporation Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 068200 [https://sps.utility.pge.com/sites/ssenvironmental/lm/lrsupport/land right toolkit/land document templates/easement document](https://sps.utility.pge.com/sites/SSEnvironmental/LM/LRSupport/Land Rights Toolkit/Land Document Templates/Easement Document Templates/Transformer Room Agreement.doc) [templates/transformer room agreement.doc](https://sps.utility.pge.com/sites/SSEnvironmental/LM/LRSupport/Land Rights Toolkit/Land Document Templates/Easement Document Templates/Transformer Room Agreement.doc)

ates/easement document](https://sps.utility.pge.com/sites/SSEnvironmental/LM/LRSupport/Land Rights Toolkit/Land Document Templates/Easement Document Templates/Transformer Room Agreement.doc) [templates/transformer room agreement.doc](https://sps.utility.pge.com/sites/SSEnvironmental/LM/LRSupport/Land Rights Toolkit/Land Document Templates/Easement Document Templates/Transformer Room Agreement.doc)

Table 1 Bill of Materials for Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformer
Item Description Code Document
1 Transformer, Pad-Mounted, Three-Phase (as required) 045290
2 Cable, Insulated, Single-Conductor, Primary, 1/0 Minimum 039955
3 Cable, Insulated, Single-Conductor, 600 V (size as required) 039955
4 Conduit (size as required) (by applicant) 062288
5 Ventilating Fan (as required) (by applicant) 054163
6 Lighting (as required) (by applicant) 054438
7 Wire, Ground, Number 2 AWG Solid, Bare Copper (by applicant) 290074
8 Terminal Connector, Compression-Type 015251
9 Connector, Ground Terminal 303214 303214
10 Clamp, Ground Rod, 3/4” 187017 013109
11 Anchor Bolt, 3-1/2” x 1/2” 190445
12 Padlock, Corporation (for exterior locking) 016583 068200
13 Cable Sectionalizing Tag 033582
14 Phase Description Tag
15 High Voltage/Maintain 8’ Clearance Label 621599 621599
16 Transformer Number Decal
17 Ground Rod, 3/4” x 12’ (by applicant) 010098 013109
18 Grating, Steel, Removable, Non-Skid (see Detail D on Page 18) (by applicant)
19 Duct Spacers (see Detail C on Page 18) (by applicant)
20 Insulated Bushing Well Plug 300486 035314
21 Spare Concentric Wire
22 Connector, Ground Terminal 302314
23 200-Amp Primary Termination: Load-Break or Dead-Break Elbow Receptacles 035314
24 200-Amp Bushing Insert: Load-Break (300481) or Dead-Break (303920)

057521 Page 4 of 20 Rev. #12: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for Up to 7 Service Cables

Alternate Secondary Pulling Eye Conduits up to 8−5”

Pulling Eye

Primary 2-4”

12’ Ground Rod With 12” Exposed

Primary 2-4” (alternate)

Note

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in 15”
Primary Trough
D 18”
Alternate
Secondary
Trough
Ground Wires
as Required per
Document
060462
E
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Alternate
Secondary
Trough

E
Ground Wires
as Required per
Document
060462
Alternate
Secondary
Trough

E
Ground Wires
as Required per
Document
060462
Alternate
Secondary
Trough

E
Ground Wires
as Required per
Document
060462
Alternate
Secondary
Trough

E
Ground Wires
as Required per
Document
060462
Alternate
Secondary
Trough

E
Ground Wires
as Required per
Document
060462
Alternate
Secondary
Trough

E
Ground Wires
as Required per
Document
060462
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough

15”
D
18”
Groun
as Re
Docu
06046
E
d Wires
quired per
ment
2
E
d Wires
quired per
ment
2
E
d Wires
quired per
ment
2
Secondary
Conduits
up to 8-5”
(see Note 20
on Page 2)
GFI Duplex
Receptacle
(see Note 16
on Page 2)
Pulling Eye
A
1
96
42”


42”
21”
20”
17”
16”
36”Min
22”
E
D
19”
42”


42”
21”
20”
17”
16”
36”Min
22”
E
D
19”
42”


42”
21”
20”
17”
16”
36”Min
22”
E
D
19”
1”
0”
17”
1”
0”
17”
1”
0”
17”
1”
0”
17”
42”


42”
21”
20”
17”
16”
36”Min
22”
E
D
19”
42”


42”
21”
20”
17”
16”
36”Min
22”
E
D
19”
3 6” Min Min Min 0”
0”
0”
0”
0”
0”
S
No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
6” High Removable
Sill (see Note 23
on Page 3)

Min
90”

Min
S
Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in 15”
Primary Trough
D 18”
Alternate
Secondary
Trough
Ground Wires
as Required per
Document
060462
E
S
No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
6” High Removable
Sill (see Note 23
on Page 3)

Min
90”

Min
S
  1. Primary may also be routed to back wall of vault. Primary may not be routed from primary section of transformer to the back wall underneath the transformer.

Rev. #12: 12-01-19 057521 Page 5 of 20

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for Up to 7 Service Cables (continued)

Style IIE Bayonet Load-Break Oil Fuse

Secondary Neutral Grounding (see Document 060462)

4

21 OFF
ON
12
21 22
20
9
7

21
12
ON
OFF
7
9
20
21 22
21
12
ON
OFF
7
9
20
21 22
21
12
ON
OFF
7
9
20
21 22
21
12
ON
OFF
7
9
20
21 22
21
12
ON
OFF
7
9
20
21 22

See Detail H on Page 20

Ground Wires

Section A−A

Figure 2 Transformer Installed

Front View For Up to 8 Sets of Service Cables (radial primary installation shown)

057521 Page 6 of 20 Rev. #12: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for Up to 7 Service Cables (continued)

Insulated Bus Support

Duct Spacer

Figure 3 Alternate Secondary Cable Trench End for Bus Duct Termination Side View

(see Details D, E, F on Page 19)

Rev. #12: 12-01-19 057521 Page 7 of 20

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for up to 8 Service Cables with Separate Fire Pump

Pulling Eye

Primary 2-4”

21
20”

12’ Ground Rod With 12” Exposed

Primary 2-4” (alternate)

Notes

Fire Pump Bus Termination (see Figure 5 on Page 9 and Figure 3 on Page 7)
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
12’ Ground Rod
With 12” Exposed
42
10
17
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
Pulling Eye
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad
Ground Wire in
Primary Trough
21”
15”
18”
E
D

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17)
E GFI Duplex
Receptacle
(see Note 16
on Page 2)
Pulling Eye
1
96”
Main Service
Bus Termination
(see Figure 5 on Page 9
and Figure 3 on Page 7)
42”

3
D
42”

3
D
42”

3
D
42”

E
42”

E
42”

E
42”

3
D
42”

3
D
3 6” Min Min Min Min
42”

3
D
42”
42”
42”
42”
42”
42”
42”
42”

3
D
42”
90” 90” 90” 90” 90”
S
No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
6” High
Sill (see
on Page

Min
S
No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
6” High
Sill (see
on Page

Min
S
No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
6” High
Sill (see
on Page

Min
S
No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
6” High
Sill (see
on Page

Min
S
Removable
Note 23
3)

Min
S
Removable
Note 23
3)

Min
S
Removable
Note 23
3)

Min
S
No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
6” High
Sill (see
on Page

Min
  1. Primary may also be routed to back wall of vault. Primary may not be routed from primary section of transformer to the back wall underneath the transformer.

  2. All exposed grounded metal bolts within 10” of bus bars shall be suitably insulated.

  3. Barrier is not needed if firestop supports the bus and is smoke proof.

057521 Page 8 of 20 Rev. #12: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for up to 8 Service Cables with Separate Fire Pump (continued)

Bus Bar Support and Smokeproof Barrier (furnished by customer)

Vault Wall

To Fire Pump Switchgear

To Main Switchgear

Figure 5 Service Connection − Top View (see Details D, E, F on Page 19)

Rev. #12: 12-01-19 057521 Page 9 of 20

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for up to 8 Service Cables with Separate Fire Pump (continued)

To Customer’s Fire Pump Switchgear

4-Sets 4-Sets 2-Deep 8-Deep

To Customer’s Main Switchgear

To Transformer

057521 Page 10 of 20 Rev. #12: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for Bus Duct with no Separate Fire Pump

Pulling Eye

2-4”

3 6”Min 6”Min
E
2 1” 17” 17”

12’ Ground

Exposed

Primary 2-4”

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B Imaginary Line for
on Page 17) Transformer Pad
Ground Wires as
Required per
Document 060462
Ground Wire in 15”
Primary Trough
E
D 18”
21”
D 36”Min
17” E
19”
22” 16” 20” 23”−24”
42” 90” 48”


S
No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
6” High Removable
Sill (see Note 23
on Page 3)

Min


Min
S

Note

  1. Primary may also be routed to back wall of vault. Primary may not be routed from primary section of transformer to the back wall underneath the transformer.

Rev. #12: 12-01-19 057521 Page 11 of 20

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for Bus Duct with no Separate Fire Pump (continued)

Bus Duct Termination Box

Customer Feeder X0 X1X2 X3 Code 019645 Bus Duct

No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
Secondar
Secondar
Secondar
Secondar
Secondar
Secondar
Secondar
Secondar
Secondar
Secondar
Secondar

Compartment

Detail A Top View − Bus Termination

21 OFF
ON
12
20 21 22
7

21
12
ON
OFF
7
20
21 22
8
9
24”
Min.

Note : See Document 063929 for bus duct termination box details

See Detail H on Page 20

Figure 8 Bus Duct Termination

057521 Page 12 of 20 Rev. #12: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for Cable Tray Service with a Separate Fire Pump

Fire Pump Bus Termination (see Figure 5 on Page 9 and Figure 3 on Page 7)

Primary 2-4”

12’ Ground Rod With 12” Exposed

2-4”

Note

Ground Wire Pulling Eye
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B
on Page 17) Imaginary Line for
Transformer Pad
Secondary Ground Terminal GFI Duplex
Connections Required in Receptacle
Document 060462 (see Note 16 on
Ground Wire in Page 2)
Primary Trough
D 18”
D 36”Min
19” Cable Tray
22” 16”
42”
90”
Min.
No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
6” High Removable Sill
(see Note 23 on Page 3)
S
S
D
D 36”Min 36”Min
42”
42”
42”
42”
42”
90” 90” 90”
Min.
S
Min.
S
Min.
S
Min.
S
  1. Primary may also be routed to back wall of vault. Primary may not be routed from primary section of transformer to the back wall underneath the transformer.

Rev. #12: 12-01-19 057521 Page 13 of 20

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for Cable Tray Service with a Separate Fire Pump (continued)

9 Sets of 1,000 kcmil, 600 V Copper Conduct Extra Flexible, 127 D Stranding Code 294490

Removable

on Page 20

Section C−C

Note: Cable tray shall be vented, with rollers, minimum of 36” wide and 3-1/2” deep.

Figure 10 3,000 A − 4,000 A Pad-Mounted Service Cable Enclosure With Fire Pump

057521 Page 14 of 20 Rev. #12: 12-01-19

Forced Air Details

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Exhaust Duct

Exhaust Air Flow

T
S
CFM Air Flow
(see Note 21 on S
Page 3)
CFM Air Flow
(see Note 21 on
Page 3)
T
S
S

Fire Damper (see Note 14 on Page 2)

Single

Double

Intake Fan

Fire Damper (see Note 14 on Page 2)

Figure 11 Plan View − Single and Multiple Transformer Room Application

Rev. #12: 12-01-19 057521 Page 15 of 20

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Forced Air Details (continued)

S
Exhaust
Duct
T
84” Min
60” 60”

6 0”

Figure 12 Section A − A (from Figure 1 on Page 5)

8.5 ft. Min

12”
12”
High
Exhaust
Vent
Opening
Low Intake
Vent
Opening
6” High
Removable Sill
(see Note 22
on Page 3)
6”
9.5 ft.
Min.
16
15
12”
12”
High
Exhaust
Vent
Opening
Low Intake
Vent
Opening
6” High
Removable Sill
(see Note 22
on Page 3)
6”
9.5 ft.
Min.
16
15
1
M
0 f
in
6” High
Removable Sill
(see Note 22
on Page 3)
16
15
9
M

Figure 13 Front View − Ventilation and Entrance Details

057521 Page 16 of 20 Rev. #12: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Cable Trough Details

Min

18 Non-Skid

Removable Grating

2
M
0”
in
17” 17”

Section D−D

Figure 14 Primary Cable Trough

Note: 3-hour fire rated (see Note 14 on Page 2)

20” 20”

Note:

Section E−E

Figure 15 Secondary Cable Trough for 400 A − 2,500 A Mains

Size as required to fit duct spacers. Dimensions shown are for Formex four way spacer for 2” conduit with 2” separation (see Detail C on Page 18).

Detail B Mounting Ground Ring Bus to Vault Wall

Rev. #12: 12-01-19 057521 Page 17 of 20

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Cable Trough Details (continued)

1-3/4”

4-9/16”

4-1/4”

Detail C Formex Four-Way Duct Spacer 2” Duct With 2” Separation

  1. Place one duct spacer every 18” from secondary window edge.

  2. Functional equivalent may be used.

  3. Use one 4-hole spacer with 2” holes for each set of 1000MCM cables, for example: − for five sets of cables each spacer set is 4 holes wide by 5 layers deep. − for seven sets of cables each spacer set is 4 holes wide by 7 layers deep.

Detail D Typical Non-Skid Grating

  1. Size and numbers as required.
  2. Maximum weight of each piece shall not exceed 50 lbs.
  3. Open area must be at least 45%.

057521 Page 18 of 20 Rev. #12: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Bus Bar Termination Details

  1. All exposed grounded metal bolts within 10” of bus bars shall be suitably insulated.
  2. Barrier is not needed if firestop supports the bus and is smokeproof.

1-3/4”

9/16” Dia. Holes

Bus Support and Smokeproof Barrier

Bus Support and Smokeproof Barrier
2-7/8”
1-1/8”
2”
2”
2”
2”

7/8”

Y
2”
2”
2”
Bus Support and Smokeproof Barrier
2-7/8”
1-1/8”
2”
2”
2”
2”

7/8”

Y
2”
2”
2”
C Windo
Holes
nector

8
L
Openi
Caulking
Face of Vault W
Varies
Y
L
Openi
Caulking
Face of Vault W
Varies
Y

Customer’s Service Entrance Bus Bars

Detail E Connection to Customer’s Bus Bar

Vault Ceiling

T o Customer’s Switchgear

Connector

Service Cable Fire Pump Cable

Detail F Section Y−Y

Vault Floor

Detail G

Rev. #12: 12-01-19 057521 Page 19 of 20

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Primary Cable Support Details (continued)

Table 2 Primary Cable Termination Support

Detail H Cable Termination Support

Item
25
Quantity
Description
Bolt, Machine 1/2” x 4”, Square Head, Galvanized
26 Bolt, Machine, 1/2” x 1-1/4” Hexagonal, Head, Galvanized
27 Bolt, Machine, 3/8” x 1” Hexagonal, Head, Galvanized
28 2 Channel, 1-1/4”, Unistrut A-1000
29 2 90 Angle Fitting, 3/16”, Unistrut A-1326
30 4 Spring Nut, 3/8”, Unistrut A-1008
31 12 Spring Nut, 1/4”, Unistrut A-1006-1420
32 4 Capscrew, Hexagonal Head 3/8” x 1” Galvanized
33 12 Capscrew, Hexagonal Head 1/4” x 1” Galvanized

Section Z−Z Alternate Section Z−Z Support Mounted Above Floor Surfaces Support Mounted Below Floor Surface (all mounting holes, drill to suit)

Revision Notes

Revision 12 has the following changes:

  1. Revised language in Note 5 on Page 1.

  2. Add Note 19 on Page 2.

  3. Revised Figure 11 on Page 15 to single and multiple room applications.

  4. Delete Figure 13 on Page 16.

057521 Page 20 of 20 Rev. #12: 12-01-19

OH: Services Greenbook EMWP

Prepared by: SXZO

This document is also included in the following manual:

Purpose and Scope

This document establishes and illustrates the required methods of providing overhead agricultural service of 300 horsepower (hp) or less.

General Information

  1. This document applies to agricultural loads rated 5 through 300 hp, provided both of the following conditions are met.

A. The service is overhead.

B. The load current does not exceed the ampere limitation of the service entrance equipment or PG&E facilities.

  1. Service Request: The customer should make application for service and verify the available service voltage with PG&E as far in advance of construction as possible. The customer should then notify his pump company of the available PG&E service voltage.

  2. Available Service Voltage:

A. Non-residential single-phase loads to a maximum of 7-1/2 hp shall be served at 120/240 V, single-phase, 3-wire.

B. Three-phase motors of 5 hp, or bigger up to 30 hp, will normally be served at 120/240 V, three-phase, 4-wire, but may be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V at the customer’s option and if capacity is available from existing facilities.

C. Single or grouped three-phase motors of 30 hp up to 50 hp can be served from an open-delta transformer producing service voltage at 120/240 V, three-phase, 4-wire, if the customer has a combination of single and three-phase loads, otherwise they must be served at 120/208 or 277/480 V, three-phase, 4-wire.

D. Single or grouped three-phase motors from 60 hp through 125 hp shall be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V, three-phase, 4-wire.

E. Single or grouped motors of 150 hp through 300 hp shall be served at 277/480 V, three-phase, 4-wire.

  1. General Requirements: PG&E shall furnish and install the overhead service drop, meters and metering current transformers. Unless otherwise stated, all other materials shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the customer and shall comply with the requirements of PG&E. It shall be the responsibility of the customer to ascertain and comply with the requirements of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. In areas where no provision is made for inspection by local authorities, the applicable state regulations shall apply. Local ordinances may include wiring requirements in addition to those shown in this document or in the National Electrical Code (NEC). Consult inspection authorities for requirements, city or county permits, and inspections that may be required before service can be connected.

  2. Clearances: All overhead conductors may not be in a vertical plane any closer than 10 feet from any wellhead. The vertical plane is the plane created between the overhead conductors and the ground. Refer to Figure 1 on Document 025055.

Rev. #15: 12/01/19 058087 Page 1 of 12

OH: Services Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

  1. Service Pole: When a service pole is required, it shall have a minimum length of 25 feet (set 4-1/2 feet in the ground) unless a longer pole is needed for required ground clearance or to accommodate additional PG&E equipment. The pole will be located at least 10 feet from the motor or load and in such a position that the overhead conductors and any required guy will not interfere with work done at the motor or load. A PG&E pole with high-voltage conductors (over 600 V) shall not be used as a service pole. Refer to Document 025055 for further information on the requirements for customer-owned poles.

  2. Service Entrance Conductor:

A. The conductors shall be sized and installed in accordance with the applicable requirements of the NEC.

B. A minimum of 18 inches of conductor shall be provided outside of the service head to make connection with PG&E’s service drop.

C. When the meter enclosures shown in Figure 9 through Figure 11 on Page 10 are used, the customer shall furnish and connect all line and load-side service entrance conductors.

D. When metering equipment requiring a current transformer (Figure 12 on Page 11 through Figure 15 on Page 11) is used, the customer shall furnish lugs and connect conductors to the line and load sides of the current-transformer mounting base. The unmetered conductor may be cable, but shall be continuous and unspliced in the current-transformer cabinet and shall be located so as to not interfere with the current-transformer installation.

  1. Service Entrance Conductor Covering for Service Poles:

A. All wires between the service head and the meter shall be enclosed in any of the following:

(1) galvanized rigid steel conduit

(2) rigid aluminum conduit

(3) electrical metallic tubing

(4) intermediate metallic conduit

(5) PVC plastic conduit having a minimum wall thickness of 0.15 inches (Schedule 40 for 2” PVC conduit or larger, Schedule 80 for 1-1/2” PVC conduit or smaller)

All fittings shall be raintight.

B. If PVC plastic conduit is used, it need not be covered. If rigid steel or other approved metallic conduit is used, it shall be enclosed with either 1/4-inch thick fiber conduit,1-1/2-inch thick wood covering or PVC “U” shaped moulding for a minimum distance of 8 feet below the lowest open service entrance conductor. The covering shall be strapped to the pole at intervals not greater than 3 feet (see Pages 7 and 8).

  1. Grounding: The customer shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed, non-current-carrying metal parts. Bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC and local ordinances. PG&E prefers, but does not require, the grounding electrode conductor wire to be protected against physical damage by rigid steel conduit or armored cladding.

  2. Metering Requirements:

A. The arrangement of service equipment shall place the meter and current-transformer cabinet (if required) on the source side of the customer’s service switch or breaker.

B. 125 hp or less: The customer shall provide and install a self-contained, meter socket enclosure, approved by PG&E, for the available service voltage, in accordance with Table 1 on Page 5 and Figure 9 through Figure 11 on Page 10.

C. 130 hp through 300 hp: The customer shall provide and install a PG&E-approved combination meter and current-transformer cabinet in accordance with Table 1 on Page 5 and as shown in Figure 12 and Figure 13 on Page 11, or, as an option, the current-transformer cabinet and separate transformer-rated meter safety-socket box as shown in Figure 14 and Figure 15 on Page 11.

D. Non-residential (agricultural) customer-owned poles are limited to only one meter panel rated less than or equal to 200 amps. Two or more meter panels or a meter panel rated greater than 200 amps must be installed on a panel board construction as shown in Document 065374.

058087 Page 2 of 12 Rev. #15: 12/01/19

OH: Services Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

  1. Customer’s Control Equipment:

A. Customer’s switch and motor control equipment shall be of proper horsepower and voltage rating and, when exposed to weather, shall be weatherproof.

B. The customer’s control equipment shall be selected in accordance with the requirements of NEC Article 430 and local ordinances. Consideration should also be given to installing open-phase and reverse-phase protection.

C. Customer’s switch and motor control cover shall be effectively locked or sealed if the enclosure contains accessible electrically energized parts.

D. When a service pole without an adjacent panel board is used, the customer’s switch and motor control equipment may be installed as shown on Pages 7 and 8. One side of the pole must be kept clear for climbing. 12. Services to Three-Phase Pumps:

A. When three-phase service is established to a pump, PG&E’s crew will assist in checking for satisfactory pump motor performance if the customer or his representative is present. The construction crew should take “Clamp-on” ammeter readings at the service head, or the customer or his representative can take them at the motor control box. If the reading on the “high” phase is more than 10% higher the reading on the “low” phase, then the phases should be rolled to get the readings as close as possible (see Figure 1 below). The set of readings that gives the lowest difference is the connection that should be retained. It is possible that none of the other readings will be any better. Use the “Motor Data Sheet, to record all readings.

(1) Starting and stopping of the pump should be done only by the customer or his representative. Connections can be changed at the transformer pole or service pole by PG&E’s crew or at the motor control box by the customer or his representative.

(2) On 240 V, 3-wire services where one phase conductor is grounded, all rolling of leads must be done on the customer’s motor leads (at the motor control box), not on PG&E’s service leads.

(3) Example

Once water was flowing satisfactorily from the pump, the following ammeter readings were taken:

Connection Amperes

L1 L2 L3

A = Original Readings 60 61 67

B = Second Set of Readings 60 62 63

C = Third Set of Readings 59 62 66

Conclusion: Connection B should be used.

1 2 3 1 2 3

1 2 3

L1 L2 L3

Figure 2 Interchanging Leads Reverses Rotation (for information only)

1 2 3

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

Roll Service

Leads to the Right L1 L2 L3

Connection A Connection B Connection C

Figure 1 Rolling Leads (maintains same rotation)

Roll Service

Leads to the Right Once Again

  1. Voltage stabilizer will be furnished and installed by PG&E. Voltage stabilizer is required on 480V, 3-phase, 3-wire ungrounded installations. Refer to Document 052497.

Rev. #15: 12/01/19 058087 Page 3 of 12

OH: Services Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

References Location Document

Dead-End Attachments for Service and Streetlight Drop Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 015009 Spool and Clevis-Type Insulators−Distribution Lines . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022439 Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025055 Dead-End and Angle Attachments for Aluminum Conductors - Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028851 Voltage Stabilizer for 480 Volt, Three-Phase, 3-Wire Ungrounded Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Meters/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 052497 Agricultural Underground Service 500 HP or Less . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 054619 Cable and Accessories for Secondary Aerial Cable Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 057876 Miscellaneous Hardware for Overhead Line Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058778 Conductors for Overhead Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 059626 Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288 Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH-Services/UG-1: Services . . . . . . . . . . 065374 Fired Wedge Connectors for Primary and Secondary Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066194

tors for Primary and Secondary](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdocTDM.asp?itemid=981530091) Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066194

058087 Page 4 of 12 Rev. #15: 12/01/19

OH: Services Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Table 1 Customer’s Metering Equipment Requirements [1]

Service Voltage 2 Maximum hp 3
Single or Grouped Motors
Metering
Equipment’s
Minimum
Current Rating
(Continuous/Max.
Amps Shown) 8
Type Meter Equipment
Required
Refer to
120/240 V
Single-Phase,
Non-Residential,
3-Wire
7-1/2 hp Single Phase 100 Self-Contained 4-Jaw Bussed
Safety-Socket Meter Box
Figure 9
Page 10
240 V Delta
Three-Phase,
3-Wire 4
30 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 5-Jaw Bussed
Safety-Socket Meter Box
Figure 10
Page 10
240 V Delta
Three-Phase,
3-Wire 4
60 hp Single or Grouped 200 200 200
240/120 V Delta
Three-Phase,
4-Wire5
30 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 7-Jaw Bused
Safety-Socket Meter Box
Figure 11
Page 10
240/120 V Delta
Three-Phase,
4-Wire5
50 hp Single or Grouped 200 200 200
480 V Delta
Three-Phase,
3-Wire6
60 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 5-Jaw Bussed
Safety-Socket Meter Box
Figure 10
Page 10
480 V Delta
Three-Phase,
3-Wire6
125 hp Single or Grouped 200 200 200
480 V Delta
Three-Phase,
3-Wire6
300 hp Single or Grouped 400 7 Combination Meter,
Current-Transformer and Service
Termination Cabinet With 8-Jaw
Socket and CT Mounting Base
Figure 12
Page 11
480 V Delta
Three-Phase,
3-Wire6
300 hp Single or Grouped 400 7 Separate Current-Transformer
Cabinet and Transformer-Rated
Meter Box
Figure 14
and
Figure 15
Page 11
277/480 V Wye
Three-Phase,
4-Wire

60 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 7-Jaw Bussed
Safety-Socket Meter Box
Figure 11
Page 10
277/480 V Wye
Three-Phase,
4-Wire

125 hp Single or Grouped 200 200 200
277/480 V Wye
Three-Phase,
4-Wire

300 hp Single or Grouped
400 7
Combination Meter,
Current-Transformer and Service
Termination Cabinet With 13-Jaw
Socket and CT Mounting Base
Figure 13
Page 11
277/480 V Wye
Three-Phase,
4-Wire

300 hp Single or Grouped
400 7
Separate Current-Transformer
Cabinet and Transformer-Rated
Meter Box
Figure 14
and
Figure 15
Page 11

1 For meter equipment illustration, see Pages 10 through 11. 2 See Note 3 on Page 1 for available service voltages. 3 Maximum horsepower for single and grouped motors is based on nameplate rating. Ratings shown are the recommended values for motors running at full load. 4 Limited availability, consult PG&E. 5 See Note 3.C on Page 1. 6 480 V Delta is not available for new services. 7 Customer metering equipment rated higher than 400 amps, three-phase, must be pad-mounted and supplied by an underground service. 8 The metering equipment ratings shown must not be exceeded with motors running at full load. Customer may choose metering equipment with a greater ampacity rating.

Rev. #15: 12/01/19 058087 Page 5 of 12

OH: Services Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Pole Construction

Notes: (For additional information on the requirements for customer-owned poles refer to Document 025055)

  1. Omit wood block (see Table 3, Item 1 on Page 7) and conduit covering (see Table 3, Item 5 on Page 7) when PVC service conduit is used. Exception: Wood block is required when service weatherhead is metallic and the neutral service entrance conductor is uninsulated.

  2. When the service conduit (see Table 3, Item 6 on Page 7), is metallic or minimum 2-1/2 inch diameter PVC Schedule 80, the enclosure height may be reduced as permitted by G.O. 95 to allow 48 inches minimum meter height from a level standing surface to the center line of the meter.

  3. The customer shall extend the service weatherhead to within 18 inches of the pole top unless otherwise instructed by PG&E (see Note 7A on Page 2).

  4. For notes and details pertaining to metering equipment, see Note 10 on Page 2.

  5. For notes and details pertaining to customer’s service disconnect and motor control equipment, see Note 11 on Page 3.

  6. Customer’s conductors installed in conduit must be in rigid steel conduit, or 2-1/2 inch minimum diameter Schedule 80 PVC plastic on surface of pole.

  7. Alternate location for the ground rod to reduce exposure to agricultural equipment is shown in Figure 3 on Page 7.

Table 2 Customer’s Service Attachment Location [1,] [2]

Metering Equipment’s
Current Rating (Continuous/
Max. Amps Shown) 4
Weatherhead Distance From Top of Pole
(inches)
PG&E Service Attachment
Type
Metering Equipment’s
Current Rating (Continuous/
Max. Amps Shown)4
Minimum Maximum Maximum
200 16 18 Weatherhead
400 (1∅) 3 32 34 3 Spool Rack5
400 (3∅) 3 40 42 4 Spool Rack5

1 All open wire services require vertical rack construction. See Figure 8, Page 8. 2 A longer pole may be necessary to obtain the required service clearances from the ground. See Document 025055 Requirements for customer-owned poles. 3 See note 10.D on page 2. 4 The metering equipment ratings shown must not be exceeded with motors running at full load. Customer may choose metering equipment with a greater ampacity rating for their metering equipment. 5 The installation of extended rack brackets is no longer allowed. Use Vertical rack construction. See Figure 8 on Page 8.

058087 Page 6 of 12 Rev. #15: 12/01/19

OH: Services Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Pole Construction (continued)

31

See Figure 5, Figure 6, and Figure 8 on Page 8 and Table 4 on Page 9 for Pole-Top Construction

See Note 3 on Page 6

Table 3 Material to be Furnished and Installed

See Table 4 on Page 9 for Application

Table e 3 Material to be Furnished and Installed by Customer
Item Description
1 Wood Block 4” x 4” x 6” Long Securely Nailed
to Pole (may be two 2” x 4” x 6” wood blocks
nailed together) (see Note 1 on Page 6)
2 Conduit Entrance Cap or Service Weatherhead
3 Service Entrance Conductors
(see Note 7A on Page 2)
4 Pipe Strap, Heavy Duty, Galvanized
5 Covering, Wood, Fiber Conduit or PVC
“U”-Shaped Moulding (see Note 8B on Page 2
and Note 1 on Page 6)
6 Service Conduit (see Note 7 on Page 2)
7 Meter Socket or Current-Transformer Enclosure
(see Pages 10 through 11)
8 Wood Pole, as Required (25 ft. minimum)
9 Guy Material, as Required. (See footnotes for
Table 4 on Page 9)

Fiber Wood Wood Conduit Boxing Molding

See Note 8B on Page 2, Entrance Conductor Covering for Service Poles

See Note 10 on Page 2

See Note 13 on Page 3

See Note 11 on Page 3

See Note 9 on Page 2

Fiber Conduit Pipe Strap

Pole Pole Pole Pole

PVC U-Shaped Molding

See Note 9 on Page 2

Figure 3 Pole Construction for Agricultural Overhead Service 300 hp or Less

Figure 4 Methods Of Covering Metallic Conduits (see Note 8B on Page 2)

Rev. #15: 12/01/19 058087 Page 7 of 12

OH: Services Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Pole-Top Construction

Notes

  1. See Table 4 on Page 9 for down guy requirements.

  2. When a neutral conductor is required inside the molding, replace the bare neutral with the required length of insulated conductor.

  3. For customer-owned poles, span lengths are limited to 150’. The vertical separation between conductors in vertical rack construction is 8” minimum.

  4. Figure 6, Page 8 installation is not allowed for new construction.

13 16 10 11 12 4” Min. Maintain 1-1/2” 14 19 18

4” Min. Maintain 1-1/2” 18 4” Min.

Maintain 1-1/2”

Minimum

Hardware

Clearance

12” 12”

See Note 1 above

See Note 1 above

Figure 5 Figure 6 Service Drop Cable Installation Aerial Cable Installation See Note 4 above

Neutral, See Note 2 above

8”

24”

Riser Installation 480 V Capacitor Installation

See Note1 above

Figure 8 Open Wire Cable Installation

2” PVC Schedule 40 U-shaped Molding (see Document 021924)

Figure 7 Pole-Top Construction for Installation of 480 V Capacitor Bank or Other PG&E Equipment

058087 Page 8 of 12 Rev. #15: 12/01/19

OH: Services Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Pole-Top Construction (continued)

Table 4 Conductor Application for Customer-Owned Service Poles

Cable Data1 Cable Data1 Cable Data1 Construction Construction
Metering Equipment’s Current Rating
(Continuous/Max. Amps shown)
Span4
(feet)
Slack Span3 Down Guy
Requirement
Pole-Top
Construction
< = 200 10-150 1/0 Service Drop 2 Figure 5
Page 8
< = 200 10-80 4/0 Service Drop 2 Figure 5
Page 8
Above 200
to 400
10-80 4/0 Service Drop 2 Figure 5
Page 8
Above 200
to 400
10-80 397.5 WP Al Open Wire 2 Figure 8
Page 8

1 Larger cable may be required if voltage drop requirements are not met. 2 A down guy is required if construction crosses the street or thoroughfare, or if the pole is not in reasonably firm soil. 3 Full Tension Span are allowed for existing installations and like for like replacements, but not new construction. 4 Span length limitations are based on light loading districts. See Document 059690 for service drop limitations in other loading districs.

Table 5 Material to be Furnished and Installed by PG&E
Item Description Document
10 Insulator, Spool and Clevis-Type 022439
11 Bolt, Machine, 5/8” x Length (as required) 058778
12 Washer, 2-1/4”, Square, 5/8” Bolt Size Washer, 2-1/4”, Square, 5/8” Bolt Size
13 Cable, Service Drop, 1/0 or 4/0 (as required) 059626
14 Cable, Aerial, 1/0 or 4/0 (as required) 057876
15 Watt-Hour Meter, Current Transformer, Test Block, Test Switch (see Note 9 on Page 2)
16 Preformed Grip, Service Cable 028851
17 Preformed Grip, WP Aluminum 028851
18 Insulator, Suspension, Clevis-Type 057876
19 Dead End, Automatic, Clevis-Type Dead End, Automatic, Clevis-Type
20 Eyebolt, 5/8” Diameter x Length (as required) 058778
21 Connector, Fired Wedge (size as required) 066194
22 Cable, 397.5 kcmil WP Aluminum (as required) 059626

Rev. #15: 12/01/19 058087 Page 9 of 12

OH: Services Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Safety-Socket Meter Box

Notes

  1. Refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements book for dimension and specification details.

  2. Figure 10 and 11 are applicable to maximum of 125 hp pump (self-contained) at 480 V or 277/480 V.

  3. 240 V, three-phase, 3-wire service is limited and available only when PG&E’s transformers are of the overhead type, the load is limited to three-phase motors (small 240 V, single-phase loads may be permissible in some locations), and in the future, other customers are not likely to be served from the transformer bank.

  4. Figure 9 below shows a meter socket with test bypass facilities used for non-residential single-phase service, 120/240 V maximum of 7-1/2 hp. All three-phase services require bypass facilities.

  5. Voltage stabilizer, required on 480 V, 3-phase, 3- wire ungrounded services, will be furnished and installed by PG&E. Refer to Document 052497.

Optional Top Entry

Ground Phase

Conductor on

240 V Service

Customer’s

Line-Side

Service

Entrance

Connection

(alternate location)

Load-Side

Conductors

See Note 5

Customer’s Line-Side

Service Entrance

Connection

Load-Side

Conductors

Neutral

Figure 9 120/240-V, Single-Phase, Self-Contained, 4-Jaw Bused 0−200 Amp Safety-Socket Meter Box See Note 4 above

Customer’s Line-Side

Service Entrance

Connection

Figure 10 240-V and 480-V, Three-Phase, 3-Wire, Self-Contained, 5-Jaw Bused 0−200 Amp Safety-Socket Meter Box See Note 3 above and Footnote 6 on Page 5

Power-Leg Conductor on 4-Wire Delta

Load-Side

Conductors

Figure 11 240/120-V, Three-Phase 4-Wire Delta or 480/277-V, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Wye Self-Contained 7-Jaw Bused 0-200 Amp Safety-Socket Meter Box See Note 2 above

058087 Page 10 of 12 Rev. #15: 12/01/19

OH: Services Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Transformer-Rated Metering and Enclosure

Notes

  1. Refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements book for dimension and specification details.

  2. Figures 12 through 15 are applicable to a maximum of 300 hp motors.

  3. Figures 12 through 15 are applicable to wall-mounted service termination enclosures with maximum ratings of 400 amps, three-phase. Termination equipment that require ratings higher than 400 amps must be pad-mounted and supplied by an underground service.

Removable

Test Switch

Bracket

A lternate

Position

Ring-Type Meter

Socket

Removable

Test Switch

Bracket

Alternate

Position

Conduit Hub

Sealable

Covers

Lifting Handles

Threa Line
H



Cond
Line
Line Side
Load Side
H



Cond
Line
Line Side
Load Side
H



Cond
Line
Line Side
Load Side
Line Side
Load Side
b
le

le

le

le

le

le
le
le

Front View Side View

Ring-Type Meter

Socket

Current-Transformer Mounting Base Furnished and Installed by Customer

Threaded Line
er
Re
Te
Br
A
P

Conduit
Line
Line Side
Load~~ Side~~
er
Re
Te
Br
A
P

Conduit
Line
Line Side
Load~~ Side~~
er
Re
Te
Br
A
P

Conduit
Line
Line Side
Load~~ Side~~
r
Line Side
Load~~ Side~~
r
Line Side
Load~~ Side~~
P

Figure 12 Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinets 0-400 Amp Rating For 480 V, 3, 3-Wire (See Table 1, Footnote 6 on Page 5)

Sealable

Cover

Sealable

Covers

Se
C

Front View Side View

Figure 14 Meter Box for Transformer-Rated Metering

Figure 13 Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinets 0-400 Amp Rating For 277/480 V, 3, 4-Wire Wye (See Table 1, Footnote 6 on Page 5)

Mounting Base Furnished and Installed by Customer (base for 3-wire service shown)

Lifting Handles

Flanged Cabinet

d


d


Front View Side View

Figure 15 Current-Transformer Cabinet 0-400 Amp Rating

Rev. #15: 12/01/19 058087 Page 11 of 12

OH: Services Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Revision Notes

Revision 15 has the following changes:

  1. Revised Table 1 on Page 5.

  2. Revised Table 2 and Footnotes on Page 6.

  3. Revised Note 3 on Page 8.

  4. Revised Figure 8 on Page 8.

  5. Deleted Item #23 in Table 5 on Page 9.

058087 Page 12 of 12 Rev. #15: 12/01/19

Greenbook

Prepared by: SXZO

Note: This document also is included in PG&E’s Distribution Interconnection Handbook .

Purpose and Scope

This document describes the requirements for low-voltage (0–600 V), isolating, disconnect switches for customer generation and energy storage systems. These requirements apply to customer generation and energy storage systems that are designed to parallel and backfeed (e.g., PV) into the PG&E system or for emergency or backup purposes only. This document also describes PG&E’s minimum functional and location requirements for switches. A disconnect switch device provides a visible open clearance point when it is necessary to isolate the customer’s generator from the PG&E system.

General Information

  1. Provide a disconnect device to electrically isolate the customer’s generator from the PG&E system in order to establish a clearance point for maintenance and repair work in accordance with PG&E safety rules and practices.

  2. The disconnect switch device must be installed to only isolate the customer generation sources and must not disconnect customer loads.

  3. The disconnect device must be installed between the PG&E meter and all generation sources.

  4. The device must be physically located for ease of access and visible to PG&E employees within 10 feet of the meter. The device must be located in close proximity, or within line of sight, of the meter.

  5. General or light duty disconnect switches typically are installed when the voltage is 240 V or less and the ampere rating 600 amps or less. Use heavy-duty disconnect switches for all applications above 240 V and 600 amps.

  6. The ampacity rating of a disconnect switch must be equal to or greater than the ampere rating of the generator.

  7. The neutral conductor shall not be switched.

  8. Three−pole switches may be used in single−phase applications.

  9. Disconnect switches with an interlock are allowed provided they meet all of the functional requirements. An interlock system allows the switch to be opened (off) by the producer, but cannot be closed (on) until reset by PG&E.

  10. All disconnect devices must have locking provisions that accept a PG&E padlock with a 5/16-inch lock shaft. Keyed locks are not allowed. If the disconnect device is operable without opening the enclosure, the operating handle must be lockable. If the enclosure must be opened to operate the disconnect device, the enclosure must be lockable.

  11. Molded case circuit breakers, pull-out type disconnects, or any other similar device are not acceptable as an approved disconnect switch.

  12. For applications not described, contact the PG&E Electric Generation Interconnection (EGI) department.

  13. Interconnections in any PG&E sealable compartment are NOT allowed without written authorization from the Electric Meter Engineering or Electric Distribution Standards departments. For any questions, contact PG&E’s EGI department.

Rev. #07: 3/25/2022 060559 Page 1 of 7

Greenbook

Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers

Disconnect Switch Requirements

Basic

As specified and in Electric Rule 21, “Generating Facility Interconnections,” and in PG&E’s Distribution Interconnection Handbook, the generating system or facility must have an ac disconnect switch. The device must meet all of the PG&E requirements, as specified in this document.

All disconnect switches must conform to nationally recognized standards and meet all applicable certification requirements. These include, but are not limited to: NFPA 70−National Electrical Code (NEC), California Electrical Code (CEC), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

PG&E-approved disconnect switch models, rated up to 1200 amps, currently listed in both the Eaton and Siemens Safety Switch Cross-Reference Guides, meet all of the functional requirements described below. These guides can be found on PG&E’s Distribution Interconnection Handbook website at http://www.pge.com/dih/. Disconnect switches rated over 1200 amps and up to 4000 amps must meet all of the requirements described in this document.

Functional

  • Manually operated: Operated by a person and not operated electronically.

    • Gang-operated: One switch handle opens and closes all phases simultaneously.

    • Includes marking or signage on the switch that clearly indicates the open (off) and closed (on) positions.

    • Lockable in the open (off) position using a PG&E padlock.

    • Allows visible verification that an air-gap of separation has occurred between the blades and contact points.

    • Has a viewing window, for visible verification, on all pad−mounted (floor standing) disconnect switches. A viewing window is not required, but allowed, on all wall−mounted disconnect switches.

    • A fusible ac disconnect switch is required for generators that do not have over-current protection (i.e., breakers, fuses) at the point of interconnection with the utility.

    • Adequately sized to handle fault and overcurrent conditions.

Labeling

  • Permanently attached signage on the front that explains this is the ac disconnect switch for the generation. Example: “UTILITY AC DISCONNECT SWITCH”.

  • Labels shall be permanent and suitable for the environment and shall be engraved phenolic or comply with ANSI Z535.4. Lettering shall be a minimum 3/8” high and in all capitals.

  • When the disconnect switch is not grouped with the meter panel provide a map showing the location.

  • If a Net Generation Output Meter (NGOM) is installed provide proper labeling as described and a map showing the location if not grouped together with the other meter(s) and disconnect switch.

Location

  • Easily accessible by PG&E, when requested.

  • Located 10 feet or less, in line of sight, from PG&E’s electric meter at the point of common coupling or interconnection and is seen easily from the meter panel.

  • Installed in an approved electric meter room 10 feet or less, in line of sight, from the PG&E’s electric meter.

  • If installed outdoors with the meter the disconnect switch must be at the same grade level.

  • Not allowed on; any floor or level above grade, on a roof, or inside a room or area that is not an approved electric meter room.

060559 Page 2 of 7 Rev. #07: 3/25/2022

Greenbook

Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers

  • When wall−mounted or floor standing (pad−mounted), installed at a vertical height of between 48 inches (minimum) and 75 inches (maximum), as measured from the ground to the top of the disconnect switch enclosure.

  • Clearly marked on the submitted single-line diagram indicating the manufacturer, model type, voltage rating, current rating, and location.

  • If the device is not adjacent to the PG&E’s electric revenue meter(s), a clear map and signs indicating of the location of the disconnect switch are required. If the disconnect switch is not accessible outside the locked premises, include signs with contact information and a distribution provider-approved locking device for the premises.

  • Installed in a safe and acceptable location that meets the same working space requirements as a meter panel. See Greenbook section 5.4.4 Working Space.

Exemption to the Disconnect Switch installation Requirement

Applicants with inverter-based generating systems that are supplied by PG&E single phase services up to 240 volts may be exempted from installing a disconnect switch, as determined by PG&E, if the meter panel that is interconnected with the generation source(s) meets all of the following conditions:

  • Self-contained (not transformer-rated).

  • Accepts form ”S” socket-based (e.g., FM2S) meters (not bolt-on meters).

  • Rated for 320 amps (CL 320) or less of “continuous” current.

  • Single-phase, 120/240 volt or 120/208 volt.

Any generation system that does not meet these conditions must install a disconnect switch, as required by PG&E.

Typical Socket−Based Meter Label

Rev. #07: 3/25/2022 060559 Page 3 of 7

Greenbook

Definitions:

Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers

Backfeed: The energizing of a utility’s distribution system from a non-utility generation source.

Disconnect Switch: A disconnect device that the customer is required to install and maintain in accordance with the requirements described in this document. It will completely isolate the customer’s generating facility and system from the electric utility’s distribution grid. The device includes a visible open, as defined below.

Distributed Generation: Any type of customer-owned electric generator, static in verter, or generating facility and system that has the capability of being operated in parallel with an electric utility’s distribution system.

Distribution System: The infrastructure constructed, maintained, and operated by a utility to deliver electric service to retail customers at primary and secondary distribution voltages.

Generating Facility: All or part of the customer’s electrical generator(s) or inverter(s) together with all protective, safety, and associated equipment necessary to produce electric power at the customer’s facility.

Onsite Generation System: A facility or energy system for generating electricity that:

A. Uses renewable, gas, propane, or other form of energy to generate electricity.

B. Is isolated from the distribution system at the customer’s premise when the utility grid is de-energized.

C. Operates in parallel or not in parallel with the utility’s distribution facilities.

D. Is intended primarily to offset part or all of the customer’s requirements for electricity from the utility.

Open Position: The disconnect blades are separated from the contacts for each phase, preventing the flow of electricity between them.

Visible Open: An air gap must be visible at the trailing edge of the moveable disconnect blades when the switch is in the open position.

060559 Page 4 of 7 Rev. #07: 3/25/2022

Greenbook

Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers

Customer Installed Disconnect Switches and Wiring Diagrams

Detail A

See Detail A

Figure 1 Typical AC Disconnect Switch

Table 1 List of Items Required for the AC Disconnect Switch
Item Description
1 AC Disconnect Switch Enclosure – General or heavy-duty, indoor or outdoor, fused or unfused,
UL/NRTL certified. As required.
2 Visible ON/OFF label.
3 Switch Handle – Manual, single pole for gang operation.
4 Provision For Locking in the Off (Open) Position – Accommodates a PG&E padlock with
5/16-inch lock shaft.
5 Device Label – Includes relevant information (device ratings, UL certification, etc.) about the
device.
6 Operable Door – Allows visible verification of blade position.
7 Blades – Solid or Fused. Allows visible verification that separation from contacts has occurred.
8 Ultraviolet (UV) and Weatherproof Iabel stating “Utility Disconnect Switch” – Placed on the out-
side in the front of the disconnect switch. See Labeling requirements on Page 2.

Rev. #07: 3/25/2022 060559 Page 5 of 7

Greenbook

Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers

Customer Installed Disconnect Switches and Wiring Diagrams

PG&E Service

Generator Lead Wires

Main Disconnecting Device

Customer Load

Disconnect Switch (See Note 3, Page 6)

Generator Facility

Figure 2 Typical Disconnect Switch Wiring Diagram

PG&E Service

Barrier from PG&E Metering Section Net Generation Output Meter (NGOM)

Line Side Interconnection Before the Main Disconnecting Means (See Note 1 on Page 6)

Main Disconnecting Device

Customer Load

Alternate NGOM Interconnection Method (See Note 1 on Page 6)

Fused Disconnect Switch

Generator Facility

Net Generation Output Meter (NGOM) Disconnect Switch (See Note 3, Page 6)

Figure 3 NGOM Disconnect Switch Interconnection

Notes for Figure 2 and Figure 3:

  1. An interconnection placed before the main disconnecting device requires approval. Submit a variance request to the PG&E’s Electric Generation Interconnection (EGI) Department. If a line (Supply) side interconnection is approved, install a fused disconnect switch before the NGOM, as shown in Figure 3. Note, customer cables and equipment are not allowed in any PG&E-sealed section.

  2. Energy storage systems must have an acceptable disconnecting device that is easily accessible, as determined by PG&E, to prevent backfeed into the NGOM while performing work on the NGOM.

  3. The disconnect switch may qualify for the exemption if all the requirements on Page 3 are met.

060559 Page 6 of 7 Rev. #07: 3/25/2022

Greenbook

Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers

Revision Notes

Revision 07 has the following changes:

  1. Revised Note 1 on Page 1 (General Information).

  2. Revised Note 2 on Page 1 (General Information).

  3. Corrected Figure 3 on Page 6.

Rev. #07: 3/25/2022 060559 Page 7 of 7

UG-1: Services Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

This document is also included in the following manuals:

Purpose and Scope

This document shows methods acceptable by PG&E, to be used by residential and non-residential (200-amp or less main service switch) customers when converting existing 2-wire or 3-wire overhead services to underground.

General Information

  1. A typical overhead service conversion is illustrated in Figure 1 on Page 3. PG&E will install cable in a conduit system provided by the applicant. Various surface mount and semi-flush meter socket installations (illustrated in Figure 2 on Page 3 through Figure 7 on Page 4) are used with services converted to underground. The conversion option selected by the customer shall comply with all local building codes and ordinances. The customer shall furnish, install, own, and maintain termination facilities on or within the building to be served.

  2. Local ordinances may include requirements in addition to those shown in this document. Consult local inspection authorities for these requirements. In areas where local ordinances require permits and inspection, these must be obtained before PG&E can establish service. PG&E will install meter(s) after an inspection clearance has been given by the appropriate electrical inspection authority.

  3. When a service larger than 200 amps is desired, the customer shall consult with the local PG&E representative.

  4. Service Conduit and Termination

A. PG&E will install the underground service cable and make the connections at the service termination point in

’ accordance with PG&E s Electric Rule 16. The underground service lateral conductors will be installed, owned, and maintained by PG&E from PG&E’s distribution system to the termination facility as indicated in Figure 2 through Figure 7 on Pages 3 through 4.

B. The customer shall provide trenching, conduit and backfill on his property in accordance with PG&E

’ specifications and pay any costs required by PG&E s Electric Rule 16.

C. Service conductors will be installed in conduit as shown in Figure 1 on Page 3. For conduit size, refer to PG&E Document 063927 for residential service or Document 063928 for commercial service.

D. The customer shall contact the local PG&E office to discuss service arrangements and agree upon the “Electric Service Location” before trenching or wiring.

E. The customer shall provide and install, in addition to termination facilities, all equipment needed to modify the service entrance when changing from overhead to underground service.

F. For conduit type on or within the applicant’s building , refer to PG&E Document 063927 or Document 063928. Also consult local code authority.

G. Install bend in direction of service trench. To facilitate cable installation, only one 90 ° bend is permitted in the riser. If a deeper trench is required, a minimum radius bend, per PG&E Document 063927 or Document 063928, shall be installed to the same depth as the trench.

Rev. #04: 04-15-11 061032 Page 1 of 4

UG-1: Services Greenbook Residential and Small Commercial Overhead to Underground Electric Service Conversion

H. If the trench is used jointly with other facilities (telephone, cable TV, etc.), increased cable depth may be required. Refer to PG&E’s electrical and gas service requirements Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook) Appendix B, Electric and Gas Service Documents: Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide.

I. Size and type of cable, conduit, and other facilities on the load side of the service termination point are subject to local code requirements.

J. To avoid cable insulation damage, the ends of all risers shall be provided with a suitable termination fitting such as bushing, nipple, hub or end bell, etc.

K. Pull termination box as specified in Table 1 on below. Item 6 is for service up to 250 kcmil cable. For larger conductor, size box as required. See PG&E Document 058817.

L. The point where PG&E’s service conductors connect to the customer’s conductors, as shown in Figure 2 on Page 3 through Figure 7 on Page 4, is identified as the “PG&E Service Termination Point.”

M. Item 3 in Figure 4 on Page 4 and Figure 5 on Page 4, may be used only if the service conductor is 1/0 AWG or smaller, and can be pulled from the PG&E end of the service.

N. Customer may install short-radius conduit fitting (i.e. service elbows that prevent water from penetrating the fitting at termination to meter panel). Short radius conduit fittings should not contain splices or taps. The cover also must be sealable by PG&E personnel.

  1. Grounding: The customer shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed non-current-carrying metal parts. Grounding shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC) and local ordinances, except that the grounding wire shall be protected against mechanical damage by rigid steel conduit or armored copper ground wire.

  2. Metering Requirements: Meter will be furnished and installed by PG&E.

References Location Document

Trench and Installation Requirements for URD Cable . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 040686 Terminating Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volt in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817 Methods and Requirement for Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0−600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063927 Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928

Table 1 Description of Items to be Furnished and Installed by Customer
Item Description
1 Option 1: Meter Adapter, Cooper B-Line Cat. No. MARR20L45GRSD
(160A) Use with Customer’s Panel Rated at 160A Continuous1, 2
1 Option 2: Meter Adapter, Ekstrom Industries No. 722B (175A). Specify Left, Right, or Bottom Hub
2 Combination Service Meter and Breaker Panel (rating as required)
3 Pull Termination Box, 8” x 12” x 4”, Rain-Tight, Circle A-W (Cooper B-Line) No. R-9007A or Equivalent (see Note
4M on Page 2)
4 Conduit, See Notes 4C and 4G on Page 1
5 Hub to Be Closed and Made Tamper Proof
6
Pull Termination Box, 12” x 26” x 6”, Rain-Tight, Circle A-W Catalog Number R-90008, or Equivalent
(see Note 4K on Page 2)

1 Fifth jaw accessory, use Cooper B-Line Cat. No. 50365. 2 Reducer hub and gasket accessories for 2” conduit, use Cooper B-Line Cat. No. AW200 and 12750A.

061032 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #04: 04-15-11

UG-1: Services Greenbook Residential and Small Commercial Overhead to Underground Electric Service Conversion

Optional Removable by Customer
To Be Removed
by PG&E
Meter Socket (see Figure 2 through Figure 7 on Pages 3 through 4)
For Riser and Pull Box Detail (see Figure 2 through Figure 7 on Pages 3 through 4)
For Gas and Water Sealing Requirements,
see Documents 063927 and Document 063928
48” Min.
72” Max.
Customer Shall Dig and Backfill Trench
(see Note 4B on Page 1)
Min. Bend
Depth
To PG&E Distribution System
As required by

Customer Shall Dig and Backfill Trench
(see Note 4B on Page 1)
For Riser and Pull Box Detail (see Figure 2 through Figure 7 on Pages 3 through 4)
Meter Socket (see Figure 2 through Figure 7 on Pages 3 through 4)
To Be Removed
by PG&E
For Gas and Water Sealing Requirements,
seeDocuments 063927 andDocument 063928
To PG&E Distribution System
Optional Removable by Customer
48” Min.
72” Max.
As required by
Min. Bend
Depth

Document 063927 and Document 063928

Figure 1 Typical Service Conversion

PG&E Service Termination Point

See Note 4K on Page 2

PG&E Service Termination Point (see Note 4L on Page 2)

See

Note 4M on Page 2

Min. Min.
Min. Min.
Min.

5
on Page 2
6
Existing Surface
oint Mount Meter So
To Grounding
Electrode
4
Conduit Suppor
6” Min.
Ground Line

Ground Line
Conduit Suppor
To Grounding
Electrode
Existing Surface
Mount Meter So
on Page 2

oint
6” Min.
4
5
6

Figure 3 Surface Mount Meter Socket

Figure 2 Cooper B-Line Meter Adapter

Rev. #04: 04-15-11 061032 Page 3 of 4

UG-1: Services Greenbook Residential and Small Commercial Overhead to Underground Electric Service Conversion

See Note 4M

PG&E Service Termination Point

PG&E Service Termination Point, (see Note 4L on Page 2)

See

Note 4M on Page 2

Figure 4 Surface Mount Meter Socket

Figure 5 Semi-Flush Meter Socket

Existing Meter Socket or A Base Meter

Existing

See Note 4K on Page 2

PG&E Service Termination Point (see Note 4L on Page 2)

PG&E Service Termination Point (see Note 4L on Page 2)

Figure 7 2-Wire or A-Base Meter Connection

Figure 6 Semi‐Flush Meter Socket

Revision Notes

Revision 04 has the following changes:

  1. Revised Note 4G on Page 1.

  2. Revised Table 1 and Note 4H, and added Note 4N on Page 2.

  3. Revised minimum depth and radius bend in Figure 1 on Page 3.

  4. Added Figure 2 on Page 3 with new B-Line meter adapter.

061032 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #04: 04-15-11

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook

Prepared by: MZGD

Purpose and Scope

This document provides dimensions, illustrations, and ordering information for surface-operable, primary, electric underground equipment and splice enclosures including frame and cover assemblies. The primary enclosures shown in this document are the preferred enclosures. Precast and poured-in-place manholes should be used only when space for surface-operable enclosures cannot be obtained.

General Information

  1. Monolithically poured concrete enclosures may be provided by the supplier, for any depth combination of body and extension, if the enclosure is delivered “in-hole” by the supplier and the enclosure accommodates the approved frame and cover assembly by matching the dimensional requirements herein. Precast and poured-in-place enclosures shall meet the requirements herein.

  2. Size all enclosures to accommodate the largest size cable or piece of equipment that may ultimately be installed for 600-Amp and 200-Amp distribution circuits.

  3. The greatest cost savings is achieved by taking delivery of the enclosure at the jobsite and using supplier’s equipment to install the enclosure into the prepared excavation.

  4. Design, design loads, concrete, and reinforcing steel materials, concrete mixes, frame and cover assemblies and materials, and construction of enclosures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C858 and ASTM C857 as modified herein, in the Engineering Material Specification No. 53. where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

  5. It is the responsibility of the installing party to check and prepare the jobsite as follows:

A. Make space available for the supplier’s equipment and/or a crane.

B. Arrange for the removal of any overhead facilities that might prohibit the use of the supplier’s equipment and/or crane (if necessary).

C. Provide the excavation in the proper location and of the correct size, depth, and alignment, dewatered as needed.

D. Prepare the excavation with 6 inches of 1” minimum drain rock (1” to 2” is acceptable). 1.5” to 2” drain rock can be used in soggier soil conditions to prevent settling of the enclosure. Drain rock can be crushed or round, but fines should be avoided. Provide backfilling, tamping, and resurfacing to ensure uniform distribution of soil pressure on floor.

E. Provide for waterproofing and protection board where required by Document 072149.

F. Provide the necessary manpower to assist in the installation of the enclosure. 6. Mastic sealant is to be provided by the supplier for all concrete-to-concrete joints. Mastic sealant must be installed for all concrete-to-concrete joints.

  1. Install enclosure body as level as practical, but do not exceed 1/8” elevation change per foot. Use adjustment bolts to adjust the cover to final grade. Grout the frame continuously 360 � to the enclosure. If grade adjustment bolts are used, remove bolts after grouting.

  2. Do not break out the bottom of the sump hole. The drain rock is for leveling the enclosure, not for drainage.

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 1 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

  1. The enclosures in this document are equipped with conduit terminators. Secondary conduits may enter the terminators with 21” to 24” of cover at the entrance of the enclosures. When entering these enclosures with conduit of a different diameter than the terminator, use a swedge reducer (Document 062288) not to be installed closer than 18” to the terminator. New enclosure designs no longer have knockout windows. Conduits entering through knockout windows on existing enclosures should use end bells and grout. Conduits must be straight with no bends, couplings, or swedge reducers for 18”.

  2. Every effort should be made to route all conduits through the short walls of the enclosure to facilitate cable pulling. Long wall entry should only be used when all other options have been exhausted.

  3. Core drilling at the enclosure wall beyond designated knockout window(s) for installation of additional conduits is not allowed.

  4. Pulling irons shall be designed for 20,000 pounds ultimate, with a safety factor of two (40,000 pounds).

  5. Lifting A. All extensions and heavy full traffic covers shall be provided with four 7/8-inch diameter, 2-1/4-inch minimum deep inserts with unified coarse thread, Class 2A threads. B. Boxes shall be lifted using pulling irons in the floor.

  6. Marking A. All covers shall be marked with one “High Voltage” and three blank number ID plates in accordance with

Document 051768.

B. All covers shall be permanently marked on the underside with the manufacturer’s name and the date of the manufacturer in this format: mm/yy. C. All concrete parts shall be permanently identified with the manufacturer’s name on the inside and outside surfaces. D. All concrete parts shall have the weight stenciled on the outside surface.

  1. All bodies and extensions shall conform to the dimensional specifications so as to be fully interchangeable with the bodies and extensions of all other manufacturers.

  2. Custom extensions made of bricks, Concrete Masonry Units (CMU, aka cinder blocks, cement blocks, etc), Cast−In−Place plain concrete, or other conventional materials are not allowed. Install only the PG&E coded materials or custom extensions by PG&E approved manufacturers.

  3. All covers shall have a PG&E-approved, high coefficient of friction (0.65 or better), slip-resistant surface.

  4. The following parts of the frame and cover assembly shall conform to the dimensional specifications and the applicable PG&E standards so as to be compatible with the frame and cover assemblies of any approved manufacturer.

A. Viewport (Refer to Document 066205)

B. Identification Plates (Refer to Document 051768)

C. Replacement Bolt Down Assembly (M040586). This assembly is part of the cover release locking mechanism.

  1. Each approved manufacturer of frame and cover assemblies shall maintain dimensional consistency between all the parts of the frame and cover assembly such that replacement parts will be compatible with that manufacturer’s existing assemblies in use in the field.

  2. Grounding is required for all new primary concrete enclosures. Grounding is highly recommended to be added to existing primary enclosures. For grounding requirements of the enclosure refer to Document 060462.

  3. Drawings are intended to be generic for the various approved enclosure and cover manufacturers. Appearances may vary slightly. All approved enclosures are compatible with all approved frame and cover assemblies.

Application

22. Incidental-vehicular-traffic (IVT) (ASTM C-857, Rating H-10-44, light traffic): For use in sidewalks, paved and unpaved pedestrian areas, parkway strips adjacent to curbs, and any other area subject to occasional vehicular traffic not to exceed 10 tons gross vehicle weight (GVW) or 10 mph speed limits.

A. IVT covers installed in commercial districts, urban environments, areas with congested parking conditions, or any area where it can be expected or observed that vehicles park or drive on these locations with any regularity should consider the use of the FVT cover instead in order to prevent damage to the enclosure.

062000 Page 2 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

23. Full−vehicular−traffic (FVT) (ASTM C-857, Rating HS−20−44, full traffic): Quick−release covers designed for H−20 vehicular wheel load but not subject to high−density traffic with speed higher than 25 mph; locations such as alleys, driveways, parking strips, etc.

24. Heavy full-vehicular-traffic (HFVT) (ASTM C-857, Rating HS-20-44, heavy traffic): For use in streets and all other areas subject to vehicular traffic in excess of 10 tons GVW, but not to exceed 20 tons GVW. Entrance into this type of enclosure shall not be made through an opened gate.

  1. Heavy full-vehicular-traffic (HFVT) enclosures are not to be used to install sectionalizing equipment (including switching devices and automatic interrupters) or transformers, except on projects where a location for an incidental-vehicular-traffic box is not available. Do not install HFVT enclosures in new business jobs unless all other options have been exhausted and PG&E has agreed to its installation.

A. Due to the entry restrictions of this enclosure and the requirement to remove the entire concrete cover to access, the HFVT enclosure may not be placed in a location where overhead obstacles or facilities pose a safety risk when using lifting equipment.

  1. Separation of enclosures from wet and non−utility facilities (Similar to Section C of UO Standard S5453):

A. The maximum practicable horizontal separation shall be maintained between the outer edge of the new primary enclosures and the outer edge of parallel existing “wet” utilities. The minimum allowable separation between the enclosures and “wet” facilities is 3’ with the presence of a minimum of 1’ of undisturbed earth or the installation of a suitable concrete barrier.

B. In the extraordinary case that the minimum 3’ horizontal separation cannot be attained between “wet” utilities and the enclosures, a variance may be recommended by the local Inspection Supervisor and submitted to Engineering Standards for approval. In no case will a separation of less than 1’ be allowed.

C. The minimum 3’ horizontal separation requirement may be allowed as a variance, at the request of an applicant if warranted and the need is clearly demonstrated. The request for a variance must:

� Be made in writing and submitted to the Company ADE during the planning and design phase of the project.

� Clearly describe the conditions necessitating the variance.

� Include a proposed design.

� And, include a mitigation proposal to provide a concrete barrier between the “wet” utilities and the enclosures in the event 3’ horizontal separation cannot be maintained.

  1. Enclosures with drag-off style covers which are also in close proximity to other potential fall hazards, such as other enclosures or uneven terrain, or which are lacking standard support beams, must be changed when doing any work other than routine switching in that enclosure. For drag−off cover replacement requirements refer to Note 9 to 11 of Document 066205.

References Location Document

Cable Support for Underground Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028077 Identification Plates for Subsurface Enclosures . . . . . . UG-1: Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051768 Duplex-Type, Three-Phase, Subsurface Transformer . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051776 Grounding of Underground Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060462 Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288 Enclosure Repair/Replacement Criteria and Replacement Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066205 Requirements for Allowing Installation of Subsurface Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG−1: General/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 072149 Design Requirements for Primary Electric Distribution where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Underground Concrete Enclosures where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS53 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

ge_ecm&commandEvent=D2_ACTION_CONTENT_VIEW&locateDql=pge_document(all) where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS53 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad81b01186' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 3 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Table 1 Enclosure and Excavation Sizes for New Installations of Subsurface Equipment

Application Location Enclosure Size 4 Excavation Size 1
Application Incident
al
and Full
Traffic
Heavy
Full
Traffic
Allowed
Heavy
Full
Traffic
Allowed
Incidental and
Full Traffic
Heavy
Full-Traffic
200-Amp Cable and
Non-Lead Splices5
Yes Yes 3’ x 5’ x 3’ 6” 5’ x 7’ x 5’ 5’ x 7’ x 6’
200-Amp
Junctions
200-Amp
Junctions
No 4’ x 6’ 6” x 5’ 6’ x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6”
200-Amp
Sectionalizing Switches
200-Amp
Sectionalizing Switches
Yes2 4’ x 6’ 6” x 5 6’ x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6” 6’ x 8’ 6” x 7’ 6”
200-Amp Subsurface
Fused Switches
200-Amp Subsurface
Fused Switches
No 4’ x 6’ 6” x 5’ 6’ x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6”
200-Amp
Automatic Interrupter
200-Amp
Automatic Interrupter
No 4’ x 6’ 6” x 5’ 6’ x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6”
1Ø Horizontal
Transformers
1Ø Horizontal
Transformers
Yes2 4’ x 6’ 6” x 5’ 6’ x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6” 6’ x 8’ 6” x 7’ 6”
1Ø Round
Transformers
1Ø Round
Transformers
Yes2 4’ x 6’ 6” x 6’ 6’ x 8’ 6” x 7’ 6” 6’ x 8’ 6” x 8’ 6”
600-Amp
Separable Connectors
600-Amp
Separable Connectors
No 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6 ”x 7’ 6”
600-Amp
Sectionalizing Switch
600-Amp
Sectionalizing Switch
Yes2 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 7’ 6”
600-Amp
Scada Switch
600-Amp
Scada Switch
No 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 9’
600-Amp
Automatic Interrupter
600-Amp
Automatic Interrupter
No 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6 ”x 7’ 6”
3Ø Duplex
Transformer3
3Ø Duplex
Transformer3
Yes2 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 7’ 6” 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 8’ 6”
3Ø UCD
(112.5 through1,000 kVA)
3Ø UCD
(112.5 through1,000 kVA)
Yes2 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 7’ 6” 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 9’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 10’

1 Depth allows for 6” of drain rock, per Note 5D. on Page 1. 2 Installing this equipment in heavy full-traffic enclosures is the least desirable option, and should only be considered on reconstruction projects where suitable locations for incidental and full vehicle traffic boxes are not available. Refer to Item 25 in the Application section of this document. 3 See Document 051776. 4 The 12” extension that is included in the heavy full-traffic assembly is not listed in this column. 5 Installation of a 3’x5’x3’6” enclosure for straight splices is only allowed if no future expansion is expected that would require a transformer, junction, or switch to be installed in that enclosure. 6 1 Ø Round transformers require a 6’ deep enclosure; add a 12” extension to the standard enclosure.

062000 Page 4 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Notes

  1. Existing 3’ x 5’ (#5) enclosure with minimum 36” depth will continue to be allowed when:

A. Replacing existing 200-Amp splice junction, and equipment.

B. Converting existing 200-Amp splices to a 200-Amp junction.

  1. When intercepting existing 200-Amp primary cable to install 200-Amp equipment, the installation of a 3’ x 5’ (#5) enclosure will only be allowed if there is no physical space for the installation of a 4’ x 6’ 6” (#6) enclosure and all other design alternatives have been exhausted. However, installation of 167 kVA single phase transformers requires a 4’ x 6’ 6” (#6) enclosure.

  2. The installation of new 200-Amp junction and equipment is not allowed in new 3’ x 5’ (#5) primary enclosure for new PG&E job estimates or Applicant Design (AD) estimates.

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 5 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5) Complete Enclosure Assemblies (incidental transformer cover shown)

Figure 1 Isometric View of 3’ x 5’ Enclosure Assembly (not to scale)

Table 2 Complete Enclosure Assembly (for 200-Amp distribution)

Application Enclosure Size Type of Traffic Loading Type of Cover 2 Code 1
Splice Box 3’ x 5’ x 3’ 6” Incidental Quick-Release
Aluminum
025601
Splice Box 3’ x 5’ x 3’ 6” Full-Traffic Quick-Release
Steel
041668
Splice Box 3’ x 5’ x 4’ 6” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041612
Splice Box 3’ x 5’ x 4’ 6” Incidental Quick-Release
Aluminum
040334
Splice Box 3’ x 5’ x 4’ 6” Full-Traffic Quick-Release
Steel
041669
Splice Box 3’ x 5’ x 5’ 6” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 040327

1 Code includes body, frame, and cover assembly. The heavy full-traffic assembly also includes a 12” extension. When extra depth is required, order additional extension from Table 3 on Page 7. 2 Transformer covers for 3’ x 5’ (#5) boxes are not available for new construction. Replacement cover material can be found in Document 066205.

062000 Page 6 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5) Enclosure and Extensions

Table 3 Codes for Enclosure Bodies and Extensions (see Figure 2)

Description Code Weight - Approximate (lbs.)
Body, 42” Depth 043361 5,940
Body, 54” Depth 043588 7,060
Extension, 6” Depth1 043197 560
Extension, 12” Depth1 043362 1,130
Extension, 18” Depth1 040578 1,690
Extension, 24” Depth1 043531 2,250

1 Joints must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail A and approved by PG&E electric distribution personnel.

CL Tongue and Groove CL - ”

Enclosure

5/8”

1-1/8”

2-1/4”

11-1/4”
1”∅Holes for
Ground Rod, Two
Places (blind)
12”∅ Sump, 4”
Deep(see Note
8 on Page 1)
6”
6”

Not Required

2-1/4”

16 − 4” ∅ Duct Terminators

1-1/4”

CL ove 20-1/4”
L
ve
20-1/4”
32-1/4”
gth
dth
1-5/8”
2-1/8”
1”

Plan

Detail A Tongue and Groove

4-1/2”

Flush Pull Irons, Four Places (see Note 12 on Page 2)

Mastic Sealant Included with Enclosure Assembly for All Concrete-to-Concrete Joints Below Surface Level

Hole

A

9-1/2”

4 − 4” ∅ Duct Terminators

3 − 3” ∅ Duct Terminators

5’ 9” 3’ 9”

Not Required A
10” 10” 10” 1
CL
14”
9-1/2”
9-1/2”
6-1/8”
CL
14”
9-1/2”
9-1/2”
6-1/8”
CL
14”
9-1/2”
9-1/2”
6-1/8”
CL
14”
9-1/2”
9-1/2”
6-1/8”
CL
14”
9-1/2”
9-1/2”
6-1/8”
CL
14”
9-1/2”
9-1/2”
6-1/8”
CL
14”
9-1/2”
9-1/2”
6-1/8”
4
CL
14”
9-1/2”
9-1/2”
6-1/8”
4-1/2”
x 1-1/2”
3’ 0”
4-1/2”
x 1-1/2”
1-1/4” x 1-1/2”
Hole
1-1/4” x 1-1/2”
Hole
1-1/4” x 1-1/2”
Hole
minators
inators
9-1/2”
15-1/2”
A
minators
inators
9-1/2”
15-1/2”
A
7”
7”
7”
12”
12”
7”
7”
7”
12”
12”
7”
7”
7”
12”
12”
minators
inators
9-1/2”
15-1/2”
A
minators
inators
9-1/2”
15-1/2”
A
minators
inators
9-1/2”
15-1/2”
A
7”
7”
6-1/8”
10”
15-1/2”
CL
18-1/2”
7”
7”
6-1/8”
10”
15-1/2”
CL
18-1/2”
7”
7”
6-1/8”
10”
15-1/2”
CL
18-1/2”
minators
inators
9-1/2”
15-1/2”
A
7”
7”
6-1/8”
10”
15-1/2”
CL
18-1/2”
7”
7”
6-1/8”
10”
15-1/2”
CL
18-1/2”
7”
7”
6-1/8”
10”
15-1/2”
CL
18-1/2”
minators
inators
9-1/2”
15-1/2”
A

Section A-A Figure 2 Section B-B

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” Body Enclosure and Extensions

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 7 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5) Aluminum Quick Release Cover Assembly − Incidental Traffic

Table 4 Complete Frame and Cover Assembly

Type of Enclosure Type of Traffic Loading Type of Cover Code
Splice Box Incidental Quick-Release Aluminum 025604
Splice Box Full-Traffic1 Quick-Release Steel 041052
Splice Box Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041616

1 For application guide, see Note 23 on Page 3.

End View

1-3/4”

See Note 14 on Page 2

70-1/2”
33 -1/4”
4
40-7/
See Detail C and Detail D
3/4” on Page 24 for Grade
Adjustment Feature 1-

1-
4
70-1/2”
33 1/4”-
40-7/
See Detail C and Detail D
on Page 24 for Grade
Adjustment Feature
3/4”
7/

3-3/4”

7-3/4”

Plan Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly

Side View

Figure 3 3’ 0” x 5’ 0” Quick Release Cover Assembly − Incidental Traffic

062000 Page 8 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5 )Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic

7-3/4”

70-1/2” 70-1/2”
-7 /8”

3-3/4”

Plan Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly

Equipment Cover Side View

End View

Figure 4 3’ 0’ x 5’ 0” Quick-Release Cover Assembly - Full Traffic

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 9 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5 ) Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assemblies

Heavy Full-Traffic Cover

Heavy Full-Traffic Frame

4.5” Grated Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert

Solid Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert

5”

Baffle

Figure 5 3’ 0” x 5’ 0” Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assemblies

Table 5 Component Parts

Description Weight Code
3’ x 5’ HFVT, Concrete Cover Without Inserts 1,160 lbs. 040338
3’ x 5’ HFVT, 5’ x 5’ x 1/2” Steel Frame With Adjustment Feature 290 lbs. 040339
Cast Iron Grate Inserts for Transformer Enclosures 120 lbs. 040346
Cast Iron Solid Inserts for Splice/Equipment Enclosures 180 lbs. 040343
Baffle 25 lbs. 360036

062000 Page 10 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Complete Enclosure Assemblies (incidental transformer shown)

Figure 6 Isometric View of 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Enclosure Assembly (not to scale)

Table 6 Complete Enclosure Assembly (for 200-amp distribution)

Application Enclosure Size Type of Traffic Type of Cover Code 1
1∅ Horizontal
Transformers
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 5’ 0” Incidental Quick-Release
Aluminum
041492
1∅ Horizontal
Transformers
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 5’ 0” Full-Traffic Quick-Release
Steel
041493
1∅ Horizontal
Transformers
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 6’ 0” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041494
Equipment/Splice Box 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 5’ 0” Incidental Quick-Release
Aluminum
041495
Equipment/Splice Box 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 5’ 0” Full-Traffic Quick-Release
Steel
041496
Equipment/Splice Box 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 6’ 0” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041521

1 Code includes body, frame, and cover assembly. The heavy full-traffic assembly also includes a 12” extension. When extra depth is required, order additional extension from Table 7 on Page 12.

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 11 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Enclosure and Extensions

Tongue and Groove Width = 27” Length = 42”

2’ 11” CL CL

6”
7’ 6” 7’ 6”
6’ 6” 6’ 6”

1-3/8”

1-1/2”

1-3/4”

1-1/4”

1-1/2”

CL

CL CL
2” 2” 2”

16 − 4” ∅ Duct Terminators

4 Places

4-13/16”

Detail A Tongue and Groove

2 − 1” ∅ Holes for Ground Rods 2 Places (blind)

CL Rod ds 2
2’ 9“ 2’ 9“
2’ 9“

Mastic Sealant Included With Enclosure Assembly for all Concrete-to-Concrete Joints Below Surface Level

2 − 1/2” ∅ Brass Insert with Rod Attached to Rebar Cage

Section C-C

Figure 7 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Body Enclosure

Table 7 Codes for Enclosure Bodies and Extensions (Figure 7)

Item Description Code Weight - Approximate (lbs.)
1 Body, 60” Depth 041567 11,750
2 Extension, 6” Depth1 041569 800
3 Extension, 12” Depth1 041570 1,600
4 Extension, 18” Depth1 041574 2,400

1 Joints must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail A on Page 12 and approved by PG&E electric distribution personnel.

062000 Page 12 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Enclosure and Extensions (continued)

D

6”

CL

7’ 6” 7’ 6”
6’ 6”
6’ 6”

16 − 4” ∅ Duct Terminators

1/2” ∅ Brass Insert

with Rod Attached to Rebar Cage

6” CL

D

CL
1’ 8” 1’ 8”
1’ 8” CL
1’ 8”
1’ 6”
1’ 6”

2 − 1/2” ∅ Brass Insert with Rod Attached to

D
CL Plan E 1’ 8”
1’ 8” 7” 7” 7”
3 − 3” ∅Duct
1’ 6” 1’ 6” Terminators for 3 1
7” 7”
SCADA use only
1’ 8”
2’ 9” 2’ 6”
5 1/2”
7” 7”
4 − 4” ∅ Duct
Terminators
1’ 6” 2’ 6” 2’ 10 1/2”
3 − 3” ∅Duct
Terminators for
6” SCADA use only
3”
7”
Section D-D Section E-E
2 − 1/2” ∅Brass Ins
/
Section D-D
Section E-E
Plan
CL

2’ 9”
1’ 6”
6”
3”
2’ 6”
2’ 6”
1’ 8”
1’ 6”
1’ 6”
7”
7”
7”
7”
7”
3 1
1’ 8”
7”
7”
1’ 8”
5 1/2”
2’ 10 1/2”
4 − 4”∅ Duct
Terminators
7”
3 − 3”∅Duct
Terminators for
SCADA use only
3 − 3”∅Duct
Terminators for
SCADA use only
2 − 1/2”∅Brass Ins


E
D

with Rod Attached Rebar Cage to Rebar Cage

Figure 8 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Body Enclosure

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 13 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6”(#6) Aluminum Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Incidental Traffic

2-1/2”

86-3/4” 8-5/8” 86-3/4”

G

86-3/4”
86-3/4”

2-1/2”

F

Plan Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly

Section F-F Plan Transformer and Cover Assembly

4-5/8”

8-5/8”

Section G-G Side View of Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly Dimensions for Transformer Frame and Cover Assembly Same as Detailed

Figure 9 4’ 6” x 6’ 6” Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Incidental Traffic

Table 8 Complete Frame and Cover Assembly
Type of Enclosure Type of Traffic Type of cover Code
1∅ Horizontal
Transformers
Incidental Quick-Release Aluminum 041092
1∅ Horizontal
Transformers
Full-Traffic1 Quick-Release Steel 360148
1∅ Horizontal
Transformers
Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041541
Equipment/Splice Box Incidental Quick-Release Aluminum 041093
Equipment/Splice Box Full-Traffic1 Quick-Release Steel 360149
Equipment/Splice Box Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041557

1 For application guide, see Note 23 on Page 3.

062000 Page 14 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic

8-5/8”

2-1/2”

47-1/8”

2-1/2” Plan H

Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly

Section H-F

4-5/8”

Side View (open)

Section I-I

Figure 10 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 15 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic (continued)

2-1/2”

J

86-3/4”

2-1/2”

4-5/8”

8-5/8”

J

K K

75-3/4”

Side View (open)

Section K-K

Figure 11 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic

Section J-J

062000 Page 16 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assemblies

Heavy Full-Traffic Cover

5”

Grated Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert

4.5”

Solid Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert

Heavy Full-Traffic Frame Baffle

Figure 12 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assembly

Table 9 Component Parts

Description Weight Code
4’ 0” x 6’ 6”, HFVT Concrete Cover Without Inserts 3,835 lbs. 041926
4’ 0” x 6’ 6”, HFVT 5’ x 5’ x 1/2” Steel Frame With Adjustment Feature 339 lbs. 041927
Cast Iron Grate Inserts for Transformer Enclosures 120 lbs. 040346
Cast Iron Solid Inserts for Splice Equipment Enclosures 180 lbs. 040343
Baffle 25 lbs. 360036

Table 10 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Cable Tail Lengths for Estimating [1]

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” 28’
Horizontal TX Enclosure (Sec. Entrance Side) 26’ Primary/ 7’ Secondary
Horizontal TX Enclosure (Opp. Sec. Entrance Side) 15’ Primary/ 15’ Secondary

1 Cable tail length for 3’ 0” x 5” 0” and 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” enclosures are found on the Electric Design Manual under the Underground 10.10 Section, Table 10 − 4.

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 17 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (#7) Complete Enclosure Assemblies

Notes

1. Swedge reducers are necessary with primary conduit smaller than 6 inches (see Document 062288).

Figure 13 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” Enclosure Assembly (not to scale)

Table 11 Complete Enclosure Assembly (for 600-amp distribution)

Application Enclosure Size Type of Traffic Type of Cover Code 1
3∅ Duplex Transformer2 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 0” Incidental Quick-Release
Aluminum
043371
3∅ Duplex Transformer2 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 0” Full-Traffic Quick-Release Steel 041649
3∅ Duplex Transformer2 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 7’ 0” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041439
Equipment3 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 0” Incidental Quick-Release
Aluminum
043411
Equipment3 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 0” Full-Traffic Quick-Release Steel 041666
Equipment3 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 7’ 0” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041441
UCD Transformer4 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 7’ 6” Incidental Quick-Release
Aluminum
040325
UCD Transformer4 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 7’ 6” Full-Traffic Quick-Release Steel 041662
UCD Transformer4 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 8’ 6” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 040324

1 Code includes body, extension (as appropriate), frame, and cover assembly. When extra depth is required, order additional extension from Table 12 on Page 19. 2 See Document 051776. 3 600-amp non-lead splices, 600-amp switches, 600-amp separable connectors. 4 112.5 through 500 kVA UCD transformers with 4-hole secondary spades will fit into existing 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 0” enclosures.

062000 Page 18 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (#7) Enclosure and Extensions

Notes

  1. Do not break out sump.

  2. Joints must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail B and approved by PG&E electric distribution personnel.

4-1/4”

1-1/4” x 1-1/2” Hole Not Required

Tongue and Groove

CL

1-3/8”

1-3/4”

3”

4-1/4”

Width = 30”

Length = 54”

2-1/4”

1-1/2”

1/2” ∅ Brass Insert with Rod Attached to Rebar Cage

M 4-1/4”
Flush Pull Iron
Five Places
1”∅ Hole for
Ground Rod Two
Places (blind)
14”∅ Sump
4” Deep Reqd.
(see Note 8 on
Page 1)
6”
6”
15”
1/2”∅ Brass Insert
with Rod Attached to
Rebar Cage

2-1/4”

e Enclosure re
CL

0”
4”
2-3/4”

2”
1-
1-
CL

0”
4”
2-3/4”

2”
1-
1-
6” Min. 6” Min.

Plan

Not Required 16 - 6” ∅

” 9” 24”

9”



24”

9”



24”

9”



24”

9”



24”

11”

Plan Duct Terminators Detail B Tongue and Groove
7 − 5”∅
Duct
Terminators
7”

6”
6’ 0”
7-1/2”
30”
7 − 5”∅
Duct
Terminators
7”

6”
6’ 0”
7-1/2”
30”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
4’ 6”
5’ 6”
6”
4’ 6”
5’ 6”
6”
9’ 6”
8’ 6”
9”
11”
22”
10”
Not Required
2 − 1/2”∅Brass Insert
with Rod Attached to
Rebar Cage
3 − 3”∅
Duct Terminators
CL
9”
11”
22”
10”
Not Required
2 − 1/2”∅Brass Insert
with Rod Attached to
Rebar Cage
3 − 3”∅
Duct Terminators
CL
6 6 9”
11”
9”
9”
9”
9”
19−1/2”
9”
19”
23”
24”
11”
7”
CL
9”
11”
9”
9”
9”
9”
19−1/2”
9”
19”
23”
24”
11”
7”
CL
9”
11”
22”
10”
Not Required
2 − 1/2”∅Brass Insert
with Rod Attached to
Rebar Cage
3 − 3”∅
Duct Terminators
CL
9”
11”
22”
10”
Not Required
2 − 1/2”∅Brass Insert
with Rod Attached to
Rebar Cage
3 − 3”∅
Duct Terminators
CL
6 0” 0” 0”
9”
11”
22”
10”
Not Required
2 − 1/2”∅Brass Insert
with Rod Attached to
Rebar Cage
3 − 3”∅
Duct Terminators
CL
9”
11”
22”
10”
Not Required
2 − 1/2”∅Brass Insert
with Rod Attached to
Rebar Cage
3 − 3”∅
Duct Terminators
CL
2” 2” 2”
9”
11”
22”
10”
Not Required
2 − 1/2”∅Brass Insert
with Rod Attached to
Rebar Cage
3 − 3”∅
Duct Terminators
CL
2” 2” 2”
9”
11”
22”
10”
Not Required
2 − 1/2”∅Brass Insert
with Rod Attached to
Rebar Cage
3 − 3”∅
Duct Terminators
CL

Section L-L

Figure 14 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” Enclosure and Extensions

Section M-M

Table 12 Parts for Enclosure and Extensions (Figure 14)

Item Description Code Weight - Approximate (lbs.)
1 Body, 72” Depth 043376 17,520
2 Extension, 6” Depth 041094 1,070
3 Extension, 12” Depth 043415 2,140
4 Extension, 18” Depth 043377 3,210

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 19 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (#7) Aluminum Quick-Release Cover Assembly - Incidental Traffic

See Note 14 on Page 2

8-1/4”
8-1/4
4-9/1
53”

11-1/8” See Detail C and Detail D on Page 24

End View

See Detail C and Detail D on Page 24

Î
Î

Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

53-1/4”
110-3/4”
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

53-1/4”
110-3/4”
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

53-1/4”
110-3/4”
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

53-1/4”
110-3/4”
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

53-1/4”
110-3/4”
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

53-1/4”
110-3/4”
ÎÎÎ

Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
58-7/8”
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

2
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

2
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

2
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

2
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

2
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

2
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

1-3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

1-3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

1-3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

1-3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

1-3

for Grade Adjustment Feature

Plan Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly

1-3/4”

Side View (open)

Side View (closed)

53-1/4”
110-3/4”
53-1/4”
53-1/4”
110-3/4”
53-1/4”
53-1/4”
110-3/4”
53-1/4”
53-1/4”
110-3/4”
53-1/4”
53-1/4”
110-3/4”
53-1/4”
53-1/4”
110-3/4”
53-1/4”
53-1/4”
110-3/4”
53-1/4”
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Pl
Equipment Fra
Asse
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
an
me and Cover
mbly
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
an
me and Cover
mbly
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
an
me and Cover
mbly
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Pl
Equipment Fra
Asse
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
an
me and Cover
mbly

See Detail C and Detail D on Page 24 for Grade Adjustment Feature

Plan Transformer Frame and Cover Assembly

Figure 15 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” Quick-Release Cover Assembly - Incidental Traffic

Table 13 Complete Frame and Cover Assembly
Type of Enclosure Type of Traffic Type of cover Code
Transformer Incidental Quick-Release Aluminum 031830
Transformer Full-Traffic1 Quick-Release Steel 041055
Transformer Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041442
Equipment Incidental Quick-Release Aluminum 040642
Equipment Full-Traffic1 Quick-Release Steel 041054
Equipment Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041443

1 For application guide, see Note 23 on Page 3.

062000 Page 20 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 6” x 8’ 6”(#7) Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly− Full Traffic

110-13/16”


110-13/16”


110-13/16”


110-13/16”


110-13/16”


110-13/16”


110-13/16”


110-13/16”


34-1/8” 34-1/8” 38-5/16” 38-5/16” 38-5/16” 38-5/16” 34-1/8” 34-1/8”
- 7/8”
- 7/8”

4-5/8”

8-5/8”

Plan Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly

Side View

110-13/16”
34-1/8”
34-1/8”
38-5/16”
110-13/16”
34-1/8”
34-1/8”
38-5/16”
110-13/16”
34-1/8”
34-1/8”
38-5/16”
38-5/16” 38-5/16” 38-5/16” 34-1/8”
- 7/8”
- 7/8”

Plan Transformer Frame and Cover Assembly

Isometric View

Figure 16 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 21 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (#7) Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assemblies

Heavy Full-Traffic Cover

5”

Grated Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert

4-1/2”

Solid Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert

Baffle

Heavy Full-Traffic Frame

Figure 17 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assembly

Table 14 Component Parts

Description Weight Code
4’ 6” x 8’ 6”, HFVT Concrete Cover Without Inserts 3,840 lbs. 040340
4’ 6” x 8’ 6”, HFVT 5’ x 5’ x 1/2” Steel Frame With Adjustment Feature 450 lbs. 040341
Cast Iron Grate Inserts for Transformer Enclosures 120 lbs. 040346
Cast Iron Solid Inserts for Splice Equipment Enclosures 180 lbs. 040343
Baffle 25 lbs. 360036

062000 Page 22 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Transformer Laser Cut Cover Assembly (Incidental Traffic Shown)

7 1/2”

4
85” 85”
85”
4 5/8”
32 13/16”
26 Ea. Slots
@ 1 5/16”
O.C.
10 7/8”
7 1/2”
4 1/2”
1/2”
1/2”
18 1/2”
18 1/2”
4 1/2”
4 1/2”
1/2”
4 1/2”
1/2”

10 7/8”
85”
4 5/8”
32 13/16”
26 Ea. Slots
@ 1 5/16”
O.C.
10 7/8”
7 1/2”
4 1/2”
1/2”
1/2”
18 1/2”
18 1/2”
4 1/2”
4 1/2”
1/2”
4 1/2”
1/2”

10 7/8”
85”
4 5/8”
32 1
26 E
@ 1
O.C.
10
10
5/8”
32 1
26 E
@ 1
O.C.
10
10
5/8”
32 1
26 E
@ 1
O.C.
10
10

PLAN

Figure 18 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Transformer Assembly − Vent Slot Detail

1/2”

1/2”

4 1/2” 4 1/2”

1 5/16”

Typ

7/16”

7/16”

Typical Vent Slot Area = 1.93 in [2] Total Minimum Open Area per Assembly = 300.7 in [2]

Note: Although the 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) cover has slightly different dimensions than the cover shown on Figure 9 on Page 14, this cover fits on the #6 body enclosure just as well as the cover shown on Figure 9 on Page 14.

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 23 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Transformer Laser Cut Cover Assembly (continued)

6 1/4”

6 7/8”

8”

6 1/4”
/16”
6 1/4”
/16”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
/16”
6 1/4”
6 1/4”
110 3/4”
53 1/4”
53 1/4”
6 7/8”
6 1/4~~”~~
33 3/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
8 7/8”
48 9/16”
38 Ea.
Slots @
1 5/16”
O.C.
5 1/8”
53 1/4”
53 1/4”
6 7/8”
6 1/4~~”~~
33 3/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
8 7/8”
48 9/16”
38 Ea.
Slots @
1 5/16”
O.C.
5 1/8”
53 1/4”
53 1/4”
6 7/8”
6 1/4~~”~~
33 3/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
8 7/8”
48 9/16”
38 Ea.
Slots @
1 5/16”
O.C.
5 1/8”
53 1/4”
53 1/4”
6 7/8”
6 1/4~~”~~
33 3/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
8 7/8”
48 9/16”
38 Ea.
Slots @
1 5/16”
O.C.
5 1/8”
53 1/4”
53 1/4”
6 7/8”
6 1/4~~”~~
33 3/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
8 7/8”
48 9/16”
38 Ea.
Slots @
1 5/16”
O.C.
5 1/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
33 3/8”
1/2”
33 3/8”
1/2”
33 3/8”
1/2”
33 3/8”
1/2”
33 3/8”
1/2”
33 3/8”
1/2”
33 3/8”
1/2”
53 1/4”
53 1/4”
6 7/8”
6 1/4~~”~~
33 3/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
8 7/8”
48 9/16”
38 Ea.
Slots @
1 5/16”
O.C.
5 1/8”
53 1/4”
53 1/4”
6 7/8”
6 1/4~~”~~
33 3/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
8 7/8”
48 9/16”
38 Ea.
Slots @
1 5/16”
O.C.
5 1/8”
53 1/4”
53 1/4”
6 7/8”
6 1/4~~”~~
33 3/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
8 7/8”
48 9/16”
38 Ea.
Slots @
1 5/16”
O.C.
5 1/8”
53 1/4”
53 1/4”
6 7/8”
6 1/4~~”~~
33 3/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
8 7/8”
48 9/16”
38 Ea.
Slots @
1 5/16”
O.C.
5 1/8”
53 1/4”
53 1/4”
6 7/8”
6 1/4~~”~~
33 3/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
8 7/8”
48 9/16”
38 Ea.
Slots @
1 5/16”
O.C.
5 1/8”
53 1/4”
53 1/4”
6 7/8”
6 1/4~~”~~
33 3/8”
33 3/8”
1/2”
6 1/4”
1/2”
6 1/4”
8 7/8”
48 9/16”
38 Ea.
Slots @
1 5/16”
O.C.
5 1/8”
8 7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”
7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”
7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”
7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”
7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”
7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”
7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”
7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”
7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”
7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”
7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”
8 7/8”
48 9/
38
Slo
1 5
O.C
5 1/8”

5 1/8”

Notes

Plan

Figure 19 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (#7) Transformer Assembly − Vent Slot Detail

7/16” Typ.

7/16”

R 7/32” Typ

Typical Vent Slot Area = 2.70 in [2] Total Minimum Open Area per Assembly = 409.4 in [2]

  1. Laser cut transformer quick-release cover assembly is an approved design for incidental and full-traffic cover assemblies.

  2. Material codes for ordering laser cut cover assemblies are the same as the fiberglass grate insert cover assemblies. Therefore, either type of transformer quick-release cover assembly will be shipped.

  3. Design complies with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Section 30.2.

Details for Frame Assemblies

2-1/2”

3-1/2”

2-1/2”

Grout 12-Gauge Metal

Detail C Grade Adjusting Bolt

Detail E See Detail E Adjustment Bolt Support Bracket Use M041601 Code to Order

Detail D Grade Adjusting Feature

062000 Page 24 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Cement Grouting Instructions for All Enclosure Frame

Grade Adjusting Bolt (see Detail C on Page 24)

Support Bracket

Figure 20 Grouting Incidental Enclosure Frame

Table 15 Grouting Material (structural - Figure 20)

Item Quantity Description Code
1 1 Sack - 55 lbs. Grout, Zero Shrink, High-Early Strength 121016

1 One sack of grout is required for approximately each 1/2” of space between the enclosure and the frame on a 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” enclosure.

Instructions

  1. Thoroughly clean all surfaces of the enclosure that the grout will contact. Use clean water to remove dust from surfaces.

  2. Remove sufficient soil from around the enclosure to preclude accidentally mixing dirt with the grout. Install the enclosure frame and adjust it to grade.

  3. Saturate all grout-contact surfaces of the enclosure with water for as long as possible before grouting using wet rags laid in and around the keyway. The recommended minimum saturation time is 24 hours . Re-saturate the keyways with water before leaving the job. Remove excess water from the female keyway just prior to grouting.

  4. Mix grout in a wheelbarrow with clean water. Do not mix more grout than can be easily used within 15 minutes. The consistency of the grout should allow it to flow under pressure.

  5. Install the grout directly from a shovel onto the enclosure using hands with gloves. After an adequate amount of grout has been applied, use a trowel to apply additional pressure to the grout so that all voids are filled and the grout is completely consolidated. This is necessary to ensure a full bearing surface for the frame.

  6. After wiping off any excess grout and making sure that all voids are filled with grout, cover the grout surface with water-saturated rags. While on the job, moisten the rags often. Re-saturate the rags with water before leaving the job. The water-saturated rags are required to cure the grout properly.

  7. Keep wet rags on and traffic off the enclosure for 24 hours to allow the grout to set up properly.

  8. Do not backfill and tamp around the enclosure until the set-up period has concluded.

  9. Remove the rags before backfilling around the enclosure.

  10. Repair any damaged grout by repeating the above procedure.

  11. Ready-mix concrete (5-sack mix) is an acceptable alternate.

Rev. #25: 03-25-22 062000 Page 25 of 26

UG-1: Enclosures Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Revision Notes

Revision 25 has the following changes:

  1. Update document owner’s name on Page 1.

  2. Clarify Note 5D on Page 1 that 1” minimum drain rock size and the intent for tamping and resurfacing.

  3. Clarify Note 9 on Page 2 to specify secondary conduit cover requirements at enclosure entry.

  4. Add Note 16 on Page 2 to state the alternative extension install with conventional building materials is not allowed.

  5. Add Note 26 on Page 3 to specify horizontal separation requirements between enclosure and wet facility.

  6. Add Note 27 on Page 3 to include drag−off cover replacement reference.

  7. Typo correction of Table 1 that Single phase Horizontal Transformer Enclosure depth is 5’.

  8. Delete duplicate row of ”200 Amp Automatic Interrupter” of Table 1 on Page 5.

  9. Clarify on Table 1 Note 1 on Page 5 that existing enclosure depth of 36 inches minimum.

  10. Typo correction of Table 2 that code 040334 is with ”Quick−Release Aluminum” cover.

  11. Fix Figure 2 Section A-A dimension callout.

  12. Clarify the short wall thickness on Figure 8 Plan.

  13. Correct Figure 8 Section D−D base dimension callout.

  14. Clarify Note 1 on Page 18 to specify the swedge reducers are only for primary conduits less than 6 inches.

  15. Typo correction of Note 3 on Page 24.

  16. Correct Figure 14 Plan and Section M-M dimension callouts.

062000 Page 26 of 26 Rev. #25: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook EDM

Prepared by: MZGD

Purpose and Scope This document provides a convenient reference for the types of transformers that are purchasable and used for underground distribution. The available voltages and kVA ratings are indicated along with the applicable codes to facilitate ordering.

General Information

  1. To conserve space and avoid overlap with other documents, the description of transformers shown has been shortened. Individual characteristics of these transformers such as dimensions, accessories, and protection can be determined by making reference to the application documents.
  2. Application A. Single-Phase: The standard transformer for single-phase service is the Style DF-LB, single-phase, pad-mounted transformer (see Table 1 through Table 3 on Page 5). The 25 kVA through 100 kVA sizes are used for new construction. The 167 kVA size is reserved for replacement use, to solve loading or voltage problems. Where their use is required, several other types may be available with the required voltage and kVA ratings. (1) Chester area pad-mount transformer (see Table 4 on Page 5). (2) Subsurface horizontal transformer (see Table 5 and Table 6 on Page 6). (3) Subway-LB transformer (see Table 8 on Page 7). B. Three-Phase: The standard transformer for three-phase service is Style MTP, Style IIE-LB, or Style IIG pad-mount transformer (see Table 12 through Table 19 on Pages 8 through 10). Where their use is required, several other types may be available with the required voltage and kVA ratings. (1) Duplex-LB pad-mount transformer (see Table 9 on Page 7). (2) Duplex subsurface transformers (see Table 21 on Page 10). (3) Radial dead-front transformer (see Table 18 on Page 10). (4) Style IIC transformer (see Table 20 on Page 10). (5) Style IIH transformer (see Table 41 on Page 16).

(6) UCD-LB transformer (see Table 22 on Page 11).

C. “-LB” designation means that the transformer has the following characteristics:

(1) Uses bayonet fuses.

(2) Has backup current-limiting (CL) fuses.

(3) Has a load-break switch between bayonet and CL fuses.

(4) Will accommodate load-break elbows.

  1. For replacement options of older style transformers, see Document 068195 for recommendations.

4. See Document 072149 for when to use pad-mount, subsurface, or vault-type transformers.

  1. Each transformer code has been assigned a footnote indicating the desired use of the transformer as defined below:

A. “1 − Current Standard Design and May Be Purchased” - these are transformers with the most current type, size, and voltage rating and are regularly purchased and used.

B. “4 − Use for Replacement Only and May Be Purchased” - may be purchased as required for replacements. They should not be used for new construction.

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 1 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

C. Transformers coded with an “E” are included in emergency stock.

D. Transformers coded as 1 are available for use on new business jobs.

E. Transformers coded as 4 are to be used only when required to replace an existing installation.

  1. Transformers indicated as “stainless steel” have all exterior metal parts (unless otherwise noted in the referenced documents) fabricated out of stainless steel or other material of equal or superior corrosion resistance. These units shall be used whenever a transformer is to be installed in the severe or moderate corrosion areas of Document 032911. Stainless steel units should also be used whenever local experience has determined that transformers experience accelerated corrosion leading to early replacement.

062111 Page 2 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Table of Contents

Table/Figure Page No. Types Suitable for New Construction Single-Phase:

      - Pad-Mount Style DF-LB Table 1 − Table 3

      - Pad-Mount Chester Area Table 4 5

      - Subsurface, Horizontal Table 5 − Table 6 6

      - Subsurface, Round Table 7 6

      - Subsurface, Subway-LB Table 8 7

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount:

      - Duplex-DF Table 9 7

      - Style MTP Table 10 − Table 11 7

      - Style IIE-LB Table 12 − Table 17 8−9

      - Radial Dead-Front Table 18 10

      - Style IIG Table 19 10

      - Style IIC Table 20 10

Three-Phase, Subsurface:

      - Duplex Table 21 10

      - UCD-LB Table 22 11

Specialty Transformers

Three-Phase, Subsurface :

      - Network Table 23 − Table 25 11

Three-Phase, Dry Type:

      - Network Table 26 − Table 27 12

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount:

      - Network Table 28 12

      - System Tie Table 29 − Table 30 12

      - Grounding Bank Table 31 13

      - Zigzag-Radial Dead-Front Table 32 13

Types for Replacements Only Single-Phase:

      - Pad-Mount Live-Front, Clam Shell Table 33 −Table 34 13−14

      - Subsurface, Round Table 35 − Table 37 14−15

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount:

      - Style IIC Table 38 15

      - Style IIF Table 39 − Table 40 15−16

      - Style IIH Table 41 16

      - Radial, Dead-Front Table 42 16

      - Radial, Live-Front Table 43 − Table 44 17

Three-Phase, Subsurface Vault Table 45 17

Transformer Winding Designations Table 47 − Table 48 18−19 Transformer Insulating Fluid Table 49 19 System Primary Voltages Table 50 20 Pictorial Index Figure 1 − Figure 6 21−26

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 3 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

References Location Document

Cabinet and Transformer for Single-Phase 12 kV Pad-Mounted Transformer Installation Underground Residential Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 032732 Corrosion Area-Overhead Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: General/EPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 032911 Requirements for Conventional Three-Phase Small Power Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 033705 Single-Phase, Subsurface, Round Transformers . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035313

cgi-bin/searchelslink.asp?server=dmsedm01&System=dmsels01&MZ_VL_idmDocCustom1=033705&MZ_OP_idmDocCustom1=equals) Single-Phase, Subsurface, Round Transformers . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035313

                          [Underground Commercial Distribution, Three](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdoctdm.asp?itemid=981910015) Phase,

Subsurface Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039830 Live-Front, Low-Profile, Single-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 042761 Cabinet and Transformer for Low-Profile, Single-Phase, 6.9 kV Pad-Mounted Transformer Installation Underground Residential Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 042764 Radial, Three-Phase, Pad−Mounted Transformers . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043816 Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformers UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045290 Pad-Mounted Network Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045774 Open Wye to Zigzag Wye Transformation Equipment and Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045786 Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Autotransformer . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/EPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051119 Duplex-Type, Three-Phase, Subsurface Transformer . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051776 Horizontal, Single-Phase, Subsurface Transformers . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060578 Pad-Mounted Ground Fault Sensing for Cogeneration UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062264 Single-Phase, Dead-Front, and Duplex, Pad-Mounted Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 064307 4 kV Circuit Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 068184 Distribution Transformer Replacement Options . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 068195 Three-Phase Subsurface Network Transformers . . . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072137

m.asp?itemid=005249846) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 068195 Three-Phase Subsurface Network Transformers . . . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072137

Three-Phase Subsurface Vault Transformers . . . . . . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072138 Single-Phase Subway Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072139 Pad-Mount Transformers-Style IIG and Style IIH . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072146 Selection of the Type of Underground Equipment . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 072149Engineering Material Specification #86, Single Phase, and Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Distribution

Transformers” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 86 Engineering Material Specification 91, “Single-Phase and Three-Phase Subsurface Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 91

062111 Page 4 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Single-Phase, Pad-Mount, for New Construction

Table 1 Codes for Style DF-LB, 1-Wire (2-Bushing) No Loop Switches With Transformer Switch With 2 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 064307 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA 20,780GRDY/12,000
kVA 240/120 V 240/120 V
kVA Mild Steel Stainless Steel
25 261501 1 262890 1
50 261502 1 262891 1
100 261503 1 262892 1
167 261504 4, E 262893 4, E

Table 2 Codes for Style DF-LB, 2-Wire, (4-Bushing) No Loop Switches With Transformer Switch With 4 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 064307 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY 12,000/20,780GrdY 17,200 20,780
kVA 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V
kVA Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Mild Steel
25 261507 1 261519 1 261511 1 261515 1
50 261508 1 261520 1 261512 1 261516 1
100 261509 1 261521 1 261513 1 261517 1
167 261510 4 261522 4, E 261514 4, E 261518 4, E

Table 3 Codes for Style DF-LB, 3-Wire, (6-Bushing) No Loop Switches With Transformer Switch and With 6 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 064307 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA 2,400/
4,160GrdY
4,160 x 12,000 12,000/
20,780GrdY
17,200 20,780
kVA 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V 480/240 V 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V
kVA Mild Steel Mild
Steel
Stainless Mild
Steel
Stainless Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel Stainless
25 261531 1 261543 1 262721 1, E 261535 1 261539 1 262894 1
50 261532 1 261544 1 261536 1 261540 1 262895 1
100 262043 1, E 261785 1 261988 1, E 261533 1 261545 1 261537 1 261541 1 262896 1
167 261534 4 261546 4, E 261538 4, E 261542 4, E 262897 4, E

Table 4 Codes for Chester Style Specialty Transformers - Single-Phase, Pad-Mount, Load-Break, Dead-Front With Single-Phase Cabinet for Use in the Chester, CA Area. With 2 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (see ANSI/IEEE Type 2(a) per IEEE C57.12.25) − Self-Protected

kVA 12,470GrdY/7,200 − 240/120 V
kVA Mild Steel
50 017414 1, E
100

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock 5

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 5 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Single-Phase, Subsurface, for New Construction

Table 5 Codes for Subsurface Horizontal, Single-Phase With 4 Primary Bushings With 2 (25-50 kVA) or 4 (75-167 kVA) Hot Secondary Leads. Neutral Lead May Be Permanently Grounded. (reference Document 060578 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY
240/120 V
17,200
240/120 V
20,780
240/120 V
kVA No Switch With
Single-
Phase
Switch
No Switch No Switch With Single-Phase Switch
25 2623891 2623951 2624361
50 2623911 2623961 2624371, E
100 2623931, E 0138841, E 2623971 2624381, E 2624391, E
167 2623944, E 2621814, E 262398, 4, E 2630504 E

Table 6 Codes for Subsurface Horizontal, Single-Phase With 6 Primary Bushings With 2 (25-50 kVA) or 4 (75−167 kVA) Hot Secondary Leads. Neutral Lead May Be Permanently Grounded. (reference Document 060578 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY
240/120 V
17,200 − 240/120 V 20,780 − 240/120 V
kVA No Switch With
Three-Phase
Switch
No Switch With
Three-Phase
Switch
No Switch With
Three-Phase
Switch
25 2603281 0272641, E 2611061 2611021
50 260668 1, E 2611071, E 2611031, E
100 2608821, E 0272661, E 2611081 0272691, E 2611041, E 0272671, E
167 2610004, E 261109 4, E 2611054, E

Table 7 Codes for Subsurface Round, Single-Phase With 3 Secondary Bushings, Neutral May be Permanently Grounded. Use to Supply Single-Phase Load. (reference Document 035313 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel

kVA 4160/7200Y
240/120 V
4 Primary Bushings
4,160GrdY/2,400
240/120 V
2 Primary Bushings
kVA No Switch No Switch With Single-Phase Switch
100 2623711, E 2621201, E 2621431, E

(See Table 36 on Page 14 for other single-phase round transformers.)

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock 5

062111 Page 6 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Single-Phase, Subsurface, for New Construction (continued)

Table 8 Codes for Subsurface Subway-LB, Single-Phase, (reference Document 072139 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel

kVA 2,400/4,160Y-120/240
3 Primary Bushings
4 Secondary Bushings
12,000/20,780Y − 120/240
kVA 2,400/4,160Y-120/240
3 Primary Bushings
4 Secondary Bushings
2 Primary Bushings
4 Secondary Bushings
3 Primary Bushings
4 Secondary Bushings
50 2613881, E 2613841 2613911
100 2613891 2613851, E 2613921, E
167 2613901, E 2613861 2613931
250 2613871, E 2613941, E

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for New Construction

Table 9 Codes for Duplex-Style DF, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, No Loop Switch, With Transformer Switch With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 064307 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 17,200 20,780
kVA 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V
kVA Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Mild Steel
25/10 2615471 2615511
50/10 2615481, E 2620471, E 2615521, E 2619141, E
100/25 2615491 2615531
100/50 2615501, E 2620491, E 2615541, E 2619151, E

Table 10 Codes for Style MTP, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 20,780
kVA 208Y/120 V 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 480Y/277 V 208Y120 V 480Y277 V
kVA Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Mild Steel
45 2618971 2619091 2618981 2619101 2619051 2619061
150 2618991 2619111, E 2619001 2619121, E 2619071, E 2619081, E

Table 11 Codes for Style MTP, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA 4,160 17,200
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
45 2619011 2619021
150 2627821, E 2627831, E 2619031, E 2619041, E

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock 5

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 7 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for New Construction (continued)

Table 12 Codes for Style IIE-LB, No Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA 4,160 x 12,000
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 2613971 2614011
150 2613981 2614021
300 2613991, E 2614031, E
750 2614001, E 2614041, E

Table 13 Codes for Style IIE-LB, No Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 12,000/20,780Y12,000
kVA 208Y/120 V 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 480Y/277 V 2,400/4,160Y/2,400 V 2,400/4,160Y/2,400 V 240/120 Delta 240/120 Delta
kVA Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless
75 2614051 2614431 2614101 2614461
150 2614061 2631281 2614111 2631241 2614211
300 2614071, E 2614441, E 2614121, E 2614471, E 2614221 2626451, E
750 2614081 2631251 2614131 2631271 2614171
1,000 2614091, E 2614451, E 2614141, E 2614481, E 2614181 2614501
1,500 2614151 2416191 2614191
2,500 2614161 2614491, E 2614201 2614511, E

Table 14 Codes for Style IIE-LB, No Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected

kVA 17,200
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 2,400/4,160Y/2,400 V
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 2614231 2614281
150 2614241, E 2614291, E
300 2614251 2614301
750 2614261, E 2614311, E 2614351, E
1,000 2614271, E 2614321
1,500 2614331, E
2,500 2614341, E 2614361, E

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock 5

062111 Page 8 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for New Construction (continued)

Table 15 Codes for Style IIE-LB, No Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected

kVA 20,780
kVA 208Y/120 V 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 480Y/277 V
kVA Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless
75 2614371 2614521 2614401 2614541
150 2614381 2614411
300 2614391 2614531, E 2614421 2614551, E

Table 16 Codes for Style IIE-LB, With Three-Phase Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000
kVA 208Y/120 V 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 480Y/277 V
kVA Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless
75 2614561 2614591
300 2614571, E 2614601, E
1,000 2614581 2614721, E 2614611 2614731, E
1,500 2618931
2,500 2618941 2618951, E

Table 17 Codes for Style IIE-LB, With Three-Phase Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected

kVA 17,200 20,780
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 2614621 2614651 2614681 2614701
300 2614631, E 2614661, E 2614691, E 2614711, E
1,000 2614641, E 2614671, E
2,500 2618961, E

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock 5

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 9 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for New Construction (continued)

Table 18 Codes for Radial Dead-Front, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 043816 and Spec. 86) − Conventional

kVA 20,780
kVA 208Y/120 V 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 480Y/277 V
kVA Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless
750 2630311, E
1,000 2630291 2615231, E 2615241
1,500 2630331
2,500 2630351 2615251, E

(See Table 42 on Page 16 for other three-phase radial DF.)

Table 19 Codes for Style IIG, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With Vacuum Fault Interrupter, With 6 Primary Bushings, 4 Secondary Bushings Including Insulated Neutral With Stainless Steel Cabinet and FR3 Insulating Fluid (reference Document 072146 and Spec. 86)

kVA 12,000/20,780Grd/12,000 12,000/20,780Grd/12,000 17,200 20,780
kVA 480Y/277 480Y/277 2,400/4160Y/2,400 480Y/277 2,400/4160Y/
2,400
480Y/277
kVA No Loop Switch With 2 Loop
Switches
No Switch No Loop Switch No Loop Switch No Loop Switch
2955/3325 262702 1, E 262703 1, E 262704 1, E 262705 1, E 262706 1, E 262707 1, E

Table 20 Codes for Style IIC, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA 4,160 x 12,000
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel
1,500 2607891
2,500 2607911, E

(See Table 38 on Page 15 for other Style IIC.)

Three-Phase, Subsurface, for New Construction

Table 21 Codes for Subsurface Duplex, Three-Phase With 6 Primary Bushings and 3 Hot Secondary Leads or Insulated Spades. The Neutral is a Welded Spade. (reference Document 051776 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 − 240/120 V 17,200 − 240/120 V
kVA No Switch With Three-Phase Switch No Switch With Three-Phase Switch
25/10 262122 1 262131 1 262349 1 262348 1
50/10 262128 1, E 262132 1, E 262350 1, E 262354 1
75/15 262133 1 262355 1
100/25 262130 1 262134 1 262352 1 262356 1, E
100/50 262363 1, E 262318 1, E 262353 1, E 262357 1, E

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock 5

062111 Page 10 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Three-Phase, Subsurface, for New Construction (continued)

Table 22 Codes for Subsurface UCD-LB, Three-Phase With Two, Three-Phase Loop Switches and With Transformer Switches With 6 Primary Bushings and 3 Hot Secondary Bushings. The Neutral May Be Permanently Grounded. (reference Document 039830 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel

kVA 4,160 x 12,000 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 17,200
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 208Y/120 480Y/277 208Y/120 480Y/277
150 2617981 261800 1 261802 1 261806 1 261810 1 261813 1
300 261799 1, E 261801 1, E 261803 1, E 261807 1, E 261811 1 261814 1
750 2623271, E 2623321, E 261804 1 261808 1 261812 1, E 261815 1, E
1,000 261805 1, E 261809 1, E

Specialty Transformers

Table 23 Codes for Subsurface Network, Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings With No Ground Switch, No Termination Chamber (reference Document 072137 and Spec. 91) − Conventional, Plate Steel

kVA 12,000 − 208Y/120 V 12,000 − 480Y/277 V 12,000X34,500GrdY/19920
480Y/277 V
34,500GrdY/19,920
480Y/277 V
300 262664 1
500 262665 1
750 262666 1 2626671, T 262673 1 262671 1
1,000 2626681, T 262674 1 262662 1
1,500 262669 1, T 262675 1 262672 1
2,000 262670 1, T 262676 1 262663 1

Table 24 Codes for Subsurface Network, Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings With Ground Switch and Termination Chamber (reference Document 072137 and Spec. 91) − Conventional, Plate Steel

kVA 12,000 − 208Y/120 V 12,000 − 480Y/277 V 12,000X34,500GrdY/19920
480Y/277 V
34,500GrdY/19,920
480Y/277 V
300 262407 4
500 262408 4 262410 4, T
750 262409 4, E 262411 4, T 262419 4 262415 4
1,000 262412 4, E, T 262420 4 262416 4
1,500 262413 4, T 262421 4 262417 4
2,000 262414 4, T 262422 4, E 262418 4

Table 25 Codes for Subsurface Vault, Three-Phase with 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary 600A ESNA Bushings (Spec. 91).

kVA 12,000 x 34,500GrdY/19,920 − 4,160Y/2400 V
2,000 2628891

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock T With high voltage taps.

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 11 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Specialty Transformers (continued)

Table 26 Codes for Dry-Type Network. Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings − Conventional, 65/115Rise Cast Coil, Rotated Layout

kVA 12,000 − 208Y/120 V 12,000 − 480Y/277 V 34,500GrdY/19,920
480Y/277 V
500 2627771, T
750 2627781, T 2627731, T 2627791, T
1,000 2627741, T 2627801, T
1,500 2627751, T
2,000 2627761, T 2627811, T

Table 27 Codes for Dry-Type Network. Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings − Conventional, 65/115Rise Cast Coil, In-Line Layout

kVA 12,000 − 208Y/120 V 12,000 − 480Y/277 V 34,500GrdY/19,920
480Y/277 V
500
750 2628161, T
1,000 2628131, T 2628171, T
1,500 2628141, T
2,000 2628151, T 2628181, T

Table 28 Codes for Pad-Mount Network, Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings (reference Document 045774 and Spec. 86) − Conventional, Mild Steel

kVA 12,000 - 480Y/277 V 34,500GrdY/19,920 - 480Y/277 V
750 260666 1 260655 1
1,000 260667 1 260656 1
1,500 260684 1 260657 1
2,000 260699 1 260658 1

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock T With high voltage taps

062111 Page 12 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Specialty Transformers (continued)

Table 29 Codes for System Tie, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings (reference Document 068184 and Spec. 86) − Conventional, Mild Steel

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 -
4,160GrdY/2,400 V
0° Phase Shift @ 21 kV
30° Phase Shift @ 12 kV
12,000
−4,800
6,930/12,000Y - 4,160Y/2,400 V
0° Phase Shift @ 12 kV
20780 -
4,160GrdY/2,400 V
30° Phase Shift
@ 21 kV
kVA With One Recloser on Secondary Side With One Recloser on Secondary Side With One Recloser on Secondary Side With One Recloser on Secondary Side
2,500 261381 1, E 262578 1, E 2625791, E
3,000 2626961, E

Table 30 Codes for System Tie, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings (reference Document 051119 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Conventional, Mild Steel

kVA 20,780Y/12,000 17,200 V Delta
kVA 12,000Y/6,930 V 12,000Y/6,930 V 17,200 V Delta 12,000Y/6930 V
kVA Without Recloser With 2 Reclosers 30° Lead to 30° Lag Switch
With Recloser on 21 kV Side
30° Lead to 30° Lag Switch
Without Recloser
3,600 264134 1 2626611, E 2611511, E, T
7,500 2619431 2624731, E 2625731, E, T

Table 31 Codes for Pad-Mount, Grounding Bank, Three-Phase, (for cogeneration fault sensing with H ο bushing, 2.5% impedance) With 6 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings (reference Document 062264 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected, Mild Steel

kVA 20,780GrdY/12,000 - 480 V Delta
225 017072 1

- Table 32 Codes for Zigzag Radial Dead-Front, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 2 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045786 and Spec. 86) − Conventional, Mild Steel

kVA 20,780GrdY/12,000
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
300 2630731, E 2630761, E

Single-Phase, Pad Mount, for Replacements Only

Table 33 Codes for Live-Front, Clam Shell, Single-Phase, Pad-Mount With 2 Primary Bushings and 2 Hot Secondary Bushings. Neutral May Be Permanently Grounded. (reference Document 042761 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA With Single-Phase Cabinet
kVA 12,000GrdY/6,930 - 240/120 V 12,000/20,780 GrdY - 240/120 V 12,000/20,780 GrdY - 240/120 V
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel Stainless Steel
50 263002 4 263037 4
100 261274 4, E 263004 4, E 263038 4, E
167 261275 4, E 263016 4, E 263039 4

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock T With high voltage taps

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 13 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Single-Phase, Pad Mount, for Replacements Only (continued)

Table 34 Codes for Live-Front, Clam Shell, Single-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 2 Hot Secondary Bushings. Neutral May Be Permanently Grounded. (reference Document 042761 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected

kVA With Three-Phase Cabinet
kVA 12,000GrdY/6,930
240/120
4,160X12,000
240/120 V
12,000/20,780 GrdY −
240/120 V
12,000/20,780 GrdY −
240/120 V
17,200
240/120 V
20,780
240/120 V
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel Stainless Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
50 263014 4, E 263006 4, E 263040 4, E 263010 4, E 263044 4
100 261276 4, E 263015 4, E 263008 4, E 263041 4, E 263012 4, E 263045 4, E
167 261277 4, E 263019 4, E 263017 4, E 263042 4 263018 4, E 263046 4, E

Single-Phase, Subsurface Round, for Replacements Only

Table 35 Codes for Subsurface Round, Single-Phase, 3 Secondary Bushings With Insulated Neutral. Use as the Power Transformer in the Bank. (reference Document 035313 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel

kVA 4,160/7,200Y − 240/120 V
4 Primary Bushings
4,160GrdY/2,400 − 240/120 V
2 Primary Bushings
12,000/20,780GrdY
240/120 V
4 Primary Bushings
17,200 − 240/120 V
4 Primary Bushings
kVA No Switch With
Single-Phase
Switch
No Switch With
Single-Phase
Switch
No Switch No Switch
25 2623624 E 2623164
50 2623144
75 2623284
100 2622834, E
167 2622844, E

Table 36 Codes for Subsurface Round Single-Phase With 3 Secondary Bushings, Neutral May Be Permanently Grounded. Use to Supply Single-Phase Load or as the Lighting Transformer in a Bank. (reference Document 035313 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel

kVA 4,160/7,200Y
240/120 V
4 Primary
Bushings
4,160GrdY/2,400
240/120 V
2 Primary Bushings
12,000/20,780GrdY
240/120 V
4 Primary Bushings
12,000/20,780GrdY
480/240 V
4 Primary Bushings
kVA No Switch No Switch With
Single-Phase
Switch
No Switch With
Single-Phase
Switch
No Switch
25 2623071, E
50 2620584, E 2620964, E
75 2623244, E
100 (see Table 7 on Page 6) (see Table 7 on Page 6) (see Table 7 on Page 6) 2620604, E 2620984, E
167 2623724, E 2621214, E 2621444 2620624, E 2620994, E

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock 5

062111 Page 14 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Single-Phase, Subsurface Round, for Replacements Only (continued)

Table 37 Codes for Subsurface Round, Single-Phase With 3 Secondary Bushings, Neutral May Be Permanently Grounded. Use to Supply Single-Phase Load or as the Lighting Transformer in a Bank. (reference Document 035313 and Spec. 91) (continued) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel

kVA 12,000GrdY/6,930
240/120 V
2 Primary Bushings
17,200
240/120 V
4 Primary Bushings
20,780GrdY/12,000
240/120 V
2 Primary Bushings
20,780GrdY/12,000
480/240 V
2 Primary Bushings
kVA No Switch With
Single-Phase
Switch
No Switch No Switch With
Single-
Phase
Switch
No Switch With
Single-
Phase
Switch
25 2623211, E 2623031, E
50 2620544, E 2620904, E 2621864, E 2621474, E 2621534, E
100 2620564, E 2620924, E 2621884, E 2621494, E 2621554, E
167 2620864, E 2620934, E 2621894, E 2621504, E 2621564, E

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for Replacements Only

Table 38 Codes for Style IIC, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings* Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA 4,160X12,000
kVA 480Y/277 V
kVA Mild Steel
1,500 2607891
2,500 260791 1, E

(Style IIC and Style llF transformers are completely interchangeable except for the primary fuses.) *See Table 20 on Page 10 for others of this type.

Table 39 Codes for Style IIF, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000
kVA 208Y/120 208Y/120 480Y/277 480Y/277 2,400/
4,160Y/2,400
2,400/
4,160Y/2,400
kVA Mild Steel Stainless Steel Mild Steel Stainless Steel Mild Steel Stainless Steel
300 2612844, E 2612884 2621154, E
750 2612854 2612894
1,000 2612864, E 2621144 2612904 2621164, E 2612924
1,500 2612914 2612934
2,500 2613284 2621774, E 2613294 2621794, E

0

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock 5

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 15 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for Replacements Only (continued)

Table 40 Codes for Style IIF, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected

kVA 4,160X12,000 17,200
kVA 208Y/120 480Y/277 208Y/120 480Y/277
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
300 261281 4 2612834 2612964
750 2612874, E 2612824, E 2612944 2612974
1,000 2612954, E 2612984, E
1,500 2612994
2,500 2613304, E

Table 41 Codes for Style IIH, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, Live-Front With Vacuum Fault Interrupter, with 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings With Insulated Neutral With Stainless Steel Cabinet and FR3 Insulating Fluid (reference Document 072146 and Spec. 86)

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 17,200
kVA 480Y/277 2,400/4160Y/2,400 480Y/277
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
2955/3325 2627084, E 2627094, E 2627104, E

Table 42 Codes for Radial, Dead-Front,* Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 043816 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Conventional

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 17,200
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 480Y/277 V
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 2603154 2603144
150 2607324 2603174
300 2606824 2603264
750 2600804, E 2600394, E 2608804, E
1,000 2601074, E 2600414 2601814
1,500 2600024 2608834, E
2,500 2600424, E
  • See Table 18 on Page 10 for others of this type.

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock

062111 Page 16 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for Replacements Only (continued)

Table 43 Codes for Radial, Live-Front, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 043816 and Spec. 86) − Conventional

kVA 4,160X12,000 17,200
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 260695 4 260309 4 260613 4
150 260615 4
300 260289 4 260617 4
750 260921 4

Table 44 Codes for Radial, Live-Front, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 043816 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Conventional

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
kVA Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 260710 4 260764 4
150 260755 4 260766 4
300 260757 4 260768 4
750 260759 4 260770 4, E
1,000 260760 4, E
1,500 260677 4
2,500 260773 4, E

Table 45 Codes for Subsurface Vault, Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 072138 and Spec. 91) − Conventional, Plate Steel

kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 − 208Y/120 V 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 − 480Y/277 V
300 262428 4
750 262430 4 262432 4
1,000 262107 4, E 262433 4, E
1,500 262434 4
2,500 015641 4, E

Table 46 Power Interconnection Hub (PIH) Transformers − for usage only on specific designted projects. Contains Quick Connect Cabinet on 480V Secondary.

mVA Primary Secondary Mild Steel
2.5 20780 GrdY/12000 480Y/277 263175
2.5 12000 GrdY/6930 480Y/277 263176
2.5 17200 GrdY/9930 480Y/277 263178

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 2

3

4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased. E Included in Emergency Stock

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 17 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Designation of Voltage Ratings of Windings - Single-Phase Transformers

Table 47 Designation of Voltage Ratings of Windings − Single-Phase Transformers

Item Designation Typical Voltage
Rating
Typical Winding
Diagram
Description
1 E 12,000 Indicates a winding of E volts which is suitable
for delta connection on an E volt system.
2 E/E1Y 1 2,400/4,160Y Indicates a winding of E volts which is suitable
for delta connection on an E volt system or for
wye connection on an E1 volt system.
3 E/E1Grd.Y1 12,000/20,780 Grd. Y
or
2,400/4,160 Grd.Y
Indicates a winding of E volts having insulation
suitable for delta connection on an E volt system
or for wye connection on an E1 volt effectively
grounded system.
4 E1Grd.Y/E1 20,780 Grd. Y/12,000
or
12,000 Grd. Y/6,930
Indicates a winding of E volts which has one
end of the winding grounded internally. Windings
with one end grounded internally are suitable for
single-phase or wye operation on a three-phase
E1 volt effectively grounded system.
5 E/2E 120/240
or
240/480
Indicates a winding, the sections of which can
be connected in parallel for operation at E volts,
connected in series for operation at 2E volts, or
connected in series with a center terminal for
3-wire operation at 2E volts between the
extreme terminals and E volts between the
center terminal and each of the extreme
terminals.
6 2E/E 240/120 Indicates a winding having a mid-tap and
suitable for 3-wire operation at 2E volts between
extreme terminals and at E volts between the
mid-tap and each of the extreme terminals
(not reconnectable).

1 E 1 � 3 E

062111 Page 18 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Designation of Voltage Ratings of Windings Three-Phase Transformers

Table 48 Designation of Voltage Ratings of Windings − Three-Phase Transformers

Item Designation Typical Voltage
Rating
Typical Winding
Diagram
Description
7 E 12,000 Indicates a winding that is permanently
delta connected for operation on an
E volt system.
8 E1Grd.Y/E1 20,780
Grd.Y/12,000
or
34,500
Grd.Y/19,920
Indicates a winding that is permanently
wye connected with neutral grounded to
the tank for operation on an E1 volt
effectively grounded system with E volts
available from line to neutral.
9 E/E1Grd.Y/E1 12,000/20,780
Grd.Y/12,000
Indicates a winding which may be delta
connected for operation on an E volt
system or may be wye connected for
operation on an E1 volt grounded system
with E volts available from line to neutral.
10 V x V1 4,160 x 12,000 Indicates a permanently delta connected
winding for multiple or series operation.
11 11 12,000 x 34,500
Grd. Y/19,920
Indicates a winding which may be delta
connected for operation on a 12 kV
system or wye connected for operation on
a 34.5 kV effectively grounded wye
system.

1 E 1 � 3 E

Table 49 Transformer Insulating Fluid Material Codes

FR3 High-Fire Point
Natural Ester
BioTemp
High-Fire Point
Natural Ester
Mineral Oil Silicone
High-Fire Point
National Standard ASTM D6871 ASTM D6871 ASTM D3487 ASTM D4652
5 Gallon Pail M507033
55 Gallon Drum M500046 M507034 M500043
Bulk M507017

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 19 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Primary Voltages

Table 50 System Primary Voltages [1]

Phase Primary Voltages System
Single-Phase 2,400/4,160Y For 2.4 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 2,400 x 4,800 For 2.4 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 4,160/7,200Y For 4 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 4,160GrdY/2,400 For 4 kV - 4-Wire L-G Connection
Single-Phase 4,160 x 12,000 For 4 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 4,160 x 7,200 For 4 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 7,200/12,470Y For 12 kV - 4-Wire L-G Connection
Single-Phase 12,000 For 12 kV L-L or 21 kV L-G Connection
Single-Phase 12,000/20,780 GrdY For 12 kV L-L or 21 kV L-G Connection
Single-Phase 12,000/20,780Y For 12 kV L-L or 21 kV L-G Connection
Single-Phase 12,000GrdY/6,930 For 12 kV - 4-Wire L-G Connection
Single-Phase 12,470GrdY/7,200 For Use in Chester
Single-Phase 17,200 For 17 kV L-L Connection
Single-Phase 20,780 For 21 kV L-L Connection
Single-Phase 20,780GrdY/12,000 For 21 kV - 4-Wire L-G Connection
Single-Phase 24,940GrdY/14,400 For Use in Chester
Single-Phase 44,000 For 44 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 44,000/25,400 For 44 kV - L-L Connection
Three-Phase 4,160 For 4 kV - Delta Connection
Three-Phase 4,160GrdY/2,400 For 4 kV - 4-Wire L-G Connection
Three-Phase 4,160 x 12,000 For 4 kV - Delta Connection
Three-Phase 4,160 x 12,480 For 4 kV - Delta Connection
Three-Phase 12,000 For 12 kV - Delta Connection
Three-Phase 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 For 12 kV Delta or 21 kV GrdY Connection
Three-Phase 12,000 x 20,780 For 12 kV Delta or 21 kV Delta Connection
Three-Phase 12,000 x 34,500GrdY/19,920 For 12 kV or 34.5 kV Networks
Three-Phase 17,200 For 17 kV Delta Connection
Three-Phase 20,780 For 21 kV Delta Connection
Three-Phase 20,780GrdY/12,000 For 21 kV GrdY Connection
Three-Phase 20,780Y/12,000 For 21 kV Y Connection
Three-Phase 34,500GrdY/19,920 For 34.5 kV Networks

1 Table 50 is intended to be a reference between the transformer’s primary voltage and the type of primary system that it can be used on in the PG&E system.

062111 Page 20 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Pictorial Index

1

1

Box Style
Front View
(doors removed)
Front View
(hinged top open)
Clam Shell Three-Phase Cabinet
Clam Shell Single-Phase Cabinet
Front View
(hinged top open)
1-Wire Cabinet
2-Wire Cabinet
3-Wire Cabinet
Front Views (hinged tops open)
Single-Phase - Style Dead-Front
Style MTP and Duplex Style DF
Figure 1
Single-Phase, Pad-Mount Transformers for Loop or Radial Application

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 21 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Pictorial Index (continued)

Front View
(doors removed)
Style IIA
Style IID 75 − 300 kVA
Front View
(doors removed)
CL Fuses Interlocked
With Switch
Style IIB 225 − 1,000 kVA
Front View
(doors removed)
Front View
(doors removed)
Bayonet Fuses
Style IIE 75 − 2,500 kVA
Style IIC 1,500 − 2,500 kVA
Front View
(doors removed)
Style IIF 300 − 2,500 kVA
Bayonet Fuses

Figure 2 Three-Phase, Pad-Mount Transformers for Loop or Radial Application

062111 Page 22 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Pictorial Index (continued)

Figure 3 Three-Phase, Pad-Mount Transformers for Loop or Radial Application

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 23 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Pictorial Index (continued)

Front View
(doors removed)
Dead-Front Radial
Front View
(doors removed)
Live-Front Radial
Open Wye to Zigzag Wye
Front View
(doors removed)
Fence Enclosed
Front View
(doors removed)
12 − 21 kV Tie Autotransformer
Front View
(doors removed)
Pad-Mounted Network Transformer

Figure 4 Three-Phase, Pad-Mount Transformers for Radial Application

062111 Page 24 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Pictorial Index (continued)

Neutral Spade
Front View
Three-Phase, Subsurface, Duplex Horizontal
Insulated Neutral
Single-Phase, Subsurface Horizontal - 6-Bushing
Single-Phase, Subsurface Horizontal - 4-Bushing Single-Phase, Subsurface Round-Type
Three-Phase UCD Transformer Three-Phase UCD−LB Transformer
Submersible
Bayonet Fuses

Figure 5 Subsurface Transformers for Loop or Radial Application

Rev. #27: 03-25-22 062111 Page 25 of 26

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Pictorial Index (continued)

Subway−LB Single-Phase Subsurface Subway Three-Phase Network Transformer With Protector
Three-Phase Subsurface Vault Three-Phase Subsurface Vault

Figure 6 Subsurface Transformers for Radial Application

Revision Notes

Revision 27 has the following changes:

  1. Added Table 46 on Page 17.

062111 Page 26 of 26 Rev. #27: 03-25-22

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook

Prepared by: MZGD

Purpose and Scope

This document covers steel and plastic conduit for electric underground installations, with or without concrete encasement.

General Information

  1. Applications for underground conduit are as follows:

A. Residential: All residential installations requiring conduit should be made without concrete encasement.

B. Light Commercial, Industrial, and Underground Residential Distribution (URD) Feeder: Installation of circuits of this type, which are three-way or less, should normally be made without concrete encasement. In densely populated urban areas, conduit banks involving more than three primary conduits may require concrete encasement.

C. Severe exposure to “dig-ins” and other hazards may require concrete encasement of conduit lines.

(1) Conduit separation for concrete encasement of conduit lines using spacers to avoid obstacles is illustrated on Page 15.

(2) Conduit separation for concrete encasement of conduit lines terminating into a manhole or vault, is illustrated on Page 16.

(3) Conduit separation for concrete encasement of conduit lines terminating into an enclosure is illustrated on Page 17.

  1. For the minimum design requirements for trenches and conduits installed in PG&E electric distribution system see Document 038193. Trench requirements previously listed in this document have been moved to Document 038193.

3. For the design requirements of conduits installed specifically on bridges see Utility Procedure TD-2310P-10.

  1. In April of 2020, PG&E stopped purchasing rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) DB-120 for conduits, couplings, fittings, and bends for installation in its electric distribution system. PG&E now purchases rigid single wall or co-extruded cellular core wall PVC Schedule 40 conduits, couplings, fittings and bends as the standard conduit type for open trench installations.

  2. Rigid single wall or co−extruded cellular core wall PVC Schedule 40 conduits, couplings, fittings, and bends are interchangeable with rigid PVC DB-120 conduits, couplings, fittings, and bends, respectively. This interchangeability is possible because DB-120 and rigid PVC Schedule 40 materials have the same outside diameters.

  3. When conduit, including service conduit, is to be installed for PG&E by others, the conduits must meet the requirements listed in this document. The conduit listed below are also acceptable alternatives to the required Rigid single wall or co−extruded cellular core wall PVC Schedule 40.

A. Single wall and co−extruded cellular core wall PVC Schedule 80, UL 651 approved conduit that is so marked.

B. Hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Specification C80.1.

Rev. #20: 03−25−22 062288 Page 1 of 20

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

It is the installer’s responsibility to use the proper fitting to join conduits. This transition may involve changes in both conduit type and size. If equal diameter conduits of different wall thicknesses are joined, the inside edge of the spigot end must be chamfered.

  1. The current carrying capacity of an insulated cable is reduced if it is surrounded by other loaded cables. For this reason, conduit banks should be arranged so that each conduit is in an outside position.

  2. In commercial distribution systems, consideration should be given to providing one or more spare conduits in the original construction for future load growth requirements. The addition of such conduits at a later time is much more costly.

  3. A mandrel must be used to prove that all conduits are free and clear of dirt, rocks, and other debris. For further information refer to Greenbook 3.4.1.

  4. A pulling tape with sequential footage markings ( Material Code M560154 ) must be installed in all conduits and attached to an end cap. The tape must be proven free and not glued or caught on joints.

  5. All conduits must be capped. All conduits not terminating in a subsurface enclosure, pedestal, or vault are to be capped with unglued rigid caps (see Table 12 on Page 8). Conduits terminating in a subsurface enclosure, pedestal, or vault must be capped with temporary plugs (see Table 12 on Page 8).

  6. Every effort should be made to obtain a straight, watertight conduit line.

  7. When the intrusion of water into buildings can be reasonably expected through lateral service ducts, PG&E is responsible for sealing both ends of the conduit (refer to Document 063927 and Document 063928). The Rayflate Duct Sealing System (RDSS) conduit sealing system can be ordered for this purpose. RDSS must be used when waterproofing a subsurface transformer enclosure is required. Refer to Document 072149.

Material Specifications

14. PVC conduits and fittings must comply with PG&E engineering material specification EMS 64 which meet the following industry specifications:

A. Tensile modulus of 500,000 psi.

B. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA TC-2 for straight conduit, couplings and NEMA TC-3 for fittings and bends.

C. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): UL 651 or Electrical Testing Labs (ETL) that conforms to UL 651.

D. UL 651 or ETL conforms to UL 651 must be marked on the outside wall of the PVC schedule 40.

E. Rigid solid and single wall or co-extruded cellular core wall PVC Schedule 40 conduits, couplings, fittings, and bends must be gray in color.

F. Marking must conform to UL 651 requirements.

Application

  1. PVC conduit may be cut with a hacksaw or a fine-toothed wood saw. Clean off burrs. Bevel the inside to eliminate sharp edges.

  2. For PVC conduit, apply a thin, uniform coat of cement to both surfaces to be glued. Avoid excessive use of cement to prevent the formation of a bead of cement on the interior shoulder of the joint since, when hardened, the bead can cause cable damage during installation. Immediately after applying the coat of cement to the conduit, insert the conduit into the fitting socket until it bottoms at the fitting shoulder. Turn the conduit 1/4 turn during insertion to distribute the cement evenly. Hold the conduit in place for about 1 minute to prevent backing out in case of tight interference fit joints. Wipe any excess cement away from the outside of the joint. Weather conditions may vary the curing time. When using cement in confined areas, adequate ventilation must be provided. Table 1 below shows the codes to order PG&E approved conduit cement.

Table 1 Cement for Use With Plastic Conduits

Application Quantity Approved Manufacturer and Part Number Material Code
Application Quantity Oatey Weld-on Duit 413 Weld-on Duit 413
PVC to PVC 1 Quart 30886 12089 490157
PVC to PVC 1 Pint 30885 12090 490151

062288 Page 2 of 20 Rev. #20: 03−25−22

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

  1. Use end bells fittings to terminate all conduits, unless the conduit has been terminated in an enclosure equipped with duct terminators. Use cable protectors on reconstruction projects only, when end bells cannot be installed.

  2. In applications where a conduit dead-ends, cap the end of the conduit and place a marker ball (material code M374947, Refer to M-60 for more information) at the location. Identify the marker ball in construction drawings.

  3. Conduits shown in Table 10 (HDPE) and Table 11 (PVC, Bore-Gard schedule 40) on Page 7 are for horizontal directional drilling (HDD) trench-less applications only. However, they can also be used in open trench applications.

A. Mechanical couplings and newly approved Shur−lock II couplers (See Figure 31 and Table 24 on Page 14 ) can be used for joining HDPE to HDPE conduits as well as HDPE to PVC conduits.

  1. Caution: When pulling conduit(s) in boring applications, be certain to cut the conduits allowing sufficient extra length for the conduit to relax. It may take as long as 72 hours for an excessively stretched conduit to fully relax.

  2. Caution: Do not use Snap-N-Stac Combo Spacers in concrete encased application.

  3. Conduit shown on Table 20 through Table 23 (flexible conduit) on Page 11 through Page 14 are for use in areas with minor soil settlement issues, and for large radius sweeps or re-routes.

  4. Backfill containing large rock, paving material, cinders, large amounts of sharply angular substance, or corrosive material must not be placed in excavations where such material may damage conduits, prevent adequate compaction of the fill, or contribute to corrosion of the conduits. Soil compaction must meet PG&E’s and any applicable federal, state, county, and local requirements. PG&E specific soil compaction requirements are as follows:

erial, cinders, large amounts of sharply angular substance, or corrosive material must not be placed in excavations where such material may damage conduits, prevent adequate compaction of the fill, or contribute to corrosion of the conduits. Soil compaction must meet PG&E’s and any applicable federal, state, county, and local requirements. PG&E specific soil compaction requirements are as follows:

A. Trenches that run across or along public roads and streets in the franchise areas must have soil compacted to a minimum of 95% density.

B. Trenches that run across private properties and in all other areas must have soil compacted to a minimum of 90% density.

C. A compaction test report may be required by PG&E. This report must include the testing company information: Name, Address, Contact information.

References Location Document

Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 038193 Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0−600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063927 Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial Underground Electric Services 0-600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928 Selection of the Type of Underground Equipment . . . . UG−1: General/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 072149 Engineering Material Specification 63, “High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduits and Fittings” . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 63 Engineering Material Specification 64, “Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Conduits, and Fittings” . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 64 Engineering Material Specification 4123, “Backfill Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS4123 Electric Distribution Conduits Installed on Bridges . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-2310P-10 Request for Variance from Electric Distrbution Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-2951P-01 Approved “Mark and Locate” Instruments, Equipment, Accessories, and Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M60

Locate” Instruments, Equipment,](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdoctdm.asp?itemid=013530147) Accessories, and Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M60

Rev. #20: 03−25−22 062288 Page 3 of 20

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings

Table 2 Material Material Codes for Rigid Steel Conduit

Conduit Size
(inches)
Dimensions (inches) Weight
(lbs.)1
Material
Code
Conduit Size
(inches)
OD ID T T T
2 2.4 2.06 0.154 33 362103
3 3.5 3.06 0.216 69 362092
4 4.5 4.02 0.237 98 362093
5 5.6 5.04 0.258 134 362104
6 6.6 6.06 0.280 177 362141
Conduit Size
(inches)
Dimensions (inches) Material
Code
Conduit Size
(inches)
P L L
2 2.73 2.18 362105
3 4.00 3.25 362094
4 5.00 3.50 362095
5 6.29 3.75 362106
6 7.39 4.00 362142

Table 4 Material Codes for Galvanized Steel Split Coupling

T Standard Coupling

Figure 1 Steel Conduit

Figure 2 Steel Coupling

1 Weight for one 10-foot length, including one standard coupling furnished with each length.

Table 3 Material Codes for Standard Steel Coupling

A

A

Figure 3 Split Coupling

7/16” Dia. Holes

Conduit Size
(inches)
Dimensions (inches) Material
Code
Conduit Size
(inches)
A L L
2 2.5 9 362019
3 3.5 9 362021
4 4.5 9 362023
5 1 5.5 9 362107
6 1 6.5 9 362143

1 These sizes are made of zinc-plated malleable iron. Can be installed on rigid steel conduits.

062288 Page 4 of 20 Rev. #20: 03−25−22

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Table 5 Material Codes for 90 ° Steel Conduit Sweeps, TBE

Figure 4 Conduit Sweep Threaded Both Ends

Conduit Size
(inches)
Radius
(inches)
Material Code
2 24 360081
3 36 362091
4 36 362090
4 60 360812
5 36 362109
6 36 362144
6 48 362145
6 60 360813

Rev. #20: 03−25−22 062288 Page 5 of 20

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

PVC and HDPE Conduit and Fittings

Notes

  1. The depth of all couplings, adapters, swedge reducers, and bell ends must conform to the requirements listed in Table 2 of ASTM Standard F512.

Table 6 Data and Material Codes for Rigid Plastic Conduit Schedule

Table 6 Da 40 ata and Material Codes for Rigid Plastic Conduit S 1 Schedule
Conduit
Size
(inches)
Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Dimensions (inches) Material
Code
Conduit
Size
(inches)
Average
Outside
Diameter
Minimum
Inside
Diameter
Wall Thickness Wall Thickness Wall Thickness
Conduit
Size
(inches)
Average
Outside
Diameter
Minimum
Inside
Diameter
Minimum Maximum Maximum
2 2.375 2.021 0.154 0.113 360153
3 3.500 3.008 0.216 0.148 016471
4 4.500 3.961 0.237 0.184 016472
5 5.563 4.975 0.258 0.221 016473
6 6.625 5.986 0.280 0.257 016474

Figure 5 Rigid Plastic Conduit

Figure 6 PVC Coupling

Figure 7 Plastic-to-Steel Adapter

Figure 8 Swedge Reducer

1 See Note 14 on Page 2 for material specifications.

Table 7 Material Codes for PVC Swedge Couplings
Swedge Coupling Swedge Coupling Swedge Coupling
Conduit Size
(inches)
Minimum
Socket Depth
Material Code
2 2.25 360321
3 3.25 360322
4 3.75 360323
5 4.25 360401
6 4.75 360482

Table 8 Material Codes for Plastic-to-Steel Adapters

Conduit Size
(inches)
Minimum
Socket Depth
Maximum
Socket Depth
Material
Code
2 1.125 2.00 360324
3 1.594 3.125 360325
4 1.750 3.375 360326
5 1.937 3.625 360402
6 2.125 3.750 360489

Table 9 Data and Material Codes for PVC Swedge Reducers [1]

Reducer
Size
(inches)
Dimensions (inches) Material
Code
Reducer
Size
(inches)
Minimum Length Minimum Length Typical Belled End ID Typical Belled End ID Typical Belled End ID
Reducer
Size
(inches)
A B C D D
3 x 2 2.875 1.750 3.515 2.393 018585
4 x 3 3.375 2.875 4.515 3.515 018584
5 x 4 4.000 3.375 5.593 4.515 360777
6 x 5 5.000 4.000 6.658 5.593 360778

1 � Both belled ends must be chamferred 0.3 inches (min) by 45 .

062288 Page 6 of 20 Rev. #20: 03−25−22

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

PVC and HDPE Conduit and Fittings (continue)

Table 10 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit Directional

Figure 9 HDPE Conduit

Figure 10 PE Mechanical Coupling

Figure 11 PVC (Bore-Gard, Schedule 40

Table 10 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Condu Boring Conduit 1 uit Directional
Conduit Conduit Conduit Conduit Mechanical
Couplings2, 3
Mechanical
Couplings2, 3
Size Length
(feet)
Description Material
Code
Size
(inches)
Material
Code
2” Sch 80 500 Coil4 360511 2 360690
2” Sch 80 40 Stick 360017 360017 360017
3” Sch 80 500 Coil4 360644 3 360691
3” Sch 80 40 Stick 360018 360018 360018
4” Sch 80 625 Coil5 360014 4 360692
4” Sch 80 40 Stick 360015 360015 360015
5” SDR 13.5 450 Coil5 360012 5 360694
5” SDR 13.5 40 Stick 360013 360013 360013
6” SDR 13.5 450 Coil5 360010 6 360695
6” SDR 13.5 40 Stick 360011 360011 360011

1 Color must be black with at least 3 red longitudinal strips. 2 May be used to connect PE conduit to PVC conduit (except in directional drilling apps.) 3 Mechanical couplings are not designed for directional drilling. Fusion joints are required. 4 No reel. 5 With reel.

Table 11 PVC (Bore-Gard) Directional Boring Conduit

Size
(inches)
Description Material
Code
3 Conduit 10’, Schedule 40 360055
3 Conduit 20’, Schedule 40 360056
4 Conduit 10’, Schedule 40 360026
4 Conduit 20’, Schedule 40 360025
4 Replacement Locking Straps1 360031
4 Replacement Seal Gaskets1 360029
6 Conduit 10’, Schedule 40 360027
6 Conduit 20’, Schedule 40 360028
6 Replacement Locking Straps1 360032
6 Replacement Seal Gaskets1 360030

1 Package of 10.

Rev. #20: 03−25−22 062288 Page 7 of 20

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

PVC Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Hole for Attaching

Rigid Cap Cap Plug

Table 12 Material Codes for Rigid Conduit Caps and

Cap Plugs

Conduit Size (inches) Material Codes Material Codes
Conduit Size (inches) Rigid Cap Cap Plug
2 360425 360440
3 360426 360441
4 360428 360443
5 360429 360444
6 360488 360494

Table 13 Material Codes for End Bells

Conduit Size (inches) Material Code
2 360420
3 360421
4 360423
5 360424
6 360487

Table 14 Material Codes for Cable Protectors [1]

Conduit Size (inches) Material Code
2 382034
3 382045
4 4
5 5
6 6

1 Not for new installations; for replacement only.

Figure 13 Plastic Conduit Cap

Figure 14 End Bell

Figure 15 Cable Protector

1

Figure 12 Rigid Cap

Table 15 Material Codes for Snap-N-Stack Combo Spacers [1]

Conduit
Size
(inches)
Duct OD
(inches)
Horizontal
Duct
Positions
Dimensions (inches) Material
Material
Codes
Conduit
Size
(inches)
Duct OD
(inches)
Horizontal
Duct
Positions
A B C D E E
3 3.500 2 2 5.5 3.63 5.38 11 360459
4 4.500 2 2 6.5 3.88 6.06 13 360460
5 5.563 2 2 7.56 4.38 7.25 15.12 360461
6 6.625 2 2 8.62 4.13 7.38 17.25 360491

1 Cable spacers allow only for 2” separation between conduits. Cable spacers are used only where is required to route around existing obstructions. Thus, locations where cable spacers are needed are exempt from the requirement of maintaining 3” separation between 600 A distribution circuits.

1

A
B

A
B

A
B
A
B

D
C
D
E E E

Figure 16 Snap-N-Stac Combo Spacers

062288 Page 8 of 20 Rev. #20: 03−25−22

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

PVC Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Table 16 Material Codes for Rigid PVC Schedule 40 Conduit Bends (sweeps) [3]

Figure 17 22-1/2PVC Conduit Bend

Figure 18 45PVC Conduit Bend

Figure 19 90PVC Conduit Bend

Conduit Size
(inches)
Sweep Material Code
Conduit Size
(inches)
Degree Radius1
(inches)
Radius1
(inches)
2 2 11-1/4 24 360155
2 2 11-1/4 36 360156
2 2 22-1/2 24 360157
2 2 22-1/2 36 360158
2 2 45 24 360159
2 2 45 36 360160
2 2 90 24 360161
2 2 90 36 360162
3 2 11-1/4 36 360801
3 2 22-1/2 36 360800
3 2 45 36 360403
3 2 90 24 360405
3 2 90 36 360328
4 3 11-1/4 36 360804
4 3 11-1/4 60 360805
4 3 22-1/2 36 360760
4 3 22-1/2 60 360761
4 3 45 36 360412
4 3 45 60 360413
4 3 90 36 360414
4 3 90 60 360415
5 11-1/4 36 360808
5 11-1/4 60 360809
5 22-1/2 36 360806
5 22-1/2 60 360763
5 45 36 360416
5 45 60 360417
5 90 36 360418
5 90 60 360419
6 11-1/4 60 360811
6 22-1/2 60 360765
6 45 36 360485
6 45 60 360486
6 90 36 360483
6 90 60 360484

1 For each conduit bend; first row shows minimum vertical radius, second row shows minimum horizontal radius. 2 For 2” and 3” primary conduits 90 ° degree bends, use 36” vertical radius. 24“ vertical radius can be used with secondary and service conduits only. 3 See Notes 1 and 2 on Page 10.

Rev. #20: 03−25−22 062288 Page 9 of 20

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

PVC Conduit and Fittings (continued) Notes in reference to Table 16 on Page 9

  1. A 36” may be allowed as the minimum horizontal radius when using 4” PVC conduits bends greater than 5 � if field conditions make it not feasible to install 60” radius and if such field conditions are validated by PG&E inspectors.

  2. Note 1 above does not apply to secondary service conduits installations. For secondary service conduits installations, 36” is the minimum horizontal radius for 4” conduit. See Document 063927 and Document 063928.

Large Radius Sweeps

Table 17 Length of Rigid PVC Conduit Segments

Approximate
Radius of Bend
(R)
Length of Rigid
Conduit Segments
(feet)
11’ 6” 1
17’ 3” 1.5
23’ 0” 2
28’ 9” 2.5
34’ 6” 3
40’ 3” 3.5
46’ 0” 4
51’ 9” 4.5
57’ 6” 5
69’ 0” 6
80’ 6” 7
92’ 0” 8

Table 18 Number of Couplings and Conduit Segments Required

5 � Couplings (see Figure 21)

Straight Run

Figure 20 Typical Application of 5Couplings

Example Radius Bend (R) = 60 Feet Angle of Bend ( � ) = 45 �

From Table 17 The nearest value to 60-foot radius is 57’ 6”. The length of conduit segments = 5 feet.

From Table 18 For a 45 � angle bend: The number of 5 � couplings required = 9. The number of conduit segments required = 8.

Angle of Bend
()
Number of Couplings and
Outside Diameter Conduit
Segments Required
Angle of Bend
()
Coupling Conduit
15 3 2
30 6 5
45 9 8
60 12 11
75 15 14
90 18 17

Figure 21 5Coupling

Table 19 Material Codes for PVC Schedule 40, 5 Degree Coupling

Coupling Size
(inches)
Material Code
2 360154
3 360399
4 360400
5 360407
6 360495

062288 Page 10 of 20 Rev. #20: 03−25−22

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Flexible (HDPE) Conduit and Fittings

Table 20 Data and Material Codes for Corrugated Core Flex Conduit With Couplers (250’ coil) [1,] [2,] [3]

Wall Thickness

Conduit
Size
(inches)
Dimension (inches) Material
Code
Conduit
Size
(inches)
Outside
Diameter
Inside
Diameter
Wall
Thickness
Wall
Thickness
2 2.375 2.050 .163 360095
3 3.500 2.950 .275 360096
4 4.750 3.975 .387 360097

Figure 22 Corrugated Core Flex Conduit

Smooth Inner Wall Lower Coefficient

No Glue

Figure 23 Key-LockCouplers

1 Conduit can be used in areas minor soil settlement issues or for re-routes. 2 Inside wall is corrugated. 3 Minimum bending radius is 24 inches for all sizes.

Table 21 Data and Material Codes for Key-LockCouplers [1]

Conduit
Size
(inches)
Insertion Lengths (inches) Material
Code
2 2.725 360102
3 3.125 360103
4 2 2.875 360105

1 Kit has coupler, two locks and two gaskets. 2 Coupler to connect corrugated core flex to corrugated core flex.

Rev. #20: 03−25−22 062288 Page 11 of 20

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Flexible (HDPE) Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Install the Key-Lock Coupler Following the Procedure Below

  1. Make certain the elastomeric gasket is seated in the second corrugation on 4” conduit and the first corrugation on 6” conduit. Be sure the gasket is positioned as shown on Figure 24.

Figure 24 Key-LockCouplers Gasket Position

  1. Use only a water-based lubricant. Apply the lubricant to the outside surface of the gasket. A light coating of lubricant should also be applied to the chamfered leading edge of the coupler as shown on Figure 25.

Figure 25 Key-LockCouplers Lubricant Application

  1. Insert the gasketed end of the Smooth-Cor � conduit into the coupler. Note the black home-mark, which is used to identify proper coupling as shown on Figure 26.

Figure 26 Key-LockCouplers Insertion

  1. Use a mallet and wood block to seat the coupler until the home-mark is covered. Note that the small lock ring on the inside surface of the coupler snaps into a matching corrugation as shown on Figure 27.

Figure 27 Key-LockCouplers Locked in Place

062288 Page 12 of 20 Rev. #20: 03−25−22

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Flexible (HDPE) Conduit and Fittings (continued)

  1. Insert the Key-Lock � strip following the directional arrow into the pre-drilled hole in the coupler. Apply a small amount of lubricant to aid in the insertion. Push the Key-Lock � strip (in the direction of the arrow on the label) around the entire circumference, locking the grooves in the conduit and coupler securely together. Trim the excess Key-Lock � strip material from the coupler (optional). See Figure 28 below.

Figure 28 Key-LockCouplers Strip Insertion

Note: When cutting the Smooth-Cor ® conduit in the field to a custom length, it necessary to follow the steps below:

  1. Cut the conduit at the selected corrugation valley.

  2. Place the gasket over the newly cut and cleaned end, making certain to seat the gasket on the second corrugation for 4” conduit. The higher ridge of the elastomeric seal is positioned toward the body of the conduit and the lower ridge toward the end of the conduit. Using a felt marker, place a home-mark on the conduit to achieve proper coupling. When using 4” conduit, place the home-mark on the seventh corrugation. Repeat steps 2-5 as shown on Page 12 and 13 to complete coupling. See Figure 29 below.

Home-Mark Elastomeric Gasket

4” Smooth-Cor ®

Figure 29 Key-LockCouplers Cut at Customized Length

Rev. #20: 03−25−22 062288 Page 13 of 20

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Flexible (HDPE) Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Figure 30 Key-LockAdapter

Table 22 Data and Material Codes for Shurlock/Key-Lock(Adapter Smooth-Core-Shur-Lock Kit[1,] [2)]

Conduit Size
(inches)
Dimension
(inches)
Material Code
Conduit Size
(inches)
Length Length
2 6.7 360106
3 6.63 360107
4 8.0 360108

1 Kit has adapter, one lock, and one gasket. 2 Adapter works connecting SC conduit to PVC and SC conduit to threaded steel conduit.

Table 23 Required Rigid PVC stub out length [1]

Conduit Size
(inches)
PVC Stub Out
(inches)
2 14.8
3 14.5
4 15
6 17.5

1 Stub out length needed to provide enough space for the adapter to connect rigid PVC to flexible conduit.

Note

  1. The key-lock bell end adapters smooth-core bell are no longer commercially available. Before the end of the flexible conduit run, it is necessary to transition from the flexible conduit to PVC conduit by following the steps below.

A. Use appropriate size Shurlock/Key-Lock � coupler listed in Table 22.

B. Use a straight section of at least 18 inches of appropriate size PVC conduit listed in Table 6 on Page 6.

C. Use appropriate size end bell for PVC conduit listed in Table 13 on Page 8.

Table 24 Data and Material Codes for Shur-Lock II Coupler

Figure 31 Shur-Lock II Coupler

Conduit Size
(inches)
Dimension
(inches)
Material Code
Conduit Size
(inches)
Length Length
2 5.70 027241
3 10.75 027242
4 12.00 027243
5 14.25 027244
6 14.25 027256

062288 Page 14 of 20 Rev. #20: 03−25−22

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Conduit Construction, Built-up Method

3”

2”

2”

3”

Plastic Conduit

3” 3” 2” 3” 2” 3”

(see Table 6 on Page 6)

Separation between conduits when using spacer. See Figure 16 on Page 8.

Concrete

Figure 32 Typical Straight Run Installation (6” conduit, 6-way shown)

Spacer

Figure 33 Typical Perspective View of Installation Around Obstruction

Figure 34 Typical Perspective View of Installation Under Obstruction

Rev. #20: 03−25−22 062288 Page 15 of 20

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Construction and Termination of Conduit Line into a Manhole or Vault

Notes

  1. Slope the conduit sufficiently to provide adequate drainage. On level ground, slope the duct line from the center to each manhole.

  2. Local city ordinances may require a minimum cover greater than PG&E’s requirements of 24” for conduits containing circuits energized at 750 volts or less, and 36” for conduits containing circuits energized in excess of 750 volts. Depth may be reduced in either case if adequate mechanical protection − as defined in Section 3.3.6 of the Greenbook− is provided. where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e064e4' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

  3. Where required, the depth of the conduit window may be increased. Where this is necessary, tie the conduit envelope concrete into the manhole reinforcing steel.

  4. Vertical staggering of conduits at entrance shown in Detail A will assist in arranging for cable crossover if required.

B
B
B

Manhole Cover Plan View Manhole Cover

Approx.

Staggered Window (see Note 4)

Inside of Manhole Wall

Section B-B

Conduit Window (6-way conduit formation shown)

062288 Page 16 of 20 Rev. #20: 03−25−22

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Concrete Encasement Conduit Configuration Tables

Notes

  1. For conduit lines two-way and larger, install #4 reinforcing bars in all four corners of the conduit envelope. Overlap bars 15 inches and install a minimum of 3 inches from the top or bottom and 1 inch from the side of the envelope.

  2. Where the width of the trench is greater than the required width of the envelope, the horizontal spacing between conduits may be increased as long as 3-inch spacing between the conduit and the outside edge of the envelope is maintained.

  3. Concrete: Normal Weight Aggregate, ASM, C33 Uniformly Graded Maximum Aggregate Size 3/4 inch type Minimum Comprehensive Strength: f’c = 3,000 pound-force per square inch (psi).

Table 25 Dimensions for Single Conduit Configurations

3”

W W 3 3”
H
3” 3” 3”

Figure 37 Single Conduit Configuration

H

3”

Conduit Envelope Dim. Concrete Reqd.
Cubic Yards
per 100 ft. 1
Description Size W H H
Single 2” 8-1/2” 8-1/2” 1.9
Single 3” 9-1/2” 9-1/2” 2.3
Single 4” 10-1/2” 10-1/2” 2.8
Single 5” 11-1/2” 11-1/2” 3.4
Single 6” 12-1/2” 12-1/2” 4.0

1 Quantities may vary due to variations encountered in construction.

Table 26 Dimensions for Multiple Conduit Configurations

3”
W W
3” 3”

3”

W 3” W 3”
W
3”


H
W
3”


H
W W W W
W
3”


H
H
W
3”


H
W
3”


H
W
3”


H

3” 3”

3” 3” 3” ”
3”

3”
W
H
3”

3”
W
H
3”

3”
W
H
3”

3”
W
H
3”

3”
W
H
W W W W W
3”

3”
W
H
H
3”

3”
W
H
3”

3”
W
H
3”

3”
W
H
3”

3”
W
H
3”

3”
W
H
3”

3”
W
H

Figure 38 Two, Four, and Six-Way Conduit Configuration

Conduit Envelope Dim. Concrete Reqd.
Cubic Yards
per 100 ft. 1
Description Size W H H
2-way 3” 16” 9-1/2” 3.9
2-way 4” 18” 10-1/2” 4.9
2-way 5” 20” 11-1/2” 5.9
2-way 6” 22-1/2” 12-1/2” 7.2
4-way 4” 18” 18” 8.3
4-way 5” 20” 20” 10.3
4-way 6” 22-1/2” 22-1/2” 13.0
6-way 4” 18” 25-1/2” 11.8
6-way 5” 20” 29” 15.0
6-way 6” 22-1/2” 32” 18.5
8-way 4” 18” 33” 15.3
8-way 5” 20” 37-1/2” 19.0
8-way 6” 22-1/2” 41-1/2” 24.0

1 Quantities may vary due to variations encountered in construction.

Rev. #20: 03−25−22 062288 Page 17 of 20

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Instructions for Sealing Conduit Using Foam

Notes

  1. Within minutes, polyurethane foam expands to form a water and gas barrier that can be easily removed in the future.

  2. Consult the manufacturer’s instructions included in each kit.

Duct Terminator

Cables

Figure 39 Details of a Polyurethane Seal

Step 1 Wipe off loose dirt and grime from cables.

Step 2 Install front dam (packing). Wind a strip of packing around each cable. Push the dam approximately 6 inches to 8 inches into the conduit. Install the back dam in the same manner as the front dam, and push it into the conduit until the dam is flush with the duct terminator.

Back Dam Flush With Duct Terminator

Figure 40 Front Dam Installation

Step 3 Insert the nozzle into the chamber between the dams and inject polyurethane.

Polyurethane Sealant

Figure 41 Nozzle Application

Table 27 Material Codes for Polyurethane Conduit Seal Kits [1]

Conduit Size Material Code Manufacturer C atalog Number
2” Through 6” 019178
D
ura-Line (Arnco)
Hydro Seal
S-60-C6P
2” Through 6” 490813 Polywater
FS
T-250KIT-PGE

1 Kits have a 12 month shelf-life.

062288 Page 18 of 20 Rev. #20: 03−25−22

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Instructions for Sealing Conduit Using RDSS

Notes

  1. Consult the manufacturer’s instructions included in each kit.

  2. Installation tool IT-16 is needed to install RDSS. This tool uses CO 2 cartridges. Both of these materials need to be ordered separately. See Figure 44 on Page 20 .

  3. Select the appropriate RDSS size per Table 28.

  4. When sealing three or more cables, the RDSS sealing clip listed on Table 34 must be used with the DRSS duct deal. One clip seals up to four cables.

  5. Order RDSS as indicated in Table 29 on Page 20.

  6. For additional reference, the link below provides an installation video. This video was developed by the manufacturer and may not reflect the use of the company required PPE. When performing this work, please be sure to use the appropriate PPE (i.e. long sleeves, hard hat, etc.) as required by PG&E. The video titled “RDSS − Rayflate Duct Seal System Installation and Removal” is posted in Microsoft Stream. Access Microsoft Stream at https://web.microsoftstream.com/ from PG&E intranet.

Table 28 RDSS Size Selection

Normal Duct
(Conduit)
Size (Inches)
RDSS-45
Cable/Cable
Bundle
Diameter
(Inches)
RDSS-60
Cable/Cable
Bundle
Diameter
(Inches)
RDSS-75
Cable/Cable
Bundle
Diameter
(Inches)
RDSS-100
Cable/Cable
Bundle
Diameter
(Inches)
RDSS-125
Cable/Cable
Bundle
Diameter
(Inches)
RDSS-150
Cable/Cable
Bundle
Diameter
(Inches)
1-1/2 0-1.25
2 0-1.50 0-1.00
3 0-2.00
4 0-3.25 0-2.75
5 2 0-2.75-4.5 2.50-4.24
6 2 2.50-5.50
RDSS Clip
Size
N/A 75 75 100 125 150

1 One RDSS clip per RDSS seal is included in the kit. 2 For 5” and 6” ducts with cable bundle diameters less than listed on this table or empty; an RDSS-AT/AP-150 device must be used along with RDSS. RDSS-AT/AP-150 must be ordered separately. See Figure 44 on Page 20.

Figure 42 RDSS Seal and Clip

Figure 43 AT/AP-150 Device

Rev. #20: 03−25−22 062288 Page 19 of 20

UG-1: Conduits Greenbook Underground Conduits

Instructions for Sealing Conduit Using RDSS (continued)

Figure 44 IT-16 Installation Tool and CO 2 Cartridges

Figure 45 RDSS Installed

Table 29 Material Material Codes for RDSS Kits and Installation Tool

Item Material Description Material Code
1 RDSS-45-PG&E 360213
2 RDSS-60-PG&E 360214
3 RDSS-75-PG&E 360215
4 RDSS-100-PG&E 360216
5 RDSS-125-PG&E 360217
6 RDSS-150-PG&E 360218
7 RDSS-AT/AP-150 Device 360219
8 RDSS-IT-16 Tool 360220
9 Compressed CO2 Gas Cylinders 360221

1 Installation tool re-usable. Unless damaged, only need to order once. 2 Only these types of cylinders are compatible with this tool.

Revision Notes

Revision 20 has the following changes:

  1. Added Note 1C(1) −1C(3) Page 1.

  2. Modified Notes 16 on Page 2 and Note 19 on Page 3.

  3. Added compaction requirements to Note 23 on Page 3.

  4. Moved, revised and added additional trench requirements from this Document to Document 038193.

  5. Revised minimum socket dept information in Table 7 on Page 6.

  6. Added new Figure 31 and Table 24 to show information of Shur−Lock II Couplers on Page 14.

062288 Page 20 of 20 Rev. #20: 03−25−22

Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

Purpose and Scope

This document provides a variety of landscape design ideas that may be used by the applicant to screen pad-mounted transformers.

Pad-mounted transformers are much less costly to install and maintain than subsurface transformers. While any landscaping, retaining walls, decorative walls, etc. may be installed or maintained by the applicant, landscape screening is encouraged as it helps improve the overall appearance and acceptance of pad-mounted transformers.

General Information

  1. This document is intended to illustrate a variety of design concepts. They may be modified to fit a particular need or site condition.

  2. The figures in this document are illustrative designs and are not intended to be construction or working drawings. Materials, quantities, and construction methods will have to be determined by the installer to meet the requirements of the particular site.

  3. The addition of suitable plants to these basic designs will enhance the overall screening effect.

  4. The designs illustrate screening single-phase transformers, but the same concepts may also be applied to screening three-phase, pad-mounted transformers.

  5. The decorative walls, fences, etc., depicted in this document are not substitutes for any required barrier posts, fire walls, etc., that may be required by Document 051122.

  6. The applicant may not paint the exterior of the transformer a different color.

Plant Matrices

  1. See Pages 7 through 12 for a plant matrix that identifies plant species suitable for screening transformers within the different climatic areas of each division.

Clearances

  1. 8-foot minimum (measured from the edge of the pad) in front of all equipment doors to provide room to operate with hot sticks and to replace the equipment.

  2. A clearance of 2 feet is required from the transformer pad to walls, fences, etc., as depicted in this document. The clearance may be reduced to 1 foot if the height of the wall does not exceed 2 feet and if the wall thickness does not exceed 1 foot (i.e., planter box). See Document 051122 for the clearances to building walls.

  3. Gates and doors may be placed with minimal clearance in front of the transformers if the required 8-foot clearance is available with the doors or gates open.

References Location Document

Location, Clearances, and Mechanical Protection Details for Pad-Mounted and Subsurface Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 051122

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 1 of 12

Greenbook Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Landscape Screen

‘‘Field Stone” 12” H x 12” W x 24” L

Concrete Apron

Low Evergreen

‘‘Field Stone” 24” H x 24” W x 36” L

‘‘Field Stone” 12” H x 12” W x 24” L

Low Growing Evergreen Shrubs with Flowers

‘‘Field Stone”

‘‘Field Stone”

Typical Plan View

Perspective − Resident’s View

Figure 1 Landscape Screen

Table 1 List of Material for Landscape Screen

Quantity Description
4
“Son
oma Field Stones”
10-12
Low
Evergreen Shrubs (5 gallon size)
1/2 Cubic Yard
Conc
rete (4” deep, broom finish)1
1/2 Cubic Yard
Grav
el Sub Base (4” deep)1

1 Excluding transformer pad.

063422 Page 2 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

Greenbook

Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Planter Wall Screen

Low, Spreading

4” x 4” Post

2” x 6” Cap (2) 2” x 12” Redwood

Wood Gate 2” x 12” Rough Redwood W/ 2” x 4” Frame

With 8’ Level Clear Space (see Note 8 on Page 1)

2” x 6” Redwood Cap (continuous)

2’-0”

(2) 2” x 12” Rough Redwood

Perspective − Resident’s View

Figure 2 Planter Wall Screen

Concrete Apron

Plan View

2’-0”

Table 2 List of Materials for Planter Wall Screen

Quantity Description
6
2”
x 12” Rough Redwood (12 feet long)
4
2”
x 12” Rough Redwood (8 feet long)
3
2”
x 6“ Rough Redwood (12 feet long)
5
4”
x 4” Rough Redwood (8 feet long)
1/2 Cubic Yard
C
oncrete (broom finish)1
1/2 Cubic Yard
G
ravel Sub Base (4” deep)1
10
L
ow Evergreen Shrubs ( 5 gallon size)
4
2”
x 4” Rough Redwood (8 feet long)
1
2”
x 6“ Rough Redwood (8 feet long)

1 Excluding transformer pad.

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 3 of 12

Greenbook Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Wall for Screening

Concrete Apron

Row of Used Brick

Concrete Block Wall

Rebar Typical

Transformer
Pad
(front)
Transformer
Pad
(front)
Transformer
Pad
(front)
Transformer
Pad
(front)
Transformer
Pad
(front)
Transformer
Pad
(front)
Transformer
Pad
(front)
Transformer
Pad
(front)
Transformer
Pad
(front)

Plan View

± 2’-0”

Perspective − Resident’s View

Figure 3 Wall for Screening

Table 3 List of Materials for Wall for Screening

Used Brick 2 5/8” H X 3 5/8” W X 8” L

Concrete Block 8” H x 8” W x 16” L with Tan Color and ‘‘Combed” Finish

Quantity Description
80 Used Bricks
Mortar
52 Concrete Blocks (8” W x 8” H x 16” L)
1/2 Cubic Yard Concrete (4” deep, broom finish)1
1/2 Cubic Yard Gravel Sub Base (4” deep)1
1/2” x 2’ Rebar for Cells at Block Corners and Edges (minimum of 8 pieces)

Grout Fill for Block Corners and Edges

1 Excluding transformer pad.

063422 Page 4 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

Retaining Wall

Concrete Apron

Greenbook

Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Evergreen Shrubs

Precast ‘‘Polymer” Concrete Wall

Plan View

Polymer Concrete Wall

Perspective − Resident’s View

Figure 4 Retaining Wall

Table 4 List of Materials for Retaining Wall

Quantity Description
12-14
Low, Evergreen Shrubs (5 gallon size)
19 LF

2’ Polymer Concrete Wall
1/2 Cubic Yard

Concrete (4” deep, broom finish)1
1/2 Cubic Yard

Gravel Sub Base (4” deep)1

1 Excluding transformer pad.

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 5 of 12

Greenbook Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Pole and Landscape Screen

Low, Evergreen Shrubs with Thorns or Barbs

Lodgepoles or Pine Bark Pole, 10”-12” Diameter

4” Min.

Concrete Apron

Concrete

Plan View 6”

Lodgepol
6”

12”
Con
Lodgepo
24”
18”
6”

12”
Con
Lodgepo
24”
18”
6”
6”

12”
Con
Lodgepo
24”
18”

Section

Lodgepoles

Perspective − Resident’s View

Figure 5 Pole and Landscape Screen

Table 5 List of Materials

1 Excluding transformer pad

063422 Page 6 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

Greenbook

Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for Stockton, Yosemite, Fresno, and Kern Divisions

Notes

  1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.

  2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.

  3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Plants
(shrubs)
Climatic Zones
Plants
(shrubs)
Zone 1 Zone 7 Zone 8 Zone 9 Zone 14
Plants
(shrubs)
Cold Climate,
High Elevation,
Snow All Year,
Frost All Year,
High Mountain,
Area
Warm Climate,
Hot Summer,
Mild Winters,
Low
Elevations,
Foothill Area
Warm Climate,
Cold-Air Basins In
Winter,
Low Elevations,
Hot, Dry
Summers,
Cool Winter
Hot Climate,
Within Thermal
Belt,
Warmer and Higher
Elevations than
Zone 8,
Foothill Areas
Warm Climate,
Low Elevation,
Hot and Dry
Summers,
Mainly Inland
Valley Areas
Arctostaphylos “Hookeri”
(Monterey Manzanita)
X X
Arctostaphylos “Emerald
Carpet” (Manzanita)
X X
Arctostaphylos “Uva
Ursi” (Bearberry)
X X
Caenothus G.H. “Yankee
Point” (Yankee Point
Ceanothus)
X X
Nandina Domestica
(Heavenly Bamboo)
X X X X
Agapanthus Orientalis
(Lily-of-the-Nile)
X X X X
Santolina
Chamaecyparissus
(Lavender Cotton)
X X X X X
Cistus Hybridus
(White Rockrose)
X X X
Cistus Purpureus
(Purple Rockrose)
X X X
Raphiolepis I. “Coates
Crimson”
(Indian Hawthorn)
X X X
Raphiolepis I.
“Enchantress”
(Indian Hawthorn)
X X X
Eriophyllum
Confertiflorum
(Yellow Yarrow)
X X X X X
Juniperus Conferta
(Shore Juniper)
X X X X X
Rosemarinus Officinalus
(Creeping Rosemary)
X X X

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 7 of 12

Greenbook Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for San Francisco, Peninsula, and DeAnza Divisions

Notes

  1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.

  2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.

  3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Plants
(shrubs)
Climatic Zones
Plants
(shrubs)
Zone 14 Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17
Plants
(shrubs)
Warm Climate,
Low Elevation,
Hot and Dry
Summers,
Mainly Inland
Valley Areas
Mild Climate,
Coastal Influence,
Cool-Air Basins in
Coast Mountain
Areas
Mild Climate,
Coastal Influence,
Within the Thermal
Belt,
Coastal Mountain
Areas
Coastal Climate,
Cool Winters and Hot
Summers,
Coastal Plain and Bay
Shoreline
Senecio Cineraria
(Dusty Miller)
X X X X
Arctostaphylos “Hookeri”
(Monterey Manzanita)
X X X X
Caenothus G.H. “Yankee
Point” (Yankee Point
Ceanothus)
X X X X
Cistus Hybridus
(White Rockrose)
X X
Cistus Purpureus
(Purple Rockrose)
X X
Santolina Chamaecyparissus
(Lavender Cotton)
X X X X
Raphiolepis I. “Coates
Crimson” (Indian Hawthorn)
X X X X
Raphiolepis I. “Enchantress”
(Indian Hawthorn)
X X X X
Pinus Mugo Mughos
(Dwarf Forms)
X X X X
Eriophyllum Confertiflorum
(Yellow Yarrow)
X X X X
Juniperus Conferta
(Shore Juniper)
X X X X
Rosemarinus Officinalus
(Creeping Rosemary)
X X X X
Cotoneaster Horizontalis
(Rock Cotoneaster)
X X X X
Nandina Domestica
(Heavenly Bamboo)
X X X X
Agapanthus Orientalis
(Lily-of-the-Nile)
X X X X

063422 Page 8 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

Greenbook

Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for San Jose, Central Coast, and Los Padres Divisions

Notes

  1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.

  2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.

  3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Plants
(shrubs)
Climatic Zones
Plants
(shrubs)
Zone 7 Zone 14 Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17
Plants
(shrubs)
Warm Climate,
Hot Summer,
Mild Winters,
Low Elevations,
Foothill Area
Warm Climate,
Low Elevation,
Hot and Dry
Summers,
Mainly Inland
Valley Areas
Mild Climate,
Coastal Influence,
Cool-Air Basins in
Coastal Mountain
Areas
Mild Climate,
Coastal Influence
Within the Thermal
Belt,
Coastal Mountain
Areas
Coastal Climate,
Cool Winters
and Hot
Summers,
Coastal Plain
and Bay
Shoreline
Senecio Cineraria
(Dusty Miller)
X X X X X
Arctostaphylos “Uva
Ursi” (Bearberry)
X X X X X
Arctostaphylos “Hookeri”
(Monterey Manzanita)
X X X X X
Arctostaphylos “Emerald
Carpet” (Manzanita)
X X X X X
Cistus Hybridus
(White Rockrose)
X X X
Cistus Purpureus
(Purple Rockrose)
X X X
Santolina
Chamaecyparissus
(Lavender Cotton)
X X X X X
Raphiolepis I. “Coates
Crimson”
(Indian Hawthorn)
X X
Pinus Mugo Mughos
(Dwarf Forms)
X X X X X
Eriophyllum
Confertiflorum
(Yellow Yarrow)
X X X X X
Juniperus Conferta
(Shore Juniper)
X X X X X
Rosemarinus Officinalus
(Creeping Rosemary)
X X X X X
Cotoneaster Horizontalis
(Rock Cotoneaster)
X X X X X
Nandina Domestica
(Heavenly Bamboo)
X X X X X
Agapanthus Orientalis
(Lily-of-the-Nile)
X X X X

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 9 of 12

Greenbook Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for North Valley, Sierra, and Sacramento Divisions

Notes

  1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.

  2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.

  3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Plants
(shrubs)
Climatic Zones
Plants
(shrubs)
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 7 Zone 8 Zone 9 Zone 14
Plants
(shrubs)
Cold Climate,
High
Elevation,
Snow All
Year,
Frost All
Year,
High
Mountain
Area
Cold Climate,
Snow and
Frost 50% of
the Year,
Mountain
Areas
Warm
Climate,
Hot Summer,
Mild Winters,
Low
Elevations,
Foothill Area
Warm Climate,
Cold Air Basins
in Winter,
Low Elevations,
Hot, Dry
Summers,
Cool Winter
Hot Climate
Within the
Thermal Belt,
Warmer and
Higher
Elevations than
Zone 8,
Foothill Areas
Warm Climate,
Low Elevation,
Hot and Dry
Summers,
Mainly Inland
Valley Areas
Senecio Cineraria
(Dusty Miller)
X X
Arctostaphylos
“Hookeri”
(Monterey
Manzanita)
X X
Arctostaphylos
“Emerald Carpet”
(Manzanita)
X X
Euryoes
Pectinatus
(Desert Daisy)
X
Juniperus Conferta
(Shore Juniper)
X X X X X X
Santolina
Chamaecyparissus
(Lavender Cotton)
X X X X X X
Cistus Hybridus
(White Rockrose)
X X X
Cistus Purpureus
(Purple Rockrose)
X X X
Eriophyllum
Confertiflorum
(Yellow Yarrow)
X X X X X X
Agapanthus
Orientalia
(Lily-of-the-Nile)
X X X X

063422 Page 10 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

Greenbook

Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for Diablo, Mission, and East Bay Divisions

Notes

  1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.

  2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.

  3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Plants
(shrubs)
Climatic Zones
Plants
(shrubs)
Zone 7 Zone 14 Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17
Plants
(shrubs)
Warm Climate,
Hot Summer,
Mild Winters,
Low
Elevations,
Foothill Area
Warm Climate,
Low Elevation,
Hot and Dry
Summers,
Mainly Inland
Valley Areas
Mild Climate,
Coastal Influence,
Cool-Air Basins in
Coastal Mountain
Areas
Mild Climate,
Coastal Influence
Within the Thermal
Belt,
Coastal Mountain
Areas
Coastal Climate,
Cool Winters and
Hot Summers,
Coastal Plain and
Bay Shoreline
Senecio Cineraria
(Dusty Miller)
X X X X
Arctostaphylos “Hookeri”
(Monterey Manzanita)
X X X X X
Euryops Pectinatus
(Desert Daisy)
X X X X
Cistus Hybridus
(White Rockrose)
X X X
Cistus Purpureus
(Purple Rockrose)
X X X
Santolina
Chamaecyparissus
(Lavender Cotton)
X X X X X
Raphiolepis I. “Coates
Crimson”
(Indian Hawthorn)
X X X X
Raphiolepis I.
“Enchantress”
(Indian Hawthorn)
X X X X
Pinus Mugo Mughos
(Dwarf Forms)
X X X X X
Ceanothus G.H. “Yankee
Point” (Yankee Point
Ceanothus)
X X X X X
Juniperus Conferta
(Shore Juniper)
X X X X X
Cotoneaster Horizontalis
(Rock Cotoneaster)
X X X X X
Nandina Domestica
(Heavenly Bamboo)
X X X X X
Agapanthus Orientalis
(Lily-of-the-Nile)
X X X X X

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 11 of 12

Greenbook Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for North Coast, and North Bay Divisions

Notes

  1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.

  2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.

  3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Plants
(shrubs)
Climatic Zones
Plants
(shrubs)
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 7 Zone 14 Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17
Plants
(shrubs)
Cold
Climate,
High Elev.
and
Snow All
Year, Frost
All Year,
High
Mountain
Areas
Cold
Climate,
Snow and
Frost 50%
of the Year,
Mountain
Areas
Warm
Climate,
Hot
Summers,
Mild
Winters,
Low
Elevations,
Foothill
Areas
Warm
Climate,
Low
Elevation,
Hot and
Dry
Summers,
Mainly
Inland
Valley
Areas
Mild
Climate,
Coastal
Influence,
Cool-air
Basins in
Coast
Mountain
Areas
Mild
Climate,
Coastal
Influence
Within the
Thermal
Belt,
Coastal
Mountain
Areas
Coastal
Climate,
Cool
Winters
and Hot
Summers,
Coastal
Plain and
Bay
Shoreline
Senecio Cineraria
(Dusty Miller)
X X X X X
Arctostaphylos “Hookeri”
(Monterey Manzanita)
X X X X X
Arctostaphylos “Emerald
Carpet” (Manzanita)
X X X X X
Ceanothus G.H. “Yankee
Point” (Yankee Pt.
Ceanothus)
X X X X X
Euryops Pectinatus
(Desert Daisy)
X X X X
Juniperus Conferta
(Shore Juniper)
X X X X X X X
Santolina
Chamaecyparissus
(Lavender Cotton)
X X X X X X X
Cistus Hybridus
(White Rockrose)
X X X
Cistus Purpureus
(Purple Rockrose)
X X X
Mahona Aquifolium
“Compacta”
(Oregon Grape)
X X X X X X X
Raphiolepis I. “Coates
Crimson”
(Indian Hawthorn)
X X X X X
Pinus Mugo Mughos
(Dwarf Forms)
X X X X X X X

Revision Notes

Revision 04 has the following changes:

  1. Revised Note 6 and Note 8 on Page 1.

063422 Page 12 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Prepared by: MZGD

This document is also included in the following manual:

Purpose and Scope

This document shows the methods and requirements for installing PG&E-owned, underground service cables in customer-owned, residential, terminating facilities. See Document 058817 for terminating underground services.

General Information

  1. Underground electric service laterals are normally installed in a PG&E service trench or in a joint trench with natural gas and communication service facilities.

  2. To determine the most satisfactory meter location, PG&E should be contacted for requirements while the building is in the planning stage.

  3. When it is necessary to install a service 75 feet or longer, the applicant must contact PG&E before ordering the service riser, conduit, or termination enclosure. If the service riser and/or conduit specified in Table 3 on Page 5 of this document will not accept the cable required to meet flicker and/or voltage drop requirements, a larger conduit must be installed. This could require the installation of a larger termination enclosure.

  4. Install a splice box whenever cable pulling tensions may be exceeded or whenever there is a change in cable or conduit size.

  5. Ensure that any new installed secondary distribution cable is not smaller, either in size or in number of runs, than the largest new service that is on the load side of that new secondary system. For example, if the largest service required will be 1−350 Al, then the secondary must be a minimum of 1−350 Al. The existing secondary distribution system can remain as is if it can adequately supports any new services without causing loading, voltage drop, and voltage flicker issues.

Residential Services Information

  1. A ‘‘residential service’’ is a service supplying a single or multi-metered residential building. This document addresses services through 600 amp, single-phase for 120/240 V. For three-phase residential services or services larger than 600 amp, see Document 063928. Single-phase main service switches must not exceed 225 amps for 120/208 V services.

A. Standard voltage for single metered residential building is 120/240 V.

B. All single-phase, 120/208 V services require full-sized neutral.

C. 800 amp single phase services are not allowed. 800 amp rated services and larger must be three-phase, and terminate in pad-mounted switchgear.

  1. Minimum service requirements.

A. Install the number and size of conduits as shown in Table 3 on Page 5, based on the main service panel rating. No more than seven service conduits, of any size, will be supplied from any one transformer.

B. Install the number and size of conductors, as shown in Table 3 on Page 5, to meet the individual initial demand load. Take load characteristics and growth into consideration.

C. It is permissible to install a smaller transformer and fewer conductors to serve a long term initial load with the intent of installing a larger transformer and additional conductors should future load increase occur.

Rev. #24: 03−25−22 063927 Page 1 of 7

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities

D. Always size the transformer pad to accommodate the largest transformer size necessary to serve the combined ampacity of all services. Never exceed more than seven sets of conductors per transformer.

E. Vacant ducts, if any, are to be used to serve future load increases.

  1. Residential design includes mobile home and mobile home parks parks that are individually metered and not master−metered. For mobile home park design requirements see Document 052521, “Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments”.

  2. Conduit is required for residential services, including multi-metered residential buildings.

10. The applicant must provide the trench, conduit, and backfill in accordance with Electric Rule 16 and PG&E requirements. PG&E will furnish and install the service cables and make the connection at the point of service delivery in the applicant’s service termination enclosure. Qualification of material for use as backfill is the responsibility of the job foreman or, in the case of contract work, the inspector or their designer. A visual inspection of the material is sufficient for evaluation of the material. The source of the backfill, native or import, is immaterial to the suitability of the backfill for use in the trench. In new construction areas, the developer may be required to have a soils report available, which will assist in determining if import backfill is necessary.

  1. Soil compaction must meet PG&E’s and any applicable federal, state, county, and local requirements. PG&E specific soil compaction requirements are as follows:

A. Trenches that run across or along public roads and streets in the franchise areas must have soil compacted to a minimum of 95% density.

B. Trenches that run across private properties and in all other areas must have soil compacted to a minimum of 90% density.

C. A compaction test report may be required by PG&E. This report must include the testing company information: Name, Address, Contact information.

  1. Service conduits installed through or under the applicant’s building foundation/slab must not exceed 20’ past the outside wall of the building and must terminate into the electrical room. See Figure 4 in Page 6. The installation requirements and conduit types for PG&E’s service conductors used in this application must be as indicated below;

A. Conduits must not pass under or through one building to supply adjacent buildings.

B. UL651 approved PVC Schedule 40 or 80.

C. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS). GRS conduit is required when the conduit will be exposed, installed along walls and low clearance ceilings, and may be subject to damage from vehicles, machinery, or tools.

  1. To avoid cable insulation damage, the ends of conduits must be provided with a suitable fitting, such as a bushing, hub, or end bell.

  2. When an applicant’s main service panel is installed in an electric meter and service termination room, the room must be built with one wall and a door that leads to the outside of the applicant’s building. See Greenbook Section 5.3.4. Electric Meter Rooms.

n electric meter and service termination room, the room must be built with one wall and a door that leads to the outside of the applicant’s building. See Greenbook Section 5.3.4. Electric Meter Rooms.

  1. When service terminations/connections are made at the customer termination can or pull section, whether the service is left energized or de-energized,

A. Cover and seal all meter sockets with an approved blank-off cover (Pie Plate) or set the electric meter(s). Material codes for electric meter socket covers are M249424 and M249559 .

B. Seal all seal-able covers on the customer owned panel using PG&E approved seals.

  1. Potential water intrusion into service conduits and meter termination facilities.

A. Water intrusion into service conduits and meter termination facilities may occur if the source side of the service facilities (e.g., secondary splice box) is at an elevation greater than the meter termination facilities.

B. CPUC General Order 128, Rule 31.6 requires “Lateral ducts for services to buildings, through which water may enter buildings, must be plugged or sealed at the customer meter panel and at the source end of the service conduit.”

C. When the intrusion of water into the service and metering equipment can be reasonably expected through lateral ducts, the conduits must be sealed at both ends using one of the PG&E approved sealing method shown in Document 062288.

063927 Page 2 of 7 Rev. #24: 03−25−22

Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

D. If the meter termination facilities are significantly lower than the source side facilities, use the Rayflate Duct Sealing System (RDSS) conduit sealing system listed in Document 062288. E. The applicant is responsible for providing a means to prevent the accumulation of excess water pressure in the service conduit system. This is accomplished by the following methods: (1) For wall-mounted service and metering equipment install an enclosure, outside, at the base of the riser to the meter panel, or at a maximum of 6 feet away from the meter panel along the service run.

(a) Install a 26” deep #2 enclosure, and enter through the short walls making sure to maintain the 18” minimum depth from finish grade to the top of the conduit. See Figure 1 on Page 3.

(b) Install the enclosure on a twelve-inch base of one-inch rock to aid in the drainage of the unwanted water, align the conduits at either end to achieve a nearly straight through pull and install end bell fittings on all conduits.

(c) Seal both ends of the service conduit from the drain enclosure to the customer meter panel.

” Min.
2” to 4” 2” to 4”
12” high, 1” rock base
12” high, 1” rock base
2” to 4”
2” to 4”
” Min.
12” high, 1” rock base
2” to 4”
2” to 4”
” Min.
12” high, 1” rock base

Figure 1 Conduit Installation in a Drain Box

(2) For indoor electric meter rooms below grade level, a reliable method of water mitigation and drainage must be incorporated into the design of the meter room(s) to prevent the accumulation of water. 17. Prior to cable installation, all conduits must be proven free and clear by means of a mandrel or other methods acceptable to PG&E. A polyester flat pulling tape, white with sequential footage markings every foot, 2,500 minimum tensile strength, and approved by PG&E ( Code M560154 ), must be installed in all conduits and attached to an end cap (see Document 063928).

Upgraded Panel

  1. For upgraded panels where the new specified size of service conductor will fit in the existing conduit, it is not necessary to upgrade the conduit to the currently specified size and number for the new panel if all of the following are met:

A. The maximum conduit fill ratio is not exceeded.

B. The calculated cable pulling tensions along the conduit route is within limits of the new cable.

C. Copper or larger size of Aluminum cable is able to handle full load in existing number of conduits. See Table 1 below.

Table 1 Service Cable Size Allowed in Existing Conduit When Upgrading Panels

Existing Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
New Upgrade
Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
Minimum
Allowed Existing
Conduit Size
and Number
Aluminum or Copper Cable
Required to Serve Maximum
Load AWG or kcmil1
Existing Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
New Upgrade
Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
Minimum
Allowed Existing
Conduit Size
and Number
(Per Phase) Neutral
100−125 200−225 1−2” 1−4/0 Al 1−1/0 Al
200−225 320 1−3” 1−350 Al 1−4/0 Al
320 400 1−3” 1−750 Al 1−4/0 Al
400 600 1−4” 1−1000 Al2 1−350 Al

1 Mixing Aluminum and Copper cable runs for the same service is not allowed. 2 Center conduit underneath middle hot leg to allow flexibility to terminate the conductor.

Rev. #24: 03−25−22 063927 Page 3 of 7

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities

  1. If the new panel is able to accommodate it, the existing service conductor may be reused provided it meets the load, voltage drop, and flicker requirements of the new load. If the service conductor size must be upgraded, the existing conduit must be proofed with a mandrel.

  2. For existing panels that are less than 36” horizontally away from the gas service riser, it is allowed to use the existing service conduit and extend new conduit of the same size and material to a new panel location that is 36” or more away from the gas riser as long as all the parameters listed in Notes 18, 19, 20, and 21 are met.

A. For service runs that approach the front of the existing panel, directly or at an angle, the new conduit will need to start back along the existing conduit and far enough away from the new panel location to minimize additional bends in the conduit system.

B. The new total number of bends must be within the maximum 315 ° allowed for service conduit run. For further information refer to Document 038193.

C. The new panel must be relocated no more than 20’ away from the existing panel.

  1. For upgraded panels, splice boxes are not allowed on private property to accommodate customers’ existing services. Service cable needs to be brought up to our current standard conduit service system from the customer meter to PG&E point of secondary distribution.

  2. Notes 18, 19, 20, and 21 do not apply to the following conditions:

A. Direct buried or Cable-In-Conduit (CIC) service cables. Direct buried and CIC service cables must be replaced with approved service cable and installed in approved service conduit.

(1) Splice boxes between the customer panel, with existing DB or CIC cable, and PG&E secondary distribution system are not allowed. See Note 22 above.

B. Upgraded electric meter panels that are within 36 inches of the gas service riser. The clearance requirements in Greenbook Section 5.4.3., “Meter Set Clearance Requirements” must be met for upgraded and relocated meter panels.

C. New upgraded panels with a Service Equipment Rating (amps) that is more than one upgraded size than the existing panel, as specified in Table 3 on Page 5. For example, if an existing panel less than or equal to 100 amps is upgraded to a 400 amp panel instead of a 200 amp panel.

D. If the existing cable size is more than one size smaller than the cable required to serve maximum load for the new panel, as specified in Table 3 on Page 5. For example, if the existing cable is #2 AWG aluminum and new upgraded panel requires 4/0 aluminum.

Cover

  1. A minimum of 24 inches of cover for secondary (0 - 750 V) electric service, or 36 inches minimum cover for primary (over 750 V) is required. Cover is the distance from the outer surface of an underground facility to the top of the final grade. The actual trench depth will be greater (approximately 30 inches or 42 inches minimum respectively) to accommodate the underground facility, bedding, enclosures, riser sweeps, and joint trench installations with other utilities.

ce, or 36 inches minimum cover for primary (over 750 V) is required. Cover is the distance from the outer surface of an underground facility to the top of the final grade. The actual trench depth will be greater (approximately 30 inches or 42 inches minimum respectively) to accommodate the underground facility, bedding, enclosures, riser sweeps, and joint trench installations with other utilities.

Temporary Service 24. The policy of using permanent service panels to supply temporary power is expanding. Schedule 40 or 80 PVC riser conduit may be damaged by staples and nails, and this has resulted in damage to service cables. Therefore, for those locations where cable will be installed or that will be energized prior to completion of the wall, the conduit must be Schedule 40, rigid steel conduit, to protect the service cables from damage caused by siding nails, etc. Refer to Greenbook Section 5.9.1., “Temporary Service Using Permanent Service Panels”.

Table 2 Service Conduit Types Approved for Underground Application

Type Specification 3
(must be marked on conduit)
Hot-Dip, Galvanized, Rigid Steel ANSI Spec. C80.1
PVC, Co-extruded Cellular Core PVC, Schedule 40 or 80 UL 651, or ETL conforms to UL 651

3 The entire “conduit system” must meet the specifications listed above. The conduit system includes conduits, conduit bends, conduit fittings or couplings and all related components (e.g., end bells and cable protectors) that are needed to install PG&E cables and conductors.

063927 Page 4 of 7 Rev. #24: 03−25−22

Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Table 3 Service Conduit Types Approved for Underground Application Cable and Conduit Requirements for Residential Services

Service Equipment
Rating (amps) 1
Conduit Size
and Number 2
Minimum
Vertical
Radius
Minimum
Horizontal
Radius
Aluminum Cable Required
to Serve Maximum Load
AWG or kcmil 6
Service Equipment
Rating (amps)1
Conduit Size
and Number2
Minimum
Vertical
Radius
Minimum
Horizontal
Radius
(Per Phase) Neutral
100−125 1−2” 24” 36” 1−1/0 1−#2
200−225 1−3” 24” 36”7 1−4/0 1−1/0
3203 1−3” 24” 36”7 1−350 1−4/0
4004, 5 1−4” 36” 36” 1−750 1−4/0
6004, 5 2−3” 24” 36”7 2−350 2−4/0

1 Service rating must be the termination section, pullcan, service section, or main service switch continuous current rating, whichever is greater. 2 See Note 3 on Page 1 for size and distance limitations, Note 12 on Page 2 for conduit type allowed on or within buildings, and Table 2 above for conduit type allowed underground. 3 Require manual bypass facilities. 4 Require transformer rated meter. 5 Requires two bolt terminations and cable to spade connectors. Lay-in lugs are not allowed. 6 Cable size shown in Table 3 is the minimum size cable that must be used. 7 Available only on 90 degree bends.

Service Installation

Notes

  1. A Vertical 90 ° manufactured sweep is required to be installed to meet trench grade. The riser conduit must not protrude away from the wall or mounted panel.

A. Couplings on the riser conduit installed inside the building foundation must be no higher than flush with the top of the concrete. Couplings installed outside building foundation must be installed a minimum of 6” below final grade.

  1. The conduit end must extend at least 12 inches away from the foundation. Install the sweep in the direction of the service trench. If a deeper trench is required, the sweep must extend to the same depth as the conduit in the trench.

  2. A minimum of 24 inches of cover must be maintained from the top of conduit to final grade.

4. See Greenbook Section 5.4.3. for electric service and metering room requirements.

5. See Greenbook Section 3.2.2. for establishing PG&E and applicants underground electric service responsibilities.

Rev. #24: 03−25−22 063927 Page 5 of 7

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities

Service Installation (Continued)

Coupling

Building Foundation

Foundation

Min.

Min.

Figure 2 Recessed-Mounted Service Termination Enclosure

Figure 3 Surface-Mounted Service Termination

Inner Building Wall

Outer Building Wall
Final Grade
Switchboard
Cable Termination
Compartment (side view)
To Customer’s Indoor
Termination Enclosure
Up to 20’ Beyond the
Building Outside Wall
Final Grade
Outer Building Wall
Final Grade
Outer Building Wall
Final Grade
Outer Building Wall
Final Grade
Outer Building Wall
Building Foundation Building Foundation

Coupling

Figure 4 Indoor Service Termination and Metering Enclosure in Electric Room

Full 90 ° Bend required

063927 Page 6 of 7 Rev. #24: 03−25−22

Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

References Location Document Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Enclosures/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028028 Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 038193 Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greenbook/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 052521 Terminating Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817 Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288 Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928

Revision Notes

Revision 24 has the following changes:

  1. Updated Note 5 on Page 1.

  2. Revised Note 6 on Page 1 to add limit to single-phase service for 120/200V.

  3. Modified Note 7A on Page 1.

  4. Added compaction requirements to Note 10 on Page 2.

  5. Modified Note 11 on Page 2.

  6. Moved section of what used to be part of Note 12 to new Note 13 on Page 2.

  7. Added new Note 15 on Page 2.

  8. Re−structured Note 16 on Page 2.

  9. Added Note 18C on Page 3.

  10. Added new Figure 1 on Page 3.

  11. Added new Table 1 on Page 3.

  12. Added new Notes 20 and 21 on Page 4.

  13. Added Note 22A1 on Page 4.

  14. Added Note 1A under Service Installation on Page 5.

  15. Modified Figures 2, 3, and added Figure 4 on Page 6.

  16. Moved Reference sections to the end of the document before Revision notes on Page 7.

  17. Added document 038193 to Reference Section on Page 7.

Rev. #24: 03−25−22 063927 Page 7 of 7

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Prepared by: MZGD

This document is also included in the following manuals:

Purpose and Scope

This document shows the methods and requirements for installing PG&E-owned underground service conductors in commercial buildings and three-phase multi-residential buildings. For agricultural underground service refer to Document 054619 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80dfe6e1' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

General Information

1. See Document 058817 for terminating underground electric service 0−600 V in customer owned facilities.

  1. Single-phase main service switches must not exceed 200 amps for 120/208 V services or 600 amps for 120/240 V services. All single-phase, 120/208 V services require full-sized neutrals.
  2. Ensure that any new installed secondary-distribution cable is not smaller, either in size or in number of runs, than the largest new service that is on the load side of that new secondary system. For example, if the largest service required will be 1-350 Al, then the secondary must be a minimum of 1-350 Al. The existing secondary distribution system can remain as is if it can adequately support any new services without causing loading, voltage drop, and voltage flicker issues.

Customer Requirements

  1. The applicant must provide trench and backfill in accordance with Electric Rule 16 and PG&E requirements. PG&E will furnish and install the service cables and make the connection at the point of service delivery in the applicant’s service termination enclosure. Qualification of material for use as backfill is the responsibility of the job foreman or, in the case of contract work, the inspector or their designer. A visual inspection of the material is sufficient for evaluation of the material. The source of the backfill, native or import, is immaterial to the suitability of the backfill for the use in the trench. In new construction areas, the developer may be required to have a soil report available, which will assist in determining if import backfill is necessary. Soil compaction must meet PG&E’s and any applicable federal, state, county, and local requirements. PG&E specific soil compaction requirements are as follows:

r import, is immaterial to the suitability of the backfill for the use in the trench. In new construction areas, the developer may be required to have a soil report available, which will assist in determining if import backfill is necessary. Soil compaction must meet PG&E’s and any applicable federal, state, county, and local requirements. PG&E specific soil compaction requirements are as follows:

A. Trenches that run across or along public roads and streets in the franchise areas must have soil compacted to a minimum of 95% density .

B. Trenches that run across private properties and in all other areas must have soil compacted to a minimum of 90% density.

C. A compaction test report may be required by PG&E. This report must include the testing company information: Name, Address, Contact Information.

Rev. #26: 03−25−22 063928 Page 1 of 9

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities

  1. Service conduits installed through or under the applicant’s building foundation/slab must not exceed 20’ past the outside wall of the building and must terminate into the electrical room. See Figure 4 on Page 8. The installation requirements and conduit types for PG&E service conductors used in this application must be as indicated below;

A. Conduits must not pass under or through one building to supply adjacent buildings.

B. UL651 approved PVC Schedule 40 or 80.

C. Galvanized rigid steel (GRS). GRS conduit is required when the conduit will be exposed, installed along walls and low clearance ceilings, and may be subject to damage from vehicles, machinery or tools.

  1. To avoid cable insulation damage, the end of the conduit must be provided with a suitable termination fitting such as a bushing, hub, or end bell.
  2. When an applicant’s main service panel is installed in an electric meter and service termination room, the room must be built with one wall and a door that leads to the outside of the applicant’s building. See Figure 4 on Page 8. See Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)Section 5.3.4 “Electric Meter Rooms”.
  3. State or local building codes require special conduit seals in certain locations, such as gasoline and hydrogen filling stations. If the underground service conduit runs within a 20’ horizontal radius of a gas pump (from any edge of the dispenser enclosure), or within a 10’ horizontal radius of an underground gas tank. Similarly, if the underground service conduit runs within a 5’ horizontal radius of a hydrogen cooling block, dispenser, or storage, or within 15’ horizontal radius of a hydrogen compressor, services should maintain the required clearances listed in this note all the way to the customer meter panel so the electric conduit and cable are designed per PG&E current requirements. Otherwise, the applicant is be responsible for meeting PG&E, the National Electric Code (NEC), Canadian Electric Code (CEC)/ or Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) requirements listed in A−C below:

A. The type of conduit required from the meter termination point to the connection point with PG&E.

(1) Install PG&E approved secondary number 5 concrete box. See Document 028028 for ordering information.

(2) Use approved secondary multi−ways tap slices for PG&E to join PG&E’s secondary cable to customer owned cable. See Document 036640 for ordering information.

B. The installation and maintenance of special fittings (explosion−proof) and sealing compounds at both ends.

C. The type of cable required from the meter termination point to the connection point with PG&E. This section of cable is customer owned, installed and maintained.

  1. Prior to cable installation, prove all conduits free and clear by means of a mandrel PG&E approved. A PG&E-approved polyester, flat pulling tape, white with sequential footage markings every foot, and 2,500-pound minimum tensile strength ( Code M560154 ), must be installed in all conduits and attached to an end cap.
  2. Install a splice box whenever cable pulling tensions are exceeded, or a change in cable or conduit size is required. The applicant must contact the local PG&E office to determine these requirements.
  3. Test bypass facilities are required for both single phase and three phase non-residential installations regardless of the panel ampacity.

PG&E Requirements

  1. If PG&E service conductors are to be run in a multiple conduit system, all phases and the neutral must be installed in each conduit that is used.

  2. PG&E will furnish and install the underground service conductors and make connections in the applicant’s service termination enclosure.

  3. Potential water intrusion into service conduits and meter termination facilities

A. Water intrusion into service conduits and meter termination facilities may occur if the source side of the service facilities (e.g., secondary splice box) is at an elevation greater than the meter termination facilities.

B. CPUC General Order 128, Rule 31.6 requires “Lateral ducts for services to buildings, through which water may enter buildings, must be plugged or sealed.”

C. When the intrusion of water into the service and metering equipment can be reasonably expected through lateral ducts, the conduits must be sealed at both ends using one of the PG&E approved sealing method shown in Document 062288.

D. If the meter termination facilities are significantly lower than the source side facilities, use the Rayflate Duct Sealing System (RDSS) conduit sealing system listed in Document 062288 .

063928 Page 2 of 9 Rev. #26: 03−25−22

Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

E. The applicant is responsible for providing a means to prevent the accumulation of excess water pressure in the service conduit system. This is accomplished by the following methods:

(1) For wall−mounted service and metering equipment install an enclosure, outside, at the base of the riser to the meter panel, or at a maximum of 6 feet away from the meter panel along the service run.

(a) For 4” service conduit or smaller, in stall a 26” deep #2 enclosure, and enter through the short walls, making sure to maintain the 18” minimum depth from finish grade to top of the conduit. See Figure 1 on Page 3.

(b) For 5” service conduit (up to 3 conduits), install a 26” deep #3 enclosure, and enter through the short walls, making sure to maintain the 18” minimum depth from finish grade to the top of the conduit. See Figure 1 below.

(c) For either 14E(1)(a) or 14E(1)(b) box installation, install the enclosure on a twelve-inch base of, one-inch rock to aid in the drainage of the unwanted water, align the conduits at either end to achieve a nearly straight pull and install end bell fittings on all conduits.

(d) Seal both ends of the service conduit form the drain enclosure to the customer meter panel.

” Min.
2” to 4” 2” to 4”
12” high, 1” rock base
2” to 4”
2” to 4”
” Min.
12” high, 1” rock base
2” to 4”
2” to 4”
” Min.
12” high, 1” rock base
12” high, 1” rock base

Figure 1 Conduit Installation in a Drain Box

(2) For indoor electric meter rooms below grade level, a reliable method of water mitigation and drainage must be incorporated into the design of the meter room(s) to prevent the accumulation of water. 15. When service termination/connections are made at the customer termination can or pull section, whether the serviced is left energized or de-energized,

A. Cover and seal all meter sockets with an approved blank-off cover (Pie Plate) or set the electric meter(s). Material codes for electric meter socket covers are M249424 and M249559 .

B. Seal all seal-able covers on the customer owned panel using PG&E approved seals.

  1. Minimum service requirements

A. Install the number and size of conduits as shown in Table 4 on Page 6 and Table 5 on Page 7, based on the main service panel rating. No more than seven service conduits, of any size, will be supplied from any one transformer.

B. Install the number and size of conductors, as shown in Table 4 on Page 6, to meet the individual initial demand load. Take load characteristics and growth into consideration. C. It is permissible to install a smaller transformer and fewer conductors to serve a long term initial load with the intent of installing a larger transformer and additional conductors should future load increase occur. D. Always size the transformer pad to accommodate the largest transformer size necessary to serve the combined ampacity of all services. Never exceed more than seven sets of conductors per transformer. E. Vacant ducts, if any, are to be used to serve future load increases.

  1. Single main service panels fed by single transformer

Example 1

480 V, 4-wire, 1,600-amp rated main switch, initial demand load is 300 kVA. Install five 5-inch ducts, service size is 1,000 kcmil for phase and 350 kcmil for neutral. Only two sets of service conductors are required to meet initial loading. The remaining three ducts should be capped for future use.

Rev. #26: 03−25−22 063928 Page 3 of 9

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities

  1. Multiple main service panels fed by single transformer

Example 2

1,000-amp, 600-amp, and 400-amp mains to be served. The number of sets of conduits required are three, two, and one, respectively. A total of six conduits are needed to serve the three main switches. The three services can be served from one transformer.

  1. Multiple main service panels fed by multiple transformers

Example 3

2,000-amp and 1,000-amp mains to be served. The number of sets of conduits required are seven and three respectively. A total of ten conduits are needed to serve the two main switches. The two services cannot be served from one transformer; they must be served from individual transformers.

Cover

  1. A minimum of 24 inches of cover for secondary (0 − 750 V) electric service, or 36 inches minimum cover for primary (over 750 V) is required. Cover is the distance from the outer surface of an underground facility to the top of the final grade . The ac tual trench dept h will be greater (approximately 30 inches or 42 inches minimum respectively) to accommodate the under ground facility, bedding, enclosures, riser sweeps, and joint trench installations with other utilities.

Upgraded Panel

  1. For upgraded panels where the new specified size of service conductor will fit in the existing conduit, it is not necessary to upgrade the conduit to the currently specified size and number for the new panel if all of the following are met:

A. The maximum conduit fill ratio is not exceeded.

B. The calculated cable pulling tensions along the conduit route is within limits of the new cable.

C. Copper or larger size Aluminum cable can handle full load in existing number of conduits. See Table 1 and Table 2 below.

Table 1 Service Cabled Size Allowed in Existing Conduit When Upgrading Single Phase Panels

Existing Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
New Upgrade
Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
Minimum
Allowed Existing
Conduit Size
and Number
Aluminum or Copper Cable
Required to Serve Maximum
Load AWG or kcmil1
Existing Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
New Upgrade
Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
Minimum
Allowed Existing
Conduit Size
and Number
(Per Phase) Neutral
100 200 1−3” 1−4/0 Al 1−1/0 Al
200 400 1−3” 1−750 Al 1−4/0 Al
400 600 1−4” 1−1000 Cu2,3 1−250 Cu

1 Mixing Aluminum and Copper cable runs for the same service is not allowed. 2 Limited to 50 feet of cable between the transformer secondary spades and the customer’s gear connection point. For greater distances, an appropriately rated PG&E approved pad-mounted termination enclosure is allowed if installed per the requirements listed in the Greenbook. For either type of installation, the PG&E installed cable length must not exceed 50 feet. 3 Center conduit underneath middle hot leg to allow flexibility to terminate the conductor.

063928 Page 4 of 9 Rev. #26: 03−25−22

Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Table 2 Service Cable Size Allowed in Existing Conduit When Upgrading Three Phase Panels

Existing Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
New Upgrade
Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
Minimum
Allowed Existing
Conduit Size
and Number
Aluminum or Copper Cable
Required to Serve Maximum
Load AWG or kcmil
Existing Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
New Upgrade
Service
Equipment
Rating (amps)
Minimum
Allowed Existing
Conduit Size
and Number
(Per Phase) Neutral
100 200 1−3” 1−4/0 Al 1−1/0 Al
200 400 1−3” 1−750 Al 1−4/0 Al
400 600 1−5” 1−1000 Cu2,3 1−250 Cu
600 800 2−5” 2−750 Al 2−4/0 Al
800 1000 2−5” 2−1000 Cu2 2−250 Cu
1000 1200 3−5” 3−750 Cu 3−250 Cu
1200 1600 4−5” 4−750 Cu 4−250 Cu
1600 2000 5−5” 5−1000 Cu2 5−250 Cu
2000 2500 7−5” 7−1000 Cu2 7−250 Cu

1 Mixing Aluminum and Copper cable runs for the same service is not allowed. 2 Limited to 50 feet of cable between the transformer secondary spades and the customer’s gear connection point. For greater distances, an appropriately rated PG&E approved pad-mounted termination enclosure is allowed if installed per the requirements listed in the Greenbook. For either type of installation, the PG&E installed cable length must not exceed 50 feet. 3 Center conduit underneath middle hot leg to allow flexibility to terminate the conductor.

  1. If the new panel is able to accommodate it, the existing service conductor may be reused provided it meets the load, voltage drop, and flicker requirements of the new load. If the service conductor size must be upgraded, the existing conduit must be proofed with a mandrel.

  2. For existing panels that are less than 36” horizontally away from the gas service riser; it is allowed to use the existing service conduit and extend new conduit of the same size and material to a new panel location that is 36” or more away from the gas riser as long as all the parameters listed in Notes 21, 22 and 23 are met. This note only applies to panels that requires a total number of two service conduits.

A. For service runs that approach the front of the existing panel, directly or at an angle, the new conduit will need to start back along the existing conduit and far enough away from the new panel location to minimize additional bends in the conduit system.

B. The new total number of bends must be within the maximum 315 ° allowed for service conduit run. For further information, refer to Document 038193.

C. The new panel must be relocated no more than 20’ away from the existing panel.

  1. Notes 21, 22 and 23 above do not apply to the following conditions .

A. Direct buried or Cable-In-Conduit (CIC) service cables. Direct buried and CIC service cables must be replaced with approved service cable and installed in approved service conduit.

(1) Splice boxes between the customer panel,with existing DB or CIC cable, and PG&E secondary distribution system are not allowed. Service cable needs to be brought up to our current standard conduit service system from the customer meter to PG&E point of secondary distribution.

B. Upgraded electric meter panels that are within 36 inches of the gas service riser. The clearance requirements in Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)Section 5.4.3 ., “Meter Set Clearance Requirements,” must be met for upgraded and relocated meter panels.

C. New upgraded panels with a Service Equipment Rating (amps) that is more than one upgraded size than the existing panel, as specified in Table 4 on Page 6 and Table 5 on Page 7. For example, if an existing panel less than or equal to 100 amps is upgraded to a 400 amp panel instead of a 200 amp panel.

D. If the existing cable size is more than one size smaller than the cable required to serve maximum load for the new panel, as specified in Table 4 on Page 6 and Table 5 on Page 7. For example, if the existing cable is #2 AWG aluminum and new upgraded panel requires 4/0 aluminum.

Rev. #26: 03−25−22 063928 Page 5 of 9

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities

Temporary Service

  1. The policy of using permanent service panels to supply temporary power is expanding. Schedule 40 or 80 PVC riser conduit may be damaged by staples and nails, and this has resulted in damage to service cables. Therefore, for those locations where cable will be installed or that will be energized prior to completion of the wall, the conduit must be Schedule 40, rigid steel conduit, to protect the service cables from damage caused by siding nails, etc. Refer to Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)Section 5.9.1 ., “Temporary Service Using Permanent Service Panels”.

Table 3 Service Conduit Types Approved for Underground Applications With Prior PG&E Approval

Type Specification 4
(must be marked on conduit)
Hot-Dip, Galvanized, Rigid Steel ANSI C80.1
PVC, Co-extruded Cellular Core PVC Schedule 40 or 80 UL 651, or ETL conforms to UL 651

4 The entire “conduit system” must meet the specifications listed above. The conduit system includes conduits, conduit bends, conduit fittings or couplings and all related components (e.g., end bells and cable protectors) that are needed to install PG&E cables and conductors.

Table 4 Cable and Conduit Requirements for Single-Phase Commercial Services

Main Service Panel
Rating (amps) 1
Conduit Size
and Number
Cables Required to Serve Maximum Load 3
Main Service Panel
Rating (amps)1
Conduit Size
and Number
Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper
Main Service Panel
Rating (amps)1
Conduit Size
and Number
Per Phase Neutral Per Phase Neutral
100 1−3” 1−1/0 1−#2 NA NA
200 1−3” 1−4/0 1−1/0 NA NA
4002 1−4” 1−750 1−4/0 NA NA
6002 2−4” 2−750 2−4/0 NA NA

1 Service rating must be the termination section, pullcan, service section, or main service switch continuous current rating, whichever is greater. See Note 2 on Page 1 for 100-600 amp 1 ∅ services. 2 Require transformer rated meter. 3 Cable size shown in Table 4 is the minimum size cable that must be used.

063928 Page 6 of 9 Rev. #26: 03−25−22

Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities

Table 5 Cable and Conduit Requirements for Three-Phase Commercial Services [1]

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Main Service Panel
Rating (amps) 2
Conduit Size
and Number
Cables Required to Serve Maximum Load 6
Main Service Panel
Rating (amps)2
Conduit Size
and Number
Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper
Main Service Panel
Rating (amps)2
Conduit Size
and Number
Per Phase Neutral Per Phase Neutral
100 1−3” 1−1/0 #2 NA NA
200 1−3” 1−4/0 1−1/0 NA NA
400 1−5” 1−750 1−4/0 NA NA
600 2−5” 2−750 2−4/0 NA NA
800 2−5” 2−750 2−4/0 NA NA
1,000 3−5” 3−1,000 3−350 NA NA
1,2003 4−5” 4−1,000 4−350 NA NA
1,6003 5−5” 5−1,000 5−350 NA NA
2,0003 7−5” 7−1,000 7−350 NA NA
2,5003, 4 7−5” NA NA 7−1,000 7−250
3,000 Bus Duct NA NA NA NA
3,5005 Bus Duct NA NA NA NA
4,0005 Bus Duct NA NA NA NA

1 3,000−, 3,500−, and 4,000−amp service rated panels require using a bus duct. 2 Service rating must be the termination section, pullcan, service section, or main service switch continuous current rating, whichever is greater. 3 Requires termination provisions (i.e., longer bolts) that allow connectors to be stacked when needed. 4 Limited to 50 feet of cable between the transformer secondary spades and the customer’s gear connection point. For greater distances, a bus duct is preferred, but a PG&E approved pad−mounted termination enclosure 2,500-Amps rated is allowed if installed per the requirements listed in Document 063929. For either type of installation, the PG&E installed cable length must not exceed 50 feet. 5 Panels rated over 3000 amps cannot be served at 120/208 V. 6 Cable size shown in Table 5 is the minimum size cable that must be used.

Table 6 Minimum Bend Radius for New Construction

Conduit Diameter Vertical Radius Horizontal Radius
2” 24” 36”
3” 24”1 36”
4” 36” 36”
5”
36”
60”

1 Only available in 90 ° bends.

Service Installation

Notes

  1. A Vertical 90 ° manufactured sweep is required to be installed to meet trench grade. The riser conduit must not protrude away from the wall or mounted panel.

A. Couplings on the riser conduit installed inside the building foundation must be no higher than flush with the top of the concrete. Couplings installed outside building foundation must be installed a minimum of 6” below final grade.

  1. The conduit end must extend at least 12 inches away from the foundation. Install the sweep in the direction of the service trench. If a deeper trench is required, the sweep must extend to the same depth as the conduit in the trench.

  2. A minimum of 24 inches of cover must be maintained from the top of conduit to the final grade.

  3. See Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)Section 5.4.3 . for electric and metering requirements.

  4. See Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)Section 3.2.2 for establishing PG&E and applicants underground electric service responsibilities.

Rev. #26: 03−25−22 063928 Page 7 of 9

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities

Service Installation (Continued)

Building Foundation

Min

Min

48” Min
66” Prefe
Outer 75” Ma
Building Wall
pling
Final Grade
n
24” Min.
12” Coupl
48” Min
66” Prefe
Outer 75” Ma
Building Wall
Final Grade
Final Grade
Outer
Building Wall
n
48” Min
66” Prefe
75” Ma
12”

pling
Coupl
24” Min.
Final Grade
Outer
Building Wall
n
48” Min
66” Prefe
75” Ma
12”

pling
Coupl
24” Min.
Min
fe
a
Final Grade
Outer
Building Wall
n
48” Min
66” Prefe
75” Ma
12”

pling
Coupl
24” Min.
Outer Building Wall
Final
Grade
n
Outer Building Wall
See Note 8
on Page 2
48” M
66” Pref
75” M
Conduit strap
installed at mid
distance from
bottom of
termination
enclosure and final
grade
12”

Coupling
Coupling
24” Min.
6” Min.
Final
Grade
n
Outer Building Wall
See Note 8
on Page 2
48” M
66” Pref
75” M
Conduit strap
installed at mid
distance from
bottom of
termination
enclosure and final
grade
12”

Coupling
Coupling
24” Min.
6” Min.
Final
Grade
12”

Coupling
Coupling
24” Min.
Final
Grade
n
Outer Building Wall
See Note 8
on Page 2
48” M
66” Pref
75” M
Conduit strap
installed at mid
distance from
bottom of
termination
enclosure and final
grade
12”

Coupling
Coupling
24” Min.
6” Min.

Figure 2 Recessed-Mounted Service Termination Enclosure

Figure 3 Surface-Mounted Combination Meter Socket Panel

Inner Building Wall

Outer Building Wall
Final Grade
Switchboard
Cable Termination
Compartment (side view)
To Customer’s Indoor
Termination Enclosure
Up to 20’ Beyond the
Building Outside Wall
Final Grade
Outer Building Wall
Final Grade
Outer Building Wall
Final Grade
Outer Building Wall
Final Grade
Outer Building Wall
Up to 20’ Beyond the
Building Outside Wall
Up to 20’ Beyond the
Building Outside Wall
Up to 20’ Beyond the
Building Outside Wall
Final Grade
Outer Building Wall
Building Foundation Building Foundation

Coupling

Full 90 ° Bend required

Figure 4 Indoor Service Termination and Metering Enclosure in Electric Room

063928 Page 8 of 9 Rev. #26: 03−25−22

Methods and Requirements for Installing Non-Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities

UG-1: Services Greenbook EDM

References Location Document

Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Enclosures/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028028 Multi-Tap Splice for 600-Volt Insulated Cables . . . . . . . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 036640 Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Electric Conduit, Insulated Cable, and Facilities . . UG−1:General/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 038193 Agricultural Underground Service 500 HP or Less . . . . UG-1 Services/Greenbook/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . . 054619 Terminating Underground Electric Services 0-600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817 Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288 Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use with Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063929

ted Transformers](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80e04d43&vd=true&device=false) . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063929

Revision Notes

Revision 26 has the following changes:

  1. Revised Note 1 and Note 3 on Page 1.

  2. Changed 225A to 200A in Note 2 on Page 1.

  3. Revised Note 4 on Page 1.

  4. Revised Note 5 on Page 1. Note 5C became new Note 6 on Page 2.

  5. Revised Note 8 on Page 2.

  6. Revised Note 14C on Page 2 and new Figure 1 on Page 3.

  7. Added New Note 15 on Page 3

  8. Modified Note 16A on Page 4.

  9. Added Note 21C on Page 4.

  10. Added new Table 1 and Table 2 on Page 4.

  11. Added new Note 23 on Page 5.

  12. Modified footnote 5 for Table 5 on Page 7.

  13. Added table footnote 1 to Table 6 on Page 7.

  14. Added Note 1A under services Installation on Page 7.

  15. Modified Figures 2, 3 and added Figure 4 on 8.

  16. Move References to the end of Document before Revision Notes.

Rev. #26: 03−25−22 063928 Page 9 of 9

UG-1: Services Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

This document is also included in the following manual:

Purpose and Scope

This document provides the tools, ordering instructions, and the necessary manufacturing specifications and details for the fabrication and assembly of bus duct entrance terminations.

The function of the entrance box is to:

  • Provide a means for connecting the customer’s bus duct to a pad-mounted transformer.

  • Permit a future, larger transformer to be installed without disturbing the existing bus duct installation.

  • Reduce the shutdown time for transformer replacement. The entrance box is furnished with two removable sections to permit access to the bus duct extension connections. PG&E will supply and install the entrance box.

General Information

  1. The “Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit” is used to provide transition from a customer-provided service entrance bus duct to the low-voltage service compartment of a PG&E, pad-mounted transformer, for services of 3,000 to 4,000 amps.

  2. Construction

A. The unit’s construction design shown in this document must comply with the Western Underground Committee’s Guide 2.13, latest revision, for tamper-resistant, pad-mounted, equipment enclosures. B. Each top and side cover must latch and securely self-lock at a minimum of three points, when the unit is assembled. All sharp external corners, edges, and joints must be smoothed to prevent injury or damage to clothing. C. The edges, seams, and joints must be made and formed to provide a close-fitting mating surface. Exposed welding on the outside surface of the unit(s) must be a continuous bead, machined and ground flush. D. All metal work must be cleaned free of dirt, oils, and rust, and immediately painted, both inside and outside, with one coat of suitable, rust-inhibiting primer, approximately 1.5 mils thick when dry. E. The interior and exterior of the housing must be finished with one or more coats of Green Munsel, No. 7gy, 3.29/1.5 paint. The total dry film thickness must not be less than 2 mils (the total paint thickness, including primer, not less than 3.5 mils when dry). F. Approximately a half pint of ‘‘touch-up’’ paint (preferably in an aerosol spray can) must be included and shipped with each unit (attached inside the unit to the cable support block). 3. Methods of Serving Large Commercial Customers A. Main Service Rating 201 Through 2,500 Amps: The approved method is by underground cable in customer-installed conduit for cable distance 50 feet or less (refer to Document 063928 for details). B. Main Service Rating 3,000 Through 4,000 Amps: The approved method is a PG&E-owned and installed bus duct entrance box attaching to customer-owned and installed bus duct that is a minimum of 36” long.

  1. Note: Bus ducts must only be connected to pad-mounted transformers with a minimum 30-inch deep cabinet and a secondary terminal height of 46 inches from the bottom of the cabinet (Style IIE-LB and IIF, 300 kVA and larger).

Rev. #12: 10-29-19 063929 Page 1 of 10

UG-1: Services Greenbook Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

  1. It is recommended to install pad-mounted transformer, bus duct entrance termination box, and customer bus duct entrance box on the same monolithic pad to avoid soil settlement issues. See Document 043818 or Document 045292 for transformer pad dimensions.

  2. Service Connection

The customer must provide a minimum of 36 inches of straight (unbent) bus duct from the bus duct entrance terminating end at the side of the pad-mounted transformer (top entry is not permitted). The customer must also supply tie straps for collecting like phases, all necessary bus extensions, and bracing for bus extensions, as required. The bus duct must enter the transformer entrance box in a ‘‘horizontal’’ configuration. PG&E will make the connections from the bus extensions to the transformer secondary terminals, using insulated, flexible, copper conductor provided by PG&E.

permitted). The customer must also supply tie straps for collecting like phases, all necessary bus extensions, and bracing for bus extensions, as required. The bus duct must enter the transformer entrance box in a ‘‘horizontal’’ configuration. PG&E will make the connections from the bus extensions to the transformer secondary terminals, using insulated, flexible, copper conductor provided by PG&E.

  1. A termination enclosure is allowed if its installation meets the following requirements:

A. Has the same capacity and short circuit rating as the customer’s switchboard.

B. Installed at a distance no closer than 60” from the edge of the transformer pad.

C. Meets Greenbook specifications as listed below:

  • 5.2.1. Approved Metering and Service Termination Equipment.

  • 5.2.2. Drawing Submittal Requirements for Metering and Service Termination Equipment.

  • 9.10. Underground Service Cable−Termination Section or Pull Box.

  • Table 9 − 4 Minimum Pad−Mounted (Floor−Standing) Switchboard Pull−Section Dimensions: Residential and Nonresidential, Single−Phase and Three−Phase.

  • Figure 9 − 15, Detail of Aluminum, Termination Bus Stubs.

  • 10.3.12. Service Terminations for Underground Services.

  • 10.3.14. Underground, Cable−Terminating Facilities in Pull Boxes or Pull Sections.

  1. To provide a water tight transition between the components, the bus duct (flanged ends provided by the customer) must match the dimensions of the transition box assembly and flange plate (Detail A on Page 9).

  2. Transformer Bus Duct Cover Plate

A cover used to close off the bus duct entrance hole left in a transformer when it is removed or replaced. This plate bolts into the same bolt holes used for the bus duct entrance termination box and can be installed locally so that the transformer can be reused without sending it to Emeryville to have the opening covered (Code 180203).

References Location Document

Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Connectors/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 015251 Concrete Pads for Radial-Style, Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043818

(https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80e08b21&vd=false&device=false) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043818

         -             Installation of Loop [Style, Three](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80e08b22&vd=true&device=false) Phase,

Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045291 Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 045292 Terminating Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817 Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial Underground Electric Services 0-600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . UG−1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . 063928

063929 Page 2 of 10 Rev. #12: 10-29-19

UG-1: Services Greenbook Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

Installation

Notes

  1. Method of installation (see Figure 1 on Page 4) - The location of the edge of the pad must first be established by consultation between PG&E and the building architect or contractor. The bus duct termination end flange and flange plate must be located such as to permit its connection to the bus duct entrance termination box at a point 23 inches to 24 inches from the edge of the pad. The vertical centerline of the bus duct entrance termination box must be located 23 inches from the front edge of the transformer pad (see Figure 1, Section A-A and Figure 2, Section B-B on Page 4). Additionally, there must be a minimum of 60 inches straight length between the edge of the pad and any obstruction (bend, support, apparatus, wall or building, etc) in the bus duct to accommodate the 48” long bus duct entrance termination box provided by PG&E.

These dimensions will accommodate all style IIB, IIC, IIE, IIF, IIG, and IIH transformers used in bus applications.

  1. Bus duct flange plate (see Detail A on Page 9) - A removable bus duct end flange plate must be provided by the customer at the transformer end of the bus duct. This plate must not be drilled. PG&E will locate and drill 1/2-inch diameter holes in the flange plate to match the square holes in the adjustable end flange of the entrance box.

  2. Transformer cabinet bus duct cutout - The horizontal centerline of the bus duct termination box in the side of the transformer must be approximately 24 inches above the top of the pad. The cutout dimensions and drilling for bolt holes must match the dimensions and drilling of the entrance box, as determined in the field. A template is provided in the kit to help in positioning the flanged end and locating the mounting holes.

  3. Bus duct connections in transformer (see Figure 3 on Page 5)

A. For two and three bars per phase, the customer must provide tie straps bolted across like phases where they enter the transformer entrance box.

B. PG&E will provide the flexible copper conductor and spade connectors necessary to make the connection between the secondary spades of the transformer and the customer’s bus duct.

C. The customer must furnish the tie bars (Section F-F on Page 9) and spacers (Detail D on Page 9) with the bus duct. The bus duct must be in a horizontal configuration when entering the entrance box.

D. PG&E will provide the necessary spade supports for the protection of the transformer. See Document 045291

for further information on the secondary cable support kit (M019644).

  1. Feeder bus duct and entrance box supports - Feeder bus duct supports (where necessary) are required to be installed by the customer. The entrance box must not be used as a bus duct support. PG&E will provide and install a support (supports are not part of a kit) for the bus duct entrance termination box, as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 on Page 4, and Detail F on Page 10.

Rev. #12: 10-29-19 063929 Page 3 of 10

UG-1: Services Greenbook Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

Installation (continued)

Bus Duct

Termination

Duct

HV Compartment Door

Transformer

Bus Duct Termination

Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box Provided by PG&E

Feeder Bus Duct Customer Supplied

Obstruction

CL

CL

LV Compartment 24” 22-3/8”

ansformer ovided PG&E A
Box CL Box CL Box CL Box CL
Box CL
Box CL
Box CL

Pad

Customer PG&E Supplied Supplied

Bu
d
C En
L
Ter
n
Bo
d
CL

Bu
En
Ter
Bo
n
4” 22- 3
23”
23”
23”

Section A-A

Unobstructed Straight Length of Feeder Bus Duct See Note 1 on Page 3

Figure 1 Typical Bus Duct Assembly for Largest Pad-Mounted Transformer

Transformer Provided by PG&E

HV Compartment Door

LV

Door

Pad

Bus Duct Termination

Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box

Transformer

Bus Duct Entrance Termination

Bus

CL

Duct

Obstruction

CL

Box

Customer

48”

Tran
d
C
L
n Bu
En
Te
Bo
d
n

CL
Tra
Bu
En
Te
Bo
d
n

CL
Tra
Bu
En
Te
Bo
2 4” 22-3
23” 23”
23” 23”

Section B-B

Unobstructed Straight Length of Feeder Bus Duct See Note 1 on Page 3

Figure 2 Typical Bus Assembly for Smallest Pad-Mounted Transformer

Note: Dimensions in all Figures are not to scale.

063929 Page 4 of 10 Rev. #12: 10-29-19

UG-1: Services Greenbook Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box Assembly

Locking Provision Upper Section

Bus Duct Entrance Terminating End

2” Min.

Transformer End Flange

Figure 3 Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box (Code 019645)

Table 1 List of Material for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box Kit [1]

Quantity Description
1 Stainless Steel Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box
1 Cable Spacer
4 Copper Bus Bar Extensions2 (see Detail E on Page 10)
24 1” x 3/8” Carriage Bolts With Nuts and Washers
2 3/8” x 3-1/2” Bolt, With Nut and 3/16” Diameter Hole for Safety Lock
2 Safety Locks, Utilco Catalog Number PEL-1, Code 170115
10-Foot Length Weather Stripping
1
Template

1 When needed, use and order secondary cable support kit M019644 (see Document 045291). This kit is not included in the bus duct termination box kit. 2 See Page 6 for additional information on copper bus bar extensions.

Rev. #12: 10-29-19 063929 Page 5 of 10

UG-1: Services Greenbook Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box Assembly (continued)

Copper bus bar extensions are available as a component of the bus duct entrance termination box kit (Code M019645), and can also be ordered separately. (Code M310028).

The copper bus bar extensions are used when additional secondary cable is added to the transformer and the terminal spades do not have enough room to accommodate the additional cable.

Figure 4 Copper Bus Bar Extension

Table 2 Recommended Tools for Assembly and Installation of Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box

Description Code
Sawzall, Heavy Duty, Milwaukee #6511-W/Case 210075
Blades, Sawzall, Milwaukee #48-00-1171 − Package of 10 207674
Drill, Skil #6550, 1/2” Variable Speed Reversible 210026
Drill Bit Set, 1/16” to 1/2”, W/Case 203026
Punch, Center, 3/8” 201305

063929 Page 6 of 10 Rev. #12: 10-29-19

UG-1: Services Greenbook Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

Bus Duct Termination Assembly − Fully Extended

Customer Feeder

See Detail E on Page 10
Custo
X0 X1 X2 X3 Termination Box Bus D
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
30”
Min. No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
C
No. 7

3
M
C
0”
in.
3
M
C
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
3
M
C
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
3
M
C
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
3
M
C
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
3
M
C
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
3
M
C
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
3
M
C
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
3
M
C
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
30” M in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”

Secondary Compartment

Plan View

Typical Outdoor Bus Termination Fully Extended

30” M 30” M
See Note 1 on

Page 3 Section C-C Fully Extended

Figure 5 Bus Duct Termination Assembly Fully Extended

Rev. #12: 10-29-19 063929 Page 7 of 10

UG-1: Services Greenbook Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

Bus Duct Termination Assembly − Fully Compressed

See Detail E on Page 10
Customer F
X0 X1 X2 X3 Termination Box Bus Duct
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
30”
Min. No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
D
No. 7

3
M
D
0”
in.
3
M
D
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
3
M
D
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
3
M
D
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
3
M
D
0”
in.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
30” in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”
in.
48”

Secondary Compartment

Plan View

Typical Outdoor Bus Termination Fully Compressed

Secondary Cable Support Kit See Document 045291

1,000 kcmil, 600-V Copper Conductor Extra Flexible, 127 D Stranding Code 294490

Bus Duct Termination End Flange and Range Plate

on Page 3

Typical Out
P
30” Mi

Section D-D Fully Compressed

Figure 6 Bus Duct Termination Assembly Fully Compressed

063929 Page 8 of 10 Rev. #12: 10-29-19

UG-1: Services Greenbook Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

Bus Duct Termination Assembly − Details

(see Detail C)

3/8” - 16 x 5/8” Long Nelson Stud

CL

#12 AWG Cold-Rolled Steel

1”

Bus
Duct
24-3/4”
Bus
Duct

1”
Bus
Duct

1”
C
” Max.
1/4
Bus
Duct

1”
W = 22 W = 22 W = 22 W = 22
Bus
Duct

1”
W = 22
Bus
Duct

1”
W = 22
10”
C

1”
G
C C
10”
C

1”
G
C C C C
10”
C

1”
G
C
10”
C

1”
G
C

Detail A End Flange Plate (customer supplied)

5”

2-1/2”

Figure 7 Termination Detail With Bus Duct End and Tie Bars

Insulation on Bus Bar

Spacer Thickness to Match the Thickness

5”

Detail B Typical Phase Bus Termination Assembly

3/4” Obstruction (building, apparatus
Top
2”
3/4”
CL
Straight Length of
Feeder Bus Duct
Bus Duct
Termination End
Flange Plate
2”

(building, apparatus
wall, support, or bend)
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase

Bottom
Neutral
8”

Section E-E Bus Bar (customer supplied)

20” Min. − 22” Max.

Insulation on Bus Bar

Detail C Typical Neutral Bus Termination Assembly

Drill 14 ea. 9/16” Dia.

1” Min.
5/8” 3” 3”
3” 3” 3” 3”

1-3/4”

Drill 14 ea. 20” Min. − 22” Max. 9/16” Dia. Holes

Wall

3”

1” Min.
3” 3
” 3” 3” 3” 3” 1” Min.
1-3/4”
3” 3
1” Min.
3” 3
1” Min.
3” 3
1” Min.
6” 5/8” 11
6” 5/8”
ea.
Dia.
3
ea.
Dia.
3
ea.
Dia.
3

Section F-F Tie Bar Connection 1/4” x 6” x 20” Long Copper (two per phase and one per neutral required) (customer supplied)

Detail D Spacer 3” x 20” Long Copper (thickness to suit) (customer supplied)

Rev. #12: 10-29-19 063929 Page 9 of 10

UG-1: Services Greenbook Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

Bus Duct Termination Assembly − Details (continued)

1-1/8”

CL

of Transformer’s Low-Voltage Compartment

Height

1-1 Compa 1/8” artment 3/4”
1-3/4” 1-3/4” 1-3/4” 1-3/4” 1-3/4” 1-3/4” 3/4”
3/4”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
3/4”
3/4”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
3/4”
3/4”
1-3/4”
1-3/4”
8” 8”
8” 8”
8” 8”
8” 8”
8” 8” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3 3” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3 3” 3 3” 3 3” 3

1-3/4”

Concrete Pad

of Bus to Door or Metal

Detail E Copper Bus Bar Extension (see Table 1 on Page 5)

Table 3 Copper Conductor Requirements [3]

Concrete Footing 12” Dia. x 12” H

Steel Flange

Concrete Footing

Concrete Pad (weld-on type)

12” Dia. x 12” H Code 025391

For Unpaved Areas For Paved Areas

Detail F Termination Unit Supports (PG&E supplies one under the bus duct termination box. Customer supplies remainder as required.)

Main Switch Rating Number of Conductors
Per Phase
Number of
Neutral Cables
Approximate Footage
of Conductor
2,500 4 2 140
3,000 5 3 180
3,500 6 3 210
4,000 7 4 250

3 Use only 1,000 kcmil copper cable (Code 294490).

Table 4 List of Materials for Bus Termination Assemblies (see Detail B and Detail C on Page 9)

Item Description Co de Document
1 Terminal Connector, Compression-Type, Cable-to-Flat, for 1,000 kcmil Cable
303
461
015251
2 Screw, Cap (bolt), Hex. Head, 1/2” x 2-1/2”, Everdur or Equivalent
193
177
3 Nut, Bolt, Hex., 1/2”, Everdur or Equivalent
195
013
4 Washer, Round, 1/2”, Everdur or Equivalent
195
252
5 Washer, Lock, 1/2”, Everdur or Equivalent
195
193

Revision Notes

Revision 12 has the following changes:

  1. Revised Notes 2E and 3B on Page 1.

  2. Updated Reference links to TIL Viewer.

  3. Delete the word joint in Note 1 on Page 3.

  4. Added Notes 1 and 2 and Figure 4 on Page 6.

  5. Replace the word shall with must throughout document.

063929 Page 10 of 10 Rev. #12: 10-29-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

This document is also included in the following manual:Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)

Purpose and Scope

This document shows the requirements for the box-pad used with single-phase Style DF (see Document 064307), duplex, and three-phase Style MTP (see Document 045290) transformers. This document applies to both radial and looped primary circuit arrangements.

Applicant Notes

  1. Prior to setting a pad, the applicant will request an inspection by PG&E. PG&E shall determine the acceptability of each pad installation. The pad installation includes two ground rods and the interconnecting ground wire.

  2. If required, the applicant shall provide suitable barriers for the protection of the transformer (refer to Document 051122).

3. The pads must be made by a PG&E-approved supplier. The approved suppliers are listed in Document 066211.

Fabrication Requirements

  1. Box-pads are designed to fully encompass the transformer, including any radiators. Each pad shall hold the full kVA range of the indicated style. The pad dimensions are based on the allowed transformer dimensions shown in Document 064307.

  2. The pads shall be permanently identified with manufacturer’s name, month and year of fabrication, nominal weight, and PG&E code number in the area indicated in Figure 1 on Page 4.

6. The pads shall conform to Engineering Material Specification 21 “Box-Pad Style Transformer Pads”

  1. The pads shall be designed to support transformers weighing 3,000 pounds.

  2. Two 1/2”-13 UNC inserts for securing the transformer cabinet shall be provided as indicated. One 5/8”-11 UNC insert shall be provided at the center of gravity for lifting the pad.

  3. The inserts shall be installed flush with the surface of the pad.

10. The edges shall be rounded. Refer to Engineering Material Specification 21 “Box-Pad Style Transformer Pads”

11. The corners may be rounded. Refer to Engineering Material Specification 21 “Box-Pad Style Transformer Pads”.

Installation Requirements

  1. The transformer pad shall be placed on a firm 10-inch rock base, on top of native or engineered fill material, which has been compacted to at least the requirements of Note 15 on Page 2.

  2. The area under the pad shall be excavated to the required grade, or to a depth necessary to reach firm, undisturbed material, whichever is deeper. The material may be considered firm if it cannot be penetrated by thumb except with moderate effort.

  3. If firm material has not been reached within a depth of 3 feet, excavate 3 feet beyond the perimeter of the pad, and backfill the entire excavated area to the required grade and to the requirements of Note 15 on Page 2.

Rev. #10: 12-01-19 064309 Page 1 of 7

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Box-Pad For Pad-Mounted Transformers

  1. In case it is necessary to excavate deeper than the required grade to reach firm material, backfill to the required grade in one of the following ways: A. Backfill with clean, non-expansive soil compacted to 90% of maximum density. The soil shall be placed in layers not more than 8 inches thick before compaction. Determine the maximum density and the in-place density by the California Test Method No. 216-6, Parts I and II respectively, or by ASTM D-1556 and D-1557 respectively. A copy of the test results may be required by PG&E. B. Backfill with soil or cement slurry consisting of one sack of Portland cement per cubic yard and clean native soil or sand.

  2. In areas of known soft soil conditions, trenches within the pad excavation area for the installation of conduits shall be backfilled in one of the ways specified in Note 15.

  3. In addition to the above requirements, the pads shall be placed on a 10-inch level rock base to provide uniform bearing.

  4. A minimum distance of 6 feet shall be maintained between the ground rods.

  5. In general, all equipment pads should be installed as level as practicable. Pads supporting oil-filled equipment must be leveled to within 1 inch in 8 feet in all directions.

  6. An equipment BOX pad SHALL NOT be placed on an elevated berm, mound or structure either earthen or otherwise when placed in a Flood Plain. If local knowledge of the area in which the equipment is to be placed identifies a high likelihood that uninsulated terminals of the equipment will come in contact with floodwater and the location cannot be moved to a location less likely to have flood levels come in contact with the exposed terminals, a Subsurface Fully Insulated Device should be installed in lieu of the pad mount design. In some cases such as transformers, because of capacity limits of subsurface material coded equipment it may not be possible to provide a transformer of sufficient capacity to serve loads in excess of the capabilities of a 1000 kVA UCD.

Installation Procedure

Step 1. Excavate as required.

Step 2. Install the exterior ground rod and run the ground wire to the pad excavation.

Step 3. Place the primary conduit bends into the pad excavation.

Step 4. Place the secondary and the service conduit into the pad excavation.

Step 5. Compact and install the rock base. See “Installation Requirements”, Notes 15, 16, and 17.

Step 6. The exposed ends of the conduit bends should be about 1 inch above the gravel base.

Step 7. Install end bell fittings.

Step 8. Temporarily cap or plug all the conduits.

Step 9. Route the ground wire through the pad opening.

Step 10. Place the box-pad and backfill to the appropriate level for the pad.

Step 11. Install the interior ground rod.

Table 1 Bill of Materials

Item Quantity Description Code
1 1 Box-Pad, (as required − see Table 2 on Page 4)
2 As Reqd. Wire, #2 AWG, Solid Bare Copper 290074
3 2 Ground Rod, 5/8” x 8’-0”, Copperclad (seeDocument 013109) 187013
4 2 Clamp, Ground Rod, (seeDocument 013109) 187012
5 As Reqd. Compacted Backfill
6 As Reqd. Rock Base (compact 3/4” minus the rock base)

064309 Page 2 of 7 Rev. #10: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Box-Pad For Pad-Mounted Transformers

References Location Document

Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Connectors/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 013109 Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad Mounted Transformers UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045290 Location, Clearances, and Mechanical Protection Details for Pad-Mounted and Subsurface Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051122

-     Single [Phase, Dead](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80e00fa6&vd=false&device=false) Front, and Duplex,

Pad−Mounted Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 064307

ttps://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80e00fa6&vd=false&device=false) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 064307

-     Single [Phase, Dead](https://ecmappwlsp01c2.comp.pge.com/TILVIEWER?chronicleId=09131aad80dfe6e4&vd=false&device=false) Front, and Duplex,

Pad−Mounted Transformer Installations . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 064308 PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066211 Engineering Material Specification No. 21 “Box-Pad Style Transformer Pads” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS21

Rev. #10: 12-01-19 064309 Page 3 of 7

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Box-Pad For Pad-Mounted Transformers

Box-pads

Table 2 Dimensions for Pad−Box

Transformer Pad Code
Number
Dimension in Inches Dimension in Inches Dimension in Inches Dimension in Inches Dimension in Inches Dimension in Inches Dimension in Inches
Transformer Pad Code
Number
A B C D E I W
1-Wire, 2-Bushing Style DF-LB 360001 25 15 5.5 4 46 28 36
2-Wire, 4-Bushing Style DF-LB 360002 28 15 11 4 60 31 50
3-Wire, 6-Bushing Style DF-LB, Duplex and Style MTP 360003 37 15 6.5 4 60 40 50

Figure 1 Box-Pad

064309 Page 4 of 7 Rev. #10: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Box-Pad For Pad-Mounted Transformers

Typical Box-Pad Installation

3 4

Group All Secondary and Service Conduits Together Near the Back of the Window

Secondary Primary Conduit Section Conduit Section

Figure 2 Pad Top View (50” x 52” x 18” box-pad shown)

C L of Pad
±7” 2
±10”
±7”
2
of Pad
CL

Detail A Placement of Conduits

± 4” ± 7”

Detail B Placement of Single Cable Conduits

Primary Joint Trench Secondary

Sweep Plastic Duct (40-foot radius minimum)

Ser
P
B
Gas
R/W

Ser
Gas
R/W
P
B
Ser
Gas
R/W
P
B
s s s s s
Ser
Gas
R/W
P
B
Ser
Gas
R/W
P
B
s
Ser
Gas
R/W
P
B
Ser
Gas
R/W
P
B
s
Ser
Gas
R/W
P
B
Ser
Gas
R/W
P
B
s
Primary
Secondary
B
Services
B
Services
B
Services
B
Services
B
Services
B
Services
B
Services

Figure 3 Facilities Plan View

Rev. #10: 12-01-19 064309 Page 5 of 7

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Box-Pad For Pad-Mounted Transformers

Typical Box-Pad Installation (continued)

Section A-A Pad Front View

Section B-B Pad Side View

h ite Grade

064309 Page 6 of 7 Rev. #10: 12-01-19

UG-1: Transformers Greenbook Box-Pad For Pad-Mounted Transformers

This document is also found in the Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook). This document has been split. See Document 064309A in the “Transformers” section of the For Reference Only Manual (FRO) for its remainder.

Revision Notes

Revision 10 has the following changes:

  1. Added Note 20 on Page 2.

  2. Updated References on Page 3.

Rev. #10: 12-01-19 064309 Page 7 of 7

OH: Services UG-1: Services Greenbook EMWP

Prepared by: SXZO

This document also is included in the following manuals:

References Location Document

Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025055 Location, Clearances, and Mechanical Protection Details for Pad-Mounted and Subsurface Equipment UG-1: General/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 051122 Voltage Stabilizer for 480 Volt, Three-Phase, 3-Wire Ungrounded Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Meters/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 052497 Agricultural Underground Service, 500 hp or Less . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 054619 Agricultural Overhead Service, 300 hp or Less . . . . . . OH: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058087

Purpose and Scope

This document illustrates the requirements applicable to residential, commercial, and agricultural overhead or underground service installations served from PG&E’s lines. This document is applicable where panel-type structures are used to mount customer-owned and installed equipment.

General Information

  1. Construction Materials and Requirements

Ensure that all posts and panels on which the service and metering equipment are mounted meet the following minimum requirements. Equipment can be mounted to a panel, boards, or struts. See Note 5 on Page 3 for the maximum rating of service termination equipment.

A. Material Treatment and Specifications

(1) Ensure that the surface areas on all wood posts, boards, and solid panels are pressure treated, including the sides and areas that have been cut. Any other treating process that provides an equivalent penetration and retention must be approved by PG&E. Acceptable wood preservatives are water-borne salts and pentachlorophenol. Brush application of wood preservatives is ineffective and therefore unacceptable.

(2) Pipe posts must be galvanized rigid steel.

(3) All metal boards or solid metal panels must be rigid steel and have a rust inhibitor applied to all surface

areas.

(4) Strut channels, fittings, and associated hardware must be stainless steel or galvanized steel.

Rev. #15: 3/25/2022 065374 Page 1 of 9

OH: Services UG-1: Services Greenbook Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction EMWP

General Information (continued)

B. Material Dimensions

(1) Structure: All structures must be a minimum length of 48 inches. For structures up to 72 inches long, the minimum combined height of the boards, panel, or struts must be 36 inches. For structures up to 96 inches long, the minimum combined height of the boards, panel, or struts must be 42 inches. For structures with lengths greater than 96 inches, use additional posts. The top of the structure must not exceed 84 inches high from the ground. There must be a minimum of 6 inches of clearance between the ground and all equipment, panels, boards, or struts.

(2) Boards: Place side by side.

(a) Wood: Minimum 2 inches thick by 12 inches wide (nominal).

(b) Metal: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 12 inches wide.

(3) Panel: One solid sheet.

(a) Wood: 1 inch thick.

(b) Metal: 1/4 inch thick.

(4) Unistrut: At a minimum, two struts are needed to support each piece of service and metering equipment. It is recommended that one strut be attached towards the top and one strut be attached towards the bottom of the equipment. Add struts for additional equipment with different length dimensions. Use struts with or without boards or panels.

(a) Strut channel dimensions must be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch. See Figure 10 on Page 8.

(5) Posts: Use a minimum of two posts to support panel-type construction. Add more posts if the construction exceeds the structural dimensions listed in Note 1B(1) on Page 1. If applicable, a PG&E-approved, customer-owned pole can be used as one of the posts. The customer-owned pole must be installed in accordance with Document 025055 and the panel board must be attached to the poles as shown in Figures 8 on Page 5 and Figure 10 on Page 8.

(a) Wood: Solid.

(i) Square, 6 inches by 6 inches cross section.

(ii) Round, 8 inches in diameter.

(b) Metal: Solid or hollow. If hollow a permanent post cap is required.

(i) Square, 3 inches by 3 inches cross section.

(ii) Round, 3 inches in diameter.

C. Footing and Support

(1) Place all posts in the center of a 12 inches minimum diameter concrete footing. Extend the footing a minimum of 36 inches into the ground (excluding gravel bedding), a minimum of 4 inches above ground level, and have a 1/2 inch slope away from the post to allow for drainage.

D. Fasteners

(1) For wood posts, use minimum 3/8 inch x 5 inches lag screws.

(2) For metal posts, use 3/8 inch minimum through bolts with nuts and washers.

(3) For Unistrut, use approved fasteners and hardware made for the strut channels. This should include through bolts with nuts and washers.

E. Screw Holes or Openings

(1) All unused or exposed screw holes and openings must be tightly secured by plugging or filling the entire hole with screws, bolts, or other type of metal fasteners. Sealants can be used along with the screws, bolts, and other metal fasteners.

F. Clearances and Barrier Posts (see Document 051122)

(1) A minimum 36 inches of clear and level working space must be maintained in front of the panel board structure at all times.

065374 Page 2 of 9 Rev. #15: 3/25/2022

OH: Services UG-1: Services Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction Greenbook EMWP

(2) If any part of the panel board structure is located within 36 inches of a thoroughfare or road, then install barrier posts. If the thoroughfare or road has high vehicular traffic and the panel board structure is less than 108 inches (9 feet) away, then install barrier posts.

(3) The panel board and customer owned pole (if installed) must not be located less than 10 feet from the surface of the PG&E pole or within 10 feet of the vertical plane of a PG&E line.

  1. Grounding

The customer is responsible for bonding and grounding metering and service termination equipment enclosures. See the requirements in Greenbook Section 5.8. Grounding, including Figures 5−15 and 5−16. Also Ground and bond in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and local ordinances. PG&E prefers, but does not require, the grounding electrode conductor wire to be protected against physical damage by rigid steel conduit or armored cladding

3. A voltage stabilizer for 3-wire service will be furnished and installed by PG&E (see Document 052497).

  1. Properly identify and mark meters as described in Section 5.5.1 on Page 5-10 of the Electric and Gas Service

Requirements Manual (Greenbook) .

  1. Termination or metering equipment with an ampacity rating greater than 400 amps, 3-phase or 600 amps, 1-phase must be pad-mounted (free standing). Refer to Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook), Section 9.10.

  2. The minimum meter height for electric panels with current transformers (CT’s) is 60 inches as measured from final grade to the center of the meter. The maximum meter height is 75 inches.

  3. Enclosure: For services greater than 100 feet install a pull box between 30 feet maximum and six feet minimum away from the Panelboard. See document 028028 Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures for the required minimum size enclosure to install.

Rev. #15: 3/25/2022 065374 Page 3 of 9

OH: Services UG-1: Services Greenbook Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction EMWP

Typical Panel Board Construction

Notes

  1. See Table 1 on Page 8 for the material list.

  2. Item 2 may be replaced by Items 1 and 3.

See Note 1D on Page 2 for Fastener s

3” Min. Galv. Rigid Steel Pipe or 6” x 6” or 8” Dia. Wood Post

1/2” Slope

Concrete Footing

1/2” Slope

8
M
He
36”
Min.
Heigh
4”
ax.
ight
4”
Min.
8
M
He
36”
Min.
Heigh
4”
Min.
4”
ax.
ight
t t
8
M
He
36”
Min.
Heigh
4”
Min.
4”
ax.
ight
8
M
He
36”
Min.
Heigh
4”
Min.
4”
ax.
ight
3
M
6”
in.
6”
in.
6”
in.

12” Min.

6” Min. Ground Clearance to Equipment or Panels

asteners
e
st

84”
Max.
Height
42”
Min.
Height
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
36” Min.
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
1/

48” − 96” Length
e
st

84”
Max.
Height
42”
Min.
Height
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
36” Min.
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
1/

48” − 96” Length
e
st

84”
Max.
Height
42”
Min.
Height
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
36” Min.
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
1/

48” − 96” Length
e
st

84”
Max.
Height
42”
Min.
Height
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
36” Min.
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
1/

48” − 96” Length
e
st

84”
Max.
Height
42”
Min.
Height
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
36” Min.
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
1/

48” − 96” Length
e
st

84”
Max.
Height
42”
Min.
Height
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
36” Min.
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
1/

48” − 96” Length
e
st

84”
Max.
Height
42”
Min.
Height
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
36” Min.
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
1/

48” − 96” Length
e
st

84”
Max.
Height
42”
Min.
Height
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
36” Min.
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
1/

48” − 96” Length
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
48” − 96” Length
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
48” − 96” Length
e
st

84”
Max.
Height
42”
Min.
Height
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
36” Min.
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
1/

48” − 96” Length
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
48” − 96” Length
e
st

84”
Max.
Height
42”
Min.
Height
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
36” Min.
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
1/

48” − 96” Length
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
4” Min.
See 1.B.(1) on Page 2
48” − 96” Length
1/

Figure 1 Panel Board Construction With Struts

Figure 2 Large Panel Board Construction With Struts

See Note 1D on Page 2 for Fasteners

3” Min. Galv. Rigid Steel Pipe or 6” x 6” or 8” Dia. Wood Post

1/2” Slope

12” Min.

Concrete Footing

to Equipment or Panels

s
Panels, Boards,
or Struts
42”
Min.
Height

t
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
36” Min.
4” Min.
6” Min.
84”
Max.
eight
48” - 96” Length
t
36
6”
8
M
ei
t
36
6”
8
M
ei
Panels, Boards,
or Struts
t
36
6”
8
M
ei
t
36
6”
8
M
ei
48” - 96” Length
t
36
6”
8
M
ei
t
36
6”
8
M
ei
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
Equipment or Panels
4” Min.
t
36
6”
8
M
ei
” Min.
Min.
” Min.
Min.

Figure 3 Figure 4 Panel Board Construction Large Panel Board Construction

065374 Page 4 of 9 Rev. #15: 3/25/2022

OH: Services UG-1: Services Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction Greenbook EMWP

Typical Underground Panel Board Construction

Note: This type of configuration is acceptable for mounting multiple meters.

Footnote on Page 8

Accommodate for the Vertical Radial Bend

Figure 5 Underground Service With Second Meter Panel

Control Equipment

Note: See Figure 7 on Page 6 for an alternate elbow & coupling Option

To Load

Footnote on Page 8

Figure 6 Underground Service Using Panel Board Construction

Increase Trench Depth to Accommodate for the Vertical Radial Bend

Rev. #15: 3/25/2022 065374 Page 5 of 9

OH: Services UG-1: Services Greenbook Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction EMWP

A support structure is required 6 inches minimum to 12 inches maximum above grade for coupling support. The support must be the same type (strut or treated board) as the rest of the panel board

12
12” Max.

to Accommodate for the Vertical Radial Bend

Figure 7 Alternate Option − PVC Elbow (Item 23) & Plastic−to−Steel Adapter / Coupling (Item 20)

065374 Page 6 of 9 Rev. #15: 3/25/2022

OH: Services UG-1: Services Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction Greenbook EMWP

Typical Overhead Panel Board Construction

Note: This type of configuration is acceptable for mounting multiple meters.

11 11

Figure 9 Overhead Service Using Panel Board Construction

Rev. #15: 3/25/2022 065374 Page 7 of 9

OH: Services UG-1: Services Greenbook Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction EMWP

1-1/2” Min.

1-1/2” Min.

1-1/2” Min. 1-1/2” Min.

Figure 10 Typical Strut Channels Used for Panel Board Construction

Table 1 List of Material To Be Furnished and Installed by Customer

Item Description
1 Underground Pull Box, Required1
2 Self-Contained, Bused Safety Socket Box
3 Combination Meter and Current Transformer Cabinet
(See Note 6 on Page 3)
4 Main Switch of Service Equipment Enclosure
5 Service Conduit, As Required
6 UG Panel Board Construction (See Figures 5 − 6)
7 OH Panel Board Construction (See Figures 7 − 8)
8 Post (See Note 1 on Page 1)
9 Conduit, Riser, Galvanized Rigid Steel, Continuous without Couplings
10 Ground Rod (See Note 2 on Page 3)
11 Ground Wire, Copper, Bare
12 Ground Clamp (As Required) for Item 10
13 Sealable Gutter
14 Metal Myers Hub With Close Nipple
15 Heavy Duty 2-Hole Pipe Strap Every 36”
16 PVC Schedule 40, minimum
17 Weatherhead
18 PG&E-Approved, Customer-Owned Pole
19 Termination Enclosure
20 Plastic−to−Steel Adapter/Coupling
21 Conduit, Bend, Galvanized Rigid Steel, Continuous without Couplings
22 Service Conduit, Coupling, As Required
23 Conduit, Bend, PVC, Continuous without Couplings

1 The pull box is required to be installed but may be exempt only at the discretion of the PG&E inspector.

065374 Page 8 of 9 Rev. #15: 3/25/2022

OH: Services UG-1: Services Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction Greenbook EMWP

Revision Notes

Revision 15 has the following changes:

  1. Corrected Note1.B.(4) on Page 2, replacing the first word “Struts” with “Unistrut”.

  2. Corrected Note D.(3). on Page 2, requiring thru bolts, nuts, and washers for Unistrut fasteners.

  3. Corrected itle of Figure 7 on Page 6, describing the coupling as a Plastic-to-Steel Adapter/Coupling.

Rev. #15: 3/25/2022 065374 Page 9 of 9

Greenbook

Prepared by: MZGD

Purpose and Scope

This document provides a list of PG&E-approved manufacturers of major materials for use in PG&E’s Electric Distribution System.

Table 1 PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers

Material Responsible
Engineer
Approved Manufacturer
Arresters Miguel Plascencia ABB, Siemens
Barrier Posts M.L. Thibault Allwire
Brackets, Overhead Eduardo Sanchez Aluma-Form, Chance, Joslyn, Kortick,
MacLean
Cable, Primary Lisseth Villareal Okonite, Prysmian, Southwire1
Cable, Aluminum, Secondary Lisseth Villareal Prysmian (General Cable)1, Southwire
Cable, Copper, Secondary Lisseth Villareal Okonite
Capacitor Controls Miguel Plascencia HD Electric, S&C (Energyline)
Capacitor, Overhead Miguel Plascencia ABB, Cooper
Capacitor, Pad-Mounted Miguel Plascencia Scott Engineering
Conduit, HDPE for Boring Lisseth Villareal Dura-Line (AD Technologies)
Conduit, Smooth Core Flex Lisseth Villareal Dura-Line (AD Technologies)
Conduit, PVC Schedule 40 and 80, UL 651, 90°C Lisseth Villareal Prime Conduits (Carlon Bore-Gard),
Certainteed CertaCom
Conduit, PVC Schedule 40 and 80, UL 651, 90°C,
Solid Core
Lisseth Villareal Atkore, Ridgeline Pipe Heritage, Prime
(conduit), JM Eagle, Cantex
Conduit,PVC Schedule 40, Cellular Core Lisseth Villareal Atkore (Rocky Mountain)
Conduit, Steel Lisseth Villareal Allied, Western Tube
Conduit Fittings, Steel Lisseth Villareal Picoma, Shamrock
Conductor, Overhead, AWAC Neutral Only Genet Mengistu Prysmian (General Cable)1, Southwire
Conductor, Overhead Covered Tree Wire Genet Mengistu Southwire, Taihan, Hendrix4
Connectors, Overhead, Automatic Splice3 Genet Mengistu Blackburn, Fargo, Reliable
Connectors, Overhead, Compression Splice Genet Mengistu Alcoa, Blackburn, Burndy, Homac,
Hubbell, Nicopress
Connectors, Overhead, Tap Clamp Genet Mengistu Hubbell, Maclean
Connectors, Overhead, Wedge Tap Genet Mengistu TE Connectivity (AMP)
Connectors, Underground, Compression, Splice Lisseth Villareal Blackburn, Burndy, Homac, Hubbell,
Kearney, Penn Union
Connectors, Underground, Pin Terminal Lisseth Villareal Homac
Connectors, Underground, Secondary Multi-Tap Bars Lisseth Villareal Blackburn, Homac

Rev. #26: 03-25-22 066211 Page 1 of 4

Greenbook PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers

Table 1 PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers (continued)

Material Responsible
Engineer
Approved Manufacturer
Connectors, Underground, Slip-Fit Transformer
Secondary Bars
Lisseth Villareal Homac, Utilco Homac, Utilco
Connectors, Underground, Shearbolt Lisseth Villareal TE-Connectivity TE-Connectivity
Connectors, Underground, Spade Terminals Lisseth Villareal Burndy, Dossert, Homac Burndy, Dossert, Homac
Connectors, Underground, Split-Bolt Lisseth Villareal Blackburn, Burndy, Penn Union Blackburn, Burndy, Penn Union
Cutouts Mike Lee MacLean, Hubbell, S&C MacLean, Hubbell, S&C
Dead-Ends, Overhead Eduardo Sanchez EMC, Hubbell
Disconnect Mike Lee Eaton-Cooper Eaton-Cooper
Elbows, 200 Amp Lisseth Villareal Eaton-Cooper, Elastimold Eaton-Cooper, Elastimold
Elbows, 600 Amp, Epoxy CP, and RTP Lisseth Villareal Eaton-Cooper, Elastimold, Richards, Eaton-Cooper, Elastimold, Richards,
EPDM CP and RTP Lisseth Villareal Elastimold, Richards Elastimold, Richards
Enclosure, Frames and Covers Calvin Yu Madruga Iron Works, Jensen Precast,
Oldcastle Precast (Utility Vault)
Madruga Iron Works, Jensen Precast,
Oldcastle Precast (Utility Vault)
Enclosure, Primary – Box, Concrete Calvin Yu Jensen Precast, Oldcastle Precast
(Utility Vault), Mid-State Concrete
Jensen Precast, Oldcastle Precast
(Utility Vault), Mid-State Concrete
Enclosure, Primary – Sectional Box, Concrete Calvin Yu Oldcastle Precast (Utility Vault) Oldcastle Precast (Utility Vault)
Enclosure, Primary – Sectional Box, Non-Concrete Calvin Yu Hubbell (Strongwell/Quazite) Hubbell (Strongwell/Quazite)
Enclosure, Secondary – Box, Concrete Calvin Yu Jensen Precast, Oldcastle Precast
(Utility Vault)
Jensen Precast, Oldcastle Precast
(Utility Vault)
Enclosure, Secondary – Box, Polymer-Concrete Calvin Yu Hubbell (Strongwell/Quazite), Armorcast,
New Basis
Hubbell (Strongwell/Quazite), Armorcast,
New Basis
Enclosure, Secondary – Pedestal Calvin Yu Armorcast, New Basis Armorcast, New Basis
Fault Indicator – Overhead Vernal Garcia Horstman/Power Delivery Products, SEL
(Schwertzer)
Horstman/Power Delivery Products, SEL
(Schwertzer)
Fault Indicator – Underground Vernal Garcia Horstman/Power Delivery Products Horstman/Power Delivery Products
Fuses Mike Lee Chance, Combined-Tech, Eaton-Cooper,
Hi-Tech, Kearny, S&C
Chance, Combined-Tech, Eaton-Cooper,
Hi-Tech, Kearny, S&C
Fuse Saver Vernal Garcia Siemens Siemens
Ground Rods M.L. Thibault Calpico, Eritech, Galvan, Nehring Calpico, Eritech, Galvan, Nehring
Insulators, Dead-End, Silicon Eduardo Sanchez K−Line, MacLean, Salisbury, Advanced
Rubber
K−Line, MacLean, Salisbury, Advanced
Rubber
Insulators, Line Eduardo Sanchez NGK, Porcelain Products, Victor, Hendrix,
Preformed
NGK, Porcelain Products, Victor, Hendrix,
Preformed
Insulators, Standoff Eduardo Sanchez S&C S&C
Interrupter – Pad-Mounted (In-Out) Ryan Kowdley Madruga, Elastimold Madruga, Elastimold
Interrupter – Pad-Mounted (Multi-Way) Ryan Kowdley ISG, Elastimold ISG, Elastimold
Interrupter – Subsurface, 200 Amp Ryan Kowdley Trayer, Elastimold Trayer, Elastimold
Interrupter – Subsurface, 600 Amp Ryan Kowdley Trayer Trayer
Interrupter – Vault-Mounted Ryan Kowdley Elastimold, G&W Elastimold, G&W
Junctions, Primary – Pad-Mounted Ryan Kowdley Madruga Madruga
Junctions, Primary – Subsurface Ryan Kowdley Elastimold (bus), Inertia (bracket) Elastimold (bus), Inertia (bracket)
Pad, Box, Interrupter Ryan Kowdley New Basis, Hubbell New Basis, Hubbell
Pad, Capacitor Miguel Plascencia Jensen Precast, Teichart Brooks,
Oldcastle Precast (Utility Vault)
Jensen Precast, Teichart Brooks,
Oldcastle Precast (Utility Vault)
Pad, Flat, Interrupter Ryan Kowdley Hubbell
Pad, Flat, Primary Junction Ryan Kowdley Hubbell, Oldcastle Hubbell, Oldcastle
Pad, Flat, Switch and Fuse Ryan Kowdley Oldcastle Precast (Utility Vault), Jensen Oldcastle Precast (Utility Vault), Jensen

066211 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #26: 03-25-22

Greenbook

PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers

Table 1 PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers (continued)

Material Responsible
Engineer
Approved Manufacturer
Pad, Transformer, Box M.L. Thibault Armorcast, CDR, New Basis,
Strongwell/Quazite
Pad, Transformer, Concrete M.L. Thibault Jensen Precast, Mid-State Concrete,
Structure Cast, Teichart Brooks, Oldcastle
Precast (Utility Vault)
Photocontrol, Streetlight2 Maylen Yue ALR, DTL, Fisher Pierce, Sun-Tech
Poles, Wood, Distribution (taller than 35 feet) Richard Kauzer McFarland Cascade, Stella-Jones
Poles, Wood, Service Richard Kauzer Koppers, McFarland Cascade, Nevada
Wood Preserving, Thunderbolt Wood
Treating, Stella-Jones
Pulling Lubricant Lisseth Villareal Dura-Line (Arnco), Polywater
Pulling Tape Lisseth Villareal Dura-Line (Arnco), Herculine, Nepco,
Wellington, Milliken
Recloser Vernal Garcia G&W
Recloser Controller Vernal Garcia Beckwith
Regulator, Voltage Miguel Plascencia Cooper, Howard Industries
Retaining Wall Calvin Yu Jensen Precast, Oldcastle Precast (Utility
Vault)
Sectionalizer Mike Lee Eaton-Cooper
Splices, UG Insulated, Primary Lisseth Villareal Elastimold, 3M, TE Connectivity
(Raychem)
Cold-shrink Y and H Splices, UG Insulated Primary Lisseth Villareal Richards, TE Connectivity
Splices, UG Insulated, Secondary Lisseth Villareal 3M
Switches, Controllers, Overhead, SCADA Mike Lee S&C
Switches, Controllers, Underground, SCADA Ryan Kowdley S&C, Trayer
Switches, Fused – Pad-Mounted Ryan Kowdley S&C
Switches, Fused – Subsurface Ryan Kowdley ABB, Trayer
Switches, Overhead, Manual Mike Lee Eaton-Cooper, Inertia, S&C
Switches, Pad-Mounted Ryan Kowdley S&C
Switches, Subsurface 200 Amp, Manual Ryan Kowdley Trayer, ISG, Elastimold
Switches, Subsurface 600 Amp, Manual Ryan Kowdley Trayer, ISG
Switches, Vault-Mounted Ryan Kowdley Elastimold, G&W, ISG, Trayer
Termination, Silicone Cold Shrink Lisseth Villareal 3M, TE Connectivity (Raychem)
Transformer, Potential, Dry-Type, Outdoor Overhead M.L. Thibault ABB, GE
Transformer, Potential, Dry-Type, Submersible M.L. Thibault ABB, Arteche
Transformer, Potential, Liquid-Filled,
Outdoor Overhead
M.L. Thibault ABB, Howard
Transformers, Single-Phase Overhead M.L. Thibault Howard Industries, Power Partners
Transformers, Single-Phase Pad-Mounted M.L. Thibault ABB, Howard Industries
Transformers, Single-Phase Subsurface M.L. Thibault ABB, Howard Industries, Power Partners
Transformers, Single-Phase Subway M.L. Thibault ABB, Howard Industries
Transformers, Three-Phase Network, Dry-Type M.L. Thibault ABB
Transformers, Three-Phase Network, Liquid Filled M.L. Thibault ABB, GE, Carte
Transformers, Three-Phase Overhead M.L. Thibault Howard Industries, Power Partners
Transformers, Three-Phase Pad-Mounted M.L. Thibault ABB, Cooper, Howard Industries,
Transformers, Three-Phase Subsurface M.L. Thibault ABB, Howard Industries

Rev. #26: 03-25-22 066211 Page 3 of 4

Greenbook PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers

Table 1 PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers (continued)

1 Manufacturer approved for option 2 market only. 2 Fully electronic, utility grade, meeting ANSI C136.10 requirements, turn on at 1.0 ± 0.2 foot candle (fc), turn off at 1.5 ± 0.3 fc. 3 For AWAC neutral only. 4 Approved for 1/0-6/1 ACSR TW only. 5 Approved ONLY fo Power Interconnection Hub (PIH) Installations (refer to Table 46 in Document 066201 Revision 27 or later) and 3.3MVA Transformers (Reference Document 072146).

Notes

  1. This document may be updated between Greenbook publishing. Contact your local PG&E representative to obtain the latest version.
  2. Each approved manufacturer does not necessarily supply all of the approved variations in each commodity.
  3. New Basis is the parent company of Associated Plastic Products and Associated Concrete International.

Revision Notes

Revision 26 has the following changes:

  1. Updated Table 1 Page 1 and Page 3 to current approved manufacturers.

066211 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #26: 03-25-22

Greenbook Electric Design Manual

Prepared by: SXZO

Purpose and Scope

This document establishes safety policy, tariff interpretation, and electric service installation guidelines when providing service to wireless carriers with antennas located on high-voltage transmission towers and poles (60 kV and above).

General Information

  1. When cellular antennas are located on high-voltage transmission towers and poles, take special safety precautions when providing normal 120 V/240 V service to their base-station equipment. The base-station equipment normally is located on a pad (typically a concrete pad) directly under the tower (see Figure 1) or adjacent to the transmission-line tower (see Figure 2). There is a direct metallic path from the antenna to the base-station equipment ground bus, which also is connected to the service neutral and ground from the incoming power service. Should a fault occur on the transmission tower, fault current and voltage could transfer into the service neutral and meter. Normal construction practices for meter installations do not always provide adequate protection for personnel touching the meter and standing on the ground from experiencing “touch voltages” in excess of the allowable limits.

Ground Grid Conductors Buried 18” Below Earth Surface Immediately Around Tower Footprint

3’ 0”

Figure 1 Base Station Under Tower

Tower Foundation (typical)

Ground Grid Conductors Buried 18” Below Earth Surface Around Tower Footprint and 3’ Outside Equipment Pad

Figure 2 Base Station Not Under Tower

Rev. #08: 07−01−14 068179 Page 1 of 2

Greenbook Electric Design Manual Service to Cellular on Transmission Tower

Guidelines

  1. The applicant must determine the predicted RMS ground potential rise, GPR RMS . . The GPR RMS may be shown at http://wwwt2/Weather/ATS/Grounding/Substation.asp.

  2. If the primary distribution system from which the cell site will be served is a uni-ground system (i.e.,12 kV, 17 kV, 3-wire 21 kV, or a primary neutral), and the predicted GPR is above 12,470 V symmetrical, then a dedicated transformer is required. On 3-wire primary systems, a transmission-line ground fault at the cell-site tower may create a very high ground-potential rise and become a safety concern. The PG&E transformer must be a dedicated transformer, serving only the cell site (now and forever), and the meter pedestal must be installed within the cell-site ground grid with a switch platform in front (see Note 8 below) to ensure that personnel will be standing on the equipment pad when they touch the meter. To ensure that no other customers share the 120 V/240 V neutral connection with these cell sites, these customers must have a dedicated service transformer that feeds only the cell sites.

  3. If the GPR is 12,470 V symmetrical or less, or if the primary distribution system from which the cell site will be served is a multi-grounded system (i.e., 4-wire, 21 kV common neutral), the site is treated as a normal Rule 16 service except the meter pedestal must be installed within the cell-site ground grid with a switch platform in front (see Note 8 below) to ensure that personnel will be standing on the equipment pad when they touch the meter. PG&E is responsible for planning, designing, and engineering its service extension using PG&E’s standards for design, materials, and construction (Rule 16 A.1).

Requirements

  1. Electric Rule 2 special facility charges apply to any additional costs if the application requires a dedicated transformer.

  2. If cell sites are on the same tower, they can share the ground grid and transformer. If the cell sites are on two adjacent towers and the towers are on the same transmission circuit, they can share the ground grid and transformer.

  3. Cell sites on towers of different transmission circuits may not share the same transformer.

8. The applicant must install a 3’ x 3’ operating switch platform, Material Code M155036 (Document 034851), centered 6” in front of the meter pedestal and interconnect the platform with the cell-site ground grid using a 250 Cu conductor.

  1. Any deviation from these guidelines requires a specific engineering analysis and design to develop sufficient compensatory design to provide touch and step protection to personnel working on the meter or cell-site equipment. Please contact applied technology services engineering personnel for assistance.

  2. Installations with meters that are not within the cell-site ground grid require an isolation transformer for protection. When performing work is at such a location without an isolation transformer, correct the meter installation by either installing an isolation transformer or by extending the cell-site ground grid to encompass the meter.

Inspections

  1. Distribution employees are responsible for inspecting work on the PG&E side of the meter.

Revision Notes

Revision 08 has the following changes:

  1. Revised Note 2 above to indicate that the GPR to be used is the symmetrical value.

  2. Revised Note 3 above to “uni-ground” instead of “not solidly grounded.”

  3. Revised Notes 6 and 7 above to refer to “transformer” rather than “service.”

068179 Page 2 of 2 Rev. #08: 07−01−14

UG-1 General Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

Purpose and Scope

This document provides special requirements for allowing the installation of a subsurface transformer. Refer to Engineering Standard Document 076255, Underground Transformer Selection, for determination of the preferred transformer locations.

General Information

Requirements for Allowing Installation of Subsurface Transformer:

Pad-mount installations are the preferred standard for underground equipment at PG&E. Where PG&E has suitable equivalent standard subsurface transformers and the applicant pays the special facilities charges, subsurface transformers may be installed in lieu of pad-mount, however:

  1. Subsurface transformers may not be installed:

A. Where heavy erosion occurs which may fill the enclosure with soil and cannot be integrated by retaining walls.

B. Where heavy snowfall occurs (generally above 3,000 foot elevation).

C. In areas not graded to prevent surface water from readily flowing into enclosure.

D. In areas where design ground water level is within 3 feet below grade.

E. In a drainage, a swale, or percolated area, etc.

F. Where local estimators or distribution planning personnel deem the location likely to flood.

2. The subsurface enclosure must be designed in accordance with the requirements of Document 062000, and

Engineering Material Specification 53 as modified by the provisions herein.

A. Low Design Groundwater Level is the condition where the design groundwater level is at or below the excavation depth of the enclosure as noted in Document 062000 (examples: 6’ 6” below grade for the incidental 4’ x 6’ 6” transformer enclosure and 9’ below grade for the incidental 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” UCD transformer enclosure) .

B. High Design Groundwater Level is the condition where the design groundwater level is above the excavation depth of the enclosure as noted in Document 062000.

  1. All requests to use subsurface transformers require soil chloride testing, and determination of design ground water level to determine the suitability of soil conditions if not already disallowed for the reasons in 1.

A. Soil chloride testing and design groundwater level determination is the responsibility of the applicant. PG&E does not reimburse the applicant for the cost.

  1. Soil chloride testing may be omitted if the applicant elects to provide exterior waterproofing of the subsurface enclosure, or where waterproofing (see Note 8 on Page 2) of the exterior surface is otherwise required such as in high design groundwater table.

A. Soil chloride testing must be performed under the supervision of a state licensed professional corrosion or geotechnical engineer.

B. Soil chloride tests shall be taken in the vicinity of the proposed subsurface transformer in a location chosen to be adequately representative of all soil strata that could impact the structure of the enclosure or the equipment

Rev. #07: 12-17-20 072149 Page 1 of 3

UG-1 General Greenbook Requirements for Allowing Installation of Subsurface Transformers

in the enclosure, as determined and stated on the report submitted by the state licensed professional engineer in responsible charge.

C. The soil must be tested for chloride by one of the following applicable standards:

Chloride content per ASTM D4327, ASTM D512, CTM 422, or AASHTO T−291

If Chloride content is greater than 5,000 parts per million (ppm), enclosure requires waterproofing.

  1. Groundwater level determination shall be performed by a state licensed professional geotechnical engineer and shall be based on site−specific borings and other information as deemed suitable by the state licensed geotechnical engineer in responsible charge.

  2. Enclosures in low design groundwater level areas and where chloride content is greater than 5,000 ppm require waterproofing. If chloride content is less than 5,000 ppm, install the enclosure per Document 062000.

  3. Enclosures in high design groundwater level areas require waterproofing.

  4. Waterproofing includes the following:

A. Sealing of all conduits (terminators) entering the enclosure.

B. Application of waterproofing membrane on all exterior surfaces including the bottom of the bottom slab. Waterproofing may be applied by the supplier or it may be applied in the field. Where extensions are added in the field, seal the joint with the required sealant prior to installation of the extension, then apply the waterproofing over the joint. Note: ground rods shall be installed before backfilling and while temporary control of groundwater is in place. Seal ground rod holes with wet-use epoxy.

C. Application of protection boards on all exterior surfaces including the bottom of the bottom slab to prevent membrane damage during backfill operations.

D. Sealing of joints between enclosure sections or extensions.

E. Sealing of ground rod holes.

F. Do no break out the four knockouts located on the bottom slab of the enclosure.

Materials used for Waterproofing the Enclodosure

  1. Waterproofing Membrane: Tremco’s TREMproof 250 GC fluid applied elastomeric waterproofing Membrane, minimum 215 mils wet thickness; Carlisle’s CCW Miradri 860/861 self−adhering sheet membrane, with manufacturer’ recommended adhesive primer; or approved equal

  2. Protection Board: Tremco’s HDPE−40 protection sheet: Carlisle’s CCW 200V Protection Fabric, or approved equal.

3. Rayflate Duct Sealing System (RDSS) conduit seal. Refer to Document 062288.

072149 Page 2 of 3 Rev. #07: 12-17-20

UG-1 General Greenbook Requirements for Allowing Installation of Subsurface Transformers

References Location Document

Single-Phase, Subsurface, Round Transformers . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035313

Underground Commercial Distribution, Three Phase, Subsurface Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039830 Live-Front, Low-Profile, Single-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 042761 Radial, Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043816 Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad Mounted Transformers UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045290 Duplex-Type, Three-Phase, Subsurface Transformer . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051776 Horizontal, Single-Phase, Subsurface Transformers . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060578 Primary Electric Underground Equipment Enclosures . UG-1: Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062000 Application of Underground Distribution Transformers UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 062111 Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288 Single-Phase, Dead-Front, and Duplex, Pad-Mounted Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 064307 Pad-Mount Transformers, Style IIG and IIH . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072146 Underground Transformer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076255 Design Requirements for Primary Electric Distribution Concrete Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 53

quirements for Primary Electric](http://wwwedm3/cgi-bin/getdocTDM.asp?itemid=005783276) Distribution Concrete Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 53

Revision Notes

Revision 07 has the following changes:

  1. Corrected Note 2 on Page 2 to 40 mil protection sheet.

Rev. #07: 12-17-20 072149 Page 3 of 3

Greenbook

Prepared by: MZGD

Purpose and Scope

This document describes metering requirements and interconnecting methods on existing service equipment for renewable electrical generation facilities enrolled in the Virtual Net Energy Metering (NEMV/VNEM) program. NEMV installations requires a VNEM meter that only measures the generation produced and must not be tied into any of the individual tenant or common use meters on the premise. The totalized amount of generation registered on the VNEM meter will be shared, through the PG&E billing process, by all tenants at the site.

General Information

  1. Developers must contact PG&E’s Electric Generation Interconnection (EGI) department and submit all applicable documents for approval before starting any installation.

  2. Submit single line, elevation drawings and detailed pictures showing the point of interconnection. The NEMV point of interconnection will require prior review and approval from all appropriate PG&E departments before any connections can be made.

  3. All installations and equipment must be approved by PG&E and approved by the local (city/county) inspection agency or the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) before any VNEM meter is set by PG&E.

  4. For any NEMV installation that requires a service disconnect/reconnect, developers must coordinate with the EGI department to request for a local PG&E inspector and metering department to inspect and approve all line side connections before reconnecting service.

  5. Developers must install UL approved service equipment with provisions for making generation interconnections that are not in any PG&E sealed sections and ahead of all tenant/house meters

Specific Requirements

  1. Applicants will provide, own, and install all equipment except for the PG&E VNEM meter and metering equipment (i.e. current transformers, test switch).

  2. VNEM panels must have test bypass facilities and meet the requirements in Section 5 and 7 of the latest Greenbook.

  3. VNEM panels greater than 200A must meet Greenbook requirements in Section 5, 9 and 10.

  4. VNEM meter height, working space and gas clearances must be maintained as specified in Section 2 and 5 of the Greenbook.

  5. Applicants will pull and connect generation conductors into the panel. Generation conductors in the panel must be clearly labeled “VNEM” at the point of interconnection for PG&E field personnel to identify.

  6. VNEM meter panels must have the generation connected to the LOAD side and the utility grid on the LINE side of the VNEM panel. The PG&E VNEM meter will register in reverse when the generating system is producing.

  7. VNEM meter panels must have proper marking and identification (i.e. apartment number, street number, use, or location). See PG&E Greenbook Section 5.5, “Meter Identification and Seals”.

Rev. #01: 03−25−22 076249 Page 1 of 7

Greenbook Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

Point of Connection

  1. For underground service multi-meter panels, an acceptable point of connection is,

A Inside the main switch section, see Figure 1, with approval from the local AHJ, or

B Install a sealable PG&E approved termination enclosure, see Figure 2. Refer to Document 058817, Terminating Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities, for termination enclosure specifications and requirements.

  1. For overhead service multi−meter panels, an acceptable point of connection is,

A Inside the main switch section, see Figure 3, with approval from the local AHJ, or

B Install a sealable wiring gutter with approval from the local AHJ. See Figure 4.

Multi-Meter Switchboards

  1. Single metered switchboards with the PG&E service termination below the metering current transformer (CT) section cannot be used for any NEMV interconnections. See Figure 5.

  2. The PG&E service termination must be in a separate enclosure/section adjacent to the metering CT section. In addition, the PG&E service termination section must have clear separation, as determined by PG&E, between the PG&E service conductors and conductors to the CT section. See Figure 6, and Figure 7.

  3. Because of various types of configurations and arrangements of switchboard compartments, the items below must be satisfied in order to interconnect into an existing switchboard. All other switchboard configurations will be denied interconnection.

A The service termination section is bus duct.

B An overhead service where PG&E’s service conductors end at the weather head. See Figure 8.

C The service termination section for an underground service has clear separation, as determined by PG&E, between the PG&E service conductors and conductors to the CT section. See Figure 9.

Generator AC disconnect Requirements

  1. Allows visible verification that an air−gap of separation has occurred between the blades and contact point.

  2. Must be fused for generators that do not have overcurrent protection at the point of interconnection with the utility.

  3. Must be installed within 10 feet and line of sight to the VNEM meter.

21. Must meet all other requirements as described in Document 060559, Disconnect Switch Requirements For Distributed Generation Customers.

Final Inspection Requirements

  1. All equipment has been approved by PG&E and the local (city/county) inspection agency or the authority having jurisdiction.

  2. VNEM point of connection has been reviewed and approved by all appropriate PG&E departments.

  3. AC disconnect has proper labeling and VNEM meter panels have proper marking and identification.

References Location Document

Terminating Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . UG-1 Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817

Disconnect Switch for Distributed

Generation Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060559

076249 Page 2 of 7 Rev. #01: 03−25−22

Greenbook

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

Point on Connection: Underground Service Wall-Mounted Equipment

Alternate Conduit

Fused Safety Switch

To Generating System

TBF TBF

Figure 1 Interconnection in Main Disconnect Section

Interconnection Area Must Have AHJ Approval

Customer Owned Wires

To Generating

Test-Bypass Facilities Sealable Termination Enclosure and Utility Service

Figure 2 Interconnection with New Service Termination Enclosure

Alternate Conduit

Fused Safety Switch

Rev. #01: 03−25−22 076249 Page 3 of 7

Greenbook Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

Point on Connection: Overhead Service Wall-Mounted Equipment

Interconnection Area Must Have AHJ Approval

Utility Service

Alternate

Main
Service
Disconnect

Fused Safety Switch

To Generating System

Test-Bypass Facilities

Figure 3 Interconnection for Overhead Service Equipment

Fused Safety Switch

To Generating System

TBF TBF

Test-Bypass Facilities

Figure 4 Interconnection with New Sealable Raceway/Bussed Gutter

076249 Page 4 of 7 Rev. #01: 03−25−22

Greenbook

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

Point on Connection: Floor Standing Switchboards

Metering CT Section

Utility Service Termination Section

Main
Service
Disconnect

Customer Owned Conductors to CT Section

Clear Separation Between Utility and Customer Conductors

Utility Service Conductors

Figure 5 Unallowable for NEMV Interconnection

rs
ice
s

Figure 6 Pull Section and Clear Separation

Rev. #01: 03−25−22 076249 Page 5 of 7

Greenbook Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

Point on Connection:

Customer Conductors Not Allowed and No Clear Separation NEMV Interconnection Not Possible

Utility Service

s

s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
on
e
on
e
on
e
on
e
on
e
on
e
on
e
on
e
on
e
on
e
on
e

Figure 7 Pull Section with No Clear Separation

Fused Safety Switch

New Sealable Raceway/Bussed Gutter (Customer Installed) Must Have AHJ Approval

To Generating System

Utility Service
N
lternate Conduit R
outing (
M
VNEM
Socket
Safety
TBF
6’ Max
10’ Max
Main Service
Disconnect
yPass Facilities
N
R
(
M
Main Service
Disconnect
TBF
N
R
(
M
Utility Service
lternate Conduit
outing
VNEM
Socket
Safety
10’ Max
6’ Max
yPass Facilities
Main Service
Disconnect
TBF
N
R
(
M
Utility Service
lternate Conduit
outing
VNEM
Socket
Safety
10’ Max
6’ Max
yPass Facilities
Main Service
Disconnect
TBF
N
R
(
M
Utility Service
lternate Conduit
outing
VNEM
Socket
Safety
10’ Max
6’ Max
yPass Facilities
Main Service
Disconnect
TBF
N
R
(
M
Utility Service
lternate Conduit
outing
VNEM
Socket
Safety
10’ Max
6’ Max
yPass Facilities
Main Service
Disconnect
TBF
N
R
(
M
Utility Service
lternate Conduit
outing
VNEM
Socket
Safety
10’ Max
6’ Max
yPass Facilities
Main Service
Disconnect
TBF
N
R
(
M
Utility Service
lternate Conduit
outing
VNEM
Socket
Safety
10’ Max
6’ Max
yPass Facilities
Main Service
Disconnect
TBF
N
R
(
M
Utility Service
lternate Conduit
outing
VNEM
Socket
Safety
10’ Max
6’ Max
yPass Facilities
Main Service
Disconnect
Main Service
Disconnect
Main Service
Disconnect
Main Service
Disconnect

Figure 8 Interconnection on Overhead Switchboard

076249 Page 6 of 7 Rev. #01: 03−25−22

Greenbook

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

Point on Connection:Floor-Standing Switchboards

Fused Safety Switch

To Generating System

Alternate Conduit Routing Generator Conductors (Customer Installed)
TBF
g

VNEM
Socket
Routing
10’ Max
6’ Max
pass Facilities
Main Service
Disconnect
TBF
g

VNEM
Socket
Routing
10’ Max
6’ Max
pass Facilities
Main Service
Disconnect
Main Service
Disconnect
TBF
g

VNEM
Socket
Routing
10’ Max
6’ Max
pass Facilities
Main Service
Disconnect
TBF
g

VNEM
Socket
Routing
10’ Max
6’ Max
pass Facilities
Main Service
Disconnect

Revision Notes

Figure 9 Interconnection on Underground Service Switches

Revision 01 has the following changes:

  1. Revised interconnection location on Figure 2.

  2. Removed alternate interconnection location on Figure 9.

Rev. #01: 03−25−22 076249 Page 7 of 7

UG-1: General Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

Purpose and Scope

This document specifies the requirements necessary and background information available for supporting denial of requests from those other than PG&E concerning modification of exterior coatings for Distribution Pad−Mounted Equipment.

General Information

This document is also included in the following manuals:

  • Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (“Greenbook”) where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e064e4' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

References Location Document

Marking, Numbering, and Identification where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e00a44' and any r_version_label='LIVE') of Line Structures where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e00a44' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Marking where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e00a44' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022168 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e00a44' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Pad-Mounted, Load-Break Switches and Fuses where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80dfbff5' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . UG-1: Switches where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80dfbff5' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 053318 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80dfbff5' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Installation of Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e08b23' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Transformer, Ground Level or Dry Vaults where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e08b23' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e08b23' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . 057521 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e08b23' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

enbook](https://edrm.comp.pge.com/D2/?docbase=pge_ecm&commandEvent=D2_ACTION_CONTENT_VIEW&locateDql=pge_document(all) where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e08b23' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . 057521 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e08b23' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e06ea3' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . Greenbook where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e06ea3' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063422 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e06ea3' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Box-Pad for Pad-Mounted Transformers where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e02e80' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e02e80' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . 064309 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e02e80' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Pad-Mount Capacitor where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e02aec' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e02aec' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066197 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e02aec' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Installation of Pad-Mounted, Load-Break Junction where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0282c' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . UG-1: Switches where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0282c' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066212 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0282c' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

pge.com/D2/?docbase=pge_ecm&commandEvent=D2_ACTION_CONTENT_VIEW&locateDql=pge_document(all) where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0282c' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066212 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0282c' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

Engineering Material Specification 86, where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0f9e2' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Single Phase, and Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Distribution where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0f9e2' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

com/D2/?docbase=pge_ecm&commandEvent=D2_ACTION_CONTENT_VIEW&locateDql=pge_document(all) where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0f9e2' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Single Phase, and Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Distribution where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0f9e2' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

Transformers” where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0f9e2' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0f9e2' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 86 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0f9e2' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Engineering Material Specification 91, where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e1e00e' and any r_version_label='LIVE') “Single-Phase and Three-Phase Subsurface where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e1e00e' and any r_version_label='LIVE') Distribution Transformers where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e1e00e' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e1e00e' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS91 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e1e00e' and any r_version_label='LIVE') General Order (G.O.) 128 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0dc02' and any r_version_label='LIVE') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.O. 128 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0dc02' and any r_version_label='LIVE')

Background

  1. Pacific Gas and Electric Utility (PG&E) receives requests from many Groups such as Service Organizations, Cities, and Counties requesting approvals for painting or placing murals on PG&E distribution line assets (Pad-mount Transformer, Switches, Capacitors, etc.) for many well-meaning reasons and causes. PG&E distribution assets are prohibited from being painted by any other than those in the employ or contracted by PG&E.

  2. Existing Assets which may have previously been painted by those other than PG&E prior to the issuance of this document will not be allowed to “freshen up” or repaint existing assets post issuance of this document.

  3. California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) General Order (G.O.) 128 where i_chronicle_id ='09131aad80e0dc02' and any r_version_label='LIVE'), Rule 17.8 requires that subsurface and pad-mounted equipment be clearly marked as to ownership. To comply with this rule, PG&E requires standardized signage on these devices which identifies them as PG&E utility assets. these requirements are contained within the corresponding Engineering Material Specifications (EMS).

Rev. #00: 08-15-17 076268 Page 1 of 2

UG-1: General Greenbook Painting of PG&E Electric Distribution Pad-Mounted and Subsurface Equipment

A Signage identifies these devices by their operating number making it quick and easy for PG&E Employees to locate and identify these devices in the event of emergencies or for the purposes of required maintenance and inspection.

B Uniformity and consistency of the exterior color and pattern assist in locating and identifying these devices. Non-Uniformity of color as well covering of signage on these devices could prolong restoration efforts and desensitize the general public from the dangers of tampering and/or not maintaining clearances from these Assets.

  1. California and Federal Law have cases which guide how PG&E would have to perform were this altering of Assets allowed. Current procedures and processes disallow PG&E from implementing these requirements when overlaid on Operational Procedures.

  2. Allowing cities and their citizens to paint on public utility assets creates two possibly significant legal issues concerning ownership of the painting and a third party s right to express their views on our equipment.

A California law protects “fine art” including murals painted on someone else’s (i.e., Utility s) property. (Cal. Civ. Code § 987(a).) The code provides that once a mural is painted on the surface (transformer housing, for example), only the artist or his or her heirs (until 50 years after the artist’s death), may authorize “any physical defacement, mutilation, alteration, or destruction of a work of fine art.” (Cal. Civ. Code § 987(c)(1).)

ng murals painted on someone else’s (i.e., Utility s) property. (Cal. Civ. Code § 987(a).) The code provides that once a mural is painted on the surface (transformer housing, for example), only the artist or his or her heirs (until 50 years after the artist’s death), may authorize “any physical defacement, mutilation, alteration, or destruction of a work of fine art.” (Cal. Civ. Code § 987(c)(1).)

B In Pacific Gas and Electric. Co. v. Public Util. Comm. (1985) 475 U.S. 1 the United States Supreme Court ruled that PG&E had a right to control access to its property for expressive purposes so long as we did not open that property as a forum for public expression. The court contrasted PG&E’s right with other property owners who had allowed their private property to be used for some types of public expression; the court held that that property had become a public forum and the owners could not thereafter exclude other speakers and other messages from their property.

Examples of Painted Assets

Figure 1 Examples of Enclosures in Violation of Note 2 (above)

Revision Notes

Revision 00 has the following changes:

  1. This is a new document.

076268 Page 2 of 2 Rev. #00: 08-15-17

UG-1: Services OH: Services Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

Purpose and Scope

This document describes the options available and requirements of Wholesale Distribution Customers (Other Utilities or Customers which can connect to PG&Es Primary Voltage Distribution System and receive energy at Wholesale Rates as defined in the Wholesale Distribution Tariff − WDT). These Distribution Customers must have an executed Wholesale Distribution Tariff and Service Agreement (SA) filed with FERC (Federal Energy Regulatory Commission) to be eligible for these options of Interconnection. Excluded from this Document and disallowed are new WDT Connections at Secondary Voltage Levels (Below 600 Vac) as well as connections to Network Primary Voltage Circuits and Network Secondary Voltage Systems.

This document details the equipment and connections requirements to safely interconnect to PG&E’s Electric Distribution System. These connections require clearly separated asset ownership while allowing for both parties (PG&E and the Wholesale Customer) to complete maintenance and operation tasks with little or minimal interaction requirements between the parties. Variations of these examples should be submitted through the Variance Process (TD−2951P−01 Request for Variance from Electric Distribution Standards) and discussed in advance with Electric Distribution Planning Departments prior to approval allowing Project progression. The intent of this document is that these generalized examples are the ONLY allowable configurations to be approved without an approved variance in the Electronic Document Routing System (EDRS). Variances are NOT precedent setting but rather are on a Project by Project Case.

omp.pge.com/TILVIEWER) Distribution Planning Departments prior to approval allowing Project progression. The intent of this document is that these generalized examples are the ONLY allowable configurations to be approved without an approved variance in the Electronic Document Routing System (EDRS). Variances are NOT precedent setting but rather are on a Project by Project Case.

Distribution Customers must provide space and locations for the equipment identified in Table 1. The intent of the equipment requirements identified in Table 1 allow the Distribution Customer (WDT Eligible Electric Utility Customer) to function largely independent of the Distribution Provider (PG&E) while at the same time isolating failures to the Distribution Customers System from affecting the PG&E Distribution System.

Table 1 Intervening Facility Requirements (WDT Customer Owned)

Intervening Facility Overhead Underground
Disconnect Switch
Required
Required
Protective Device
Required
Required
Wood Pole
Required
Not Required
Conductor1

Required
Required

1 The WDT Customer must own the conductor from either the Metering Panel or Protective Device depending on the Point of Interconnection (POI) which is discussed in the Application Section of this document

Excluded from this Document are cases in which Generation is connected to the PG&E Distribution Grid. Retail Interconnection Projects are detailed in the Distribution Interconnection Handbook. Additionally, excluded from this document is the Document TD-2999B-030 Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary Distribution Voltages. Document TD-2999B-030 applies to Retail Interconnections in contrast to this document which pertains to Wholesale Interconnections. In general, most documents included in the PG&E Underground and Overhead Construction Manual have been developed specifically for Retail applications unless specifically identified as pertaining to both Retail and Wholesale Customers.

Rev. #00: 12-17-20 092816 Page 1 of 4

UG-1: Services OH: Services Wholesale Distribution Tariff (WDT) Greenbook Interconnection Design Options for Primary Voltage Service

General Information

Utilities having a WDT Tariff on File with FERC:

  • WD Tariff, SA 3 : Port of Oakland WDT Service Agreement

  • WD Tariff, SA 15 : Westside Power Authority IA and WDT Service Agreement

  • WD Tariff, SA 17 : Western Area Power Administration WDT Service Agreement

  • WD Tariff, SA 30 : Power and Water Resources Pooling Authority IA and WDT SAs

  • WD Tariff, SA 56 : Power and Water Resources Pooling Authority IA and WDT SAs

  • WD Tariff, SA 275 : City and County of San Francisco IA and WDT SA

    • WD Tariff, SA 382 : Shelter Cove Resort Improvement District IA and WDT SA

This document will be included in the following manuals:

Application

Below is a list of representative requirements for Wholesale Interconnection. These requirement details indicate associated PG&E Installation and Design Documentation which satisfy the Intervening Facilities identified in Table 1 Intervening Facility Requirements (WDT Customer Owned) on Page 1. These installations allow the WDT Customer to operate and perform maintenance on their System exclusive of PG&E involvement through operation of WDT Customer owned Protective Devices. These designs provide the necessary equipment to interconnect seamlessly into the existing PG&E Distribution System.

Primary Underground Service Connection

This is a typical installation in urban areas such as San Jose, Oakland and San Francisco but may be present throughout the PG&E System.

Ì

Note: Typical Pad Mounted Switchgears include Metering in the Service Conductor Entrance Section with the WDT Owned Protective Device located immediately adjacent. Reference Greenbook Section 11

WDT Customer Owned Protective Device (Circuit Breaker)

WDT Owned Service Entrance Conductor and Conduit

Alternate Primary UG Service Interconnect

092816 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #00: 12-17-20

UG-1: Services OH: Services Wholesale Distribution Tariff (WDT) Greenbook Interconnection Design Options for Primary Voltage Service

Primary Underground Service Connection (continued)

At the point designated by PG&E as the connection to the existing PG&E Electric Distribution System, PG&E will install and own a Gang Operated Protective Device such as a Switch Interrupter Switch. This device may be Pad−Mounted or a Subsurface device depending on local space constraints and/or requirements. Installation of this PG&E owned protective device allows selective clearing of the Tap Line from the PG&E System should faults not be cleared by the WDT Customer Owned Primary Protective Device. Reference Document 068188 (Installation of Automatic Pad−Mounted Interrupters for Underground Distribution Lines) for the 200 A Pad Mounted Interrupter to be owned by the WDT Customer. Reference Document 066208 (Installation of Automatic Subsurface Interrupters for Primary Equipment Enclosures) for the Subsurface Interrupter Installations.

Primary Metering by the WDT Customer is preferred to be immediately on the Source side of the WDT Customer Owned Protective Device as indicated in Figure 1 on Page 2 . In such a configuration, PG&E’s Ownership of the Underground Conductor and Conduit stop at the Cable Terminals on the Meter Panel which is immediately adjacent the WDT Customer Owned Service Main Breaker. In some cases, this will prove difficult for the WDT Customer to accomplish and they may instead request the Alternative identified in Figure 2 on Page 2. Where the WDT Owned Protective Device is requested to be located on the Source Side of the Metering and PG&E can accommodate this request, PG&E’s Ownership of conduit will stop at the entrance to the subsurface enclosure and cable will stop at the Cable Elbows landing on the WDT Customer owned Interrupter. PG&E or the WDT Customer may own the Revenue Meter. Non-PG&E owned meters are covered by Electric Rule 22 Direct Access. PG&E SHALL install, own and maintain the associate Metering Potential Transformers (PTs) and Current Transformers (CTs) located in the Metering Panel that will be owned by the WDT Customer. The WDT Customer’s Metering must be within 50 cable feet of the WDT Customer owned Protective Device to avoid uncompensated line loss through the cable. Further than 50’ should be compensated for in the metering programming.

Should the WDT Customer request the Alternative in Figure 2 on Page 2 they SHALL only use the PG&E Material Coded Devices to be installed per the above−mentioned PG&E Standards. This installation requirement is necessary to allow PG&E Personnel to safely operate the cabling on the WDT Customer Owned Protective Device. PG&E Personnel SHALL NOT operate the WDT Customer Owned Protective Device (Open, Close, Setting Changes).

Primary Overhead Service Connection

This is a typical installation in Rural Areas such as the Inland and San Joaquin Valley Service Territory Areas.

At the point designated by PG&E as the connection to the existing PG&E System, PG&E will install, own and operate a Gang Operated Protective Device such as a Recloser. Installation of this protective device allows selective clearing of the Tap Line and associated load for the WDT Customer should faults not be cleared by the WDT Customer Owned Primary Protective Device. The WDT Load will then feed through the Pole Mounted Primary Metering identified in Document 058779 Pole−Top Primary Metering Installation, (12 or 21kV Line) .

Primary Metering for WDT Services should occur before the WDT Customer Owned Protective Device. In this case PG&E’s Ownership of the Overhead Conductor stops at the PT’s and CTs identified in Document 058779 Pole−Top Primary Metering Installation, (12 or 21kV Line). Where the WDT Customer Owned Protective Device is requested by the WDT Customer to be located on the Source Side of the Metering and PG&E can accommodate this request, PG&E’s Ownership stops at the Source Side Disconnects on the WDT Customer Owned Protective Device.

Note − Unlike the PG&E Standard Design for Line Reclosers which is identified in Document 066199 Installing Automatic Circuit Reclosers on Distribution Lines, there SHALL NOT be a U.S. switch (identified in Document 066195 25 kV Underarm Side−Break Switch) installed as a Bypass to the WDT Customer owned Line Recloser whether on the Source or Load Side of the Primary Metering in the Wholesale Application. This variance to the PG&E Standard Design disallows the WDT Customer to bypass their Protection Device thereby moving the primary sectionalizing device responsibility to PG&E’s Protective Device.

PG&E or the WDT Customer may own the Revenue Meter. PG&E SHALL install, own and maintain the associate Metering Potential Transformers (PTs) and Current Transformers (CTs) located on the Metering Pole that will be owned by the WDT Customer. The WDT Customers Metering must be within 50 feet of the WDT Customer owned Protective Device to avoid uncompensated line losses. Further than 50’ should be compensated for in the metering programming.

The WDT Customer SHALL use the PG&E Material Coded Device identified in the PG&E Standards. This installation requirement is necessary to allow PG&E Personnel to safely connect the PG&E Overhead Conductors to the WDT Owned Line Recloser. PG&E Personnel SHALL NOT operate the WDT Customer owned Protective Device (Open, Close, Setting Changes).

Rev. #00: 12-17-20 092816 Page 3 of 4

UG-1: Services OH: Services Wholesale Distribution Tariff (WDT) Greenbook Interconnection Design Options for Primary Voltage Service

References Location Document

600-Amp Separable Insulated Connectors . . . . . . . . . . UG-1:Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051071 Pole-Mounted Primary Metering Installation (12 or 21 KV Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Meters/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058779 Cables for Underground Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1:Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039955 25 kV Underarm Side-Break Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066195

Installation of Automatic Circuit Reclosures

on Distribution Lines: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066199 Installation of Automatic Subsurface Interrupters for Primary Equipment Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066208 Request for Variance from Electric Distribution Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-2951P-01 Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary Distribution . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-2999B-030 Distribution Interconnection Handbook Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (“Greenbook”) Electric Overhead Construction Manual − Services Section Electric Underground Construction Manual − Services Section

Revision Notes

Revision 00 has the following changes:

  1. This is a new document.

092816 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #00: 12-17-20

Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

Purpose and Scope

This document describes interconnection requirements for Net Energy Metering (NEM) projects where a supply side interconnection is requested by Distributed Generation (DG) customers on 0 − 600 Volt meter panels and switchboards. A supply side interconnection is defined as a connection between the PG&E electric meter and the main service disconnect / breaker. For Virtual Net Energy Metering (VNEM) projects where the proposed interconnection is on the line side of the PG&E meter, refer to Document 076249.

References Location Document

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Meters/UG-1 Services/Greenbook . 076249 Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060559

General Information

PG&E’s preferred distributed generation interconnection is on the load side of the panel, after the service main disconnect. This interconnection is described in National Electrical Code (NEC) 705.

For supply side interconnections, the following requirements apply:

  1. The interconnection must be between the PG&E Meter and main breaker in the customer’s section of the equipment and not in the PG&E termination, metering, or other sealed compartment or section.

  2. PG&E recommends the interconnection proposal and single line diagrams are pre−approved by their Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

  3. The AHJ must sign off the building permit for the generation system before PG&E will give the final approval to operate.

  4. Residential “solar ready” service panels designed with a dedicated alternative energy (customer generation) circuit breaker on the supply side of the main breaker is allowable. “Solar ready” panels must be PG&E and EUSERC approved and have factory installed labels showing location and ratings of the generation source.

  5. New pad-mounted (floor-standing) switchboards must have a separate compartment / section dedicated for supply side connections. Or, the switchboard manufacturer may design and install provisions for a supply side connection prior to the switchboard being installed and energized.

Specific Requirements

  1. When requesting to propose a supply side interconnection, submit the following to the PG&E Electric Generation

Interconnection (EGI) department:

A. Single line diagram clearly showing the supply side interconnection.

B. Photos of the service panel.

1.Photos must show the whole service panel and all switchboard sections, no close-up photos.

2.Photos must be marked−up to show where the interconnection will be and how conductors will be routed to the Interconnection Location.

Rev. #00: 9-15-20 094670 Page 1 of 7

Greenbook Supply Side Interconnection Requirements for Distributed Generation

  1. Do not route conduit and/or conductors through any PG&E sealed sections for the purpose of interconnection.

  2. A fused AC disconnect switch must be installed within 10 feet and line of sight to the PG&E meter. Refer to

Document 060559 for AC disconnect requirements .

  1. Figure 1 − Figure 7 on Pages 2 − 7 distinguishes the separation between PG&E and customer sections and the designated Supply Side Interconnection Location s . Interconnections are not allowed in any PG&E sections (shaded grey).

Supply Side Interconnection Location. Must Have AHJ Approval

PG&E Sealed Sections (Shaded Grey) No Interconnections

Allowed

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ

ÎÎ

ÎÎ

Main Service Breaker

Customer Main Breaker

and Distribution Section

Figure 1 Residential Wall-Mount Service Panel Interconnections are not allowed in any PG&E sections (shaded grey)

094670 Page 2 of 7 Rev. #00: 9-15-20

Greenbook

Supply Side Interconnection Requirements for Distributed Generation

Supply Side Interconnection

Main Service Switch

Test By−Pass Facility Section

ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ

ÎÎ

Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î



ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î



Î



ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

TBF

ÎÎ

Alternate Supply Side Interconnection Location with an Applicant Installed Raceway or Bussed Gutter. Must Have AHJ Approval

Figure 2 Commercial Wall-Mount Service Panel

Î

ÎÎÎÎ

PG&E Sealed Sections (Shaded Grey) No Interconnections

Allowed

Test By−Pass Facility Section

Customer Main Breaker Section Supply Side Interconnection Location. Must Have AHJ Approval

ns ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion
Î
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion
Î
ss
tion

Figure 3 Commercial Wall−Mount Meter Breaker Combination Service Panel Interconnections are not allowed in any PG&E sections (shaded grey)

Rev. #00: 9-15-20 094670 Page 3 of 7

Greenbook Supply Side Interconnection Requirements for Distributed Generation

PG&E Sealed Sections (Shaded Grey) No Interconnections

Allowed

Supply Side Interconnection Location. Must Have AHJ Approval

PG&E Sealed Test

By-Pass Facility Sections (Shaded Gray). No Interconnections

Allowed

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

Î Î Î

Main Service Breakers

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Suppl
Locati
AHJ A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
TBF
Suppl
Locati
AHJ A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
TBF
Suppl
Locati
AHJ A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
TBF
Suppl
Locati
AHJ A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
TBF
Suppl
Locati
AHJ A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

TBF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
TBF
Suppl
Locati
AHJ A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TBF
TBF
Suppl
Locati
AHJ A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

Figure 4 Commercial Floor-Standing Multi-Meter Switchboard Interconnections are not allowed in any PG&E sections (shaded grey)

094670 Page 4 of 7 Rev. #00: 9-15-20

Greenbook

Supply Side Interconnection Requirements for Distributed Generation

PG&E Sealed Sections (Shaded Grey) No Interconnections

Allowed

Barrier Between Sections

Supply Side Interconnection Location. Must Have AHJ Approval

Main Service Breaker

Barr
Sup
Inter
Loca
Hav
M

Figure 5 Floor Standing Switchboard With Metering Section Above the Main Breaker Interconnections are not allowed in any PG&E sections (shaded grey)

Rev. #00: 9-15-20 094670 Page 5 of 7

Greenbook Supply Side Interconnection Requirements for Distributed Generation

Supply Side Interconnection Location. Must Have AHJ Approval

Main Service Breaker

PG&E Sealed Sections (Shaded Grey) No Interconnections

Allowed

oval
ice

oval
ice
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
oval
ice
oval
ice
oval
ice
oval
ice
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î

Figure 6 Floor Standing Switchboard With Metering Section Above the Service Termination Section Interconnections are not allowed in any PG&E sections (shaded grey)

094670 Page 6 of 7 Rev. #00: 9-15-20

Greenbook

Supply Side Interconnection Requirements for Distributed Generation

Supply Side Interconnection Location.

PG&E Sealed Sections (Shaded Grey) No Interconnections

Allowed

Main Service Breaker

Î Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
Î
Î Î
Î Î Î
Î Î Î

Figure 7 Wall Mounted and Current Transformer Cabinet Interconnections are not allowed in any PG&E sections (shaded grey)

Revision Notes

Revision 00 has the following changes:

  1. This is a new document. This document replaces PG&E Bulletin TD−6999B−048, “Requirements for Line Side Interconnections for Distributed Generation”.

Rev. #00: 9-15-20 094670 Page 7 of 7

OH: Services UG: Services Greenbook

Prepared by: SXZO

Purpose and Scope

This document specifies the technical requirements for all customers requesting electric service at one of Pacific Gas and Electric Company’s (PG&E) primary distribution voltages as defined in Rule 2. It is intended to give the customer a clear understanding of what their responsibilities are to receive Primary Service (PS) and those of PG&E. PG&E has developed these technical requirements in order to provide safe and reliable service to all the customers the Company

serves. This document applies to load and generation PS customers. If the PS customer already has or intends to install distributed generation or back up generation, then also refer to the information described in the PG&E Distribution Interconnection Handbook (DIH). The DIH contains the specific requirements for interconnecting generating facilities or distributed generation (DG) with PG&E electrical distribution system.

References Location Document

25 kV Underarm Side−Break Switch, Manual

and Automated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH:Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066195 Installing Automatic Circuit Reclosers

on Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH:Switches/EPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066199 Installation of Pad−Mounted Interrupters for

Underground Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG:Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 068188 Introduction of the Eaton/Cooper NOVA Pad−Mounted Line Recloser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG:Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076266

Transmission Interconnection Handbook, Section G2, Protection and Control Requirements. Electric & Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)

ok,](https://www.pge.com/en_US/large-business/services/alternatives-to-pge/third-party-electric-options/electric-transmission-services/transmission-interconnection-handbooks.page) Section G2, Protection and Control Requirements. Electric & Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)

Section 1 General Requirements

Customers meeting the Rule 2 requirements for PS shall install, own, and operate their distribution system beyond their Point of Service (POS). While there are a number of technical requirements associated with a PS, two requirements are particularly important:

� PG&E must approve the POS.

� PG&E must approve the protection scheme that the customer installs, owns and operates at the POS.

� The maximum capacity of PG&E’s primary distribution main line circuits is 600 amps. The maximum capacity of local loop distribution circuits is typically 200 amps. PS customers may be required to connect to a main line circuit if one or more customers are already connected to a local loop circuit as the capacity may be limited.

Additionally, the following information and requirements are also noteworthy.

� The PG&E system has an A−C−B counterclockwise rotation.

� Before making changes to PG&E−required protection equipment, the customer must submit the proposed changes to PG&E for review and approval.

� The customer is responsible for maintaining PG&E−required protection equipment in accordance with PG&E maintenance and test practices. A PG&E technical representative will reseal PG&E−required relays following setting changes and routine maintenance.

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094676 Page 1 of 16

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

� After completing such tests, the customer must submit maintenance and test report documentation to PG&E for review and approval.

� Contact the local PG&E representative with any questions.

Satisfying these requirements assists PG&E in providing safe and reliable service to other customers connected to the Company’s system. Customers considering a PS should contact PG&E early in the design process.

Section 2 Primary Service Arrangements

PG&E prefers that the POS, protective device, and revenue meter for a PS be at or near the property line nearest to PG&E’s primary distribution. The PG&E−approved and customer installed primary protection must be at the POS to protect other PG&E customers from outages due to faults on customer facilities. The revenue−metering should also be at this point because the PS customer is responsible for the line losses on their primary conductor and transformer(s) as well as their load. However, unlike the requirement for the protective device, it is not an absolute requirement.

The sections below explain the primary protection requirements and revenue−metering location requirements for PG&E’s preferred PS arrangements. Please note that non−preferred service arrangement proposals may take longer to approve and involve additional cost for the customer.

Section 3 Preferred PS Arrangements

PG&E’s preferred PS arrangements are either: a) when the PS customer’s primary distribution line is underground (UG) and the POS is less than 500 feet from the property line, or b) when the PS customer’s primary distribution line is overhead (OH) and the protective device pole (if separate from the POS pole) is less than 50 feet from the property line.

  1. UG Conductor and POS < 500 Feet

If the PS customer’s primary line is underground and the POS is 500 feet or less from the property line, refer to Figure 1 on Page 12 and Figure 2 on Page 13. The following requirements apply:

A. The PS customer must provide a PG&E approved pad−mounted switchgear enclosure for PG&E’s revenue−metering equipment. See Section 12 on Page 13 for detailed revenue− metering requirements.

B. The PS customer must install primary protection at the POS. This protection may consist of a circuit breaker with phase and ground relays or, depending on the customer’s load, fuses may suffice. If PG&E determines that fuses will not coordinate with PG&E’s source−side protection, then the customer must use a circuit breaker. See Section 8A on Page 6 and Section 8C on Page 7 for circuit breaker and fuse requirements.

C. The PS customer must install conduit from the POS to PG&E’s primary distribution equipment location.

D. PG&E will pull one continuous run of cable and connect to the customer’s POS termination facility, not to exceed 500 feet (subject to an acceptable number of bends in the conduit).

  1. OH Conductor

If the PS customer’s primary line is overhead, then the first pole at the customer’s property line is the POS. Refer to Figure 3. The following requirements apply:

A. PG&E will install pole−top revenue−metering on the first pole on the PS customer’s property. See Engineering Standard 058779 Pole−Top Primary Metering Installation, (12 or 21 kV Line) for pole−top revenue− metering requirements.

B. The PS customer must install primary protection on the second pole on their property, not to exceed 50 feet from the revenue metering pole. This protection may consist of a recloser or, depending on the customer’s load, fuses may suffice. If PG&E determines that fuses will not coordinate with PG&E’s source−side protection, then the customer must use a recloser. See Section 8C on Page 7 for recloser requirements.

C. The PS customer second pole and the equipment installed on it, must maintain a minimum clearance of 10 feet from the PG&E revenue metering pole and any equipment, crossarms, and wires installed on it.

D. PG&E will interconnect its system with the customer’s system at the revenue−metering pole.

Section 4 Non−Preferred PS Arrangement Proposals

PS customers may propose a non−preferred PS arrangement. This typically occurs when the PS customer’s primary distribution line is UG and the proposed location for the primary switchgear is greater than 500 feet from the property line. PG&E will consider such proposals; however, non−preferred service arrangement proposals may take longer to

094676 Page 2 of 16 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

design, approve, and can involve additional customer expense. Customers should contact PG&E early in the design process if they are considering a non−preferred PS arrangement.

Also, a non−preferred PS arrangement may consist of:

  1. A PG&E approved interrupter within 500 feet of the property line, or

  2. Pad−mounted switchgear greater than 500 feet of the property line that includes a protective device such as a breaker or fuses. In these cases, the substructures and equipment are installed and owned by the customer. As with preferred arrangements, PG&E must approve the location, substructure/equipment arrangement and protective devices.

In addition, The PS customer must provide space for PG&E’s revenue−metering in their switchgear. See Section 12.B.5).a. on Page 15 for detailed metering requirements.

  1. PG&E will pull one continuous run of cable, not to exceed 500 feet, to the POS (interrupter) subject to an acceptable number of bends in the conduit.

Section 5 Location of Revenue − Metering

The preferred revenue meter location is at the POS. High−side metering is PG&E’s preferred metering configuration. If PG&E approves low−side metering, a 2% adjustment factor will be applied at each stage of the transformation before the meter. See Section 12 on Page 13 for additional revenue−metering requirements.

Section 6 Service Wire Configuration

If the PG&E POS is at a protective device and not at the customer owned switchgear the wiring configuration, 3−wire or 4−wire, of the customer’s service from the protective device to the switchgear must be the same as PG&E’s.

Section 7 General Protection Requirements

It is important to minimize the potential hazard to life and property when interconnecting facilities to the PG&E distribution system. This requires the automatic detection of abnormal conditions and trouble related to a PS customer’s equipment and the isolation of the condition and/or equipment within a reasonable time. As a general rule, neither party should depend on the other for system protection. As such, PG&E’s minimum protection requirements are designed and intended to protect the PG&E power system only. Moreover, the interconnection of a PS customer to the PG&E distribution system must not degrade existing PG&E protection and control schemes or interfere with the service of other customers (see Rule 2). The PS customer’s facilities must isolate any fault or abnormality that could adversely affect the PG&E electric system, or the electric systems of other entities connected to the PG&E electric system. PG&E assumes no liability for damage to the PS customer−owned facilities resulting from a lack of adequate coordination between the PS customer’s protective device(s) and PG&E’s protective devices, or negligence due to the PS customer’s failure to maintain protective and/or isolation equipment. PG&E recommends that the PS customer acquire the services of a qualified and licensed electrical engineer to review its plans. The PS customer must, at its expense, install, operate, and maintain system protection facilities in accordance with all applicable regulatory rules and requirements, and in accordance with this document.

  1. Data the PS Customer Provides to PG&E

A. The PS customer must provide the information necessary for PG&E to determine the interconnection requirements before PG&E approves the specific PS installation. This information includes, but is not limited to, the following:

(1) Single−Line diagrams.

(2) Meter and Relay diagrams.

(3) Three−Line diagrams of required protective device.

(4) Control diagrams including direct current (dc) tripping circuit.

(5) Proposed relay specifications and settings.

(6) Relay manufacturer, model, style, type, ranges, settings, and a copy of the relay instruction manual.

(7) Projected electrical demand (i.e., kilowatt [kW]), including the following information:

(a) Power factor

(b) Load factor

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094676 Page 3 of 16

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

(c) Large motor sizes

(d) Motor starting currents

(e) Customer’s transformer size

(f) Estimated breakdown of the electric energy use (i.e., kilowatt hours [kwh]) by month

(8) Full−size phase and ground coordination curves showing full coordination with PG&E’s system.

(9) A registered electrical engineer must prepare and stamp the fault–study results.

(10) Maintenance program documentation for PG&E−required switches, interrupting devices, and protective equipment.

(11) Completed PS-1 Form with main breaker(s) and relay data.

(12) Main Protective Relay Current Transformer(s) (CT) data;

(a) Manufacturer

(b) Model Number

(c) CT Ratio

(d) CT Class (Minimum Class C100 Required)

(e) CT Burden (Value must be provided in Ohms

B. PG&E strongly recommends that the PS customer, or their representative, provide the above information before ordering equipment and finalizing the design.

C. Also, before energizing the new PS facility, the PS customer must also provide a copy of the on−site test reports for the switches, devices, and relays at least 30 working days before energizing the service. This allows sufficient time for review, modification, and final PG&E approval. Qualified personnel must prepare these on−site test reports. Refer to Section 9, “Equipment Test Requirements,” on Page 6 and Section 10, “Pre−Energizing Test” on Page 8 for further details.

  1. Data that PG&E Provides to the Applicant

PG&E provides the following engineering data to the PS customer:

A. System fault−duty at the property line.

B. Settings for PG&E source−side protective devices and the required clearance time to comply with PG&E protection standards.

C. Relay curves for PG&E source−side protective devices, if requested by the PS customer.

Section 8 Specific Protection Requirements

PG&E must review and approve the fault−interrupting devices that the PS customer selects. There are four basic types of fault−interrupting devices available for distribution systems:

� Circuit breakers

� Reclosers (without bypass)

� Interrupters

� Fuses

The following sections provide specific requirements for each of these devices.

  1. Circuit Breaker Requirements

The interconnecting circuit breaker must have sufficient capacity to interrupt the maximum available fault current at its location. Phase and ground relays approved by PG&E (see Table 1, PG&E Approved Relays, on Page 7) must be used to trip the circuit breaker for phase and ground faults. These relays must coordinate with PG&E’s source−side protection. It must also include the following features:

A. Shunt−trip via a trip signal supplied through a battery external to the circuit breaker.

B. Lock out if operated by protective relays required for interconnection.

094676 Page 4 of 16 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

C. Capacitive tripping is unacceptable.

D. Relay Requirements:

(1) PG&E requires PS customers to install phase and ground over−current relays that trip the interrupting device at the POS. These relays must detect all phase and ground faults, and coordinate with PG&E’s source side protection. All required relays must include relay targets and have “manual reset” capability.

(2) The PS customer must either:

(a) select phase and ground relays approved by PG&E or,

(b) have an International Electric Testing Association certified testing company test the relay and provide the test results to PG&E for review. This option should be discussed with PG&E prior to testing the relays.

(3) PG&E strongly recommends that PS customers submit all relay specification and setting proposals for PG&E approval before finalizing the design and ordering equipment. PS customers not submitting this information risk delaying their projects.

Table 1 PG&E Approved Relays

E. Relay Redundancy Requirement

The PS customer’s protection system must contain redundancy such that the failure of any one component will still allow the customer’s system to isolate the PS facility from the PG&E system under a fault condition. Three single−phase over−current relays and a ground over−current relay, or two three−phase over−current relays and a ground over−current relay satisfy the redundancy requirement. PS facilities, using microprocessor−based relays as a multifunctional protective device, must have backup relays.

F. Power Supply Requirements

(1) Power supplies for PG&E required relays and the tripping circuitry for the fault−interrupting device must be supplied from a battery and charger system. The system must include dc under−voltage detection.

(2) Fuses are not allowed in the dc trip circuitry (dc breakers are acceptable).

(3) The preferred battery type is flooded lead−acid (calcium, antimony) or nickel−cadmium (NiCd). Sealed batteries (Valve Regulated Lead Acid [VRLA]) are not allowed. An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is unacceptable. See Section 14, “Battery Requirements for Interconnecting to the PG&E System,” on Page 10, for more details on PG&E’s battery requirements.

(4) The power supply system must include an alarm feature supplied from a DC low voltage source and connected to a customer monitoring system. The alarm must be audible and visual (strobe) and be operational at all times.

G. Fire Pump Circuit Breaker

Fire pumps connected to a separate circuit breaker that are not protected by the PS main circuit breaker are considered a second and independent main circuit breaker and therefore must meet all of the protection requirements in Section 8.1.

  1. Reclosers and Interrupters

Contact PG&E for approved reclosers and interrupters. When a recloser is used as the customer’s primary protection, do not install a bypass switch or other type of equipment which bypasses the protective functions of the recloser. PG&E does not allow the customer’s primary fault−interrupting device to be temporarily or permanently removed or bypassed at any time.

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094676 Page 5 of 16

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

  1. Fuse Requirements

A. Fuses are single−phase, direct−acting, sacrificial links that melt to interrupt fault current and protect the equipment.

B. PG&E may approve the use of fuses as the fault interrupting device at the POS for load−only facilities if the fuses coordinate with the PG&E source−side devices for both phase and ground faults. Large primary fuses that do not coordinate with PG&E’s source−side protective phase and ground relays are not allowed. These fuses may cause other customers on the circuit to lose power due to a fault inside the PS customer’s facility.

C. If the facility has a generation source refer to the Distribution Interconnection Handbook for limitations on when fuses may be used as the fault interrupting device.

D. The PS customer must replace the blown fuses manually after each fault before the facility can return to service. Only trained, qualified personnel should replace the primary fuses.

E. If PG&E approves the fuses, the PS customer should consider installing a negative− sequence relay and/or other devices to protect its facility against single−phase conditions (however, this is not a requirement). The PS customer is responsible for protecting their equipment against single phase conditions, if they determine or feel that it is needed.

F. Customers must keep a full set of replacement fuses (PG&E must approve the size and type) onsite.

G. Solid Blade cutouts are not fuses and therefore not acceptable as a fault−interrupting device.

  1. Replacement or Failure of Protective Equipment

When the customer’s primary protection device malfunctions or fails to detect abnormal service conditions and trouble related to a PS customer’s equipment and the isolation of the condition and/or equipment within a reasonable time then PG&E may require the equipment to be replaced. Also, when protective equipment is repaired or replaced the equipment must meet all of the qualification and testing requirements in this document including passing inspection by PG&E personnel. If new equipment is installed it must be currently listed as PG&E approved.

Section 9 Equipment Test Requirements

The tests in this section apply only to the PG&E−required equipment at the POS; specifically, the breaker, the relays, and the tripping circuitry.

The customer must complete the following requirements:

� The equipment must pass all the tests described below.

� The customer must submit two copies of the test reports to PG&E a minimum of 30 working days before energizing the PS facilities.

� Each test report must identify the equipment tested and that identification must match that in the single−line or three−line diagrams.

The customer must meet the above requirements and obtain PG&E approval of the test reports at least ten working days before PG&E energizes the PS. PG&E strongly recommends that the PS customer coordinate the test program with PG&E.

  1. Circuit Breaker Tests

The PS customer must perform the following circuit breaker tests:

A. Minimum−to−trip test at 70% or less of the nominal control voltage on all circuit breakers operated by PG&E−required relays.

B. Micro−ohm test on the main circuit breaker(s) at the POS.

C. Timing test showing the time from the trip initiation to the opening of the main poles. Proving insulation tests, as described below.

D. Proving Insulation

(1) Megger circuit breaker(s) at the POS operated by PG&E require relays (see Table 2 below).

094676 Page 6 of 16 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

Table 2 Circuit Breaker Positions and Connections

Circuit Breaker Position Connection
Circuit breaker open. Each pole to ground, pole 1 to 2, pole 3 to 4, pole 5 to 6
Circuit breaker closed. Pole 1–ground, pole 3–ground, pole 5–ground
If the poles are in a common tank or cell. Pole 1 to 3, pole 3 to 5, pole 5 to 1

(2) Megger (phase−to−phase and phase−to−ground) all buses from the POS to the main breaker or fuses.

(3) The main circuit breaker(s) must have a dielectric test performed on the insulating medium (gas or oil). This test is not required for factory−sealed, circuit−switcher interrupters.

  1. Tests for Current Transformers and Current Circuits PS customers must perform the following tests for current transformers (CTs) and current circuits associated with PG&E−required relays:

A. Check the saturation on all CTs. If this is not possible, a manufacturer’s curve is acceptable.

B. Prove the ratio of all CTs by using current (primary to secondary) or voltage (secondary to primary).

C. Check the CTs for the proper polarity.

D. Check the CT circuits for the proper connections.

E. Check the continuity of the CTs by:

(1) Applying primary or secondary current at the CT block.

(2) Verifying that the proper current exists in each phase relay and the ground relay.

Customers must perform each test (primary or secondary) in all combinations prove that all phase relays and ground relays have proper connections.

PS customers must also ensure that no loose wiring or parallel current paths exist, by applying or injecting the current to achieve a secondary reading of 5 amperes (A) in each relay.

Check each phase of each current circuit feeding PG&E–required relays. Megger the total circuit with the ground wire lifted (to prove that only one ground exists).

  1. Relay and Fuse Tests

The testing requirements for relays/fuses include:

A. PS customers must field test the settings of PG&E required relays to verify the following items:

(1) The minimum operating point at which the relay picks up (minimum pickup).

(2) Time delays at three different current−test points, in integral multiples of the minimum pickup that closely characterize the relay time−current curve.

(3) Test results must be within the tolerances listed below:

(a) Current/Voltage/Time ± 10 %

(b) Impedance/Phase Angle ± 0.05 %

(c) Frequency ± 0.05 Hz

B. Check all fuses for continuity before energizing.

  1. Tests Recommended (But Not Required by PG&E) for the PS Customers

A. Transformer

It is recommended (but not required by PG&E) that the customer perform the following tests prove the insulation and turns ratio on their primary service transformers.

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094676 Page 7 of 16

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

(1) Proving Insulation

A 1,000 or 2,500 volt (V) dc megger test or a 1,000 V, high−pot test is recommended for any of the insulation tests below.

(a) Megger the main transformer(s) winding−to−winding and each winding−to−ground.

(b) Megger the buses (phase−to−phase and phase−to−ground) from the POS to the main transformer.

(c) Perform a dielectric test on the main transformer(s) insulating medium (gas or oil).

(2) Proving Ratios

Prove the main transformer(s) ratio(s) using one of the following methods:

(a) Turns−ratio tester.

(b) Voltage−ratio test on the final operating tap. Consult with PG&E to best match the present distribution−system voltage.

Section 10 Pre−Energizing Test

  1. Customers must meet the following requirements before PG&E will energize the PS:

A. Ensure that any inspections required by local governmental and regulatory agencies are complete and any applicable permits are obtained before PG&E energizes the PS.

B. A PG&E technical representative must witness trip checks of all PG&E−required relays. This may require injecting a signal to trigger the relay. This proves that the relay will handle the trip current of the circuit breaker. It also proves relay targeting. Jumpering the studs on the back of the relay is not acceptable.

(1) The Primary Service Entity shall provide all test equipment and qualified 3rd party personnel to perform the required tests. PG&E recommends third party testers to be National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) certified. PG&E shall be there strictly as an observer. Form PS−1 shall be completed by the PG&E representative on site at the time of the pre− energizing test.

C. A PG&E technical representative must verify grounds are bonded per standard (switching platforms, fences, buildings, etc.) and verify signage is correct per the below requirement. All signs shall be constructed to be weatherproof.

(1) Disconnect − The disconnect sign shall have 1 inch wide by 2 inch high, with colors venetian red (#3) lettering on a buff (#1) background (or similar). If the facility has multiple feeds with multiple separate disconnect switches, then each disconnect requires a separate sign.

(2) Location − The location sign shall have 1 inch high venetian red (#3) lettering on a buff (#1) background. PG&E’s standard location sign size is 14 inches wide by 7 inches high overall. It shall be posted at each entrance to the facility. If there are other gates or doors to go through, then each one of those shall have a sign as well. For example: One posted at the entrance to the primary service facility, and one posted on the entrance to the substation within the primary service facility.

D. After energizing the PS and adding load, a PG&E technical representative must witness the reading of the load current in each phase relay and the absence of load current in the ground relay. The PG&E technical representative will then seal the relays.

E. The PS customer is responsible for providing all test equipment, and qualified personnel to conduct the tests in the presence of a PG&E technical representative.

Section 11 Alternate Source

A PS customer may request an alternate primary service source installed at customer expense. Requests for an alternate source are handled on a case−by−case basis. This section describes some of the technical requirements associated with installing and operating a PS with an alternate source. Technical requirements may change depending on location and a variety of other factors. PG&E strongly recommends that customers contact the Company early in the design phase to ensure a successful project. The PS customer and PG&E must work together to ensure that an alternate source system fulfills the customer’s needs while not degrading PG&E protection schemes, operating flexibility, or cause interference with another customer’s service.

on location and a variety of other factors. PG&E strongly recommends that customers contact the Company early in the design phase to ensure a successful project. The PS customer and PG&E must work together to ensure that an alternate source system fulfills the customer’s needs while not degrading PG&E protection schemes, operating flexibility, or cause interference with another customer’s service.

When a PS load is transferred from the primary source to the alternate source or vice versa, a momentary outage (“drop−and−pickup” operation) occurs.

094676 Page 8 of 16 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

When the PS is fed from the alternate source and the PS customer wants to transfer back to the primary source with a parallel operation (“make−before−break” method), the PS customer must meet the following requirements:

F. The ratios and electrical connections of the transformers on both sources must be well matched to minimize circulating currents.

G. The impedance of the transformers and the relative phase angles of the sources must be such that any “through load” (i.e., flowing of power through the PS customer’s electrical system to other customers) does not cause overloads.

H. The parallel transfer operation must not degrade protection, inhibit PG&E’s operating flexibility, or overstress equipment (customer or PG&E equipment).

I. The transfer switches, one on each side of the PS load, require an automatic interlock control scheme to minimize the time the two systems are paralleled. The transfer switches must be circuit breakers or other suitably rated, automatically controlled switches.

NOTE The parallel period must be less than one second because the presence of two parallel circuits will increase the fault duty and may overstress the PS customer’s equipment.

J. In some cases, PG&E may require additional protective devices and/or special operating procedures to ensure safe and reliable service for the PS customer and other PG&E customers.

K. Each parallel transfer operation can only proceed after PG&E’s specific approval. The PS customer must obtain PG&E’s approval before performing the parallel transfer operation. PG&E may withhold approval if, in its sole judgment, the above requirements have not been met, or if a previously unforeseen factor or change in conditions is deemed to jeopardize the operator, public safety, or reliability to customers.

L. The PS customer must assume all liability for any problems or damage resulting from any parallel transfer operation.

Section 12 Revenue−metering Requirements

This section addresses direct access (DA) and bundled–service PS customers connected at distribution voltages (34.5 kV and below), as described in Rule 2. Customers must satisfy PG&E’s revenue–metering requirements and those of other applicable governing authorities (i.e., California Public Utilities Commission [CPUC], California Independent System Operator [CAISO], etc.).

For customers exporting power, loads connected at distribution voltages must satisfy the metering protocols established by PG&E and CAISO. Exceptions are handled on a case−by– case basis with approval from PG&E’s Meter Engineering department in close coordination with Field Metering Services.

Other arrangements that affect the required metering installation may also require a “Generation Special Facilities Agreement.”

There are two types of distribution services:

� Wholesale

� Retail (i.e., end–users)

  1. Wholesale Service

A. For wholesale−service interconnections, please refer to the Wholesale Distribution Tariff (WDT) and document

092816 Wholesale Distribution Tariff (WDT) Interconnection Design Options for Primary Voltage Service

B. For the revenue metering of the wholesale−service interconnections, the PS customers must provide, install, own, and maintain all revenue−metering−related equipment, including all the items provided and maintained by PG&E or a Meter Service Provider (MSP) listed under “Retail Service” below.

C. PS customers requesting wholesale service must meet the following criteria:

(1) CAISO metering standards

(2) PG&E’s requirements

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094676 Page 9 of 16

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

(3) Enter into a Meter Service Agreement (MSA) with the CAISO and, in certain cases, with PG&E. The MSA specifies requirements regarding the retrieval of load data and accessibility by CAISO.

D. The wholesale PS customer is responsible for ensuring that the meters comply with CAISO’s meter standards and accuracy requirements.

E. All PS customers must contact PG&E’s local account services representative for PG&E’s revenue–metering requirements.

  1. Retail Service (End Users)

Electric Rule 22 governs the interconnection and operating requirements for DA customers. Please use the following link to access the document, https://www.pge.com/tariffs/assets/pdf/tariffbook/ELEC_RULES_22.pdf, for the following elections.

A. Customer service elections

B. Customer metering options

C. Customer Responsibilities

The customer (end−user) maintains the following:

(1) The (pad−mounted) primary switchgear

(a) Please refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Services Requirements

(http://www.pge.com/greenbook) Section 11 for primary switchgear requirements and to Section 5 for our general requirements of all metering equipment.

irection/09131aad80e064e4/false) Section 11 for primary switchgear requirements and to Section 5 for our general requirements of all metering equipment.

(b) The ampacity rating of primary switchgear should not exceed 600 amps. This supply rating must be listed on the switchgear nameplate. As this is the maximum rating of PG&E’s primary distribution main line circuits. Also note that some circuits may be de-rated to less than 600 amps due to the PG&E installed distribution wire size and distribution equipment ratings.

(c) To maintain the required metering accuracy and to meet PG&E requirements, the revenue−metering instrument transformers must be located in the same switchgear with the revenue meters.

(d) The enclosure must be grounded and if applicable, located within the substation ground grid.

(e) Access must be readily available for PG&E employees to read and maintain the metering equipment

(2) Overhead PS

Refer to Engineering Document 058779, “Pole−Top Primary Metering Installation, (12 or 21 kV Line).” for metering requirements of overhead primary services.

Section 13 Communication Circuits

PG&E may require communications circuits between PG&E and the customer’s PS facilities for the following purposes:

� Protection

� Revenue Metering

� Energy Management System (EMS)

� Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)

� Generation

� Voice communications

When external communication circuits are installed, the responsible party must ensure that the high−voltage protection (HVP) equipment on these circuits meets all applicable standards.

Section 14 Battery Requirements for Interconnecting to the PG&E System

This section describes PG&E’s process for ensuring safety and reliability of for customers who connect to Company systems. The recommendations made here will ensure that the system operates as designed.

  1. Because of reliability and safety reasons only flooded lead acid (calcium, antimony) and Nickel−Cadmium (NiCd) batteries are acceptable in switchgear installations.

094676 Page 10 of 16 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

  1. It is required for the third party customer to provide the following documentation to PG&E for review and acceptance by the Substation Engineering Department:

A. Complete FORM AT−1, “Third Party Interconnection Battery Information Sheet and Acceptance Document” (https://www.pge.com/includes/docs/pdfs/shared/rates/tariffbook/ferc/tih/app_t.pdf), located on pages 4 thru 5 in Appendix T on the Transmission Interconnection Handbook webpage.

B. Type of Battery (Vented Lead Acid−VLA or NiCd). Monoblock (multiples cells in a jar) batteries from C & D, EnerSys or other vendors will be acceptable. Battery racks must be designed to withstand loading based on IEEE 693 (High Seismic).

C. Detail information of load including continuous and momentary. No minimum requirement− Smallest flooded acid may be the limitation.

D. Battery sizing calculation based on IEEE Standard 485−2010 (IEEE recommended Practice for Sizing Large Lead Storage Batteries for Generating Stations and Substations) or IEEE Standard 1115−2014 (IEEE recommended Practice for Sizing Nickel−Cadmium Batteries for Stationary application) and minimum 8 hours discharge rate using manufacturer software (to ensure proper discharge curve is used) using aging factor of 1.25 and design margin of 1.1 to be clearly shown on the calculation. Charger sizing calculation based on battery size with recharge time of 12 hours assuming charger will support the continuous load as well as recharges the battery at the same time.

E. When battery is installed proof of three (3) hour discharge testing to ensure battery has the capacity to support the load and trip; per IEEE Standard 450−2010 (Voltage measurements should be taken every 15 minutes throughout the testing).

F. Documentation showing what kind of maintenance will be done (Monthly, Quarterly, and Yearly etc.).

G. Monitoring of minimum battery low voltage by separate voltage relay or through charger and provide critical audible and visual alarm for the monitoring system.

Section 15 Preferred Service Arrangement Figures

The following pages provide figures showing the preferred service arrangements for overhead and underground primary services.

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094676 Page 11 of 16

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

PG&E Equipment

Notes:

PL PL

PL PL

  1. PG&E will install a protective device under a special facilities agreement if there are extenuating circumstances that prevent the customer from installing one. This is an exception and will be handled on case−by−case basis.

  2. PG&E will own and maintain substructures in the franchise area and the customer will own and maintain substructures on private property

  3. PG&E will provide one continuous pull of cable to POS, not to exceed 500 feet.

Figure 1 Underground Primary Service from Underground Distribution Preferred Service Arrangement Switchgear > 500 feet from PG&E Equipment

094676 Page 12 of 16 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

OH: Services UG: Services

Notes:

  1. PG&E will install a protective device under a special facilities agreement if there are extenuating circumstances that prevent the customer from installing one. This is an exception and will be handled on case−by−case basis.

  2. PG&E will own and maintain substructures in the franchise area and the customer will own and maintain conduit on private property.

  3. PG&E will still provide one continuous pull of cable to POS, not to exceed 500 feet.

Figure 2 Underground Primary Service from Overhead Distribution Preferred Service Arrangement POS500 feet from PG&E Pole

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094676 Page 13 of 16

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

PG&E Distribution Pole Gang Operated Disconnect

are extenuating circumstances that prevent the customer from installing one. This is an exception and will be handled on case−by−case basis.

Figure 3 Overhead Primary Service From Overhead Distribution Preferred Service Arrangement

094676 Page 14 of 16 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

PG&E Equipment

bution
Distri Point of Service (POS)
Customer Owned Protective
Device − PG&E Approved
 PG&E approves setting
Street
Underground

Notes:

PL PL

PL PL

  1. PG&E will install a protective device under a special facilities agreement if there are extenuating circumstances that prevent the customer from installing one. This is an exception and will be handled on case−by−case basis

  2. PG&E will own and maintain substructures in the franchise area and the customer will own and maintain substructures on private property.

  3. PG&E will provide one continuous pull of cable to POS, not to exceed 500 feet.

Figure 4 Underground Primary Service from Underground Distribution Non−Preferred Service Arrangement Switchgear > 500 feet from PG&E Equipment

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094676 Page 15 of 16

OH: Services UG: Services Primary Electric Service Requirements Greenbook

Revision Notes

Revision 00 has the following changes:

  1. Converted Bulletin TD−2999B−030 to this new numbered engineering document.

  2. Consolidated general requirements through document to Section 1 General Requirements on Page 1.

  3. Added links and updated information throughout the document.

  4. Updated Figure 1 on Page 12.

  5. Updated Figure 2 on Page 13.

  6. Updated Figure 3 on Page 14.

  7. Added Figure 4 on Page 15.

  8. Added Note 1.A.(11) on Page 4.

094676 Page 16 of 16 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

Greenbook

Prepared by: SXZO

Purpose and Scope

This Document provides Smart Meter (SM) infrastructure installation and construction requirements for customers designing indoor electric meter rooms for high−rise buildings. This will address below−grade and multiple above−grade meter room installations such as those that may exist in an urban, high−rise environment to ensure PG&E’s Smart Meter mesh network is established for these customers. These provisions are required for commercial and/or residential, single, or multiple, indoor meter rooms to ensure Smart Meter electric network communication access and performance.

References Location Document

Electric and Gas Service Requirements ( Greenbook ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD−7001M

General Information

  1. To make sure customer’s Smart Meters are connected to the Smart Meter mesh network, provisions must be made for access to mount equipment and pathways for radio frequency (RF) communications. It is important to make the necessary provisions for Smart Meter equipment early in the planning stage for high-rise or below-grade meter room situations to prevent additional costs from being incurred by customers and/or by PG&E. Special provisions to facilitate the installation of Smart Meter technology meters and equipment include:

A Access by PG&E personnel for placement of radio frequency equipment

B Path for radio frequency (RF) signal propagation (i.e., conduit)

C Placement of ancillary RF equipment (in−room relay or access point may be installed inside meter rooms or on the exterior of the building, including on the top of the building)

D Conduit and cable routing. Placement and mounting of antennas (MPACK or Salt−shaker antennas)

Please review the drawings on pages 3 through 7 which illustrate these required provisions.

  1. The minimum requirements in this document must be met but should not preclude applicable building, fire, or electrical code requirements.

  2. Because many of the buildings and situations where these provisions will be required are custom in nature, design plans must be submitted to your local service planner for review by the local meter shop and any other appropriate PG&E department. Communicating early in the design process will allow for additional site−specific review by the Smart Meter Operations Center (SMOC) Tier 4 Analyst(s).

  3. I nstall 3” conduits from the main electrical room ceiling, where the PG&E service cables terminate into the switchboard or switchgear, to the floor above. Continue to install conduit, vertically aligned, in each floor and ceiling, with or without a meter room on the floor. The conduit must be installed upward to the floor with the highest meter room above grade. For example, if the main electrical room is one level below grade (B1) and highest meter room is on the 22nd floor; then install 3” conduit in each ceiling/floor from level B1 to floor 22.

. Continue to install conduit, vertically aligned, in each floor and ceiling, with or without a meter room on the floor. The conduit must be installed upward to the floor with the highest meter room above grade. For example, if the main electrical room is one level below grade (B1) and highest meter room is on the 22nd floor; then install 3” conduit in each ceiling/floor from level B1 to floor 22.

  1. All meter rooms must be vertically aligned in the building. Offset meter rooms are not allowed.

Requirements for Figure 2, Figure 3, Figure 4 and Figure 5:

  1. Conduit Size: 3−inch in diameter.

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094683 Page 1 of 8

Greenbook Smart Meter Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and High−Rise Buildings

  1. Conduit Type: Non−metallic Schedule 40 or better.

  2. Conduit Caps: Non−metallic permanent caps, of the same conduit type and size, must be placed on both ends of the conduit. The cap ends should be flush with the ceiling or floor surface.

  3. Firestop System: Install as required by local building, fire, or electrical code.

  4. Conduit Placement: Inside the meter room. Preferably in front of the meter panel. The conduit must not be blocked by any equipment or objects. The conduit must not be covered with concrete or metal flooring.

Requirements for Figure 4, Figure 5, and Figure 6:

  1. Firestop System: Not required. Do not install.

  2. Conduit Size: 2-inch in diameter. The total length of all conduits must not exceed 300 feet.

  3. Conduit Type: Conduits installed, in walls, ceilings, floors, or concrete must be made of rigid steel. For all other locations the conduit type can be electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or better.

  4. Conduit Cap: A temporary cap, of the same type and size as the conduit, must be placed on the end of the conduit next to the meter panel.

  5. Conduit Termination Inside: The conduit must be terminated in a horizontal position on top of the meter panel section and 6 to 12 inches from the front of it. The conduit must not enter or pass through the switchgear or enclosure.

  6. Conduit Termination Outside: The conduit must terminate in a horizontal position, inside a termination enclosure, on the outside building wall. The conduit must be 8 to 10 feet above grade level and protrude 1-inch outward from the wall.

  7. Termination Enclosure: A minimum 6” x 6” x 6”, NEMA 3R rated, with an accessible front cover. It must be permanently installed to the outside wall with the conduit terminated inside.

  8. Conduit Bends: Any bend must have a minimum 12-inch radius.

  9. Junction box: A minimum size of 12” x 12” x 4” is required for pulling when the total number of degrees of conduit bends exceeds 270 between end points or junction boxes. A junction box is also required when the conduit run length exceeds 100 feet. The total length of all conduits must not exceed 300 feet.

  10. Pulling Tape: Rated for a minimum of 500 pounds and placed inside the conduit for its entire length from end to end to facilitate cable pulling.

  11. Transformer Rooms: Conduit must not be installed inside of a transformer room.

  12. Conduits can be installed in the floors, ceilings, or walls of the room.

  13. Working Space: The open area that must be maintained around all switchboards, metering enclosures, and the outdoor conduit

A Above the entire top of switchboard or enclosure a minimum of 12 inches of vertical clearance .

B In front of the switchboard a minimum of 48 inches of horizontal clearance and extending to a height 12” above the switchboard or enclosure .

C In front of the location where the outdoor conduit terminates a minimum area of 36 inches deep, as measured from the outside building wall, by 30 inches wide and extending upward to 12 inches above the conduit.

094683 Page 2 of 8 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

Greenbook

Smart Meter Electric Network Requirements for

Indoor Meter Rooms and High Rise Buildings

See Figure 2 and Figure 3 for Meter Rooms at or Above Grade

See Note 4 on Page 1

See Figure 4, Figure 5, and Figure 6 for Meter Rooms at or Below Grade

2” conduit Must Terminate in an Enclosure 8 to 10 feet above Grade on Outside of Building

Figure 1 High Rise Building with Indoor Electric Meter Rooms

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094683 Page 3 of 8

Greenbook Smart Meter Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and High−Rise Buildings

Figure 2 Above Grade Meter Rooms

094683 Page 4 of 8 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

Greenbook

Smart Meter Electric Network Requirements for

Indoor Meter Rooms and High Rise Buildings

Figure 3 Vertically Align Meter Rooms

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094683 Page 5 of 8

Greenbook Smart Meter Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and High−Rise Buildings

Figure 5

Indoor Electric Meter Room Below Grade (Subsurface)

094683 Page 6 of 8 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

Greenbook

Smart Meter Electric Network Requirements for

Indoor Meter Rooms and High Rise Buildings

Figure 6 Multiple Electric Meter Rooms at or Below Ground Floor

Rev. #00: 3/25/2022 094683 Page 7 of 8

Greenbook Smart Meter Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and High−Rise Buildings

Revision Notes

Revision 00 has the following changes:

  1. Converted Bulletin TD−7001B−005 to this new numbered engineering document.

  2. Updated requirements and Figures throughout.

094683 Page 8 of 8 Rev. #00: 3/25/2022

USA Color Coding

Excavation Site & Underground Facilities Marking Color
Proposed Excavation White
Temporary Survey Markings Pink
Electric Red
Gas - Oil - Steam Chemical Yellow
Communication CATV Orange
Water Blue
Reclaimed Water Irrigation Slurry Purple
Sewer Green
Call811 Two (2) Working Days Before You Dig!

www.call811.com

USA Identificadores del Código de Color

Sitio de Excavación y de Instalaciones
Subterráneas
Colored de
Identificación
Excavación Propuesta Blanco
Marcas Temporarias de Inspección Rosa
Líneas de Energía Eléctrica, Cables, Conductos
y Cables deIiluminación
Rojo
Gas, Aceite, Vapor, Petróleo o Materiales
Gaseosos
Amarillo
Líneas, Cables o Conductos de Comunicaciones,
Alarma o Señales
Naranja
Agua Potable Azul
Líneas de Lodos, Irrigación y Agua Recuperada Purpura
Líneas de Alcantarillado y de Drenaje Verde
Llame811a dos (2) días hábiles antes de excavar!

Get a plain-English answer with a citation back to this text.

Ask AI about this code
Contents — 2022 PG&E Greenbook (Gas & Electric Service Requirements)

GoCodebook provides public access, search, citation, multilingual explanation, and practical interpretation of legally adopted building regulations. It is not a substitute for the official ICC or California code publications.